20201222Gas Standards Manual 2021.pdf

Avista Corp.
141 I East Mission P.O.Box 3727
Spokane, Washington 99220-0500
Telephone [phone]
Toll Free 800-727-9170
RECEIVED
2020 December 22 PM 3:16
IDAHO PUBLIC
ATILITIES COMMISSION
December 22,2020
JanNoriyuki, Secretary
Idaho Public Utilities Commission
11331 W. Chinden Blvd., Bldg. 8, Ste. 201-A
Boise,Idaho 83717
Re: AVU-G-18-07 - Avista 2021 Gas Standards Manual and Standard Operating procedures forGas Meter Measurement Performance Program
Dear Ms. Noriyuki:
Enclosed for electronic filing with the Commission is Avista Corporation,s, dba Avista
Utilities ('oAvista" or "the Company") ,2021Gas Standards Manual (*GSM") and Standard Operating
Procedures for its Gas Meter Measurement Performance Program ("soP.). This filing is being made
in compliance with the commission's order No. 34178 in case No. AVU-G-lg-07, and with the
Company's associated natural gas tariff I.P.U.C. No 27, Schedule 170, which states that Avista is to
provide electronic copies of these documents to the Commission upon request or whenever substantive
changes are made.
Due to the voluminous nature of the GSM, the first 17 pages of the document provide a
sunmary of the changes made for 2021. Avista's SOP document contains only a minor change for
2021, with the term "domestic" being removed as it refers to meter capacity, to alleviate confusion
with similar industry terminology.
If you have any questions regarding this filing, please contact me at (509) 4g5-7g3g.
Sincerely,
/r/-/m%g"*
Regulatory Policy Analyst
Avista Utilities
i aime.majure@ avistacorp.com
Demo'"'fS*ffJ$floFbyAppligent,Inc.http://www.apprigent.com
AVISTA IJTILITIES
GAS METER
MEASUREMENT
PERFORMANCE PROGRAM
(PMC PROGRAM)
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance p ram Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oreson Manager: JeffWebb Paee 1 of 13
CONTENTS
I. CONTENTS
2. SCOPE3. GENERAL
A. COMPLIANCE
b. HISTORY4, GAS METER MEASUREMENT PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
5. APPENDIX - COMPLIANCE STANDARDS
a. Avista ID Gas TariffRule No. 27, Section 25, effective November l, 2018
b. Avista OR Gas Tariff Rule No. 18, effective dates April 1, 2008 thru January 1,2012
c. OAR 860-023 (Public Utility Commission)
d. Avista WA Gas TariffRule No. 170, Section 20, effective November 30,2011
e. WAC 480-90 o'Gas companies - operations", Section 333,338,343, &'348
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance Program Date:12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Page 2 of 13
SCOPE
This procedure covers the methodology, testing requirements, and annual reporting guidelines forAvista's gas meter measurement performance testing progftrm (PMC program) foin-ew and in-servicemeters.
Deviations or changes to this SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) shall be approved by the GasMeasurement Manager. Material changes require .or.uo"n"" with the gor"-irrg "o--i..ioo. Non-material changes shall be submitted to the commissions in conjunction with ur",r-ut meter performancestatistics.
- STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDUREGAS METER SHOP
Title:Gas Meter Measurement Performance p m Date: 12-14-20Jurisdiction: Wash n, lda o Man r: JeffWebb 3of13
GENERAL
COMPLIAI\CE
Id.s.ho: Avista ID Gas Tariff Rule No. 27, Section 25, effective November l, 2018, has been approved
and prescribes the minimum inspection and testing requirernents.
Oregon: Gas meter testing requirements for Avista are promulgated by Oregon Administrative Rules'
chalter g60, Division 023-"Service Standards", Section00l5 (Testing Gas and Electric-Meters)' Avista
Gas Tariff Rule No. 18, Section 20, effective September l, z}lz,has been approved and is in compliance
with the requirements of the applicable OAR and prescribes the minimum inspection and testing
requiremenis. It is the intent that this program is in accordance with the aforementioned Oregon
Administrative Rules.
Washington Gas meter testing requirements for Avista are promulgated by Washington Administrative
Code, Chapter 480-90 "Gas coirpanies - operations", Section 333 (Initial accuracy of meters), Section
338 (ivletering tolerance), Section 343 (Statement of meter test procedures), and Section 348 (Frequency
of periodic miter tests. errirtu Gas Tariff Rule No. 170, Section 20, effective November 30, 2011, has
been approved and is in compliance with the requirements of WAC 480-90 and prescribes the minimum
in*pe"iio, and testing requirements. It is the intint that this program is in accordance with WAC 480-90'
HISTORY
Avista,s current random meter measurement performance program is in accordance with ANSI Zl '9
(Inspection by variables). Random sampling and testing is completed for all meters 1000 cFH and
smaller. The program was revised and upgraded in 2009. The prior progrcm was in accordance with
inspection standard ANSI21.4 (Inspection by Attributes). The cha_nge in inspection standard and
programmatic changes were completed in order to enhance the quality and accuracy of the measurement
performance program.
In 20l l the gas meter testing program was enhanced as follows:
o Random sampling progrur" - Redefined a meter population. Previously a meter population was
defined as meters-&th-" ,r-" model, installed in the same State jurisdiction, and purchased in the
same year. The revised definition for a meter population now includes meters of the same model,
size, indmanufactured in the same year. The new definition removes the criteria to test meters by
state. A statistical analysis of meter testing results for all three (3) states revealed that the mean
accgracy and standard deviation of accuracy about the mean are similar for all three states and
that anydifference is not statistically significant, indicating that state test results can be
combined. Random sampling gu. n "t", testing requirements for 2012 were developed using the
revised meter population definition.
o Installed turbine Meters: Changes were made to expand turbine testing requirements to include
both single rotor and dual rotor auto adjust meters'
o Installed rotary meters: Changes were made to provide clarification regarding necessary test
requirements for rotary meters.
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Date: 12-14-20Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance P
4of13Jeff WebbMaldaho,Jurisdiction: Washi n
In2019 a new subpart titled "Meter Data Management Calibration" was added to section VI InstalledMeter Testing Program, part c. This subpart defines an alternative means to address meter families thatare experiencing a consistent drift in mean accuracy identified by the sample meter testing program.Because these families are experiencing a consistent drift in accllracy, theheter reading C- t" correctedby changing the Installation Constant value in Avista's Meter Data Management systeri rather thanreplacing the meter. Meter families experiencing this drift in accuracy will continue to be tested undertightened inspection and their lnstallation constant reevaluated every year.
SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDUREGAS METER
Title:Gas Meter Measurement Performance Date: 12-14-20
ldaJurisdiction: Wash Ma JeffWebb 5of13
GAS METER MEASUREMENT PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
I. Tests of Customer Meters
a. Avista shall maintain a quality control program to veriff performance accuracy of new
meters and installed meters.
b. Testins of Small Capacity Meters. All meters with capacities up to and including one
@hour (cftr) atYz" differential pressure that have been in
service ten (10) or more years as established by either the last install date or manufacture
date shall be tested through annual random sampling using sample size methods in
accordance witn aNSyAS Q-21.9 or other generally accepted statistical method that
conforms to the requirernents of the applicable sections of ANSI 8.109.1 and 8109.2
measuring in-service performance of diaphragm type gas meters'
c. Testing of Lareer Capacitv Meters. All meters with capacities greater than one thousand
@iceten(10)yearsasestablishedbyeitherlastinstallor
manufacture date shall be replaced or field tested based on a periodic schedule.
Diaphragm type meters shali be tested in accordance with applicable sections of ANSI
B109.1 and B109.2. Rotary type meters shall be tested in accordance with applicable
sections of ANSI B109.3.
II. Customer Meter AccuracY
Accuracv of Meters
i. Diaphragm Meters:
l. A new gas meter installed for the use of any customer shall not be more
than one (1) Percent slow or fast.
2. Every meter removed from service and opened for repair shall have the
meter tolerance adjusted to 100% plus or minus 0.5olo, with no greater
spread than}.TYobetween the check and open prior to being reinstalled.
3. Meters not opened for repairs may be reinstalled without adjustment if
found to be not more than two (2) percent in error slow or fast, per
Section III (Customer Meter Test Loads)'
ii. Rotary Meters
L A new gas meter installed for the use of any customer shall not be more
than one (l) Percent slow or fast'
2. Meters inspected by differential pressure testing shall confirm that the
meter is performing within 150% of the manufacturer's specification for
differential pressure at the operating pressure'
3. Every meter tested by proving shall be adjusted to be not more than two
(2) percent slow or fast before being reinstalled'
iii. Turbine Meters
a.
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Date: 12-14-20Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance
6of13MJeffWebbldaho,Jurisdiction: Washi
l. A new gas meter installed for the use of any customer shall not be more
than one (1) percent slow or fast.
2. Meters inspected by spin testing shall confirm that the meter is
performing within the manufacture's limits.
3. Every meter tested by proving shall be adjusted to be not more than two
(2) percent slow or fast before being reinstalled.
b. Removal of Defective Meters from Service. No meter that is mechanically defective shall
be placed in service or allowed to remain in service after the defect has been discovered.
When any gas meter is not connected and in service, the inlet and outlet will be capped to
prevent the drying out of diaphragms and contamination of the meter with dirt and debris.
The exception shall be when stored indoors during the testing and/or repair process.
m. Customer Meter Test Loads
a. Testing of Meters, Test Equipment. All tests to determine the accuracy of registrations of
gas service meters shall be made with a suitable meter prover or testing equipment as
detailed in this standard.
b. Gas Flows During Testing. The flow rate to be used in testing meters, except orifice type
meters and high volume meters with capacity in excess of test equipment capability, will
be at fwenty (20) percent (check) and one hundred (100) percent (open) oftheir
capacity. For the purpose of determining the accuracy of these meters, the average of the
two results shall be used.
c. High Volume Meters. Turbine and rotary meters that have rated capacities in excess of
the mechanical limits of the proving equipment shall be tested at a minimum of two (2)
points of flow with each at or above a minimum of l|Yo of the rated capacity of the
meter. For purposes of the test the two results shall be averaged and shall conform to the
standards set forth in Section II (Customer Meter Accuracy).
ry. Meter Test Procedures and Test Records
a. Reportine
i. After Decernber 3l of each year, meter test results will be summarized, analyzed
and forwarded to all the three State Utility Commissions. Retention and filing of
records will be in accordance with the appropriate Commission requirements.
b. Test Records
i. After December 3l of each year, meter test results will be summarized and
analyzed. Annual results of all meter accuracy tests will be tabulated and
retained in accordance with the appropriate Commission as follows:
1. Idaho: Avista ID Gas TariffRule No. 27, Section 25
2. Oregon: OAR 860-023-0015(4)
3. Washington: WAC 480-90-353
ii. Avista shall keep records of tests of the accuracy of each of its meters, which
may be superseded by a later test, but shall be maintained for not less than two
These records shall ve:
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance Program Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Page 7 of 13
1. sufficient information to identify the meter,
2. the reason for the test,
3. the date of the test and reading of the meter,
4. an identification of the person making the test, and
5. accuracy, as found and as left, together with enough ofthe data taken at
the time of the test to permit the convenient checking of the methods
employed and the calculations.
c. Technical Standard. Technical performance requirements for diaphragm natural gas
meters shall be per the current versions of ANSI B109.1 and ANSI B109.2. Technical
performance requirements for rotary type natural gas meters shall be per the current
versions of ANSI 8109.3.
d. Uniouely Defective Test. An individual meter test result within a random sample of
more than l0% error shall be declared a uniquely defective test and disregarded. A
substitute test will be made with meter selected from within the same test family. Subject
meter shall be adjusted or replaced.
V. New Meters
a. New meters shall be factory tested and certified to meet accuracy criteria specified by
Section II (Customer Meter Accuracy).
i. Manufacturers shall provide results of new meter testing that conforms to
generally accepted practice for meter accuracy and performance. Diaphragm
meters shall meet the standards set forth in ANSI Bl09.l and ANSI8.109.2.
Rotary meters shall meet the standards set forth in ANSI Bl09'3.
b. lnspection and acceptance testing by Avista prior to installation of new meters.
i. Each meter shipment will be inspected for physical damage. Meters found to be
damaged or in damaged packaging will be tested, repaired and/or calibrated or
returned to the manufacturer as described herein. All costs for tests, return
shipping and/or calibration to meters described in this section shall be borne by
the manufacturer.
ii. Normal acceptance testing described herein, not associated with physical damage
found on a:rival of the shipment, will be performed for all meters not factory
tested prior to shipment. Expanded testing beyond normal test quantities for
shipments found to be non-conforming through acceptance testing will be paid
for by the manufacturer or the shipment retumed to the manufacturer per
negotiations between Avista and the manufacturer.
c. New diaphragn type metets, less than or equal to 1000 CFH:
i. The methodology for the random sampling of new meters is derived from
ANSVASQ Zl.9 or other generally accepted statistical method that conforms to
the requirements of the applicable sections of ANSI B.109.1 and B109.2.
1. The lot size to determine random sample quantity shall be the size of the
shipment.
2. Acceptable Quality Limit (AQL) for analysis of new meters will equal
l 5.
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance Program Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Paee 8 of 13
ii. Sample size: is based on Normal inspection levels
1. Normal inspection is the default inspection level.
2. Sample size for meter tlpes with five (5) test histories are eligible for
application of switching rules in general accordance with the guidelines
contained within the Standard as modified below.
3. Switching Rules:
a. Normal to tightened: Switching rules for transition from normal
to tightened inspection shall be applied if two (2) out of five (5)
consecutive lots have been rejected on original inspection.
Testing beyond the sample size for normal inspection level will
be paid for by the manufacturer.
b. Tightened to Normal: Switching rules for transition from
tightened to normal inspection may be applied when testing has
been at the tightened level and five (5) consecutive batcheJhave
been acceptable on original inspection.
c. Normal to Reduced: Switching rules for transition from normal
to reduced inspection (inspection level II to inspection level IIf
may be applied if:
i. Preceding five (5) lots have been on normal inspection
and none have been rejected, AND
ii. Meter model has been in steady production without
major design modifications (as determined by the
Company).
d. Reduced to Normal: Switching rules for transition from reduced
to normal (inspection level III to inspection level II) shall be
applied ifl
i. A batch is rejected under reduced inspection, OR
ii. Meter model has not been in steady production or a
major design modification has occurred (as determined
by the Company).
4- Random sampling per the Standard shall be discontinued if five (5)
consecutive lots are not accepted. Acceptance procedures as detailed
herein shall not be resumed until corrective action has been taken.d. New diaphragm meters, greater than 1000 CFH.
i. New large capacity diaphragm meters shall be tested against metering tolerance
of Section II.
ii. Meters found to be outside of tolerance shall be adjusted per section II. If the
meter cannot be adjusted within these standards, it shall be returned to the
manufacturer.
e. New rotary meters.
i. Rotary meters shall meet the accuracy requiranents as specified in Section II and
appropriate requirements of ANSI B109.3.
f. New turbine meters.
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Page 9 of 13
i. New turbine meters shall meet the accuracy requirements as specified in Section
II and shall be spin tested at installation to veriff they will operate within the
accuracy limits as specified by the manufacture'
VI. Installed meter testing program
a. General: Meters shall be inspected and tested against metering tolerance prescribed in
Section II. Meters found to be outside the tolerances shall be immediately adjusted or
replaced.
b. Ase: Testing requirements are applicable to meters that are 10 years old or older. The
first year of required testing is calculated as Manufacturing year + 9'
c. Meters. diaphragm type 1000 CFH and smaller. randomly sampled: A random sample of
r*rto. .frufi be selectid, tested against tolerances prescribed by Section II, and analysis
conducted using the Standard. The annual random sampling program shall begin during
the tenth (10s) year after meter manufacture date. The methodology for sample sizes and
analysis for the meter testing program is derived from ANSVASQ 21.9 (hereafter may be
referred to as the Standard) or other generally accepted statistical method that conforms
to the requirernents of the applicable sections of ANSI B.l09.l and 8109.2 measuring in-
service performance of gas meters.
i. The lot size to determine random sample quantity shall be the size of the meter
population. A meter population should include randomly sampled meters in
approximate proportion to the number of meters installed in each operating area.
ii. A meter population is defined as meters of the same model, size, and
manufactured year'
1. Meter population is synonymous with the term lot as used in the
Standard.
Z. Major design changes to a meter model within a single year shall be a
new poPulation for samPling
iii. All of the meters within a population will be identified by a"flag" in Avista's
Service Suite mobile application at the beginning of a calendar year' Meters
shall be chosen at random and in sufficient quantities to meet the guidelines for
sampling as detailed in the standard. Once the required number of meters in each
family is removed for testing the "flag" will be removed in Service Suite
indicating that no more meters in that family are required for testing. Meter
populations of 50 or fewer units are subject to modified sample size. Sample
quantity shall be set to avoid repeat testing of a meter more than once every ten
years.
iv. Inspection Levels, Sample Size and Test result analysis:
L General: Analysis of population sample results shall conform to the
guidelines contained in the Standard. Acceptable Quality Limit (AQL)
for analysis will equal 10.0'
2. Normal inspection is the default level of inspection'
3. Inspection levels for meter types with five (5) year test histories are
eligible for application of switching rules.
4. Switchins rules:
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance Program Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Page 10 of 13
a. Normal to tightened: Switching rules for transition from normal
to tightened inspection shall be applied if trvo (2) lots out of five
(5) consecutive lots have been rejected.
b. Tightened to Normal: Switching rules for transition from
tightened to normal inspection may be applied when testing has
been at the tightened level and five (5) consecutive batches have
been acceptable.
c. Normal to Reduced: Switching rules for transition from normal
to reduced inspection may be applied ifl
i. Preceding ten (10) lots have been on normal inspection
and none have been rejected.
d. Reduced to Normal: Switching rules for transition from reduced
to normal shall be applied if:
i. A batch is rejected.
5. Failure of meter oopulation. A meter population shall be declared
defective (failed) when:
a. Three (3) consecutive yearly inspections for a population under
tightened inspection are not accepted based on AeL of 10.0 for
overall performance (double specification limit) AND/ORb. Two (2) consecutive yearly inspections for a population under
tightened inspection are not accepted based on AeL of 10.0 for
overall performance (single specification limit) which measures
meters running fast, also referred to as Failed Fast.
These failed meter families shall either be removed from service as
described by subpart 6 or have their Installation Constant updated in the
Meter Data Management system as described in subpart 7.6. Removal of failed meterpopulation: Removal of a meterpopulation of
less than 2500 units may take place within one (l) year. Removal of
meter population of more than 2500 units may take place over two (2)
years. Removal of meter population of more than 5000 units may take
place over three (3) years. Removal of meter population of more than
7500 units may take place over four (4) years.
7. Meter Data Managernent calibration: If a statistical analysis shows that a
meter family is experiencing a consistent drift in mean accuracy, the
meter reading may be corrected by adjusting the entire family's
Installation Constant value in the Meter Data Management system rather
than removing the meters from service. Meter families experiencing thisdrift in accuracy will continue to be tested under tightened inspection and
their Installation Constant reevaluated every year.
d. Installed diaphragm meters, greater than 1000 CFH, periodic test.i. 1001 cFH through 3000 cFH: Inspected and proved every ten (10) years or
sooner.
ii. Larger than 3000 cFH: Inspected and proved every five (5) years or sooner.iii. All meters shall be tested against metering tolerance of Section II.
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance p Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Ma JeffWebb Page 11 of 13
e.
iv. Meters found to be outside of tolerance shall be adjusted to within the tolerances
as specified in Section II.
lnstalled rotary meters, periodic test.
i. Testing of installed rotary meters will be done using either a portable transfer
pror"i- differential testing device. A differential test shall confirm a minimum
of troo (2) points. Results of a differential test or prover test shall show that the
meter is performing within the accuracy as detail in section II.
ii. Meters shall be inspected and tested every five (5) years of sooner.
iii. Meters found to be outside of tolerance shall be adjusted to within the tolerances
as specified in Section II or removed from service'
Installed turbine meters, periodic test.
i. Installed single rotor turbine meters shall be inspected and spin tested annually
and determined to be within the manufactures acceptability limits. Turbine
meters failing the spin test shall be removed from the field and repaired prior to
any subsequent installation.
ii. lnstalled auto adjust meters shall be inspected annually and determined to be
operating within the manufactures acceptability limits. _Meter Delta A (AA), the
aimeren& between the main and sensing rotor pulses, that exceed the
manufactures recommended operating parameters shall be repaired or replaced.
iii. All turbiire meters will be tested with a transfer proven or at an approved offsite
facility at a maximum interval of every ten (10) years. Tested meters shall meet
or exceed the meter accuracy requirements of Section II'
VII. Meter Test Equipment and Application
a. Meter test equiPment
i. Transfer Prover. The accuracy of the testing equipment is ascertained through:
l. Monthly, in-house self-testing procedures'
Z. Sending of Standard Meter Module to the manufacturer for periodic
calibration. The period between factory calibrations shall not exceed
five (5) Years.
ii. Sonic Nozzle Prover and Bell Prover.
l. The accuracy of the testing equipment is ascertained through an
automatic test diagnostic. The diagnostic is completed each time the
prover is Powered on.
2. The test equipment shall be factory calibrated every two (2) years.
b. Meters shall be tested on either: Sonic Nozzle, Bell Prover, Transfer Prover, or at an
approved offsite facilitY.
f,
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Date: 12-14-20Title:Gas Meter Measurement Performance t2of L3r: JeffWebbManJurisdiction: Wash n, ld o
APPENDIX - COMPLIAI\CE STAI\DARDS
Avista ID Gas TariffRule No. 27, Section 25
Avista OR Gas Tariff Rule No. 18
OAR 860-023 (Public Utiliry Commission)
Avista WA Gas Tariff Rule No. 170, Section 20
WAC 480-90 "Gas companies - operations,,, Section 333 , 339, 343, & 34g
GAS METER SHOP - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE
Title: Gas Meter Measurement Performance m Date: 12-14-20
Jurisdiction: Washington, ldaho, Oregon Manager: JeffWebb Page 13 of 13
2021
Gas Standards
Manual
This manual expires on December 31, 2021
 2021 Avista Corp.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER U.S. AND FOREIGN LAW, TREATIES AND CONVENTIONS. NO PART OF THIS WORK MAY BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED, STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM, OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY FORM, GRAPHIC, ELECTRONIC OR MECHANICAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION OF THE COPYRIGHT OWNER.
FOREWORD REV. NO. 16
1 OF 3

FOREWORD This manual is written to conform to the requirements of the United States Department of Transportation Pipeline Safety Regulations, 49 CFR, Part 191 and 192. It also, where necessary, identifies and references applicable state codes in Avista’s operating territories.
The purpose of this manual is to set forth, in writing, Avista’s policy pertaining to design, construction, operation, and maintenance of its natural gas systems. The Manager of Gas Engineering, a licensed Professional Engineer, should be the final signatory of designs that are completed by the Gas Engineering Department. The Avista mentioned herein refers to all states in Avista’s operating territory. This manual supersedes any previous gas standards used by Avista gas companies prior to this date.
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the Gas Emergency and Service Handbook (GESH), Gas Construction Specifications, Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual for Gas Operations, Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook), Transmission Integrity Management
Plan (TIMP), Gas Distribution Integrity Management Plan, Anti-Drug and Alcohol Misuse Prevention Plan, Gas Control Room Manual, Natural Gas Quality Assurance / Quality Control
Program, and Public Awareness Program. These documents comprise Avista’s Operating and Maintenance Plan as required by §192.605 and as required by state codes. Operations Managers or personnel designated by them are responsible for adherence to these
standards for proper installation and maintenance of Avista’s natural gas facilities. This manual is made available to appropriate individuals through hardcopy and/or via the company intranet per
§192.615(b)(1)
Throughout this manual, material is referred to as approved type rather than by manufacturer's name or catalog number. Only materials approved by Gas Engineering or currently on record as
suitable for purchase in the Supply Chain Management Department are to be used in the construction of company gas facilities.
Within the Gas Standards Manual a "shall" or "must" is used to indicate that a provision is
mandatory.
• Written variances to the Gas Standards Manual (for “shall/must” statements) may be granted except in situations where the provision is mandatory in state /federal code in which case the variance will not be granted.
• A request to not follow a “shall” or “must” starts with the respective local Avista manager/designated Avista representative giving their approval.
• The request will then be forwarded to the appropriate responsible reviewer as delineated in Specification 1.4, Table 1.
• These variances should be in written form (email preferred) and maintained with the as-built project documents. Within the Gas Standards Manual a "should" is used to indicate that a provision is not mandatory, but is the preferred method and recommended as a good practice.
• These “should” variances requested by Avista personnel do not require approval but the documentation (typically within an as-built document) should explain why the “should”
preferred method was not followed.
FOREWORD REV. NO. 16
2 OF 3

• “Should” variances requested by Avista contractors should be approved by the respective local Avista manager / local manager-designated Avista representative before implementing and should be documented in the as-built document. Responsibility for maintaining the accuracy of this manual is the function of the Gas Compliance Department. Suggestions for improvement are always welcome. Please forward suggestions or observations to Randy Bareither in the Gas Compliance Department via the “Recommended Changes” form from this manual or scan and send to him at [e-mail]. Management Commitment and Support Avista’s goal is to protect the health and safety of its employees and the communities in which we operate. Avista’s management is committed to supporting the Gas Standards Manual (GSM) and the corresponding activities which seek to recognize and mitigate threats to Avista’s pipeline facilities. Avista’s leadership provides this continuous support through the implementation of a Pipeline Safety Management System ((P)SMS.) Avista’s (P)SMS provides an overarching safety strategy and framework designed to enhance the effectiveness of risk management and enable continuous improvement of pipeline safety performance. The Gas Standards Manual (GSM) is evaluated and improved in accordance with the (P)SMS framework outlined in Avista’s Pipeline Safety Management Plan. Avista’s (P)SMS connects the GSM with the other plans, programs, and emergency response activities to ensure the continued safe operation of the gas system. Pipeline Safety Management System Avista’s (P)SMS is based on industry guidance provided in the American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 1173 (RP 1173) “Pipeline Safety Management Systems.” RP 1173 details the components of a (P)SMS using 10 Essential Elements and the Plan, Do, Check, Act model (PDCA.) Avista has modified the model to replace the Act step with Adjust to align with our enterprise Safety Management system. The graphic below illustrates, each of the 10 Elements embedded into the PDCA circle showing the cyclical nature of PDCA and the continuous improvement philosophy of the (P)SMS. Each cycle through PDCA produces opportunities for improvement of our defenses and controls, making our system safer over time. The components of the Plan-Do-Check-Adjust cycle are as follows: Plan: This step entails establishing the objectives and processes necessary to deliver results in accordance with the organization’s policies and the expected goals. By establishing output expectations, the completeness and accuracy of the process is also a part of the targeted improvement. Do: This step is the execution of the plan designed in the previous step. Check: This step entails the review of the results compared with established objectives. Comparing those results to the expected goals to ascertain any differences; looking for deviation in implementation from the plan. Adjust: This step is where a pipeline operator takes actions to continuously improve process performance, including corrective actions on significant differences between actual and planned results, analyzes the differences to determine their root causes, and determines where to apply changes that will include improvement of the process or product.
FOREWORD REV. NO. 16
3 OF 3

Plan-Do-Check-Adjust Cycle
This manual or portions thereof should not be reproduced. If additional copies are required, please contact the Gas Compliance Department.
Director, Natural Gas
2021 UPDATES
GAS STANDARDS MANUAL

Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 Foreword Foreword Professional Engineer, should be the final signatory of designs that are completed by the
01/01/2021 Foreword Foreword Sentence revised for conciseness.
01/01/2021 Foreword Commitment and “…leadership…” and “…((P)SMS.) added.
01/01/2021 Foreword Commitment and “Avista’s…” added.
01/01/2021 Foreword Management Commitment and Support
1173…” replaced with “…(P)SMS framework outlined in Avista’s Pipeline Safety
01/01/2021 Foreword Pipeline Safety
Management System Paragraph addressing API Recommended Practice 1173 updated.
01/01/2021 Foreword Pipeline Safety Management System “Act” changed to “Adjust”.
01/01/2021 Foreword Plan-Do-Check-Adjust
Cycle Graphic updated.
01/01/2021 Foreword Plan-Do-Check-Adjust Cycle “Act” changed to “Adjust”.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Ampere” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Backfill” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Bar Hole Survey” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Bedding” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Block Valve” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detector” entry added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “…by the use of…” revised to “…using…”.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Chimney Effect” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “City Gate” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Combustion Turbine” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Conductor” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Coupling” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Current” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Curtailment” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Dekatherm” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Deflection” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Degree Day (Heating Degree Day – HDD)” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Firm Customers” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Flue Gases” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Force Majeure” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Forced Air” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Furnace” entry added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Holiday Detector (Jeeping Machine)” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Ignition Temperature” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Inflection” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Interruptible Gas” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Joule-Thomson Effect” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Landfill Gas” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Lateral” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Maximo” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Meter Data Management” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Meter Swivel” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB)” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “…since…” revised to “…as…”.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Ohm” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Orifice” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Padding” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Pilot” entry added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Plug” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Propane” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Public Utility Commission” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Pumpkin” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Radiographic Inspection” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “…and used in the gas industry for external corrosion control of pipe and other metals.” Added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary Safety Data Sheet entry rewritten to give a full definition.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Sour Gas” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Stray Current” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary Stringing entry rewritten to emphasize updated terminology.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Submetering” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Sweet Gas” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Tariff” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “...or a “fink”).” Added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Valve Box” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Valve Seat” entry added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary “Volt” entry added.
01/01/2021 1.1 Glossary Definition of “Welding” revised to better describe the types of welding done at Avista.
01/01/2021 1.3 Gas Acronyms and Abbreviations Several new acronyms added to the document
01/01/2021 2.12 Transmission Line- Approval of Change “…for HCAs…” replaced with “(TIMP).”
01/01/2021 2.13 Regulatory Requirements “§192.59” added.
01/01/2021 2.13 Design Requirements Sentences revised to address chemical resistance and §192.59 references.
01/01/2021 2.13 Aboveground Plastic Pipe
Section revised to address the appropriate
method of protection, and to add bullet points about methods of protection.
01/01/2021 2.14 Emergency Curb Valves Sentence revised to add churches.
01/01/2021 2.22 Protection, and “A barricade and breakaway fitting can be installed together to provide an additional level of protection.” added.
01/01/2021 2.22 Breakaway Fitting Sentences added addressing situations where a breakaway fitting can be installed in addition to a bollard or snow shelter.
01/01/2021 2.22 Inside Meter Set “…and be approved by Gas Engineering.” added
01/01/2021 2.22 Meter Room Installation Sentences added to address inside meter sets and potential moving.
01/01/2021 2.22 Installation “…Meter Capacity Tables…” changed to “…Appendix A drawings…”
01/01/2021 2.22 Multiple Meters “…installing agency…” replaced with “…builder or developer…”.
01/01/2021 2.24 Appendix A – Meters and Drawings Added Drawing A-38500 to the table.
01/01/2021 3.12 Repair and Patching
Using a Coating Patch Section added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 3.12 Field Pinhole Repair “…or covered using a coating patch.” Added.
01/01/2021 3.12 Knitted Fiberglass Tape Section added.
01/01/2021 3.12 Cadweld Procedure “…wax tape and applicable primer.” Revised to “…a company approved coating.”
01/01/2021 3.13 Tracer Wire Sentence added to address when it is necessary to tape tracer wire.
01/01/2021 3.13 Plowing and Planting “…padding (sometimes referred to as…” added.
01/01/2021 3.13 Plowing and Planting “…bedding…’ replaced with “…padding…”.
01/01/2021 3.13 Pulling-In “…padding (sometimes referred to as…” added.
01/01/2021 3.15 Padding Material “Bedding” replaced with “Padding”.
01/01/2021 3.15 Padding Material “(sometimes referred to as bedding)” added.
01/01/2021 3.15 Controlled-Density Backfill “(sometimes referred to as bedding)” added.
01/01/2021 3.15 Backfill “…Bedding…” replaced with “Padding”.
01/01/2021 3.15 Customer Trench / Ditch Detail Drawings
“See the following drawings provided ref Customer Provided Trenches:” replaced with “Customer Trench / Ditch Detail Drawings”
01/01/2021 3.15 Customer Trench / Ditch Detail Drawings Drawing A-38315 added (two sheets).
01/01/2021 3.16 New Plastic Services Section added.
01/01/2021 3.16 EFV Capacity Tables Heading updated to “775 CFH, LYCO EFV II SERIES, ½””.
01/01/2021 3.16 EFV Capacity Tables Heading updated to “775 CFH, LYCO EFV I SERIES, ¾””.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 3.16 EFV Capacity Tables Heading updated to “1200 CFH, LYCO EFV I SERIES, ¾””.
01/01/2021 3.16 EFV Capacity Tables Heading updated to “1800 CFH, LYCO EFV I SERIES, ¾””.
01/01/2021 3.16 Main Connections “…shall…” revised to “…should…”.
01/01/2021 3.17 Blow Down Procedure “3” replaced with “7” and “2” replaced with “7.5”.
01/01/2021 3.18 Pressure Testing for Steel Paragraph added to clarify how to document a soap test.
01/01/2021 3.18 Requirements –
Intermediate Pressure Footnote #5 added for how to measure main and service combined.
01/01/2021 3.18 Pressure Testing Requirements for PE Paragraph added to clarify how to document a soap test.
01/01/2021 3.18 Requirements – Plastic Footnote #5 added for how to measure main and service combined.
01/01/2020 3.22 Welder Certification
Card Welder Certification card front and back updated.
01/01/2021 3.22 Qualification “…adhered to…” revised to “…retained and followed…”
01/01/2021 Appendix Weld Procedure Index Two new procedures, B17 and B19, added to the table and the appendix.
01/01/2021 3.23 Joining Methods Sentence rewritten for better clarity.
01/01/2021 3.24 General “…and M.T. Deason all of…” added.
01/01/2021 3.24 Electrofusion Second line titled “IPEX Genesis F3” added.
01/01/2021 3.24 Endcap Joining “…chamfer…” replaced with “…deburr…”.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 3.24 Tapping Procedure Bullet point 3 rewritten to better align with manufacturer’s procedures.
01/01/2021 3.24 Tapping Procedure Bullet point 4 rewritten to better align with manufacturer’s procedures.
01/01/2021 3.24 Tapping Procedure Bullet point 5 rewritten to better align with manufacturer’s procedures.
01/01/2021 3.24 Table D: M.T. Deason Table added.
01/01/2021 3.24 Table D: M.T. Deason Continued Table added.
01/01/2021 3.25
Removing Scratches
from PE Pipe Prior to the Installation of a Mechanical Tapping
“…240 emery grit…” updated to read “…280 emery grit…”
01/01/2021 3.32 Transmission Lines “…Transmission…” and “(TIMP)” added.
01/01/2021 3.44 External Examination Plastic Pipe End note added.
01/01/2021 4.12 Reporting of Safety-
Related Conditions Bullet point rewritten for succinctness.
01/01/2021 4.12 Reporting of Safety-Related Conditions
Bullet point added addressing MAOP requirements for transmission pipelines and
01/01/2021 4.12 Exceptions to Reporting Safety-
Related Conditions
pipelines where there has been an exceedance of MAOP plus allowable build-up as discussed in the last bulleted item of the
01/01/2021 4.12 Related Condition “…Office of Pipeline Safety…” revised to “…Associate Administrator) in writing…”
01/01/2021 4.12 Related Condition Paragraph added to address transmission pipeline MAOP.
01/01/2021 4.12 Filing of Safety-Related Condition
Report
location)” replaced with “…principal address, and operator identification number (OPID).
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 4.13 Public Awareness Program “…online marketing…” and “...and events.” Added.
01/01/2021 4.13 Public Awareness Program “…events…” added.
01/01/2021 4.13 Locating and Marking Gas Facilities “…sports courts,” added.
01/01/2021 4.13 Locating and Marking Gas Facilities “…and dead vegetation areas where visibility of yellow paint presents a problem.” Added.
01/01/2021 4.13 Locating and Marking Gas Facilities Sentence added to address if a locating technician discovers a leak.
01/01/2021 4.13 Hard to Locate Facilities Process “…they…” replaced with “…the local Avista operations office…”.
01/01/2021 4.13 Hard to Locate Facilities Process
“(Contact Damage Prevention Program
Administrator for guidance if necessary)” added.
01/01/2021 4.13 Responsibilities for “…starting…” added and “…date of…” replaced with “…day after…”
01/01/2021 4.13 Blasting Near Pipelines “…inspector…’ replaced with “…Avista representative.”
01/01/2021 4.13 Removal of Locate “…Engineering.” Replaced with “…Compliance.”
01/01/2021 4.14 TIMP Performance Reporting T added to title.
01/01/2021 4.14 TIMP Performance Reporting “T” added.
01/01/2021 4.14 PHMSA Conditional Reporting “…and as discussed at §191.22.” added.
01/01/2021 4.15 Recordkeeping “…Document For High Consequence Areas…” replaced with “...program
01/01/2021 4.16 MAOP Reconfirmation Section added.
01/01/2021 4.16 Records “…Transmission…” and “T” Added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 4.17 Typical Sequence of “(N-2757)” added.
01/01/2021 4.17 Typical Sequence of “(N-2757)” added.
01/01/2021 4.17 During the Pressure Increases “(N-2757)” added.
01/01/2021 4.17 During the Pressure Increases “(N-2757)” added.
01/01/2021 4.17 Uprate Acceptability Criteria “(N-2757)” added.
01/01/2021 4.17 Recordkeeping Section moved to end.
01/01/2021 4.18 Calibration of Instrument
“(Note: The DTEX calibration due date is
displayed each time the unit is powered on.)” added.
01/01/2021 4.19 Daily Reporting “…area…” replaced with “…office or entity (including the Gas Facility Replacement Program)”.
01/01/2021 4.19 Daily Reporting Sentences added regarding ability for contractors to make the WUTC notifications.
01/01/2021 4.31 Scope OQ Program Document is a separate document maintained by the OQ Program
01/01/2021 4.31 General “…shall…” replaced with “…has…” and “…WAC…” replaced with “…State regulatory…”.
01/01/2021 4.41 Management Program Title changed from “Integrity Management Program (IMP) for High Consequence Areas”.
01/01/2021 4.41 Management Program “…Transmission…” added and “…Pipeline Integrity…” revised to “…TIMP…”.
01/01/2021 4.41 Scope “…Transmission…” and “T” added.
01/01/2021 4.41 Scope “T” added.
01/01/2021 4.41 Scope “…medium consequence areas, and Class 3 or Class 4 areas operating at a hoop stress of 30% SMYS or more,” added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 4.41 Integrity Management Principles “T” added.
01/01/2021 4.41 Integrity Management Principles “T” added.
01/01/2021 4.41 Integrity Management Principles. “T” added.
01/01/2021 5.10 Gas Maintenance Matrix Tables
“Integrity Management Plan” revised to “Transmission Integrity Management Plan”
and “T” added in second column.
01/01/2021 5.10 Gas Maintenance Matrix Tables “Integrity Management Plan” revised to “Transmission Integrity Management Plan”.
01/01/2021 5.11 General Sentence added to clarify requirements for distribution patrolling function requirements.
01/01/2021 5.11 Leak Detection Instruments “…on a daily basis…” revised to “…daily…”.
01/01/2021 5.11 Leak Detection Instruments Sections added for Bascom Turner Gas Rovers and Bascom Turner Gas Explorers.
01/01/2021 5.11 Gas Leak Survey Methods “…during the course of…” revised to “…during…”.
01/01/2021 5.11 Gas Leak Survey Methods “…whether or not…” revised to “…whether…”
01/01/2021 5.11 Leak Survey Plans “…Transmission…” added.
01/01/2021 5.11 Special Surveys “During the course of…” revised to “During…”
01/01/2021 5.11 Grade 2 Leak “…reevaluated every 6 months (minimum) and…” and “…to…” added.
01/01/2021 5.11 Venting Underground Leakage “…during the course of…” revised to “…during…”.
01/01/2021 5.11 Underground Leak Repair Paragraph added to address valve box leaks.
01/01/2021 5.13 General “…crew…” revised to “…individuals…”
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 5.13 Maintenance “hospitals, jails, convalescent homes,” added.
01/01/2021 5.13 Maintenance Sentence added clarifying AC inspections
required in §192.479 and §192.481.
01/01/2021 5.14 Shorted Casings Parenthetical statement added to discuss how a Cathodic Technician will perform the required follow-up inspection.
01/01/2021 5.14 Verification of “and/or Verification” added to section title.
01/01/2021 5.14 Verification of “…and/or verification…” added.
01/01/2021 5.14 Verification of “(for ID purposes) and a sticker or label affixed and updated annually during maintenance…”, “…the…” and “…or verification.” Added.
01/01/2021 5.14 Requesting Assistance “…the…” added.
01/01/2021 5.15 Recordkeeping “…shall…” revised to “…should…” and “…or otherwise as applicable.” Added.
01/01/2021 5.15 TIMP – Transmission Patrolling “T” added to section title.
01/01/2021 5.15 TIMP – Transmission Patrolling “…Transmission…” added.
01/01/2021 5.15 Pipeline Markers for Buried Pipe “(in Class 1/ Class 2 areas)” added.
01/01/2021 5.17 Reinstating Gas Facilities “…General…” added.
01/01/2021 5.19 Maintenance Frequencies Note added to address CGI calibration requirements.
01/01/2021 5.19 Maintenance Frequencies Last sentence added.
01/01/2021 5.21 Responsibilities by Job Type “/label…” added.
01/01/2021 5.21 Verification at Test “/label…” added.
Date Section No. Category Update
01/01/2021 5.21 Recordkeeping “…or label…” added.
01/01/2021 5.22 General “…for every…” added.
01/01/2021 5.22 Pilot Line Heaters Last sentence rewritten to say: “Pilot line heaters are typically used at stations with pressure drops in excess of 250 psig.”

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE PLAN RECOMMENDED CHANGES In adherence with 49 CFR 192.603 and 192.605 and Gas Standard Spec. 1.4, “Gas Operations and Maintenance Plans”, the following is a review of the existing Company O&M Plan for conducting operations, maintenance activities and emergency responses. Manual Reviewed_______________________________________Date____________________
Section _______________________________________________________________________
Title of procedure _______________________________________________________________
Reviewed by / Submitted by______________________________________________________
Recommended changes (please fill out separate sheets for each recommended change):

Return to Randy Bareither, MSC 6 ([e-mail])
_____________________________________________________________________________ FOR OFFICE USE:
Received Date _______________

Action Taken
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 1 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD
1.1 GLOSSARY
1.2 INDEX
1.3 GAS ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Acronym and Abbreviations List .......................................................... 1-13
1.4 GAS OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PLANS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Operations and Maintenance Plan Review ............................................... 1 Construction Procedures Filing with the WUTC ....................................... 2 WA Filing of Construction Procedures (WAC-480-93-017) ......... 2 Records Available to Operating Personnel ............................................... 2 Table 1 – Standards Accountability ....................................................... 3-5
2.0 DESIGN
2.1 PIPE SYSTEMS
2.12 PIPE DESIGN - STEEL Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Converting an Acquired System .................................................. 1 Steel Pipe Coating and Marking .................................................. 2 Design Formula for Steel Pipe ..................................................... 2 Class Location Considerations .................................................... 3 Transmission Lines – Design of Pipe and Components .............. 3 Transmission Line – Internal Corrosion Control .......................... 4 Transmission Line – Approval of Change .................................... 5 WA Reporting of Proposed Construction of Transmission Main (WAC 480-93-160) ................................................................ 5 Design of Pipeline Components................................................................ 6 Joining of Steel Pipeline Components ...................................................... 7 Flanged Connections ................................................................................ 7 ASTM A105 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ................ 7 Flange and Fastener Requirements ........................................... 8 Supports - General .................................................................................... 8 Thermal Contraction and Expansion ........................................................ 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 2 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Longitudinal Stress ...................................................................... 9 Deflection and Bending Stress..................................................... 9 Deflection Formula and Examples .................................. 9 Bending Stress Formula and Examples ....................... 10 Seismic Supports ....................................................................... 11 Torsional Stress ......................................................................... 11
Torsional Stress Formula and Examples ...................... 11 Washington State Proximity Considerations ........................................... 11 WA Proximity Considerations (WAC 480-93-020) ..................... 11 Protection of Aboveground Steel Pipelines ............................................ 12 Clearances and Cover ............................................................................ 12 Easement Considerations ....................................................................... 13
Steel Piping Data Tables ........................................................................ 14 Manufacturing Design and Composition of Line Pipe ............................. 16 Pipe Specification ...................................................................... 16 Pressure Testing ........................................................................ 17
Corrosion Protection .................................................................. 17 AC Mitigation on New Steel Pipelines ....................................... 17
2.13 PIPE DESIGN - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Markings on Plastic Pipe and Components .............................................. 1
Pipe Print Line on Pipe Example ................................................. 2 Design Formulas ....................................................................................... 3
Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Dimensions Table .................................. 3 Pressure/Temperature Limitations ............................................................ 4
Aboveground Plastic Pipe ......................................................................... 4 WA Aboveground Limitations (WAC 480-93-178(6)) ................... 4
Bridge Crossings .......................................................................... 4 Plastic Pipe under Waterways .................................................................. 4
Clearances and Cover .............................................................................. 5 Thermal Contraction and Expansion ........................................................ 5
Joining of Plastic Pipelines ....................................................................... 5 Cathodic Protection ................................................................................... 6 Tracer Wire .................................................................................. 6
2.14 VALVE DESIGN Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements ............................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Valve Types .............................................................................................. 2 Steel Plug Valves ......................................................................... 2 Steel Gate Valves ........................................................................ 2 Steel Ball Valves .......................................................................... 2 Polyethylene Valves ..................................................................... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 3 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Service Line Valves .................................................................................. 3 Excess Flow Valve Performance Standards ............................................. 3 Curb Valves (Underground Service Valves) ............................................. 3 Emergency Curb Valves .............................................................. 4 WA Criteria for Emergency Curb Valves (WAC 480-93-100(2)) ............................................... 4
Valves at New Housing Developments ..................................................... 4 Criteria for Determining Emergency Operating Plan (EOP) Valves ......... 4 Tying EOP Zones Together ......................................................... 4 Emergency Regulator Station Valves .......................................... 5 Transmission Line Valves ......................................................................... 5 Valve Numbering....................................................................................... 5
Installation ................................................................................................. 6 Valve Supports .......................................................................................... 6 Corrosion ................................................................................................... 6 Valve Codes .............................................................................................. 7
2.15 BRIDGE DESIGN
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Pipeline Installation ................................................................................... 1
Permits ...................................................................................................... 2 Design Requirements ............................................................................... 2
Supports .................................................................................................... 2 Seismic Supports ......................................................................... 2
Corrosion Protection ................................................................................. 2 Casings ..................................................................................................... 3
2.2 METERING & REGULATION
2.22 METER DESIGN
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Pipeline Companies to Follow Law and Manufacturer’s WA Recommended Installation and Maintenance
(WAC 480-93-140(1)) ............................................... 1 Meter Types ................................................................................. 2 Aluminum and Iron Case Diaphragm Meters.................. 2 Rotary Meters ................................................................. 2 Turbine Meters ................................................................ 2 Ultrasonic Meters ............................................................ 2 Coriolis Meters ................................................................ 2 Meter Identification .................................................................................... 2 WA Meter Identification Requirements (WAC 480-909-328) ....... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 4 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Meter Case Pressures .............................................................................. 3 Meter Set Location, Protection and Barricades ........................................ 3 WA Meter Set Assembly Location (WAC 480-90-323) ................ 3 Breakaway Fitting ........................................................................ 5 3 Foot Rule................................................................................... 6 10 Foot Rule................................................................................. 7
Earthquake Valves .................................................................................... 7 Inside Meter Sets ...................................................................................... 8 Alcove Installation ........................................................................ 8 Meter Room Installation ............................................................... 8 Regulator and Relief Vent Design............................................................. 9 Pits and Vaults ........................................................................................ 10
Installation ............................................................................................... 10 Meter to Flanges Torque Table ................................................. 10 Overbuilds ............................................................................................... 11 Idle Meters .............................................................................................. 11
Idle Services ............................................................................................ 11 Multiple Services ..................................................................................... 11
Multiple Meters ........................................................................................ 12 Insulating Downstream Customer Piping ................................................ 12 Meter Set Design .................................................................................... 12 Gas Meter Information Sheets ................................................................ 13
Industrial Sets and Elevated Pressure Sets ........................................... 13 Identifying Sites with Special Design and Maintenance Requirements .. 14
Gas Volume Calculation ......................................................................... 15 Behavior of Natural Gas ............................................................. 15
Computing Corrected Flows ...................................................... 15 Elevation Compensation ............................................................ 15
Atmospheric Pressure Elevation Table ......................... 16 Pressure Compensation ............................................................ 16
Temperature Compensation ...................................................... 17 Example for Computing Corrected Flow .................................... 17
Correction Codes ....................................................................... 17 Meter Correction Codes ........................................................ 18-19
Temperature Corrected Flows ................................................... 20 Frequency of Meter Tests .......................................................... 20
Prover Calibration Interval ......................................................... 20 Avista’s Requirements for Gas Meter Room Installations ...................... 21 A-36275, Residential Meter Set Location Drawing ................................. 22
2.23 REGULATOR DESIGN Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Sizing Requirements .................................................................... 2 Regulation of Intermediate Pressure to Service Pressure ........... 2 Regulation of High Pressure to Service Pressure ....................... 2 WA Requirements for Proximity Considerations (WAC 480-93-020) ................................................... 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 5 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Valves .......................................................................................... 3 Control and Sensing Lines ........................................................... 3 Capacity ....................................................................................... 4 Telemetering and Pressure Recorders ........................................ 4 Regulator Station Numbering....................................................... 4
2.24 METER AND REGULATOR TABLES AND DRAWINGS Regulator and Accuracy of Set Pressure Table ........................................ 1 Relief Capacity .......................................................................................... 1 Obsolete Regulators .............................................................................. 1-2 Meter Capacity Tables .............................................................................. 2 Diaphragm Meters ....................................................................... 2
Rotary Meters............................................................................... 3 Turbine Meters ............................................................................. 4 Regulator Capacity Tables ........................................................................ 4 Meter Set Regulators (30 PSIG Inlet, 46-60 PSIG MAOP) ...... 5-6
Meter Set Regulators (15 PSIG Inlet, 22.6-45 PSIG MAOP) ... 7-8 Meter Set Regulators (5 PSIG Inlet, 10-22.5 PSIG MAOP) ..... 8-9
Meter Set Regulators (2 PSIG Inlet, 6-8 PSIG MAOP) ............. 10 Farm Tap Regulator 500 PSIG MAOP Inlet (50 PSIG Set Point) ............................................................. 11 Relief Valve Capacities at Set Point (60 MAOP Downstream) .. 12
Other Applications ...................................................................... 12
Drawings ........................................................................................... App A A-36712, Barricade Detail / Bollard Detail ........................... App A
A-36712, Barricade Detail for Close Prox. to Electric .......... App A A-38500, Meter Set Stand for Flex Line Support ................. App A
A-34175, Single Pipe Ground Support ................................ App A A-34175, Double Pipe Ground Support ............................... App A
A-35208, Residential Meter Sets Intermediate Pressure .... App A A-37102, Residential Meter, 2 psig Delivery ........................ App A
A-37103, Residential & Small Commercial Meter, HP ........ App A B-35207, Residential Standard Meter .................................. App A
B-35207, Commercial Standard Meter ................................ App A C-35209, Small Commercial Standard Meter ...................... App A
C-35209, Large Diaphragm Meter Set ................................. App A B-33325, 2000, 3000 and 3500 Rotary Meters.................... App A B-33325, 5000 and 7000 Rotary Meters .............................. App A B-33325, 11000 Rotary Meter.............................................. App A B-38205, 2000, 3000, 3500 Rotary Meters Int Pressure ..... App A B-35785, Threaded 5000 and 7000 Rotary Meters ............. App A E-37197, Code 3, 2” Standard Meter Set ............................ App A E-37842, Welded Farm Tap Station, 2” outlet ..................... App A E-37970, Welded Farm Tap Station, 3/4” outlet .................. App A E-33952, Single Run District Reg, 2” x 4” ............................ App A E-35783, Single Run District Reg, 4” x 6” ............................ App A E-35158, Dual Run District Reg, 2” x 4” .............................. App A L-36082, Fencing Detail ....................................................... App A
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 6 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
2.25 TELEMETRY DESIGN Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements ............................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Data Collected ............................................................................. 1 Data Path and Uses ..................................................................... 2 Equipment Configuration ......................................................................... 3 Gate Stations ............................................................................... 3 Gas Transport and Telemetry Customers ................................... 3
Regulator Sites and System Pressure Monitoring ....................... 3 Power Plants ................................................................................ 4 Table of Quantities Measured ...................................................... 4 Communications ....................................................................................... 5
Power Source ............................................................................................ 5 Electrical Classification ............................................................................. 5
Sensing Lines............................................................................................ 6 Pulses to Customers ................................................................................. 6 Transport Customers ................................................................................ 8 Avista Procures ............................................................................ 8
Customer Provides ...................................................................... 8 Avista Provides ............................................................................ 9
Notification and Timing ................................................................ 9 Drawing - E-37114, Gas Transportation Customer Detail ...................... 10
2.3 CATHODIC PROTECTION
2.32 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Theory of Corrosion……………………………………………………….. .... 1 AC vs. DC .................................................................................... 1
Corrosion Cell .............................................................................. 1 Anode and Cathode Reactions .................................................... 2
Anode-Cathode Area Ratio .......................................................... 2 Electrolyte Resistivity ................................................................... 3
Anode-Cathode Separation Distance .......................................... 3 Dissimilar Metals .......................................................................... 3 The Galvanic Series ..................................................................... 4 Stress Corrosion .......................................................................... 4 Controlling Corrosion ................................................................................ 4 Insulation ...................................................................................... 4 Metallic Coatings .......................................................................... 4 Nonmetallic Materials ................................................................... 5 Change in Environment ............................................................... 5 Cathodic Protection ...................................................................... 5 Galvanic System .......................................................................... 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 7 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Impressed Current System .......................................................... 5 Design and Installation .............................................................................. 5 General ........................................................................................ 5 WA Pipe Systems Corrosion Protection (WAC 480-93-110) ....... 5 WA Grounding Well Design (WAC 173-160-456(2)) ................... 6 Anode Systems ............................................................................ 6
AC Mitigation ................................................................................ 6 Test Leads ................................................................................... 6 Tracer Wire .................................................................................. 7 System Isolation ........................................................................... 7 Replacing Steel Main ................................................................... 7 Replacing Steel Services ............................................................. 8
2.4 VAULTS
2.42 VAULT DESIGN
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Design Requirements………………………………………………………….1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Sealing and Ventilation ................................................................ 2 Drainage ....................................................................................... 2
Electrical Code ............................................................................. 2
2.5 ODORIZATION
2.52 ODORIZATION OF NATURAL GAS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Odorization…………………………………………………………………….. 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Odorant Type ............................................................................... 1 Odorizer Types ............................................................................ 1
Odorant Concentrations ............................................................................ 2
3.0 CONSTRUCTION
3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION
3.12 PIPE INSTALLATION – STEEL MAINS
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Construction Requirements ...................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Monitoring of Pressures ............................................................... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 8 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Storage and Handling of Pipe ...................................................... 2 Visual Inspection .......................................................................... 3 Stringing ....................................................................................... 3 Mastic Coating ............................................................................. 3 Tape Wrap ................................................................................... 3 Cold Applied Tape Wrap .............................................................. 4
Coating on Steel Risers ............................................................... 4 Wax Type – Tape Wrap ............................................................... 4 Repair and Patching Using Tape Wrap .......................... 5 Repair and Patching Using a Coating Patch ............................... 5 Field Pinhole Repair ..................................................................... 5 Liquid Epoxy Coating ................................................................... 5
Liquid Epoxy Curing Time Table ..................................... 6 Knitted Fiberglass Tape ............................................................ 6-7 Installation in Ditch ....................................................................... 8 Test Leads ................................................................................... 8
Cadweld Procedure ..................................................................... 8 Caution Tape.............................................................................. 10
Marker Balls ............................................................................... 10 Dry Line Installations .................................................................. 10 Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings (Jeeping) .................. 10 Voltage Settings for Conventional Coatings .............................. 11
Voltage Settings for Conventional Coatings Table .................... 11 Voltage Settings for Thin Film Coatings (FBE) .......................... 11
Voltage Settings for ARO Pipe................................................... 12 Coating Thickness for New Pipe ................................................ 12
New Pipe Coating Thickness Table .............................. 12 Supports ..................................................................................... 12
Pipe Bends ................................................................................. 12 Minimum Steel Bend Radius Table .............................. 13
Mitering/Segmenting Elbows ..................................................... 13 Pigging of Pipe ........................................................................... 13
Pits and Vaults ........................................................................... 13 Odorizing Newly Installed Pipe .................................................. 13
Moving or Lowering Steel Pipe in Service ................................. 14 Minimum Roping Distance on Both Sides of the
Moved Pipe Section Table ..................................... 14 Piping and Weld Data Collection .............................................. 14
Toughness Testing .................................................................... 15 WA High Pressure Pipeline Diameter Requirements (WAC 480-93-175) ................................................. 15 Recordkeeping ........................................................................... 15 Pipe Coupon Retention Procedures .......................................... 15 Updating Maps and Records ..................................................... 16 WA Recordkeeping (WAC 480-93-018(5)) ................... 16 Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flowchart ................................... 16 Drawings ............................................................................................ 17-19 A-35447, Color Coding of Test Leads Across Insulated Ftgs .... 18 B-36271, Test Stations, Isolation Fittings and Tracer Wire ....... 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 9 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
3.13 PIPE INSTALLATION – PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) MAINS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Construction Requirements ...................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Qualified Joiners .......................................................................... 1 Monitoring of Pressures ............................................................... 2 Storage of Pipe and Fittings......................................................... 2 Handling ....................................................................................... 3 Installation .................................................................................... 3 Field Bending ............................................................................... 3
Minimum Permanent Bending Radius Table ............................... 4 Tensile Loading ............................................................................ 5 Tracer Wire .................................................................................. 5 Wire Connections ......................................................................... 6
Pulling Limitations ........................................................................ 6 Plowing and Planting ................................................................... 6
Minimum Temporary Bending Table ............................................ 6 Caution Tape................................................................................ 7 Dry Line Installations .................................................................... 7 Pulling-In ...................................................................................... 7
Safe Pulling Forces ...................................................................... 7 Safe Pulling Forces Table ............................................... 8
Break-Away Pin or Weak Link ..................................................... 9 Static Charges ............................................................................. 9
Examining Buried Pipe ................................................................. 9 Pigging of Pipe ........................................................................... 10
Odorizing Newly Installed Pipe .................................................. 10 Pressure Testing ........................................................................ 10
Updating Maps and Records ..................................................... 10 WA Requirement to Update Records within 6 Months
of a Construction Activity (WAC 480-93-018(5)) .... 10 Drawings ................................................................................................. 11
A-35776, Taping Tracer Wire to Pipe ........................................ 11 A-36277, Tracer Wire & Nuts ..................................................... 12
3.14 PRE-CHECK LAYOUT AND INSPECTION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Preliminary Inspection and Layout ............................................................ 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Pre-Construction Notification for Locate Tickets .......................... 1 Pre-Construction Inspection ......................................................... 2 Layout .......................................................................................... 2 Joint Ditch .................................................................................... 2
3.15 TRENCHING & BACKFILLING Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 10 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Trenching Requirements ........................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Cover ............................................................................................ 1 Clearances - Steel and PE Pipelines ........................................... 2 Vegetation Clearance .................................................................. 3
Shoring and Excavating Safety .................................................... 3 Trench Excavation ....................................................................... 3 Examining Buried Pipe ................................................................. 4 Padding Material .......................................................................... 4 Controlled-Density Backfill ........................................................... 4 Backfill .......................................................................................... 4
Compaction .................................................................................. 4 Marking Pipe after Installation (OR) ............................................. 5 Pressure Testing After Backfilling ................................................ 5 Pipeline Markers .......................................................................... 5
Customer Trench / Ditch Detail Drawings .................................... 5 Drawings ................................................................................................ 6-7
A-38315, Customer Supplied Ditch Relocation Spec .................. 6 A-38315, Customer Provided Trench Construction Spec ............ 7
3.16 SERVICES
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Installation Requirements ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Location Considerations .............................................................. 1
New Plastic Services ................................................................... 2 Steel Service Replacement .......................................................... 2
Excess Flow Valves .................................................................................. 2 EFV Symbology Table ................................................................. 3
Capacity of EFV ........................................................................... 4 EFV Capacity Tables ................................................... 5-7
Branch (Split) Service .................................................................. 7 Installation of Excess Flow Valves .............................................. 8
EFV – Installation Procedures Service Tee Style ........... 8 EFV – Installation Procedures In-Line “Stick” Style ........ 8
EFV – High Pressure Services ....................................... 9 Service Risers ........................................................................................... 9 Service Risers for Multi-Meter Manifolds ................................... 10 Services in Heavy Snow Areas ............................................................... 10 Service Lines in Conduit/Casing ............................................................. 10 Requirement for Sealing Conduit Ends (WAC 480-93-115)............. 11 Service Lines into Buildings .................................................................... 11 Service Lines Passing Under Buildings .................................................. 11 Main Connections ................................................................................... 11 Curb Valves ............................................................................................. 11 Insertion of Old Steel Services Along Steel Main ................................... 11 Insertion of Old Steel Services Along Plastic Main ................................. 12 Service - Termination Valve .................................................................... 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 11 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Steel Service Abandonment ................................................................... 12 New Service Lines Not in Use ................................................................ 12 Service Lines to Recreational Vehicles ................................................. 13 Service Pipe Capacities .......................................................................... 13 Service Pipe Capacities Chart ................................................... 13 Pipe Sizes and Capacities Downstream of Meter...................... 14
Pipe Sizes and Capacities Downstream of Meter Charts ..... 15-17 Drawings ............................................................................................ 18-20 A-34735, Inserting ¾” Steel Service with ½” PE........................ 18 B-36269, Service Installation in Heavy Snow Areas ................. 19 A-37169, ½” PE Svc & EFV Off Steel IP Main ........................... 20
3.17 PURGING PIPELINES Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Prevention of Accidental Ignition ............................................................... 1 Purging Requirements .............................................................................. 2
General ........................................................................................ 2 Purging Plan................................................................................. 2 Purging Main With Laterals .......................................................... 3 Injection Rate ............................................................................... 3
Venting and Blow Down ............................................................... 3 Blow Down Procedure .............................................................................. 3
Static Charges ............................................................................. 4 Bleed Off of Steel Pipe ................................................................. 4
Bleed Off of Plastic Pipe .............................................................. 4 Purging Air out of Facilities to be Placed in Service………………………. 4
Purging Services .......................................................................... 5 Purging Services with an Excess Flow Valve ............................. 5
Small Pipelines ............................................................................ 5 Large Pipelines ............................................................................ 5
Purging with Nitrogen ................................................................... 5 Nitrogen Purging Data for 4” – 20” Pipe Table ............... 6
Verifying the Presence of Gas ..................................................... 7 Purging Natural Gas Out of Existing Facilities .......................................... 7
Small Pipelines ............................................................................ 7 Large Pipelines ............................................................................ 8
Verifying the Absence of Gas ...................................................... 8 Flaring of Natural Gas .................................................................. 8 Working on Purged Pipeline ........................................................ 9
3.18 PRESSURE TESTING Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Pressure Testing Requirements ............................................................... 1 New and Replacement Pipe ........................................................ 1 Dry Line Pipe................................................................................ 1 Pressure Testing for Steel ........................................................... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 12 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Maximum Test Pressure Permitted Table ................................... 2 WA Notification to WUTC Prior to Pressure Testing Transmission Pipe (WAC 480-93-170).................................. 4 Pressure Test Chart – HP Steel Pipeline Systems ...................... 5 Pressure Testing Chart – IP Steel Pipeline Systems .................. 6 Pressure Testing Requirements for PE ....................................... 7
Pressure Test Chart – Plastic Pipeline Systems ......................... 8 Reinstating Service Lines ............................................................ 8 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 9 Avista Pressure Test Information Sticker ................................... 10 Pressure Test Procedures ......................................................... 10
3.19 TRENCHLESS PIPE INSTALLATION METHODS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ..................................................................................................... 1 Tracking and Potholing when Crossing Utilities ........................... 1
Longitudinal Separation ............................................................... 2 Depth of Cover ............................................................................. 2 Future Locatability ........................................................................ 2 Steel – Minimum Radius of Curvature ......................................... 3
PE – Minimum Radius of Curvature ............................................ 3 Horizontal Directional Drilling .................................................................... 3
General ........................................................................................ 3 Permits ......................................................................................... 3
Pilot Hole Alignment ..................................................................... 3 HDD Bore Path ............................................................................ 3
Reaming ....................................................................................... 4 Pullback ........................................................................................ 4
HDD Discharge Mitigation Plan ................................................... 4 Pipe Splitting ............................................................................................. 5
General ........................................................................................ 5 Determining Factors ..................................................................... 5
Equipment Requirements – Steel or PE ...................................... 5 Equipment Requirements - PE .................................................... 6
Procedure..................................................................................... 6 Pneumatic Missiling/Piercing .................................................................... 6 General ........................................................................................ 6 Determining Factors ..................................................................... 6 Missile Alignment Procedure ....................................................... 7
3.2 JOINING OF PIPE
3.22 JOINING OF PIPE - STEEL
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Welder Qualification Requirements .......................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 13 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Qualifications of Welders ............................................................. 2 Recommended Initial Qualification Test – Production and In-Svc <60 PSIG GMAW/SMAW .... 2 Recommended Initial Qualification Test – Production and In-Svc >60 PSIG GMAW/SMAW ... 3 Recommended Re-Qualification Test –
Production and In-Svc GMAW/SMAW .................... 3 Weld Testing ................................................................................ 3 Retesting after Failure .................................................................. 3 Welder Certification Card ............................................................. 4 Weld Procedure Qualification Requirements ............................................ 5 General ........................................................................................ 5
Weld Procedure Qualification ...................................................... 5 Weld Procedure Groupings .......................................................... 5 Welding Control Requirements ................................................................. 6 Weld Type/Procedure Selection .................................................. 6
Weld Preparation ......................................................................... 6 Non-Destructive Pre-Inspection ................................................... 7
Pipe End Alignment ..................................................................... 7 Miter Joints ................................................................................... 8 Circumferential Weld Separation ................................................. 8 Preheating .................................................................................... 8
Post Heat Weld Treatment ........................................................... 9 Over-Cooling ................................................................................ 9
Grounding Devices ...................................................................... 9 Butt Welding Technique ............................................................... 9
Depositing Root Bead and Hot Pass ........................................... 9 Filler and Cover Passes ............................................................. 10
Roll Welding ............................................................................... 10 Fillet Welding.............................................................................. 10
Fillet Welding Diagram ............................................................... 11 Socket Welding .......................................................................... 11
Socket Welding Diagram ........................................................... 11 Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Requirements .......................... 11
Determining Speed of Travel ..................................................... 13 Removal or Repair of Weld Defects or Cracks .......................... 13
Electrode Storage ...................................................................... 13 Visual Inspection ..................................................................................... 14
Weld Defects/Causes/Visual Checks ........................................ 14 Appendix A Weld Procedure Index
3.23 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) - HEAT FUSION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Joining Methods ........................................................................................ 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Qualifications of Persons to Join Plastic Pipe .............................. 1 WA Requirements for PE Joint Tracking (WAC 480-93-080) ...... 2 Marking Joints .............................................................................. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 14 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Pipe Joining Certification Record ................................................. 2 Butt Fusion Procedures ............................................................................ 2 General ........................................................................................ 2 Heating Tool ................................................................................. 3 Heater Surface Temperature Table ............................................. 3 Approx. Melt Bead Size Table ..................................................... 4
Butt Fusion Cooling Times Table ................................................. 5 Hydraulic Butt Fusion ................................................................................ 5 Determining Drag Pressure ......................................................... 5 Determining Fusion Pressure ...................................................... 6 Hydraulic Fusion Pressures (#28 McElroy Machine) ................... 6 Hydraulic Shift Sequence ............................................................. 7
Cold Weather Fusion ................................................................................ 7 Butt Fusion Troubleshooting Guide .......................................................... 8 Compatibility/Cross Fusions ..................................................................... 8
3.24 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) ELECTROFUSION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Calibration of Electrofusion Equipment ........................................ 2
Marking Joints .............................................................................. 2 Standard Coupling and Endcap Joining Procedures ................................ 2
Repair Coupling Joining Procedure .......................................................... 4 Saddle Joining Procedure ......................................................................... 5
Aldyl A Tee Repair Procedure .................................................................. 6 Service Line Joining Procedure ................................................................ 6
Tapping Procedure ................................................................................... 7 Repair Clamp Joining Procedure .............................................................. 7
Re-fusion of Electrofusion Fittings ............................................................ 8 Fusion/Cooling Times Table ................................................................ 9-13
3.25 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) - MECHANICAL
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ..................................................................................................... 1
Marking Joints ........................................................................................... 2 Procedures ................................................................................................ 2 Procedures for Installing Approved Spigot and Sleeve Type Couplings and Fittings using the QRP-100 Quick Ratchet Press Tool ................................................................ 2 Installation Procedure for Double Ended Couplings ....... 2 Installing Other Lycofit Fittings ........................................ 3 Procedures for Installing Approved Spigot and Sleeve Type Couplings/Fittings using the LHP-200 Hydraulic Press Tool. 3 Procedure for Installing Approved Slip-Lock Type Couplings and Fittings ............................................................................ 4 Procedures for Installing Approved Compression Type Service Head Adapters ....................................................................... 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 15 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Procedure for Installing Approved Slip-Lock Type Service Head Adapters (i.e., “Perfection” type) .................................. 5 Procedure for Installing Approved Weld-On 1201 and 1302 Style Steel Punch Tees with Compression Type Outlet Connection for PE Pipe ......................................................... 6 Procedure for Installing Approved Weld-On 1201 and
1302 Style Steel Punch Tees with Spigot and Sleeve Type Outlet Connection for PE Pipe .............................................. 8 Procedure for Installing Approved PE Compression X Weld End Adapter Couplings (Sometimes Referred to as the “Button” Fitting) ...................................................................... 9 Procedure for Installing Approved Bolt-On Type Mechanical
Tees with Spigot and Sleeve Type Outlet Connection ........ 10 Procedure for Installing Approved Bolt-On-Type Mechanical Tees with Slip-Lock Type Outlet Connection ..................... 11 Procedure for Removing Scratches from PE Pipe Prior to
Installation of a Mechanical Tapping Tee ............................ 11 Procedure for Installing 1/2 Inch and 3/4 Inch Abandonment
Nuts on Continental Steel to PE Service Tee ..................... 12 3.3 REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES 3.32 REPAIR OF STEEL PIPE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Steel Repair Requirements ....................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Monitoring of Pressure ................................................................. 2
Service Lines................................................................................ 2 Grinding ........................................................................................ 2
Grinding and Fill Welding ............................................................. 3 Patching ....................................................................................... 3
Sleeving ....................................................................................... 3 Mueller Save-A-Valve Nipple or Equivalent ................................. 3
Canning (Barreling) ...................................................................... 3 Tapping and Plugging Procedures .............................................. 3
Replace Segment of Pipe ............................................................ 4 Pre-Tested Steel Pipe .................................................................. 4 Dents (Pipe Distortion) ................................................................. 4 Repair Clamps and Sleeves ........................................................ 5 Transmission Lines ...................................................................... 5 Leak Repair and Residual Gas Checks ....................................... 5 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 6 Specific Repair Methods .............................................................. 6 Steel Repair Charts ................................................................................... 6 Steel Repair Chart where MAOP ≤100 PSIG ........................... 6-7 Steel Repair Chart where MAOP >100 PSIG, <500 PSIG, and <20% SMYS ................................................................ 7-8 Steel Repair Chart where MAOP ≥500 PSIG and ≥20% SMYS .. 9
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 16 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
3.32A PERMANENT REPAIR SLEEVES Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ..................................................................................................... 1 Plidco Split-Sleeve Steel Repair Clamp Procedure .................................. 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Precautions .................................................................................. 1 Installation .................................................................................... 2 Field Welding Instructions ........................................................... 2
Welding Sequence ....................................................................... 3 Testing ......................................................................................... 3 Storage ......................................................................................... 3 TD Williamson Permanent Hemi-Head Repair Sphere Procedure… ....... 3
General ........................................................................................ 3 Precautions .................................................................................. 4
Installation .................................................................................... 4 Fit-Up and Welding Sequence ..................................................... 4 Inspection ..................................................................................... 4
3.33 REPAIR OF PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) PIPE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Plastic Repair Requirements .................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Monitoring of Pressure ................................................................. 2 Pre-Tested Pipe ........................................................................... 2
Static Charges ............................................................................. 2 Temporary Repairs ...................................................................... 2
Permanent Repairs ...................................................................... 2 Plastic Repair Selection Chart ..................................................... 3
Damage to Service Line ............................................................... 3 Heat Damage ............................................................................... 4
Marking Joints ............................................................................. 4 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 4
3.34 SQUEEZE-OFF OF PE PIPE AND PREVENTION OF STATIC ELECTRICITY Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Squeeze-Off Tools ....................................................................... 1 Monitoring of Pressures ............................................................... 1 Prevention of Accidental Ignition by Static Electricity .................. 2 Prevention of Static Electricity Procedures ............................................... 2 Aerosol Static Suppression Procedure ........................................ 3 Wet Soapy Rag Procedure .......................................................... 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 17 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Squeezing Procedure ............................................................................... 4 WA Requirements for Pipe Squeezing (WAC 480-93-178) ......... 5 Squeeze Procedure ..................................................................... 5 Squeeze Release Procedure ....................................................... 5 PE Pipe Squeeze and Release Rates Table ............................................ 6 Post-Squeeze Procedure .......................................................................... 6
New Fitting / Fusion near a Previous Squeeze Point ............................... 6
3.35 DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR USE OF“ADAMS” STYLE REPAIR CLAMPS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ..................................................................................................... 1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 1 Romac Style SS1 Procedure .................................................................... 2
Adams and Mueller Style Procedure ........................................................ 2
3.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION
3.42 CASING AND CONDUIT INSTALLATION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
Design Requirements ............................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
WA Requirement for Sealing Conduit Ends (WAC 480-93-115) . 1 Casing Size .................................................................................. 2
Steel Casing for Steel Carrier Pipe Spec. Table.......................... 2 Steel Casing for PE (Polyethylene) Carrier Pipe Spec. Table ..... 2
Casing Specifications ................................................................... 2 Installation Requirements. ........................................................................ 3
Installing Steel Carrier Pipe in Casing ......................................... 3 WA Requirements for Test Leads (WAC 480-93-115) ................ 4
Installing PE Carrier Pipe in Casing ............................................. 4 Conduits ....................................................................................... 5
Drawings ................................................................................................... 6 B-34947, Big and Little Fink Casing Detail .................................. 6
E-33947, Standard Casing Detail ............................................. 7-8
3.43 LAND DISTURBANCE REQUIREMENTS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ..................................................................................................... 1 Definitions ................................................................................................. 2 Storm Water Permitting Requirements ..................................................... 3 Storm Water Erosion Control Guidance for >1 Acre Table ....................... 4 Best Management Practices (BMPs) ........................................................ 5 Planning BMPs ............................................................................ 5 Erosion Control BMPs .................................................................. 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 18 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Sediment Control BMPs ............................................................... 6 Run-off Control BMPs .................................................................. 7 Construction Activities, Typical Gov. Agencies and Associated Permits Table ................................................................................................ 8-9 Exhibit A – Common BMPs and How to Implement ............................... 10 Silt Fence Sediment Control BMP ............................................. 10
Fiber Roll/Straw Wattle Sediment Control BMP ........................ 11 Rock Check Dam Run-off Control BMP ..................................... 12 3.44 EXPOSED PIPE EVALUATION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ..................................................................................................... 1 External Examination Plastic Pipe ............................................................ 2 Examining Buried Steel and Pipe Coating ................................................ 2
Examining Buried Portion of Steel Risers ................................................. 3 Coating Bond Condition Classifications ....................................... 3
Soil Type Descriptions ................................................................. 3 Low Cathodic Protection (CP) Read Identified ......................................... 4 Internal Steel Pipe Examination ................................................................ 4 Internal PE Pipe Examination ................................................................... 4
Compliance ............................................................................................... 4 Records Retention .................................................................................... 4
Examples of Pipe Exposures .................................................................... 5 4.0 OPERATIONS
4.11 CONTINUING SURVEILLANCE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Information Analysis and Responsibilities ................................... 1
Material Failure ............................................................................ 2 WA Requirements for Lab Analysis Findings
(WAC 480-93-200(6)) ............................................... 3 Map and Data Corrections ........................................................... 3
4.12 SAFETY-RELATED CONDITIONS
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Reporting of Safety-Related Conditions ...................................... 1 Exceptions to Reporting Safety-Related Conditions .................... 2 Filing of Safety-Related Condition Report ................................... 3 Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 4 4.13 DAMAGE PREVENTION PROGRAM Scope ........................................................................................................ 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 19 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Public Awareness Program .......................................................... 2 Inspection and Protection of Pipeline after Railroad Accidents ... 2 One Call Notification System ....................................................... 2
Requests for Locates Through One Call ..................................... 3 Requesting Emergency Locates .................................................. 3 Locating and Marking Gas Facilities ............................................ 3 Websites for State Underground Dig Laws ..................... 3 Hard to Locate Facilities Process ............................................................. 5 Tolerance Zone ......................................................................................... 7
Diagram - WA/ID Tolerance Zone................................................ 7 Diagram – Oregon Tolerance Zone ............................................. 8 Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 8 APWA Uniform Color Codes for Marking .................................................. 8
Excavator Responsibilities for Safe Digging ............................................. 9 Locate Ticket Availability ........................................................................... 9
On-Site Inspections - General ................................................................. 10 Blasting Near Pipelines .............................................................. 10 Peak Particle Velocity Chart ......................................... 11 On-Site Inspections for Transmission Facilities ......................... 11
Excavation Identified Without a Locate Ticket (WA) .................. 12 WA Excavator Digging within 35 FT of a Transmission
Pipeline (WAC 480-93-200(9)) ............................................ 13 Intentional Damage or Removal of Locate Marks...................... 13
Mapping Corrections .................................................................. 13 Response to Facility Damage .................................................... 13
Avista Damage to Other Facility Operators ............................... 14 Photograph Requirements ......................................................... 15
WA Damage Reporting ........................................................................... 15 Reporting of Damage (WAC 480-93-200(7)(b)) ......................... 15
Damage Record Retention (WAC 480-93-200(7)(c)) ................ 15 WA Excavator Notification ......................................................... 16
WA Notification of Excavator (WAC 480-93-200(8)) .... 16 Building Permits near Transmission Utility Easements ............. 16
Right of Way Easement and Notification to Pipeline Company (RCW Chapter 19.122.033(4)) ............... 16 4.14 RECURRING REPORTING REQUIREMENTS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Reporting Distribution Facilities ................................................... 1 Reporting Transmission Facilities ................................................ 1
Submission of Reports ................................................................. 1 TIMP Performance Reporting ...................................................... 2 PHMSA Conditional Reporting..................................................... 2 WUTC Construction Defects and Material Failures Report (WAC 480-93-200(10)(b)) ..................................................... 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 20 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

DOT Drug & Alcohol MIS Form Submission (WAC 480-93-200(13)) .......................................................... 3 Plans and Procedures ............................................................................... 3 WUTC Plans and Procedures (WAC 480-93-180(2)) .................. 3 WA Isolated Steel and Replacement Program ......................................... 3 NPMS Updating ........................................................................................ 3
250+ PSIG Pipelines Map Submission (Washington) .............................. 4 WA Damage Reporting ............................................................................. 4 WUTC Damage Reporting (RCW Chapter 19.122.053(1) & (3)) . 4 WUTC Damage to Own Underground Facility (RCW Chapter 19.122.053(2) ............................................... 4 WA Utilization of the Reporting Tool (WAC 480-93-200(7)) ........ 4
WA Reporting Requirements .................................................................... 4 WA Damage Reporting Requirement (WAC 480-93-200(7)(b)) .. 5 ID Damage Reporting ............................................................................... 5 ID Damage to Underground Facilities (Idaho Code Title 55
Chapter 22; 55-2208 (5) ........................................................ 5 Document Retention ................................................................................. 6
WA Administrative Code Requirements for Document Retention (WAC 480-93-200(7)(c)) ....................................... 6 4.15 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE (MAOP)
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Determination of MAOP ............................................................... 1 Steel Pipe (≥100 PSIG) Test Pressure Chart ................. 2
Proximity Considerations (WAC 480-93-020) ................. 2 Changing MAOP .......................................................................... 2
MAOP Considerations during Startup and Shutdown ................. 2 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 3
WA Recordkeeping Requirements (WAC 480-93-018(5)) .... 3 4.16 CLASS LOCATIONS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Class Locations ............................................................................ 1 Class Location Boundaries .......................................................... 2 Drawing – Clustering Example ....................................... 2 Class Location Study ................................................................... 2 Change in Class Location ............................................................ 3 Confirmation or Revision of MAOP .............................................. 3 MAOP Reconfirmation ................................................................. 4 Documentation of MAOP Revisions ............................................ 4 Records ........................................................................................ 4 4.17 UPRATING Scope ........................................................................................................ 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 21 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Uprating Requirements ............................................................................. 1 Uprating Pipeline to Hoop Stress <30% SMYS ........................... 2 5Uprating Pipeline to Hoop Stress ≥30% SMYS ......................... 3
Uprate in State of Washington ..................................................... 3 Uprating Procedure - Typical Sequence of Events ................................... 3 Prior to Pressure Increase ........................................................... 4 During the Pressure Increases .................................................... 4 Uprate Acceptability Criteria ........................................................ 5 After Final MAOP is Achieved...................................................... 5
Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 5 4.18 ODORIZATION PROCEDURES Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Odorant Concentrations ............................................................................ 1 Pickling Newly Installed Pipe .................................................................... 2 Odorant Sampling ..................................................................................... 2
Test Point Review ..................................................................................... 2 Locations Where Odor is Inadequate ....................................................... 2
Odorant Level Analysis ................................................................ 3 Periodic Odorizer Station Inspections ....................................................... 3
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 3 YZ Odorometer (DTEX) ........................................................................... 3
General ........................................................................................ 3 Operating Instructions .................................................................. 3
Threshold Detection Level (TDL) ................................................. 4 Readily Detectable Level (RDL)................................................... 4
Exhaust Background Evaluation .................................................. 5 Calibration of Instrument .............................................................. 5
4.19 CREW ACTIVITY REPORTING WASHINGTON
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Daily Reporting ............................................................................ 1 Submission of Reports ................................................................. 1
WUTC Contact ............................................................................. 2 4.2 CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION 4.22 CUSTOMER OWNED SERVICE LINES Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 22 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Required Information ................................................................... 1 One-Time Notification .................................................................. 2 Ongoing Notification ..................................................................... 2 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 2
4.3 OPERATOR QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
4.31 OPERATOR QUALIFICATION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Covered Task List – Appendix A Evaluation Guidelines – Appendix B Operator Qualification Acceptance Form – Appendix C Operator Qualification Investigation Guideline Flowchart – Appendix D
4.4 INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS
4.41 TRANSMISSION INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (TIMP) Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 23 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Integrity Management Principles ............................................................... 2 4.42 DISTRIBUTION INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Distribution Integrity Management Elements ............................................ 2 4.51 GAS CONTROL ROOM MANAGEMENT PLAN Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Control Room Major Elements .................................................................. 1 Control Room Notifications .......................................................... 2
4.61 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROGRAM
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Objectives of the QA/QC Program ............................................................ 1 Program Applicability ................................................................................ 2
5.0 MAINTENANCE 5.10 GAS MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES AND MATRIX Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Definitions ................................................................................................. 1
Maintenance Matrix Tables ....................................................................... 2 Regulator Stations ....................................................................... 2
Single Service Farm Tap ............................................................. 2 Heaters ......................................................................................... 3
Valves .......................................................................................... 3 Line Patrols .................................................................................. 4
Cathodic ....................................................................................... 4 Leak Survey ................................................................................. 5
Odorization ................................................................................... 6 Vaults ........................................................................................... 6
Meters .......................................................................................... 6 Certifications ................................................................................ 6
Damage Prevention ..................................................................... 6 Emergency Plan ........................................................................... 6 O & M Manual .............................................................................. 6 Instruments .................................................................................. 6 Customer Notification ................................................................... 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 24 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

5.11 LEAK SURVEY Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Leak Survey .............................................................................................. 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
PPM Relation Table ..................................................................... 1 Leak Detection Instruments ......................................................... 2 Maintenance of Instruments......................................................... 3 Gas Leak Survey Methods ........................................................................ 4 Surface Gas Detection Survey..................................................... 4 Survey Limitations ........................................................................ 5
Bubble Leak Test ......................................................................... 5 Pressure Drop Test ...................................................................... 5 Detection of Other Combustible Gases ....................................... 6 WA Foreign Source Leaks (WAC-480-93-185) .............. 6
Can’t Gain Entry/Can’t Find ......................................................... 6 Leak Survey Plans .................................................................................... 6
Annual Surveys ............................................................................ 6 Identifying High Occupancy Structures, High Occupancy Areas, and Business Districts ........................................................... 7 250+ PSIG Pipelines (WAC 480-93-188) .................................... 7
Transmission and Other HP Pipelines ......................................... 7 5 Year Survey .............................................................................. 8
Special Surveys ........................................................................... 8 WA Non-Cathodic Protected Steel Piping Surveys
(WAC 480-93-188(3)(d)) ............................................................ 9 WA Lowering or Moving Metallic Gas Pipelines
(WAC 480-93-175) ................................................................ 9 DIMP Identified Surveys .............................................................. 9
Classifying Leaks ...................................................................................... 9 Grade 1 Leak ............................................................................. 10
Grade 2A Leak ........................................................................... 11 Grade 2 Leak ............................................................................. 11
Grade 3 Leak ............................................................................. 12 Aboveground Outside Leak Classification ................................. 12
Aboveground Inside Leak Classification .................................... 13 Underground Leak Investigation ............................................................. 13 Underground Leak Determination ........................................................... 14 Pinpointing/Centering .............................................................................. 14 Venting Underground Leakage ............................................................... 15 Gas Present in Sewer or Duct System ................................................... 15 Gas Control Room Notification ............................................................... 16 Remaining-on-the-Job ............................................................................ 16 Underground Leak Repair ....................................................................... 16 Leak Repair and Residual Gas Checks ..................................... 16 Pressure Testing Replaced Segments ...................................... 17 Reinstating a Damaged Service Line ........................................ 17 Service Line Leak Survey .......................................................... 17 Follow-up Inspections for Residual Gas .................................... 17 Re-Classification of Leaks ......................................................... 18

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 25 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Self-Audits .................................................................................. 18 Self-Audit Records ..................................................................... 18 Maintenance Frequencies ....................................................................... 19 Maintenance Frequency Schedule ....................................... 19-20 Recordkeeping ........................................................................... 20 Leak Survey Forms ................................................................................. 20
Closing Leak Reports ................................................................. 21 Blowing Gas and Odor Calls ...................................................... 21 Leak Incident Reporting ............................................................. 22 Leak Failure Cause Definitions ............................................................... 22 WA Failure Analysis Report Requirements (WAC 480-93-200(6)) ......................................................... 23
Hazardous Mechanical Fitting Failures ................................................... 24 5.12 REGULATOR AND RELIEF INSPECTION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Other References ...................................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Pressures Precaution ................................................................... 1 Service Regulators .................................................................................... 2
General Maintenance of all Service Pressures ............................ 2 Maintenance of Elevated Service Pressure Accounts ................. 3
180 Day Inspection Criteria .......................................................... 3 Maintenance of Industrial Meter Sets…………………………….. 4
Regulator Stations and Elevated Pressure Meter Sets ............................ 4 Farm Taps .................................................................................... 4
District Regulator Stations ........................................................... 4 District Regulator Station Relief Capacity Review ....................... 5
Gate Station Regulator and Relief Set Point Review .................. 5 Regulator Station Numbering....................................................... 5
General Station Inspection ........................................................... 5 Farm Taps and HP Services ........................................................ 6
Annual Regulator Station Maintenance .................................................... 6 Maintenance Procedure ............................................................... 6
Maintenance of Overpressure Protection Devices ...................... 8 Relief and Safety .......................................................................... 8
Monitor Testing ............................................................................ 8 Strainer/Filter Inspection .............................................................. 8 Station Valves .............................................................................. 8 Maintenance of Blow Down Facilities .......................................... 9 Changes in Station Design .......................................................... 9 Maintenance of Regulator Stations Operating on Permanent Bypass .................................................................................. 9 Portable Regulator Station Maintenance…………………………..9 Portable CNG Trailer Maintenance…………………………………9 Regulator Stations - Special Inspections ..................................... 9 5 Year Overhaul – Flexible Element and Boot Type Regulators ............ 10 Maintenance Procedures ........................................................... 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 26 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
10 Year Overhaul – Diaphragm Type Regulators, Relief Valves and Pilots…………. ................................................................................. 10 Maintenance Procedures ........................................................... 10 Gate Stations .......................................................................................... 10 Chart Recorders and Telemetry................................................. 11 Maintenance Frequencies ....................................................................... 12
Maintenance Frequency Table .................................................. 12 Recordkeeping ........................................................................................ 12 Drawing – Regulator Identification Sequence ............................ 13 Procedure for Regulator Station and Meter Set Bypassing .................... 14 Procedure for Testing Relief Valves with Nitrogen or Bottled CNG ........ 15
5.13 VALVE MAINTENANCE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Valve Types .............................................................................................. 1
Steel Plug Valves ......................................................................... 1 Steel Gate Valves ........................................................................ 2 Steel Ball Valves .......................................................................... 2 Gear Valves ................................................................................. 2
Polyethylene Valves ..................................................................... 2 Valve Turns .................................................................................. 3
Valve Turns Table ........................................................... 3 Maintenance Requirements for Valve Types ............................................ 4
Steel Plug Valves ......................................................................... 4 Steel Gate Valves ........................................................................ 4
Steel Ball Valves .......................................................................... 4 Steel Gear Valves ........................................................................ 4
Polyethylene Valves ..................................................................... 5 General Valve Maintenance and Installation Notes .................................. 5
General ........................................................................................ 5 Maintaining Valve Boxes .............................................................. 6
Valve Disable/Abandonment........................................................ 6 Maintenance................................................................................. 6
Valve Maintenance Frequency Schedule ....................... 6 WA Curb Valve Requirements (WAC 480-93-100 (2)) ................ 7
Secondary Valves Maintenance .................................................. 7 Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 7 Plug Valve Lubrication Procedures ........................................................... 7 Manual Injection ........................................................................... 8 Sealant Gun ................................................................................. 8
5.14 CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Cathodic Protection Monitoring ................................................................. 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Cathodic Protection Criteria ......................................................... 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 27 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Monitoring Cathodic Protection Areas ......................................... 2 Monitoring Isolated Mains Less than 100 Ft or Service Lines. .... 2 Monitoring Rectifiers ................................................................................. 2 General ........................................................................................ 2 Bi-monthly Rectifier Monitoring ................................................... 2 Detecting Stray Current ............................................................... 3
Monitoring Critical Bonds and Diodes .......................................... 4 Monitoring Steel in Steel Casings ................................................ 4 Cathodic Protection Maintenance ............................................................. 4 Facilities Under Restoration of Cathodic Protection .................... 4 WA Cathodic Deficiency Correction Requirements (WAC-480-93-110(2)) ............................................... 5
Shorted Casings .......................................................................... 5 Electrical Shorts ........................................................................... 5 Isolated Steel ............................................................................... 6 WA Isolated Sections Leak Survey(WAC-480-93-188(3)(d))6
Isolated Steel Risers .................................................................... 6 Isolated Steel Services ................................................................ 6
Examining Buried Steel Pipe and Coating ................................... 6 Repair and Wrapping of Pipe ....................................................... 6 Internal Corrosion Control ......................................................................... 6 Examining Internal Pipe ............................................................... 6
CP Equipment Accuracy Check ................................................... 7 Maintenance and Remediation Timeframes and Frequencies Table ....... 8
Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 9 Structure-to-Electrolyte Potential (Pipe-to-Soil Potential) ......................... 9
General ........................................................................................ 9 Potential Test Equipment ............................................................. 9
Potential Requirements ................................................................ 9 Maintenance of Equipment ........................................................ 10
Calibration of Equipment ............................................................ 10 Equipment Setup ....................................................................... 10
Aboveground Potential Reads ................................................... 10 Exposed Pipe Reads ................................................................. 11
Recordkeeping ........................................................................... 11 Requesting Assistance .............................................................. 11
Monitoring Electrical Isolation of Steel Encased Pipeline .......... 11 Procedure for Testing a Casing without Test Leads ............................... 12
Examples of Non-Shorted and Shorted Casings ....................... 12 Alternative Procedure for Testing a Casing without Test Leads ............. 13 5.15 PIPELINE PATROLLING AND PIPELINE MARKERS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Methods of Patrolling ................................................................... 2 Clearance ..................................................................................... 3 Maintenance Frequencies ......................................................................... 4 Distribution Line Maintenance Frequency Table ......................... 4 Transmission Line Maintenance Frequency Table ...................... 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 28 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 4 TIMP – Transmission Patrolling ..................................................... 5 Pipeline Markers ....................................................................................... 5 Pipeline Markers for Buried Pipe ................................................. 5 Exceptions for Marking ................................................................ 6 Washington State Additional Pipeline Marker Requirements
(WAC 480-93-124) ................................................................ 6 Vegetation Guidelines .................................................................. 6 Markers for Aboveground Pipelines ............................................. 6 Washington State Pipeline Marker Surveys (WAC 480-93-124) ................................................................ 7
5.16 ABANDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF FACILITIES Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Abandoning Gas Facilities ........................................................................ 1
Casings ........................................................................................ 3 Disabling a Curb Valve Tee ......................................................... 3 Valve Abandonment ..................................................................... 3 Valve Box Abandonment ............................................................. 3
Regulator Station Abandonment .................................................. 3 Vault Abandonment ..................................................................... 4
Commercially Navigable Waterways ........................................... 4 Inactivating Gas Meter Facilities .................................................. 4
Idle Meters and Idle Services....................................................... 4 Maintenance Requirements ...................................................................... 4
5.17 REINSTATING ABANDONED GAS PIPELINES AND FACILITIES
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Reinstating Gas Mains and Services ........................................... 1 Reinstating Gas Facilities ............................................................ 2
5.18 VAULT MAINTENANCE
Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1
Vault Inspection ........................................................................... 1 Maintenance Frequency ........................................................................... 2 Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 2
5.19 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR TESTING AND CALIBRATION Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 29 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Calibration Procedures ............................................................................. 1 Maintenance Frequencies ......................................................................... 2 Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 2 5.20 ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL Scope ........................................................................................................ 1
Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 Atmospheric Corrosion Control ................................................................. 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Causes of Atmospheric Corrosion ............................................... 1 Inspection Requirements ............................................................. 2
Can’t Gain Entry / Can’t Find ....................................................... 2 Remediation ................................................................................. 2 Insufficient Wrap on Steel Risers ................................................. 3 Order Types and Remediation Time Guidelines Table ............... 4
Recordkeeping ............................................................................. 5 Blowing Gas and Odor Calls ........................................................ 5
5.21 MAINTENANCE OF PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1
Other References ...................................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Types of Pressure Gauges .......................................................... 2
Types of Pressure Recorders ...................................................... 3 Calibration/Verification Standard Device ..................................... 4
Test Benches ............................................................................... 4 Required Gauges by Job Type .................................................... 4
List of Acceptable Gauges ........................................................... 5 The Gauge ID and Verification Sticker ........................................ 5
Responsibilities by Job Type ....................................................... 6 Test Bench Locations .................................................................. 7
Test Bench Gauge Verification .................................................... 7 Field Gauge Verification at Test Benches ................................... 8
Field Operating Guidelines for Pressure Gauges ..................................... 8 Field Operating Guidelines for Pressure Recorders ................................. 9
Maintenance Frequencies ....................................................................... 10 Maintenance Frequency Table .................................................. 10
Recordkeeping ........................................................................................ 10
5.22 HEATER MAINTENANCE Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1 General ........................................................................................ 1 Line Heaters .............................................................................................. 1 Operation ..................................................................................... 1 Maintenance................................................................................. 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 30 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Maintenance Interval Table .......................................................... 2 Fluid Sampling Procedures ....................................................................... 2 Pilot Line Heaters ...................................................................................... 3 Theory of Operation ..................................................................... 3 Operation/Maintenance ................................................................ 3 Maintenance Interval Table .......................................................... 3
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 3 5.23 ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT Scope ........................................................................................................ 1 Regulatory Requirements ......................................................................... 1 Corresponding Standards ......................................................................... 1
General ........................................................................................ 1 Injection Odorizers (YZ Style) ................................................................... 1 Operation/Maintenance ................................................................ 1 Maintenance................................................................................. 2
Maintenance Interval Table .......................................................... 2 By-pass Odorizers..................................................................................... 3
Theory of Operation ..................................................................... 3 Operation/Maintenance ................................................................ 3 Maintenance Interval Table .......................................................... 3 Wick Odorizers .......................................................................................... 3
Theory of Operation ..................................................................... 3 Operation/Maintenance ................................................................ 4
Maintenance Interval Table .......................................................... 4 Odorant Transport ..................................................................................... 4
Odorant Spills ............................................................................................ 4 Safety and Health Department Notification ............................................... 5
Recordkeeping .......................................................................................... 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 31 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0
CHARTS AND TABLES
Spec. Page(s) Chart/Table No. Description
1.4 3-5 Standards Accountability Table
2.12 7 ASTM A105 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (ASME B16.5) Table
2.12 8 Flange and Fastener Combinations Minimum Requirements
2.12 14-15 Steel Pipe Data Table
2.13 3 Polyethylene Pipe Dimensions Table
2.14
2.14
2.22
2.22
5
7
6
10
Transmission Line Valve Spacing Table
Valve Codes (GIS) Chart
Acceptable Breakaway Fitting Applications Table
Meter Attachment to Flanges Torque Table
2.22
2.22
16
18-19
Atmospheric Pressure at Various Elevations Table
Meter Correction Codes Chart
2.22 20 Frequency of Meter Test Table
2.22 20 Prover Calibration Interval Table
2.24 1 Capacity of Regulator Table
2.24 1 Relief Capacities, Downstream Protection Table
2.24 2 Obsolete Regulators Table
2.24 2 Meter Capacity Tables - Diaphragm Meters
2.24 3 Meter Capacity Tables - Rotary Meters
2.24 3 Rotary Meter Pressure Rating
2.24 4 Meter Capacity Tables - Turbine Meters
2.24 5-6 Regulator Capacity Table - 30 psig Inlet
2.24 7-8 Regulator Capacity Table - 15 psig Inlet
2.24 8-9 Regulator Capacity Table - 5 psig Inlet
2.24 10 Regulator Capacity Table – 2 psig Inlet
2.24 11 Farm Tap Regulator Table - 500 psig
2.24 12 Relief Valve Capacities at Set Point Table
2.24 12 Other Applications Table
2.25 4 Telemetry Quantities Measured (Inputs/Outputs) Table
2.32 3 Soil Resistivity Table
2.32 4 The Galvanic Series Chart

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 32 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Spec. Page(s) Chart/Table No. Description
3.12 6 Liquid Epoxy Curing Time Table
3.12 11 Testing Voltages for Conventional Coatings – Table 1
3.12 12 Testing Voltages for Thin Film and New Coatings – Table 2
3.12 13 Minimum Steel Bend Radius Table
3.12 14 Minimum Roping Distance on Both Sides of Moved Pipe Table
3.12 17 Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flowchart
3.13 4 Minimum Permanent Bending Radius Table - PE Pipe
3.13 6 Minimum Temporary Bending Radius Table - PE Pipe
3.13
3.16
8
3
Safe Pulling Forces Table, PE Pipe
EFV Symbology Table
3.16 5-7 EFV Capacity Tables (with Stock Numbers)
3.16 13 Service Pipe Sizes and Capacities Chart
3.16 15 Pipe Capacities Table - PE, @ 2.0 psig ΔP = 0.5 psig
3.16 15 Pipe Capacities Table – Steel @ 2.0 psig ΔP = 0.5 psig
3.16 16 Pipe Capacities Table - PE, @ 5.0 psig ∆P = 3.5 psig
3.16 16 Pipe Capacities Table -Steel, @ 5.0 psig ∆P = 3.5 psig
3.16 17 Pipe Capacities Table - PE, @ 7.0 W.C. ∆P = 0.5” W.C
3.16 17 Pipe Capacities Table -Steel, @ 7.0 W.C. ∆P = 0.5” W.C.
3.17 6 Nitrogen Purge Data Table – 4” thru 20“ Pipe Volume @ 100 ft/min
3.18 2 Maximum Test Pressure Permitted (Steel) as a % of SYMS Table
3.18 5 Pressure Testing – High Pressure Steel Pipelines Table
3.18 6 Pressure Testing – Inter. Pressure Steel Pipelines Table
3.18 8 Pressure Testing Requirements – PE Pipelines Table
3.23 3 Butt Fusion Heater Surface Temperature Table
3.23 4 Approximate Melt Bead Size Table
3.23 5 Butt Fusion Cooling Times Table
3.23 6 Hydraulic Fusion Pressures Table
3.23
3.24
8
2
Butt Fusion Bead Troubleshooting Guide Table
Electrofusion Calibration Manufacturer Maintenance Table
3.24 9-13 Electrofusion Electrical Requirements and Cooling Times Table
3.32 6-7 Steel Repair Selection Chart – MAOP ≤100 psig
3.32 7-8 Steel Repair Selection Chart – MAOP >100 psig but <20% SMYS and <500 psig

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 33 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Spec. Page(s) Chart/Table No. Description
3.32 9 Steel Repair Selection Chart – MAOP ≥500 psig or ≥20% SMYS
3.32A 2 Stud Bolt and Nut Torque Chart
3.33 3 Plastic Repair Selection Chart
3.34 6 PE Pipe Squeeze and Release Rates
3.35 2 Adam/Mueller Series Bolt to Torque Table
3.42 2 Casing Specification Table – Steel Carrier Pipe
3.42 2 Casing Specification Table – PE Carrier Pipe
3.43 4 Storm Water Erosion Control Guidance Table
3.43 8-9 Construction Activities, Typical Governing Agencies and Associated Permits Table
4.13 8 APWA Uniform Color Code Marking Table
4.13 11 Blasting – Peak Particle Velocity Chart
4.31 11 Program Accountabilities Table
4.31A 1 Task Index Table
4.31A 20 Covered Tasks Associated With Integrity Management
5.10
5.11
5.11
5.12
2-6
1
18-19
12
Gas Maintenance Matrix Tables
PPM Relation Table
Leak Survey Program Maintenance Frequency Schedule Tables
Gas Regulator Maintenance Frequency Schedule Table
5.13 3 Valve Turns for Each Valve Type Table
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.19
6
7-8
4
2
Valve Maintenance Frequencies Table
Maintenance and Remediation Timeframes and Frequencies Table
Pipeline Patrol Maintenance Frequency Tables
Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI) Maintenance Frequency Table
5.20 4 AC Corrective Order Types and Remediation Time Guidelines
5.21 10 Pressure Instrument Maintenance Frequency Table
5.22 2 Line Heater Maintenance Frequency Table
5.22 3 Pilot Line Heater Maintenance Frequency Table
5.23 2 Injection Odorizer Maintenance Frequency Table
5.23 3 By-Pass Odorizer Maintenance Frequency Table
5.23 4 Wick Odorizer Maintenance Frequency Table

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 34 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

DRAWINGS AND DETAILS

Spec Page(s) Drawing Sheet Rev Description of Contents
2.22 22 A-36275 1 of 1 10 3-Foot and 10-Foot Rule Diagram (Residential Meter Set Location)
2.24 A A-36712 1 of 2 11 Meter Set Barricade Detail for Diaphragm Type Meters
2.24 A A-36712 2 of 2 1 Typical Meter Set Barricades
2.24 A A-38500 1 of 1 1 Standard Meter Set Stand for Flex Line Support
2.24 A A-34175 1 of 2 3 Single Pipe Ground Pipe Support - District Regular Stations, Meter Sets
2.24 A A-34175 2 of 2 1 Double Pipe Ground Pipe Support - District Regular Stations, Meter Sets
2.24 A A-35208 1 of 1 7 Meter Set - Residential, Standard Delivery
2.24 A A-37102 1 of 1 6 Meter Set - Residential, 2 psig Delivery
2.24 A A-37103 1 of 1 2 Meter Set - Residential, Riser Detail
2.24 A B-35207 1 of 2 0 Meter Set - H.P. Residential - MAOP 175 psig or Less
2.24 A B-35207 2 of 2 6 Meter Set - H.P. Small Commercial MAOP 175 psig or Less
2.24 A C-35209 1 of 2 8 Meter Set - Typical Small Diaphragm
2.24 A C-35209 2 of 2 5 Meter Set - Typical Large Diaphragm
2.24 A B-33325 1 of 4 8 Meter Set – 2000, 3000 and 3500 Rotary; 7" W.C., 2 psig, 5 psig
2.24 A B-33325 2 of 4 10 Meter Set - 5000 and 7000 Rotary; 7” W.C., 2 psig
2.24 A B-33325 4 of 4 10 Meter Set - 11000 Rotary; 7” W.C., 2 psig, 5 psig
2.24 A B-38205 1 of 1 2 2000, 3000 and 3500 Rotary Meter, Intermediate Delivery Pressure.
2.24 A B-35785 1 of 1 8 Meter Set – Threaded 5000 and 7000; 7" W.C., 2 psig, 5 psig
2.24 A E-37197 1 of 1 5 Code 3 – 2” Standard Meter Set
2.24 A E-37842 1 of 1 4 Welded Farm Tap Regulator Piping 2” outlet
2.24 A E-37970 1 of 1 4 Welded Farm Tap Regulator Station Piping 3/4” outlet
2.24 A E-33952 1 of 1 6 District Regulator Station – 2” Inlet; 4” Outlet
2.24 A E-35783 1 of 1 6 District Regulator Station – 4” Inlet; 6” Outlet
2.24 A E-35158 1 of 1 6 District Regulator Station – Dual Run 2” Inlet; 4” Outlet
2.24 A L-36082 1 of 1 2 Regulator Station Fencing Details

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 35 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

Spec Page(s) Drawing Sheet Rev Description of Contents
2.25 10 E-37114 1 of 1 2 Gas Telemetry Standards
3.12 17 A-35447 1 of 1 0 Color Coding of CP Test Leads Across Insulated Fittings
3.12 18 B-36271 1 of 1 0 Test Stations, Isolation Fittings & Tracer Wire
3.13 11 A-35776 1 of 1 1 Taping Tracer Wire to Pipe Detail
3.13 12 A-36277 1 of 1 1 Tracer Wire Connectors
3.15 6 A-38315 1 of 2 1 Construction Specification for Customer Supplied Ditch
for Meter Relocation
3.15 7 A-38315 2 of 2 1 Construction Specification for PE Natural Gas Service Customer Provided Trench Detail
3.16 18 A-34735 1 of 1 5 Inserting ¾” Steel Pipe With ½” CTS PE Pipe
3.16 19 B-36269 1 of 1 2 Service Installation – Heavy Snow Areas
3.16 20 A-37169 1 of 1 2 Unit Assembly – 1/2” PE Service & EFV Off Steel IP
Main
3.42 6 B-34947 1 of 1 1 Big & Little Fink Casing Test Box Installation Details
3.42 7 E-33947 1 of 2 0 Steel Casing Detail - RR Crossing
3.42 8 E-33947 2 of 2 0 Steel Casing Detail - Crossing State or Interstate
Highways

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 36 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

DIAGRAMS, ILLUSTRATIONS AND FLOWCHARTS
Spec Page(s) Description of Contents
2.13 2 Print Line on Pipe Example
2.22 7 Earthquake Valve Installation Illustration
2.32 4 The Galvanic Series Chart
3.12 16 Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flowchart
3.16 4 Diagram of Protected Length of Service Examples
3.17 7 Illustration for Purging a Pipeline into Service
3.17 8 Illustration for Purging a Pipeline Out of Service
3.18 9 Examples of recordkeeping for single and multiple facilities.
3.18 10 Pressure Test Information sticker
3.22 4 Welder Certification Card
3.22 7 Illustration – Use of a Back Bevel
3.22 11 Diagrams of Slip Flanges - Fillet welded.
3.22 11 Diagram for Socket Weld
3.43 10 Exhibit A – Common BMPs and How to Implement 1. .Silt Fence Sediment Control BMP
3.43 11 Exhibit A – Common BMPs and How to Implement. 2. Fiber Roll / Straw Wattle Sediment Control BMP
3.43 12 Exhibit A – Common BMPs and How to Implement. 3, Rock Check Dam Run off Control
4.13
4.13
7
8
Tolerance Zone Diagrams – WA/ID
Tolerance Zone Diagrams - OR
4.13 11 Blasting – Peak Particle Velocity Chart
4.16 2 Example of Clustering for Class Location Boundaries
4.31D 1 Operator Qualification Investigation Guideline Flow Chart
5.14 12 Diagram Examples of Non-shorted and Shorted Casings

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 37 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

GIS MAPPING SYMBOLOGY

TABLE OF CONTENTS REV. NO. 23
DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 38 OF 38
FOR GAS COMPANIES SPEC 1.0

GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 1 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
1.1 GLOSSARY ABANDONED PIPELINE: A pipeline permanently removed from service that has been physically separated from its source of gas or hazardous liquid and is no longer maintained under regulation 49 CFR Part 192, as applicable. Abandoned pipelines are usually purged of the gas and refilled with nitrogen, water, or a non-flammable slurry
mixture. ABNORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS: A condition identified by the operator that may indicate a malfunction of a component deviation from normal operations that either indicates a condition exceeding design limits or results in a hazard to persons, property or the environment.
ACCESS, SAFE: Condition of being reached safely and quickly for operation, inspection, adjustment, or repair without requiring climbing over or removing obstacles. Safe access may also be provided by use of an approved ladder. AIR/FUEL RATIO: The proper combination of air and gas required for complete
combustion. For natural gas, the ratio is 10 to 1 (10 parts air to 1 part gas). For propane, the corresponding ratio is 25 to 1. See also Explosive Limit. AIR SHUTTER: An adjustable gate or door used to control the amount of primary air to an atmospheric style burner.
ALARM: An audible or visible means of indicating to the controller that equipment or processes are outside operator-defined, safety-related parameters. ALCOVE: A recessed area within a building’s exterior wall that is sealed from the building interior.
ALDEHYDES: Chemical compounds formed along with carbon monoxide during the incomplete combustion of natural gas. Aldehydes cause watering of the eyes and a burning feeling in the throat. ALLOWABLE PRESSURE DROP (PRESSURE DROP): The maximum allowable loss in working pressure in a piping system, typically measured from the outlet of the gas
meter to the furthest appliance. AMPERE (AMP): The unit of measurement of electric current proportional to the quantity of electrons flowing through a conductor past a given point in one second. ANODE (Cathodic Protection): The expendable material, which is buried and through which direct current flows into the soil. Common materials used for this purpose are graphite or carbon rods, silicon, iron, magnesium, zinc, and scrap iron. ANODE (Corrosion): The electrode of a corrosion cell which has the greater tendency to corrode or oxidize. ANODE EFFICIENCY: The ratio of the actual corrosion of an anode to the theoretical corrosion calculated from the quantity of electricity, which has passed.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 2 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
ANODELESS RISER: A plastic pipe sheathed inside a protective steel metallic casing. The steel-cased plastic pipe protrudes from the soil and is part of the service line carrying gas to the customer meter. An anode is not required in this instance because the plastic pipe contains the gas pressure and is not susceptible to the typical corrosive processes.
ANODIC FIELD: The area in which the soil potential is raised because of current flow away from a ground electrode (anode). The extent of this influence is a function of soil resistivity and the magnitude of current flow. APPLIANCE: A device which uses fuel or other forms of energy to produce light, heat,
power, refrigeration, or air conditioning. This definition shall also include vented decorative appliances. This definition is also used interchangeably with the term "equipment" in this policy. APPLIANCE REGULATOR: A control device installed on an appliance fuel line to reduce house line gas pressure to the required appliance manifold pressure.
APPROVED: Materials, equipment, appliances, methods of inspection, or construction that are approved as a result of tests, standards, or investigations by the authority having jurisdiction or by national authorities or testing bodies. The Company may also provide direction in this respect as indicated in the Operating and Maintenance plan. The approval which is most restrictive shall prevail in cases where there is a difference
between Company policy and other accepted or required standards. APPURTENANCE: Any attachment to or component of a pipeline that may be subjected to system pressures including (but not limited to), pipe, valves, fittings, flanges, and closures.
AREA ODOR: An odor or smell located in a general area that is thought to be natural gas, but that may also be the result of other chemicals or actions in a given area. ASSESSMENT: The use of testing techniques as allowed in this 49 CFR 192, Subpart O, to ascertain the condition of a covered pipeline segment.
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION: As referred to in this policy, this refers to actual loss of metal on any above ground pipeline or facility by means of rusting or other oxidation. Such corrosion is normally evident in the form of actual pitting, flaking, or exfoliation of the metal. Exposure to certain reactive chemicals in the atmosphere may also result in deterioration of metal surfaces. AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION: The organization, office, or individual responsible for approving equipment, installation, or a procedure. The authority having jurisdiction may be the city, county or other local building official, the supplying utility, or other deputized agency or person per statute. AUTOMATIC IGNITION: An ignition system that requires no manual attention to ignite the main burner. Safety monitoring controls verify safe operating conditions at all times.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 3 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
BACKFILL: Earth or other material which is used to refill a ditch or trench. Also, the act of refilling a ditch or trench. BACKFILL (CP): The material, which is placed around anodes to ensure uniform corrosion and, in certain instances, to extend the useful life of the anode. Coal coke or petroleum coke is used in conjunction with carbon or Duriron anodes; while a mixture of
gypsum, bentonite, and salt is used with zinc, magnesium, and scrap iron anodes. BAR HOLE: A hole in the ground made with a probe. Bar holes are normally made over buried gas pipelines to determine the presence of escaping natural gas. BAR HOLE SURVEY: An area search for leaks, made by driving or boring bar holes at
regular intervals along the route of an underground gas pipe and testing the air from the bar hole for their gas content. BEDDING: See PADDING BELL HOLE: An enlarged hole other than a continuous trench, dug over and along the
side of buried pipelines or in a trench to allow room for persons to perform maintenance-related work on the pipeline (i.e., coating repairs, welding, connections, or pipe replacement). In the broad sense, any larger hole, other than a ditch, opened for pipeline work. Smaller holes may be called key holes or potholes. BLIND FLANGE: A disk for closing the end of a pipe, having holes for bolting it to a
flange. Such devices can be used to fulfill regulations concerning the inactivation of customer meters or facilities. BLOCK VALVE: A valve in a main line that is designed to close in or shut down gas flow.
BLOWDOWN: The depressurizing of a natural gas pipeline to facilitate maintenance on the pipeline, accomplished by opening a valve and allowing the gas to escape to atmosphere, usually through a vertical pipe or "stack". BOND: A connection, usually metallic, that provides electrical continuity between structures that can conduct electricity.
BTU: British Thermal Unit. One BTU is the amount of heat required to raise one pound of water one Fahrenheit degree. BUILDING: A structure or dwelling designed for occupancy or storage with sides enclosed which could trap gas. BUSINESS DISTRICT: An area where the public regularly congregates or where the majority of buildings on either side of the street are regularly utilized for financial, commercial, industrial, religious, educational, health, or recreational purposes. Mains in the right of way adjoining a business district must also be included in the leak survey. BUTT FUSION: Joining process for two pieces of polyethylene pipe and/or fittings in which heat fusion is used and materials are joined by "butting" or pushing heated ends together.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 4 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
BYPASS: A valve or assembly installed on a pipe, in a meter set or in a regulator station which allows the gas to flow in a path that is not part of the normal operating conditions, usually associated with a meter or regulator for maintenance purposes. BYPASS CUSTOMER: A customer receiving gas directly from a transmission pipeline
company or other gas company other than Avista. Pressure reducing regulators are normally found at such stations. CALIBRATION: The act of formally determining the accuracy of an instrument or device and making required adjustments if it is found to be out of tolerance. Such action is normally carried out by a certified test facility but in some instances, may be
performed by the Gas Meter Shop. (Also, refer to the definition of “verification” herein this glossary.) CALL-OUT LIST: A list of qualified employees that are available on a round-the-clock basis to respond to emergency and service requests. This list is normally retained in the gas control room and is updated and reviewed by the Operations Manager.
CAN (BARREL): To encapsulate a portion of carrier facility (pipe, fitting, valve, etc.) for the purpose of repairing or rendering that portion of the facility leak-free. Cans must be rated to at least at the same MAOP as the encapsulated facility. CAN'T-GAIN-ENTRY NOTICE: A Company approved form that advises the customer
that an employee has visited the premises for a certain purpose, and that the order could not be completed as scheduled for one or more reasons. CARBON MONOXIDE: A toxic and combustible gas produced during the incomplete combustion of hydrocarbons (such as natural gas). Carbon monoxide is colorless and odorless. Inhalation of carbon monoxide may cause sickness and death. The chemical
formula is CO. CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) DETECTOR: An alarm / device to detect carbon monoxide before most people experience symptoms. CARRIER PIPE: The pipe or piping that goes through a casing.
CASING: A metallic pipe (normally steel) installed to contain a pipe or piping. CASING INSULATOR: A dielectric device specifically designed to electrically isolate a carrier pipe from a casing and provide support for the carrier pipe.
CATHODE: The electrode of a corrosion cell where a net reduction reaction occurs. In corrosion processes the cathode is usually that area which does not corrode. CATHODIC FIELD: The area in which the soil potential is lowered because of current flow to a ground electrode (pipeline). The extent of this influence is a function of soil resistivity and current density in the soil.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 5 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
CATHODIC PROTECTION (CP): Reduction or prevention of corrosion of a metal surface by making it cathodic; for example, using sacrificial anodes or impressed current rectifier protection systems. CHIMNEY EFFECT: The tendency of air or gas in a duct, vertical passage, or building to rise when heated because its density becomes less than the surrounding, colder air
or gas. CITY GATE: See Gate Station. CLASS LOCATION: A geographic area representing population levels, as classified and described in §192.5.
CLOCK TEST: Refer to “Meter Clock Test.” CLOCKING INPUT: The measurement of the volume of gas that an appliance consumes during a given period. The test dial on the gas meter is used to time how long it takes for one complete revolution. This time is then used in the clocking formula
to determine gas consumption. The formula is: 3600/time in seconds x the dial size = the quantity of gas. The figure must then be converted into BTU per hour by multiplying by 1,000. (Note: an exact figure can be obtained by using the existing BTU value per cubic foot of gas as supplied.) COATING: A liquid, liquefiable or mastic composition that, after application to a
surface, is converted into a solid protective, decorative or functional adherent film. COATING RESISTANCE: The electrical resistance of a coating to the flow of current. Unit of measurement is ohms per square foot. Values range from 1000 ohms to more than 1,000,000 ohms per square foot for conventional organic coatings.
CODE 5: Avista code word for a gas leak or gas odor. CODE 9: Avista code word for a blowing gas situation. COMBINATION CONTROL: An operating control that contains more than one switch to monitor different functions. A fan/limit control is an example of a combination
control. COMBINATION VALVE: A gas valve that contains a regulator, a main shut-off, and an operator all in one manufactured unit. COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR (CGI): An instrument designed to obtain a sample of the air in a bar hole or in an atmosphere and indicate a percentage of gas in air or ppm reading. Combustible gas indicators are used to determine the presence or absence of natural gas, to center or pinpoint underground leakage, and to quantify the amount of gas detected. COMBUSTION AIR: The air supply required for complete combustion of natural gas. COMBUSTION PRODUCTS: By-products resulting from the combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air- but excluding excess air.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 6 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
COMBUSTION TURBINE: An electric generator that uses a jet engine as the prime mover. Often fueled by natural gas or other petroleum products and typically used as a peaking plant. COMMAND CENTER: A centralized location that exists for the purpose of coordinating
the activities of emergency response personnel. This term may also apply to a temporary headquarters or communications center set up by the Company to coordinate activities of personnel during an emergency. COMPLETE (RECORDS): Complete records are those in which the record is finalized, as evidenced by a signature or date.
COMPRESSED NATURAL GAS (CNG): Natural gas stored inside containers at a pressure greater than atmospheric air pressure, typically up to 3600 psig. CNG is normally placed in pressure-containing vessels (bottles) where it can be used as a portable fuel source (i.e., in CNG vehicles and other applications not attached to a pipeline). CONCENTRATION CELL: A corrosion cell due to the potential difference between the anode and cathode caused by differences in composition of electrolyte. CONDUCTOR: A substance or body that allows an electric current to pass continuously along it.
CONDUIT: Plastic pipe installed to enable road construction, etc., prior to installation of plastic gas mains or services where the plastic line is inserted at a later date. Also
used to describe steel services that have been inserted with a new gas service pipe.
CONFINED SPACE: Any space that is large enough for an employee to fully enter and perform assigned work, is not designated for continuous occupancy by an employee
and has limited or restricted means of entry or exit. Confined spaces may include, but are not limited to, tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, pits, manholes, tunnels, equipment housings, bridge enclosures, etc. Refer to the Avista Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook), Part 2, Section 16 – Confined/Enclosed Spaces, for additional guidance. CONFIRMED DISCOVERY: When it can be reasonably determined, based on information available to Avista at the time that a reportable event has occurred, even if only based on a preliminary evaluation. CONSTRUCTION OFFICE: As referred to in this policy, the main operating headquarters for a region, where the persons responsible for supervision of daily construction and service activities are located. This may also be referred to as "areas", "regions", “districts”, or other terms. CONTROL: Any device, mechanical or electrical, which monitors or activates a piece of equipment. CONTROL ROOM: An operations center staffed by personnel charged with the responsibility for remotely monitoring and controlling a pipeline facility.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 7 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
CONTROLLER: A qualified individual who remotely monitors and controls the safety-related operations of a pipeline facility via a SCADA system from a control room, and who has operational authority and accountability for the remote operations functions of the pipeline facility as applicable.
COPPER-COPPER SULFATE ELECTRODE: A standard or reference electrode used for determining potentials of metals in soils or other electrolytes. CORRECTING DEVICE: An instrument installed on a meter to correct for varying pressures or temperatures of the gas stream. The corrector can be electronic or mechanical.
CORRECTION CODE: A billing code that identifies certain assumptions related to metering pressure and temperature. CORROSION: The deterioration of a substance, usually a metal, resulting from a reaction with its environment.
CORROSION CELL: A term used to describe the environment in which an anode, cathode, electrolyte, and an electrical connection exist in which there is active current flow. COUPLING: A sleeve-type fitting used to connect two pipes.
COVERED TASK: A covered task is an activity, identified by the operator, that (1) Is performed on a pipeline facility, (2) Is an operations or maintenance task (state of Washington includes new construction); (3) Is performed as a requirement of Part 192; and (4) affects the operation or integrity of the pipeline. (Refer to Specification 4.31, Appendix A for the list of covered tasks.)
CROSS BORE: A utility cross bore is an intersection of an existing underground utility or underground structure by a second utility installed by trenchless technology that results in direct contact between the two and thereby compromises the integrity of either utility or underground structure.
CURB VALVE: A manually operated valve located near the service line that is safely accessible to Avista personnel or other personnel authorized by Avista to manually shut off gas flow to the service line, needed. (Definition taken from §192.385) CURRENT: The movement of charged particles in a material. Measured in amps. CURRENT DENSITY: As related to Cathodic Protection, the current per unit area of electrodes, usually expressed in terms of milliamperes per square foot. CURTAILMENT: Reductions of deliveries of natural gas by interstate pipelines to distribution or end-use customers. This situation occurs when demand for natural gas exceeds supply, causing pipelines; or local distribution systems; to curtail their deliveries. CUSTOMER: The person paying the gas bill or requesting gas service.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 8 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
CUSTOMER PROJECT COORDINATOR (CPC): A person responsible for construction development, design, layout, pricing, scheduling, etc. This may also be referred to as "construction design rep (CDR)” or “marketing design technician (MDT)” or other titles.
CUSTOMER SERVICES DEPARTMENT: The department of the Company that is responsible for handling customer calls, answering, and resolving billing issues, originating orders for new and subsequent service, handling high bill complaints, answering emergency calls, etc. This may also be referred to as the “call center" or the "business office."
DEKATHERM: Unit of measurement for natural gas; a dekatherm is equal to approximately one thousand cubic feet (volume) or 1,000,000 BTUs (energy). DAMAGE: The substantial weakening of structural or lateral support of an underground facility, penetration, impairment, or destruction of any underground protective coating, housing or other protective device, or the severance (partial or
complete) of any underground facility to the extent that the project owner or the affected facility owner or facility operator determines that repairs are required. DEFLECTION: The distance a pipe may be displaced under load. DEGREE DAY (HEATING DEGREE DAY – HDD): A measure of the coldness of the
weather experienced, based on the extent to which the daily mean temperature falls below a reference temperature, usually 65 degrees F. DELAYED IGNITION: The improper lighting of a main burner causing an explosion during ignition. The sound of delayed ignition can range from a mild rumble to a thunderous bang depending on the severity of the problem. The customer's concerns
and perceptions should be used in determining the existence of a delayed ignition condition. DELIVERY PRESSURE: The pressure delivered to the customer piping. Also, it is referred to as the "service pressure" or the "utilization pressure.”
DESIGN FACTOR: The percentage of SMYS to which operating stress must be limited as described in §192.111. DESIGN PRESSURE: The minimum pressure that new facilities within a system should be designed. This pressure determines the minimum required test pressure to establish MAOP as well as the required component characteristics for design. DIELECTRIC: A fitting or component that is partially made of a non-conducting material such as plastic. These fittings are designed to prevent electrolysis from damaging metal surfaces and to interrupt CP current. DIRECT AND OBSERVE: The process by which a qualified individual oversees the work activities of a nonqualified individual(s) and is able to take immediate corrective action when necessary.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 9 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
DISTRIBUTION: A pipeline system within which hoop stress within pipe is less than 20 percent of specified minimum yield strength (SMYS). DISTRIBUTION CENTER: The initial point where gas enters piping used primarily to deliver gas to customers who purchase it for consumption (for example, residential users, institutional users, power plants and factories) as opposed to customers who
purchase it for resale. Typically, each demarcation line between Williams or TransCanada and Avista is designated as a Distribution Center. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: A pipeline system with a MAOP at less than 20 percent of specified minimum yield strength.
DISTRICT REGULATOR STATION: A pressure regulating station that controls pressure to high- or low-pressure distribution main. It does not include pressure regulation whose sole function is to control pressure to a manifold serving multiple customers. Assembly utilizes either a regulator and relief or regulator and monitor to reduce pressure. Master meter stations and bypass customer stations are treated like district regulator stations and are maintained accordingly. DOUBLE SUBMERGED-ARC-WELDED PIPE (DSAW): Steel pipe which has a longitudinal butt joint wherein coalescence is produced by at least two passes including at least one inside and one outside the pipe with an electric arc. DOWNSTREAM PIPING: The customer owned piping which typically begins at the outlet of the meter or the regulator, whichever is furthest downstream. Also, it is referred to as “house line” or “house piping.” DRY GAS: Gas above its dew point and without condensed liquids. For most operator established tariff purposes, any gas containing water vapor less than 7 pounds per million cubic feet (mmcf) is considered dry gas. DUNNAGE: Wood material, usually 2x4's or 4x4's, placed between lifts of pipe to keep pipe from being damaged. Dunnage can also be used to help support pipe during pipe end alignment. May also be called cribbing or skids. ELECTRIC RESISTANCE WELDED PIPE (ERW): Pipe which has a longitudinal butt joint wherein coalescence is produced by the application of pressure and by heat obtained from the resistance at the weld to electric current. ELECTRODE: Either the corroding or non-corroding portion of a corrosion cell; Refer to anode or cathode, whichever is appropriate. Also, it is used loosely to describe half-cells such as the copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. ELECTROLYSIS: The production of a chemical change in an electrolyte resulting from the passage of electricity and often traditionally used to describe any and all forms of corrosion. ELECTROLYTE: An ionized chemical substance or mixture that will conduct electric current, such as water, soil, or many chemical solutions.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 10 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
ELECTRO-NEGATIVE: A term used to designate the metal most likely to corrode in a bimetallic corrosion cell. Magnesium and zinc, for instance, are electro-negative with respect to copper or steel. In the same relationship, copper and steel are electro-positive. ELECTRONIC IGNITION: An ignition system which uses a high open-ended voltage to
produce a high temperature spark to ignite the pilot or main burner. ELEVATED DELIVERY PRESSURE: Any delivery pressure in excess of 7-inches WC (water column) or 1/4 psig. EMERGENCY: For the purposes of this handbook, any situation, occurrence, or
incident that requires immediate action to protect life and / or property. EMERGENCY OPERATING PLAN (EOP): A plan required by Federal regulations that details procedures to be followed to ensure the safety of the public and/or employees in the event of a natural gas related emergency.
EMERGENCY SERVICES: Any public or private agency which has the primary responsibility to respond to emergencies. This includes police departments, state patrols, fire departments, hazmat teams, ambulance services, paramedics, etc. These agencies are normally accessed by dialing “911”. EMERGENCY VALVE: A valve that may be necessary for the safe operation of a
transmission or distribution system. Such valves must be checked and serviced at intervals not exceeding 15 months, but at least once each calendar year. (Note: An EOP valve is a type of emergency valve but the names are not synonymous. See “EOP Valve” definition for further information. EMPLOYEE: Also referred to in this policy as "gas employee", "service person", and
other titles. Denotes any person in the employ of Avista Utilities who may be responsible for carrying out the duties as described in this handbook, or as detailed in the O & M plan. May also refer to contract employees depending on the context of the policy and current Union/Company agreements. ENCODER, RECEIVER, TRANSMITTER (ERT): An auxiliary device installed on
meters to allow for remote reading. EOP VALVE: Distribution or transmission valves that are located in key positions to enable quick isolation and shut-down of a pipeline during an emergency. An EOP valve is a type of Emergency Valve. EROSION: Deterioration by the abrasive action of fluids, usually accelerated by the presence of solid particles of matter in suspension. When deterioration is further increased by corrosion, the term erosion-corrosion is often used. EVACUATION: The process of removing or assisting in the removal of persons from an area or structure in order to avoid danger. EVALUATION: A process established and documented to determine an individual’s ability to perform a covered task by various methods.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 11 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
EVALUATOR: An individual selected or credentialed to conduct performance or oral interview evaluations to determine if an individual is qualified. EXCESS FLOW VALVE (EFV): A device that is designed to automatically shut off the flow of gas should the service line be severed.
EXPLOSIVE LIMITS: Lower and upper percentages expressing a range of fuel-to-air mixtures that will burn when exposed to a high enough temperature to cause ignition. The explosive limits of natural gas are approximately 5 percent to 15 percent gas in air but may range slightly lower or higher depending on the methane content of the gas. Ratios outside these should not combust or explode. The explosive limits for propane
are approximately 2 percent to 10 percent. FABRICATED UNIT: An assembly of two or more fittings and/or pieces of pipe joined together. FACILITY, GAS: A Company gas pipeline, meter set, fitting, station, or other related
appurtenance used in the distribution of natural gas to Avista’s customers. FARM TAP (SINGLE SERVICE FARM TAP-SSFT): A pressure regulating station that controls pressure to a service line. Assembly usually utilizes a regulator and relief to reduce transmission or distribution pressure to 60 psig or less.
FIRM CUSTOMERS: Natural gas customer for whom contract demand (supply or capacity) is reserved and to whom the seller (pipeline or producer) is obligated to furnish service at all times, except in cases of force majeure. FITTING: A component used in a gas facility for changing direction, branching or for
change of pipe diameter. FITTING, PIPE (NON-RATED): A fitting that has physical characteristics (diameter, wall thickness, grade, etc.) similar to gas pipe and whose MAOP is determined based on those characteristics. These fittings require a pressure test to establish MAOP.
FITTING, RATED: A fitting that is designed to a specific standard (ANSI, ASTM, etc.) and has a designated pressure rating from the manufacturer. FLAME IONIZATION UNIT: Also referred to as an “F.I. Unit” and “Flame Pak”. An extremely sensitive gas leak detection instrument that senses the presence of methane gas by measuring the ions produced in a hydrogen flame when gas is burned. F.I. Units can normally detect methane down to 1 ppm. FLOW PRESSURE: The pressure within a piping system that exists when there is a certain amount of flow through a meter set that is representative of a “normal” load. FLOW RATE: A volume of gas measured over a given time. The flow rate is generally measured in cubic feet per hour (CFH) and is sometimes used synonymously with "load" although technically these are not the same.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 12 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
FLUE GASES: Normal products of combustion: carbon dioxide and water vapor, which are vented into the outdoor atmosphere through a flue pipe. FORCE MAJEURE: A superior obligation, "act of god," or any other unexpected and disruptive event, which may serve to relieve a party from a contract or obligation.
FORCED AIR: An air delivery system that moves heated air mechanically with fans and blowers through ductwork. FURNACE: A self-contained appliance, used in central heating systems, for heating air by transfer of heat of combustion through metal to the air.
GALVANIC SERIES: A list of metals and alloys arranged according to their relative electrolytic potentials to one another in a given environment. The metals or alloys higher on the list (more negative) are anodic to those lower on the list and the metals or alloys lower on the list (more positive) are cathodic to those higher on the list. GAS OPERATING ORDER: A Company approved form or electronic process that
serves as documentation of work performed in relation to installation of facilities, of work on customer premises, of meter changes or repairs, of response to leak and odor requests, etc. This form may take on different formats to accommodate the particular type of order being worked, or to fit the particular system being used to generate the order.
GAS SERVICE PERSON: A Company employee who has completed a minimum 2-year apprenticeship (or the equivalent) for the position of Gas Serviceman, and who has achieved “Journeyman” status through evidence of completion of all required or statutory courses and licensing. GAS SHUT-OFF NOTICE: A Company approved form or electronic process that
advises a customer that the gas service has been closed to facilitate repairs or due to other conditions. GATE STATION: The point at which the distribution company (Avista) taps off a pipeline company (i.e. NWP or GTN). Custody transfer of gas occurs at this point. Even if only one customer is downstream of this station, it is still considered a Gate
Station. Generally, regulating, odorizing, and metering equipment are found in a gate station. Other possible names for a gate station include meter station, town border station, and odorizer station. (If gas is not metered at the site, then the station is not considered a Gate Station, such as the regulator stations off the Williams NW 6-inch pipeline that runs between Mead and Starr Road Gate Stations.) GROUND BED: Refer to anode (cathodic protection). HAZARDOUS CONDITION: Any condition that is causing or that may cause a hazard to persons or property. Such conditions require notification of the customer and issuance of the appropriate hazard notice. HEAT EXCHANGER: A device used for transferring heat from one fluid to another without allowing them to mix, typically found in a forced air furnace.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 13 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
HEAT FUSION JOINT: A joint made in thermoplastic piping (polyethylene piping) by heating the parts sufficiently to permit fusion of the materials when the materials are pressed together. HIGH OCCUPANCY STRUCTURE OR AREA: A structure which is normally occupied by 20 or more persons on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period.
(The days and weeks need not be consecutive.) Structures and areas include churches, hospitals, schools, and may include assembly buildings, outdoor theaters, outdoor recreation areas, etc. HIGH PRESSURE: Pressure that is greater than 60 PSIG.
HOLIDAY: A break or imperfection in a pipe coating. HOLIDAY DETECTOR (JEEPING MACHINE): An electronic device for locating discontinuities or breaks in the protective coating on a pipe, tubing, or fitting. HOOP STRESS: The stress in a pipe wall that acts circumferentially in a plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe and is produced by the pressure in the pipe. IDLE METER: A meter installed on a service and the account is closed. IGNITION TEMPERATURE: The temperature at which a substance, such as natural
gas, will ignite and continue burning with adequate air supply. IMMEDIATE RESPONSE: Any form of prompt action taken to save lives, prevent injury, or mitigate property damage under imminently serious conditions when time does not permit approval from a higher authority.
IMPRESSED CURRENT: Cathodic protection current provided by rectifier type protective systems. INCHES OF WATER COLUMN: A standard unit of measurement typically used to describe the amount of gas pressure in units of less than 1 PSIG. The conversion for inches of water column is: 27.7" = 1 PSIG.
INCIDENT: An occurrence or event that happens in relation to Company gas facilities that warrants immediate or quick action, and that may require appropriate notifications of certain Company supervisory, or state or federal officials. Incidents may also be related to an emergency situation. INCONCLUSIVE: Not having a final conclusion. As applied to leak and odor investigations, any situation involving response to a leak or odor in which the cause or reason for the leak or odor is not evident at the conclusion of the investigation. An inconclusive leak or odor request requires additional action. INDUSTRIAL METER SET: A meter set that meets any of the following criteria: It meters at a pressure greater than 5 PSIG; is a turbine meter; or has a Meter Correction Code of 3 or P.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 14 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
INERT GAS: A gas that is non-explosive and non-flammable. Operators use inert gases for testing and purging pipelines. The most common inert gas is nitrogen. High concentrations of inert gases may cause asphyxiation. INFLECTION: A change in course or direction of a pipeline typically made by a bend or fitting.
INHIBITOR: A substance which retards corrosion when added to an environment in small concentrations. INPUT RATING: The fuel burning capacity of the appliance in BTU/hr as specified by the manufacturer. Also referred to as “input” or “BTU input”.
INSULATOR: Pipe fittings such as unions, couplings, and flanges which permit electrical separation of one section of pipe from another. Refer to “Dielectric”. INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE: Pressure that is 1 PSIG up to and including 60 PSIG.
INTERMITTENT IGNITION (IID): An ignition system that is activated only on a call for heat to reduce standby losses. The pilot burner is ignited by either an electric spark or a hot surface igniter. There may also be direct ignition of the burner from the ignition devices. INTERNAL RELIEF VALVE (IRV): A relief valve that is built into many service
regulators to relieve excess gas pressure above a certain set point. The internal relief valve will open and allow gas to escape to the atmosphere in cases where the set point is exceeded due to an operational malfunction. INTERRUPTIBLE GAS: Service to a customer which under contract may be interrupted during periods of peak demand to the total system.
JEEP: An instrument used to detect imperfections (holidays) or damage to protective coating on steel pipe. It is also known as a holiday detector. JOULE-THOMSON EFFECT: The cooling which occurs when a compressed gas is allowed to expand in such a way that no external work is done. The effect is
approximately 7º F per 100 psi for natural gas. LADDER POLICY: A company policy determining the circumstances in which a ladder may be used by company and contract personnel. LANDFILL GAS: Gas which is composed of methane and carbon dioxide and produced by aerobic and anaerobic decomposition of organic solid waste in a landfill. LATERAL: A pipe in a gas distribution or transmission system which branches away from the main. LEAK: An uncontrolled or unauthorized discharge or escape of natural gas from the system.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 15 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
LEAK CENTERING OR PINPOINTING: The procedure used to determine (normally within a radius of several feet) from where an underground leak is originating. The procedure involves making a series of bar holes in an area where gas may be migrating, measuring the gas-in-air mixture at each hole, and then determining the general location of the leak by analyzing the readings.
LEAK DETECTOR: A device for determining the concentration of gas in air. LEAK TEST: A pressure test to determine the tightness of the system. LIFT OF PIPE: One level stack of pipe.
LIMIT DEVICE: A temperature activated control designed to shut off the supply of gas in the event of an over temperature situation. LIQUEIFIED NATURAL GAS: Natural gas or synthetic gas having methane (CH4) as its major constituent which has been changed to a liquid by lowering the temperature.
LOAD: A means of expressing the quantity of gas require to service all appliances on a piping system over a period of one hour, as expressed in BTU/hour or in therms. LOCAL DISTRIBUTION COMPANY (LDC): A local gas company responsible for distributing gas to its customers. An LDC purchases gas from transmission companies for resale to the consumer. LDC's operate and maintain the underground piping,
regulators, and meters that connect to each residential and commercial customer. LOCKUP PRESSURE: The gas pressure contained within a piping system when there is no consumption. LOW PRESSURE: Operating at less than 1 psig. It is usually measured in inches of
water column. LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL): The lower explosive limit of natural gas which varies slightly depending on the amount of methane present. For Avista, the LEL of natural gas is generally defined as 5 percent gas in air. Refer to “Explosive Limits” for more information.
MAIN: A pipeline serving as a common source of supply for more than one service line. MANHOLE: Any inspection or access port for the maintenance or operation of equipment or components. MANIFOLD: A common piping system used as an intersection for distribution of gas to more than one customer. A single service line and regulator typically feeds the inlet of the manifold. Several outlet, valves, and meters are installed on the manifold to serve individual customers. MANOMETER (U-GAUGE): A "U" shaped tube, filled with water or another liquid with a specific gravity equal to water. It is used to measure pressure in units of inches of water column.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 16 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
MANUAL SERVICE LINE SHUT-OFF VALVE – See Curb Valve. MASTER METER STATION: A meter set serving a pipeline system for distributing gas within, but not limited to, a definable area, such as a mobile home park, housing project, or apartment complex, where the operator purchases metered gas from an
outside source (Avista) for resale through a gas distribution pipeline system. The gas distribution pipeline system supplies the ultimate consumer who either purchases the gas directly through a meter or by other means, such as by rents. Master meter stations are considered district regulator stations and are maintained accordingly. MAXIMO: The IBM asset management system that tracks procurement, inventory,
location, and work management for planned and unplanned work activities related to assets (including meters). In Gas Compliance, it is the system of record for scheduling, tracking and documenting gas maintenance activity. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE (MAOP): The maximum pressure at which a gas pipeline or pipeline segment may be operated in accordance with the
applicable regulatory codes. The MAOP of such a gas facility is determined by the “weakest link” within that facility. MECHANICAL FITTING: Fittings that connect steel or PE components in a manner other than heat fusion or welding.
METER CLOCK TEST: Procedure where a test dial on a gas meter is observed for movement over time. The procedure is used to identify volume of flow through the meter. METER DATA MANAGEMENT: The system that ensures the reliability and optimized use of available data from a smart meter system (AMI). MDM loads, validates, stores,
and formats meter/usage data from smart meter sources and enables interface to other utility systems such as customer information, outage management, work force management, and geographical information. METER ROOM: A room designed to house natural gas meter(s) that is within the confines of the building to be served.
METER SWIVEL: The fitting that connects to the inlet and the outlet of a small gas meter. METER SET ASSEMBLY (MSA): The equipment including meters, regulators, relief valves, etc. required to measure and deliver gas to a customer. METER SPOT CHECK: A procedure where the test hand on a gas meter is observed for no movement. METER, GAS: An instrument for measuring, indicating or recording the volume, mass or energy of natural gas at its pressure and temperature at the time of measurement. METERING PRESSURE: The pressure at which the meter is measuring gas.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 17 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
MIL: A unit of length equal to 1/1000 inch used especially in measuring thickness (as in plastic films). MITER JOINT: Used instead of an elbow to change direction of pipe. A miter is made by cutting ends of pipes to be joined at angles.
MONITOR: Second regulator used in series configuration with the working regulator to maintain downstream pressure within the necessary limits of accuracy should the controlling regulator fail. Monitor acts as secondary backup regulator and does not release gas to atmosphere. The monitor may be located upstream or downstream of the working regulator.
NATIONAL TRANSPORTATION SAFETY BOARD (NTSB): An independent agency reporting administratively to the Secretary of the Department of Transportation, charged with the investigation of all safety-related incidents involving transportation. These include air, rail, highway, and certain liquid and gas pipeline transportation. The NTSB has no power to issue regulations; however, it issues reports and recommendations.
NEGATIVE PRESSURE: A condition that is created when more air is exhausted out of a building than is being replaced. This creates a partial vacuum in the building, so that air is forced down chimneys or vents causing the products of combustion to spill into the living space.
NEUTRAL PRESSURE POINT: The location in a converted appliance's combustion chamber between the positive pressure zone above the flame and the negative pressure zone below the flame. This point is usually set at about the firing door latch; however, the point may vary with heat exchanger design.
NEW CONSTRUCTION RISER: An anodeless riser that is field fabricated and comprised of a galvanized steel sleeve, PE pipe, and service head adapter. A new construction riser can be built in custom lengths to accommodate instances where the standard manufactured anodeless riser is insufficient. NON-OBSERVABLE TASK: A task that can only be performed by a qualified
individual. NON-QUALIFIED: An individual not qualified to perform a covered task. ODORANT: A substance giving a readily distinctive perceptible odor at low concentrations in natural gas. It is used as a method of detection of the presence of natural gas, as natural gas itself has no odor. ODORIZATION: The process of adding an odor to natural gas. Since natural gas is odorless, odorant is added to the gas so that people can smell escaping or leaking gas and report to the gas companies for further investigation. ODORIZER: A piece of equipment that adds chemical odorant to flowing natural gas pipelines.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 18 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
ODOROMETER: A device used to detect the amount of natural gas as a percentage of gas in air at the point the odorized gas can be detected by a person with a normal sense of smell. OHM: The unit of measurement of electrical resistance.
ONE-CALL SYSTEM: A utility coordinating and notification system that allows for requests for locations of underground facilities to be forwarded in a timely manner to the appropriate utility for field locating and marking. OPERATING STRESS: The stress in a pipe or structural member under normal operating conditions.
OPERATION OF A PIPELINE: The starting, stopping, changing, or monitoring of pressure, flow, and temperature of product through a pipeline. OPERATIONS MANAGER: Supervisory person in charge of a particular operating area. The operations manager may also be referred to as a "regional manager",
“district manager”, “construction manager”, “supervisor", or "area coordinator". ORIFICE: The opening in an orifice cap, orifice spud, whereby the flow of gas is limited and through which the gas is discharged. OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION (OPP): Any device that ensures that the maximum
allowable operating pressure of a piping system is not exceeded. These devices may include, but are not limited to relief valves, safety shutoff valves, and monitor regulators. OXIDATION: The loss of electrons by a constituent of a chemical reaction occurs at anode.
P/S (PIPE TO SOIL): A measurement of the difference in potential between a pipeline and a copper-copper sulfate half-cell electrode in contact with an electrolyte. PADDING: The placing of material free of any hard objects (rocks, etc.) below, around and above the pipe during backfill in order to protect the pipe surface from puncture or
excessive abrasion. (Sometimes referred to as “bedding”.) PATCHING: Method of repairing damaged pipe where piece of metal usually less than 1/2 the circumference of the damaged pipe is welded over the damaged section of pipe. PERIMETER: When conducting a leak investigation, an area that reasonably surrounds the initial underground leak location. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE): Personal equipment that protects the individual who wears it by placing a barrier between that individual and a potential or known hazard. Examples of PPE include protective eyewear, face shields, masks, gloves, boots, hats, clothing, and respirators.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 19 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
PIG: A device used to clean debris or scale from internal pipe walls and to purge water from pipe after hydro testing. Pigs are usually forced through pipe by air compressors, but sometimes are pulled with cables. The word is also used to refer to a sophisticated internal inspection device (smart pig) used to assess the integrity of pipelines. See Smart Pig.
PILOT: A small flame which is utilized to ignite gas at a main burner. PINPOINTING: The process of locating the exact source of a gas leak along a pipeline route with a minimum of excavation. This is accomplished using a gas measuring analyzer and a non-sparking metal plunger bar to punch holes in the ground along the pipeline's right-of-way (see "centering").
PIPELINE: All parts of those physical facilities through which gas moves. This includes but is not limited to pipe, valves, and other appurtenances. PIPELINE COMPANIES: Companies that deliver gas to Avista gate stations.
PITTING: Localized corrosion of a metal surface that is confined to a small area and takes the form of cavities called pits. PLUG: An external thread pipe fitting that is inserted into the open end of an internal thread pipe fitting to seal the end of the pipe. Also, the act of sealing a hole in a vessel, such as a pipe or tank, by inserting material in the hole and then securing it, and the
material used to seal the hole. POLARIZATION: The change of electrode potential resulting from the effects of current flow, measured with respect to steady state potentials. POLYETHYLENE: The material used to manufacture plastic pipe and some plastic
fittings. When the term “plastic” is used, it is typically synonymous with “polyethylene” or “PE”. PRESSURE DROP: Refer to “Allowable Pressure Drop.” PRESSURE TEST: A test performed by pressurizing a gas line for a predetermined
length of time. A successful pressure test will show no unaccounted-for loss in pressure as indicated on a recording chart, pressure gauge, or water manometer, thus indicating that the system is gas tight. Also referred to as an “air pressure test.” PROPANE: A gaseous member of the paraffin series of hydrocarbons, that, when liquefied under pressure, is one of the components of liquefied petroleum gas (LPG). Propane contains approximately 2,500 British thermal units (Btu) per Cubic foot. Although it is gaseous at ordinary atmospheric conditions, it is readily compressed into a liquid. It is highly volatile, odorless, and colorless. PSI (pounds per square inch): The unit of pressure or measure of force on a given area. Within the oil and gas industry, psi normally refers to the pressure of the gas or product contained within the pipeline or pressure vessel. (Typically shown in lower case letters.)
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 20 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
PSIA (pounds per square inch, absolute): The pressure expressed in pounds exerted on one square inch of surface area. The absolute refers to the total pressure sensed including the surrounding atmospheric pressure. (Typically shown in lower case letters.) PSIG (pounds per square inch, gauge): The pressure expressed in pounds exerted on
one square inch of surface area. The designation "gauge" indicates the readings are already adjusted or biased to ignore the surrounding atmospheric pressure which is 14.7 psi at sea level. If a PSIG type of gauge were not connected to any pressure source, it would read zero even though it is actually sensing 14.7 psi at sea level. (Typically shown in lower case letters.)
PUBLIC UTILITY COMMISSION: State agencies that inspect pipeline safety and regulate the tariffs (pricing) of investor-owned utility companies. PUMPKIN: A reinforcing sleeve welded over a coupling or other fitting. PURGE: To free a gas facility of air or gas, or of a mixture of gas and air. Purging is
required when bringing new or existing facilities into service from a depressurized state or after a facility has been blown down/depressurized to perform work on or abandon an existing facility. QUALIFIED: An individual that has been evaluated and can perform assigned covered tasks and is able to recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
RADIANT HEAT: Heat energy that is emitted from an object to the surrounding atmosphere. RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION: Method used to determine flaws in pipe or other metals by use of a machine that emits x-rays or gamma rays which penetrate the metal
and are transcribed onto film. RANGE: A cooking appliance which usually includes several top burners above, and an oven and broiler below. Also referred to as a “stove” or “cook stove”. READ: The volume of gas measured in cubic feet (CF) by the gas meter. A cubic foot
of gas measured at standard pressure and temperature contains approximately 1000 BTUs of energy. READING: A repeatable (sustained) representation on a device such as a combustible gas indicator, a pressure gauge, etc. RECTIFIER: A device used to convert alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) and used in the gas industry for external corrosion control of pipe and other metals. REDUCTION: Gain of electrons by a constituent of a chemical reaction, occurs at cathode. REFERENCE ELECTRODE: An electrode whose open-circuit potential is constant under similar conditions of measurement, which is used for measuring the relative potentials of other electrodes. (Often referred to as a “half-cell”.)
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 21 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
REGULATION: The process of reducing and controlling pressure. REGULATOR: Device used to maintain a constant downstream pressure. Also known as a Pressure Regulator.
REGULATOR VENT: The opening in the atmospheric side of the regulator housing permitting the free movement of the regulator diaphragm.
REGULATOR, SERVICE: A device on a service line that controls the pressure of gas delivered from a higher pressure to the pressure provided to the customer. A service regulator may serve one customer or multiple customers through a meter header or manifold. RELIEF: Device used to maintain downstream pressure within necessary limits by
relieving gas to atmosphere should the working regulator fail. REMOTE CONTROL VALVE (RCV): A valve that is operated from a location remote from where the valve is installed. The RCV is usually operated by a controller via the SCADA system. The linkage between the pipeline control center and the RCV may be by fiber optics, microwave, telephone lines, or satellite. REMOTE METER: A meter that is installed more than three feet from a building or foundation wall.
RENEWABLE NATURAL GAS: Pipeline-quality biomethane produced from biomass. It is interchangeable with natural gas. It is carbon neutral, extremely versatile and fully
compatible with the U.S. pipeline infrastructure. REPLACED SERVICE LINE: When the fitting that connects the service line to the main is replaced or the piping connecting the fitting is replaced.
RESISTIVITY: The relative degree to which soil or water resists the flow of electric
current. The most common terms in use are the ohmmeter and the ohm-centimeter. REVERSE CURRENT SWITCH: A bond designed and constructed such that CP current can pass in only one direction.
RISER: A general term for vertical runs of piping regardless of the size or application.
(The most common reference at Avista would be a “meter riser” which is the piping that connects underground service piping to the gas meter.) RUST: Corrosion product consisting primarily of iron oxide. A term properly applied
only to iron and other ferrous metals.
SACRIFICIAL PROTECTION: Reduction or prevention of corrosion of a metal in an environment by coupling it to another metal which is electrochemically more active in that environment.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 22 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
SAFETY DATA SHEET: Document that contains information on the potential health effects of exposure to chemicals, or other potentially dangerous substances, and on safe working procedures when handling chemical products. SAFETY DEVICES: Devices designed to forestall the development of a hazardous or undesirable condition in the piping system, in the equipment, in the medium being
treated, or in the combustion products. SEAMLESS PIPE: Steel pipe which has no longitudinal butt joint. It is manufactured by hot working the tubular product (usually over a mandrel) into the desired shape. SEGMENT (PIPELINE SEGMENT): A section or length of gas facility that typically has
the same physical pipe characteristics (diameter, grade, wall thickness, etc.) and which the MAOP was established under the same pressure test. A segment may include valves and fittings that have different characteristics from the connected line pipe. SELF TAPPING TEE: A service tee with a self-contained cutter which is installed on in-service pipe for drilling a hole in the pipe.
SERVICE (SERVICE LINE): A distribution line that transports gas from a common source of supply to an individual customer to two adjacent or adjoining residential or small commercial customers, or to multiple residential or small commercial customers served through a meter header or manifold. A service line ends at the outlet of the meter or at the connection to a customer’s piping, if there is no meter.
SERVICE HEAD ADAPTER: A PE to steel transition fitting most commonly used on a new construction riser or a steel service that is inserted with PE pipe. The fitting is threaded onto the outlet of the steel riser and allows for the attachment of the meter valve.
SERVICE REGULATOR: See Regulator, Service. SERVICE VALVE or SERVICE-LINE VALVE: A valve located in a service line and located upstream of the service regulator, meter, any meter bypass where there is no service regulator, or connection to customer piping if there is no meter.
SHALL: Indicates that a provision is MANDATORY for completion. The word “must” is a synonym and requires similar treatment in these standards. SHIELDING: High resistance or non-conducting material preventing CP current from reaching the structure, or low resistance material diverting the current away from the structure to be protected. SHORT: An inadvertent, undesirable contact between two buried metals, or the electrical failure of installed insulation which destroys the desired metallic isolation of a piping system. SHORT SECTION OF PIPE: A single piece of pipe containing no girth welds (steel) or fusion joints (PE).
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 23 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
SHORTED PIPELINE CASING: A casing that is not electrically isolated from the carrier pipe. Generally, this term is used for casings that are in direct metallic contact with the carrier pipe. SHOULD: Indicates a provision that although not mandatory, is the preferred method and strongly recommended as a best practice. There must be a substantial reason for
not completing such provisions within Avista’s Gas Standards and oftentimes non completion of these provisions must be documented with a reason. SHUT-OFF VALVE (Pertaining to overpressure protection): Device used in series configurations with regulator to maintain downstream pressure within necessary limits by shutting off gas supply should the regulator fail.
SINGLE SERVICE FARM TAP (SSFT) – See Farm Tap Regulator SLEEVING: Method of repairing damaged pipe where metal is welded around the full circumference of the pipe over the damaged section. Sleeves usually come in two halves.
SMART PIG: Any of a variety of internal pipe inspection devices. These devices, or "pigs", measure and record the internal geometry, external or internal corrosion as well as provide information about pipe characteristics such as wall thickness and other pipe defects. Magnetic flux leakage, ultrasonic, calipers, and geometry are examples of smart tools; also referred to as ILI tools.
SOAP TEST: A test for gas leaks, which involves wiping or brushing the joints to be tested with a soap and water solution, typically performed at no less than the operating pressure of the facility. Any leaks on the piping will be identified by the formation of bubbles.
SOIL POTENTIAL GRADIENT: The voltage drop in the soil caused by direct current flowing away from or to a ground electrode, anode, or cathode. The voltage gradient is measured between two copper-copper sulfate half-cell electrodes a set distance apart on a radius line from the ground electrode. SOUR GAS: Natural gas contaminated with chemical impurities, notably hydrogen
sulfide or other sulfur compounds, that impart a foul odor to the gas. Such impurities must be removed before the gas can be used for commercial and domestic purposes. SOURCE OF IGNITION: Any device or object that is capable of producing a source of heat of sufficient temperature to ignite natural gas. Examples of such devices or objects are radios, matches, heating equipment, motors, static electricity, light switches, etc. SPAN OF CONTROL: The maximum number of non-qualified individuals that a qualified individual can direct and observe under Operator Qualification rules. SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH (SMYS): The minimum yield strength prescribed by the specifications under which pipe or non-rated pipe fittings are manufactured and sold. SPOT CHECK: Refer to “Meter Spot Check”
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 24 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
STANDARD CONFIGURATION: As specified by drawings in the Gas Standards Manual. STANDARD METERING PRESSURE: The pressure at which most residential meters measure gas. Usually 7-inches WC (water column) or 1/4 psig. In some areas, it is 8-
inches WC. STATIC ELECTRICITY: An electric charge, which builds up on an insulated object usually as a result of friction. Static electricity will discharge as soon as it come close to a metallic object or other conductor and will create a bluish spark and snapping sound. In gas leak situations, the spark from static electricity is hot enough to cause
ignition of flammable gas-in-air mixtures. STRAY CURRENT: Electrical current (normally direct current, DC), from either a natural or man-made source, that could result in pipe corrosion if not properly drained or compensated for by other means.
STRENGTH TEST: A quality control check of the structural integrity of a pipeline performed by filling the line with a liquid or gas and applying a specified pressure for a prescribed period of time. May be called a pressure test. If water is used as the testing medium, it may be called a hydrotest. STRESS: The magnitude of the internal and/or external forces that act on a structure.
STRESS CORROSION CRACKING: The formation of cracks in metallic pipe, typically in a colony or cluster, as a result of the interaction of tensile stress, a corrosive environment, and a susceptible material. STRINGING: The act of laying pipe, end-to-end, alongside the pipeline ditch. in
preparation for welding or fusing. SUBMETERING: The practice of re-metering customer's building meter in order to distribute gas to individual building tenants through privately owned or rented meters. SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA): A computer-based
system or systems used by a controller in a control room that collects and displays information about a pipeline facility and may have the ability to send commands back to the pipeline facility. SWEET GAS: Natural gas not contaminated with impurities, such as sulfur compounds. Except for the removal of any liquid constituents that may be present, sweet gas can be used for commercial and domestic use without any processing. SYMPTOMATIC: Exhibiting symptoms. In relation to this policy, refers to any person that is complaining of or that is outwardly exhibiting symptoms of carbon monoxide related or other illnesses requiring immediate Company response. SYSTEM: Natural gas facilities that are interconnected and have the same MAOP.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 25 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
TARIFF: A schedule filled by a utility with a regulatory agency describing transactions between the utility and customers in types of service, rates charged and means of payment. TASK: A defined unit of work having an identifiable beginning and end and specific actions that are observable and measurable.
TELEMETER: see Telemetry. TELEMETRY: As related to Avista’s gas system, telemetry, in general, is the process of remotely monitoring gas pressure, gas temperature, and calculated values for volume, flow, and abnormal conditions. The values are measured and calculated by
instruments at Gate Stations, Regulator Stations, Pressure Monitoring Sites, and Gas Transportation Customers. The instruments also generate alarms/alerts when the values are outside of an acceptable range. They transmit data via cellular modem, dial-up modems, AVA Corporate, or SCADA networks to a server at headquarters which relays the data to the SCADA system, PI data historian system, and Flow Cal system.
TEST MEDIUM: A substance such as water, air, or gas used to exert an internal pressure to leak test or strength test a facility. TEST POINT: An aboveground electrical connection to an underground pipe or structure where pipe-to-soil potentials are taken to monitor CP. (Also known as a “test
station” or a “fink”.) TEST PRESSURE: The internal gauge pressure specified for testing. THERM: A unit of energy equivalent to 100,000 BTUs. A customer is billed according to the amount of therms used.
TRACEABLE (RECORDS): Traceable records are those which can be clearly linked to original information about a pipeline segment or facility. TRANSMISSION LINE: A pipeline that transports gas from a gathering line or storage facility to a gas distribution center, storage facility, or large volume customer that is not
downstream from a gas distribution center; a pipeline that operates with a hoop stress that equals or exceeds 20 percent of specified minimum yield strength; or a pipeline that transports gas within a storage field. TRANSPORTATION CUSTOMER: A gas transportation customer is one who purchases natural gas directly, usually through a broker, and pays Avista a transport fee. TRENCH: A long ditch cut into the ground dug by a backhoe or by a specialized digging machine such as a trencher, for the purpose of installing a pipeline. UNION: A specialized threaded fitting used to couple two joints of threaded pipe together, without having to turn or dismantle either run of pipe.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 26 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
UPPER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (UEL): The upper explosive limit of natural gas which varies slightly depending on the amount of methane present. For Avista, it is generally defined as 15 percent gas in air. Refer to “Explosive Limits” for more information. VALVE: A mechanical device used to control the flow of gas or liquid. A valve can be used solely for fully open or closed applications, to control the direction of flow, or used
to throttle flow or regulate pressure. Typical valve types include plug valves, ball valves, globe valves and gate valves. VALVE BOX: A housing around an underground valve that extends to the surface of the ground. A valve box allows access to the valve and protects the valve from mechanical damage or the effects of weather.
VALVE SEAT: The stationary portion of the valve which, when in contact with the movable portion, stops flow completely. VAULT: An underground pit or enclosed structure which houses valves, pressure regulation equipment, or other gas appurtenances.
VERIFIABLE (RECORDS): Verifiable records are those in which information is confirmed by other complementary, but separate, documentation. VERIFICATION: The act of checking the accuracy of an instrument or device and making required adjustments if it is found to be out of tolerance. This process is
typically done by comparing the device to a recognized standard device that is known to be accurate. VOLT: The electromotive force which, when steadily applied to a conductor with one ohm resistance, will produce a current of one ampere.
VOLTAGE: An electromotive force or a difference in electrode potentials expressed in volts. WEAK LINK: A device or method used when pulling polyethylene pipe, typically through methods such as horizontal directional drilling, to ensure that damage will not occur to the pipeline by exceeding the maximum tensile stress allowed.
WELDING: A method of joining metal together using heat to fuse the pieces. Examples of welding processes are shielded metal arc welding and gas metal arc welding. WET GAS: Natural gas containing liquid, including water or liquefiable hydrocarbons such as natural gasoline, butane, pentane and other light hydrocarbons that can be removed by chilling, pressurization, or other extraction methods. For operator established tariff purposes, any gas containing water vapor in excess of 7 pounds per million cubic feet (mmcf) is considered wet gas. WICK-TYPE ODORIZER: Equipment that odorizes the natural gas by having the natural gas flow across a wick in a pipe bottle saturated with odorant. Wick-type odorizers are generally used for odorizing individual lines such as farm taps.
GLOSSARY REV. NO. 11 DATE 01/01/21
ST ANDARDS 27 OF 27
NATURAL GAS SPEC. 1.1
WRINKLE BEND: Bends made by the obsolete practice of bending prior to the advent of smooth bending technology. These consist of circumferentially oriented ripples at the intrados (interior surface of an arch) of the bend. (Wrinkle bends are not allowed at Avista.) YIELD STRENGTH: The yield strength is the stress level at which a material exceeds
its elastic limits and the material begins to permanently deform.
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
1% at 1 foot rule GESH 4 general
10 ppm Rule CO orders GESH 3 10 ppm rule
10% survey of isolated main and risers 5.14
10-year overhaul of regulator stations 5.12
2 psig meter sets maintenance 5.12
2 psig meter sets design 2.22, 2.24
20% leak survey 5.11
Drawing B-33325, pg 1 2.24 Appendix A
Drawing B-38205 2.24 Appendix A
Drawing B-38205 2.24 Appendix A
250 psig and above pipelines leak surveys 5.11
5 psig meter sets maintenance 5.12
5 psig meter sets design 2.22, 2.24 pressure sets; 2.24 - Appendix A
Drawing B-33325, pg 2 2.24 Appendix A
5-year overhaul of regulator stations 5.12
5-year survey leak survey 5.11
abandoning 5.16
abandoning services 5.16
abandoning steel services 3.16, 5.16
1
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
abandoning valves 5.13, 5.16
AC mitigation 2.12, 2.32
aerosol static suppression spray 3.34
AFM mapping 3.42, 4.13
alcohol screening employment GESH 2
aldyl a tee repair electrofusion 3.24, 3.25
annual leak surveys transmission pipelines 5.11
annual leak surveys high occupancy buildings 2.14, 2.22, 5.11
annual maintenance industrial meters 5.12
annual maintenance master meters 5.12
annual maintenance regulator stations 5.12
annual maintenance odorizers 5.23
2
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
annual reporting requirements 4.14
API 1104 3.22
API 1107 3.22
arc burns steel pipe repair 3.32
ASTM specification A-106 design requirements 2.12
ASTM specification A-53 design requirements 2.12
ASTM specification D2513 design requirements 2.13
ASTM specification D2513 design requirements 2.13
ASTM specification F2897 design requirements 2.13
ASTM specification F2897 design requirements 2.13
3
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
Avista First Responder restoration of service GESH 5 steps for restoration of service
Avista major gas incident report form #N-
2566 reporting an emergency GESH 13 responses and notifications
GESH 16 customer requested meter test
Avista-side leak and odor investigation GESH 2
Avista-side leak and odor investigation GESH 2
Avista-side leak and odor investigation GESH 2
Avista-side leak and odor investigation GESH 2
Avista-side leak and odor investigation GESH 2
backfill clearances 3.15
ball valves maintenance 5.13
bar holing leak survey 5.11, GESH 2
residual gas; 5.11 - re-
bar holing GESH 2 external ppm survey
barricades requirement for 2.22
barricades 5.20 inspection requirements
bedding material 3.13, 3.15
4
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
bell hole definition 1.1 glossary
bell holes damage prevention 4.13 on-site inspections - general
bell prover 2.22 prover calibration interval
bending steel pipe 3.12 pipe bends
bending PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 field bending
bending OQ task 4.31 App A 221.120.085
big fink installation drawing B-34947 3.42 B-34947
big fink 4.31 App A 221.110.035
biomimetic detector GESH 3
blowdown 3.17, 5.12
blowing gas & odor calls GESH 2, 4
general GESH 2
bolt-on tees PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.25
boot type seals 3.42
boring 3.19 pe - min. radius of curvature
boring tracking boring tools 3.19
boring foreign utilities 3.19, 4.13 4.13 - on-site inspections -
boring potholing 3.19, 4.13 4.13 - on-site inspections -
boxes, valve 5.13
5
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
branch services excess flow valves 3.16 branch (split) service
break away pin 3.13, 3.19
breakaway fitting 2.22 breakaway fitting
breakaway fitting 2.22 breakaway fitting
burner adjustments GESH 10
bypassing procedure 5.12, GESH 9
bypassing procedures GESH 9 bypassing procedures
general information GESH 9 general information
bypassing station procedure 5.12
cadweld procedure cathodic protection 3.12, 3.13
calibration cathodic instruments 5.14
6
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
calibration electrodes for CP instruments 5.14 CP equipment accuracy check
calibration voltmeters 5.14
calibration pressure gauges 5.21
calibration pressure recorders 5.21
can't gain entry GESH 2
can't gain entry procedures shutdown and restoration of
service GESH 5
can't gain entry procedures turn off orders GESH 7, 8
can't gain entry procedures meter change or removal GESH 9
capacity tables pipe, customer downstream 3.16
capacity tables pipe, PE 3.16
capacity tables pipe, steel 3.16
carbon monoxide call priority 1 emergency requests GESH 1
7
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
carbon monoxide detectors UL 2034 GESH 3 UL 2034
carbon monoxide detectors GESH 3
carbon monoxide orders GESH 3
carbon monoxide poisoning GESH 1, GESH 3
10 ppm Rule GESH 3 10 ppm rule
200 ppm Rule GESH 3 200 ppm rule
35 ppm Rule GESH 3 35 ppm rule
GESH 3
100 ppm Rule GESH 3 100 ppm Rule
GESH 3
casings 3.42 B-34947
casings 3.42 E-33947
casings insulators 3.42
casings PE pipe within casings 3.42
casings 3.42 E-33947
casings steel carrier pipe within casing 3.42
casings 5.11 special surveys
casings monitoring for CP 5.14
8
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
cathodic instrument calibration 5.14
cathodic protection 2.32 anode and cathode reactions
cathodic protection 2.32
cathodic protection 2.32 anode systems
cathodic protection holiday 3.12
cathodic protection exposed steel reports 4.13
cathodic protection 5.11 special surveys
cathodic protection casings monitoring 5.14
cathodic protection critical bonds 5.14
cathodic protection diode 5.14
9
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
cathodic protection electrode 5.14
cathodic protection isolated main less than 100 ft 5.14
cathodic protection isolated services 5.14
cathodic protection pipe-to-soil procedure 5.14
cathodic protection remediation 5.14
cathodic protection 5.14
cathodic protection corrosion cell 2.32, 5.14
cathodic protection pipe-to-soil 5.14
cathodic protection 4.31 App A 221.110.035
chain of custody GESH 17
changing meters GESH 9
10
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
chart recorders calibration and inspection 5.12 chart recorders and telemetry
chart recorders 5.21 types of pressure recorders
chute bending table 3.13 plowing and planting
claims gas incident field investigation GESH 17
classifying leaks 5.11, GESH 2
classifying leaks grade 1 leaks 5.11, GESH 2
classifying leaks grade 2 leaks GESH 2
classifying leaks grade 2A leaks GESH 2
classifying leaks grade 3 leaks GESH 2
classifying leaks GESH 2 classifying leaks
clean water act requirements 3.43
clearances joint ditch design 3.15
clearances PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.15
clearances sewer mains 3.15
clearances steel pipe 3.15
clearances water mains 3.15
clock test (clocking), meter 2.22, GESH 2, 3, 12, 17
GESH 5 closing meters
CO detectors GESH 3
11
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
CO orders can't gain entry procedures GESH 3 can't gain entry
CO orders GESH 3
CO poisoning GESH 3
coating for steel pipe voltage settings for jeeping 3.12
coating for steel pipe 4.31 App A 221.110.030
code 5 (odor calls)procedures GESH 2
code numbers (dispatching)GESH 1
combustible gas indicator (CGI)maintenance 5.19
combustible gas indicator (CGI)gas incident field investigation GESH 17
combustible gas indicator (CGI)bar hole survey GESH 2
commercially navigable waterways 5.16
communication with public officials GESH 13
12
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
compensation elevation 2.22 elevation compensation
compensation pressure 2.22 pressure compensation
compensation temperature 2.22 temperature compensation
complete (records)definition 1.1 glossary
compressed natural gas definition 1.1 glossary
compressed natural gas (CNG)maintenance 5.12
conduit sealing end or ends 3.16, 3.42
construction defects report for WUTC 4.14
contaminants 3.23 heating tool
contaminants 3.23 heating tool
contractor OQ 4.31
correcting device computing corrected flows 2.22
13
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
corrosion erosion-corrosion 5.14 internal corrosion control
corrosion corrosion cell 2.32, 5.14
corrosion 4.31 App A 221.110.20
corrosion 4.31 App A 221.110.015
corrosion leak failure cause 5.11, GESH 2
coupling joining procedure PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.24
coupon retention procedures steel pipe 3.12
critical bonds 5.14
customer project coordinator role GESH 13
customer project coordinator (CPC)2.22, GESH 6, GESH 13
14
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
damage prevention color codes 4.13
damage prevention dig laws 4.13
damage prevention One Call 4.13
damage prevention recordkeeping 4.13
damage prevention statistics report for WUTC 4.14
damaged meter sets GESH 9, 15
damaged pipe 3.14, 3.32
damaged service lines 3.18, 3.32, 3.33, 5.11
data collection measurement table 2.25
delivery pressure 2.22
depth of cover 3.15, 3.19
detection of other combustible gases 5.11, GESH 2
digital pressure gauge
digital pressure gauge
15
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
direct and observe definition 1.1 glossary
direct-vent appliance, proximity to meters 2.22 3 foot rule
discharge mitigation plan 3.19 HDD discharge mitigation plan
discharge velocity purging 3.17 injection rate
dispatching general GESH 1 general
dispatching out of area odor calls GESH 1 out of area odor calls
dispatching priority of service requests GESH 1 priority of service requests
dispatching service requests GESH 1 priority of service requests
dispatching GESH 1 GESH 1 - throughout
dissimilar metals 2.32 dissimilar metals
distribution definition 1.1 glossary
distribution center definition 1.1 glossary
distribution integrity management program
(DIMP)overview 4.42 general
distribution system 2.23
district regulator station maintenance 5.12
district regulator station relief capacity review 5.12
doors, proximity to gas meters 2.22
double ended couplings joining of pipe 3.25
quick ratchet press tool
definition 1.1 glossary
downstream customer piping insulation 2.22
downstream piping 4.22
downstream piping appliances GESH 10
downstream piping combustion and ventilation GESH 10
downstream piping downstream piping GESH 10
downstream piping propane conversions GESH 10
downstream piping GESH 12
drawings 2.22 A-36275
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
16
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.24 Appendix A
drawings 2.32 A-35447
drawings 2.32 B-36271
drawings 3.16 B-36269
drawings 3.42 E-33947
drawings 3500, 5000, 7000, 11000), B-2.24 Appendix A
drawings 3500, 5000, 7000, 11000), B-2.24 Appendix A
drug and alcohol screening GESH 2
dry line pipe 3.12, 3.13, 3.18
electric meters, proximity to gas meters 2.22
17
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
electric resistance welded pipe (ERW)definition 1.1 glossary
electrode definition 1.1 glossary
electrode (welding)3.22 throughout
electrofusion 3.24 throughout
electrolysis definition 1.1 glossary
electrolyte definition 1.1 glossary
electrolyte resistivity of 2.32 electrolyte resistivity
electro-negative definition 1.1 glossary
electronic ignition definition 1.1 glossary
electronic pressure recorder distribution system 2.25 general
elevated delivery pressure definition 1.1 glossary
elevated delivery pressure 2.24
elevated delivery pressure maint. of elevated pressure sets 5.12
elevated service pressure accounts maintenance 5.12
emergency planning worksheet GESH 5
curtailment rules GESH 13 curtailment rules
GESH 13
official incident notification GESH 13 official incident notification
GESH 13
GESH 13
cold weather action plan GESH 13 cold weather action plan
GESH 13
emergency evaluation GESH 13 emergency evaluation
GESH 13
emergency training GESH 13 emergency training
GESH 13
incident field investigation GESH 13 incident field investigation
local emergency manuals GESH 13 local emergency manuals
material failure GESH 13 material failure
mock emergency drills GESH 13 mock emergency drills
18
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
emergency planning, training, and incident
notification mutual assistance GESH 13 mutual assistance
notice of events GESH 13 notice of events
post incident evaluations GESH 13 post incident evaluations
responding to pressure alarms GESH 13 responding to pressure alarms
review emergency activities GESH 13 review emergency activities
snow action plan GESH 13 snow action plan
general GESH 13 throughout
GESH 4 required truck tools and supplies
safety equipment GESH 4 safety equipment
GESH 4 throughout
4.31 App A 221.020.035
EOP plan response to emergencies GESH 13
EOP plan GESH 13
EOP zone shutdown and restoration GESH 5
equipment, leak failure cause 5.11, GESH 2
ERT installation GESH 6
excavation damages (leak or no leak)photography requirements GESH 2
excavation damages (leak or no leak)GESH 2
excavation, leak failure cause 5.11, GESH 2
exception for safety related condition rprts 4.12
19
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
exceptions for markers 3.15, 5.15
excess flow valves (EFVs)performance standards 2.14
excess flow valves (EFVs)coupling style 3.16
excess flow valves (EFVs)in-line stick style 3.16
excess flow valves (EFVs)installation procedures 3.16
excess flow valves (EFVs)3.16 capacity of EFV
excess flow valves (EFVs)tee style 3.16
excess flow valves (EFVs)purging through 3.17
excess flow valves (EFVs)service tee style 3.16
excess flow valves (EFVs)service tee style 3.16
exhaust background evaluation odorization 4.18
exposed pipe report 3.32, 3.44, 4.13
exposed piping inspections 3.32, 3.44, 4.13
farm tap 2.24 farm tap regulator
farm tap maintenance 5.12
farm tap relief capacity review 5.12
20
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
fencing guidelines Drawing L-36082 2.24 Appendix - A
FI (flame ionization) units calibrations 5.11 maintenance of instruments
field bend diagram 3.13 field bending
field bend diagram 3.13 field bending
field bending PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 field bending
field pinhole repair steel pipe 3.12 field pinhole repair
field verification reports (FVR)4.31 field verification reports (FVR)
field welding 3.32A field welding instructions
fill welding steel pipe 3.32 thoughout
filter inspection 5.12 strainer/filter inspection
filters GESH 10 service to appliances; filters
finks installation drawing B-34947 3.42 B-34947
finks 4.31 App A 221.110.035
fires GESH 1
fires GESH 17 gas incident field checklist
flow and lockup test GESH 2, 6, 7, 9, 17
5 psig); GESH 7 - non-
21
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
follow up inspections 5.11
forced entry GESH 2
foreign source leaks and odors 5.11, GESH 2
foreign utilities boring near 3.19, 4.13 4.13 - on-site inspections -
full-seal clamps pipe repair 3.35
fusion-bonded epoxy (FBE) coatings jeeping voltage settings 3.12
galvanized riser 3.25
gas diversion GESH 15 typical gas diversion methods
gas diversion GESH 15 typical gas diversion methods
gas equipment service GESH 10
gas incident field investigation chain of custody GESH 17
22
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
gas incident field investigation testing warning GESH 17 testing warning
gas incident field investigation GESH 17 throughout
gas input to burner in cubic feet per hour table GESH tables GESH tables
gas material failure report material failure 4.11 material failure
gas meter information sheets requirements 2.22 gas meter information sheets
gas meter room installation Avista requirement 2.22
gas operating order gas incident field investigation GESH 17
gas pipeline integrity program manager 4.11
gas serviceman restoration of service GESH 5
gas transport telemetry 2.25
gas transport customers quantities measured, telemetry 2.25
gate station valves 2.14
gate valves 2.14, 5.13
grade 1 leaks 5.11, GESH 1, GESH 2
duct system; 5.11 - re-
23
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
grade 2 leaks 5.11, GESH 2
duct system; 5.11 - re-
grade 2A leak 5.11, GESH 2
grade 3 leaks 5.11, GESH 2 duct system; 5.11 - re-
2 - grade 3 leak; GESH 2 - re-
Grunsky meter changer GESH 9
handling emergency calls GESH 1
hazardous conditions GESH 2, 10
heating tool 3.23 heating tool
24
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
heating tool 3.23 heating tool
hemi-head spheres 3.32A "td williamson permanent hemi-
Avista initiated meter tests GESH 16 Avista initiated meter test
customer requested meter tests GESH 16 customer requested meter test
customer service responsibility GESH 16 customer service responsibility
GESH 16 throughout
high occupancy structures curb valve installation requirements 2.14, 2.22
high occupancy structures leak survey requirements 2.22, 5.11
hud part 3280 manufactured homes GESH 12
hydrofracture 3.19
"Contingency Plan for Firm Service Gas emergency operations GESH 13 curtailment rules
ID damage reporting
Idaho dig law website reference 4.13
25
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
identify atmospheric corrosion, OQ task 4.31 App A 221.110.020
identify corrosion on buried pipe, OQ task 4.31 App A 221.110.015
idle meter definition 1.1 glossary
idle meter general 2.22 idle meters
idle meter removing 5.16 idle meters and idle services
idle service line 2.22, 5.16
incident commander GESH 5
incident investigation operator qualification (OQ)4.31
inconclusive leaks and odors 5.11, GESH 2
inconclusive leaks and odors GESH 2
inconclusive leaks and odors flame Ionization follow up GESH 2
industrial meter sets maintenance 5.12
industrial meter sets design 2.22, 2.24
injection odorizers 2.52, 5.23
injection type odorizer type 2.52, 5.23
26
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
input rating definition 1.1 glossary
insertion of PE (polyethylene) pipe into
steel services 3.16
insertion of steel into steel services 3.16
inside leak and odor investigation GESH 2
inspection atmospheric corrosion 5.14
inspection bridges 5.15
inspection distribution lines 5.15
inspection high pressure mains 5.15
inspection pipeline markers for buried pipe 5.15 pipeline markers for buried pipe
inspection pipelines subject to movement 5.15
inspection 5.15
inspection, general 3.14, 4.13
27
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
installation test procedures utilization pressure test GESH 6 utilization pressure test
insulation cathodic protection 2.32 insulation
insulator definition 1.1 glossary
intermediate pressure definition 1.1 glossary
intermediate pressure meter set Drawing A-35208 2.24 Appendix A
intermittent ignition (IID)definition 1.1 glossary
internal corrosion control 5.14 internal corrosion control
internal relief valve (IRV)definition 1.1 glossary
international fuel gas code safety inspections GESH 12 recognized codes
international mechanical code safety inspections GESH 12 recognized codes
investigation see incident invest.
iron case meters meters 2.22 meter types
iron temperature (fusion)3.23 heating tool
isolated main less than 100 ft 5.14
isolated risers with cathodic protection 5.14
isolated steel 4.14, 5.14
jeeping steel pipe 3.12
jeeping formula 3.12
jeeping formula 3.12
joining PE pipe 2.13, 3.23, 3.24, 3.25
leak and odor investigation GESH 2
28
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
leak failure cause definitions 5.11, GESH 2
leak investigation 5.11, GESH 2
leak repair 5.11, GESH 2
leak survey 250 psig and greater pipelines 5.11
leak survey 5 year surveys 5.11
leak survey annual surveys 5.11
leak survey business districts 5.11
leak survey calibration of equipment 5.11
leak survey combustible gas indicator (CGI)5.11
leak survey 5.11 leak detection instruments
leak survey flame ionization detector (F.I.)5.11
leak survey 5.11 grade 2A leak; grade 2 leak
leak survey 5.11
leak survey mechanical fittings 5.11
29
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
leak survey procedures 5.11 throughout
leak survey re-classification of leaks 5.11 re-classification of leaks
leak survey recordkeeping 5.11 recordkeeping and reporting
leak survey 5.11 leak detection instruments
leak survey transmission pipelines 5.11
leak survey cathodic protection 5.14
leak survey pinpointing/centering 5.11, GESH 2 GESH 2 - pinpointing / centering
LEL GESH 4
GESH 17
line patrols 5.15
link type seals 3.42
glossary
liquid epoxy coating steel pipe 3.12 liquid epoxy coating
little fink 4.31 App A 221.110.035
locating facilities 4.13
30
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
locks valve locks
locks idle riser locks 2.22, 5.16
locks gas meter locks 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17
department calls; GESH 2 -
lowering steel pipe decision flow chart 3.12
lowering steel pipe minimum considerations 3.12
lowering steel pipe 3.12 toughness testing
lowering steel pipe leak survey after 3.12, 5.11
lycofit fittings 3.25
lycoring 3.25
31
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
maintenance cycles odorometer calibrations 4.18 calibration of equipment
maintenance cycles EOP plan 5.11 grade 1 leak
maintenance cycles FI (flame ionization) units 5.11 maintenance of instruments
maintenance cycles leak survey 5.11 maintenance frequencies
maintenance cycles regulator stations 5.12 maintenance frequencies
maintenance cycles single service farm taps 5.12 farm taps and HP services
maintenance cycles valves 5.13
maintenance cycles 5.19 maintenance frequencies
maintenance cycles odorizers 5.23
maintenance cycles meters 2.22, 5.12
maintenance frequencies 5.19, 5.21
management of change, transmission line 2.12
manometer pressure gauges 5.21
changing 4.15 changing MAOP
determination of 4.15 determination of MAOP
revisions 4.16
marker ball 2.14, 3.12, 3.19
markers aboveground pipe 3.15, 5.15
32
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
markers buried pipe 3.15, 5.15
markers exceptions for marking 3.15, 5.15
marking gas facilities (locates)4.13
marking meters (shutdown & restoration)GESH 5
marking PE joints 3.23, 3.24, 3.25
master meter / master meter station 4.12
master meter / master meter station maintenance 5.12
material failures report for WUTC 4.14
definition 1.1 glossary
steel pipe 2.12 design formula for steel pipe
PE (polyethylene) pipe 2.13 general
station capacity 2.23 capacity
steel pipe 2.12 design formula for steel pipe
PE (polyethylene) pipe 2.13 general
station capacity 2.23 capacity
2.22
33
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
meter and regulator sizing vent lines GESH 6 vent lines
meter capacity diaphragm meters 2.24 diaphragm meters
meter capacity rotary meters 2.24 rotary meters
meter capacity turbine meters 2.24 turbine meters
meter change order / meter removal order checking for electrical shorts GESH 9 checking for electrical shorts
meter change order / meter removal order existing meter sets GESH 9 existing meter sets
meter change order / meter removal order general GESH 9 general
meter change order / meter removal order GESH 9
meter change orders GESH 9
meter remove order GESH 9
meter room 2.22
meter room minimum requirements for 2.22
meter room ventilation of 2.22
meter set design 2.22
meter spot check GESH 2
meter spot check hazardous conditions GESH 2
meter spot check procedures GESH 2
meter spot check GESH 2
34
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
meter turn-off orders cancellations or postponements GESH 8 cancellations or postponements
meter turn-off orders can't gain entry situations GESH 8 can't gain entry situations
meter turn-off orders cold weather precautions GESH 8 cold weather precautions
meter turn-off orders duplicate orders GESH 8 duplicate orders
meter turn-off orders GESH 8
meter turn-on orders GESH 1, GESH 7
meter turn-on procedures GESH 7
meter turn-on procedures GESH 7
meters 2 psig meter sets 2.22
meters 2.22
35
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
meters 2.22 meter types
meters customer piping, insulating from 2.22
meters downstream piping 2.22
meters elevated pressure sets 2.22
meters industrial sets 2.22
meters maintenance 2.22
meters meter rooms 2.22
meters relief vent design 2.22
meters 2.22 inside meter sets
36
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
meters location 2.22, 2.24
meters design 2.22, 2.24, GESH 6
meters installation 2.22, 2.24, GESH 6
meters 2.22, 2.24, GESH 6
meters snow areas 2.22, 3.16
meters protection 2.22, 5.14
meters overbuilds 2.22, 5.20
meters insulating 2.22, GESH 6
meters sizing 2.24, GESH 6
meters multi-meter manifolds 3.16, GESH 6
meters coriolis meters 2.22 meter types
meters protection 2.22
meters barricades 2.22
meters downstream insulation 2.22
meters protection 2.22
meters barricades 2.22
meters downstream insulation 2.22
37
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
migration of gas GESH 2, 4
monitor regulator testing 5.12
monitoring pressure App A, 5.12
Mueller Save-a-Valve nipple 3.32
Mueller repair clamps 3.35
Mueller 4.31 App A 221.040.001
Mueller tapping & stopping 6" and larger 4.31 App A 221.040.010
multi-meter manifolds 2.22, 3.16, GESH 6
mutual assistance 4.31, GESH 13
mutual assistance plan GESH 5
natural forces, leak failure cause 5.11, GESH 2
NDT (non-destructive testing)3.12, 4.31, App A
38
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
nfpa number 54 GESH 12
nitrogen relief testing with nitrogen, procedure 5.12
odor calls procedures 5.11, GESH 2
odorization odorometer 4.18
odorization periodic inspections 4.18
odorization threshold detection 4.18
39
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
odorization odorant 2.52, 4.18
odorization odorant concentrations 2.52, 4.18
odorization 4.31 App A 221.090.030
odorizer by-pass 2.52, 5.23
odorizer injection type 2.52, 5.23
odorizer wick type 2.52, 5.23
odorizer maintenance 4.31 App A, 5.23
offset staking (for locates)4.13
one & two family dwelling code, the GESH 12
One Call color codes 4.13
One Call dig laws 4.13
One Call 4.13
operation, leak failure cause 5.11, GESH 2
operations planning for road projects GESH 13
operator qualification 4.31 general
40
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
operator qualification contractor qualification 4.31 contractor qualification
operator qualification covered task 4.31 throughout
operator qualification evaluation 4.31 throughout
operator qualification evaluation intervals 4.31 subsequent evaluation intervals
operator qualification failing an evaluation 4.31 failing an evaluation
operator qualification mergers & acquisitions 4.31 mergers & acquisitions
operator qualification mutual aid 4.31 mutual assistance agreement
operator qualification post incident investigation 4.31
operator qualification reasonable cause 4.31
operator qualification training 4.31
operator qualification 4.31, App. D
OQ program 4.31, App D
emergency operations GESH 13 curtailment rules
Oregon dig law website reference 4.13
outside leak and odor investigations 5.11, GESH 2 ppm survey; GESH 2 - avista-
odor investigation
overbuilt facilities 2.22, 5.20
overpressure protection devices design capacities 2.24
overpressure protection devices maintenance 5.12
patroling pipeline 5.15
41
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
PE (polyethylene) pipe approved dimensions table 2.13 design formulas
PE (polyethylene) pipe cathodic protection 2.13 cathodic protection
PE (polyethylene) pipe design formulas for 2.13 design formulas
PE (polyethylene) pipe markings on PE pipe 2.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe 2.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe 2.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe storage and handling 3.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe clearances 3.15
PE (polyethylene) pipe capacities table 3.16
PE (polyethylene) pipe casings for 3.42
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.42 E-33947
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.42 E-33947,1
PE (polyethylene) pipe bridge crossings 2.13, 3.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe thermal contraction/expansion 2.13, 3.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe tracer wire 2.13, 3.13
42
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
PE (polyethylene) pipe joining of components 2.13, 3.13, 3.23, 3.24, 3.25
PE (polyethylene) pipe electrofusion 2.13, 3.24, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe static charges 3.13, 3.17, 3.33
PE (polyethylene) pipe trenchless pipe installation 3.13, 3.19
PE (polyethylene) pipe pressure testing 3.18, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe butt fusion 3.23, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe hydraulic butt fusion 3.23, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe mechanical couplings 3.25, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe repair 3.33, 4.31 App A
PE (polyethylene) pipe thermal contraction/expansion 2.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe insulation 2.22
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 field bending
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 plowing and planting
PE (polyethylene) pipe pressure testing 3.18
PE (polyethylene) pipe thermal contraction/expansion 2.13
PE (polyethylene) pipe insulation 2.22
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 field bending
PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13 plowing and planting
PE (polyethylene) pipe pressure testing 3.18
PE (polyethylene) valves design 2.14 valve types
43
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
perimeter 5.11, GESH 2
periodic meter changeout program 2.22, GESH 9
pete's plug 5.21
pigging casing 3.42
pilot filters
pilot lights GESH 10
pipe lowering steel 3.12
pipe 3.13
pipe 3.16
pipe capacities, PE (polyethylene)
pipe 3.16
pipe capacities, service lines 3.16
pipe capacities, steel 3.16
44
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
pipe 3.19 pipe splitting
pipe joining PE 2.13, 3.13, 3.23, 3.24, 3.25
pipe dry line 3.12, 3.13, 3.18
pipe bending, steel 3.12, 4.31 App A
pipe joining 3.13 qualified joiners
pipe joining electrofusion 3.24, 4.31 App A
pipe repair steel 3.22, 3.32
pipe splitting equipment requirements 3.19
pipe splitting 3.19 throughout
GESH Foreword Foreward
pipe-to-soil procedure 5.14
45
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
pipe-to-soil OQ task 4.31 App A 221.110.055
pit gauge steel pipe repair 3.32 throughout
pits meters 2.22 pits and vaults
pitting definition 1.1 glossary
planned meter changeout program 2.22, GESH 9
planning worksheet, shutdown &
restoration GESH 5
plidco split-sleeve steel repair clamp 3.32A
plug valves maintenance 5.13
plugging steel for repairs 3.32 tapping and plugging procedures
PMC program 2.22, GESH 9
portable regulator stations 5.10, 5.12
potholing trenchless pipe installation 3.19
pressure monitoring of 3.12, 3.13, 3.32, 3.33
pressure calibration standards 5.21
46
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
pressure factor formula 2.22 pressure compensation
pressure gauges calibrations (accuracy checks)5.21 throughout
pressure recorders requirements for use 2.23
pressure recorders calibrations (accuracy checks)5.21
pressure testing requirements for high pressure
steel 3.18
system
pressure testing requirements for IN pressure
steel 3.18
pressure testing short section of pipe 3.18
pressure testing transmission testing in WA state 3.18
pressure testing reinstating services 3.16, 3.18, 3.32, 5.11
pressure testing PE 3.18, 3.25
pressure testing replaced segments 3.18, 5.11
prevention of accidental ignition squeeze-off of PE 3.34
priority 1 emergency requests GESH 1
priority 2 emergency requests GESH 1
detecting Instruments GESH 3
documentation GESH 3 documentation
initial determination GESH 3 initial determination
propane conversions GESH 10
47
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
protection see barricades
protective system trenching 3.15 shoring and excavating safety
provers calibration interval 2.22 prover calibration interval
provers SNAP prover 2.22 prover calibration interval
provers transfer prover 2.22 prover calibration interval
proximity considerations in Washington 2.12, 2.23, 4.17
pulling forces 3.13 plowing and planting
pulling forces 3.13 safe pulling forces
purging laterals 3.17 purging main with laterals
purging 3.17 small pipelines
purging excess flow valve (EFV)3.16, 3.17
overview 4.61
48
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
RCW chapter 19.122.033(4)permits 4.13
RCW chapter 19.122.053 4.13
4.14 WA reporting requirements
RCW chapter 19.27 4.13
RCW chapter 81.88.080 4.14
re-classification of leaks 5.11, GESH 2
recordkeeping odorization 4.18, 5.23
recreational vehicles service lines to 3.16
49
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
regulator 2.23
regulator 2.23
regulator pressure recorders 2.23
regulator pressure regulation 2.23
regulator 2.23
regulator telemetry 2.23
regulator pressure reduction, two stage 2.23
regulator relief valve capacities table 2.24
regulator station fencing drawing L-36082 2.24 Appendix - A
regulator annual maintenance, station 5.12
regulator bypassing stations, procedure 5.12
regulator district regulator stations 5.12
regulator station annual maintenance 5.12
regulator station, permanent bypass 5.12
regulator vent orientation 2.22, 5.20
regulator capacity of 2.23, 2.24
regulator sizing 2.23, 2.24, GESH 6
regulator design 2.23, 5.12
regulator numbering of stations 2.23, 5.12
regulator 4.31 App A 221.080.030
regulator 4.31 App A 221.080.030
50
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
regulator station bypassing, OQ task 4.31 App A 221.080.025
regulator installations GESH 6
regulator station quantities measured, telemetry 2.25
reinstating services 3.16 installation of excess flow valves
reinstating services damaged 3.18, 3.32
reinstating services customer piping GESH 2
relief annual capacity review 5.12
relief valve maintenance, testing 5.12
remediation atmospheric corrosion 5.20
removing meters damage to meter sets GESH 9 damage to meter sets
removing meters GESH 9
repair temporary 3.33. GESH 2
51
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
repair charts 3.32 steel repair selection charts
repair coupling electrofusion 3.24 repair coupling joining procedure
repair sleeves 3.32, 3.32A
replacing steel pipe repair segments 3.32
residual follow up inspections 5.11, GESH 2
restoration of service GESH 5
restoration of service GESH 5
risers, idle 2.22, 5.16
risers, isolated 5.14
road construction coordinator role GESH 13
roping minimum distance table 3.12
roping minimum distance table 3.12
roping (steel lowering)3.12
52
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
rotary meter capacity 2.24 rotary meters table
rotary meters meter capacity 2.24 rotary meters table
runaway furnace GESH 1 priority 1 - emergency requests
rust definition 1.1 glossary
sacrificial protection definition 1.1 glossary
saddle joining 3.24 saddle joining procedure
safety excavating 3.15 shoring and excavating safety
safety and health department 5.23
GESH 12 GESH 12 - throughout
safety-related conditions 4.12
safety-related conditions earthquake 4.12
safety-related conditions exceptions for filing reports 4.12
safety-related conditions flooding 4.12
safety-related conditions landslides 4.12
Save-a-Valve nipple steel pipe 3.32 equivalent
scratch repair procedure pipe joining 3.25
sealing conduit ends 3.42 conduit
segment (pipeline segment)definition 1.1 glossary
53
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
self-contained breathing apparatus
(SCBA)3.32A, 3.34, 3.35
service head adapters compression type 3.25
service head adapters slip lock type 3.25
GESH 5
service regulator 2.23, 2.24, 5.12
service valve and outlet valve ownership GESH 7
services buildings, service lines under 3.16
services excess flow valves (EFVs)3.16
services insertion of PE into steel 3.16
services multi-meter manifolds 3.16
services 3.16
services 3.16 service pipe capacities
services valves for 3.16
services bar holing 5.11
54
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
services 5.12
services abandonment 5.16
services regulators, service 2.23, 2.24, 5.12
services pressure testing 3.18, 4.31 App A
services reinstating 3.18,3.32
sewers clearances from 3.15
sewers gas present within sewers 5.11, GESH 2
shoring ID rule 3.15, GESH 4
shoring OR rule 3.15, GESH 4
shoring WA rule 3.15, GESH 4
short section of pipe usage 3.18
shorted casings, CP remediation 5.14
55
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
single run district regulator, 2-in inlet Drawing E-33952 2.24 Appendix - A
single run district regulator, 4-in inlet Drawing E-35783 2.24 Appendix - A
single service farm tap 5.12
slip-lock type couplings 3.25
2185 Rev "L" 10/31/07, 34-6034-
special concerns GESH 12 CSST
special concerns GESH 12
special concerns GESH 12
special leak surveys before paving 5.11
special leak surveys after lowering steel pipe 3.12, 5.11
special leak surveys uprating 4.17, 5.11
special leak surveys shorted casings 5.11, 5.14
56
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
special leak surveys after 3rd-party damage repairs 5.11, GESH 2
spot check, meter GESH 2, 16
squeeze-off of PE prevention of accidental ignition 3.17, 3.34
SSFT maintenance 5.12
static charges purging 3.17
static charges aerosol suppression 3.34
static charges 3.13, 3.17, 3.33, 3.34
static suppression spray 3.34
steel carrier pipe casing 3.42
steel pipe composition of line pipe 2.12
57
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
steel pipe 2.12 steel pipe data tables
steel pipe thermal contraction/expansion 2.12
steel pipe 2.32 replacing steel services
steel pipe lowering decision flowchart 3.12
steel pipe coating, thin film 3.12
steel pipe FBE coating 3.12
steel pipe lowering 3.12
steel pipe warning tape 3.12 caution tape
steel pipe clearances 3.15
steel pipe capacities 3.16
steel pipe bleed off 3.17
steel pipe radius of curvature when boring 3.19
steel pipe casings for 3.42
steel pipe 3.42 E-33947,2
steel pipe 3.42 E-33947,1
steel pipe bending 2.12, 3.12, 4.31 App A
steel pipe replacing segments 2.32, 3.16
58
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
steel pipe pressure testing 3.18, 3.32, 4.31 App A
steel pipe exposed steel inspections 4.13, 5.11, 5.14
steel pipe aboveground installations 2.12
steel pipe 3.16 steel service replacement
steel pipe aboveground installations 2.12
steel pipe 3.16 steel service replacement
steel pipe components joining of 2.12
steel pipe components joining of 2.12
steel pipe lowering flowchart 3.12
stormwater erosion control 3.43
strainer inspection 5.12
glossary
59
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
surveillance 4.11 throughout
symptomatic definition 1.1 glossary
symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning GESH 3
priority 1 - emergency requests GESH 1 priority 1 - emergency requests
tape wrap repair by taping 3.12
tapping 3.24 tapping procedure
tapping mandatory review of procedures 3.32 tapping and plugging procedures
tapping steel, for repairs 3.32 tapping and plugging procedures
tapping 4.31 App A 221.040.001
tapping 4.31 App A 221.040.010
TD Williamson hemi-head spheres 3.32A williamson permanente hemi-
TD Williamson repair spheres 3.32A williamson permanente hemi-
TD Williamson 4.31 App A 221.040.005
TD Williamson tapping & stopping 6" and larger 4.31 App A 221.040.015
telemetry regulator stations 2.23
telemetry communications 2.25
telemetry gas transport 2.25
telemetry quantities measured table 2.25
telemetry system pressure monitoring 2.25
60
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
telemetry transport customers 2.25
temporary control of escaping gas broken plastic pipe GESH 4
temporary control of escaping gas broken steel pipe GESH 4
temporary control of escaping gas GESH 4
temporary control of escaping gas trench safety GESH 4 trench safety
temporary control of escaping gas UG electric precautions GESH 4 UG electric precautions
temporary repairs 3.33, GESH 2
test leads 3.12, 3.42, 5.14
thermal contraction 2.12, 2.13 contraction or expansion
thermal expansion 2.12, 2.13
thermal expansion PE, polyethylene pipe 2.13, 3.13
4.41 throughout
TIMP (transmission integrity mgmnt program)inspection, on site, damage prevention 4.13
TIMP (transmission integrity mgmnt
program)
leak survey of <30% SMYS,
Class 3 & 4 5.11
61
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
torsional stress steel pipe (design formula)2.12 torsional stress
toughness testing steel pipe 3.12 toughness testing
traceable (records)definition 1.1 glossary
tracer wire anode placement for 2.32 tracer wire
tracer wire wire type 2.13, 3.13
tracer wire installation 3.13, 3.19
tracer wire connections 3.13, 4.31 App A
tracking boring tools 3.19
transmission annual report 4.14
principles 4.41 integrity management principles
overview 4.41 introduction; scope
patrols of transmission lines 5.15 TIMP - transmission patroling
transmission integrity mgmnt program
(TIMP)
inspection, on site, damage
prevention 4.13
transmission line design of pipe and components 2.12
transmission line internal corrosion control 2.12
transmission line WAC reporting of construction 2.12
transmission line inspection 4.13
transmission line leak survey 5.11
transmission line patrols 5.15
transmission line change approvals 2.12
transmission line change approvals 2.12
transmission pipelines inspection 4.13
trenching clearances 3.15
62
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
trenching compaction 3.15 compaction
trenching cover 3.15 cover
trenching protection 3.15
trenching 3.15 shoring and excavating safety
trenching joint ditch design 3.14, 3.15
trenching ID (Idaho) rule for shoring 3.15, GESH 4
trenching OR (Oregon) rule for shoring 3.15, GESH 4
trenchless pipe installation potholing 3.19
trenchless pipe installation PE pipe 3.13, 3.19
turn-on fees GESH 11
uniform mechanical code special concerns GESH 12
unvented heaters GESH 12
uprating hoop stress 4.17
uprating incremental pressure increases 4.17
uprating leak survey for 4.17
63
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
uprating limitation 4.17 uprating requirements
uprating pipe record form 4.17
uprating procedure 4.17
uprating repairs 4.17
uprating written plan 4.17
valves new housing developments 2.14
valves maintenance cycles, procedure 5.13
valves secondary 5.13
valves steel 5.13
valves curb 2.14, 3.16
valves excess flow 2.14, 3.16 performance standards, 3.16-
valves service 2.14, 3.16, 4.31 App A
valves ball, steel 2.14, 5.13
64
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
valves gate, steel 2.14, 5.13
valves plug 2.14, 5.13
valves polyethylene 2.14, 5.13
valves abandoning 5.13, 5.16
valves boxes 5.13, 5.16
valves curb 2.14
valves curb 2.14
valves regulators 2.23 valves
ventilation meter rooms, of 2.22
65
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
ventilation meter rooms, of 2.22
venting underground leaks 5.11, GESH 2
vents, regulator 2.22, 5.20, GESH 6
visual inspection of weld 3.12, 3.22, 3.32A, 4.31 App
A
emergency operations GESH 13 curtailment rules
Washington dig law website reference 4.13
Washington Mechanical Code recognized codes GESH 12
Washington State Amendments recognized codes GESH 12
Washington State WACs by description O&M manual filing 1.4
Washington State WACs by description 2.12
Washington State WACs by description reporting of transmission
construction 2.12
Washington State WACs by description transmission line construction 2.12
Washington State WACs by description 2.22 general
Washington State WACs by description 2.32 design and installation
Washington State WACs by description 2.32 design and installation
Washington State WACs by description pressure testing transmission
pipelines 3.18
66
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
Washington State WACs by description transmission line testing 3.18
Washington State WACs by description 3.23
Washington State WACs by description casing test leads 3.42
Washington State WACs by description test leads for casings 3.42
Washington State WACs by description 4.13
Washington State WACs by description 4.14
Washington State WACs by description 4.14 WA damage reporting
Washington State WACs by description drug and alcohol testing report 4.14
Washington State WACs by description material failures report, annual 4.14
Washington State WACs by description 5.11 special surveys
Washington State WACs by description 5.11 special surveys
Washington State WACs by description 5.11 special surveys
Washington State WACs by description 5.11
Washington State WACs by description leaks from foreign sources 5.11
Washington State WACs by description 5.13
Washington State WACs by description line marker requirements 5.15
Washington State WACs by description marker maintenance 5.15
Washington State WACs by description pipeline markers for buried pipe 5.15
Washington State WACs by description proximity considerations 2.12, 2.23, 4.15
Washington State WACs by description curb valves criteria 2.14, 5.13
Washington State WACs by description emergency curb valves criteria 2.14, 5.13
Washington State WACs by description lowering steel pipe 3.12, 5.11
Washington State WACs by description 4.11, 5.11
Washington State WACs by description 5.11, 5.14
67
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
Washington State WACs by description foreign source leak detection 5.11, GESH 2
Washington State WACs by description emergency contact notification GESH 13
Washington State WACs by description 2.14 emergency curb valves
Washington State WACs by description meter set assembly location 2.22
Washington State WACs by description 2.23
Washington State WACs by description hazardous situation notifications 5.11
Washington State WACs by description 2.14 emergency curb valves
Washington State WACs by description meter set assembly location 2.22
Washington State WACs by description 2.23
Washington State WACs by description hazardous situation notifications 5.11
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-017 1.4
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-020 2.12
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-160 2.12
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-170 3.18
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-080 3.23
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (9)4.13
68
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (10) (b)4.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (13) 4.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-188 5.11
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-020 2.12, 2.23, 4.15
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-100 (2)2.14, 5.13
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-110 2.32, 5.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-175 3.12, 5.11
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-124 3.15, 5.15
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-115 3.42 (2 plcs)
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (6)4.11, 5.11, GESH 2
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (7)4.13, 4.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (7) (b)4.13, 4.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (8)4.13, GESH 13
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-200 (7) (c)4.14, GESH 2
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-188 (3) (d)5.11, 5.14
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-185 5.11, GESH 2
Washington State WACs by number 480-90-323 2.22
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-020 2.23
69
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-115 3.42
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-185 5.11
Washington State WACs by number 480-90-323 2.22
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-020 2.23
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-115 3.42
Washington State WACs by number 480-93-185 5.11
water mains clearances from 3.15
waterways commercially navigable 5.16
weak link PE (polyethylene) pipe 3.13, 3.19
weak link 3.13, 3.19
Drawing E-37842 2.24 Appendix A
Drawing E-37970 2.24 Appendix A
welding API 1104 3.22
welding defects 3.22
70
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
welding destructive testing 3.22
welding 3.22
welding 3.22
welding repair 3.22
welding root bead 3.22
welding undercutting 3.22
welding cadwelding 3.12, 3.13, 3.16, 3.22
3.22 - non-destructive pre-
welding visual inspection of 3.12, 3.22, 4.31 App A
welding seal welding 3.32A
wick odorizers 2.52, 5.23
71
Subject Details Spec/Section Subsection
wick-type odorizer definition 1.1 glossary
windows, proximity of gas meters 2.22 3 foot rule
wrapping of pipe 3.12, 3.32A, 5.14
72
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
1 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

1.3 GAS ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

SCOPE:
To define common acronyms and abbreviations found in the natural gas industry.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
None.

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
AC Alternating Current
AC Atmospheric Corrosion
ACFH Actual Cubic Feet per Hour
A-D Analog to Digital
AES AutoSol Enterprise Service
AFM Avista Facility Management
AFUDC Allowance for Funds Used During Construction
AGA American Gas Association
AGM Aboveground Markers
AH After Hours
AMI Advanced Metering Infrastructure
AMR Automated Meter Reading
ANPRM Advanced Notice of Proposed Rulemaking
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOC Abnormal Operating Condition
AOC Area of Concern
APGA American Public Gas Association
API American Petroleum Institute
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
2 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
APWA American Public Works Association
ARCOS Automated Roster Call-out System
ARO Abrasion Resistant Overlay
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT American Society of Non-Destructive Testing
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ASV Automatic Shut-off Valve
AVA Avista
AWG American Wire Gauge
AWS American Welding Society
BAP Baseline Assessment Plan
BCF Billion Cubic Feet
BECS Building Energy Codes and Standards
BH Regular Business Hours
BMP Best Management Practices
BTU British Thermal Unit
BTUH British Thermal Unit per Hour
CABO Council of American Building Officials
CC&B Customer Care and Billing
CCB Cathodic Critical Bond
CCF One hundred cubic feet (of gas)
CDA Confirmatory Direct Assessment
CDF Controlled Density Fill
CDR Construction Design Representative
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
3 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
CDT Construction Design Tool
CESCL Certified Erosion & Sediment Control Lead
CF Can't Find
CF Cubic Feet
CFH Cubic Feet per Hour
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CFS Cubic Feet Per Second
CGA Canadian Gas Association
CGE Can't Gain Entry
CGI Combustible Gas Indicator
CIS Close-Interval Survey
CLB Comfort Level Billing
CLM Construction List Manager
CNG Compressed Natural Gas
CO Carbon Monoxide
COS Cost of Service
CO2 Carbon Dioxide
CP Cathodic Protection
CPC Customer Project Coordinator
CSR Customer Service Representative
CSS Customer Service System
CSST Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing
CTS Copper Tube Size
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
4 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
CUFT Cubic Feet (usually shown in lowercase.)
CWAP Cold Weather Action Plan
CWIP Construction Work In Progress
DA Direct Assessment
DBF Dandy Blue Flame
DC Direct Current
DCVG Direct Current Voltage Gradient
DEG Degrees
DEQ Department of Environmental Quality
DER Designated Employer Representative
DHS Department of Homeland Security
DIMP Distribution Integrity Management Program
DIRT Damage Information Reporting Tool
DOE Department of Energy
DOT Department of Transportation
DP-IR Detecto Pak Infrared Detector
DSAW Double Submerged Arc Weld
DSM Demand-Side Management
EC External Corrosion
ECDA External Corrosion Direct Assessment
EFV Excess Flow Valve
EOP Emergency Operating Procedure or Emergency Operating Plan
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ERT Encoder Receiver Transmitter
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
5 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
ERW Electric Résistance Welded
ESC Erosion and Sediment Control Plan
F Fahrenheit
F.P. Fireplace
FAF Forced Air Furnace
FBE Fusion Bonded Epoxy
FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency
FERC Federal Energy Regulatory Commission
FI Flame Ionization
FT Foot or Feet (usually shown in lowercase.)
FVR Field Verification Report
FW Flash Weld
G Grams (usually shown in lower case)
GAAP Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
GESH Gas Emergency & Service Handbook
GHG Greenhouse Gas
GIS Geographic Information System
GMAW Gas Metal Arc Welding
GPG Gas Pressure Gauge
GPS Global Positioning System
GPTC Gas Piping Technology Committee
GSM Gas Standards Manual
GTI Gas Technology Institute
GTN Gas Transmission Northwest
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
6 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
HBI High Bill Investigation
HCA High Consequence Areas
HDB Hydrostatic Design Basis
HDD Horizontal Directional Drilling
HOS Hours of Service
HP High Pressure
HPS High Pressure Service
HSI Hot Surface Igniter
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
HWH Hot Water Heater
IC Internal Corrosion
ICDA Internal Corrosion Direct Assessment
ICS Incident Command System
ID Inside Diameter
IHO Intended for Human Occupancy
ILI In Line Inspection
IMP Integrity Management Plan (or Integrity Management Program)
IN Inch or Inches (usually shown in lowercase)
INGAA Interstate Natural Gas Association of America
IOU Investor Owned Utility
IP Internet Protocol
IPM Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Manual)
IPS Iron Pipe Size
IPUC Idaho Public Utility Commission
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
7 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
IRAS Integrated Risk Assessment Software
IRED Infrared Ethane Detector
IRP Integrated Resource Plan
IRV Internal Relief Valve
IT Information Technology
IUCC Idaho Utility Coordinating Council
IVP Integrity Verification Process
IVR Interactive Voice Response
JPSP Jackson Prairie Storage Project
KFGS Kettle Falls Generating Station
LB Pound or Pounds (usually shown in lowercase.)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDC Local Distribution Company
LEL Lower Explosive Level
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LTIR Lost Time Injury Rate
MAOP Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
MCA Medium Consequence Areas
MCF One Thousand Cubic Feet
MDM Meter Data Management
MDQ Maximum Daily Quantity
MDT Marketing Design Technician
MEA Midwest Energy Association
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
8 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
MIC Microbiologically Induced Corrosion
MIS Management Information System
MMBTU One Million British Thermal Units
MMCF One Million Cubic Feet
MOC Management of Change
MOP Maximum Operating Pressure
MRO Medical Review Officer
MSA Meter Set Assembly
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
MTR Mill Test Report
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NAPSR National Association of Pipeline Safety Representatives
NARUC National Association of Regulatory Utility Commissioners
NDE Non-Destructive Evaluation
NDT Non-Destructive Testing
NEC National Electric Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NG Natural Gas
NGL Natural Gas Liquids
NGT Not Greater Than
NGV Natural Gas Vehicle
NLT Not Less Than
NO Non-Observable
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
9 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
NOA Notice of Amendment
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
NOI Notice of Intent
NOP Nominal Operating Pressure
NOPR Notice of Proposed Rulemaking
NOPV Notice of Probable Violation
NOT Notice of Termination
NPDES National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
NPMS National Pipeline Mapping System
NPRM Notice of Proposed Rulemaking
NPS Nominal Pipe Size
NPT National Pipe Thread
NRC National Response Center
NTE Not to Exceed
NTSB National Transportation Safety Board
NWP Northwest Pipeline (i.e. Williams Northwest Pipeline Company)
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OAR Oregon Administrative Rules
OCS Outer Continental Shelf
OD Outside Diameter
ODEQ Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality
OMB Office of Management and Budget
OOF Other Outside Forces
OPID Operator Identification Number
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
10 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
OPP Overpressure Protection
OPS Office of Pipeline Safety
OPUC Oregon Public Utilities Commission
OQ Operator Qualification
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSRAC Operations Safety Regulatory Action Committee
OST Office of the Secretary of Transportation
P&M Preventive and Mitigative
PAPA Pipeline Association for Public Awareness
PAW Pipeline Association of Washington
PE Polyethylene
PEF Performance Evaluation Form
PGA Purchase Gas Adjustment
PHMSA Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration
PIC Potential Impact Circle
PIR Potential Impact Radius
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PMC Periodic Meter Change-Out Program
PPB Parts per Billion (usually shown lowercase)
PPDC Plastic Pipe Data Collection (AGA)
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PPI Plastic Pipe Institute
PPM Parts per Million (usually shown lowercase)
PPV Peak Particle Velocity
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
11 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
PQR Procedure Qualification Record
PSI Pounds per Square Inch (usually shown lowercase)
PSIA Pounds per Square Inch Absolute (usually shown lowercase)
PSIG Pounds per Square Inch Gage (usually shown lowercase)
PSMS Pipeline Safety Management System
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
RCV Remote Control Valve
RCW Revised Code of Washington
RDL Readily Detectable Level
RIR Recordable Injury Rate
RMLD Remote Methane Leak Detector
RNG Renewable Natural Gas
ROW Right-of-Way
RTL Record Test Level
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RULD Remote Methane Leak Detector
SAP Snow Action Plan
SAP Substance Abuse Professional
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SCBA Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCC Stress Corrosion Cracking
SCCDA Stress Corrosion Cracking Direct Assessment
SCFH Standard Cubic Feet per Hour
SDR Standard Dimension Ratio
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
12 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
SDS Safety Data Sheet
SEPA State Environmental Policy Act
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SME Subject Matter Expert
SMYS Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SP Steel Pipeline
SSFT Single Service Farm Tap
STTR Service Tee Transition Rebuild
SWPPP Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
T.C. Thermocouple
TAC Technical Advisory Committee
TC Temperature Compensating
TDC Top Dead Center
TDL Threshold Detection Level
TIMP Transmission Integrity Management Program
TOU Time of Use
TQM Total Quality Management
TX Transformer
UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (i.e. drone)
UGS Underground Gas Storage
UNGSF Underground Natural Gas Storage Facility
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
GAS ACRONYMS AND REV. NO. 5
13 OF 13 SPEC. 1.3

Acronym Definition of Acronym or Abbreviation
USDOT U.S. Department of Transportation
UV Ultraviolet
V.C. Vent Connector
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VAR Vehicle Accident Rate
VDC Volts Direct Current
WAC Washington Administrative Code
WC Water Column
WEI Western Energy Institute
WUTC Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission
WWP Washington Water Power

GAS OPERATIONS AND REV. NO. 6
1 OF 5 SPEC. 1.4

1.4 GAS OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE PLANS
SCOPE: To establish a procedure for updating Avista’s Gas Standards Manual (GSM) and Gas Emergency and Service Handbook (GESH). REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.605, §192.613 WAC 480-93-017, 480-93-180 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.11, Continuing Surveillance Operations and Maintenance Plan Review
The Gas Standards Manual (GSM) and the Gas Emergency and Service Handbook (GESH) are the foundational documents in Avista’s Operations and Maintenance Plan. These documents shall be reviewed and updated as applicable once each calendar year, not to exceed 15 months. Updates will be coordinated by the Pipeline Safety Engineer with assistance from the Gas Standards Manual Committee and the Gas Emergency and Services Handbook Committee. Operations managers and the Quality Assurance Department will conduct periodic reviews of the work done by operating personnel to determine the effectiveness and adequacy of the procedures used in normal operations and maintenance. Review of construction and maintenance activities and subsequent incorporation of enhancements within the operations and maintenance plans is part of Avista’s continuing surveillance program as specified in Specification 4.11, Continuing Surveillance. Avista encourages employees (and contractors) who utilize these procedures to review them for deficiencies and recommendations. Such reviews will be analyzed and the procedures will be modified appropriately if deficiencies are found. Reviews, analysis, and modifications will be documented by the Pipeline Safety Engineer. GSM / GESH correction or enhancement requests should be submitted to the Pipeline Safety Engineer as they are identified. The requests will be forwarded to and reviewed / incorporated within the standards as applicable by the individual accountable for the specific standard as detailed in Table 1 of this specification. Individuals accountable for review of the various standards will review them at the period specified and validate the following: 1) The Standard is in accordance with federal, state, and industry codes and standards. 2) Requested changes have been reviewed and incorporated within the standard as appropriate. The required corrections / enhancements should be completed by the first of September each calendar
year to include approval by the Approver as noted in Table 1. Completion by this date will allow sufficient time for the changes to be incorporated into the next year’s GSM / GESH update.
GAS OPERATIONS AND REV. NO. 6
2 OF 5 SPEC. 1.4

Appropriate parts of the Operating and Maintenance Plan will be prepared outlining procedures necessary for conducting operations and maintenance and emergency operations before operations commence on any new pipeline system. Copies of these procedures will be kept at locations where the operations and maintenance activities are conducted. Construction Procedures Filing With the WUTC
In the state of Washington, any new or updated construction procedures, designs, or specifications must be provided to the Commission a minimum of 45 days prior to implementation. As a general rule, this will be accomplished with the annual forwarding of the GSM / GESH to the Commission. In the event such notification needs to occur during the calendar year; it must be completed under separate correspondence.

Records Available To Operating Personnel
This manual and all manuals comprising Avista’s Gas Operating and Maintenance Plan, are to be made available to personnel performing design, construction, maintenance, and emergency response of the
natural gas systems along with maintenance and construction records which includes maps.
These manuals and records are to be made available, upon request, to responsible federal and state regulatory personnel per §192.605(b)(3) and WAC 480-93-180.

WAC 480-93-017:
1. Any operator intending to construct or operate a gas pipeline facility in Washington must file with
the commission all applicable construction procedures, design, and specifications used for each pipeline facility prior to operating the pipeline or have a plan and procedures manual on file with the
commission. All procedures must detail the acceptable types of materials, fittings, and components for the different types of facilities in the operator’s system. 2. With the exception of emergency situations, any construction plans that do not conform with Avista’s existing and accepted construction procedures, designs, and specifications on file with the
commission, must be submitted to the commission for review 45 days prior to the initiation of construction activity.
GAS OPERATIONS AND REV. NO. 6
3 OF 5 SPEC. 1.4

Table 1 – Standards Accountability
Standard Title Frequency of Review Responsible Reviewer
GSM Gas Standards Manual

1.1 Glossary Pipeline Safety Engineer
1.2 Index Pipeline Safety Engineer
2.0 Design Standards
2.12 Pipe Design - Steel Design Manager
2.13 Pipe Design - Plastic (Polyethylene) Design Manager
2.15 Bridge Design Design Manager
2.22 Meter Design Design Manager
2.23 Regulator Design Design Manager
2.25 Telemetry Design Design Manager
2.32 Cathodic Protection Design Design Manager
2.42 Vaults - Design Design Manager
3.0 Construction
3.12 Pipe Installation - Steel Mains Annually Design Manager
3.13 Pipe Installation –Plastic (Poly) Mains Annually Design Manager
3.14 Precheck Layout and Inspection Annually Design Manager
3.15 Trenching and Backfilling Design Manager
3.16 Services Design Manager
3.19 Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods Design Manager
3.22 Joining of Pipe - Steel Design Manager
3.25 Joining of Pipe - Plastic - Mechanical Design Manager
3.32 Repair of Steel Pipe Design Manager
3.33
3.34 Squeeze-off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity Design Manager
3.35 Detailed Procedure for Use of “Adams” Style Repair Design Manager
3.42 Casing and Conduit Installation Design Manager
3.43 Land Disturbance Requirements Design Manager
GAS OPERATIONS AND REV. NO. 6
4 OF 5 SPEC. 1.4

Standard Title Frequency of Review Responsible Reviewer
3.44 Exposed Pipe Evaluation Compliance Manager
4.0 Operations
4.11 Continuing Surveillance Annually Compliance Manager
4.12 Safety-Related Conditions Annually Compliance Manager
4.13 Damage Prevention Program Damage Prevention
4.15 Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) Compliance Manager
4.16 Class Locations Compliance Manager
4.17 Uprating Design Manager
4.19 Crew Activity Reporting – Washington Compliance Manager
4.22 Customer Owned Service Lines Compliance Manager
4.31 Operator Qualification OQ Program Administrator
4.42 Distribution Integrity Management Program DIMP Program Manager
4.51 Gas Control Room Management Plan Design Manager
4.61 Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) Program QA/QC Manager
Maintenance
5.10 Gas Maintenance Timeframes and Matrix Compliance Manager
5.11 Leak Survey Leak Survey Program Manager
5.12 Regulator and Relief Inspection Design Manager
5.14 Cathodic Protection Maintenance Design Manager
5.15 Pipeline Patrolling and Pipeline Markers Compliance Manager
5.16 Abandonment or Inactivation of Facilities Design Manager
5.18 Vault Maintenance Design Manager
5.19 Combustible Gas Indicator Testing and Calibration Compliance Manager
5.20 Atmospheric Corrosion Control AC Program Manager
5.22 Heater Maintenance Design Manager
5.23 Odorization Equipment Maintenance Design Manager

GAS OPERATIONS AND REV. NO. 6
5 OF 5 SPEC. 1.4

Standard

Title

Frequency of Review

Responsible Reviewer
GESH Gas Emergency and Service Handbook
Section 1 Receiving and Dispatching Emergency Annually Operations Support Manager
Section 2 Leak and Odor Investigation Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 3 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Orders Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 4 Emergency Procedures – Blowing or Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 5 Emergency Shutdown and Restoration of Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 6 Meter, ERT, AMI and Regulator Annually Design Manager
Section 7 Meter Turn-On Orders Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 8 Meter Turn-Off Orders Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 9 Meter Change Order/Meter Removal Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 10 Gas Equipment Service Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 11 Customer Charges Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 12 Safety Inspections Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 13 Emergency Planning, Training and Incident Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 15 Diversion of Service Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 16 High Bill Investigations and Customer Annually Natural Gas Director
Section 17 Gas Incident Field Investigation Annually QA/QC Manager
Tables Gas Input to Burner in CFH Annually Design Manager

1 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

2.1 PIPE SYSTEMS 2.12 PIPE DESIGN - STEEL SCOPE:
To establish a uniform procedure for designing steel gas piping systems that meets applicable regulatory codes and provide a safe and reliable operating system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.7, §192.14, §192.53, §192.55, §192.63, §192.67, §192.101, §192.103, §192.105, §192.107,
§192.109, §192.111, §192.113, §192.115, §192.141, §192.143, §192.144, §192.145, §192.147, §192.149, §192.150, §192.151, §192.153, §192.159, §192.161, §192.241, §192.461, §192.476, §192.501, §192.503, §192.505, §192.507, §192.509, §192.511, §192.611 WAC 480-93-020, 480-93-160
OTHER REFERENCES: NACE SP0102, Section 7 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling Spec. 3.22, Joining of Pipe - Steel DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
General New steel pipelines shall be in accordance with the provisions of API Standard 5L, ASTM Specification A-53, or ASTM Specification A-106. Gas Engineering shall be responsible for the design of all applications having an MAOP greater than 60 psig (high pressure designs).
Steel pipelines must be coated and cathodically protected per the requirements of Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design. Before using any new material, Gas Engineering will evaluate and approve the material by following the Adopting a New Gas Material Process Checklist. Following this checklist will ensure the new material meets specification and proper training has been completed with appropriate Company and contractor personnel. Converting an Acquired System
If acquiring a system that will be converted to natural gas and is not currently subject to 49 CFR Part 192, Avista shall prepare a written plan to meet the requirements of §192.14. The plan shall include reviewing past history records of the system, or if insufficient records are available, perform appropriate tests to

2 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

determine if the pipeline is in a satisfactory condition for safe operation, including visual inspection of aboveground segments and selected underground segments for physical defects and operating conditions which reasonably could be expected to impair the strength or tightness of the pipeline and correct known defects in accordance with CFR 49 Part 192. The pipeline must be tested to substantiate the maximum allowable operating pressure permitted by CFR 49 Part 192 Subpart L. Records must be kept for the life of the pipeline in regard to the investigation, tests, repairs, replacements, and alterations
made under the requirements of §192.14.
Steel Pipe Coating and Marking New buried steel pipes must be applied on a properly prepared surface and coated with an approved coating which meets the requirements of §192.461 as follows:

• Have sufficient adhesion to the metal surface to effectively resist under film migration of moisture
• Be sufficiently ductile to resist cracking
• Have sufficient strength to resist damage due to handling and soil stress
• Have properties compatible with any supplemental cathodic protection
• Coating which is electrically insulating must also have low moisture absorption and high electrical resistance
• Coating must be applied and protected from damage during installation as outlined in Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Mains.
Coated pipe shall be printed on the outside with the following information:
• Outside diameter of pipe
• Pipe wall thickness
• Pipe specification, grade and seam type
• Coating company’s name
• Date of coating application
• Coating type and thickness
• Purchase order number (Avista PO number preferred)
• Pipe manufacturer’s name
• Pipe heat number Factory-applied stenciling of the above printed information shall be maintained until the pipe has been
installed in the ground. If the pipe specification information has not been maintained, the pipe shall not be used as carrier pipe. However, if the factory stencil fails, Avista personnel may reapply the required information on the pipe before installation with complete verification of all data of the original stencil. Design Formula for Steel Pipe
The design formula for steel pipe is given as follows:
P = 2St
D x F x E x T
Where: P = design pressure (psig)
S = specified minimum yield strength (psi) in accordance with §192.107 D = outside diameter (in)

3 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

t = nominal wall thickness (in) in accordance with §192.109 F = design factor determined in accordance with §192.111 E = longitudinal joint factor determined in accordance with §192.113 T = temperature derating factor determined in accordance with §192.115 The design of new gas facilities and any subsequent additions or alterations to existing facilities shall
meet the maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) requirements of the pipeline. Future plans for expansion or uprating may dictate a higher design MAOP. When possible, pipelines should be designed so the MAOP of the pipeline will not exceed 20 percent of the specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) of the pipe. Allowance shall be made in the overall design, in addition to internal pipeline hoop stress, for other
possible stress factors such as overburden, fill, external loads, thermal expansion and contraction, or pipeline bending. Class Location Considerations
For pipelines that must be designed to operate at or in excess of 20 percent SMYS, design
considerations and pressure testing considerations must be made, as the pipeline will ultimately be limited to an MAOP as specified by its Population Class Location. Refer to Specification 4.16, Class Locations.
The MAOP of a pipeline may not exceed that which will cause the following hoop stress as a percentage of SMYS for the indicated Population Class Location*:
Class 1 - 72 percent SMYS
Class 2 - 60 percent SMYS Class 3 - 50 percent SMYS
Class 4 - 40 percent SMYS
*Note: A pipeline may be operated at a pressure which equates to “one class level out” if the pipeline has previously been tested to 90 percent SMYS for the required test duration (Reference notes in subsection
“Pressure Testing” in this specification).
Transmission Lines – Design of Pipe and Components
• Each transmission line and each replacement of line pipe, valve, fitting, or other line component
in a transmission line (regardless of operating hoop stress) constructed after July 1, 2020 has the
following design and recordkeeping criteria:
o Collect or make and retain, for the life of the pipeline, records documenting that the pipe
is designed to withstand anticipated external pressures and loads in accordance with
§192.103 and document that the determination of design pressure for the pipe is made in
accordance with §192.105.
o Records that document the physical characteristics of the pipeline, including diameter,
yield strength, ultimate tensile strength, wall thickness, seam type, and chemical
composition of materials for pipe in accordance with §192.53 and §192.55 shall be made
and retained for the life of the pipeline. Records must include tests, inspections, and
attributes required by the manufacturing specifications applicable at the time the pipe was
manufactured or installed.

4 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

o Records documenting the manufacturing standard and pressure rating to which each
valve was manufactured and tested shall be made and retained for the life of the pipeline.
Flanges, fittings, branch connections, extruded outlets, anchor forgings, and other
components with material yield strength grades of 42,000 psi (X42) or greater and with
nominal diameters of greater than 2 inches must have records documenting the
manufacturing specification in effect at the time of manufacture, including yield strength,
ultimate tensile strength, and chemical composition of materials.
o Must be designed and constructed to accommodate the passage of instrumented internal inspection devices in accordance with NACE SP0102, Section 7. This does not apply to the following:
 Manifolds
 Station piping such as at compressor stations, meter stations, or regulator stations
 Crossovers
 Sizes of pipe for which an instrumented internal device is not commercially available
 Transmission lines, operated in conjunction with a distribution system which are installed in Class 4 locations
• For steel transmission pipeline segments constructed on or before July 1, 2020, the following
documentation shall be retained for the life of the pipeline if they are available:
o Pipe design and the determination of design pressure in accordance with §192.103 and
§192.105.
o Physical characteristics of the pipeline, including diameter, yield strength, ultimate tensile
strength, wall thickness, seam type, and chemical composition of materials for pipe.
o Manufacturing standard and pressure rating for valves, flanges, fittings, branch
connections, extruded outlets, anchor forgings, and other components with material yield
strength grades of 42,000 psi (X42) or greater and with nominal diameters of greater than
2 inches.
Transmission Line- Internal Corrosion Control Each new transmission line and each replacement of line pipe, valve, fitting, or other line component in an onshore transmission line that was installed after May 23, 2007 must have features incorporated into its
design and construction to reduce the risk of internal corrosion per the requirements of §192.476. At a minimum, unless it is impracticable or unnecessary to do so, it must:
• Be configured to reduce the risk that liquids will collect in the line
• Have effective liquid removal features whenever the configuration would allow liquids to collect
• Allow use of devices for monitoring internal corrosion at locations with significant potential for internal corrosion There are design features that can be incorporated to address the requirements above including:

5 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

1. Minimizing dead ends and low areas 2. Minimizing aerial crossings, since these can result in variation of temperature 3. Designing for turbulent flow, in which the velocity at a given point varies erratically in magnitude and direction, to decrease the chance of liquids separating from the flow and accumulating 4. Designing a pipeline to minimize entry of water and corrosive gases at receipt locations
5. Providing slam valves to isolate systems when corrosive gas is expected 6. Applying coatings to interior walls to inhibit internal corrosion 7. Identifying critical low spots and instrument the pipeline to monitor relevant operating conditions (temperature, pressure, velocity, dew point) 8. Evaluating seasonal nature of delivery and capacity patterns and design to avoid no flow or low flow conditions
9. Including equipment to evaluate gas characteristics and 10. Including equipment to allow sampling at key areas, such as pig traps, isolated sections with no flow, dead ends, and river and road crossings
When there are changes to the configuration of a transmission line, an evaluation must be done on the impact of the change in regard to internal corrosion risk to the downstream portion of an existing onshore
transmission line and provide for removal of liquids and monitoring of internal corrosion as appropriate. Records must be maintained to demonstrate compliance with this requirement. If it is impractical or unnecessary to incorporate design features from 1 - 3 listed above, it shall be documented through
construction records and as-built drawings.
Transmission Line- Approval of Change
When considering a modification to Avista’s transmission assets, an Approval of Change to Transmission Pipeline System form is required to be filled out during the design or planning process. This form shall be
forwarded to the appropriate manager for approval of the change prior to the design or change. See Section 13.4, Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP), for a list of changes with the
associated approving manager.
Part A of the Approval of Change to Transmission Pipeline System form is filled out by the individual initiating the proposed change to the system and includes a list of reasons for making the proposed
change. The initiator chooses the appropriate reason driving the change to the transmission pipeline system and provides a description of the proposed change(s). The initiator then signs and dates the form
and forwards the form to the appropriate manager for approval. Part B – Preliminary Review is then filled out by the manager. If approved, the form then goes to the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager for
processing if there are any conditions of approval identified as outlined in Avista’s Transmission IMP Plan, Section 13 - Management of Change Plan. The Pipeline Integrity Program Manager will file the
document as appropriate.
Reporting of Proposed Construction of Transmission Main (WA)

WAC 480-93-160:
prior to the construction or replacement of any segment of a gas transmission pipeline equal to or
greater than 100 feet in length. Emergency repairs are exempt from this rule.

6 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Design of Pipeline Components Company approved pipeline components shall meet the requirements of Part 192, Subpart D. Pressure ratings for Company approved fittings, valves, and other piping components shall be equal to or greater than the MAOP for the pipeline being built. Design of pipeline components shall be based on unit stresses equivalent to those allowed for comparable material in pipe or based upon a pressure rating
established by the manufacturer by pressure testing that component or a prototype of the component. In addition, fittings, valves, and other piping components to be tested as part of the pipeline system must be able to withstand the test pressure, which is generally a minimum of 1.5 times the proposed MAOP. Each fitting used to make a hot tap must be designed for at least the MAOP of the pipeline system. Welded branch connections made to pipe in the form of a single connection, header, or manifold as a series of connections must be designed to ensure that the strength of the pipeline system is not reduced
by taking into account the stresses in the remaining pipe wall due to the opening in the pipe or header, the shear stresses produced by the pressure acting on the area of the branch opening, and external loadings due to thermal movement, weight, and vibration. Branch sizes larger than 2 inches in diameter must be evaluated per ASME B31.8, Section 831.42.
Extruded outlets must be suitable for anticipated service conditions and must be at least equal to the
design strength of the pipe and other fittings in the pipeline to which it is attached. Steel butt weld fittings must have pressure and temperature ratings based on stresses for pipe of the same or equivalent material. The actual bursting strength of the fitting must at least equal the computed
bursting strength of pipe of the designed material and wall thickness, as determined by a prototype that was tested to at least the pressure required for the pipeline to which it is being added. Components
fabricated by welding shall be made from standard pipe and fittings. Prefabricated units must meet the requirements of §192.153.
Field fabricated fittings (e.g. orange-peel caps and reducers) may not be used without prior approval from
Gas Engineering. Field fabricated fittings are not approved for use on pipelines that are to operate at a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of the SMYS of the pipe. This does not include mitering of weld elbow
fittings as discussed in Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains.
Flat closures (circular plate) may only be used on systems with an MAOP of 60 psig or less and on pipe that is 2 inches nominal diameter and smaller. Fish tails (pinch and weld) shall not be used.
Threaded fittings shall not be used on aboveground pipeline facilities 3 inch and larger without concurrence by Gas Engineering. The minimum metal thickness for threaded fittings may not be less
than specified for the pressure and temperatures in the applicable standards as referenced in Part 192. When close all-threaded nipples are used, the remaining wall thickness must meet the minimum wall
thickness requirements.
Connections made of lead or other easily damaged material may not be used in the installation of meters or regulators.
Pipeline systems should be welded where possible. Welding provides a stronger joint with less likelihood
of future leakage.
Full encirclement type line stopper fittings should be used on steel pipelines with an MAOP greater than 60 psig. Full encirclement fittings provide added stability for the tapping assembly. Generally, service valve installations do not require full encirclement fittings. Partial encirclement or top-stopper type fittings

7 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

may be used on pipelines with an MAOP greater than 60 psig provided the pipe and tapping gear are properly supported to minimize the stresses induced during tapping and stopping. Joining of Steel Pipeline Components Mechanical fittings shall not be used to join steel pipe with the exception of bolted valves, flanges,
expansion joints, pressure couplings, threaded connections, and Victaulic couplings. In each case, the assembly must be properly rated to meet or exceed the pipeline system MAOP. Threaded connections shall not be used on underground pipeline systems. Flanged connections should also be avoided on underground pipeline systems.
Flanged Connections Flanges and flange accessories must be designed to meet the minimum requirements of ASME B16.5, MSS SP-44, or equivalent. Each flange assembly must be rated to operate at the MAOP of the system
and must maintain its physical and chemical properties at all temperatures the system may operate in. ASTM A105 STEEL PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS (ASME B16.5)

Steel flange ratings are often referred to in any of the following ways, all of which have the same meaning:
Class 150 ANSI 150
ASA 150 150 pound 150 # 150 LB
For flange joints, the bolting (bolts or stud bolts) used shall extend completely through the nuts and be in
conformance with ANSI B31.8 Section 831.22 and ASME B16.5 Section 5.3.
Between the temperatures of -20 degrees F and 400 degrees F, ANSI 150 and ANSI 300 flange joints should use ASTM A307 Gr. B bolting; this is classified as “Low Strength”. Outside this temperature range
and for ratings higher than ANSI 300, bolting shall conform to ASTM A193 Grade B7, or as defined by ASME B16.5 as “High Strength”.
When using ASTM A307 bolting, either ASTM A563 or ASTM A194 nuts may be used. When using ASTM
A193 bolting, only ASTM A194 nuts may be used. Studs shall be used on ANSI 600 flange joints and greater. See table below for a summary:

Rating in PSIG
Temperature (°F) ANSI 150 ANSI 300 ANSI 600
−20 to 100 285 740 1480
101 to 200 260 675 1360
201 to 300 230 655 1310

8 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

FLANGE and FASTENER COMBINATIONS MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
Flange Type, ANSI Bolts / Studs Nuts Gaskets
150 FF ASTM A307 Grade B –
∗
ASTM A563 Grade A,
Heavy Hex Type E
150 RF ASTM A307 Grade B –
∗
ASTM A563 Grade A,
Heavy Hex Type F
300 RF ASTM A307 Grade B –
Bolts or Studs ∗ ASTM A563 Grade A, Heavy Hex Type F
600 RF ASTM A193 Grade B7 – Studs Only ASTM A194 Grade 2H, Heavy Hex Type F
*When the operating temperature will be outside −20F to 450F, use ASTM A193 Grade B7 bolts and ASTM A194 Grade 2H nuts (see ASME B31.8, paragraph 831.22[b]). SAE Grade 8 bolt and nuts may be found in the field and are acceptable but should not be installed on new ANSI 150 and 300 applications. ASTM A193, A194, and A307 hardware is stamped with its grade, ASTM 563 Grade A nuts are not marked. Type E gaskets are a full-faced gasket with the same outside diameter as the flange. Precision cut holes match the bolt size and pattern for the intended flange. This design facilitates proper alignment of the gasket during installation and keeps foreign material from shorting the flange insulation. Type E gaskets are only to be used when bolting flat faced flanges. Type F gaskets are made to fit the raised face portion of the flange only. As there are no bolts holes in the Type F gasket, the inside diameter of the bolt hole circle is slightly smaller than the outside diameter of the gasket, assuring an exact, automatic positioning of the gasket.
Supports - General Each pipeline and its associated equipment must be anchored or supported to prevent undue strain on connected equipment, resist longitudinal forces caused by a bend or offset in the pipe, and prevent or damp out excessive vibrations. Each mechanical pipeline support or anchor must be made of durable, noncombustible material, and must be designed with enough flexibility to allow free expansion and contraction between supports. Supports or anchors shall not be welded to the carrier pipe. Supports or anchors should be mechanically attached to carrier pipe and cathodic isolation should be provided where needed. Supports should also have the ability to be lowered away from the gas carrying pipe to allow for atmospheric corrosion inspection. For exposed transmission pipelines operating at a stress level 50 percent or more of SMYS, a support must be provided by a member that completely encircles the pipe.

9 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Thermal Contraction and Expansion Steel pipe expands or contracts at a rate of 0.000078 inch for every foot of pipe subjected to a 1-degree F temperature change. Therefore, the following equation may be used to calculate thermal expansion or contraction in steel pipe:
δ = 0.000078 (L)( ∆t)
Where: δ = elongation if (+) or contraction if (-) (in)
L = length of steel pipe (ft)
∆t = change in temperature (°F), (+) if increase or (-) if decrease Longitudinal Stress The following equations may be used to calculate longitudinal stress induced by thermal change for restrained pipe:
σ+ = ∝E(∆t)
σ+ = 195 (∆t)
Where: σ+ = longitudinal stress (psi)
∝ = coefficient of thermal expansion = 6.5x10-6 (in/in-°F) ∆t = change in temperature (°F), (+) if increase or (-) if decrease E = modulus of elasticity = 30x106 psi
Deflection and Bending Stress Supports must be spaced so as not to cause excessive deflection and excessive stress in the pipeline being supported. The following equations may be of assistance in calculating deflection and bending stresses:

DEFLECTION
Max deflection of empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on a single span with free ends:
∆ = 22.5 WL^4
El

10 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Max deflection of empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on a continuous span:
∆ = 22.5 WL^4
El

Max deflection of empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on a single span with fixed
ends:
∆ = 22.5 WL^4
El

Where: ∆ = deflection (in) W = weight of pipe (lbs/ft). See the Steel Pipe Data Table in this specification L = distance between supports (ft) E = modules of elasticity (psi) I = moment of inertia (in4). See the Steel Pipe Data Table in this specification
BENDING STRESS

Max bending stress in empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on a single span with free ends:
σB = 1.5 WL^2
Z
Max bending stress in empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on a continuous span:
σB = 1.2 WL^2
Z
Max bending stress in empty pipe caused by its weight between supports based on single span with fixed ends:
σB = WL^2
Z
Where: σB = bending stress (psi)

11 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

W = weight of pipe (lbs/ft). See the Steel Pipe Data Table in this specification L = distance between supports (ft) Z = section modulus (in³). See the Steel Pipe Data Table in this specification
Seismic Supports In seismic prone areas, pipe supports, and hangers should be designed to withstand seismic forces. In addition to static loads of pipeline systems, use an additional 0.2g for vertical seismic force and 0.3g for horizontal seismic force (i.e., supports and hangers must be able to withstand 120 percent of load weight of pipeline system in the vertical direction and 30 percent of load weight in the horizontal direction).
Torsional Stress
Design considerations must be observed if the pipe will be subjected to torsional stresses. This most
often will occur when a pipe is supported on a structure such as a bridge crossing in a “double offset” configuration. Stresses may be induced through temperature change or by other load factors.
Maximum torsional stress of an empty pipe with restrained ends (for the section being twisted) is:
τmax = Tro
J

Where: τmax = maximum torque (psi) T = torque (in-lb)
ro = outside radius = do/2 (in) J = Polar moment of inertia = π/32 (do4 – di4)
Where: do = outside diameter (in)
di = inside diameter (in)
Washington State Proximity Considerations

WAC 480-93-020:

12 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Gas facilities having a MAOP greater than 500 PSIG shall not be operated within 500 feet of the places described below:
• A building that is in existence or under construction prior to the date authorization for construction is filed with the WUTC and that is not owned and used by the petitioning operator in its gas operations; or
• A high occupancy structure or area such as a playground, recreation area, outdoor theater, or other place of public assembly, which is occupied by 20 or more persons, on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period (the days and weeks need not be consecutive), which is in existence or under construction prior to the date authorization for pipeline construction is filed with the commission; and
• A public highway, as defined in RCW 81.80.010(3).
Gas Facilities having a MAOP greater than 250 PSIG and including 500 PSIG shall not be operated
within 100 feet of the places described below:
• A building that is in existence or under construction prior to the date authorization for construction is filed with the WUTC and that is not owned and used by the petitioning operator in its gas operations; or
• A high occupancy structure or area such as a playground, recreation area, outdoor theater, or other place of public assembly, which is occupied by 20 or more persons, on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period (the days and weeks need not be consecutive), which is in existence or under construction prior to the date authorization for pipeline construction is filed with the commission.
For proposed new construction of pipelines having the characteristics listed above, Avista must provide
documentation proving that it is not practical to select an alternate route that will avoid such locations and further provide documents that demonstrate that the operator has considered the possibility of the future development of the area and has designed the pipeline facilities accordingly.
During the review process, Avista must provide maps and records to the Commission showing the exact location of the pipeline and the shortest direct distance to the places described above. Upon request of the Commission, Avista must provide maintenance, construction, and operational history of the pipeline system. Also, Avista must provide an aerial photograph showing the exact location of the pipeline in reference to the places listed above.
Protection of Aboveground Steel Pipelines Each aboveground transmission line or main not located in inland navigable water areas must be protected from accidental damage by vehicular traffic or other similar causes, either by being placed at a safe distance from the traffic or by installing some type of barricade.
Clearances & Cover See Specification 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling for the requirements of cover and clearances for steel pipelines.

13 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Easement Considerations When designing pipe to be installed in an easement, the minimum preferred easement width is 20 feet extending 10 feet in each direction from the centerline of the pipe. The easement language should ensure the Company’s ability to maintain access to the pipe and restrict installation of structures, bushes, trees, and other vegetation that could be detrimental to the buried facility within the easement.

14 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Steel Pipe Data Tables
The following tables provide useful dimensional and engineering data for various steel pipe specifications:

NOM. PIPE WALL THICKNESS DIMENSIONS WEIGHTS CIRCUMFERENCE AREAS DESIGN PROPERTIES VOLUME
IRON PIPE SIZE
SCH. NO. OUTSIDE DIA. INSIDE DIA.
WALL THICK- NESS
EMPTY PIPE WATER IN OF INERTIA SECTION MODULUS
RADIUS OF GYRATION EXTERNAL INTERNAL FLOW METAL INSIDE PIPE
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
3 STD.
40
3.500 3.500 3.500
3.188 3.124 3.068
.156 .188 .216
5.57 6.65 7.58
3.46 3.32 3.20
10.996 10.996 10.996
10.015 9.814 9.638
7.982 7.665 7.393
1.639 1.956 2.228
2.296 2.691 3.017
1.312 1.538 1.724
1.184 1.173 1.164
.0554 .0532 .0513
.4140 .3982 .3840
4 STD. - 40 4.500 4.500 4.124 4.026 .188 .237 8.66 10.79 5.79 5.52 14.137 14.137 12.956 12.648 13.358 12.730 2.547 3.174 5.930 7.233 2.636 3.214 1.526 1.510 .0928 .0884 .6939 .6613
6 STD.
- 40
6.625 6.625 6.625
6.281 6.249 6.065
.172 .188 .280
11.85 12.92 18.97
13.4 13.3 13.5
20.813 20.813 20.813
19.732 19.632 19.054
30.96 30.67 28.89
3.49 3.80 5.58
18.16 19.71 28.14
5.48 5.95 8.50
2.28 2.28 2.25
.2152 .2130 .2006
1.6096 1.5932 1.5008
8
STD.
40
8.625 8.625 8.625 8.625 8.625
8.248 8.219 8.187 8.063 7.951
.188 .203 .219 .281 .322
16.94 18.30 19.66 25.07 28.55
23.2 23.0 22.8 22.1 21.7
27.096 27.096 27.096 27.096 27.096
25.915 25.821 25.720 25.331 25.073
53.44 53.06 52.64 51.05 50.03
4.98 5.38 5.78 7.37 8.40
44.37 47.64 51.12 64.18 72.49
10.29 11.05 11.85 14.86 16.21
2.98 2.98 2.97 2.95 2.94
.3711 .3685 .3656 .3546 .3474
2.7763 2.7562 2.7347 2.6524 2.5988
10
- STD.
20 40
10.750 10.750 10.750 10.750
10.344 10.312 10.250 10.020
.203 .219 .250 .365
23.87 24.63 28.04 40.48
36.4 36.2 35.8 34.2
33.772 33.772 33.772 33.772
32.497 32.396 32.201 31.479
84.04 83.52 82.52 78.85
6.73 7.25 8.25 11.91
93.57 100.48 113.71 160.73
17.41 18.69 21.16 29.90
3.73 3.72 3.71 3.67
.5836 .5800 .5730 .5476
4.3654 4.3396 4.2885 4.0963
12
STD.
20 12.750 12.750 12.750 12.750 12.750
12.312 12.250 12.188 12.126 12.000
.219 .250 .281 .312 .375
29.3 33.4 37.4 47.4 49.6
51.6 51.1 50.6 50.0 49.0
40.055 40.055 40.055 40.055 40.055
38.679 38.485 38.290 38.095 37.699
119.1 117.2 116.7 115.5 113.1
8.62 9.82 11.01 12.19 14.58
169.3 191.8 214.0 235.9 278.3
26.5 30.1 33.6 37.0 43.8
4.43 4.42 4.41 4.40 4.38
.8268 .8185 .8104 .8020 .7854
6.1847 6.1225 6.0619 5.9992 5.9752
16
STD.
10 20 30
16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
15.500 15.435 15.376 15.250
.250 .281 .312 .375
42.0 47.0 52.0 63.0
81.8 81.1 80.5 79.2
50.265 50.265 50.265 50.265
48.695 48.500 48.305 47.909
188.7 187.2 185.7 182.7
12.37 13.88 15.38 18.41
384.0 429.0 473.0 562.0
48.0 53.6 59.2 70.3
5.57 5.56 5.55 5.53
1.3104 1.2999 1.2895 1.2684
9.8008 9.7239 9.6460 9.4885
18 STD.
18.000 18.000 18.000
17.438 17.375 17.250
.281 .312 .375
53.0 59.0 71.0
103.5 102.5 101.3
56.549 56.549 56.549
54.783 54.585 54.192
238.8 237.1 233.7
15.64 17.36 20.78
614.0 679.0 807.0
68.2 75.5 89.6
6.27 6.25 6.23
1.6585 1.6465 1.6230
12.4065 12.3160 12.1405

15 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

PIPE WALL THICKNESS DIMENSIONS WEIGHTS CIRCUMFERENCE AREAS DESIGN PROPERTIES VOLUME
IRON PIPE SIZE
SCH. NO. OUTSIDE DIA. INSIDE DIA.
WALL THICK- NESS
EMPTY PIPE WATER IN EXTERNAL INTERNAL MOMENT OF INERTIA (I)
SECTION MODULUS
RADIUS OF GYRATION INSIDE PIPE FLOW METAL
20
STD.
20
20.000 20.000 20.000 20.000 20.000
19.438 19.376 19.312 19.250 19.188
.281 .312 .344 .375 .406
59.0 66.0 78.0 79.0 85.0
128.6 127.8 126.9 126.1 125.3
62.832 62.832 62.832 62.832 62.832
61.066 60.872 60.670 60.476 60.281
296.8 294.9 292.9 291.0 289.2
17.41 19.30 21.24 23.12 24.99
846.0 935.0 1026.0 1113.0 1200.0
84.6 93.5 102.6 111.3 120.0
6.97 6.96 6.95 6.94 6.93
2.0608 2.0476 2.0341 2.0211 2.0081
15.4157 15.3175 15.2154 15.1189 15.0206
22 STD.
20
22.000 22.000 22.000
21.438 21.376 21.250
.281 .312 .375
65.0 72.0 87.0
156.4 155.5 153.7
69.115 69.115 69.115
67.349 67.155 66.759
361.0 358.9 354.7
19.17 21.26 25.48
1131.0 1250.0 1490.0
102.8 113.7 135.4
7.68 7.67 7.65
2.5067 2.4922 2.4629
18.7511 18.6428 18.4237
24
STD.
10 20
24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000 24.000
23.438 23.376 23.312 23.250 23.188 23.125
.281 .312 .344 .375 .406 .438
71.0 79.0 87.0 95.0 102.0 110.0
187.0 186.0 185.0 184.0 183.0 181.8
75;398 75.398 75.398 75.398 75.398 75.398
73.633 73.438 72.237 73.042 72.847 72.649
431.5 429.2 426.8 424.6 422.3 420.0
20.94 23.22 25.56 27.83 30.09 32.39
1472.0 1629.0 1789.0 1942.0 2095.0 2248.0
122.7 135.7 149.1 161.9 174.6 187.4
8.39 8.38 8.36 8.35 8.34 8.33
2.9962 2.9804 2.9641 2.9483 2.9326 2.9167
22.4130 22.2946 22.1711 22.0549 21.9359 21.8167
26
STD.
10
26.000 26.000 26.000 26.000
25.376 25.312 25.250 25.188
.312 .344 .375 .406
86.0 94.0 103.0 111.0
219.2 218.1 217.0 215.9
81.681 81.681 81.681 81.681
79.721 79.520 79.325 79.130
505.8 503.2 500.7 498.3
25.18 27.73 30.19 32.64
2077.0 2282.0 2478.0 2673.0
159.8 175.5 190.6 205.7
9.08 9.07 9.06 9.04
3.5122 3.4945 3.4774 3.4603
26.2727 26.1386 26.0125 25.8830
30
STD.
10
30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000 30.000
29.376 29.312 29.250 29.188 29.125
.312 .344 .375 .406 .438
99.0 109.0 119.0 128.0 138.0
293.7 292.4 291.0 289.0 288.7
94.248 94.248 94.248 94.248 94.248
92.287 92.086 91.892 91.696 91.499
677.8 674.8 672.0 669.1 666.2
29.10 32.05 34.90 37.75 40.63
3206.0 3524.0 3829.0 4133.0 4440.0
213.8 234.9 255.3 275.5 296.0
10.50 10.49 10.47 10.46 10.45
4.7067 4.6862 4.6664 4.6466 4.6264
35.2082 35.0526 34.9069 34.7566 34.6054
34
STD.

34.000 34.000 34.000 34.000
33.312 33.250 33.188 33.124
.344 .375 .406 .438
124.0 135.0 146.0 157.0
377.7 376.3 374.9 373.4
106.814 106.814 106.814 106.814
104.653 104.458 104.283 104.062
871.5 868.3 865.1 861.7
35.37 39.61 42.84 46.18
5153.0 5599.0 6045.0 6504.0
303.0 329.4 355.6 382.6
11.90 11.89 11.88 11.87
6.0524 6.0299 6.0074 5.9843
45.2752 45.1068 44.9357 44.7656
36
STD. XS
20 30
36.000 36.000 36.000 36.000 36.000 36.000 36.000
35.250 35.188 35.124 35.062 35.000 34.750 34.626
.375 .406 .438 .469 .500 .625 .687
143.0 154.0 166.0 178.0 190.0 236.0 259.0
422.9 421.4 419.9 418.4 416.9 411.0 408.1
113.097 113.097 113.097 113.097 113.097 113.097 113.097
110.741 110.546 110.345 110.151 109.956 109.170 108.781
975.9 972.5 968.9 965.5 962.1 948.4 941.7
41.97 45.40 48.93 52.35 55.76 69.46 76.22
6659.0 7191.0 7737.0 8263.0 8786.0 10,868.0 11,885.0
369.9 399.5 429.8 459.0 488.1 603.8 660.3
12.60 12.59 12.57 12.56 12.55 12.51 12.49
6.7771 6.7533 6.7288 6.7050 6.6813 6.5862 6.5393
50.6964 50.5182 50.3347 50.1571 49.9799 49.2684 48.9174
42
STD. XS
42.000 42.000 42.000
41.188 41.124 41.000
.406 .438 .500
180.0 194.0 221.0
577.3 575.6 572.1
131.947 131.947 131.947
129.396 129.195 128.805
1,332.4 1,328.3 1,302.3
53.05 57.19 65.19
11,474.0 12,350.0 14,036.0
546.4 588.1 668.4
14.71 14.70 14.67
9.2528 9.2240 9.1684
69.2100 69.0000 68.5800

SURFACE AREAS OF PIPE NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 34 36 42
AREAS SQ. .275 .344 .439 .497 .622 .916 1.178 1.173 2.26 2.81 3.34 4.19 4.71 5.24 5.76 6.28 6.81 7.85 8.90 9.42 10.99

16 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Manufacturing Design and Composition of Line Pipe Steel pipe used for natural gas piping shall meet the specifications of API 5L, ASTM A-53, or ASTM A-106 as listed in §192.7 documents incorporated by reference or to use from a previous edition of specifications it must meet the requirements of §192.144. Each specification requires certain chemical and physical tests are met by the manufacturer.
ASTM A-53 covers welded and seamless black and galvanized pipe. It is suitable for coiling, bending, welding, and general fabrication. In addition, seamless A-53 pipe can be flanged. This specification requires tensile, hydrostatic, flattening, coiling, and bending tests. Chemical analyses are also specified. Grades A (30,000 psi SMYS) and B (35,000 psi SMYS) are covered by this specification.
ASTM A-106 covers only carbon steel pipe. It can be used in high-pressure and high-temperature service as well as in forming applications. ASTM A-106 requires hydrostatic, tensile, bending, coiling, and flattening tests and calls for more complete analysis than A-53. Grades A and B are covered by this specification.
API 5L provides standards for seamless and welded pipe used in conveying gas, water and oil in both the
natural gas and oil industries. API 5L requires hydrostatic, tensile, flattening, and bending tests. Chemical analyses are also specified. Grades A and B are covered by this specification as well as Grades X-42 (42,000 psi SMYS) to Grade X-80 (80,000 psi SMYS).
Gas line pipe should be specified by Gas Engineering to assure the appropriate pipe is ordered for the particular design application. Currently Avista’s welding procedures permit welding of Grade B or greater
yield strength pipe.
Pipe Specification
When specifying pipe, the following information should be provided:
• Outside diameter and wall thickness
• Pipe specification and grade
• Longitudinal seam welding process
• Coating: specify bare or type of coating Example specifications: A) 16" x 0.250" W.T., API 5L Grade X-42, ERW, FBE coated B) 4" x 0.237" W.T., API 5L Grade B, seamless, bare C) 3/4" x 0.113" W.T., ASTM A-106 Grade B, seamless, FBE coated The following grade specifications are normally used for 2-inch and larger steel line pipe: ASTM A-53 Grade B (35,000 psi SMYS) API 5L Grade B (35,000 psi SMYS) API 5L Grade X-42 (42,000 psi SMYS) API 5L Grade X-52 (52,000 psi SMYS) API 5L Grade X-60 (60,000 psi SMYS) API 5L Grade X-65 (65,000 psi SMYS)

17 OF 17 SPEC. 2.12

Specification ASTM A-106 Grade B, ASTM A-53 Grade B, or API 5L Grade B (35,000 psi SMYS) seamless shall be used for size smaller than 2 inches. API 5L Grades higher than X-52 are typically utilized for pipelines with high operating pressures and large diameters. API 5L Grades B through X-52 and ASTM A-53 Grade B are the most economical choices for distribution pressure. They are also more ductile and easier to work than higher yield strength pipe.
For new pipe, longitudinal seams should be specified as seamless, electric resistance weld (ERW) or double submerged-arc-weld (DSAW). Generally, all weld types are satisfactory, and consideration should be based on price. Sometimes seamless pipe is specified for station pipe to avoid tapping through a longitudinal seam. The following are the available longitudinal seam welding processes by pipe diameter size:
3/4 inch – 2 inch seamless 3 inch – 16 inch electric resistance weld or seamless 18 inch – 36 inch double submerged-arc-weld
Pressure Testing
New, replaced, or re-connected pipelines and facilities transporting natural gas must be pressure tested. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing for minimum testing requirements.
Corrosion Protection
Steel pipeline systems must be cathodically protected. Generally, buried facilities are wrapped or coated with a protective coating that meets the requirements of §192.461. Aboveground facilities are usually
painted, meeting the requirements of §192.479. A Cathodic Protection Technician should be consulted to recommend the appropriate cathodic protection system during the design stage of a new steel pipeline.
Refer to Specification 2.3, Cathodic Protection.
AC Mitigation on New Steel Pipelines
During the design of a new steel pipeline, it should be determined whether it will be susceptible to detrimental effects from stray electrical currents. Things to consider are the physical location, particularly
a location that may subject the new pipeline to stray currents from other underground facilities, including other pipelines, and induced currents from electrical transmission lines, whether aboveground or
underground. A qualified Cathodic Protection Technician should review and recommend a design for AC mitigation where needed. Also, a qualified Cathodic Protection Technician should be present during
construction, when applicable, to identify, mitigate and monitor any detrimental stray currents that might damage new pipelines. Refer to Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
1 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

2.13 PIPE DESIGN – PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for designing and testing plastic gas piping systems that meets applicable regulatory codes and provide a safe, reliable operating system.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.59, §192.63, §192.121, §192.204, §192.321; §192.325, §192.327, §192.375 WAC 480-93-178
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.3, Cathodic Protection Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Spec. 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: General New polyethylene pipelines and fittings shall meet the provisions of applicable ASTM specifications, be
resistant to chemicals with which contact may be anticipated and be free of visible defects as noted in §192.59. Applicable ASTM specifications include ASTM D2513 – PE Pipe & Fittings, ASTM F1055 – Electrofusion type PE Fittings, ASTM F1924 – Plastic Mechanical fittings for PE Pipe, ASTM F1948 – Metallic Mechanical Fittings for PE pipe and ASTM F1978 – Factory Assembled Anodeless Risers and Transition Fittings for PE Pipe. Used polyethylene pipe shall not be installed.
Plastic (polyethylene) pipe and components may be used for underground construction of pipeline to operate at a MAOP not to exceed 60 psig. As material and installation costs for plastic are usually less than for steel, plastic is usually preferred for applications up to 60 psig.
Plastic pipe and components may be used for aboveground construction only as described within this specification.
Plastic pipe and components can be used for mains and services up through 6-inch in diameter (PHMSA allows larger sizes but Avista is not tooled to handle them).
Before using a new material, Gas Engineering will evaluate and approve the material by following the Adopting a New Gas Material Process Checklist. Following this checklist will ensure the new material meets specification and the proper training has been completed with appropriate Avista and contractor personnel.
Markings on Plastic Pipe and Components
Polyethylene pipe and components shall be marked per the requirements of ASTM Specifications D2513 & F2897. The markings shall be applied to remain legible under normal handling and installation practices.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
2 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

The markings on PE pipe shall be in black, stenciled continuously along the length of the pipe in increments no further apart than two feet including the following information:
• Nominal pipe size (IPS, CTS, or OD)
• SDR (Standard dimension ratio) or minimum wall thickness
• Manufacturer’s name or trademark
• “GAS” and “ASTM D2513”
• Material designation (PE 2406/2708)
• Three additional code letters as required per ASTM D2513 (the first identifies the temperature of pressure rating; the second letter identifies the hydrostatic design basis at highest recommended
temperature; and the third letter identifies the melt index). “CEE” is the proper code for the PE 2406/2708 resin Avista is currently using.
• Appropriate code information that will enable manufacturer to identify pipe (i.e. lot number with NR (No Rework), date code, plant code etc.)
• Additional Information (i.e. coil number, feet, alphanumeric code, etc.)
• A representative 16-character tracking and traceability identifier per ASTM F2897.
Markings on plastic fittings or non-pipe components shall be marked on the body or hub of the assembly
including the following information:
• “ASTM D2513” as well as the applicable fitting specification
• Manufacturer’s name or trademark
• Size designation
• Material type designation
• Three additional code letters as required per ASTM D2513 (See bullet item 5 above)
• Appropriate code that will enable the manufacturer to identify date and location of manufacture,
fitting production and resin lots, and any additional information agreed upon by the manufacturer.
• A representative 16-character tracking and traceability identifier per ASTM F2897.
Pipe Print Line on Pipe Example 1” CTS X 0.090 WALL - - DURA-LINE POLYPIPE POLYTOUGH GDY 20
Pipe Diameter Sizing System (CTS or IPS) Standard Dimension or Minimum Wall Thickness Manufacturer’s Name & Trademark Gas Distribution Yellow (20 = 2708)
- - GAS - - PE2708 - - CEE ASTM D2513 - - S01J64NR - - 2EB Material Designation Code Elevated Temperature Code Standard the Pipe is Designed to Lot Number Resin Lot Code Plant Code
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
3 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

- - 01NOV13 500 FEET Date Pipe Manufactured Running Footage
Design Formulas The maximum pressure allowed for plastic piping systems is determined in accordance with the following formula found in §192.121: P = .32 x 2S x t/(D – t) P = .32 x 2S/(SDR – 1) Where: P = Design pressure in PSIG, (Avista max: 60 PSIG) S = Long term hydrostatic strength in PSI. Use 1250 PSI for pipe operating at less than 100 degrees F; use 1000 PSI for pipe operating between 100 degrees F and 140 degrees F (Note: Avista’s 60 PSIG max design pressure for plastic pipe is based upon a 1000 PSI hydrostatic strength (up to 140 degrees F)) t = minimum wall thickness in inches D = specified outside diameter in inches SDR = standard dimension ratio, the ratio of the average specified outside diameter to the minimum specified wall thickness. The following sizes and wall thicknesses of polyethylene plastic pipe are approved for use. Use of other sizes and wall thickness should be reviewed and approved by Gas Engineering:
NOMINAL POLYETHYLENE PIPE DIMENSIONS
SIZE IN.
1/2 CTS (5/8 OD) 7 0.090 0.625 0.445 0.065
3/4 IPS 11 0.095 1.050 0.860 0.123
1-1/4 IPS*** 10 0.166 1.660 1.328 0.335
2 IPS 11 0.216 2.375 1.943 0.631
3 IPS*** 11.5 0.304 3.500 2.892 1.317
4 IPS** 11.5 0.391 4.500 3.718 2.176
6 IPS** 11.5 0.576 6.625 5.473 4.717
*SDR - Standard dimension ratio is calculated by dividing the average O.D. of the pipe by the minimum wall thickness in inches. ** NOTE - Coiled 4-inch IPS and 6-inch IPS pipe may be used; if an approved pipe straightener is employed. *** Pipe sizes may be found in the field but are no longer used for new construction.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
4 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

Pressure/Temperature Limitations Under normal conditions, buried plastic pipe would not be exposed to a high temperature of 100 degrees F or greater or a low temperature of -20 degrees F or less. The only place where plastic pipe could be subjected to these extreme temperature points would be where the plastic pipe is encased in a service riser or in an above grade steel casing. Approved prefabricated service risers are designed to operate at
60 psig and in a temperature range of -20 degrees F to 140 degrees F. Plastic pipe shall not be used where it could be exposed to a temperature of higher than 140 degrees F or a temperature less than -20 degrees F unless all of the components being installed are rated by the manufacturer for these operating temperatures.
Aboveground Plastic Pipe Plastic pipe is typically installed below ground level, with the exception of when encased in a steel riser as part of a meter set, for a temporary bypass condition, for temporary aboveground installations /
emergency repairs, and when encased on bridge crossings. For temporary aboveground installations, the plastic pipe must be protected from potential damage. The appropriate method of protection will depend
on the project site and associated risk of leaving the aboveground plastic pipe unattended. Possible methods of protection include:
• Install barricades and/or fencing around the aboveground plastic pipe
• Wrap the plastic pipe in yellow caution tape
• Build an aboveground conduit casing for the aboveground plastic pipe
If the temporary aboveground plastic pipe will be in place for one week or longer, Gas Engineering should
be contacted to discuss an appropriate protection plan.
In Washington State, notification of the WUTC is required if the temporary installation will exceed 30 days.
Plastic pipe shall not be installed where it would be exposed in a pit, vault or box, except in a valve box
that is installed for a plastic valve.
Bridge Crossings
Federal regulations permit installation of polyethylene pipe on bridges. Specific design considerations must be employed to assure that the plastic is installed in a safe manner. Gas Engineering shall design polyethylene pipe bridge crossings. Refer to Specification 2.15, Bridge Design, and Specification 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installation.
Plastic Pipe under Waterways Plastic pipe should not be installed under a waterway susceptible to scouring or migration unless it is adequately protected. This can be accomplished using additional cover or by utilizing a steel casing.
WAC 480-93-178 (6)ground is 30 days. Plastic pipe may be installed temporarily aboveground for longer than 30 days if Avista has a written monitoring program and notifies the WUTC by telephone prior to exceeding the 30
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
5 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

Clearances and Cover Refer to Specification 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling for the requirements of cover and clearances for plastic pipelines. Thermal Contraction and Expansion
Pipe must be designed and installed so it and associated fittings will be free of tensile loading as a result of temperature change. Allowance must be made for thermal contraction when plastic pipe is installed on a warm day; otherwise pipe will be in tension when it cools. PE pipe (i.e. PE 2406/2708) expands or contracts at a rate of 0.0001 feet for every foot of pipe subjected to a 1-degree F temperature change. Therefore, the following equation may be used to calculate thermal
expansion or contraction in PE pipe:
δ = 0.0001 (L)( ∆t)
Where: δ = elongation if (+) or contraction if (-) in feet L = length of PE pipe in feet
∆t = change in temperature (°F), (+) if increase or (-) if decrease This equates to approximately 0.1 feet (1.2 inches) of contraction/expansion of pipe per 100 foot length for every 10 degrees F temperature change. This is about 15 times greater than that of steel pipe.
Joining of Plastic Pipelines Only approved methods of heat fusion, electrofusion or approved mechanical fittings shall be used to join polyethylene pipe. Plastic pipe may not be joined by a threaded joint or mitered joint. The preferred method of joining for each size of pipe is as follows: Pipe Size Method of Joining
Mains:
Services:
Polyethylene to steel transition joints may be made where MAOP of steel system is 60 psig or less. The transition joint must be made using approved transition fitting. Install a protective sleeve over the fitting to provide support from external forces. Refer to Specifications 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion; 3.24, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) - Electrofusion, and 3.25 Joining of Plastic – Plastic (Polyethylene) Mechanical. The use of an insert stiffener is required with mechanical type transition fittings. The gasket material in the fitting must be compatible with the pipe material.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
6 OF 6 SPEC. 2.13

Cathodic Protection
Steel portions of a plastic system (any valves, risers, and other pressurized steel components) must be cathodically protected either off tracer wire or by use of an anode. Refer to Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection. These are considered short isolated sections of steel that require monitoring. Reference
Specification 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance.
Tracer Wire Solid type coated locating wire (minimum AWG #12) shall be installed with polyethylene pipe since it is not locatable on its own. Horizontal Directional Drill (HDD) installs shall be installed with a tracer wire as
well (minimum AWG #10 should be used). Refer to Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Pipe, Tracer Wire, for details on installing tracer wire. Electric continuity should be maintained at all wire connections. Wire connections are to be formed by use of Avista-approved connectors and/or crimping tool or other approved methods. Refer to Drawing A-36277, Wire Connections, in Specification 3.13,
Pipe Installation – Plastic Mains.
Consideration should be made to install a Little Fink at the end of a main to make access to the locating wire easier. Refer to Drawing B-36271, Test Stations, in Specification 2.32, CP Design.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
1 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

2.14 VALVE DESIGN SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for gas valve selection and installation.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.145, §192.179, §192.181, §192.193, §192.363, §192.365, §192.381, §192.385 WAC 480-93-100
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic Spec. 2.23, Regulator Design Spec. 3.16, Services
Spec. 5.13, Valve Maintenance DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
General
In general, plastic (polyethylene) valves are installed on polyethylene pipelines and steel valves are installed on steel pipelines. Polyethylene valves may only be used for applications where system MAOP is 60 psig or less. Each steel valve must meet the minimum requirements of API 6D, or an equivalent national or international standard that provides an equivalent performance level. Each polyethylene valve must meet
the minimum requirements stipulated in nationally recognized standards specific to PE valves in a gas system. Valves used must be pressure tested to withstand shell and seat pressures to not less than 1.5 times the
maximum service pressure rating. Valve shell and seat tests are normally conducted by the manufacturer.
The valve must have a maximum service pressure rating for temperatures that equal or exceed the maximum service temperature.
No valves shall be installed or reused other than carbon steel, stainless steel, or polyethylene valves. Neither ductile iron valves nor cast iron valves shall be installed or reused. When installing steel valves, weld-end types are preferred over threaded or flanged valves since they are
less prone to leakage.
The valve and its operating device must be accessible and protected from tampering and damage. Underground valves shall be installed in valve boxes or vaults. A marker ball should be installed adjacent to the valve box on the north side and buried at, or just below, the valve box top, giving adequate cover to the ball of about 12” to 18”. Aboveground valves, except service riser and meter set outlet valves, should
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
2 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

be installed with locking assemblies or with valve handles removed or secured in locked stations or buildings. Except for abnormal conditions, service riser and meter outlet valves should not be locked. VALVE TYPES
The following are the primary types of valves used in Avista’s facilities. For a more complete description
of valve types and how they are operated and maintained, refer to Specification 5.13, Valve Maintenance. Steel Plug Valves Steel plug valves historically make up the majority of the existing valves in steel gas distribution systems. These quarter-turn valves have a reduced flow port in a conical plug and are no longer the valve of choice
for new construction or as a replacement valve because they require injection of grease to maintain proper seal and torque. Plug valves 6-inch and larger may require special gearing to aid operation. Steel Gate Valves Steel gate valves are the valve of choice for buried high-pressure applications. They are designed so that
a threaded stem with a steel gate or conical end travels downward and seats in a receptacle to shut off the flow of gas. These rugged and durable valves have a full open flow port and do not require lubricating sealants. Steel gate valves require multiple turns to operate and as a result of this have low operating torques. They are also significantly less expensive size-for-size than comparable heavy-duty plug valves and ball valves. Steel Ball Valves Modern ball valves do not need lubricating and are designed so that gas flows through a machined ball. The port is full open when the valve is cycled by a quarter-turn, making them ideal for use in regulator station designs. Such valves, however, should not routinely be used in throttling applications. In applications where a trunnion-mounted ball valve will have high differential pressures across it, a small
bypass should be considered to equalize the pressure across the valve prior to opening; this will prevent damage to valve seats. In applications intended for throttling or blowdown valves, where pressure cannot be equalized, a plug valve or gate valve should be considered. Approved stock-item ball valves may be used in buried intermediate pressure applications. Care must be taken, however, to assure stem torque ratings are sufficient for buried use. Steel ball valves shall not be used in buried high-pressure applications without the approval of Gas Engineering.
Polyethylene Valves Polyethylene valves are either of ball or plug design and are used in plastic distribution systems. They are quarter-turn type and require minimal torque to operate. These valves do not need lubricating and shall not be used aboveground or in a vault. Polyethylene valves shall only be installed using a butt fusion, spigot and sleeve fittings (if the fitting can be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions) or an electrofusion process. Other mechanical fittings are not approved for the installation of PE valves.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
3 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

Service Line Valves Each service line valve (commonly known as a riser valve) shall be designed to prevent removal of the valve core, except by use of specialized tools. Each service line valve must be installed upstream of the regulator or, if there is no regulator, upstream of the meter. Each service line must have a shutoff valve in a readily accessible location that, if feasible, is outside the building.
The customer may install a fence around the meter set to limit public access and reduce the possibility of vandalism. If locked, an Avista pad lock must be used to allow Avista personnel access to enter the area. The fence must allow sufficient room for maintenance activities to occur and should be installed after consultation with the Gas Meter Shop or the local district office, as applicable. Avista reserves the right to request removal of the fence if the aforementioned conditions of installation are not met.
Excess Flow Valve Performance Standards
Excess flow valves (EFVs) are to be installed per the requirements discussed in Specification 3.16,
Excess Flow Valves. The valve must meet the manufacturer’s standards and industry specification to ensure:
1. The valve will function properly up to the maximum operating pressure to which the valve is rated; 2. The valve will operate for all reasonably expected temperatures for the operating area; 3. At pressures > 10 psig: The valve will close at or not more than 50 percent above the rated closure flow rate specified by the manufacturer; and upon closing, reduce the flow of gas thusly:
a) For an EFV designed to allow pressure to equalize across the valve – allows no more than 5 percent of the manufacturer’s specified closure flow rate, up to a maximum of 20 CFH, or b) For an EFV designed to prevent equalization, allows no more than 0.4 CFH;
4. The valve does not close when the pressure is less than the manufacturer’s minimum specified operating pressure and the flow rate is below the manufacturer’s minimum specified closure flow rate.
An EFV must meet the applicable requirements of subparts B and D of 49 CFR, Part 192. The valve
must be marked or the presence of an EFV on the service line must be identified. The EFV must be located as near as practical to the fitting connecting the service line to the main. Additionally, an EFV should not be installed on a service line where there have been prior problems with contaminants in the gas stream that could cause the valve to malfunction or interfere with the removal of liquids from the line for necessary maintenance. Curb Valves (Underground Service Valves)
Underground service line valves or "curb valves" shall be installed on all services where meter sets are installed inside buildings or where it is impossible to provide ready access to a service line valve (riser valve) at the outside wall of a building. A curb valve shall also be installed on all new or replaced service lines where the installed meter capacity is greater than 1000 CFH and an EFV will not be installed. These curb valves will be considered secondary valves in most cases, see the next subsection,
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
4 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

“Emergency Curb Valves” for exceptions. Curb valves should be located as close to the source main as possible. Consideration should be given to locating the valve so that it will be accessible at all times.
Emergency Curb Valves
Curb valves are considered Emergency Curb Valves when installed on services to buildings in which it
would be difficult to quickly evacuate such as churches, schools, hospitals, jails, and convalescent homes, regardless of the size and pressure of the service line. Additionally, if the meter set is located inside with no outside riser valve, the curb valves shall be designated as an Emergency Curb Valves. Emergency Curb Valves are subject to maintenance on the schedule outlined in Specification 5.13, Valve Maintenance.

Valves at New Housing Developments
When designing a gas distribution system for a new housing development or subdivision, consideration should be given for installing a valve at the entrance to the development or subdivision. The valve will
allow for quick isolation of gas if an incident were to happen in the subdivision.
Criteria for Determining Emergency Operating Plan (EOP) Valves
An EOP valve is a type of emergency valve that is used to divide large gas distribution systems into more manageable zones. Each transmission and distribution system must have specially designated valves,
spaced to reduce the time to shut down a section of main in an emergency. Emergency valve spacing is determined by the operating pressure, the size of the mains, and local physical conditions of the area
(rural, urban, business districts, and areas with predominately high-rise buildings as in a Class 4 location for instance). Sectionalizing an area, using EOP valves, should be considered based on the number of
customers and the manpower needed for restoration in a reasonable timeframe (i.e., 24-hour period). Refer to Section 5, Emergency Shutdown and Restoration of Service, in the Gas Emergency and Service
Handbook for further guidelines.
Tying EOP Zones Together
When designing main extensions and reinforcements, it is vital to consider where EOP zones may exist and to be aware of conflicts that may arise by joining EOP zones together. Whenever designing
reinforcement projects, valves should be installed between the new and old pipe systems and the local Compliance Technician shall be notified. Additionally, when designing main extensions, consideration
must be given to the placement of valves to ensure EOP zones are not adversely impacted.
WAC 480-93-100 (2):
to the criteria listed above) regardless of pressure, for these locations:
• Service lines 2-inch in diameter and larger to commercial and industrial buildings
• High occupancy buildings of more than 4 stories which would be difficult to quickly evacuate, regardless of the service line length or pressure.
Note: WAC 480-93-100 (2) The requirement above outlines the results of Avista’s consideration of
the criteria outlined in WAC 480-93-100 (2) (a through f). The sites noted in paragraphs (a through f)
of the WAC have been considered as locations for valve installation. The above guidelines are the
result of that consideration and are in addition to Avista’s stated guidelines within this Specification.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
5 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

Emergency Regulator Station Valves
Each regulator station serving more than two service points must have a valve installed on the inlet piping at a distance from the regulator station (50-feet preferred, 20-feet minimum) sufficient to permit the operation of the valve in an emergency and designated as an emergency valve. Consideration should be
given to installing a similar valve on the regulator station outlet piping. Gate stations should always have outlet valves. Operations personnel should coordinate efforts and work with Gas Engineering as appropriate to ensure that applicable emergency valves are prioritized for installation where they are required as noted above or would promote improved system safety or reliability. Farm tap regulators (sometimes referred to single service farm taps) should also have consideration for
inlet and outlet valves. The inlet valve should be designated as a secondary valve unless there is an extenuating reason to designate it as an emergency valve (e.g., the farm tap serves a school, church, hospital, limited mobility occupant structure, commercial building, industrial building or other high occupancy structure, or area.) This emergency / secondary valve designation guidance is a requirement
in Washington per WAC 480-93-100(3) and a best management practice in Oregon and Idaho.
Transmission Line Valves Each transmission line must have sectionalizing block valves spaced as follows:
Population Class Minimum Spacing of Valves

Each main line valve installed in a transmission pipeline shall be full opening to allow for the passage of internal inspection devices. Each section of a transmission line between block valves must have a blow-down valve with enough capacity to allow the transmission line to be blown down as rapidly as practical. Each blowdown discharge must be located so the gas can be blown to the atmosphere without hazard to nearby
structures and overhead electrical lines. Refer to Specification 2.12, “Transmission Lines – Design of Pipe and Components” for more information related to design criteria and records documentation requirements.
Valve Numbering
Valve numbering shall be shown within the Avista’s AFM (GIS) system. New valves shall receive new numbers at the time of installation. If a valve is being changed out / replaced in the same physical location, it should maintain the same valve numbering. If a valve is being changed out / replaced and
installed at a new location, whether to renumber or not shall be at the discretion of the local operations manager based on EOP Plan considerations. Refer to Spec. 5.13, Valve Maintenance, “Valve Disable / Abandonment” for further guidance on the difference between disabling and abandoning a valve.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
6 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

Installation Valves installed on a main for operation or emergency purposes must be placed in a readily accessible location. The operating stem must be readily accessible. Valve boxes, when utilized, shall be installed so as to avoid transmitting external loads to the main. Valve box lids should be easily removable and painted yellow. Cathodic protection wires, if required, should be installed in such a way that they will not
be damaged by the use of a valve key, including installing the wires on the outside of the valve box bottom. For future use of the wires, they should be left long enough so 36” of wire can be pulled from the valve box. Generally, mainline valves installed within Avista’s facilities should be in the open position unless there is a specific reason for them to be closed, for example for pressure zone isolation. This includes valves that
are installed in pipe “pup” locations for future use. These valves should be open so that if the downstream pipe is damaged, that damage will be evident and can be repaired immediately. For aboveground installations, consideration should be given to orienting the valve, so the stem is in the
horizontal position. This will help prevent water from entering the valve.
Weld end ball or plug valves should always be placed in the open position when welding. This will keep the weld splatter off the ball or plug. Weld end gate valves should always be placed in the closed position when welding. This will keep the
weld splatter out of the seat.
Valve Supports
Transmission and distribution line valves shall be supported to prevent settling of the valve or movement of the pipe to which it is attached. If the valve is installed in a buried box or enclosure, the box or
enclosure must be installed as to avoid transmitting external loads to the main.
Each valve installed in plastic systems must be designed to protect the plastic material against excessive torsional or shearing loads when the valve is operated.
Corrosion
Buried steel valves must be externally coated or wrapped. Isolated steel valves within plastic systems
require additional cathodic protection. Refer to Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design. These isolated steel valves are considered short sections of steel and require monitoring just like any other short
section of steel and must be placed on the Short Section Cathodic Ten Percent Survey. Refer to Specification 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance for further guidance on this maintenance
requirement.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 21
7 OF 7 SPEC. 2.14

Valve Codes Valves listed in Avista’s AFM (GIS) system are identified in the “USAGECODE” field by the following abbreviations: E = Emergency Zone Valve: A valve that isolates an EOP zone.
I = Emergency Station Isolation Valve: The inlet or outlet valves to a regulator station, typically 25 feet to 50 feet outside of the station (Single-service farm tap inlet valves are not automatically considered Emergency Station Isolation Valves and may be designated as Secondary Valves.) X = Emergency Zone and Station Isolation Valve: A valve that is both an emergency zone valve and
a station isolation valve. A = Emergency Mainline Valve: Any other emergency valve on a main that should be designated for emergency situations. (Example: valves on either side of a bridge.)
M = Emergency Curb Valve: Those curb valves on services that must be designated as emergency
valves. P = Emergency Pressure Isolation Valve: A valve that is normally closed and separates two different pressure zones.
Y = Emergency Zone and Pressure Isolation Valve: Both an EOP zone and pressure isolation valve.
C = Secondary Curb Valve: Any other valves on services that are not used for emergencies.
S = Secondary Mainline Valve: Any other valves on mains that are not classified as any of the above
and are not used for emergencies.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 11
1 OF 3 SPEC. 2.15

2.15 BRIDGE DESIGN SCOPE: To establish general guidelines for the design and installation of natural gas lines on steel and concrete bridge structures.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.159, §192.161, §192.321, §192.323 WAC 480-93-115
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic Spec. 2.3, Cathodic Protection Spec. 3.42, Casing & Conduit Installation
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: General Bridge designs are unique and situations involved with each design are unique; therefore, Gas
Engineering shall be consulted for pipeline installations involving bridges. Bridge crossing designs often include the use of hangers, seismic bracing, expansion joints, and other special design features. Federal regulations permit the installation of either steel or polyethylene pipe on bridges. Specific design considerations must be employed to assure that the polyethylene pipe is installed in a safe manner.
Pipeline Installation Pipelines installed on a bridge structure shall be placed so as to allow for future inspection of hangers,
seismic bracing, pipe, expansion joints, etc. Ideally, the pipe will be installed within the outermost girders on the downstream side of the bridge. This allows for easy inspection while protecting the pipe from
stream flows, effects of sunlight and damage from traffic. This will involve coordination with responsible parties to allow for manhole and crawl space access within bridge structures. On new bridges, construction arrangements shall be made to provide suitable openings or advance
placement of casing or pipe through the structure and abutments of the bridge. Pipe support structures on either new or existing bridges must be coordinated closely with the agency responsible for the bridge. The pipe support design should provide for future increases in pipe size
wherever practical.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 11
2 OF 3 SPEC. 2.15

Permits When a pipeline crosses state highway bridge structures, an application must be made for an encroachment permit. The permit application shall comply with current State Department of Transportation requirements. Permit applications for other than state highway crossings shall be obtained from the responsible government agency.
Design Requirements Pipe wall thickness shall be chosen to allow for hoop, bending, and torsional stresses due to temperature change, pressure, weight of pipe (including weight of water if carrier pipe is to be hydrostatically tested on the bridge), and any movement of or stresses caused by the configuration of the bridge. Pipe wall
thickness shall be as required to meet required stress calculations. Thermal expansion forces and stresses shall be considered for bridge spans over 100 feet. Reference Specification 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel. It may be necessary to compensate for
thermal expansion by the use of approved expansion fittings or by use of pipe fittings using "U" or "L" pipe bends.
Stresses due to temperature should be based on a temperature range of -20 degrees F to 110 degrees F. As both allowances for thermal contraction and thermal expansion need to be considered, calculations need to be based on probable temperature variations from the temperature at time of construction.
Maximum hoop stress due to internal gas pressure shall not exceed 40 percent of SMYS of the carrier
pipe. When possible, the pipeline should be designed so that the hoop stress is less than 20 percent of SMYS.
Use of isolation valves should be considered at both ends of bridge, outside of the bridge structure, to
allow isolation of the pipeline on the bridge structure.
Supports
Care should be taken in selection of supports, hangers, brackets, rollers, and pads. Allowance must be made for the casing and carrier pipeline to expand and contract at a different rate than the bridge, yet be
restrained and supported satisfactorily.
Seismic Supports
In seismic prone areas, pipe supports and hangers should be designed to withstand seismic forces. In addition to static loads of pipeline systems, use an additional 0.2g for vertical seismic force and 0.3g for
horizontal seismic force (i.e., supports and hangers must be able to withstand 120 percent of load weight of pipeline system in the vertical direction and 30 percent of load weight in the horizontal direction).
Reference Specification 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel.
Corrosion Protection
Carrier pipe shall be electrically isolated from the bridge structure and support components through the use insulated fittings on pipe hangers and support hardware. Steel carrier pipe and weld joints shall be coated with an approved coating. Coating on exposed carrier
pipe should be UV resistant paint or tape wrap.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 11
3 OF 3 SPEC. 2.15

Exposed hanger hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized, stainless steel, or other atmospheric corrosion-resistant coating.
Casings
Some governing agencies require natural gas pipelines on bridges to be steel cased throughout the length of the structure. If a casing is used, the space between the pipe and the casing must be effectively open to atmosphere preferably at both ends, but at least on one end, using either a vent pipe or other satisfactory type vent to avoid unsafe build-up of pressure in the casing due to leakage of the carrier pipe. Reference Specification 3.42, Casing & Conduit Installation.
Casing insulators, end seals, and vents shall be installed as detailed in Specification 3.42, Casing & Conduit Installation.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
1 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

2.2 METERING & REGULATION

2.22 METER DESIGN
SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for designing and installing metering equipment. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.351, §192.353, §192.355, §192.357, §192.359. WAC 480-90-323, 480-90-328, 480-93-140 OTHER REFERENCES:
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), Sec. 401.7
National Electric Code (NEC), Article 500, 501, and 504
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 2.23, Regulator Design
Spec. 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 5.12, Regulator and Relief Inspection DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
General The amount of natural gas a customer consumes must be measured as it is delivered to the customer primarily to provide information for billing. This measurement is accomplished by a gas meter and it is
important to have knowledge and understanding of the gas meter and the various components associated with metering as follows in this section.
Avista’s metering and regulating equipment shall be installed, operated, and maintained in accordance with federal and state regulations, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation and maintenance practices

Existing meter set designs that do not currently conform to this specification should be brought up to standard when there is an opportunity to do so with some reasonable exceptions. Refer to GESH Section
7 - Meter Turn on Orders, “Bringing Meters up to Standard” for further guidance.
WAC 480-93-140(1)
must install, operate, and maintain service regulators in accordance with federal and state
regulations, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation and maintenance
practices.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
2 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Existing inside gas meters should, where possible, be relocated outside when the customer piping is revised, altered, or if another opportunity exists. Meter Types Common types of gas meters used in the system are as follows:
Aluminum and Iron Case Diaphragm Meters: These meters are positive displacement meters and measure a known quantity of gas by filling and emptying chambers within the meter. This is the most common type of meter; residential meters are of this kind. New diaphragm meters are aluminum cased. Iron case meters are being phased out of the system
because they are no longer manufactured and are large, heavy, and cumbersome to maintain. Many of the large diaphragm meters, aluminum and iron, are being replaced with rotary meters due to their size and difficulty in keeping them accurate as they age. Currently, however, both types are still active in the system.
Rotary Meters: The rotary meter is a positive displacement meter that measures gas with two oppositely
rotating figure 8 impellers operating within a rigid casing. Rotary meters are typically used for commercial and industrial loads. Rotary meters are smaller and lighter weight than their diaphragm counterparts and are replacing them in the field.
Turbine Meters: As gas enters a turbine meter inlet, it exerts a force on the turbine rotor blades that turns the rotor at a speed directly proportional to the gas flow rate that is measured by the index. Turbine
meters are used primarily for large commercial and industrial loads and for metering at Gate Stations.
Ultrasonic Meters: Ultrasonic meters operate using ultrasound-based flow measurement with little to no pressure drop across the meter. Ultrasonic meters typically have high accuracy flow measurement with a
large capacity and range. Ultrasonic meters are not currently installed in Avista’s system and are primarily located at Gate Stations on the Interstate side of the custody transfer.
Coriolis Meters: Coriolis meters operate by measuring the mass flow rate of natural gas through a tube
per unit of time. The mass flow rate is then divided by the fluid density to determine the volumetric flow rate at a measurement location. Coriolis meters are not currently installed in Avista’s system and are
primarily located at Gate Stations on the Interstate side of the custody transfer.
Meter Identification
Meters must have a unique serial number and a tag or sticker identifying the utility’s name. An updated name tag or sticker must be installed on meters within three years of a company name change in
accordance with WAC 480-90-328.

WAC 480-90-328 - Meter Identification.
serial numbers, letters, or combination of both, placed in a conspicuous position on the meter, along
with the utility's name or initials. Utilities must update the name or initials on its meters within 3 years
of a name change.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
3 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Meter Case Pressures A manufacturer's shell test pressure on a meter must be at least 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure of the meter. Each newly installed meter manufactured after November 12, 1970 must have been tested to a minimum of 10 psig. A rebuilt or repaired tinned steel case meter may not be used at a
pressure that is more than 50 percent of the pressure used to test the meter after rebuilding or repairing. A meter may not be used for pressures above the rated pressure of the meter. Reference the "Meter Capacity Tables" under Specification 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings, for further information.
Meter Set Location, Protection, and Barricades
The meter and service regulator must be installed in a location readily accessible for examination, reading, replacement, and maintenance. The meter location shall provide protection from damage due to outside forces including but not limited to vehicles, weather, snow, and ice. When proper meter protection cannot be provided by placement of the meter, secondary protection shall be provided.
Customers may install protective fences around meters as long as they comply with Avista’s requirement for access and maintenance. Refer to Specification 2.14, Valve Design, “Service Line Valves” for further
information. Ideally, the meter set should be located so that the service line route is the shortest route between the gas main and the meter set location. Where feasible, the meter and regulator should be located outside
the building at the building wall, unless located in a separate metering or regulating building or fenced area. When multiple regulators are used, the upstream regulator in a series must be located outside the
building unless it is located in a separate metering or regulating building.
Meter sets must be installed in one of the following locations (listed in order of preference).
1. Outside, at or near ground level, adjacent to an exterior wall of the building. In heavy snow areas the meter shall be installed under a roof overhang of 12 inches (minimum) measured from the
drip line to the front face of the meter or on the gable end of the building where possible. On new installations, if this is not possible, approved external meter protection and a breakaway fitting
should be considered for installation to protect the meter from falling snow and ice, see “Breakaway Fitting” in this Specification for more information. Refer to Specification 3.16,
Services, “Services in Heavy Snow Areas”, for additional guidance. 2. In an alcove in the exterior wall of the building.
3. In a meter room (or meter rooms) within the interior of the building.
Should it be necessary to install the meter set in an alcove or a meter room(s), special design considerations must be met as detailed in the “Inside Meter Set” section of this specification.
A meter that is installed more than 3 feet from a building or foundation wall shall be considered a “Remote
Meter Set”. These installations are not preferred but may be necessary at mobile home parks or in other special circumstances. These meter sets shall be flagged in Avista’s (GIS) AFM system or the asset
management system for tracking per WAC 480-90-323.

WAC 480-90-323 – Meter Set Assembly Location.
away from the building wall or inside buildings, the gas utility must keep a record of these meter set
assemblies, including in such record the location, installation date, and leak history. Utilities must
submit copies of such records to the commission upon request.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
4 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

The following should be considered (listed in the order of preference) when locating a meter and ensuring adequate meter protection: 1. Use of the proposed or existing structure, such as under a building eave or other appropriately designed architectural feature, to provide protection from weather, ice or snow, or outside forces.
2. Installation of an excess flow valve (EFV) and a breakaway fitting to reduce the consequences if a meter is damaged, see “Breakaway Fitting” in this Specification for more information. Residential EFV’s shall be installed per Specification 3.16, Services. (Oftentimes, an EFV may be a preferred method of providing snow protection as it cannot be removed by the customer.) As noted in Specification 3.16, EFV’s must be located as close to the fitting connecting the
service line to main as practical. 3. Secondary structure - A secondary structure, sometimes referred to as a snow shed, shall be installed at the time of the meter installation by Avista. The structure shall be per Avista
specifications.
When protection from vehicle or other outside force damage (other than snow) cannot adequately be provided, secondary protection such as a breakaway fitting or a meter barricade shall be installed by Avista; see “Breakaway Fitting” in this Specification for more information. A barricade and breakaway fitting can be installed together to provide an additional level of protection. The barricade shall be
installed as detailed in Specification 2.24, Drawing A-36712, or according to a Gas Engineering approved equivalent design. A 2-inch diameter barricade may be used only in residential applications. A 4-inch
diameter barricade should be used in commercial applications, in areas where two-way vehicle traffic is expected or when additional protection is deemed necessary based on site conditions. It is preferred that
barricades be installed at least 6 feet from primary voltage electric equipment (greater than 600 volts). The “swing radius” of equipment doors must be taken into consideration in the “6-foot rule”. If a barricade
is required within 6 feet of primary voltage electric equipment, the barricade shall be one of the following:
• Non-conductive bollard
• Steel bollard with non-conductive sleeve
• Steel bollard bonded to electrical equipment ground
In areas that experience heavy snowfall the meter should be installed on the gable end of the building to protect the meter from falling snow and ice from the roof. Areas prone to heavy snowfall include the following counties: Bonner (ID), Boundary (ID), Klamath (OR), Klickitat (WA), Kootenai (ID), Lake (OR), Latah (ID), Lincoln (WA), Shoshone (ID), Spokane (WA), Stevens (WA), Union (OR), and Whitman (WA).
If the meter cannot be installed on the gable end of the building or if the meter is located under a roof
overhang whose drip line is less than 12 inches from the front face of the meter, a breakaway fitting and a meter cover should be considered for installation to protect the meter. See “Breakaway Fitting” in this Specification for more information. Company provided “snow sheds” are the preferred option, but the customer may choose to install their own cover. Customers who elect to install their own cover are
responsible for the design and construction of the cover. The design of the cover must be stamped by a professional engineer and approved by Avista. Covers shall be structurally sound and installed in a manner that does not interfere with the inspection, maintenance, and replacement of the meter.

METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
5 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Anchoring of the snow sheds in a “fixed foundation”, such as concrete, is strongly recommended. Guidance on concrete anchoring is as follows:
• Use one 80# bag of concrete
• Divide the dry concrete mix between the four holes dug for the posts of the snow shed
• Add a quart of water per hole and mix
• Place excavated soil on top of the concrete filled holes to prevent quick drying of the concrete
• Level the placement of the shelter before the concrete cures Design requirements for customer provided snow covers are as follows: 1. Be designed to withstand a uniform pressure of 500 pounds per square foot distributed over the top surface of the structure. The snow shed must not deform or fail under this design load. 2. Have a minimum of 12 inches of clearance between the top of the meter set and the snow shed shall be provided. 3. Must cover the entire width of the meter set, with an additional 8 inches (minimum) on either side to allow accessibility for maintenance. 4. Must be corrosion resistant, through the use of galvanized metals, paint, or other corrosion resistant materials. 5. Must be free standing and cannot be attached to the meter assembly in any way. 6. Shall allow for natural ventilation to mitigate accumulation of natural gas. 7. Must provide a minimum of 8 inches of overhang, measured from the front face of the meter. When the operating district is made aware of existing situations where the meter set is subject to possible damage, Avista will provide meter protection at the Company’s expense. In addition to minimum location requirements as outlined in Drawing A-36275, meter sets should not be installed in the following locations: 1. Locations subject to snow or water shedding off a roof. 2. Locations subject to corrosion. 3. Locations subject to vehicular damage such as adjacent to driveways. 4. Locations subject to ground erosion or places subject to excessive vibration. 5. Locations subject to condensation or where live steam, hot liquid, or corrosive gases or vapor are present or used. 6. Locations under or within any porch, deck patio or similar enclosure where access is limited, and the free venting of gas is not assured. 7. Locations under interior stairways. 8. In engine, boiler, heater, or electric meter rooms. 9. Under outside fire escapes.
Breakaway Fitting
A breakaway fitting should be installed on a new or existing meter set where damage may occur due to
outside forces including, but not limited to, vehicles, snow, ice, and ground settlement. A breakaway
fitting may not be used as an alternative to an EFV, curb valve, or a snow shelter. In situations where a
bollard or snow shelter is necessary, a breakaway fitting can also be installed to provide an additional
level of protection. In residential applications a breakaway fitting may be used instead of a bollard. In
commercial applications a breakaway fitting may not be used as an alternative to a bollard but can be
installed in addition to a bollard to provide a higher degree of protection.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
6 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

The breakaway fitting should be installed downstream of the service valve, preferably directly into the
outlet of the service valve. The following table shows meter set configurations where it is acceptable to
install a breakaway fitting. Due to flow rate restrictions, do not install a breakaway fitting in the
applications shown in gray or on any other type of meter not included in the table.
System MAOP
 1  6 7 8
 2 2 9,10
 3,4,5


3 Foot Rule
For outside meter set locations, at the time of installation of the meter, the vent of the service regulator should not be located within a 3-foot radius of the following (refer to Drawing A-36275):

• Any ignition source such as an electrical meter and associated enclosure, electric outlet, electric
switch, light fixture, disconnect, circuit breaker, air conditioner condenser or heat pump, generator
and transformers
• A direct-vent appliance vent, duct or air intake
• The combustion air vent to a 90+ efficiency heating appliance or the vent terminal
• Any non-mechanical, free flow building air vent such as a foundation vent, window, dryer vent,
door, etc. unless the regulator vents above the opening in which case a 12” radius of separation
is acceptable.
• Combustion air vents to fireplaces
• Any external building fire suppression system connection locations should not be within 3 feet of
the closest component of the meter set (not necessarily the regulator vent).
Also, they should not be within a 3-foot radius from the opening part or side of any window that can be
opened or any opening to a building or doorway. Where minimum distances cannot be maintained, care
must be taken to pipe the vent of the regulator to a safe location or the meter set should be relocated.
be located no closer than 3 feet from the electric meter and associated enclosure, Refer to Drawing
A-36275. (This is the one “shall” requirement of the 3-foot rule.)
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
7 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Note: Under normal operating conditions, cable television and telephone termination boxes are not
sources of ignition.
10 Foot Rule For outside meter set locations, the vent of the service regulator must be located at least 10 feet away from any active fresh air intake or combustion air vents into mechanical rooms. Refer to Drawing A-36275.
Where the minimum distances cannot be maintained, care must be taken to pipe the vent of the regulator
to a safe location or the meter set should be relocated.
Earthquake Valves
Earthquake valves are devices that are designed to shut off gas flow to a facility in the event of an
earthquake. Some customers may require an earthquake valve to be installed at their facility. If a
customer desires to have an earthquake valve, it is the customer’s responsibility to purchase, install, and
maintain the valve. The earthquake valve shall only be installed on the customer owned side of the meter
set, downstream of the custody demarcation point. Since earthquake valves are designed to close when
movement is detected, the valve should be securely attached by the customer to the building and
supported in a way that allows the meter set to be maintained and disassembled without disturbing the
valve. The illustration below shows a recommended earthquake valve installation.

METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
8 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Inside Meter Sets Installing a meter set inside a building is generally undesirable because it is difficult to read and maintain and should only be considered as a last alternative. If the meter and/or the regulator are installed within a building, they must be located as near as practical to the point of service line entrance and be approved by Gas Engineering.
In general, any meter set inside a building must be located in a ventilated place and not less than 3 feet from any source of ignition or any source of heat that might damage the metering equipment. Electronic correctors mounted on meters with or without telemetry must comply with the applicable version of the National Electric Code (NEC), Article 500, 501, and 504 for Hazardous (classified) Locations. Refer to Specification 2.25, Telemetry Design for further detail on electrical classifications.
If a meter set must be installed other than outside, at or near ground level, and adjacent to an exterior wall of the building, then the preferred location is for the meter to be installed in a building alcove. Alcove Installation:
An alcove is a recessed area in the building’s exterior wall that is sealed from the building interior and is accessed from outside the building. An alcove must have a floor, sidewalls, and a ceiling with a minimum 1-hour fire rating. Doors may be installed for aesthetic reasons (facing outward), but venting must be provided to the outside atmosphere (via louvers, decorative panels, or ventilation piping). Minimum venting requirements for each alcove door are 5 inches x 10 inches screened vent, top, and bottom.
If the pressure regulator is installed within the alcove, then the service to the regulator must not penetrate into or underneath the building. Alcove meter locations:

• Must be dedicated to gas facilities only,
• Must not obstruct a building entrance or exit,
• Must be large enough to house the meter set(s) and/or pressure regulator assembly and provide
adequate space for installation and maintenance,
• Must be at or near ground level, and
• Must be accessible at all times to Avista service personnel. Meter Room Installation: If an inside meter set may not be constructed in an alcove but must be within the interior of the building and accessed from within the building, then it is considered a “meter room” installation. Meter rooms must be built to Avista’s specifications (Refer to attachment titled “Avista’s Requirements for Gas Meter Room Installations” at the end of this specification. Inside meter sets should be installed only as a last resort. Inside meter sets must be reviewed and approved by Gas Engineering prior to installation. Acceptable locations for meter rooms are listed below (in order of preference): 1. On the ground floor and adjacent to an exterior wall. 2. In a basement and adjacent to an exterior wall. 3. On the ground floor, located in the interior of the building, and not adjacent to an exterior wall. 4. In a basement, located in the interior of the building, and not adjacent to an exterior wall. 5. On a floor other than the ground floor or basement and adjacent to an exterior wall.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
9 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

6. On a floor other than the ground floor or basement and located in the interior of the building, and not adjacent to an exterior wall. 7. A series of meter rooms stacked vertically on multiple floors. Extended service piping necessary to reach the meter room from outside the building wall should be welded steel piping between Avista’s primary pressure regulator and the inside meter (or meter headers).
Extended service piping must be identified as belonging to Avista. The piping must:
• Operate at less than or equal to 5 psig within the building. Reference “Delivery Pressure” in this specification.
• Be designed and installed in accordance with the applicable regulations, as set forth in federal, state, and municipal codes,
• Be electrically isolated from underground gas facilities at the riser. Reference “Insulating Downstream Customer Piping” in this specification.
• Be vapor-proof sealed at penetration points through the exterior of the building and be designed and installed in accordance with the applicable regulations, as set forth in federal, state, and municipal codes. Avista may contract to an approved contractor the installation of the extended service piping. An Avista representative must supervise the installation of this piping. If the extended service piping is installed without Avista’s supervision, Avista reserves the right to require that the piping be replaced at the contractor’s expense to ensure that it has been installed to Avista’s specifications. Acceptable locations for extended service piping are listed (in order of preference):
• In an area that is fully exposed and accessible.
• In a 1-hour fire rated chase that is fully accessible with 1-hour fire rated doors on each floor.
• In a welded steel casing approved by Avista’s Gas Engineering Department that is sealed and vented to the outside atmosphere. Each inside meter set must have a service valve or a curb valve located outside the building wall. The curb valve must be maintained and accessible by a valve box. Reference Specification 2.14, Valve Design for more information on curb valve applications. Service regulator vents and relief vents must be piped outdoors per “Regulator and Relief Vent Design” in this specification. Occasionally meters and/or regulators must be installed inside a structure to avoid snow load or snow roof unloading issues. This should be a last resort and is only to be done with prior approval from Gas Engineering. Efforts should be made to move inside meter sets outside anytime work is required on the meter, regulator, or service piping. If it is proposed to leave the meter set inside, contact Gas Engineering. Gas Engineering will review the existing installation and determine if it meets current installation requirements. Regulator and Relief Vent Design Service regulator vent lines up to 20 feet in length shall be of minimum 1-inch pipe or sized according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Vent lines shall be constructed of minimum Schedule 40 steel or wrought pipe unless otherwise specified by Gas Engineering. Vent lines shall be properly sloped, maintaining a
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
10 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

rise of at least 1/4-inch per run foot and properly doped and tightened to prevent moisture accumulation or the entry of water. Vent lines in excess of 20 feet shall be referred to Gas Engineering for sizing.
Vent lines shall be adequately supported. On mobile homes, vent lines should not be secured to the structure. The outside piping must be rain and insect resistant by orienting the vent pipe downward and
installing a screen in the end. Vent lines must be located at a place where gas from the vent can escape freely into the atmosphere and away from any opening into the building. (Reference Drawing A-36275 in
this specification for minimum distances.) The vent lines must be protected from damage caused by submergence in areas where flooding may occur.
Pits and Vaults
Ideally, meter sets should not be installed in pits or vaults, as they are difficult to access, tend to accumulate liquids, and often contain air of questionable quality. Each pit or vault that does house a
customer meter or regulator at a place where pedestrian and/or vehicular traffic is anticipated must be able to support that traffic. For further information regarding vaults, refer to Specification 2.42, Vault
Design, and Specification 5.18, Vault Maintenance.
Installation Each meter set must be installed so as to minimize anticipated stresses upon the connecting piping and
the meter. Some meter sets may require additional support. For example, an external support is required to keep rotary meters level and supported in order to function properly. A concrete pad or adjustable stand approved by Gas Engineering is needed to support the larger diaphragm meters. A meter support is required if a flex line is used to connect the meter set to the house line. In all cases the
meter support shall be made of non-combustible material. Reference the Appendix A drawings under Specification 2.24, Meter and Regulator Tables and Drawings for further details of some frequently used
supports. Meters must be installed and should be maintained so that they are readily accessible to meter readers and meter service personnel. The meter should be facing the direction from which a meter reader would
approach the meter to be read. For newly installed meters/regulators and those being brought up to standard configuration, the regulator vents shall be oriented straight downward (six o’clock position) to prevent water from entering into the regulator and causing the regulator to freeze up. Vent screens are required on the regulator vents to keep out insects and debris. If the regulator vent cannot be positioned downward on its own, then a “mushroom cap” fitting may be used, or a vented elbow fitting may be installed in the vent so that it is configured to vent in the downward position.
Only one service should be installed per customer or per building unless the building contains a firewall between customers. Reference “Multiple Services” within this specification for requirements. Meter sets should not be installed until the ground level is established as to final grade wherever possible. When attaching the meter to flanges, tighten the bolts in an alternating sequence until the entire flange face contacts the meter. Repeat the tightening sequence until the bolts area at the specified torque. By gradually increasing the bolt torque over multiple steps, it is less likely that the flange and meter face will bind or become misaligned. Tighten the bolts to the following torque levels based on meter manufacturer. Manufacturer Torque (ft-lb)
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
11 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Overbuilds Buildings, mobile homes, carports, and structures that might entrap gas shall not be constructed over Company gas facilities without an approved design by Gas Engineering. If an existing customer's service line or meter set must be relocated by the Company due to any change being proposed by the customer, (i.e. building construction making the meter set inaccessible, building over the service line, or any other
violation of the federal, state, or local regulations), the cost of the relocation should be paid by the customer. Overbuilds that have occurred in the past should be corrected by removing the structure or relocating the overbuilt facilities. The cost for this work should be handled on a case-by-case basis.
Idle Meters
Idle meters should be removed when it is apparent gas will not be used in the future. Refer to Specification 5.16, Abandonment or Inactivation of Facilities. An idle meter on Rental property may remain if the marketing representative determines that another tenant may use gas in the near future.
Idle Services
Idle services have either not had a meter installed yet or the meter has been removed and the service valve has been locked off. They should be cut off at the main if it is determined that it is unlikely that gas will be used in the future. If left in place, the riser is subject to the requirements of atmospheric corrosion
monitoring, Reference Specification 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance to include the need to be marked with the appropriate gas pipeline sticker.
High pressure (HP) idle risers shall be properly protected and labeled. High pressure risers shall be
marked with the appropriate “HP Gas Pipeline” sticker.
When reinstating a HP idle riser into service, Gas Engineering shall verify the MAOP and design appropriate regulation and metering equipment for the conditions.
Multiple Services
A building or other structure served on a single lot and/or sharing a structural component with another
building (i.e., common wall, common roof, etc.) should be supplied by only one service. Zero lot-line structures are considered a single structure.
More than one service is permitted by the following exceptions. Additional services must be in a readily
accessible location and shall not compromise safety or system integrity.
• Single-family dwellings are not allowed additional service points unless it is for the following exceptions: Allowances do not apply. a. Swimming pool/spa, when there is a permanent building containing the heating equipment which is detached from the main structure. (Note: This option should only be used when it is a hardship for customer to install downstream piping.) b. Shops, garages, barns, and outbuildings which are detached from the main structure.
• Multiple unit residential and commercial buildings may be allowed additional service points provided that only one service feeds a unit or units located between a 2-hour firewall. Limiting
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
12 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

service points can reduce confusion and assure that no additional gas feeds go unaccounted for in a gas emergency. Allowances may be applied.
• Industrial complexes will be individually evaluated and handled on a case-by-case basis. Contact Gas Engineering in these instances. Multiple Meters
Multiple meters (meter manifolds or meter banks) should be grouped in one accessible location wherever possible. Meter manifolds should be constructed so that different delivery pressures are separated using pipe branching to allow for ease of identification. Gas houseline piping at multiple meter installations shall be marked by a stamped metal washer or metal tag attached by the builder or developer so that the piping system supplied by each meter is easily identifiable per the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), Sec. 401.7. The identifier shall be made of brass, galvanized steel, or other weather resistant metal that can be stamped with the unit number or other identification. Identifiers made of soft metals (such as aluminum) that may be subject to bending or other damage are prohibited. All tags shall be secured to the downstream piping with a metal wire of sufficient strength to prevent tampering. Insulating Downstream Customer Piping The customer gas piping system must be electrically insulated from the gas service piping if the service pipe is steel. This is necessary in order to maintain proper cathodic protection of the Company underground gas piping system. The following methods of insulating the customer piping from the steel service piping are used:
• Meter sets are most often installed with a service valve that is equipped with an insulating union. This is the preferred method of insulation.
• Meter sets with a non-insulating service valve should have an insulating union installed.
Installation of an insulated meter swivel is also acceptable on existing meter sets.
• Large meter sets are most often insulated with an insulating gasket and insulating kit at a flange.
• Some large meter sets have an insulating type coupling on the outlet side of the gas meter. On polyethylene (PE) plastic services, the tracer must terminate below the insulated fitting. Refer to Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection, and Specification 3.16, Services for more information. Reference the "Standard Meter Set Drawings" under Specification 2.24, Meter and Regulator Tables and Drawings for further details. Meter Set Design Refer to the "Standard Meter Set Drawings" under Specification 2.24, Meter and Regulator Tables and Drawings for design of residential and commercial meter sets. These standard designs are to be used in most applications; however, they may not be appropriate for every meter set application. Gas Engineering will assist with the design of non-standard meter sets. Industrial meter sets are handled on a case-to-case basis in Gas Engineering.

METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
13 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Some parameters to include when designing a meter set are as follows:
• Customer's total connected load and/or expected peak load (BTU/HR)
• Customer's minimum load expected
• Customer's desired and/or required delivery pressure
• Minimum and maximum inlet pressure to the meter set
• Relief Requirements (downstream MAOP)
• Upstream MAOP for pressure rating requirements of equipment
• Upstream MAOP for pressure rating of equipment
• Required pressure differential across the regulator
• Pressure differential across the meter
• Adequate test plugs and blow down valves
• Adequate bypass valves
• Filter/Strainer requirements
• Pipe lengths required for sensing lines and meters
• Range of the meter for low flow and peak flow conditions
• Telemetry requirements such as for transport customers
• Future load requirements
• Inlet pipe size
• Outlet pipe size
• Meter set supports
• Valve locking devices
• Accessibility to meter set
• Meter set protection such as barricades, fencing, locks, and buildings
• Meter location
Note: Refer to the following paragraph on Gas Information Sheets for further reference on meter set design. Also, reference “Meter Capacity Tables” and the “Regulator Capacity Tables” under Specification 2.24, Meter and Regulator Tables and Drawings, for more information.
Gas Meter Information Sheets
Gas Meter Information Sheets for meter sets are to be filled out and submitted for approval for sizing the meter and regulator when:
• Elevated pressure is desired (Metering Pressure > 7 inches WC.)
• The load is greater than 900,000 BTU/Hr.
• Customer's load or pressure requirements change. The sheets are to be submitted to the Gas Meter Shop in Spokane. Requests for meter sets with
conditions that meet the industrial meter set definition or for delivery pressures of 5 psig or above shall be submitted to Gas Engineering for design and/or approval.
Industrial Sets and Elevated Pressure Sets
Metering pressure above 7 inches WC (1/4-inch psig) is considered elevated pressure. “Metering
Pressure” is the pressure at which the gas flows through the meter and to which the volume is corrected. “Delivery Pressure” is the pressure at which the gas is served to the customer’s piping. Typically, these
are the same.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
14 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Requests for 2 psig meter sets with loads less than 14,600,000 BTU/hour shall be handled and approved by the Customer Project Coordinator (CPC) or the Local Construction Office. Requests for 2 psig meter sets shall include a Gas Meter Information Sheet regardless of BTU load for recordkeeping purposes. Note: Refer to “Maintenance of Elevated Pressure Meter Sets” and “Maintenance of Industrial Meter Sets” in Specification 5.12, Regulator and Relief Inspection for pressure check requirements.
Requests for delivery pressures of greater than 5 psig or with loads greater than or equal to 14,600,000 BTU/Hr shall be submitted to Gas Engineering for review prior to making a commitment to the customer, as these are typically large commercial or industrial meter sets that may need to be specially designed and involve contracts. A gas planning analysis may need to be conducted to assure that gas is available at the desired pressure.
Requests for elevated pressure meter sets at 5 psig or greater should be considered based on the following criteria:
• Customer's equipment requires elevated pressure. (Manufacturer's equipment verification should be attached to the Gas Meter Information Sheet)
• Customer's piping requires greater than 2-inch piping for standard delivery pressure.
• Customer is adding load to an existing house line that is no longer sufficient at standard delivery
pressure.
A meter set that meets any of the following conditions is considered an “industrial” set:
• A set metering at pressures above 5 psig (note: metering pressure, not delivery pressure.)
• A turbine meter
• Meter Correction Code of 3 or P Engineering Design Note: It is recommended to use fixed factor metering on sets with loads below 14,600,000 BTU/Hr metering at 7 inches WC, 2 psig, and 5 psig. On sets with metering pressures above
5 psig and loads equal to or greater than 14,600,000 BTU/Hr, or loads greater than or equal to 14,600,000 BTU/Hr, electronic pressure correction should be used for better volume correction accuracy.
If a request is made for an elevated pressure above 5 psig and load below 14,600,000 BTU/Hr, gas
engineers can use fixed factor correcting heads on rotary meters or electronic correctors on other meters.
Identifying Sites with Special Design and Maintenance Requirements
Certain service points have specialized design and maintenance requirements and should be identified at the time of initial installation by the Customer Project Coordinator or Gas Engineering. For example, commercial or industrial buildings with service lines 2 inches or greater in diameter require an emergency curb valve in Washington (WAC Rule). Additionally, high occupancy structures require an annual leak
survey. Reference Specification 2.14, Valve Design for additional site criteria that determines the installation of curb valves (the above sites are not a complete list) as well as Specification 5.11, Leak
Survey, for details on the frequency of surveys.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
15 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

GAS VOLUME CALCULATION:
Behavior of Natural Gas Natural gas is compressible meaning that a given amount of gas can be expanded or squeezed into different volumes. The pressure of the gas will affect its compressibility. As the pressure of the gas is
increased, the gas “squeezes” down and the given amount of gas will occupy a smaller space. As the pressure of the gas is decreased, the gas will expand, and the given amount of gas will occupy a larger space. Therefore, the higher the operating pressure of the gas in the system, the more capacity that system will have. Temperature also affects the compressibility gas. As the temperature of the gas decreases, the volume
of gas will also decrease, and the same amount of gas will then occupy a smaller space. Conversely, as the temperature of the gas increases, the volume of gas increases”, and the same amount of gas will occupy a larger area. Therefore, the higher the temperature of the gas, the less capacity that system will have.
Computing Corrected Flows
Gas meters measure the actual gas volume passing through the meter based on the gas temperature, metering pressure, and elevation. It is necessary to correct the actual measured gas volume to standard metering conditions in order to calculate the SCFH (Standard Cubic Feet per Hour) delivered to the
customer. Standard conditions for natural gas are 60 degrees F, 1 atmospheric pressure (14.73 psia), and 0 feet elevation. Elevation corrections are made to at least the closest 100-foot increment. The
following calculation will correct gas at non-standard conditions to standard conditions for billing purposes.
Corrected Flow [SCFH] = (Metered Flow)*(Pf+Pe)*(Tf) Where:
Metered Flow = Actual Cubic Feet of Gas per Hour [ACFH]
Pf = Pressure Factor [Corrects metering pressure to standard conditions (14.73 psi)] Pe = Elevation Factor [Corrects metered volume to zero feet elevation]
Tf = Temperature Factor [Corrects gas temperature to standard conditions (60°F). Tf is only to be used when metering with a non-TC’d meter. Tf = 1 for a TC’d meter]
Elevation Compensation
The factor to compensate for elevation only is simply the atmospheric pressure of the town where the
meter is located divided by the base pressure. The factor is as follows: Elevation Factor Pe = Paz 14.73 Where: Pe = Elevation Factor Paz = Absolute Atmospheric Pressure (psia) at actual location (Refer to Fig. 1) 14.73 = Standard Base Pressure (atmospheric pressure at sea level in psia) The following table, Fig. 1, shows atmospheric pressures for various elevations within Avista’s service territories (rounded to nearest 100-foot increment).
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
16 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Atmospheric Pressure at Various Elevations Fig. 1
0 14.73 .053 / 100 ft. 3600 12.888 100 14.677 .053 / 100 ft. 3700 12.841 200 14.624 .053 / 100 ft. 3800 12.794
300 14.571 .053 / 100 ft. 3900 12.747
400 14.518 .053 / 100 ft. 4000 12.7 500 14.465 .053 / 100 ft. 4100 12.655 600 14.412 .053 / 100 ft. 4200 12.61
700 14.359 .053 / 100 ft. 4300 12.565 800 14.306 .053 / 100 ft. 4400 12.52 900 14.253 .053 / 100 ft. 4500 12.475
1000 14.2 .053 / 100 ft. 4600 12.43 1100 14.147 .053 / 100 ft. 4700 12.385 1200 14.094 .053 / 100 ft. 4800 12.34
1300 14.041 .053 / 100 ft. 4900 12.295
1400 13.988 .053 / 100 ft. 5000 12.25 1500 13.935 .053 / 100 ft. 5100 12.207 1600 13.882 .053 / 100 ft. 5200 12.164
1700 13.829 .053 / 100 ft. 5300 12.121 1800 13.776 .053 / 100 ft. 5400 12.078 1900 13.723 .053 / 100 ft. 5500 12.035
2000 13.67 .053 / 100 ft. 5600 11.992 2100 13.62 0.050 / 100 ft. 5700 11.949 2200 13.57 0.050 / 100 ft. 5800 11.906 2300 13.52 0.050 / 100 ft. 5900 11.863 2400 13.47 0.050 / 100 ft. 6000 11.82 2500 13.42 0.050 / 100 ft. 6100 11.779 2600 13.37 0.050 / 100 ft. 6200 11.738
2700 13.32 0.050 / 100 ft. 6300 11.697 2800 13.27 0.050 / 100 ft. 6400 11.656 2900 13.22 0.050 / 100 ft. 6500 11.615
3000 13.17 0.050 / 100 ft. 6600 11.574 3100 13.123 .047 / 100 ft. 6700 11.533 3200 13.076 .047 / 100 ft. 6800 11.492
3300 13.029 .047 / 100 ft. 6900 11.451
3400 12.982 .047 / 100 ft. 7000 11.41 3500 12.935 .047 / 100 ft. Ref. American Meter Company Handbook E-4, 1970 ed.
Displacement Gas Meters, p. 18
(Using 14.73 psia at Sea Level per State Tariffs)
Pressure Compensation
A pressure factor is applied to adjust the volume of measured gas for meters that are measuring gas at a pressure higher than atmospheric conditions. The following formula is used to compute the pressure
factor:
Pf = Pg__ 14.73
Where: Pf = Pressure factor
Pg = Gauge Pressure (psig) 14.73 = Standard Base Pressure (Absolute atmospheric
pressure at Sea Level in psig)
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
17 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Temperature Compensation Many of the gas meters used in the system are TC or temperature compensating meters. They are equipped with the mechanics to adjust the flow for temperature variations. Many meters, however, are non-TC meters and may require a temperature factor to be applied to the volume of flow. The following formula is used to compute the factor:
Tf = 520__ 460 + Tg Where: Tf = Temperature Factor (For non-TC’d meters). Note: Value equals 1 for a TC’d meter.
520 = Standard Base temperature of 60 degrees Fahrenheit expressed in absolute temperature (degrees Rankine) 460 = 0 degrees Fahrenheit expressed in absolute temperature (degrees Rankine) Tg = Temperature of the gas stream in degrees Fahrenheit
A non-TC meter is clocked and the uncorrected flow of gas is found to be 1000 ACFH. Metering pressure is 30 psig, the gas temperature is 45 degrees F, and the meter is located at 1900 feet elevation. What is the corrected flow?
Paz = 13.723 psia (from Figure 1 – Atmospheric Pressure at Various Elevations) Pg = 30 psig
Tg = 45°F Therefore: Pf = Pg/14.73 = 30/(14.73) = 2.04 Pe = Paz/14.73 = (13.723/14.73) = 0.93
Tf = 520/(460+Tg) = 520/(460+45) = 1.03
So:
Corrected Flow = (Measured Flow)*(Pf+Pe)*Tf = (1000)*(2.04+0.93)*(1.03) = 3,059 SCFH
Correction Codes
Once a read is taken from a meter, it must be corrected for elevation, pressure, and/or temperature if
necessary and then converted into therms for billing purposes. The billing system completes the conversion of the measured volume at site conditions into a volume at standard conditions. For ease of
billing, each method is assigned a Code Number which is used with the appropriate type of meter set and is applied by the computer at the time of billing in the form of a Billing Factor. The various codes are as
follows:

METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
18 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

METER CORRECTION CODES
CODE DESCRIPTION
1 A TC meter with a standard index for standard metering pressures of 7 inches WC or 0.25 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU content of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf).
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 0.25/14.73 = 0.017) +Pe]
2 A non-TC meter with a standard index for standard metering pressure of 7 inches WC or 0.25 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)] times the temperature factor (Tf).
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 0.25/14.73 = 0.017) +Pe)]*Tf
3 A TC meter with a base pressure index (BPI) or an electronic corrector, (usually for metering at pressures higher than 5 psig). The billing factor will be the BTU content of the gas only.
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)
Note: The billing system does not complete a correction to standard conditions because the field device is providing a meter reading corrected to standard conditions. (Standard Conditions at 60 degrees F, 1 Atmosphere or 14.73 psia)
4 A TC meter with a standard index for metering at 2 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU content of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)].
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[( Pf = 2/14.73 = 0.1358)+Pe]
5 A TC meter with a standard index metering at 5 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU content of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)].
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[( Pf = 5/14.73 = 0.3394)+Pe]
6 A non-TC meter with a standard index metering at 2 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)] times the temperature factor (Tf)
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 2/14.73 = 0.1358)+Pe]*(Tf)
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
19 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

METER CORRECTION CODES
CODE DESCRIPTION
7 A non-TC meter with a standard index metering at 5 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)] times the temperature factor (Tf).
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 5/14.73 = 0.3394)+Pe]*(Tf)
8 A non-TC meter with a standard index metering at 10 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)] times the temperature factor (Tf).
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 10/14.73 = 0.6789)+Pe]*(Tf)
A A non-TC meter with a standard index metering at 15 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU of the gas times the quantity [elevation factor (Pe) + pressure factor (Pf)] times the temperature factor (Tf)
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*[(Pf = 15/14.73 = 1.0183)+Pe]*(Tf):
P A TC meter with a pressure compensation index (mechanical or electrical) metering at 10 psig, 15 psig, or 20 psig. The billing factor will be calculated by multiplying the BTU content of the gas times the elevation factor (Pe)
Billing Factor = (BTU Content)*(Pe)
Note: The billing system does not complete a correction to standard conditions for metering pressure and temperature because the field device is providing a meter reading corrected to standard conditions. (Standard Conditions @ 60 degrees F, 1 Atmosphere or 14.73 psia). Only an elevation correction is required.
NOTES: 1) Customer Bill [Therms] = (Measured Volume [CF])*(Billing Factor)/100,000 2) The billing system uses the following when calculating the quantity of gas measured: a. BTU Content – Average calculated BTU content per cubic foot of gas for a given set of dates based on a specific BTU zone. b. Tg – Gas Temperature – Average gas temperature for a given set of dates based on a temperature zone. 3) NOTE: A yellow decal on the index and a yellow cap on the spring of the regulator is used to indicate a 2 psig meter set (Code 4 or Code 6). A green decal on the index and a green cap on the spring of the regulator is used to indicate a 5 psig meter set (Code 5 or Code 7). A red decal on the index and a red cap on the spring of the regulator is used to indicate a Code 8, Code A, Code P, or non-standard meter set and tagged with the identifying set pressure. The decal on the index is a redundant indicator in case the regulator spring cap is painted over.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
20 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Temperatures Corrected Flows Gas volumes through meters that are non-temperature compensated must be corrected for the temperature effects on the volume. This is achieved by one of three methods: a temperature-compensating (TC) meter, a correction device installed on the meter such as an electronic corrector (typically for large volume accounts), or by the correcting factor (imbedded in the correction code) applied
to the account through the billing system. Special attention must be paid when setting meters in Oregon to note if they are TC (temperature compensated) or non-TC to apply the proper correction code.
Frequency of Meter Tests
The periodic testing of gas meters is done in accordance with programs approved by each state and in accordance with Utilities Commission rules. Avista’s PMC Program (Periodic Meter Change-out Program) uses statistical testing as a quality assurance measure to ensure meters continue to accurately measure flow as the meters age.
Small-capacity meters up to 1000 CFH are grouped into “families” based on the state in which they are
installed, the manufacturing date, and the type and make of the meter. For example, American AC250TC meters manufactured in the year 1980 and set in the state of Idaho constitute one family. A statistical sampling of meters to be tested in each family is generated at the beginning of the year. The number of meters to be tested is determined by the size of the family and the past performance of that family.
For all other meter sizes, eligible meters are selected based on their type, age, and the last test date.
Meters that are eligible for PMC may be pulled either through a dedicated PMC service order or when
meter sites are visited for other purposes. The following table lists the requirements by meter type and size.

Meter Type and Size Test Frequency
Turbine, all sizes
Prover Calibration Interval
Meter Provers Calibration Interval
SNAP Prover or Bell Prover Every Second Calendar Year
Transfer Prover Every Second Calendar Year

METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
21 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

Avista’s Requirements for Gas Meter Room Installations
Standard Meter Room(s) Specifications 1. Meter room construction must have a minimum 1-hour fire rating, be completely sealed from the rest of the building, and include a self-closing airtight door. 2. Penetration points through the floors, walls, and ceilings of meter room must be vapor-proof sealed and be designed and installed in accordance with applicable regulations, as set forth in federal, state, and municipal codes. 3. It must be equipped with explosion-proof lighting equipment (minimum of one light), that complies with the applicable version of National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 500 and 501 for Hazardous (classified) Locations. Switches located outside the room are not required to be explosion-proof. 4. Meter room must be dedicated to natural gas meter sets only. 5. Meter room must be accessible at all times to Avista. Key box locations are recommended. Meter Room Ventilation 1. Venting configurations must have a minimum of two vents, one at the top and one at the bottom of the meter room. Vents must connect from the meter room to the outside. Specifically:
• The top vent can be installed either on the ceiling of the meter room or on one of the walls of the meter room, located at a maximum of 1 foot from the top of the vent to the
surface of the ceiling.
• The bottom vent must be installed on one of the walls of the meter room, located a maximum of 1 foot and a minimum of 6 inches from the bottom of the vent to the surface of the floor. 2. Ventilation piping may be installed horizontally through the exterior wall, vertically through the roof, or a combination of the two. The minimum size of the piping is determined by the venting configuration.
• For vertical vent piping on the top and bottom, and for vertical venting on the top with horizontal venting on the bottom, the minimum vent size is 4 inches.
• For horizontal venting on the bottom, the minimum vent size is 6 inches.
• Where little or no vent piping is required, such as a meter room adjacent to an outside wall of the building where the vents are less than 1 foot in length, the minimum vent size is 4 inches. (Square louvers with the same cross-sectional area may also be used.) 3. Vent locations outside should be placed:
• A minimum of 36 inches from an electric meter or other ignition source.
• A minimum of 36 inches from a combustion air intake.
• A minimum of 36 inches from any natural gas appliance direct vent assembly or as specified by the manufacturer of the appliance.
• A minimum of 10 feet from any mechanical air intake opening.
• Not under a carport, roof awning, or overhang larger than a standard eave.
• Not under a stairwell or staircase providing the only access or exit to the building (stairwells providing alternative access or exit to the building are an exception to this requirement) Regulator and Relief Ventilation Service regulator vents and relief vents must be piped outdoors per “Regulator and Relief Vent Design” in this specification.
METERING & REGULATION REV. NO. 21
22 OF 22 SPEC. 2.22

METERING AND REGULATION REV. NO. 14
1 OF 4 SPEC. 2.23

2.23 REGULATOR DESIGN
SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for designing gas farm tap style regulator stations, larger district regulator stations, and service regulators. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.181, §192.195, §192.197, §192.199; §192.201, §192.203, §192.353, §192.355, §192.357, §192.359, §192.741 WAC 480-93-020, 480-93-130, 480-93-140 OAR 860-023-0035 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 5.12, Regulator and Relief Inspection DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
General Each regulating system reducing gas pressure must have overpressure protection such as a monitor regulator, relief valve, or shut-off valve. When a relief valve is used it must be sized for a wide-open failure of the largest capacity regulator. Regulating systems acting as either District Regulators or Single Service Farm Taps shall be designed to prevent any single incident from causing an overpressurization of the downstream system, including multi-stage pressure regulation. Regulating system equipment including monitor regulators and shut-off devices must be designed to handle the MAOP of the system upstream of the regulating system. Service regulators shall utilize a method of overpressure protection to ensure pressure build-up under no flow conditions does not cause unsafe operation of any connected and properly adjusted gas utilization equipment. Overpressure devices must be designed to meet the requirements of §192.199 by: 1. Being constructed of materials such that the operation of a device will not be impaired by corrosion; 2. Have valves and valve seats that are designed not to stick in a position that will make the device inoperative;
METERING AND REGULATION REV. NO. 14
2 OF 4 SPEC. 2.23

3. Be designed and installed so that it can be readily operated to determine if the valve is free, can be tested to determine the pressure at which it will operate and can be tested for leakage when in the closed position; 4. Have supports made of noncombustible material; 5. Have discharge stacks, vents, or outlet ports designed to prevent accumulation of water, ice, or snow, and located where gas can be discharged into the atmosphere without undue hazard;
6. Be designed and installed so that the size of the openings, pipe, and fittings located between the system to be protected and the pressure relieving device, and the size of the vent line are adequate to prevent hammering of the valve and to prevent impairment of relief capacity; 7. Where installed at a district regulator station to protect a pipeline system from over-pressuring, be designed and installed to prevent any single incident such as an explosion in a vault or damage by a vehicle from affecting the operation of both the overpressure protective device and the
district regulator; and 8. Except for a valve that will isolate the system under protection from its source of pressure, be designed to prevent unauthorized operation of any stop valve that will make the pressure relief valve or pressure limiting device inoperative.
Sizing Requirements
Regulating systems should be sized to maintain the required station outlet pressure under full load conditions with the station inlet pressure at a minimum expected value. Other factors to consider include the pressure drop in the inlet and outlet piping, fittings, and valves within the station flow path.
Overpressure devices shall be sized to control the wide-open capacity of the regulator without exceeding
the downstream MAOP. They shall be designed and installed so that the size of the openings, pipes, valves, and fittings located between the system to be protected and the pressure-relieving device and the
size of the vent line downstream are adequate to prevent hammering of the relief valve and to prevent restriction of relief capacity.
Regulation of Intermediate Pressure to Service Pressure
If the MAOP of the distribution system is 60 psig or less, a suitable protective device such as an internal
relief valve on the service regulator, a monitor regulator, an independent relief valve, or an automatic shut-off valve shall be used to prevent unsafe overpressuring of the customer's appliances if the service
regulator fails.
Regulation of High Pressure to Service Pressure
If the MAOP of the distribution or transmission system exceeds 60 psig, one of the following methods must be used to regulate and limit, to the maximum safe value, the pressure of gas delivered to the
customer:
1. Two stage pressure reduction consisting of an upstream regulator performing a first stage pressure cut followed by a service regulator. The upstream regulator may not be set to maintain
a pressure higher than 60 psig. A device must be installed between the upstream regulator and the service regulator to limit the pressure on the inlet of the service regulator to 60 psig or less in
case the upstream regulator fails to function properly. This device may be either a relief valve or an automatic shutoff valve that closes if the pressure on the inlet of the service regulator exceeds the set pressure (60 psig or less) and remains closed until manually reset. The service regulator must also feature a suitable protective device such as an internal relief valve, a monitor regulator,
METERING AND REGULATION REV. NO. 14
3 OF 4 SPEC. 2.23

an independent relief valve, or a shut-off valve to protect the customer’s piping downstream of the meter to a maximum safe level in the event the service regulator malfunctions. 2. A service regulator and a monitoring regulator set to limit, to a maximum safe value, the pressure of the gas delivered to the customer.
3. A service regulator with a relief valve vented to the outside atmosphere, with the relief valve set to open so that the pressure delivered to the customer does not exceed a maximum safe value. The relief valve may either be built into the service regulator or it may be a separate unit installed downstream from the service regulator. This combination may be used alone only in those cases where the inlet pressure on the service regulator does not exceed the manufacturer's safe working pressure rating of the service regulator, and may not be used where the inlet pressure on
the service regulator exceeds 125 psig. For higher inlet pressures, refer to (1) and (2) in this section. 4. A service regulator and an automatic shutoff device that closes upon a rise in pressure
downstream from the regulator and remains closed until manually reset.
Valves Each regulator station must have a valve installed on the inlet piping at a distance from the regulator
station sufficient to permit the operation of the valve during an emergency that might preclude access to the station (50 feet preferred, 20 feet minimum). Refer to Specification 2.14, Valve Design. Consideration should be given to locating a valve downstream of the station especially if the system is back fed to enable isolation of the station from both directions. Except for a valve that will isolate the regulating system from its source of pressure, handles from other valves in the station should be locked or removed to prevent unauthorized operation.
Control and Sensing Lines Each takeoff connection and attaching fitting or adapter must be made of suitable material, be able to withstand the maximum service pressure and temperature of the pipe or equipment to which it is attached, and be designed to satisfactorily withstand all stresses without failure by fatigue. Control and sensing lines should be located at a point of non-turbulent laminar flow. This generally is achieved by placing sensing taps a minimum of 10 pipe diameters (based on regulator size) downstream
of valves, regulators, or fittings. Each control line must be protected from anticipated causes of damage and must be designed and installed to prevent damage to any one-control line from making both the regulator and the overpressure protection device inoperative. Each sensing line shall have an individual tap.
A shutoff valve must be installed in each takeoff line as near as practical to the point of takeoff. Blow down valves must be installed where necessary.
WAC 480-93-020:
human occupancy within 500 feet of a gas facility having a minimum operating pressure greater than
500 psig and also within 100 feet of a gas facility having a minimum operating pressure between 250
psig and 500 psig. Refer to Specification 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel for specific requirements.
METERING AND REGULATION REV. NO. 14
4 OF 4 SPEC. 2.23

Strainers and/or filters should be installed as needed to prevent clogging of lines or orifices by foreign materials.
Capacity
Each pressure relief station or pressure limiting station or group of those stations installed to protect a pipeline must have enough capacity and must be set to operate as follows: 1. In a low-pressure distribution system (less than 1 psig), the pressure may not cause the unsafe operation of any connected and properly adjusted gas utilization equipment.
2. In other pipeline systems, if: a. The MAOP is greater than or equal to 60 psig the pressure may not exceed the MAOP plus 10 percent or the pressure that produces a hoop stress of 75 percent of SMYS,
whichever is lower.
b. The MAOP is greater than or equal to 12 psig or more, but less than 60 psig, the pressure may not exceed the MAOP plus 6 psig. c. The MAOP is less than 12 psig; the pressure may not exceed the MAOP plus 50 percent.
In regulator stations with relief devices, the relief set points may not exceed those specified by Gas
Engineering. These calculations must include allowances for any pressure build-up due to pipe, fittings and valves in the station, as well as for any outlet pressure limitations on the regulators. Relief capacity
calculations and determination of relief set points should not be performed by field personnel.
Telemetering and Pressure Recorders
In general, telemetering should be provided to monitor system flows and pressures from areas of special interest such as gate stations and at meter sets of large industrial customers.
Each distribution system supplied by more than one district regulator station shall be equipped with
telemetering or recording pressure gauges to indicate the gas pressure in the district.
On distribution systems supplied by a single district regulator station, Gas Engineering shall determine the necessity of installing telemetering or recording gauges in the district, taking into consideration the
number of customers supplied, the operating pressures, the capacity of the installation, and other operating conditions.
Reference Specification 2.25, Telemetry Design for detail regarding the design and installation of
telemetry devices.
Regulator Station Numbering
Regulator station numbering shall be generated by Gas Engineering and verified through the Avista Gas Design Tool. Renumbering is not necessary or recommended for a station that is being rebuilt. Consideration should be given to renumbering the station if it is moved for any reason to a new location more than 100 feet from the former location.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

1 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

2.24 METER AND REGULATOR TABLES AND DRAWINGS The following tables and drawings are to be used in aiding the sizing and design of gas metering and regulating facilities. The tables are not included as standards but as guidelines and tools. The drawings are the standard for new installations and should be used as guidelines when bringing meters up to standard.
In the interest of saving space within the following tables, the unit PSI is understood to mean PSIG and the unit CFH is understood to mean SCFH. Only regulators that are currently being installed are shown in the following tables. Contact Gas Engineering or the Gas Meter Shop if there are questions regarding regulators that are not included in the tables.
The following table summarizes how the capacity of each regulator was determined based on the manufacturer’s literature.
Regulator Accuracy of Set Pressure
Make Type 7" WC 2 PSIG 5 PSIG
American 1813B +2"/-1" WC ± 2% Absolute ± 2% Absolute
Fisher CS820 N/A ± 2% Absolute ± 2% Absolute
Schlumberger CL-38-2IM N/A ± 1% Absolute ± 1% Absolute
Relief Capacity
Relief capacities should be calculated to protect the downstream system as follows:
Delivery Pressure Protect downstream system to no more than
7" WC 2 PSIG
2 PSIG 5 PSIG
5 PSIG 10 PSIG

Obsolete Regulators The following regulators are obsolete and shall no longer be utilized within the gas distribution system. When identified, these regulators shall be replaced or scheduled to be changed out as soon as arrangements can be made for access to the customer’s equipment.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

2 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

OBSOLETE REGULATORS
American Reliance Type K No relief valve.
Fisher S100-4 No relief valve.
Fisher S253 No relief valve.
Fisher S292-4 Inadequate or no relief valve.
Rockwell 143-1, 143-4 No relief valve.
Rockwell 143-2, 143-6 with 1/4” or larger orifice. Inadequate relief valve for 1/4” or larger orifice. Relief valve OK for 1/8” and 3/16” orifice.
Rockwell 143-80-1,143-80-4 No relief valve.
Rockwell 143-80-2 with 1/4” or larger orifice. Inadequate relief valve for 1/4” or larger orifice. Relief valve OK for 1/8” and 3/16” orifice.
METER CAPACITY TABLES
DIAPHRAGM METERS

PRESSURE RATING
METER CAPACITY IN CFH AT METER PRESSURE SHOWN
CLASS Size Make 7" WC 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 20 PSI 35 PSI 50 PSI
*Formerly Rockwell/Equimeter **Also Available in Case Rated at 100 psi
7-inch WC capacity based on 0.75 inch WC differential across the meter (based on manufacturer’s recommendation). 2 PSIG and greater capacities are based on a 2-inch WC differential across the meter. Grayed out meters may be found in the field but are not currently installed as new.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

3 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

ROTARY METERS
METER
SIZE 7" WC 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 20 PSI 35 PSI 50 PSI
* A diaphragm meter should be used instead of a rotary meter for this application. If limited space will not allow the installation of a diaphragm meter, then a rotary meter may be used.

ROTARY METER MANUFACTURER PRESSURE RATING (PSIG)
Roots (Cast Iron Models 11M, 16M, 23M) 125
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

4 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

TURBINE METERS

PRESSURE RATING *
METER CAPACITY IN CFH AT METER PRESSURE SHOWN WITH 45 DEGREE ROTORS (STANDARD)
SIZE MAKE 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 20 PSI 35 PSI 50 PSI 100 PSI
220 psi 12TURBO Sensus ** 156,000 185,000 233,000 281,000 329,000 473,000 618,000 1,106,000

PRESSURE RATING *
METER CAPACITY IN CFH AT METER PRESSURE SHOWN WITH 30 DEGREE ROTORS (OPTIONAL)
SIZE MAKE 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 20 PSI 35 PSI 50 PSI 100 PSI
220 psi 12TURBO Sensus ** 257,000 304,000 383,000 461,000 540,000 767,000 1,015,000 1,816,000
* Available with higher pressure ratings
** Formerly Rockwell/Equimeter
Grayed out meters may be found in the field but are not currently installed as new.
REGULATOR CAPACITY TABLES REGULATOR CLASSIFICATIONS: CLASS A = RESIDENTIAL 7 –inch W.C. - 0 to 500 CFH CLASS B = RESIDENTIAL 2 PSIG, & SMALL COMMERCIAL 7 -inch W.C. & 2 PSIG - 500 to 2,000 CFH CLASS C = LARGE COMMERCIAL 7 -inch W.C. & 2 PSIG - 2,000 to 10,000 CFH CLASS D = LARGE COMMERCIAL 2PSIG & 5 PSIG - 10,000 to 30,000 CFH
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

5 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

METER SET REGULATORS (BASED ON 30 PSIG INLET; 46-60 PSIG MAOP)
Body Size 7" W.C. Capacity 2 PSIG Capacity 5 PSIG Capacity
A&B SENSUS 143-80 3/4"X1" 1/8" 695 695 695
INVENSYS 180 DEG 3/16" 1,465 1,465* 1,465* EQUIMETER 1/4" 2,000* 2,000* 2,000*
ROCKWELL 5/16" ** ** ** WA/ID ONLY 3/8" ** ** ** 1/2" ** ** **
B AMERICAN 1813 C 3/4"X1" 1/8" 600 650 n/a
90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 1,400 1,300 n/a 1/4" 2,300* 1,7001 n/a 5/16" **** **** n/a 3/8" **** **** n/a
1/2" ** ** n/a
B AMERICAN 1813 C 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 1/8" 700 650 n/a OREGON ONLY 90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 1,600*** 1,500 n/a
1/4" **** 2,5001 n/a 5/16" **** **** n/a 3/8" **** **** n/a
B ITRON B42 3/4"x1" 1/8" 700 500 n/a ACTARIS 90 & 180 DEG 1/8"x3/16" 700 700 n/a
SCHLUMBERGER 3/16" 1,400 900 n/a WA/ID ONLY 1/4" 2,000* 1,230 n/a 5/16" ** ** n/a
B&C ITRON CL-31-IMRV 3/4"x1" 1/8" n/a 7002 7002 ACTARIS & 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 3/16" n/a 1,5752 1,5752
SCHLUMBERGER 180 DEG 1/4" n/a 2,2752 2,2502
5/16" n/a 2,7002 2,7002
C AMERICAN 1813 B 2"x2" 1/4" 2,800 2,600 1,500 OREGON ONLY 180 DEG 3/8" 5,900 5,700 2,000 1/2" 10,300* 10,1001 3,200 5/8" **** 12,600* 3,900*
3/4" **** 15,900* 4,700*
7/8" **** 18,000* 4,600*
C FISHER CS800IQ (in) 2"X2" 3/8" x 1/4" 2850 2,940 2,930
CS820IQ (lbs) 180 DEG 3/8" 6290 6,170 4,050 1/2" 11,8501 11,770 6,360
High Capacity 5/8" 18,720* 16,960* 8,380
2-1/2" IRV 3/4" 23,010* 20,850* 10,580
7/8" ** 23,130* 13,250*
1" ** ** **
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

6 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

NO IRV
Body Size Capacity

→
* Exceeds IRV capacity, or has no IRV. Assemble with properly sized relief valve. ** Exceeds maximum inlet rating for orifice size, replace with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field. *** Acceptable if found in the field. Do not install new in this configuration. **** Not acceptable because of IRV capacity and parameters fall outside of optimum performance criteria, replace with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field.
1 Internal Relief Valve OK at typical high operating pressure of 2-4 psig below MAOP.
2 When using a CL31-IMRV regulator, a 1-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig. If the regulator is set at 5 psig, set the relief valve at 8 psig.
3 When using a CL38-2IMRV regulator, a 2-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig. If the regulator is set at 5 psig, set the relief valve at 8 psig.

METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

7 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

METER SET REGULATORS (BASED ON 15 PSIG INLET; 22.6-45 PSIG MAOP)
Body Size 7" W.C. Capacity 2 PSIG Capacity 5 PSIG Capacity
A&B SENSUS 143-80 3/4"X1" 1/8" 450 450 450
INVENSYS 180 DEG 3/16" 1,035 1,035 1,035 EQUIMETER 1/4" 1,680 1,680* 1,680*
ROCKWELL 5/16" ** ** ** WA/ID ONLY 3/8" ** ** ** 1/2" ** ** ** 5/8" ** ** **
B AMERICAN 1813 C 3/4"X1" 1/8" 425 425 n/a 90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 900 800 n/a 1/4" 1,400 1,000 n/a 5/16" **** **** n/a 3/8" **** **** n/a
B AMERICAN 1813 C 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 1/8" 450 425 n/a OREGON ONLY 90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 1,000*** 850 n/a
1/4" 1,800*** 1,200 n/a 5/16" **** ** n/a 3/8" **** ** n/a
B ITRON B42 3/4"x1" 1/8" 425 300 n/a
ACTARIS 90 & 180 DEG 1/8"x3/16" 470 410 n/a
SCHLUMBERGER 3/16" 850 500 n/a WA/ID ONLY 1/4" 1,2001 650 n/a 5/16" ** ** n/a 3/8" ** ** n/a
B&C ITRON CL-31-IMRV 3/4"x1" 1/8" n/a 5002 5002
ACTARIS & 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 3/16" n/a 1,0252 9502 SCHLUMBERGER 180 DEG 1/4" n/a 1,3752 1,2752 5/16" n/a 1,6502 1,5252
C AMERICAN 1813 B 2"x2" 1/4" 1,900 1,800 1,000 OREGON ONLY 180 DEG 3/8" 4,000 3,200 1,100 1/2" 6,400* 5,500 1,900
5/8" **** 6,200* 2,300
3/4" **** 8,500* 2,600
7/8" **** 9,600* 2,600*
C FISHER CS800IQ (in) 2"X2" 3/8" x 1/4" 1,870 1,980 1,820
CS820IQ (lbs) 180 DEG 3/8" 3,130 4,150 1,950 1/2" 7,760 7,440 3,410 High Capacity 5/8" 12,000* 10,230 4,020
2-1/2" IRV 3/4" 16,170* 12,410* 5,440
7/8" **** 15,290* 5,830 1" ** ** **
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

8 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

Class Make Type Body Size 7" W.C. Capacity 2 PSIG Capacity 5 PSIG Capacity
C&D FISHER 299H 2"x2" 1/4"x3/8" 1,920* 1,920* 1,870*
WA/ID ONLY 180 DEG 3/8" 4,410* 4,360* 4,190* 1/2" 7,670* 7,580* 7,280* 3/4" 16,480* 15,990* 15,150* 1" 25,750* 25,050* 23,310*
1-3/16" 31,690* 30,760* 28,530*
C&D ITRON CL-38-2IMRV 2"x2" 3/8" n/a 3,9503 3,7503
ACTARIS 180 DEG 1/2" n/a 5,4503 5,2003 SCHLUMBERGER 5/8" n/a 9,0003 8,6003
3/4" n/a 10,4003 10,0003
Use Black Closing Spring→ 1” n/a 12,8003 12,2003
* Exceeds IRV capacity, or has no IRV. Assemble with properly sized relief valve. ** Exceeds maximum inlet rating for orifice size, replace with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field. *** Acceptable if found in the field. Do not install new in this configuration. **** Not acceptable because of IRV capacity and parameters fall outside of optimum performance criteria, replace with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field.
1 Internal Relief Valve OK at typical high operating pressure of 2-4 psig below MAOP.
2 When using a CL31-IMRV regulator, a 1-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig. If the regulator is set at 5 psig, set the relief valve at 8 psig.
3 When using a CL38-2IMRV regulator, a 2-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig. If the regulator is set at 5 psig, set the relief valve at 8 psig.
METER SET REGULATORS (BASED ON 5 PSIG INLET; 10-22.5 PSIG MAOP)
Body Size Capacity Capacity
B AMERICAN 1813 B 2"x2" 1/4" 1,000 850 OREGON ONLY 180 DEG 3/8" 2,000 1,600 1/2" 2,900 2,300 5/8" 4,000* 2,600 3/4" 5,000* 3,700 7/8" 7,000* 4,100* 1" **** 4,400*
B AMERICAN 1813 C 3/4"X1" 1/8" 250 225
90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 450 350 1/4" 650 450
5/16" 750 500 3/8" 950* 650 1/2" 1,200* 750* 9/16" ** **
B AMERICAN 1813 C 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" 1/8" 275 225 OREGON ONLY 90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 550 350 1/4" 1,000 500 5/16" 1,600 600 3/8" 2,100* 7001
1/2" 2,500* 900*
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

9 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

Class Make Type Body Size Capacity Capacity
B&C ITRON CL-31-IMRV 3/4"x1" 1/8" n/a 2752 ACTARIS & 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 3/16" n/a 5002 SCHLUMBERGER 180 DEG 1/4" n/a 6002 5/16" n/a 6802
C FISHER CS800IQ (in) 2"X2" 3/8" x 1/4" 1,120 1,140 CS820IQ (lbs) 180 DEG 3/8" 1,120 1,850 1/2" 2,600 3,140
High Capacity 5/8" 3,670 4,120 2-1/2" IRV 3/4" 4,630* 5,150 7/8" 8,130* 6,120 1" 9,590* 7,050* 1-3/8" ** **
C&D ITRON CL-38-2IM 2"x2" 3/8" n/a 1,9003 ACTARIS 180 DEG 1/2" n/a 2,6503 SCHLUMBERGER 5/8" n/a 4,2503 3/4" n/a 4,9503 1" n/a 6,2503
* Exceeds IRV capacity, or has no IRV. Assemble with properly sized relief valve. ** Exceeds maximum inlet rating for orifice size, replace with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field. *** Acceptable if found in the field. Do not install new in this configuration. **** Not acceptable because of IRV capacity and parameters fall outside of optimum performance criteria, replace
with proper regulator or orifice if found in the field.
1 Internal Relief Valve OK at typical high operating pressure of 2-4 psig below MAOP. 2When using a CL31-IMRV regulator, a 1-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set
at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig. 3When using a CL38-2IMRV regulator, a 2-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is
set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

10 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

METER SET REGULATORS (BASED ON 2 PSIG INLET; 6-8 PSIG MAOP)
Class Make Type Body Size Capacity Capacity
B AMERICAN 1813 B 2"x2" 1/4" n/a 5752 OREGON ONLY 180 DEG 3/8" 1,250 1,1002 1/2" 1,600 1,6002 5/8" 2,400 1,7002 3/4" 2,700 2,2002 7/8" 3,500 2,5002 1" 4,400* 2,8002
B AMERICAN 1813 C 3/4"X1" 1/8"x3/16" n/a 150
90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 250 225 1/4" 350 250 5/16" 450 350 3/8" 500 425 1/2" 600* 550 9/16" 650* 550*
B AMERICAN 1813 C 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" 1/8"x3/16 n/a 150 OREGON ONLY 90 & 180 DEG 3/16" 325 225 1/4" 500 350 5/16" 600 375 3/8" 700 425
1/2" 9/16" 950* 1,400* 550 550* B&C ITRON CL-31-IMRV 3/4"x1" 1/8" n/a n/a ACTARIS & 1-1/4"x1-1/4" 3/16" n/a 3003 SCHLUMBERGER 180 DEG 1/4" n/a 3253 5/16" n/a 3503
C FISHER CS800IQ (in) 2"X2" 3/8" x 1/4" 810 720 CS820IQ (lbs) 180 DEG 3/8" 1,080 1,150 1/2" 2,040 1,980
High Capacity 5/8" 2,750 2,470 2-1/2" IRV 3/4" 3,950 3,230 7/8" 4,610 3,540 1" 4,990 4,200 1-3/8" 6,250* 5,640
C&D ITRON CL-38-2IM 2"x2" 3/8" 1,4004 1,1504 ACTARIS 180 DEG 1/2" 1,9504 1,6004 SCHLUMBERGER 5/8" 3,1004 2,5504 3/4" 3,6504 3,0004
1" 4,5505 3,7504
* Exceeds IRV capacity, or has no IRV. Assemble with properly sized relief valve.
1 Capacities at 2 psig delivery pressure are sized using a 3 psig inlet pressure. 2 Use American Meter spring 71424P021 (1-2 psig) to achieve listed capacity. 3 When using a CL31-IMRV regulator, a 1-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig.
4 When using a CL38-2IMRV regulator, a 1-inch Fisher 289H relief valve should also be installed. If the regulator is set at 7” WC, set the relief valve at 1 psig. If the regulator is set at 2 psig, set the relief valve at 4 psig.
5 When using a CL38-2IMRV regulator with a 1 inch orifice at 7-inch WC, a 2-inch Fisher 289H relief valve set at 1 psig should also be installed.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

11 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

FARM TAP REGULATOR 500 PSIG MAOP INLET (50 PSIG SET POINT)
Class Make Type Body Size Configuration Orifice
Inlet Capacity CFH
Inlet Capacity CFH
Inlet Capacity CFH
N/A Fisher 620 & 621
OUT OF PRODUCTION 1/8"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
2,430*
9,070*
N/A**
N/A**
3,910*
15,000*
N/A**
N/A**
7,500*
28,650*
N/A**
N/A**
IRV
INADEQUATE
1/8"
3/16"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
2,580*
5,850*
9,740*
**
**
4,100*
9,400*
15,050*
**
**
8090*
18,300*
20,000*
N/A**
N/A**
3/16"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
5,700*
8,700*
13,000*
N/A**
9,450*
15,500*
34,500*
N/A**
20,500*
37,500*
86,500*
N/A**
(Equimeter)

OUT OF
PRODUCTION
3/16"
1/4"
5/16"
3/8"
5,400*
9,900*
14,500*
19,000*
8,750*
15,850*
21,750*
29,000*
17,000*
30,500*
N/A**
N/A**
(Equimeter)
(Sensus)
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
9,000*
21,000*
N/A**
N/A**
11,000*
25,000*
N/A**
N/A**
26,250*
42,000*
N/A**
N/A**
(Equimeter)
(Sensus)
3/16"
1/4"
5/16"
5,400*
9,900*
N/A**
8,750*
14425*
N/A**
17,000*
24,500*
N/A**
*Has no IRV or IRV is inadequate. Assemble with properly sized relief valve. **Exceeds maximum inlet rating or pressure drop for orifice size.
Grayed out regulators may be found in the field but are not currently installed as new. For inlet pressure above 500 psig MAOP and orifices above ¼" consult Gas Engineering.
METER AND REGULATOR REV. NO. 13

12 OF 12 SPEC. 2.24

RELIEF VALVE CAPACITIES AT SET POINT
(60 MAOP DOWNSTREAM)
Make Type Size Orifice Set @ 50 PSIG Capacity CFH Set @ 60 PSIG Capacity CFH
American Axial Flow 2" 100% 164,000 190,000
Anderson Greenwood 83 3/4" x 1"
3/4" x 1"
-6
-8
8,580
15,300
9,960
17,700
Mooney Single Port 2" 100% 94,000 108,000
*Maximum set point 50 psig. **Maximum set point 53 psig to maintain 60 psig MAOP.
Grayed out relief valves may be found in the field, but are not currently installed as new. For pressure conditions other than listed, consult Gas Engineering for proper sizing. (OTHER APPLICATIONS)
Make Type Size Orifice Set @ 15" W.C. Capacity CFH COMMENTS
Fisher 289L 1" 1" 8,300 Capacity at 2 psig build-up
.
APPENDIX A – METER AND REGULATOR DRAWINGS
A-36712 1 of 2 11 2018
A-36712 2 of 2 1 2015
A-38500 1 of 1 0 2020 Meter Set Stand for Flex Line Support
A-34175 1 of 2 3 2014 District Regulator Stations
A-34175 2 of 2 1 2014 District Regulator Stations
A-35208 1 of 1 7 2019
A-37102 1 of 1 6 2019 Pressure Gas Dist Systems
A-37103 1 of 1 2 2015
B-35207 1 of 2 0 2016 MAOP 175 PSIG or less.
B-35207 2 of 2 6 2016 Pressure Systems with MAOP 175 PSIG or less.
C-35209 1 of 2 8 2019
C-35209 2 of 2 5 2019
B-33325 1 of 4 8 2019
B-33325 2 of 4 10 2019
B-33325 4 of 4 10 2019
B-38205 1 of 1 2 2019
B-35785 1 of 1 8 2019
E-37197 1 of 1 5 2019
E-37970 1 of 1 4 2019
E-33952 1 of 1 6 2015
E-35783 1 of 1 6 2015

METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
1 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

2.25 TELEMETRY DESIGN SCOPE: To establish a standard design for gas telemetry systems.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.741 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC), including Articles 500, 501, 504
OTHER REFERENCES: AGA XL1001, Classification of Locations for Electrical installations in Gas Utility Areas CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 2.23, Regulator Design Spec. 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings Spec. 4.51, Gas Control Room Management Plan DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
General Telemetry systems, including alarm set points, should be specified by Gas Engineering. In general, telemetry is used to monitor system pressures, volumes, and flows from areas of special
interest such as gate stations, gas transportation customers, district regulator stations, selected large industrial customers, and distribution systems with more than one source of gas. Each distribution system supplied by more than one pressure regulating station must be equipped with telemetry, an electronic pressure recorder, or a mechanical chart recorder to monitor the gas pressure. Telemetry is preferred. Sites with telemetry should alarm for pressures that exceed the MAOP and for
pressures that fall below reasonable levels for reliable operation. For single-source distribution systems, the Construction Manager in conjunction with Gas Engineering should determine the necessity of installing telemetry or recording gauges, taking into consideration the number of customers supplied, the operating pressures, the capacity of the installation, and other operating conditions that might warrant the
installation of monitoring devices.
Data Collected Data collected generally includes metering pressure, gas temperature, corrected and uncorrected gas volume, pressure upstream and downstream from regulation points, and odorizer alarms.
The local instrument, either an electronic corrector, electronic pressure recorder, or a programmable logic controller (PLC)/remote terminal unit (RTU)/flow computer, calculates and transmits: corrected gas volume and flow, and reports this information along with measured pressures and temperatures, high and
low pressure alarms, ambient or case temperature, instrument alarms such as pulse switches, tamper,
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
2 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

instrument main battery, memory battery, and communications battery voltage and alarms, high flow alarms in selected cases, and alarm set points. Depending on the nature of the installation, data collected ranges from pulse accumulator volumes (from a meter that has internal temperature compensation), to complete data (from meters with electronic correctors) to pressure, flow, volume, and gas temperature.
Gate stations with flow computers/PLCs/RTUs should measure and report complete pressure, temperature, volume, and flow data that is measured via transducers on upstream, metering, and downstream piping. This may also include data such as corrected volumes, flows, and pressures from the interstate pipeline companies, as obtained from their instruments at a gate station.
Data Path and Uses Field data is collected with AutoSol Enterprise Service (AES) software, developed by Automation Solutions, Inc. Avista’s AutoSol server communicates with the field devices via a bank of conventional
analog telephone line modems (POTS, “plain old telephone service”) and Internet Protocol (IP) communications. New installations should be IP-based since the use of conventional land lines is being
phased out by Avista. Field instruments collect and record hourly data, typically maintaining at least a 30 day history. The AES server polls the field devices and downloads hourly summary data from the instruments. Polling ranges
from several times per day for older battery powered installations on landlines to once every 15 minutes for selected AC powered devices.
The data collected by the AES server is placed on a network file share where SCADA, Nucleus, and PI
load it for multiple users including the Natural Gas Resources Department’s use for daily nominations and transactions with interstate pipeline companies and customers, and Gas Engineering.
Nucleus is the data warehouse and long-term repository for hourly billing data. This data is used to
create reports for both internal and external consumption. Some transportation customers receive daily and/or monthly reports regarding usage at their site. The data in such reports is sent to customers as a
courtesy, not for billing purposes. It is considered to be “un-scrubbed” raw data and is provided on a best-effort basis.
Data is also transferred from the AutoSol server to Avista’s SCADA system for use by Gas Control. The
SCADA displays and information are also available to multiple users throughout Avista including Gas Engineering, Pressure Controlmen, and Managers.
Data in SCADA is value reported at the time the field device was polled. SCADA’s primary function is
alarming and reporting present readings with an option for a demand scan (forced polling) initiated by a Gas Controller. Official billing hourly volume data is stored in Nucleus, not in PI or SCADA.
PI stores both instantaneous data and historical data. For Mercury/Honeywell instruments, additional
data in the audit trail for pressure history is periodically transferred directly several times daily to PI and typically includes the maximum, average, and minimum pressures during the hourly interval, in addition to
the values at the time of polling. ABB TotalFlow flow computers also provide 1 minute trend files for selected data. PI is accessible by multiple users within Avista. Historic gas volume hourly data is stored in PI and Nucleus.

METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
3 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION:
Gate Stations New and retrofitted measurement and telemetry installations at gate stations should utilize an ABB TotalFlow flow computer/RTU.
Gate stations should be connected to receive un-corrected pulses from the interstate pipeline company’s turbine or rotary meter which is established as the sole billing meter. Avista’s transducers for pressure and temperature at the meter should be connected to Avista’s RTUs and/or correctors and pressure monitors so that Avista’s equipment can provide our check correction. Additional pressures and temperatures upstream and downstream of Avista-owned and operated gas heaters are also
recommended. Orifice meters require direct measurement of differential pressure as well as static pressure as there are no moving parts or sensors to provide a pulse.
Coriolis and ultrasonic meters generally require a pulse splitter to share their output with the interstate
pipeline and Avista as they measure mass flow directly and convert that signal to pulses that indicate the flow rate. Avista’s flow computer then converts the flow rate to volume and flow in our standard units of MCF or CCF.
The instruments should calculate corrected volumes, flows, and alarms, and report this information along with pressures, temperatures, internal instrument status, and alarms. AC power with battery backup is
required.
Where injection type odorizers (typically YZ brand) are owned and operated by Avista, the flow computer should generate the control signal which is typically 4 – 20 mA based on the calculated flow rate.
Gas Transport and Telemetry Customers
Gas Transportation (“Transport”) customers should have a Mercury/Honeywell Instruments Model Mini AT
PT or PPT or Mini Max electronic volume corrector installed with inputs from the meter for pulses (or by mechanical coupling when mounted on the meter) and transducers for pressure and temperature. Rotary
meters with Dresser Micro PTZ correctors providing corrected pulse output may also be utilized depending on the application. Additional pressure monitoring such as the pressure delivered to the
customer or upstream pressure if different than the metering pressure will be evaluated by Gas Engineering on a site specific basis.
Communications should be via a Mercury Instruments “MI Wireless” communications package with a
cellular modem and an AC power supply and rechargeable battery backup. The corrector should also have an internal battery backup. Refer to “Transport Customers” within this specification for further detail.
Regulator Sites and System Pressure Monitoring
Regulator station sites and other pressure monitoring points selected for telemetry installations should
have a Mercury Instruments model “ERX” electronic pressure recorder in a common enclosure from the manufacturer that includes the MI Wireless communications package, power supply, rechargeable communications battery, and 6 volt battery backup independent of the communications battery. AC power supply is preferred. Solar may be used with Gas Engineering’s approval on a site specific basis.

METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
4 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

Both upstream and downstream pressures should be monitored with the instrument located nearest to the high pressure side to minimize sense line tubing length for the highest pressure line. Power Plants Power plants requirements are site specific. Gas Engineering should be involved very early in the
planning and design process. An ABB TotalFlow flow computer is preferred. A Mercury / Honeywell instruments Mini AT-PT may be acceptable. Instruments should have a an AC power supply, rechargeable battery backup, memory backup battery independent of the communications battery, and IP based communications. Table for detailed reference to quantities measured:
Table for detailed reference to quantities measured:

Site Quantities Measured (Inputs/Outputs)
Gate Stations
Pulses for volume, uncorrected from the interstate pipeline company’s meter.
Pulses for volume, corrected from the interstate pipeline company’s meter or PLC when we do not calculate our own volume.
Flow rate, corrected, from the interstate pipeline company’s PLC or flow
computer when we do not calculate our own flow rate.
Pressure at each meter.
Differential pressure at orifice meters.
Pressure to Avista HP, IP, and distribution systems.
Pressure in the pipelines’ upstream line.
Gas temperature at each meter.
Gas temperature upstream and downstream of Avista owned gas heaters.
Ambient air temperature.
Alarm contacts from the odorizer’s common alarm when used.
Alarms such as security, tamper, valve position, interstate pipeline company, etc. when available.
AC Power failure or battery charger failure.
Communications battery voltage.
Output: Analog output to odorizer, 4-20 mA signal based on flow, preferably from Avista’s flow computer. Avista may use a 4-20 mA signal from the pipelines’
Regulator Stations
Pressure upstream of the regulator(s).
Pressure downstream of the regulator(s).
Communications battery voltage.
Gas Transportation Customers
Pressure at meter.
Gas temperature at meter.
Pulses from meter either by mechanical coupling, pulser, or pulses, depending on meter.
Downstream or customer pressure, or upstream pressure, depending on metering configuration, and location on system.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
5 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

Notes: Instruments calculate corrected volume, corrected flow rates, and alarms based on the inputs and
programming. There are internal measurements that the instruments also provide such as case temperature, main battery voltage, and index switch fail, which we also utilize.
Some equipment at some transport customers may not support telemetering of pressure and temperature such as when utilizing pulses from a fixed factor or temperature compensated meter or from
a corrector (e.g. Dresser micro PTZ) that does not support communications directly with AutoSol.
Communications Internet Protocol (IP) based communications is the preferred choice.
• Sierra Wireless RV50, Raven XT, or XE cellular gateway for packet switched data on the Verizon or AT&T cellular networks for communicating via IP wirelessly. For non-flow computer installations, a Mercury Instruments MI Wireless communications box with a port server may be used for up to four Mercury devices.
• Avista Ethernet, (wireless when available) as part of “smart grid” projects or near an electric substation or other facility where Avista has Ethernet.
• Land line telephone lines (POTS) and dial-up modems are the last choice for new installations due to slow speed and long scan times by the AutoSol modem bank.
• Priorities
• New installations
• Gate stations
• Pressure monitoring stations
• Transportation customers Power Source AC Line power with self-contained rechargeable battery backup is preferred. Solar voltaic power or thermoelectric utilizing gas for fuel may be considered for certain locations with Gas Engineering’s approval, depending on the location, data being acquired and its purpose, and the economics of providing AC power to the site.
Electrical Classification Outdoor area classification for electrical installations are based on:
• NFPA 70 / National Electrical Code (NEC) with particular attention to Articles 500, 501, 504 relating to Hazardous (Classified Locations, primarily with respect to Class I, Divisions 1 and 2.
• American Gas Association (AGA) XL1001, Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations in Gas Utility Areas.
• Areas within 5 feet of or directly above any relief valves or automatic vents will be treated as Class I Division 1 (likely to have gas present during normal operation).
• Areas within 15 feet of any flanges, screwed connection, valves, relief valves, or vents will be treated as Class I Division 2 (likely to have gas present only during abnormal operation).
• Underground (buried) flanges, screwed connections, or valves create a class I Division 2 area above the ground.
• Electrical equipment should not be installed in the direct path of discharge from vents or relief valves.
• Areas including pipe without valves, flanges, or screwed connections are considered non-hazardous (ordinary) areas.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
6 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

• Electronic correctors mounted on meters with or without telemetry must comply with the applicable version of the NEC, Articles 500, 501, and 504 for Hazardous (classified) Locations. Sensing Lines
• Small underground piping at Avista’s installations is discouraged. It is preferred to use pressure transducers tapped from the main piping and route the signal cables in conduit to the RTU or communication box.
• Correctors and pressure recorders utilizing integral pressure transducers should be mounted as close to the meter or piping as practical to minimize the use of small diameter exposed tubing.
• Each sensing line should have a unique tap with 1/4-inch NPT female pipe threads for connection to sense line tubing adaptor.
• A shutoff valve must be installed in each takeoff line as near as practical to the point of takeoff. No taps off bottom of piping.
• Sensing lines should be located in the piping system to sense line pressures at a point of non-turbulent laminar flow. This generally is achieved by placing sensing taps a minimum of 10 pipe
diameters downstream of any valves, regulators, or fittings. Sense line taps are typically located with the taps for the associated regulator sense lines.
• Site specific consideration should be given to adjusting the pressure sensing location to allow for maintenance of the tap without shutting down a single sourced system. Location of bypass regulators and manual bypasses should also be considered.
• Each takeoff connection and attaching fitting or adapter must be made of suitable material, be able to withstand the maximum service pressure and temperature of the pipe or equipment to which it is attached, and be designed to satisfactorily withstand all stresses without failure by fatigue.
• Isolation valves and tees supplied by Mercury Instruments in their installation kit or similar fittings procured separately should be used along with fittings to allow for calibration and a Ralston “check valve type Quick Test” fitting or similar approved fitting.
• Sensing lines should be 3/8-inch OD stainless steel tubing for mechanical strength except in the case of extremely short runs where the corrector or recorder is at the tap location such as on the meter.
• Fittings at the instrument connections should use dielectric insulators for electrical isolation from the gas piping and cathodic protection system.
• Sensing lines should be routed and secured above grade to provide protection from anticipated causes of damage.
• Valve handles should be removed or locked to prevent unauthorized operation. Pulses to Customer Avista may, upon customer request, provide metering pulses as described below for connection to an input to the customer’s energy management system or to a remote totalizer. The costs for these custom installations will be billed to the customer on a time and materials basis. Customer connection and general information regarding pulses:
• The transistors or reed switches that provide output pulses from Avista’s metering installations are designed for low voltage and low current control signal applications such as interfacing with electronic energy management systems. Ratings are listed below. They are not for controlling
relays, solenoids, or lights.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
7 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

• Manual local electrical isolation disconnect from the customers wiring should be provided by installation of a weather proof MIL style connector set supplied and installed by Avista in series with the wiring from the customer near the meter. This is to protect Avista personnel working on metering from inadvertent voltages that could be present on the wiring from the customer and serve as a demarcation point.
• The customer is responsible for installation of conduit and wiring in accordance with requirements outlined by Gas Engineering and communicated by Avista’s Metermen or Telemetry Technicians.
• Avista will make the connection to the meter’s corrector or pulser.
• Meters without electronic volume correctors: o Pulses should be provided by adding a magnetic volume pulser between the wiggler shaft and the mechanical index or replace the index with a combination index/pulser consisting of a commercially available reed switch and magnet unit that may provide 1, 2, 4, or 10 pulses per revolution. o The reed switch is rated for low voltage and current, typical for an electronic input. o These are dry contacts. The wetting voltage will be provided by the customer’s energy management system. o Typical reed switch ratings are 30 VDC / 21 VAC, 0.025 amps maximum. o Acceptable pulsers include Miners & Pisani # MVP-10 and MVP-1; Honeywell / Mercury Instruments #206, 210, or 212; Miners and Pisani / Elster/American Meter #RVP-F1 52870K161, depending the application. o Avista provides and installs the above pulsers and bills the customer.
• Meters with electronic gas volume correctors:
o Corrected or un-corrected pulses, as determined by the customer’s need and Avista’s metering capabilities, should be provided from the electronic corrector’s isolated pulse output. o The pulse output is typically an open-collector transistor rated for low voltage and current and is polarity sensitive: 3VDC min – 30 VDC max (DC only), sinking up to 0.015 amps for form C outputs and 0.005 A for Form A outputs. The wetting voltage will be provided by the customer’s energy management system. o Avista provides and installs any additional components that may be required to obtain the isolated pulse output and bills the customer.
• Remote Volume Totalizers / Counters: Avista may furnish remote totalizers to make use of metering or corrector pulses to actuate a remote volume index for the customer. Costs are billed to the customer.
• Avista will define the volume of gas that each pulse represents. Avista will also define if it is an un-corrected reading (index or raw value and if it is temperature compensated) or a “corrected for temperature and pressure” value from an electronic gas volume corrector.
• Disclaimer: Pulses and reports furnished to the customer are not for billing purposes. They are local raw data and informational only. Future delivery and/or replacement data is not guaranteed. Avista makes no other representations or warranties concerning the pulses or data and there are no express warranties and no implied warranties pertaining to the data including, but not limited to, any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, all of which are hereby expressly disclaimed.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
8 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

Transport Customers Gas Transportation Customers: Refer to Drawing E-37114 Sheet 1, Gas Telemetry Standards, Gas Transportation Customer. The drawing is located at the end of this specification for typical installation details.
1. Avista procures the following on the customer’s behalf and bills the customer: a. Meter upgrades, when required, to provide metering suitable for gas transportation and telemetry. b. Corrector that meets current Avista requirements for gas telemetry for mounting on or near the gas meter.
c. Wireless cellular packet switched data communications assembly and antenna that mount near the meter or on existing structures. d. Associated wiring and hardware to connect the individual components. e. Avista procures and installs the above items. The customer is billed for the loaded costs
for materials, labor, travel, installation, engineering, and technical work related to integration into Avista’s telemetry system.
2. Customer provides: a. AC power including installation: 120 V, single phase, 15 or 20 amp dedicated or high reliability circuit for powering the telemetry instruments which consume very little power.
This includes all conduit, conductors, excavation, backfill, permits, and installation to get power to the device. Avista makes the final connection at the device.
b. Conduit for communications and low voltage power between the corrector and the communications assembly when both are not mounted adjacent to the meter and each
other. For example, if the communications box is on a wall rather than post mounted at the meter.
c. The installation shall comply with state and local electrical codes, rules, and regulations. Note that typically areas within 15 feet of gas piping flanges, screwed connections,
valves, reliefs, or vents are considered hazardous (classified) locations and have special requirements. Installation of the over-current protection and disconnecting means is
required to be in an ordinary (non-hazardous) area. Refer to Electrical Classification within this specification for additional details.
d. If a wireless or cellular radio or modem is not practical such as when there is no reliable coverage, the customer must provide or continue to provide, at their expense, as is
standard practice for existing customers: i. Dedicated standard voice grade telephone line with direct dialing in and out
including long distance direct dial service that is available continuously. ii. Installation of Avista provided signal circuit protector for the phone line including
grounding. iii. Installation of telephone cable to protector and to the penetration at the wall with
enough extra cable for Avista to terminate. iv. Dedicated galvanized rigid steel conduit for telephone line including installation
from customer’s wall penetration and interior junction box to the vicinity of Avista’s corrector at the meter. This includes all penetrations, supports, clamps,
anchors, sealants, etc. v. If the telephone signal circuit protector is mounted outdoors, a locking box and ground rod are required.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
9 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

3. Avista provides: a. Avista establishes, maintains, and pays for the cellular data account. b. The cellular account must be an Avista account with the carrier for many reasons including communications protocol, network security, and account access for service, troubleshooting, and standardization.
4. Notification and Timing: a. Avista’s Gas Engineering requires 90 days minimum notice from the date Avista receives “written notice” from the customer advising of their intent to sign a “Transportation Services Agreement”. This allows time to design, procure, install, test, and integrate the field devices into the Gas Telemetry System.
b. Advice of this notice should be via e-mail either from the Natural Gas Resources Manager or the Account Executive to both the Manager of Gas Engineering and to the Gas Measurement Engineer.
METERING & REGULATION
TELEMETRY DESIGN
REV. NO. 6
10 OF 10 SPEC. 2.25

CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
1 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

2.3 CATHODIC PROTECTION 2.32 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN SCOPE:
To establish uniform procedures for the protection of metallic pipelines from external, internal, and atmospheric corrosion. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.451, §192.452, §192.453, §192.455, §192.457, §192.459, §192.461, §192.463, §192.465,
§192.467, §192.469, §192.471, §192.473, §192.45, §192.476, §192.477, §192.479, §192.481, §192.483, §192.485, §192.489, §192.490, §192.491 WAC 173-160-456, 480-93-110 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 2.15, Bridge Design Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel
Spec. 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installation THEORY OF CORROSION:
AC vs. DC
Electrical current is classified as either alternating (AC) or direct (DC). Alternating current reverses its direction of flow many times each second. Direct current is line-directional in nature or flows in one direction only. Alternating current, for all practical purposes, is not related to the corrosion process. In order to measure corrosion current, to determine cathodic protection current requirements, and to verify the adequacy of protection equipment installed, it is necessary to make measurements of DC
current.
Corrosion Cell
Corrosion of a metal will only occur if all the following four are present: an anode, a cathode, an electrolyte, and an electrical connection between the anode and cathode. When all of these are present, we have a corrosion cell. Corrosion or deterioration of the metal takes place at the anode where metal ions enter solution. When steel corrodes or oxidizes, the iron atom loses two electrons (e-) and the iron ion (Fe++) enters the
electrolyte. The initial reaction produces a corrosion product, ferrous hydroxide, which is usually white in color. This product is often unstable and will combine further with available oxygen and water. The stable product formed is ferric hydroxide and it exhibits a characteristic brown or rust color.
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
2 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

Anode and Cathode Reactions Anode Reaction:
Fe++ + 2OH → Fe(OH)2 Unstable Ferrous Hydroxide (White) 4Fe(OH)2 + O2 + 2H2O → 4Fe(OH)3 Ferric Hydroxide or Rust Cathode Reaction:
2H+ + 2e- → H2 Hydrogen Gas 4H+ + 4e- + O2 → 2H2O Water
An associated, simultaneous reaction occurs at the cathode and combines hydrogen ions (H+) with electrons (e-), which have been released from the anode, to form hydrogen atoms (H). This hydrogen then plates out on the cathode, combines with oxygen to form water, or combines with other hydrogen atoms and evolves off as molecules of gas (H2). The formation of hydrogen on the cathode and oxide on the anode, polarization, tends to retard the
corrosion rate. A chemical or mechanical process that removes either the protective hydrogen or oxide films will allow corrosion to continue. The corrosion rate of the anode is directly proportional to the current density or current flow from the
anode. Therefore, anything that can be done to stop or reduce this current flow will in turn stop or reduce corrosion. Corrosion and corresponding corrosion control are based on this principle. The basic means
of corrosion control is first and foremost an effective coating installation, followed by the removal of either anode or cathode, breaking the electrical connection between anode and cathode, removing the electrolyte or increasing its electrical resistance, and the application of a counter protective current.
Anode-Cathode Area Ratio
The corrosion or penetration rate is also a function of the anode-cathode area ratios as follows (assuming a corrosion cell exists):
Corrosion Rate =Cathode Area
Anode Area

This relationship means simply that if a large cathode is connected to a small anode, the corrosion rate can be very severe. If the ratios are reversed, that is, a large anode connected to a small cathode, then
the corrosion rate can be drastically reduced and, in many instances, will become negligible.
If perfect coatings could be applied to the anode or cathode, they would be electrically insulated from the electrolyte and all corrosion would stop. Since coatings are never perfect, coating the anode only will
cause accelerated pitting where there are coating holidays due to the change in anode-cathode area ratios. Coating the cathode instead of the anode will more effectively reduce the corrosion rate without
the danger of localized pitting. For practical reasons, since anodes and cathodes are not readily distinguishable on pipelines, both are given a coating.
Regardless of what metal is involved in a corrosion cell, the reaction at the anode and cathode is basically the same. The anode and cathode reactions occur simultaneously and cannot occur separately.

CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
3 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

Electrolyte Resistivity The magnitude of the corrosion current flowing between any anode and cathode is also dependent on the electrolyte resistance or resistivity. The greater the electrolyte resistivity the smaller the current flow, and conversely, the lower the resistivity the greater the magnitude of corrosion current.
Soil resistivity is sometimes classified as follows:
Resistivity (Ohm-cm) Classification
0-1,000 Very Corrosive
1,000-10,000 Moderately Corrosive
10,000-Over Slightly Corrosive
Corrosion classification of soils represents, in a very general way, a means of predicting areas in which corrosion of metals may become a problem. It is not proper to say that serious corrosion will occur because a specific resistivity is less than 500 ohm-cm or that corrosion will not occur because resistivities are above 10,000 ohm-cm. The corrosion classification of soils is still a useful tool to generally define corrosive areas if used within limits as a general guide to provide for better corrosion judgment. Anode-Cathode Separation Distance It is important to note that separation between anode and cathode exists more often than not on the same piece of pipe. The anode and cathode can be microscopically close or thousands of feet apart. Anodes and cathodes are formed when metals are placed in dissimilar soils or electrolytes. These dissimilarities can be dissolved salts, moisture, temperature, or oxygen concentrations. Anodic areas will usually be in areas of greatest salt concentration, greatest moisture content, highest temperature, and lowest oxygen concentration. Oxygen concentration cells are common at mechanical junctions, in crevices, and under foreign deposits.
Dissimilar Metals One of the most common types of corrosion is that caused by the junctions of two or more dissimilar metals. In cases where dissimilar metals are coupled together, one metal will corrode (anode) and have metal ions enter solution (electrolyte) and travel to the other metal (cathode). Metals are ranked by their tendency to corrode to each other in the following table known as the Galvanic Series. Stainless steel and chromium are listed in two places in the series as both active and passive. When these metals are in an oxygen-starved environment, they have a greater tendency to corrode and are therefore placed higher in the series. When in a solution containing adequate or excess oxygen, stainless steel, and chromium are passive and are listed correspondingly toward the cathodic or protected end of the series.
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
4 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

The Galvanic Series
MAGNESIUM Anode - Corroding End, ALUMINUM Least Noble, Electro- ZINC Negative CADMIUM STEEL OR IRON CAST IRON CHROMIUM (ACTIVE) STAINLESS STEEL (ACTIVE) SOFT SOLDER TIN LEAD NICKEL BRASS BRONZE COPPER SILVER SOLDER CHROMIUM (PASSIVE) STAINLESS STEEL (PASSIVE) Cathode - Protected SILVER End, Most Noble, GRAPHITE Electro-Positive GOLD PLATINUM
Stress Corrosion Metals that have been stressed due to cold working, such as bending, threading, or riveting, will be affected by corrosion. The stressed area will normally be anodic to the adjacent non-stressed section. CONTROLLING CORROSION Direct current discharges from metal to the soil at all locations where corrosion occurs underground. Corrosion does not take place when current flows from soil to the pipe. One useful way of controlling corrosion is to stop the discharge current flow. Insulation Dissimilar metals in galvanic corrosion cells can be separated electrically by using insulated or dielectric fittings. The pipe itself can be insulated electrically from the soil electrolyte with the application of a nonconductive coating. Metallic Coatings Conductive or metallic coatings such as zinc coating or galvanized coatings are applied to base metal materials. Some of these applications are used underground but are usually more effective to combat atmospheric corrosion problems. When used underground the coated metal is protected by the preferential corrosion (galvanic series) of the metallic coating applied. The duration of protection is based
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
5 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

on the thickness and uniformity of the coating applied, the difference in potential between the two metals (galvanic series), the soil resistivity, and at times the chemical composition of the soil. Nonmetallic Materials Plastic pipe (polyethylene) should be used where applicable. Plastic pipe is preferred for installations in
intermediate pressure systems as it eliminates corrosion losses.
Change in Environment Often the environment can be adjusted or altered to control or eliminate the presence of electrolytes. Select backfill can be used which provides drainage around the pipe and assures that sharp rocks do not
damage pipe coatings. The ends of casings and conduits are sealed to assure that moisture is kept away from the pipe. Refer to Specification 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installation. Allowances can be made in system designs to lessen velocities, cavitation, and pulsations that might
break down protective films or oxides on inside walls of pipes.
Cathodic Protection It is not economically feasible to design, apply, install, and maintain a coating that will completely insulate metal pipe from the soil electrolyte. Instead, the protection provided by an economical pipe coating is
supplemented with the application of cathodic protection, an electromechanical method that forces the metal to become cathodic to its environment.
Galvanic System
Cathodic protection is applied galvanically by utilizing metals higher on the galvanic series such as zinc
and magnesium and bonding them to the steel pipeline via a coated conductor. By causing metals higher on the series to become metallically part of the piping system, we cause these metals (sacrificial anodes)
to corrode and afford protection to the steel pipeline. This application is usually limited to well-coated lines in lower soil resistivities.
Impressed Current System
In areas where current requirements are higher, impressed current protection systems be used. These
systems normally utilize a rectifier which changes alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC) which then is caused to flow into the soil through an anode and ultimately to flow onto the pipeline thereby
canceling all undesired corrosion current. DESIGN AND INSTALLATION:
General Newly installed metallic pipeline facilities must be installed with an Avista-approved coating that meets the requirements of §192.461 and must be cathodically protected within one year after installation. Refer to Specification 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel, “Pipe Systems Corrosion Protection” for specific coating requirements.
WAC 480-93-110:
within 90 days after installation.
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
6 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

The design, operation, installation, and maintenance of cathodic protection systems shall be carried out under the direction of a person qualified in pipeline corrosion control methods. Additionally, CP Deep Well design shall be done by a registered Professional Engineer if installed in Washington State (ideally NACE Level 4) and as a best management practice, such designs should be completed by a Registered PE in other Avista jurisdictions.
Consult with a Cathodic Protection Technician before tying together or separating Cathodic Protection zones. Zones could be connected by adding steel main between other areas of steel main, or by connecting cathodic wires found at valves, regulator stations, and other sites. Zones could be separated when steel pipe is cut off and abandoned or through the separation or severing of cathodic wires found above or below ground.
Generally, new and existing metallic piping systems are cathodically protected by Impressed Current Systems.
Anode Systems Impressed Anode System Installation: Installation of an impressed current anode should be done with respect to remote earth. A good standard distance is 150 to 200 feet from the pipe. Anodes should be separated a minimum of 20 feet from a surface or traditional system. For a deep well, the top anode should be a minimum of 150 feet from the piping.
Galvanic Anode System Installation: Install galvanic anodes 3 to 5 feet from the pipe. Use a test
station to connect the anode to the pipe. Two white lead wires should be installed on the pipe during the installation.
AC Mitigation
It may be necessary to provide AC mitigation systems on piping, which is closely parallel to or in close
proximity to electrical transmission facilities or in areas where fault currents or unusual risk of lightning may be anticipated. A qualified Cathodic Protection Technician should review and recommend a design
for AC mitigation. A mitigation system may include the following:
• Voltage gradient control mats at test stations, valves, and other pipeline appurtenances for personnel safety.
• Polarization cells connected between the pipeline and an AC ground such as a bare steel casing. These cells have a high resistance to DC and low resistance to AC.
• Periodic placement of zinc anodes for protection of the pipeline during phase –to-ground faults. In certain situations, paralleling the pipeline with zinc ribbon anodes may be recommended.
Test Leads Test leads should be installed as discussed in Specification 3.12, Test Leads.

WAC 173-160-456 (2):
CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
7 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

Tracer Wire Insulated #12 solid coated locating wire installed with polyethylene pipe should be cathodically protected by installing a 4-1/2 lb. zinc anode approximately every 1,000 feet. Refer to Specification 3.13, Installation – Plastic Mains. Refer to Drawing A-36277, Wire Connections at the end of Specification 3.13, Installation – Plastic Mains.
System Isolation Cathodic protection systems are to be designed and operated to minimize adverse effects on adjacent underground metallic structures.
Where stray currents from foreign cathodic protection systems are affecting Avista lines, corrective measures are to be taken to limit / eliminate the stray current condition. Each pipeline must be electrically isolated from other underground metallic structures, unless the pipeline
and the other structure are electrically interconnected and cathodically protected as a single unit. Care must be taken to assure that steel components within plastic pipe systems are not isolated unless it is
planned to protect the steel as a single unit. Often it is desirable to utilize locating wire to provide cathodic protection to isolated steel components within the plastic pipe system (contact Gas Engineering in such cases as heavier gauge wire may be required). Wire connections to steel main or steel fittings shall be made by the “Cadweld” process. Refer to Specification 3.12, Cadweld Procedure.
Approved insulating devices must be installed where electrical isolation of a portion of a pipeline is
necessary to facilitate the application of cathodic protection.
Each metallic pipeline must be electrically isolated from metallic casings. If isolation is not achieved because it is impractical, other measures must be taken to minimize corrosion of the pipeline.
Insulating devices may not be installed where a combustible atmosphere is anticipated unless
precautions are taken to prevent arcing.
Replacing Steel Main
When replacing steel pipe (main) of any length, consult a Cathodic Protection Technician prior to considering conversion to polyethylene plastic (PE) pipe. Isolation of steel services and sections of steel
main is a critical consideration and shall not occur without the permission of Gas Engineering.
The true replacement cost should be considered when replacing steel with PE. Such analysis should consider both the cost to replace in-kind with new steel (thereby preserving cathodic protection continuity)
and the cost of replacing with PE (to include replacement of any steel services that will be isolated in the process and any related cathodic protection work needing to be done).

CATHODIC PROTECTION
CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN
REV. NO. 16
8 OF 8 SPEC. 2.32

Replacing Steel Services When replacing steel services of any length, consult a Cathodic Protection Technician prior to considering conversion to polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe. The conversion to polyethylene (PE) plastic services should be the full length from the main to the meter
for the betterment of the gas system to prevent isolated steel locations and disbonded dresser fittings. Refer to Specification 3.16, Services, “Steel Service Replacement” for further guidance. The customer will pay for their portion of the replacement cost and the remainder (possible isolated steel locations) is to be borne by Avista.

VAULTS REV. NO. 5
1 OF 2 SPEC. 2.42

2.4 VAULTS 2.42 VAULT DESIGN SCOPE:
To establish a uniform procedure for designing vaults for regulator stations and valve assemblies. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.183, §192.185, §192.187, §192.189
OTHER REFERENCES: NEC Article 500 Standard Highway H-20 loading requirements CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 5.18, Vault Maintenance DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: General
The use of vaults for valves or regulating stations should be avoided whenever possible. The confined space created by vaults can accumulate gas, restrict available room to maintain equipment, and are difficult to keep dry. Regulator stations should be constructed aboveground whenever possible. Vaults shall be located in an accessible location that is away from street intersections or points where
traffic is heavy. They shall not be located in close proximity to water, steam, electric, or other facilities. Points of minimum elevation, catch basins, or places where the access cover will be in the course of surface waters should also be avoided when determining the location of a vault.
Each underground vault must be able to meet the loads which may be applied on it while protecting the equipment inside. Generally, vaults installed in traveled roadways must be designed to meet Standard
Highway H-20 loading requirements. Enough room must be provided within the vault to enable proper installation and maintenance of the equipment.
Each pipe entering or within a regulator vault or pit must be steel, except instrumentation and control lines, which can be stainless steel. Where pipe extends through the vault structure, provisions must be made to prevent the passage of gases or liquids through the opening, and to avert strain in the pipe.
Polyethylene piping may not be used inside a vault.

VAULTS REV. NO. 5
2 OF 2 SPEC. 2.42

Sealing and Ventilation Each underground vault or closed top pit containing either a pressure regulating or relieving station must be sealed, vented, or ventilated as follows:
• When the volume exceeds 200 cubic feet, the vault or pit must be ventilated with two ducts (one at bottom and one at top of structure), each having at least the ventilating effect of a pipe 4 inches
in diameter and vents shall be positioned high enough above grade to disperse gas air mixtures that might be discharged. Ventilation must be enough to minimize the ability of a combustible atmosphere to develop within the vault
• When the volume exceeds 75 cubic feet, but is less than 200 cubic feet and the vault or pit is sealed, each opening must have a tight fitting cover, free of openings through which an explosive mixture might be ignited, and there must be a means for testing the internal atmosphere before removing the cover.
• When the volume exceeds 75 cubic feet, but is less than 200 cubic feet and the vault or pit is vented, the venting shall be designed to prevent external sources of ignition from reaching the
vault atmosphere. Vents shall be directed away from potential sources of ignition.
• When the volume exceeds 75 cubic feet, but is less than 200 cubic feet and the vault or pit is ventilated, the ventilation shall be designed to conform to the requirements described for vaults with volumes in excess of 200 cubic feet unless the vault or pit is to be ventilated by openings in grates or covers and the ratio of internal volume (cubic feet) to the effective ventilating area (sq. in.) of the grate or cover is less than 20:1 in which case no additional ventilation is required.
• When the volume is less than 75 cubic feet, no ventilation is required. Drainage Each vault must be designed so as to minimize the entrance of water. A vault containing gas piping may not be connected by means of a drain connection to other underground structures.
Electrical Code Electrical equipment in vaults must conform to the applicable requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) Article 500 for Hazardous (classified) Locations.
ODORIZATION REV. NO. 6
1 OF 2 SPEC. 2.52

2.5 ODORIZATION

2.52 ODORIZATION OF NATURAL GAS
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for odorizing natural gas. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.625 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.18, Odorization Procedures Spec. 5.23, Odorization Equipment ODORIZATION: General Natural gas in its natural state is odorless. A distinctive odorant is mixed with natural gas enabling it to be detected by a person with a normal sense of smell at concentrations well below that which would allow the natural gas to ignite. Natural gas supplied to customers will be odorized. Natural gas will generally be odorized at or near the gate station except where such gas is adequately odorized as received from the interstate pipeline company. Odorant Type Only odorants approved by Gas Engineering shall be used to odorize gas distributed by Avista. Avista utilizes an odorant mixture comprised of 80 percent by weight tert-butyl mercaptan and 20 percent methyl ethyl sulfide. In the concentrations in which it is used, the odorant in combustible gases must comply with the following:
• The odorant may not be harmful to persons, materials, or pipe.
• The products of combustion from the odorant may not be toxic when breathed nor may they be corrosive or harmful to those materials to which the products of combustion will be exposed.
• The odorant may not be soluble in water to an extent greater than 2.5 parts to 100 parts by
weight.
Odorizer Types Equipment for odorization must introduce the odorant without wide variations in the level of odorant. Three different types of odorizers are used to transfer odorant into the gas stream. Wick Odorizer - This odorizer is used for very small flow applications (up to approximately 500 SCFH). It consists of a small one pint to 3 quart bottle that is fastened in-line with the gas flow. A wick extends from
ODORIZATION REV. NO. 6
2 OF 2 SPEC. 2.52

the bottle into the gas flow and odorant is transferred from the bottle to the gas via the wick. This type of odorizer is often referred to as a "domestic" odorizer. Bypass Odorizer - This odorizer is used for the majority of odorization applications (up to approximately 4,000,000 SCFH). A very small portion of the total volume of natural gas to be odorized is bypassed through the odorizing unit where it is saturated with odorant vapor. The saturated gas is then
reintroduced and mixed with the gas passing through the gas main. In the process of passing through the odorizing unit, the bypassed gas absorbs many times the amount of odorant required to provide the desired odor intensity, therefore only a relatively small volume of saturated gas need be mixed with the main gas stream. Gas is bypassed or drawn through the unit by a differential pressure created by placing a restriction in the gas line. The volume of bypassed gas can be fine-tuned with a restrictor valve. Injection Odorizer - This odorizer is used for high volume applications and in locations where telemetry is available on site. Liquid odorant is injected by a pump or other mechanical means into the pipe where it is mixed into the gas stream as it flows through the pipeline. A computer operates the odorizer and determines the appropriate amount of odorant to inject based on the desired odorization level and the volumetric flow rate of gas in the pipeline.
Odorant Concentrations Refer to Specification 4.18, Odorization Procedures, “Odorant Concentrations” for details on Avista’s odorization concentration procedures.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
1 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

3.0 CONSTRUCTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION

3.12 PIPE INSTALLATION - STEEL MAINS
SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for storing, handling, and installing steel gas pipe systems which adhere to applicable regulatory codes and provide a safe, reliable gas system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
§192.161, §192.233, §192.241, §192.243, §192.245, §192.307, §192.313, §192.315, §192.317, §192.319 WAC 480-93-018, 480-93-160, 480-93-175 OTHER REFERENCES:
API Standard 1104 SSPC-SP-10 Near White Blast Cleaning NACE Standard RP027A-98 ASME B31.8 ASTM A370 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design Spec. 3.18, Dry Line Pipe Spec. 3.22, Pipe Joining – Steel Spec. 5.17, Reinstating Abandoned Gas Pipelines and Facilities CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: General Personnel installing and inspecting steel pipelines and facilities shall be instructed, trained, and qualified with the equipment and procedures required to install steel pipe. Steel pipe shall be welded by personnel tested by Avista. As a best practice, prior to welding on existing high pressure (above 60 psig) steel pipelines, a Welder should try to verify the wall thickness of the pipe through available means such as recorded pipeline data, pipe stenciling, or a wall thickness tester. Installations of steel pipelines and facilities shall be inspected on a sampling basis to ensure the work conforms to Avista standards, as well as to the applicable state, federal, and local requirements. The Inspector shall have the authority to order the repair, or the removal and replacement, of any component that fails to meet the above requirements.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
2 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Except for those situations noted in Specification 2.13, Pipe Design–Plastic (Polyethylene), Aboveground Plastic Pipe, pipe installed aboveground, in pits, or that passes through a wall shall be steel. Steel pipe installed aboveground shall be protected from vehicles or other hazards by placing at a safe distance or by installing behind barricades.
Steel pipe installed below ground must be protected from washouts, floods, unstable soil, landslides, or other hazards. Monitoring of Pressures Gas personnel performing work on pipelines and facilities that could result in loss of pressure or
overpressure to the system shall install accurate pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the work site. The pressure gauges shall be continuously monitored so that personnel can respond accordingly if system pressures are greatly affected.
Additionally, there may be times when merely monitoring downstream pressure may not be sufficient to prevent customer outages without further action. It may be necessary during warm days or periods of low
gas use to intentionally draw down the pressure of the downstream system and observe it to confirm the existence of a looped system prior to altering the system or leaving the area. Consult Gas Engineering for recommendations prior to altering any system’s pressure.
Storage and Handling of Pipe
Pipe must be handled carefully to prevent bending, denting, buckling, scratching, gouging, or other damage.
If coated pipe is to be handled with lifting equipment, use belts, slings, or padded forks to minimize
damage to the coating. Metallic equipment shall not be allowed to come in contact with the coating.
Coated pipe 4 inches in diameter and greater shall be stored and/or hauled with flat wooden dunnage between each layer of pipe. The entire load must be adequately secured to prevent movement. Metallic
tie-down equipment and/or lines shall be carefully padded.
Steel pipeline coatings are susceptible to damage from ultraviolet (UV) radiation. For this reason, it is recommended that yard stock be inspected periodically and rotated to maximize the coating life.
Chalking or fading of fusion bonded epoxy and abrasion resistant overlay coatings is common for pipe that is exposed to UV radiation and does not indicate that the coating is compromised. The utilization of
jeeping (refer to "Installation in Ditch" within this specification) is the preferred way to evaluate the condition of the pipeline coating prior to installation. Pipe coating with excessive weathering (cracking,
etc.) should either be discarded or repaired with an approved coating.
The ends of pipe shall be sealed with end caps or other acceptable means to keep water and foreign objects out of pipe.
Stenciled markings on coated pipe shall be maintained until the pipe has been installed in the ground. If
the pipe specification information cannot be verified, the pipe shall not be used as carrier pipe.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
3 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Visual Inspection Visual inspection requirements apply to welding performed on a gas carrying system. Welds shall be visually inspected by an individual with the appropriate training and experience in visual inspection and qualified on Visual Inspection of the Weld (221.130.005) or Welding (221.130.010) or be a qualified welding inspector authorized by Avista. Visual inspections must be performed as per applicable
section(s) of API Standard 1104. Refer to Specification 3.22, Joining of Pipe - Steel, “Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Requirements”. Under the following conditions for pipe that produces a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of specified minimum yield strength (SMYS), visual examinations of the welds by a qualified welding inspector may be substituted for non-destructive testing (NDT):

• The pipe has a nominal diameter of less than 6 inches regardless of stress level; or
• The pipeline operates at a pressure of under 40 percent of SMYS and the welds are so limited that NDT is impractical. A waiver from Gas Engineering should be obtained to avoid NDT examination in either case.
Stringing To prevent contact between the coating and the ground, it is preferred that pipe is supported on dunnage, sandbags, or other non-metallic objects that will not cause damage to the pipe coating. In areas free of sharp rocks and other objects that can cause damage to the pipe coating, pipe may be placed on the ground as long as the pipe is not drug across the ground. Pipe shall not be strung on the right-of-way in rocky areas where blasting is probable until after the trench is completely shot.
Mastic Coating Mastic coating, such as Royston Roskote R28 Rubberized Mastic, is a cold-applied coating with high electrical resistivity designed to protect underground steel pipe and fittings. Mastic may be used as a field applied coating for valves and other intricate objects that are difficult to wrap with tape or wax wrap. Mastic shall be applied per the manufacturer’s instructions on the can. Tape Wrap Bare steel pipe and fittings shall be coated prior to burial to protect against corrosion. Avista primarily utilizes cold applied tape wraps for protecting bare steel pipe, weld joints, and smooth contoured fittings. Wax type tapes may be used for irregular shaped surfaces as they are more flexible and will provide better coverage when applied to sharp contours. Wax type tape is available for both below ground and above ground applications. Tape for above ground applications has a special backing that is both UV and weather resistant. Both cold applied and wax type tapes can be applied to steel materials with factory coating types including polyethylene X-Tru coat, FBE (Fusion Bonded Epoxy), and asphalt-based materials.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
4 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Cold Applied Tape Wrap Cold applied tapes shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions including use of primer when applicable. Bare steel to be tape wrapped shall be free of water, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter. At a
minimum the surface shall be cleaned by either power or hand wire brushing. Grease and oil can be removed by use of a solvent. Surface to be coated should be wiped clean prior to tape application to verify removal of any residual dust or film from solvent cleaning. Moisture present on the surface shall be removed before coating. Welds shall be cleaned of welding slag, splatter, and scale. Sharp edges or burrs shall be removed by
grinding or filing. Some cold applied tape materials are provided with in integrated primer (such as Tapecoat H35 and H50 Gray tape) and may be applied directly to the cleaned surface. A separate, additional primer is necessary
when this tape is applied to materials at low temperatures (below 32 degrees F). When primer is required it shall be applied and allowed to dry prior to application of the tape wrap.
Tape should be applied using the spiral wrap method with a minimum of 1-inch overlap between successive wraps. Wrap should overlap the factory coating by at least 4 inches. When taping pipe positioned in the vertical position the tape should be wrapped from the bottom up to create an overlap
that does not allow moisture to accumulate at the overlapping tape joints.
Care shall be taken to minimize wrinkling of the tape wrap. A wrinkle may contain an air space between the tape and the pipe which may cause a corrosion concern. If a wrinkle occurs during the wrapping
process, the wrinkle should be removed as much as possible by pushing down on the wrinkle to try and achieve bondage between the tape and the pipe. If an excessive wrinkle is present, the wrinkle shall be
cut out and new tape wrap applied.
When taping pipe that is oriented horizontally, ensure that the wrap is terminated on the downhill side of the wrapping process. This minimizes the chance or water getting between the tape and the pipe
surface.
Coating on Steel Risers
Ultraviolet (UV) resistant coatings on steel (carrier pipe) risers shall come above final grade by approximately 2 inches to protect the steel at the soil-to-air interface.
X-Tru coating may not be used for the above ground portion of steel risers (or for any above ground pipe)
without a supplementary over coating because the X-Tru coat may degrade with UV exposure. Above ground wax tape is the preferred over coating for X-Tru coat in aboveground applications. Existing risers
may be left with X-Tru coating if the coating is not cracked or degraded and covered with a well bonded gray enamel paint. Cracked and degrading X-Tru coating can lead to water pooling and subsequent
corrosion and must be repaired with above ground wax tape.
Wax Type - Tape Wrap Petrolatum or “Wax Type” tapes shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions including use of a primer.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
5 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Bare steel to be tape wrapped shall be free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter. At a minimum the surface shall be cleaned by either power or hand wire brushing. Grease and oil can be removed by use of a solvent. Surface to be coated should be wiped clean to verify removal of any residual dust or film from solvent cleaning. The primer exhibits preferential wetting and will displace moisture on the surface when properly applied. To assist in application excessive surface moisture should be removed prior to primer application.
Primer is to be applied by hand to a minimum thickness as specified by the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure preferential wetting and continuous application. Primer should be used to fill any voids or gaps prior to application of the wax tape. Wrap the wax tape in a spiral wrap method with a minimum of a 1-inch overlap. Wrap should overlap the
factory coating by at least 4 inches. Press and form the tape so there are no air pockets or voids. When taping pipe positioned in the vertical position the tape should be wrapped from the bottom up to create an overlap that does not allow moisture to accumulate at the overlapping tape joints. Press and smooth lap seams to ensure they are properly sealed. Underground applications may be backfilled immediately.
Repair and Patching Using Tape Wrap
Tape wrap may be used to repair damage in factory applied coatings or “holidays”. To repair the damaged coating, remove loose or non-bonded material. Prepare the surface of the pipe as listed previously. No sharp points, burrs, or rough edges shall appear around the factory coating edges. Sharp
edges shall be feathered smooth prior to application of the tape. Tape should be applied in a continuous circumferential wrap. Repair tape coating shall overlap the adjacent undamaged factory coating a
minimum of 4 inches. The tape shall be worked down onto the surface of the steel so as to leave no wrinkles or voids appearing on the view surface of tape that is in contact with the steel.
Repair and Patching Using a Coating Patch

A coating patch may be used to repair damaged coatings or holidays. Prepare the surface of the pipe by removing dust, dirt, grease, oil, loose particles, and moisture. Use either power or hand wire brushing to clean the surface. Use a solvent if necessary, to remove grease or oil. Wipe the surface dry. Install the coating patch by applying pressure to the entire patch area to ensure complete adhesion to the pipe surface. The patch should overlap the undisturbed pipe coating by a minimum of 1 inch. Multiple coating patches can be used if necessary.
Field Pinhole Repair
On new factory-applied coatings a pinhole holiday may be tape coated with a minimum of four inches of tape coat and primer or covered using a coating patch. Alternatively, a ScotchkkoteTM hot melt patch compound (226P Green) may be used. When using the hot melt compound, follow manufacturer’s recommended application procedures. Existing piping pinholes may be tape coated with a minimum of a 4 inches square section of tape coat and primer when it is impractical to complete a full circumferential wrap.
Liquid Epoxy Coating Liquid Epoxy Coating shall be used to repair damage, holidays, or coat weld joints in Abrasion Resistant
Overlay (ARO) coated pipe when it is to be installed by boring.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
6 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Liquid Epoxy Coating shall be Powercrete R95, or as specified by Gas Engineering, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Installation of Powercrete R95 shall be applied using the minimum application steps: 1. Ensure the pipe is clean of grease, oil, salts, and other contaminates. Acetone or other suitable
solvent may be used to clean the pipe. 2. Abrasive-blast clean the surface to a near white (SSPC-SP-10) using a particle blast of non-crystalline silica material. Crystalline silica material may not be used due to possible health concerns. A “Bristle Blaster” or similar mechanical method of preparing the pipe surface is also acceptable as long as a near white surface cleanliness is achieved. A wire wheel is not an
approved method for surface preparation and may lead to incomplete bonding of the coating. 3. Mix Parts A and B thoroughly and apply to dry and clean pipe using plastic paddles to a uniform desired thickness, typically 60-80 mils or on butt weld joints above the circumferential weld
height. The coating is only to be applied to pipe in which the temperature is above the dew point to ensure no moisture is present. If necessary, the pipe may be preheated to remove moisture
and speed the cure time. Refer to the table below:
LIQUID EPOXY CURING TIME
Product Min. Cure Time *
Powercrete R-95
77 6.75 hours
80 5.5 hours
100 1.5 hours
23 minutes
*The temperature of the pipe must be maintained for the duration of the cure to meet the minimum cure times specified. Knitted Fiberglass Tape Knitted fiberglass tape, such as Stop It BoreShield ARO, can be used as an abrasive resistant overlay
over wrap for steel pipe used in horizontal directional drilling applications. The product uses a strong fiberglass knitted tape that is pre-coated with fast setting water-activated urethane resins. This type of
tape is designed to be installed directly over a corrosion protective coating such as cold applied tape wrap (see subsection Cold Applied Tape Warp for installation details). Installation of Stop It BoreShield ARO shall be applied using the minimum application steps:
1. Surface preparation: When overwrapping girth welds, the adjacent factory-applied coating should be cleaned with denatured alcohol or acetone to remove any dust, grease and moisture. Surface prepped area should extend a minimum of 4” beyond both the leading and non-leading edges of the corrosion prevention coating. 2. Fill a 3-5-gallon container with water.
3. Put on latex gloves.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
7 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

4. Tear open foil pouch at notch and remove roll. Immediately immerse roll in water for approximately 10 to 15 seconds while squeezing firmly 3 times. 5. Initiate installation of Stop It BoreShield ARO on the leading edge of the cut back. A minimum of 4” in front of the corrosion prevention coating is required. See diagram below. 6. Wrap Stop It BoreShield ARO as tightly and evenly as possible. The initial wrap should be a straight circumferential wrap, wrapping two times on top of itself, then spiraling the wrap with a
50% overlap towards the non-leading edge of the cut back. 7. Continue adding additional rolls (beginning where previous roll ended) wrapping back and forth with a 50% overlap until a minimum of 6 plys are installed (6 plys are achieved after wrapping back and forth 3 times). 8. Immediately after all required rolls have been applied, wet the gloves in water and compress the wet expanding resins back into the fiberglass material. This can be completed by rapidly and
firmly stroking the surface. Keep hands moving quickly and wet gloves frequently to avoid sticking. 9. Continue this polishing action until the resins harden to the touch and ALL bubbling has stopped. (4-5 min). The composite wrap should now have a smooth, hard cap.
10. Stop It BoreShield ARO is fully cured and ready for HDD installation in the following timeframes: a. 30 minutes if the ambient temperature is at or above 50 degrees Fahrenheit
b. 60 minutes if the ambient temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
8 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Installation in Ditch Coating must be inspected prior to lowering the pipe into the ditch and any damage found must be repaired prior to backfilling. In addition to visual inspection, high pressure distribution pipelines and transmission pipelines shall be
electrically inspected using a holiday detector, jeeping machine, or similarly tested to assure no flaws are present in the coating. The steel pipe shall be installed in the trench with enough flexibility to prevent excessive stress from thermal expansion or contraction. Anchors or supports shall be provided to prevent undue strain, resist longitudinal forces, and prevent or damp out excessive vibration. Exposed pipe joints must be protected
from any end forces caused by internal pressure, thermal expansion or contraction, and weight of pipe.
Test Leads
Test leads are to be installed at the following locations to enable cathodic protection monitoring and locating:

• New steel main installations at approximately 1,000-foot intervals when possible or as needed.
• As close as possible to bore entrance and exit points of bores extending under a river, road, or other location in which the installed pipe depth is greater than standard installations.
• Both sides of buried insulated fittings. Refer to Drawing A-35447 and Drawing B-36271 at the end of this Specification.
• Steel casings with steel carrier pipe. Refer to Specification 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installations, Drawing B-34947 for details.
• On steel pipelines, where they cross other metallic pipelines. Additional test leads should be attached to foreign pipelines if consent can be obtained. Test leads are normally a #10 white or black wire. The #10 wire may be either a solid or stranded wire. White wires shall be used on the pipe at each location where isolation or casings are not encountered. Test leads are to be attached to steel mains or fittings by the “Cadweld” process. Reference the Cadweld Procedure within this specification. Joining and splice connections shall be either encapsulated in a dielectric type gel connector which is the preferred method, or a crimped sleeve covered by an approved dielectric sealing compound (such as Aqua-Seal) and tape wrapped. Prior to installing wires into an encapsulated connector, the wires should be tied together with an over-the-hand type knot approximately 6 inches to 12 inches from the end of the wires. This knot alleviates strain on the wire connection. Refer to Drawing A-36277, Wire Connections at the end of Specification 3.13, Installation – Plastic Mains. The test leads shall terminate in a suitable, accessible, and convenient location near the transition point such as a test box or valve box. Refer to Drawing B-36271 for detail.
CADWELD PROCEDURE:
Before performing a Cadweld the pipe must be inspected to ensure the absence of defects, corrosion, mechanical damage, or other anomalies. Refer to the “Non-Destructive Pre-Inspection” section in Specification 3.22, Joining of Steel Pipe, for further guidance.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
9 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Select the correct Cadweld mold. There are two different types to choose from. The mold with the flat bottom is used only on 4-inch and larger diameter pipe. The mold with a concave bottom is used only on 3/4-inch to 3-1/2-inch pipe. Inspect the Cadweld tool and ensure it is in good working condition. Ensure the ignition controller is in good condition and has batteries installed. If the light does not illuminate, the batteries are likely expired
and will need replacing. Identify the size of wire being used. The largest wire to be used with either mold is #8 (without a sleeve) or #10 and #12 which both require a sleeve. Remove coating from the pipe surface using either an electric grinder or a sanding tool such as a file or a
wire brush. An area no larger than 2 inches x 2 inches will be required. The pipe surface should be bright and clean of debris. At this point, fill out an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534). Strip enough coating from the #10 and #12 wires to accommodate a sleeve. Leave 1/8-inch exposed
through the end of the sleeve. (A slight crimp may be used to hold the sleeve in place). Leave 1/8-inch of the sleeve exposed when inserted into the mold. For #8 wires, a sleeve is not required. Strip enough
coating back to leave 1/4-inch of the wire exposed when placed into the mold. Prior to loading the cad welder or performing the Cadweld, you must preheat the mold and pipe to eliminate moisture.
Load the Cadweld mold with the approved metal cup. Be sure to remove the clear plastic from the metal
cup prior to loading. The cup should be labeled “CA-15” and have a green top.
Connect the ignition controller termination clip to the metal cup. The black line on the metal cup that indicates when the metal cup is fully installed.
Perform the Cadweld by holding the button on the ignition controller. The light will blink 5-10 times during the welding procedure. (Do not move or flinch during the Cadweld process as this may cause a
substandard weld.)
Loop the wire around the pipe to relieve any potential stresses on the Cadweld.
Use a brass hammer to verify the quality of the weld. Remove any slag from the weld site using a wire brush.
If a poor Cadweld is performed, remove the debris and move a minimum of 6 inches and return to Step
#4 above.
When Cadwelding multiple leads to a pipe, ensure they are installed a minimum of 6 inches apart.
Coat the Cadweld and bare pipe with a company approved coating.
Bring wires up into the appropriate test box. Refer to Drawing B-36271 for test lead details across isolation fittings or transition fittings. Refer to Drawing B-34947 for casing test lead details. (Test leads
may be either solid or stranded.) Any questions about the configuration of wires can be referred to the local Cathodic Protection Technician.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
10 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Caution Tape Except for horizontal directional drilling (HDD) installations, high pressure steel pipelines shall be installed with yellow warning tape stating words to the effect “CAUTION, GAS LINE BURIED BELOW” placed approximately 1 foot above the main.
The use of caution tape should also strongly be considered for intermediate pressure pipelines. These types of locations may include but are not limited to installations within private easements and dry-line installations where the presence of a gas pipeline may be unexpected to excavators.
Marker Balls
Marker balls should be installed at stopper fittings, bottom-out fittings, side-out fittings, ends of main, and in other applicable instances in order to facilitate finding these fittings and locations in the future. Ensure as-built drawings and the resulting mapping records are updated to indicate the presence of these locating devices. Marker balls shall be installed with a minimum of 4 inches of vertical clearance to the
buried gas facilities. The marker ball cannot be buried deeper than 4 feet from finish grade to allow for accurate locating.
Dry Line Installations
As a general rule, dry line gas lines should not be installed unless there is a high degree of certainty that
the line will be placed into service within three years. Additionally, consideration should be given to abandoning dry lines that have been in place for five years or greater to lessen the burden of ongoing
locating of the facility. If the need arises to bring a former dry line into service that has been abandoned, it can be done in accordance with Specification 5.17, Reinstating Abandoned Gas Pipelines and
Facilities. Refer to Specification 3.18, Dry Line Pipe, for additional details on pressure testing of dry line pipe.
Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings (Jeeping)
An electrical inspection (commonly referred to as jeeping) is a test of the continuity of protective coating that should be performed on steel pipe prior to underground installation. It detects bubble or blister-type
voids, cracks, thin spots, and foreign inclusions or contaminants in the coating that lowers the electrical resistance (dielectric strength) of the coating significantly.
Manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed on the use and maintenance of the equipment.
Excessive moisture or any electrically conductive material in or on the surface of the coating system can
cause appreciable leakage currents, which may lower the effective testing voltage or cause erroneous holiday indication. Drying and cleaning of the coated surface may be necessary. Holiday detector parts
shall be kept clean and free of moisture at all times.
The voltage setting on the equipment should be adjusted to match the coating. Thin film coatings up to 20 mil thickness require a low voltage detector. Thicker film coatings greater than 20 mil thickness
require the use of a high voltage detector.
Piping coating should be jeeped immediately prior to installation in trench. This will ensure that damage to the coating does not happen after jeeping is completed from vandalism or other occurrences while the pipe is unattended.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
11 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Voltage Settings for Conventional Coatings The minimum testing voltage for a particular coating thickness shall be within 20 percent of the value determined from one of the following formulas or as shown in Table 1 as recommended by NACE Standard SP0188-2006.
Testing Voltage = 1,250 x �coating thickness (mils)

Or
Testing Voltage = 7,900 x �coating thickness (mm)

TABLE 1
mm (in) (mils)
0.51 N/A 20 5,600
1.0 N/A 40 7,900
1.6 N/A 62 9,900
4.0 5/32 156 16,000
13.0 1/2 500 28,000
19.0 3/4 750 34,000
*Thin-film coatings (fusion bonded epoxy) are not covered in this table.
Voltage Settings for Thin Film Coatings (FBE)
The following formula shall be used to determine the voltage setting for thin film coatings such as fusion bonded epoxy (FBE):
Testing Voltage (TV) = 127 x mil thickness
Example: mil thickness = 16 mils
TV = 127 x 16 mils TV = 2,032 Volts

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
12 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Voltage Settings for ARO Pipe The following formula shall be used to determine the voltage setting for FBE coated pipe with an additional ARO (Abrasive Resistant Overlay) coating:
Testing Voltage (TV) = (127 x mil thickness of FBE) + (1250 x �(mil thickness of ARO))

Example: FBE mil thickness = 16 mils ARO mil thickness = 40 mils
TV = (127 x 16) + (1250 x √40) TV = 9,938 Volts
Coating Thickness for New Pipe The following table is provided as a reference for typical X-Tru coat and Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating thickness on new pipe.
TABLE 2
New Pipe Coating Thickness Table
Pipe Size FBE Coating Thickness
(in) (mils) (mils)
¾ .025 25 14 – 18
2 .030 30 14 – 18
6 .040 40 14 – 18

Supports Supports or anchors must be made from a durable material such as steel and/or concrete. No wood supports or anchors shall be used. Supports or anchors should be mechanically attached to carrier pipe and cathodic isolation should be provided between the supports or anchors where needed. Supports or anchors shall not be welded to the carrier pipe. Pipe Bends Pipe inflections or changes in direction may be completed using appropriate bending equipment. Bends shall be free from buckling, cracks, or other evidence of mechanical damage. Bends shall not impair the serviceability of the pipe. Wrinkle bends are not allowed.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
13 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

When bending pipe containing a longitudinal weld, the longitudinal weld shall be near as practical to the neutral axis of the bend. The bend radius shall be no smaller than allowed by ASME B31.8 and as summarized in the following table:
Minimum Steel Bend Radius
Less than 12 18 x D*
20 and greater 30 x D
* Note: Shorter radius bends may be permitted provided the completed bend meets the serviceability criteria and the remaining wall thickness after bending is not less than the minimum design wall thickness. Contact Gas Engineering
for assistance. Bends should be positioned at least 6 pipe diameters from the end of the pipe or a girth/circumferential
weld. Bends and bending equipment shall be positioned so as to not affect the roundness at the ends of the pipe or stress the circumferential weld. No bends are allowed in girth welds. Note that minimum steel pipe bend radius in this section are not to be confused with minimum bend
radius of pipe for horizontal directional drilling and trenchless installation. Refer to Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation, for information with regards to minimum allowable bend radius during
trenchless installation.
Mitering/Segmenting Elbows
Welding elbows may be cut into segments to provide proper angle. Segments of elbows 2 inches or more in diameter must be at least 1-inch across the crotch (throat).
Pigging of Pipe
For large jobs or jobs installed during wet weather, it is possible that water and debris may need to be
removed from the pipeline. Pigging should be considered at the discretion of the Avista project engineer, foreman, or inspector.
Pits and Vaults
For any steel mains installed in association with a pit or vault, refer to Specification 2.42, Vault Design.
Odorizing Newly Installed Pipe
Newly installed pipe may present challenges with regards to meeting the required detection levels as
defined in Specification 4.18, Odorization Procedures. New pipe, especially that which is gassed up but not immediately put into service, tends to absorb odorant in the pipe wall. Consideration should be made
to “pickle” such pipe per Specification 4.18, Odorization Procedures, “Pickling Newly Installed Pipe.”
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
14 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Moving or Lowering Steel Pipe in Service Moving (or lowering) of steel pipe in service shall be performed only after careful of various factors that might cause additional stress on the pipeline. Steel pipe with mechanical or threaded joints may not be moved. (Refer to the “Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flow Chart” at the end of this Specification.)
When a small amount of pipe movement is required, the table below may be used to determine the minimum roping distance on both sides of the moved pipe section. This minimum roping distance will allow the pipe to move while keeping the stress level at an acceptable level. This table may only be used for pipelines 2 inches and smaller, that operate at 60 psig or less, and require 3 inches or less of movement.
Minimum Roping Distance on Both Sides of the Moved Pipe Section (MAOP = 60 psig or less)
Pipe Size (Steel Pipe ¼ ½ 1 1-½ 2 2-½ 3
1/2 3 ft 4 ft 5 ft 6 ft 7 ft 8 ft 9 ft
3/4 3 ft 4 ft 5 ft 6 ft 7 ft 8 ft 9 ft
1-1/2 4 ft 5 ft 7 ft 9 ft 10 ft 11 ft 12 ft
Steel pipelines that require greater than 3 inches of movement, operate above 60 psig, or are greater than 2-inches nominal diameter must have roping calculations performed to determine whether moving will cause an unsafe condition. Roping calculations take into consideration the required deflection of the pipeline, existing pipe specifications, operating pressures, terrain, class location, present condition of the pipe, anticipated stresses, and the toughness of the steel. Consult Gas Engineering when a roping calculation is needed. It is a requirement in Washington State to leak survey a gas facility within 30 days after being moved if the pipeline is intermediate pressure and 2 inches diameter or less. For other states and facilities, this is a best management practice. If leaks, flawed welds, or unsatisfactory workmanship are discovered when the pipe is exposed for moving, they shall be repaired prior to moving the pipe. Piping and Weld Data Collection For newly installed high-pressure pipelines, the welder name, date of weld, weld procedure used, and GPS location should be collected for each weld. The pipe and fitting information collected should include the purchase order number, manufacturer’s name, heat number, approximate segment length, coating type, and GPS location, which should be collected for each pipe segment. This information gathered shall be retained as part of the MAOP record for the pipeline and uploaded to Avista’s AFM (GIS) system.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
15 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

For newly installed or rebuilt high pressure gate stations and regulator stations, the welder name, date of welds, and weld procedures used should be collected for the station and displayed on the drawing or placed in the MAOP file for the station. The pipe and fitting information collected should include the pipe purchase order number, manufacturer’s name and heat number. Toughness Testing
By engineering analysis, Avista has determined that pipelines of a certain age and size must undergo toughness testing before lowering or roping. Toughness testing is required for all diameters of high-pressure pipe fabricated prior to 1980, as well as all intermediate pressure pipe larger than 2 inches in diameter and fabricated prior to 1980. Pre-1980 manufacturing techniques and this era of pipe’s tendency to exhibit lower toughness due to higher carbon levels demands this analysis before lowering.
A Charpy v-notch test is commonly used to determine the toughness of a specimen by determining the amount of energy a material absorbs when fracturing. An acceptable toughness level is determined when the average energy absorbed is 20 ft-lbs or more with no single specimen less than 15 ft-lbs on a 10 mm x 10 mm specimen at 40 degrees F. Acceptance criteria and testing shall be according to ASTM A370,
Table 9. Consult Gas Engineering for an interpretation of the results.
Reference the Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flowchart at the end of this specification for guidance on
sorting out the requirements for toughness testing and analysis. This chart is meant to identify minimum guidelines; Avista may choose to do additional study as necessary based on the particular circumstances
of a proposed lowering site.
Recordkeeping
Studies, analyses, and toughness testing results shall be retained for the life of the facility. Copies of the analysis and test results shall be retained in Gas Engineering. Pipe Coupon Retentions Procedures
Whenever a tapping occurs on a transmission line or high pressure main, the pipe coupon should be
retrieved, properly cataloged (including date, pipe size, location, Work Order number, and any pertinent notes), and kept at the local construction office for future testing as may be warranted.

WAC 480-93-175: High Pressure Pipelines of any Diameter and Intermediate Pressure Pipelines Larger than 2 inches Diameter: In the State of Washington, prior to lowering any steel pipeline a study (which may consist of either a roping calculation or toughness testing, depending on the age of pipe) must be performed by Gas Engineering to determine whether the action will cause an unsafe condition. This study must be retained for the life of the pipeline. 2 inches and Smaller Diameter, Intermediate Pressure: In the State of Washington, pipelines
operating at 60 psig or less which have a nominal diameter of 2 inches or less do not require a study
to be performed prior to lowering if the operator can certify that no undue stresses will be placed on
the pipeline and that it can be moved or lowered in a safe manner. A leak survey must be conducted
within 30 days from the date these pipelines have been moved or lowered for these pipelines.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
16 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Updating Maps and Records Employees responsible for construction activities shall ensure field as-built documents are completed immediately following construction, repair, or abandonment of facilities. Field as-built documents shall be subsequently mapped by the district GIS Editor within the electronic mapping system. The district manager in which the construction activities take place is responsible to ensure that field work as-built
documents are completed, and mapping finished within a timely manner. In Washington State, this shall be completed within 6 months following the completion of the field work. In Idaho and Oregon this is a best management practice.

WAC 480-93-018 (5):
completes any construction activity and make such records available to appropriate company
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
17 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

Steel Pipe Lowering Decision Flowchart
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
18 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
19 OF 19 SPEC. 3.12

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
1 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

3.13 PIPE INSTALLATION - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) MAINS
SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for storing, handling, and installing plastic (polyethylene) gas pipe systems which adhere to applicable regulatory codes and provide a safe, reliable gas system. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.59, §192.67, §192.307, §192.321, §192.323 WAC 480-93-178 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic Spec. 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 3.19, Pipe Installation – Trenchless Pipe Installation Spec. 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion Spec. 3.24, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Electrofusion Spec. 3.25, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Mechanical Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 4.18, Odorization Procedures Spec. 5.17, Reinstating Abandoned Gas Pipelines and Facilities CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: General Personnel installing and inspecting polyethylene (PE) pipe shall be instructed, trained, and qualified with the equipment and procedures required to install polyethylene pipe.
Qualified Joiners No person shall perform plastic pipe joining on polyethylene pipe and fittings until that person has been qualified in the approved methods of plastic pipe joining. Upon completion of qualification, a certification record will be issued and must be available for inspection when performing plastic pipe joining in the field. Refer to Specifications 3.23, 3.24, and 3.25 for Joining of Pipe - Plastic. No solvent joints shall be used. No person shall perform inspection of plastic joints without being qualified by training or experience in evaluating the acceptability of plastic pipe joints made under the applicable joining procedures. Installations of polyethylene pipelines and facilities shall be inspected on a sampling basis to ensure that the work conforms to Avista standards, as well as to the applicable state, federal, and local requirements. The Inspector shall have the authority to order the repair or the removal and replacement of any component that fails to meet the above requirements. Installation of plastic pipe that requires squeeze-off shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Specification 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
2 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Monitoring of Pressures Gas personnel performing work on pipelines and facilities that could result in loss of pressure or overpressure to the system shall install accurate pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the work site. The pressure gauges shall be continuously monitored as long as necessary so that personnel can respond accordingly if system pressures are greatly affected.
Additionally, there may be times when merely monitoring downstream pressure may not be sufficient to prevent customer outages without further action. It may be necessary during warm days or periods of low gas use to intentionally draw down the pressure of the downstream system and observe it to confirm the existence of a looped system prior to altering the system or leaving the area. Consult Gas Engineering for recommendations prior to altering any system’s pressure.
Storage of Pipe and Fittings Per manufacturer’s latest recommended practices and industry best practices, the following are
guidelines for the storage of PE pipe and fittings:
Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be stored so as to prevent the possibility of the material being damaged by crushing, gouging, or piercing. The height to which polyethylene pipe may be stacked depends on factors such as size, wall thickness, and ambient temperature. At no time should the height of the stack cause the pipe to be forced out of round. Care must be taken at all times to protect the
polyethylene pipe and fittings from fire, excessive heat, harmful chemicals, and mechanical damage.
Plastic pipe, which includes anodeless risers, transition fittings, and stick EFV assemblies since they are made with PE pipe, shall not be used if more than 36 months old. Pipe, risers, transition fittings, and stick
EFVs, older than this must be discarded. The age of anodeless risers and transition fittings is based upon the date the plastic pipe was manufactured and not the date the riser or transition fitting was fabricated.
The age of the stick EFV assembly is based upon the date the fitting was fabricated.
PE fittings such as elbows, tees, couplings, etc. should be stored indoors and protected from UV exposure as a matter of company policy. As a best practice, PE fittings should be discarded if they are
found to be older than the following:
• Yellow plastic fittings – 3 years (36 months)
• Black plastic fittings – 10 years (120 months) Use sandbags or planking to protect sticks of pipe from ground surface conditions that might damage the pipe. The ends of pipe should be sealed with end caps or other acceptable means to keep debris, water, and rodents out of the pipe. Banded bundles should be offset with wood dunnage when stacked. Stacks should be leveled to prevent leaning and uneven loading on the bottom bundle. Pipe coils should be stored (center hole vertical) on pallets or dunnage on a level surface.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
3 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Handling The following guidelines must be followed for PE pipe handling: Polyethylene pipe shall be handled carefully to eliminate the possibility of damage during loading and unloading operations. Whether using a forklift or forks attached to the bucket of a front-end loader or
backhoe, the forks should be checked for jagged edges or burrs. If the forks are marred, cover them with a suitable protective covering to prevent gouging of the pipe. The forks should be spread as wide as possible. The pipe must be supported during transport to minimize movement. Ropes and other securing devices shall be padded to prevent damage to the pipe. Chains shall not be used to secure the pipe. Equipment
or other supplies shall not be placed on top of the pipe. Banded bundles should be picked up one bundle at a time. Banding should not be removed until the bundles have been transported to the storage area and secured in a stable and safe manner.
The stringing of coils of plastic pipe may be accomplished by hand or from a reel. Coils should not be
rolled over sharp objects or pulled over rough surfaces. Stringing of straight lengths should be done by lifting the pipe from the truck to the ground. The pipe should be protected from rocks or other abrasive material during this operation and should not be dropped.
Coiled polyethylene pipe is confined with straps at intervals within the coils. As the pipe is uncoiled, only the outside straps should be cut.
Polyethylene pipe shall be carefully inspected for kinks, cuts, gouges, deep scratches, punctures, and
other imperfections after each of the handling operations. Defective or damaged pipe must be rejected.
Installation
Plastic pipe is typically installed below ground level with the exception of temporary emergency repairs and encased bridge crossings. Gas Engineering must approve the use of plastic pipe above ground.
Pipe must be firmly supported along its entire length to minimize any stresses induced by settlement.
Care should be taken to assure pipe ends are kept free of debris and water at all times. As a minimum,
plastic end caps shall be used in ends of main during off-construction periods.
If water or debris is suspected to have entered pipe, the entire length of suspected line shall be pigged until all water and/or debris is eliminated.
Field Bending
A field bend is an intentional deflection of pipe without the use of a fitting. Plastic pipe should be installed
so that there are no bends with a radius less than 25 times the outside pipe diameter (20 times the outside diameter for SDR 7). When a fusion or fitting is present in the bend the minimum bending radius
is 100 times the outside pipe diameter of the pipe for a recommended distance of 5 times the outside diameter on each side of the fusion or fitting. Refer to the table below:
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
4 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

*Calculation from Plastics Pipe Institute Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe 2nd Edition, Chapter 7 Table 4.
The exception to the bending radii in the above table is when PE pipe is being installed or utilized in prefabricated risers and new construction risers. It is acceptable for the bend radius to exceed the above values and be more similar to the approved chute bending radii shown on Sheet 6 of this Spec 3.13.
Minimum Permanent Bending Radius
Pipe Min. Bend
Outside Diameter “O.D”
Min. Bend Radius “R”
Min. Bend Ratio with a Fusion or Fitting
Radius with a Fusion or Fitting Present
for 100x Radius Each Side of Fusion or Fitting “L”
1/2” CTS 7 20 0.625” 1’ - 1” 100 5’ - 3” 0’ - 4”
3/4” IPS 11 25 1.050” 2’ - 3” 100 8’ - 9” 0’ - 6”
1-1/4” IPS 11 25 1.660” 3’ - 6” 100 13’ - 10” 0’ - 9”
2” IPS 11 25 2.375” 5’ - 0” 100 19’ - 10” 1’ - 0”
3” IPS 11 25 3.500” 7’ - 4” 100 29’ - 2” 1’ - 6”
4” IPS 11.5 25 4.500” 9’ - 5” 100 37’ - 6” 1’ - 11”
6” IPS 11.5 25 6.625” 13’ - 10” 100 55’ - 3” 2’ - 10”
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
5 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Tensile Loading The pipe must be installed so it will be free of tensile loading. When plastic pipe is installed on a warm day, allowance must be made for thermal contraction; otherwise the pipe will be in tension when it cools. Refer to Specification 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic.
For direct burial, where clearance from other facilities is not a problem, "snake" the pipe in the ditch to provide excess length. On insert work, additional pipe should be provided at ends of pipe being inserted. For trenchless installation, refer to the use of “Safe Pulling Forces” later in this specification and
Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation. At tie-in locations, the pipe should be cut long so that the tie-in fittings are in compression when installed. Whenever possible, make tie-ins during the cooler part of the day, after the pipe has cooled to ground
temperature. This is particularly important for insert construction and where clearance problems prohibit the pipe from being "snaked".
Tracer Wire Plastic pipe that is not encased in steel must have an electrically conducting tracer wire buried with the pipe for locating the pipe while underground. Insulated #12 solid type coated tracer wire shall be installed so that the wire is taped (with black electrical tape) to the upper half of the pipe at no more than 20 foot-
intervals. When installing pipe around a bend, tracer wire may need to be taped at closer intervals to ensure that wire is in line with pipe after being backfilled for more accurate locates. Do not wrap the wire around the buried pipe or the PE service tee tower. Refer to Drawings A-35776 and A-36277 at the end of this specification. For plastic pipe that is encased in steel, maintain continuity of the tracer wire by insertion of tracer wire
along with the plastic through the steel casing. It is recommended that multiple strands of tracer wire be used to ensure at least one remains unbroken. Cadwelding of the tracer wire to each end of the steel casing is one means of maintaining continuity but is not preferred as it lowers the level of cathodic protection on the tracer wire. A #10 yellow solid or stranded wire should be used when boring plastic pipe or when installing pipe via
split and pull. The heavier gauge wire will allow for added strength during the pullback process. It is recommended that multiple strands of tracer wire be used to ensure at least one remains unbroken. When boring, it is not necessary to tape the wire to the pipe as you would in an open trench installation, since the tape is likely to come off during pullback. Once the installation is completed, the tracer wire(s)
should be checked for continuity to confirm at least one was not damaged. Tracer wire connections should not be made to steel main or steel fittings when transitioning to plastic pipe. Two #10 wires shall be “Cadwelded” on the steel side and a tracer wire on the plastic side brought up into the test box. Do not tie wires together. Refer to Specification 3.12, Drawing B-36271 for details. The exception to this is when inserting plastic service into an old steel service line. Refer to Specification 3.16, Services, Insertion of Old Steel Services along Steel Main, or gain approval of other proposed deviations from standard policy from a Cathodic Protection Technician. A 4-1/2 lb. zinc anode should be installed on the tracer wire at intervals not to exceed 1000 feet to prevent corrosion of the tracer wires. At a minimum a 4-1/2 lb. anode shall be installed on the tracer wire
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
6 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

at the end of each new plastic main to help with current flow for locating. In order to monitor continuity of tracer wire and for locating, cathodic test stations should be installed as needed i.e., approximately every 1000 feet where there is no place to connect to the system for locating, such as a service. Refer to Specification 3.12, Drawing B-36271. At the riser, the tracer wire should be terminated (clipped) so that it does not make contact above the
insulated valve or with the meter, which can cause a cathodic short across the insulated fittings. Ensure a sufficient amount of wire is left aboveground to allow connection to and testing with a multi-meter. The tracer shall be secured to the meter riser with a half-hitch knot (do not tape wire to riser; this can trap moisture and cause corrosion). Wire Connections
Tracer wires will be joined by a direct-bury splice kit (in line or “Y” connection). Maintain electric continuity at wire connections.
Joining and splice connections shall be either encapsulated in a dielectric type gel connector which is the preferred method, or a crimped sleeve covered by an approved dielectric sealing compound (such as
Aqua-Seal) and tape wrapped. Prior to installing wires into an encapsulated connector, the wires should be tied together loosely with an over-the-hand type knot approximately 6 inches to 12 inches from the end of the wires. This knot alleviates strain on the wire connection.
Pulling Limitations
Polyethylene pipe may be pushed through a casing or “planted” with a plow-type chute arrangement. It is not to be pulled through a casing pipe with mechanical equipment or pulled through the ground with a
plow unless special precautions are taken to eliminate the possibility of overstressing. Using a pulling head incorporating a break-away device or "weak link" are two methods of eliminating the possibility of
overstressing and are discussed later in this specification. Additionally, it is recommended that pulling forces be monitored via pressure gauge when equipment permits
Plowing and Planting
Plowing and planting involves cutting a narrow trench and feeding the pipe into the trench through a shoe
or chute fitted just behind the trench cutting equipment. The shoe or chute should feed the pipe into the bottom of the cut.
The minimum short term bending radius for plastic pipe during plowing installations is as indicated in the
following table:
Minimum Temporary Bending Radius
Pipe Size SDR Outside Diameter (in.) Minimum Chute Bending Radius* (in.)
*Calculation from Plastics Pipe Institute Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe 2nd Edition, Chapter 10 Table 3
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
7 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Small diameter coiled pipe is usually fed over the trenching equipment and through the shoe. Straight lengths may be butt fused into a long string, then fed over and through the shoe. Plowing shoes or chutes should be inspected periodically to assure that they are not worn and that the pipe does not kink or bind on the shoe during installation. Plowing operations should be completed in materials acceptable for padding (sometimes referred to as
bedding) pipe. Prior to plowing, a subsurface review of the soil conditions shall be conducted to determine the acceptability of the soil to plowing and future padding of the installed pipe. Soil should be primarily sand or cohesive earth with a minimum of rock.
Caution Tape
When plowing in PE pipelines that are 2 inches and larger, yellow gas caution tape with the words to the effect “CAUTION, GAS LINE BURIED BELOW” should be installed approximately 12 inches above the pipeline. This tape shall be installed with the pipe by feeding the tape through one of the chutes on the plow.
The use of caution tape should also strongly be considered in open-trench pipeline installations. These
types of locations may include but are not limited to installations within private easements and dry-line installations where the presence of a gas pipeline may be unexpected to excavators. Dry Line Installations
As a general rule, dry line gas lines should not be installed unless there is a high degree of certainty that
the line will be “gassed up” within three years. Additionally, consideration should be given to abandoning dry lines that have been in place for five years or greater to lessen the burden of ongoing locating of the
facility. If the need arises to bring into service a former dry line that has been abandoned, it can be done in accordance with Specification 5.17, Reinstating Abandoned Gas Pipelines and Facilities. Refer to
Specification 3.18, Dry Line Pipe for additional details on pressure testing of dry line pipe.
Pulling-In
Pulling-in involves cutting a trench, then pulling the pipe in from one end of the trench. Pulling-in may be accomplished as a simultaneous operation by attaching the leading end of the pipe behind the trench
cutter or as a separate operation after the trench has been opened. In either case, pulling-in requires a relatively straight trench and the pulling force applied to the pipe must not exceed what might damage the
pipe. Refer to “Safe Pulling Forces” below for additional information. This method should be limited to shorter runs. Care shall be taken when pulling in pipe to protect the exterior pipe surface. Sandbags and
sand padding (sometimes referred to as bedding) to be placed in the trench to support and protect the exterior of the pipe during pull-in.
Safe Pulling Forces
When polyethylene pipe is subjected to a significant short term pulling stress, the pipe will stretch
somewhat before yielding. This is a possibility during pull-in installation and horizontal directional drilling as well as split and pull procedures described further in Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation.
The safe pulling force as shown in the following table assures that the pulling stress in the pipe is limited to about 40 percent of its yield strength, the level at which the pipe will recover undamaged to its original length in a day or less after the stress is removed.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
8 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

The safe pull force for polyethylene pipe is determined by the following equation: SFp = 1.257 (Y)(OD)2((1/SDR) - (1/SDR2)) Where SFp = safe pull force, lbs Y = yield strength of MDPE (2800 lbs/in2 for PE 2406/2708 resin)
OD = outside diameter, inches SDR = standard dimension ratio The safe pull forces for PE 2406/2708 resin, medium density pipe for varying diameters and SDRs used by Avista, are shown in the following table:
SAFE PULLING FORCES TABLE
Pipe Size Diameter Dimension SFp (lbs)
½ CTS 0.625 7 168
*The safe pull force listed in the table is for 1 hour under tension.
Use the following factors for longer tension durations: 1 - 12 hours multiply by 0.95; 12 - 24 hours multiply by 0.91 If these safe pulling forces are exceeded, the pipe should be abandoned, and the pull-in operation repeated, or the pipe should be installed by other means. Just because pipe does not break when pulling forces are exceeded does not mean that it may not be irreparably damaged. When the pull force exceeds the above limits, the pipe may begin to yield (stretch) to a point where it will not recover to its original length. As polyethylene pipe will stretch as much as 800 percent to 1000 percent before it
breaks, it may be visually impossible to tell if the pipe integrity has been damaged if the safe pull force is exceeded. To help assure safe pulling forces are not exceeded during installation of plastic pipe by mechanical means (bore machine, backhoe, winch, etc.) a break-away device or a “weak link” shall be utilized during any trenchless installation methods. During pull-back, it is recommended that the exit pit farthest away
from the pull-back machine be monitored to ensure the pipe being pulled maintains a constant rate of pull-back until installation is complete. Pipe that shows a slowed rate of installation or stops moving at the exit pit may be an indication of the pipe being stuck in the bore hole during pull-back. Plastic (polyethylene) pipe may stretch slightly during the pulling operation and care should be taken to allow the
pipe to recover to its original length before it is tied in (this may take as long as 24 hours). To assure the pipe has recovered to its original length after pullback, it is recommended that the pipe be allowed to rest
in place for a period of time equal to or greater than twice the time of pull-back or one hour, whichever is greater, up to a maximum rest time of 24 hours before making tie-ins at either end. One way to verify pipe recovery is to compare the measured length of the pull-back with the length of the pipe installed as determined by calculating the differences in footage markings stenciled on the pipe.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
9 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Tie-ins may be completed without a wait period if all of the following conditions are met: 1. The HDD or split-and-pull length does not exceed 500 feet. 2. A “weak link” of reduced pipe diameter is used, not a break away pin (shear pin). 3. The “weak link” must not show any elongation during pullback. This shall be verified by measuring the length of the weak link before and immediately after the HDD or split-and-pull
operation is completed. These measurements shall be recorded and documented in the job paperwork. If the “weak link” shows any elongation, the pipe shall rest per the times described in the paragraph above prior to performing any tie-ins.
Break –Away Pin or Weak Link
Pipe should be pulled-in behind a pulling head, typically shaped like a bullet that is one or two pipe diameters larger than the pipe being pulled-in. Refer to “Pullback” in Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation for additional information. In order to assure the safe pull force is not exceeded during mechanical pullback, a calibrated break-away pin or “weak link” shall be used between the pulling head
and the gas pipe as described below.
A “weak link” can be used between the pulling head and the gas pipe in lieu of a calibrated break-away pin. A “weak link” shall consist of a one foot long (minimum) section of pipe measuring at least one available stock pipe diameter smaller than the pipe to be pulled and composed of the same material (for the purposes of a weak link, unimodal PE is considered the same material as bi-modal). However, using
the “weak link” will not always assure that the amount of pulling force being applied is not exceeding the safe pull force of the gas pipe (again, defined as 40 percent of the gas pipe's yield strength, the level at
which the pipe will recover undamaged to its original length in a day or less after the stress is removed). In some cases, the pulling force exerted on the gas pipe with the “weak link” method using one pipe size
smaller may reach 60 percent of the yield strength before the "weak link” fails. In this case, the pipe will still only stretch to a point where it will return to its original length, but this may take longer than 24 hours.
If a break away pin or “weak link” fails during a pullback installation and it can be shown that the carrier
pipe was not subjected to unsafe pulling forces or pulling stresses greater than 40 percent of the pipe’s yield strength then it is acceptable to utilize the installed pipe without abandonment. Contact Gas
Engineering for review prior to proceeding.
Static Charges
Static electric charges may build up on both the inside and outside surfaces of polyethylene pipe. Localized static electricity build-up occurs because polyethylene pipe does not readily conduct electricity.
Charges are generated by physical handling or by the high velocity flow of gas through polyethylene mains and services (i.e., purging, flow of gas through restriction). Discharge of static electricity can cause
unpleasant shocks or ignite a gas-air mixture. Refer to Specification 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity for specific requirements.
Examining Buried Pipe
When previously buried plastic pipe is exposed, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report (Form N-2534)
shall be completed in accordance with Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
10 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

Pigging of Pipe For large jobs or jobs installed during wet weather, it is possible that water and debris may need to be removed from the pipeline. Pigging should be considered at the discretion of the Avista Project Engineer, Foreman, or Inspector.
Odorizing Newly Installed Pipe Newly installed pipe may present challenges with regards to meeting the required odorant detection levels as defined in Specification 4.18, Odorization Procedures. New pipe, especially which is gassed up, but not immediately put into service, tends to absorb odorant in the pipe walls. Consideration should be made to “pickle” such pipe per the sub-section titled “Pickling Newly Installed Piping” in Specification
4.18, Odorization Procedures.
Pressure Testing
New or replaced main and new, replaced, or reconnected services transporting natural gas must be pressure tested. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing for specific requirements.
Updating Maps and Records Employees responsible for construction activities shall ensure field as-built documents are completed
immediately following construction, repair, or abandonment of facilities. Field as-built documents shall be subsequently mapped by the district GIS Editor within the electronic mapping system. The district
manager in which the construction activities take place is responsible to ensure that field work as-built documents are completed, and mapping finished within a timely manner. In Washington, this shall be
completed within 6 months following the completion of the field work. In Idaho and Oregon this is a best management practice.

WAC 480-93-018 (5):
completes any construction activity and make such records available to appropriate company
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
11 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
12 OF 12 SPEC. 3.13

PIPE INSTALLATION
PRE-CHECK LAYOUT AND INSPECTION
REV. NO. 8
1 OF 2 SPEC. 3.14

3.14 PRE-CHECK LAYOUT AND INSPECTION
SCOPE: To provide qualitative guidelines for layout and inspection of a job site prior to construction. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.325(c) CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling Spec. 4.13, Damage Prevention Program PRELIMINARY INSPECTION AND LAYOUT:
General The job location for gas pipeline installations, extensions, or replacements shall be inspected prior to any work. During this inspection, the proposed Avista installation should be pre-marked in white paint so that other affected parties can determine Avista’s worksite.
Pre-Construction Notification for Locate Tickets After inspecting the job site, mark the proposed installation location(s) with white marking paint or other appropriate white marking materials prior to requesting a locate ticket through the local One Call System. The One Call System shall be notified with the appropriate description of the dig area so that the locators for underground facilities identified on the ticket can locate and mark the appropriate area prior to construction. The requestor must include in the description, a contact name and phone number in case there are questions by facility locators with regard to the locate ticket request. Note: When filling out the locate ticket request, be sure to select (as applicable) the “Type of Work” that most accurately reflects the work that will be done. Notifications for locates shall be made at least 2 business days prior to planned construction (Saturdays, Sundays and federal / state holidays are not “business days”). EXCEPTION: An exception to this notification timeframe is when Avista is responding to a gas emergency. In this case, a notification for locates must be made as soon as possible and Avista shall take reasonable care to protect underground facilities. An EMERGENCY means any condition involving a clear and present danger to life, property or a customer service outage. (In Oregon the definition includes interruption of essential public services and in Idaho the definition includes blockage of roads/transportation facilities that require immediate action). Design Locates (Oregon) – Facility locators have 10 days to respond to the request by locating and marking facilities, providing best available information, or by contacting the person requesting the design information to provide facility information.
PIPE INSTALLATION
PRE-CHECK LAYOUT AND INSPECTION
REV. NO. 8
2 OF 2 SPEC. 3.14

The excavator shall either maintain the markings, or if required by state dig laws, request for new locates to be made. Consult the respective state underground dig laws for specifics and refer to Specification 4.13, Damage Prevention Program.
Pre-Construction Inspection
Job planning should consider expected traffic conditions and necessary barricade requirements in accordance with good safety practices, local safety ordinances, and Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook). Job planning should also consider possible conflict with other construction work in immediate area. Verify that underground structures which might be encountered during excavation are clearly marked by
the utility, city, municipality, or agency to which they belong. When pipe is delivered and unloaded on the job site prior to the start of the work, it shall be placed in such a way as to offer a minimum hazard to vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
Pipe lengths and pipe fittings or components shall be inspected for any damage prior to the start of
installation. Damaged pipe or fittings shall not be installed. If the coating on steel pipe is damaged, but the pipe itself is not, the coating shall be repaired per Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains. Layout
When running a main extension in a residential area or commercial area, consideration should be given
to notifying property owners of impending construction. This may include written or verbal communications and should include project purpose, duration, and method of inquiry about potential gas
service hookup.
Mains should run parallel to street, alley, or highway centerlines. Gas mains should be located on opposite side of the street from water mains where possible.
Gas mains shall not run through manholes or footings but shall be offset around them unless a utility
sleeve has been specifically approved by the impacted utility and Gas Engineering.
Joint Ditch
When installing mains and services in a joint trench with electric, telephone, fiber optic, cable TV, or any other unspecified utility, consult the Avista Electric Service and Meter Requirements for ditch and service
stub requirements, or other local utility guidelines, as well as clearances as outlined in Specification 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
1 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

3.15 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for trenching, backfilling, and marking natural gas piping systems. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.319, §192.325, §192.327, §192.361, §192.707 OAR 952-001-0070 WAC 480-93-124, 480-93-170 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation, Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling - Pipeline Markers TRENCHING REQUIREMENTS:
General Those persons operating excavating, boring, or trenching equipment (backhoes, track excavators, trenchers, drilling machines, etc.) should be experienced and knowledgeable on each piece of equipment being used.
Cover High pressure transmission lines shall be installed with a minimum of 36 inches of cover in normal soil (42 inches is preferred) and have at least 24 inches of cover in consolidated rock. High pressure distribution mains should be installed with a minimum of 36 inches of cover (42 inches is preferred), but in all cases shall be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover. Intermediate pressure mains should be installed with a minimum of 30 inches of cover, but in all cases shall be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover. Services should be installed with a minimum of 24 inches of cover but in all cases shall be installed with a minimum of 18 inches cover in streets and roads, and 12 inches of cover on private property. Service risers may be installed at a depth between 18 and 24 inches to prevent covering the ‘Do not bury’ line on the riser. In these circumstances, the service piping should transition to a minimum cover depth of 24 inches as soon as practical. Consideration should be given to install that portion of a service residing within the road right-of-way at depths equivalent to a standard main depth. Additional cover may be required on road crossings by the local jurisdiction.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
2 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

Where an underground structure prevents the installations of a pipeline with the minimum cover, the pipeline may be installed with less cover if it is provided with additional protection to withstand anticipated external loads. Any additional protection should not prevent ability to maintain pipeline. Additional cover should be provided as needed to assure protection of pipeline from other structures and future erosion or removal of cover.
Pipe which is installed by open trenching in a river or stream must have a minimum cover of 48 inches in soil or 24 inches in consolidated rock. For boring depth requirements refer to Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods. Clearances – Steel and PE Pipelines
Each gas pipeline should be installed with a minimum 12-inch radial (non-longitudinal) separation from any foreign utility crossing, for pipelines operating at 20 percent SMYS or greater this clearance is a must. If this clearance cannot be maintained, the pipeline must be installed with enough clearance to allow for
proper maintenance of the facilities and be protected from damage that might result from proximity to other utilities. Consideration should be made to protect against physical and cathodic damage that might
occur from close proximity to other structures or utilities. For PE pipelines, a casing or conduit may be used. Each gas pipeline, including services, should be installed with a 5-foot minimum longitudinal separation from sanitary sewer and storm water pipelines or at a further distance as specified by the appropriate regulating agency. If the sewer is pressurized, a 3-foot separation is sufficient.
No gas pipelines, including services, shall be installed through, above, or below a septic drain fields without approval of Gas Engineering. A minimum separation of 10 feet (25 feet preferred) from sewer drain lines and leech fields should be maintained. Septic and sewer systems afford an easy path for gas migration should a leak ever occur.
Each pipeline including services should be installed with a 3-foot minimum longitudinal separation from other non-gas underground utilities or at a further distance as specified by the appropriate regulating agency. If this clearance cannot be maintained, the pipeline must be protected from damage that might result from proximity to the other structure. Consideration should be made to protect against physical and cathodic damage that might occur from close proximity to other structures or utilities.
When necessary, plastic pipe may be installed in a joint trench with other utilities. A longitudinal separation not less than 12-inches should be maintained. If this clearance cannot be maintained, pipe must be installed with enough clearance to allow for proper maintenance of the facility and be protected from damage that might result from proximity to the other utilities sharing the trench. Customer’s gas piping should not be installed within 12-inches of Avista’s gas pipeline. Each gas pipeline must be installed with enough clearance from any other underground structure to allow proper maintenance and to protect against damage that might result from proximity to other structures. Plastic pipe shall not be installed closer than 10 feet of a steam or hot water pipeline and in general
should not be installed in an area where steam or hot water distribution systems are located. Each gas pipeline should be installed with a minimum of 12 inches of clearance from a culvert while maintaining the minimum cover requirements.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
3 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

Pipelines installed adjacent to buildings should be done so with a concern for future maintenance and an awareness of the possibility of gas becoming trapped under the building should a leak occur. Mains and services (excluding the meter riser itself) should be located a minimum of 5 feet from the foundation of a building. Deviations from the separation requirement for mains must be approved by Gas Engineering, whereas deviations for services will follow the guidance for “Should” as found in the Foreword.
See also “Location Considerations” in Specification 3.16, Services.
Vegetation Clearance Gas distribution intermediate pressure mains (and services when possible) should be installed with consideration for vegetation root growth and its impact on the pipeline. To prevent damage from
vegetation root growth the minimum clearance from a tree should be determined by measuring the diameter of the tree (in inches) at a height of 4.5 feet above finish grade and multiplying that value by 1 to 1.5. This value is the critical root zone (in feet) per the International Society of Arboriculture. For example, a tree with a 4 inches in diameter trunk (measured 4.5 feet above grade) will have a critical root
zone of 4 feet to 6 feet. For trees that are not fully mature or for special circumstances, the critical root zone should be estimated based on the best available information for that tree species in the region.
Small bushes, shrubs, etc. should have at least 5 feet of horizontal clearance from the edge of the gas facilities. Shoring and Excavating Safety
Avista employees engaging in trenching, excavating, or shoring activities shall the procedures outlined in
Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook). Others contracting work for Avista are required to follow the respective state OSHA requirements. Avista’s Safety Department shall be consulted for
excavations greater than 20 feet of depth.
Inspections shall be made of excavations, trenches, adjacent areas, and protective systems by a "competent person" as defined in the Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook). Such
inspections shall be performed at the start of work and as needed throughout the course of the job in order to determine if conditions exist that could result in a cave-in, failure of protective systems, or other
hazardous situations. When the "competent person" finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in, failure of protective systems, or other hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall
be removed from the area until the necessary precautions have been taken.
Underground utilities that have been located and exposed during the course of the construction or excavation process shall be protected, supported, or removed as necessary to safeguard employees and
to prevent damage to the utilities.
Manufactured materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Any suspected defect in such protective systems shall
be reported and corrected before use by any employee.
Trench Excavation
Trenches must be wide enough for installing pipe without damaging coating or inducing unnecessary stresses on the pipe. At horizontal angles, the trench must have sufficient width to accommodate the welding elbow or bend and provide clearance between the side of the trench and the pipe (at least 6 inches on each side for pipe sizes 6-inch and larger).

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
4 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

Examining Buried Pipe When previously buried steel or plastic pipe is exposed, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report Form (Form N-2534) shall be completed in accordance with Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation.
Padding Material When the bottom of the trench does not provide for a smooth and firm base for the pipe due to rock, etc. a minimum padding (sometimes referred to as bedding) of 6 inches of cohesive earth or sand with maximum aggregate of 3/4-inch size shall be used. This material may be obtained from screened native soil or by import. This soil should consist primarily of fines and have a minimum of sharp edge aggregate.
Soil should be of a nature to allow a firm compacted surface providing uniform support for pipe. Refer to Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation - Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains, “Plowing and Planting” for additional bedding requirements when plowing.
Controlled-Density Backfill
Some jurisdictions may require the use of controlled density backfill (CDF) near gas mains to enhance compaction during roadway construction. Foreign utilities may use CDF material between Avista’s gas mains and their facilities when minimum clearances are difficult to achieve. If CDF is used, it shall not be placed directly on the pipe. A minimum of 6 inches of padding (sometimes referred to as bedding)
material shall be placed around Avista’s mains before CDF material is placed.
When gas pipe is exposed adjacent to other construction / utility projects, the gas pipe shall be sufficiently supported so that no pipe movement occurs. This can be accomplished by strapping, blocking, or other
measures as approved by an Avista Inspector or other qualified individual. Care shall be taken to restore original compaction upon backfilling.
Backfill
A backfill of 6-inches using material as described above in Padding Material should be placed over the
top of the pipe to prevent damage from rocks while backfilling. If exceptionally large rock (8 inches or larger) are to be pushed back into the trench, an initial backfill of 12 inches of approved material should
be placed over the pipe.
If Caution Tape will be installed at the particular location, it is at this one-foot level of cover that the tape should be installed. Reference Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Mains, and Specification 3.13,
Pipe Installation - Plastic Mains for additional information regarding the use of Caution Tape.
Backfill must provide firm continuous support under and around the pipe. It must be free of sharp objects, rocks, frozen materials, large clods, or any other materials that could be detrimental to the pipe or pipe
coating. Materials used for support must be well compacted. Avoid using backfill or supporting materials that could create undue stress or damage to the pipe. To allow for backfill settlement, at casing pipe
gaps and where plastic is located on disturbed earth; the pipe should be lifted slightly while the backfill is packed underneath.
Compaction Compaction levels shall be as specified by the appropriate regulating agency. In general, traveled
roadways and improved right of ways require 95 percent compaction. Driveways should be compacted
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
5 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

similar to roadways. Heavily traveled roadways and arterials may have special requirements pertaining to sub-base construction and compaction. Care should be taken to prevent damage to the buried gas facilities when placing and compacting backfill. Proper compaction should be provided under and around pipe and fittings at branch connections, transitions, service connections, and riser locations to prevent differential settlement even if CDF will be
used. This should be accomplished by using hand operated tamping equipment (such as a hand tamper, vibratory plate, whacker, or pogo stick) adjacent to the pipe. Sand backfill may be placed directly on top of pipe or fittings. A minimum of 12 inches of backfill must be in place before using hand operated tamping equipment directly over the pipe, or a minimum of 18 inches if using equipment mounted compacting devices (such as a hoe-pack, or vibratory roller). A sheep’s foot
style compactor attached to a backhoe or excavator requires at least 24 inches of cover. Consideration should be made regarding the age of the pipe, operating pressure and quality of backfill prior to allowing these types of activity over gas mains. When construction activity occurs adjacent to or over existing pipelines and facilities, these same cover requirements apply. If tamping or compaction activities are
planned to occur over an existing high pressure main with less than 24 inches of cover, contact Gas Engineering.
Marking Pipe After Installation (OR) In areas of ongoing excavation or construction (such as residential or commercial site development) in
Oregon, newly installed facilities shall be located and marked with locate paint or appropriate flagging for backfilled facilities immediately upon placement. For shaded pipe in a ditch where Avista is not backfilling
the ditch, locate and mark using locate paint on the sand or “natural gas” caution/marking tape which may be placed on the sand over the pipe using sand in various places to anchor the tape in place so that the
location of the pipe is still visible. (This is a requirement in Oregon per OAR 952-001-0070 (8)).
Pressure Testing After Backfilling
Where feasible, plastic pipe must be installed and backfilled prior to pressure testing to bring attention to any potential damage that may occur during the installation and backfill process. Pre-tested pipe may
only be used where it is not feasible to conduct a post construction pressure test.
Pipeline Markers
For further guidance, refer to Specification 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling and Pipeline Markers, in subsections “Pipeline Markers for Buried Pipe,” ”Exceptions for Marking,” “Washington Pipeline Marker
Requirements,” and “Markers for Aboveground Pipelines.”
Customer Trench / Ditch Detail Drawings

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
6 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 20
7 OF 7 SPEC. 3.15

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
1 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

3.16 SERVICES
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for designing, locating, and installing natural gas services. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.361, §192.363, §192.365, §192.367, §192.371, §192.375, §192.381, §192.383, §192.385, §192.725 WAC 480-93-100, 480-93-115 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Mains Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 5.16, Abandonment or Inactivation of Facilities INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
General New or re-commissioned services shall be tested to the pressures required for a new line installation. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. Location Considerations Consideration shall be given to the location of the service and riser so that each meter and service regulator, whether inside or outside of a building, is installed in a readily accessible location and protected from corrosion and other damage, including vehicular damage that may be anticipated. Service lines should be run directly to the meter at right angles to the main and property line. Services should not be run under existing or proposed driveways or patios unless there is no alternate route. Consideration should also be given to the future probable location(s) of egress windows when installing service lines in close proximity to homes. If condensates are present in the gas where it might cause interruption in the gas supply to the customer, the service line must be sloped so condensates will drain toward the main or into drips at the low points in the service line. Service lines must be installed to minimize anticipated piping strain / external loading. See Spec 3.13 – “Pipe Installation – Plastic Mains” for additional considerations related to field bending of PE pipe. See Spec 3.15 – “Trenching and Backfilling” for additional considerations related to clearances.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
2 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

New Plastic Services
When installing a new plastic service near, equal to, or exceeding 1,000 feet in length, a 4-1/2 lb. zinc
anode should be installed to prevent corrosion of the tracer wire. Install one anode near the main and
install any additional anodes at 1,000-foot spacings toward the service riser. (Refer to Specification 3.13,
Tracer Wire, for further guidance.)
Steel Service Replacement
When replacing or repairing sections of steel service, care must be taken to maintain cathodic protection
(CP) as well as the ability to locate the pipe. Below is a hierarchy of preferences when replacing all or a portion of a steel service:
1. Convert the service to polyethylene plastic (PE) the full length from the main to the meter for the
betterment of the gas system to prevent isolated steel locations and to prevent disbonded dresser fittings. 2. In situations where only a portion of the service is to be replaced or repaired, install new steel pipe to maintain CP continuity. An example of this is offsetting a steel service for installation of a
window well. 3. Replace the service from the riser back as far as practical using PE pipe and install a transition
fitting before reaching the main. A stress relieving sleeve should be installed at the steel to PE transition point prior to completion of the service connection. Refer to Spec 2.13 – “Joining of
Plastic Pipelines”. The following must also be completed in this scenario: a. Install a marker ball at the transition.
b. Install tracer wire from the transition to the riser. c. Note accurate centerline measurements of the exact location of the transition on the
appropriate work order.
Excess Flow Valves
An excess flow valve (EFV) is a device that is designed to automatically shut off the flow of gas should the service line be severed. An EFV shall be installed in any of the following circumstances where the
operating pressure is 10 psig or greater:
• On each newly installed or replaced service line serving a residential load up to and including a 4-plex apartment;
• On a small commercial facility with a high likelihood of existing or future loads not to exceed 1,000 CFH; and
• On newly installed or replaced branched services if an EFV does not already exist. The EFV should be installed so that it protects both services on a branched service.
As noted in §192.383, customers have a right to request an EFV on service lines not exceeding 1000 SCFH and who are not exempt from needing to have one as discussed below. Avista is required to notify customers regarding their right to request an EFV and will do so via its website and / or through periodic monthly bill inserts. Avista is required to keep evidence of such notifications, present such evidence if asked during pipeline safety inspections and provide EFV reporting on its Distribution Annual Report
required by §191.11. Although not explicitly required, consideration should be given to installing an EFV when a service line is exposed near the main and an opportunity to install an EFV exists. Additionally, the EFV must be marked
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
3 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

or its presence be identified on the service line and must be located as close to the fitting connecting the service line to the main as practical. Where an EFV is not required to be installed:
• Apartment complexes with more than four units.
• Service points with existing or potential future loads above 1000 CFH where an EFV is not sufficient or not practical. In these cases, however, a curb valve shall be installed on new or replaced services lines. (Refer to Specification 2.14, Valve Design, “Curb Valves” for more information.). EFVs are preferred if they are able to meet the flow requirements of the service.
• Industrial services.
• Systems that operate at a pressure of less than 10 psig.
• Service lines where there have been prior problems with contaminants in the gas stream that could cause the EFV to malfunction or interfere with the removal of liquids from the line for necessary maintenance.
• When minor work is performed on the service but not in the vicinity of where an EFV would normally be placed.
The excess flow valves are available in three styles:
1. PE bolt-on service tee with EFV incorporated into the outlet.
a. To be used on new PE services.
2. In-line “stick” EFV. a. For use on existing PE stubs. Locate EFV at road right-of-way line.
b. For use off of steel main downstream of the transition fitting.
3. Mechanical coupling with built in EFV. a. For use on existing PE stubs. Locate EFV at road right-of-way line.
b. For use off of steel main downstream of the transition fitting.
Individuals designing services shall use the following charts under Capacity of EFV to determine which EFV to install based on the customer’s projected load. The design that goes to construction shall indicate
if an EFV is to be installed based on the requirements of this specification. The EFV symbol shall be shown in Avista’s AFM (GIS) system. This enables Avista to run reports on the number of excess flow
valves installed in the system on a yearly basis.
The following table shows EFV symbology in AFM.
Symbol Description
Stick EFV
Tapping tee with integrated EFV
Inline Tee with EFV
Reducer Inline Tee with EFV
Reducer Coupling with EFV

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
4 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

Capacity of EFV The following tables are used to size the EFV based on the lowest pressure (psig) the service line will operate and the minimum trip rate in cubic feet per hour (CFH). Designers should use 10 psig in the tables as the lowest pressure the service line will operate at, unless the system operates at a pressure lower than 10 psig.
The smallest capacity (not length) EFV capable of managing the anticipated load shall be selected, unless there are extenuating circumstances. In such cases, contact Gas Engineering for assistance. If the projected load exceeds the capacity of the EFV in the following tables at 10 psig, select a higher capacity EFV or install a curb valve. A higher capacity EFV may need to be specified and special ordered in certain applications.
“Maximum Length of Service Protected” in the last column of the tables is the maximum distance from where the excess flow valve is located that it will trip at the minimum flow rate if the service line were damaged.
EXAMPLE: If a service line is 800 feet in length at a pressure of 10 psig, a tap tee with integrated 775
EFV would protect 1,054 feet of service line. This EFV provides adequate protection. See diagram below.
If the length of the service line is longer than the max length of service protected listed in the table, install a second EFV in the service to protect the remaining length of service. EXAMPLE: If a service line is 1,400 feet in length at a pressure of 10 psig, a tap tee with integrated 775 EFV would protect the first 1,054 feet of service line. If the damage occurs beyond 1,054 feet, the excess flow valve may not trip. In this scenario, a stick EFV can be installed to protect the remaining 346 feet of service line. See diagram below.
When an existing customer load is increased and the service line has an EFV, the EFV capacity must be evaluated and the EFV upsized if necessary.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
5 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

EFV Capacity Tables

10* 775 34
10* 775 1,054
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
6 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

Max Length of Service Protected (ft)
10* 1200 388
1800 CFH, LYCO EFV I SERIES, ¾”
Max Length of Service Protected (ft)
10* 1800 78
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
7 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

The RW Lyall 475, 3/4-inch EFVB, Stick style was used up through the year 2007 and the following table
is used for troubleshooting only. This model EFV is no longer being installed as of 1/1/2008.

Branch (Split) Service A branch or split service is a distribution line that transports gas from a common source service of supply to two adjacent or adjoining residential or small commercial customers. Branch services may be initiated near an adjacent property owner’s meter provided the adjacent customer’s written approval is obtained to work on their property, otherwise a branch can be done at the curb within the public right-of-way. The advantage of a branch is to avoid cutting asphalt or concrete. A branch service should only be installed when both the existing and new services are located on the adjacent, nearby sides of the structure, not the far side of either. Branching of an existing branched service (thereby creating more than two service points on a branched arrangement) shall not be done to add another residential or commercial load. Branching off of an existing branched service line to add a small metered load such as a shop, swimming pool, etc. may be allowed if approved by Gas Engineering. Considerations such as total connected load, the depth of the existing service line that will be reclassified as a main line, and the length of time of the original pressure test(s) of the existing service line that will be reclassified as a main line must be considered before approval is granted. When branching off of an existing service, an EFV should be installed such that it protects both downstream services, unless there are extenuating circumstances such as those listed earlier in this specification in the subsection entitled “Excess Flow Valves”. If the existing service already has an EFV installed, the new capacity of the combined customer loads must be evaluated and the EFV upsized if necessary. Consideration when designing branch services in regard to excess flow valves: 1. If the combined load of the branch services exceeds the specified CFH in the EFV sizing tables based on the minimum operating system pressure (10 psig), then separate services shall be run on residential homes. 2. Large custom home areas may necessitate separate services.
Pressure Min Trip Flow Rate (CFH) Max Length of Service Protected (ft)
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
8 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

A 1/2-inch service should not be split or branched due to potential capacity issues. Installation of Excess Flow Valves The excess flow valve (EFV) is a precision device and should be handled with care. Excessively rough
handling and/or the allowing of dirt, sand, or other debris to enter the EFV carrier (tee, stick, or coupling) could cause damage to the device, rendering it inoperable. The following are procedures for installing and putting a service with an excess flow valve into operation by style of EFV:
Excess Flow Valve (EFV) Installation Procedure – Service Tee Style: The following procedure is to be used when installing a service tee style excess flow valve (EFV): 1. Run service line and install riser. Install EFV identification washer on riser, immediately below the
service valve.
2. Use air compressor to purge debris out of service line prior to installing and connecting to the
service tee.
3. Perform pressure test on entire service line back to the service tee using standard testing procedures.
4. Ensure that the EFV is not tripped by observing the pressure gauge for a slow, steady rise in
pressure. If the pressure “bumps” or rises quickly, the EFV is probably tripped. Shut off air and allow the EFV to reset and equalize the pressure in the service line. Resume pressurization while observing the pressure gauge.
5. Pressurize the service line to the proper test pressure (90 psig minimum) and observe for
pressure drops. The length of the test is determined by the table in Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
6. When test is complete, slowly bleed the pressure off at the main.
7. Tap the main, back off the tap slowly to avoid tripping the EFV.
8. Purge the service line of air at the riser. A test regulator with a 1/8-inch orifice or a 90-degree elbow with cap that has 1/8-inch drilled orifice may be used to control flow and avoid tripping the
EFV. Orient the purging device in a safe direction for gas flow. Fully open service valve at riser slowly to avoid tripping the EFV. If the EFV trips, close the service valve and allow the bypass
gas to equalize, this resets the EFV. Use a combustible gas indicator to check for 93 percent gas or higher. For additional information, refer to Specification 3.17, Purging Pipelines, “Purging Services.”
9. Set the meter and purge slowly. Do not free-flow the meter unrestricted as this could trip the
EFV.
10. Record the EFV data on the As-built and/or service card.
Excess Flow Valve (EFV) Installation Procedure – In-Line Stick or Coupling Style: For use off of steel main, existing service stub, and when branching off of an existing service that does not already have an excess flow valve. Refer to Standard Unit Assembly Drawing A-37169 at the end of this specification for EFV installations from an existing steel service tee. Note: Prior to completing the connection of the EFV to the steel tee be sure to install a stress-relieving sleeve on the service line that
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
9 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

will help protect the rigid steel to PE transition per the requirements in Spec 2.13 – “Joining of Plastic Pipeline Components”. 1. Run service line and install riser. Install identification washer on riser, immediately below the service valve.
2. Use air compressor to purge debris out of service line prior to installing EFV.
3. Connect EFV stick or coupling in proper position (with arrow pointing away from source of gas) with mechanical fittings to the stub or steel service tee in the bell hole depending on which type of
connection is being made.
4. Perform pressure test on the service line, including the EFV, using standard testing procedure.
5. Ensure that the EFV is not tripped by observing the pressure gauge for a slow, steady rise in pressure. If the pressure “bumps” or rises quickly, the EFV is probably tripped. Shut off air and
allow the EFV to reset and equalize the pressure in the service line. Resume pressurization while observing the pressure gauge.
6. Pressurize the service line to the proper test pressure (90 psig minimum) and observe for pressure drops. The length of the test is determined by the table in Spec 3.18 Pressure Testing.
7. When test is complete, slowly bleed the pressure off.
8. (Tap the main or make final connection), back off the tap or squeezer slowly to avoid tripping the
EFV.
9. Purge service line of air at the riser. A test regulator with a 1/8-inch orifice or a 90-degree elbow with cap that has 1/8-inch drilled orifice may be used to control flow and void tripping the EFV. Orient the purging device in a safe direction for gas flow. Fully open service valve at riser slowly
to avoid tripping the EFV. If the EFV trips, close the service valve and allow the bypass gas to equalize, this resets the EFV. Use a combustible gas indicator to check for 93 percent gas or
higher. For additional information, refer to Specification 3.17, Purging Pipelines, “Purging Services.”
10. Set the meter and purge slowly. Do not free-flow the meter unrestricted as this could trip the EFV.
11. Record the EFV data on the As-built and/or service card.

EFV – High Pressure Services
A high-pressure service is defined as a steel service line carrying pressure in excess of 60 psig up to a customer. In general, it is desired to minimize the installation of high-pressure services. It is preferred to
design intermediate distribution systems and serve customers with intermediate pressure.
When it is necessary to install a high-pressure service, the service shall be installed utilizing a Mueller Autosafe Model H-17842 Curb Valve Tee at the main. This valve tee operates with a ball check (EFV)
and is designed to shut off at flows exceeding 500 CFH. No exceptions are to be made without concurrence by Gas Engineering.
Not more than one customer shall be served off a high-pressure service (i.e., no branching). Should it be
necessary to branch the existing high-pressure service, a regulator station or “farm tap” type regulator station must be installed near the main.
High-pressure service designs shall be reviewed by Gas Engineering.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
10 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

Service Risers Service risers should be installed a minimum of 8 inches from the finished building wall with the service termination valve approximately 10 inches from ground level or finished grade to accommodate proper riser installation (refer to the drawings in Specification 2.24). For installation in heavy snow areas refer to Sheets 8 and 17 of this specification. The service valve should be positioned so that the shut off is facing
away from the building or the meter and easily accessible for operation. The service valve and meter shall not be in contact with the ground except for applications detailed in Drawings A-36712 and C-35209 in Specification 2.24. Variance to these requirements must be approved by Gas Engineering. The service riser and tracer wire (if applicable) shall be installed through a 4-inch diameter, or larger, non-metallic sleeve (i.e. PVC or corrugated drainpipe). The sleeve should be installed to a depth of 12-18
inches below grade and extend to a height 3-4 inches above grade. The sleeve once positioned, is filled with soil. The purpose of setting the sleeve above grade is to prevent eventual accumulation of debris around the
riser and assure future concrete, pavement or other customer improvements do not contact the riser. It also provides an opening around the riser that aids in leak survey and detection as well as provides
access to take a cathodic pipe-to-soil reading. The PE “pigtail” on anodeless service risers may be shortened if necessary, to accommodate unique installation requirements. The steel portion of the riser may be rethreaded in the event the threads are
damaged as long as the riser nipple is Schedule 80 and the original threads are completely removed before rethreading. Schedule 40 risers may not be rethreaded. No other modifications are allowed to the
steel portion of the riser.
Service Risers for Multi-Meter Manifolds
Service risers for multi-meter manifolds should be installed a minimum of 12 inches from the finished building wall.
Services in Heavy Snow Areas
Location of the riser and meter set shall be on a non-shed side of the roof, where possible. On new
installations, approved external meter protection and a breakaway fitting should be installed to protect the meter from falling snow and ice. Refer to Specification 2.22, Meter Design, “Meter Set Location Protection
and Barricades” and “Breakaway Fitting” for further guidance. If a suitable site cannot be found, an inside meter installation may be considered. (Contact Gas Engineering for approval before installing an inside
meter). On meter sets installed inside a structure to avoid snow loads, the service valve should be installed approximately 6 feet aboveground, level to the riser, and anchored to the wall per Drawing B-
36269.
Service Lines in Conduit/ Casing
When it is necessary to install a service line in a conduit/casing, the end nearest the building wall must be sealed to prevent or slow the migration of gas towards the building in the event of a leak in the service
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
11 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

piping. This end seal may be made with expansion foam or other suitable seal. This is required not only in Washington (per WAC 480-93-115(4)) but also in Oregon and Idaho.
Service Lines into Buildings The service line or service riser should not pass through a concrete wall, floor slab, or a foundation wall without design approval by Gas Engineering. Each underground service line that enters a building below grade must:
• In the case of a metal service line, be protected against corrosion,
• In the case of a plastic service line, be protected from shearing action and backfill settlement and a steel anodeless riser be used (either prebuilt or “new construction”) where it enters the building
wall,
• Enter into a normally usable and accessible part of the building, and
• Be encased in a gas-tight conduit as it passes through the foundation or floor.
The space between the conduit and the service line must be sealed to prevent gas leakage into the building and, if the conduit is sealed at both ends, a vent line from the annular space must extend to a point where gas would not be a hazard, and extend above grade, terminating in a rain and insect resistant fitting. If the service is steel, it is best to have a bare steel conduit with spacers installed to ensure the carrier pipe does not short to the conduit.
Service Lines Passing Under Buildings The installation of service lines underground under buildings should be performed only as a last resort
and only after prior approval from Gas Engineering. Service lines installed under buildings must be cased, sealed, and vented to the outside atmosphere. Main Connections Each service line connection to a main should be located at the top of the main. If connection to the top of
the main is not practical, then the service may be connected to the side of the main using approved fittings. Service connections to main by use of compression-type fittings must be designed and installed to
effectively sustain the longitudinal pullout, or thrust forces caused by contraction or expansion of the piping, or by anticipated external or internal loading. If gaskets are used in connecting the service line to
the main connection fitting, they must be compatible with the gas in the system.
Curb Valves
Underground service valves or “curb valves” shall be installed on all services where meter sets are installed in buildings or where it is impossible to provide ready access to a service line valve at an outside
WAC 480-93-115 (4):
the gas pipeline company must seal the casing at the end nearest the building wall to prevent or slow
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
12 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

wall of a building. A curb valve shall also be installed on all new or replaced service lines where the load is greater than 1000 CFH and an EFV is not practical for installation. For additional criteria of where curb valve shall be installed refer to Specification 2.14, Valve Design, “Curb Valves.”
Insertion of Old Steel Services Along Steel Main
Insertion should be done only as a last resort when open trenching is too costly. In these cases, it is often possible to pull short services that are reasonably straight out of the ground and pull new plastic pipe and tracer wire through the void left by the steel service pipe that is removed. Pulling force limitations on plastic pipe shall be monitored and adhered in accordance with Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation - Plastic Mains.
When insertion of an old steel service is to be performed off steel main, electrical continuity should be maintained along the service. This shall be performed as shown in Drawing A-34735 at the end of this specification. The tracer wire shall be cadwelded to the main near the old steel service and the other end of the tracer wire shall be cadwelded to the steel service being inserted.
Insertion of Old Steel Services Along Plastic Main
When an old steel service is to be inserted and new plastic main is to be run, the electrical continuity of the service should be maintained. In order to accomplish this, splice the tracer wire at the main and perform a Cadweld to the steel service being inserted.
New, smaller diameter PE shall not be inserted into existing PE main or service unless the old pipe has been split open (as in a pipe-replacement project) without Gas Engineering’s approval.
Service – Termination Valve
The service termination valve shall be the first exposed threaded fitting aboveground other than a service head adapter for field fabricated risers. The valve shall be one of the following types:

• On steel services, an insulated type, with the insulating portion on the outlet side of the valve.
• On plastic services, a non-insulating type valve may be used; however, the insulated valve is preferred. Unless a meter set assembly is to be immediately installed, the service valve shall be locked off and an 8-inch idle riser nipple and cap assembly shall be installed or alternatively an approved meter bar. A gas warning sticker (Stock Item Number 662-0426 or 662-0428) shall be applied to the assembly to help prevent future damage to the service riser.
Steel Service Abandonment Refer to Specification 5.16, Abandonment or Inactivation of Facilities, for further guidance on steel service abandonment. New Service Lines Not in Use Each service line that is not placed in service upon completion of installation must comply with one of the following until the customer is supplied with gas:
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
13 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

• The valve that is closed to prevent the flow of gas to the customer must be provided with a locking device or other means designed to prevent the opening of the valve by unauthorized persons.
• A mechanical device or disc that will prevent the flow of gas must be installed in the service line or in the meter assembly.
• The customer's piping must be physically disconnected from the gas supply and the open ends sealed.
Service Lines to Recreational Vehicles
Service lines shall not be installed to any type of recreational vehicle including but not limited to motor homes, travel trailers, and campers.
Service Pipe Capacities
The following table may be utilized in sizing natural gas services. The tables provide maximum flow rates
in SCFH for various lengths, sizes, and piping materials with inlet pressure of 15 psig. Flows are given assuming a 5 psig drop in pressure from the beginning of the service (inlet from main) to the end of
service (inlet of the meter). Contact the Gas Planning Department for guidance in situations where the design criteria fall outside of the parameters of the table.

Plastic (roughness = 0.000060) Steel (roughness = 0.00180)
1/2" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2" 4" 6"
Length (ft) CTS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS Std. Std. Std. Sch. 10 Sch. 10

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
14 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

Pipe Sizes and Capacities Downstream of Meter As a matter of standard practice, Avista personnel should not design customer piping systems downstream of the meter. As Avista does not own or maintain stream of customer piping, liability may be incurred by Avista if we design a customer's piping system. Avista’s Account Representatives have been
provided a list of professional engineering consultants that responded to a request for qualifications solicitation by Gas Engineering to design downstream gas piping for customers. Contact the applicable Account Representative for your area should you need to refer to the aforementioned list. It is sometimes necessary, when working with customers to verify their piping systems are adequate to meet their load requirements. For this reason, the following tables are provided. The tables give
maximum flows for various lengths, sizes, and piping materials with inlet pressures from regulation of 5.0 psig, 2.0 psig, or 7.0-inch WC (water column). Pressure drop allowed from beginning to end of pipe (Delta P) are shown for each table.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
15 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

P1 = 2.0 psig
P2 = 1.5 psig
Based on 0.60 S.G. & 95% efficiency factor to account for equiv. Delta P = 0.5 psig

Plastic (roughness = 0.000060)
1/2" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) CTS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS

Steel (roughness = 0.00180)
3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) Std. Std. Std. Std. Std. Sch. 10 Sch. 10

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
16 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

P1 = 5.0 psig
P2 = 1.5 psig
Based on 0.60 S.G. & 95% efficiency factor to account for equiv. Delta P = 3.5 psig

Plastic (roughness = 0.000060)
1/2" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) CTS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS

Steel (roughness = 0.00180)
3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) Std. Std. Std. Std. Std. Sch. 10 Sch. 10

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
17 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

P1 = 7.0" W.C.
P2 = 6.5" W.C.
Delta P = 0.5" W.C.
Plastic (roughness = 0.000060)
1/2" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) CTS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS IPS
Steel (roughness = 0.00180)
3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 2" 3" 4" 6"
Length (ft) Std. Std. Std. Std. Std. Sch. 10 Sch. 10
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
18 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
19 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 21
20 OF 20 SPEC. 3.16

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
1 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

3.17 PURGING PIPELINES
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for the purging of air or natural gas from distribution and transmission facilities. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.629, §192.751 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation - Plastic Spec. 3.32, Repair for Steel Pipe Spec. 3.33, Repair for Plastic Pipe Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off P.E. Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity
Prevention of Accidental Ignition It is essential that vented natural gas and air/gas mixtures be diffused into the air without hazard to Company personnel, the general public, or property. Each potential source of ignition must be removed from the area and a fire extinguisher must be provided. In addition to the precautions discussed in this specification, those who work on or near gas pipeline facilities shall be aware of the risks of their activities. In all situations, trained individuals shall be able to identify risks in their immediate area including sources of ignition that may not be obvious. Some factors to consider:
• Cars, trucks, and engine-driven construction equipment: Where are vehicles in relation to a potential gas envelope? Remain upwind of the gas facilities whenever possible.

• Warning Signs: Are passing motorists and pedestrians aware of the presence of gas facilities? Ensure appropriate signage is in place and that it provides sufficient information to warn of the risks of gas-fueled fires. Such warning signs include not only those that are permanently affixed at Gate Stations and Regulator Stations but also temporary signage that may be placed any time the public should be informed of a temporary gas ignition risk in an area.
• Sparks from hand tools: Are precautions being taken when accessing vaults and manhole covers? Avoid glancing blows on metal, concrete and stone to prevent sparks.
• Sparks from electrical switches, telephones, and flashlights: Do not ring door bells, operate thermostats, telephones, or light switches when in a potentially explosive environment. Do not use flashlights unless they are of the explosion-proof variety.
• Traffic signals: Are street lighting and signal control boxes nearby? If possible, request that the appropriate agency temporarily disconnect these devices during a blowing-gas event.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
2 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

• Welding equipment: Do not permit the use or storage of welding equipment where a dangerous gas-air mixture may exist. Prior to welding, cutting, or other hot work in or around a structure or area including a trench containing gas facilities, a thorough check shall be made with a combustible gas indicator (CGI) for the absence of a combustible gas mixture. CGI readings shall continuously be taken while repairs are being made until the area is made safe. PURGING REQUIREMENTS:
General Purging of air or natural gas prevents a combustible mixture of gas and air from occurring in the pipeline.
Purging is required:
• When new facilities are brought into service.
• Post blowdown when existing facilities are brought back into service.

• Post blowdown when existing facilities are temporarily taken out of service and the removal of natural gas is necessary.

• Post blowdown when lines are to be abandoned. Purging Plan When necessary, a written plan for purging should be prepared prior to the work and reviewed with the Company personnel involved. The following items should be discussed:
• The extent of the facility to be purged and points of isolation.
• The purging medium to be used.
• Safe working practices, especially around plastic pipe due to concerns of static charges that may develop. Refer to Specification 3.34, Squeeze-Off of P.E. Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity.
• Means of communication during purge.
• Means of determining when purge is complete.
• Procedures for handling emergencies, such as gas ignition.
• Notification of local agencies if required (police, fire, air pollution, noise abatement).

• Backup provision, in case of unanticipated occurrences (i.e., compressor failure, insufficient supply of purging gas, etc.).
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
3 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Purging Main with Laterals When purging a pipeline which has laterals or branches, care must be taken to remove the air or gas from all sections of the piping system. The main (trunk) section should be purged first, then each lateral.
Injection Rate Injection of purging medium must be done at a high velocity (100 lineal feet/minute minimum) within the pipeline. A high flow rate will maintain a turbulent interface between the natural gas and air to minimize the mixing of the gas and air in the pipeline.
A purging rate of 100 feet/minute is easily maintained within a pipeline by partially opening a main line valve in all but low pressure systems. The vent stack should be smaller than the piping being purged, where possible. Sizing the vent stack smaller than the pipe helps ensure that the discharge velocity is greater than the flashback velocity, so accidental ignition from outside cannot travel back into the piping.
Venting and Blow Down
A permanent or temporary steel vent stack shall be used that is valved and in the vertical position. It should be of a safe height to keep the natural gas out of the work area and to blow it in a safe direction. The vent pipe shall be grounded using a 12-inch minimum grounding rod. Buildings, overhead lines,
aircraft landing patterns, and other obstructions or sources of ignition should be considered when determining the location for venting the gas. Plastic pipe shall not be used as a vent stack as electrical
charges on the pipe can cause ignition. An anodeless riser, however, may be used as a vent stack so long as an effective grounding device can and does get installed.
Blow Down Procedure: Assure a safe work area that prevents the general public, non-essential personnel, and equipment from
entering. Access shall be restricted only to personnel required to be within the work area. All other individuals and equipment should be kept a safe distance away. If possible place no smoking / warning signs, barricades, and yellow plastic warning tape as necessary to assist. Employ appropriate PPE and safety equipment as required by existing field conditions per Section 4 of the GESH and Part 7, Section 7.5 of the Avista Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook) prior to
entering the work area. Survey the existing field conditions to understand the potential hazards to venting gas at a specific location. Take the necessary precautions to allow the discharge of gas to the atmosphere without
hazard. Non-required personnel should be moved to a safe distance from the blow down stack. On permanent blow down facilities that utilize closure devices or blind flanges on the outlet of the blow down stack, bleed off any pressure that might exist between the operating valve and this fitting prior to removal of the fitting.
Begin the blow down operation by operating the vent stack valve to allow a controlled release of gas from the blow down stack to atmosphere. It is important to monitor the pressure in the line you are intending to blow down and verify the pressure is dropping, indicating that the line is isolated from the system.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
4 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Continue to survey the immediate area for changes to existing field conditions and follow strict precautions to prevent accidental ignition of venting gas and to ensure the safety of Company personnel, the general public, and/or property during blow down. Follow the purging requirements further outlined in this specification. Purging, once started, must be continued until completed so as not to allow combustible mixtures of gas and air to develop.
When possible, consideration must be given to the public with regard to noise and odor as well as to any applicable state and local noise and pollution abatement requirements. Such considerations may include the notification of residents in close proximity to the blow down operations, the use of noise suppressers, reduction of line pressure, reduced rate of venting, etc. Gas Control should be notified prior to the purging procedure so they can react to calls from the public and dispatch crews as necessary.
Static Charges Polyethylene is a poor conductor of electricity; therefore, precautions must be taken to prevent build-up of
static electrical charges on plastic pipe during purging operations. Refer to Specification 3.34, Squeeze-off of P.E. Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity.
Bleed Off of Steel Pipe When bleeding off pressure in steel pipelines that have been stopped-off or valved-off, a steel-valved vent
stack shall be installed to bleed-off the pressure remaining in the pipeline prior to cutting the pipe. Refer to “Venting and Blow Down” in this Specification. If the system does not bleed down, shut valve to vent
stack and check fittings used to stop the flow. A bonding cable shall be connected across the proposed opening before cutting a steel pipe apart. The cable will carry the electrical current and prevent sparking.
Bleed Off of Plastic Pipe
When bleeding-off pressure in plastic pipelines that have been squeezed-off or valved-off, a steel-valved
vent stack (mechanical tee connected to a riser with a valve) shall be installed to bleed off the pressure remaining in the pipeline prior to cutting the pipe. Do not purge through the squeezers without installing these additional fittings to control the flow and direction of the bleed-off gas. Refer to “Venting and Blow Down” in this specification. If the system does not bleed down, shut valve to vent
stack and check fittings used to stop the flow.
On small diameter pipe (1/2 inch and 3/4 inch) there may not be the ability to install a steel-valved vent stack due to unavailability of fittings to connect to the pipe before making a cut in the pipe. On short
sections of pipe in all diameters (for example stubs and transition fittings) there may not be enough clearance to squeeze and install a steel-valved vent stack before making the cut in the pipe. In these
cases, the pipe shall be squeezed or shutoff in a location that minimizes the amount of gas to be bled off. For pipe larger than 3/4 inch diameter, the length of pipe being bled off shall not exceed 5 feet without the
use of a steel-valved vent stack. PURGING AIR OUT OF FACILITIES TO BE PLACED IN SERVICE: NOTE: For any diameter of pipe, it is important to monitor the pressure during the purging process. At no time can the pressure exceed the MAOP. If at any time the pressure exceeds the MAOP plus the allowable build-up, contact Gas Engineering.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
5 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Purging Services Service installations may be purged by opening the riser valve after the service tee been tapped. Care must be taken to blow gas away from structures by connecting a meter bend or street elbow to the riser valve and pointing the stream of gas in a safe direction. The valve should be opened slowly to the full open position; no person or object should be in the exhaust stream area. The operator shall hold the
wrench and keep it in contact with the valve stem at all times. Care must be taken to be aware of all potential ignition sources and direct the purge in a safe direction. See Sheet 1 of this specification for further guidance on “Prevention of Accidental Ignition.” A sufficient amount of gas should be blown to atmosphere and a combustible gas indicator used to ensure that all air is removed from the line. Service lines should be purged immediately after the service tee has been tapped and gas is in the service line.
Purging Services with an Excess Flow Valve As an Excess Flow Valve (EFV) is designed to shut off excess flow, purging of a service with an EFV must be done with care. The purging procedure is outlined in Specification 3.16, Services, “Installation of
Excess Flow Valve.”
Small Pipelines Purging of Pipelines 6 inches in Diameter and Smaller
Small diameter mains should be purged of air by injecting gas at high enough velocities to create a minimum lineal flow of 100 feet/minute within the pipeline (refer to "Injection Rate" above). A slug of
nitrogen between the air and gas is required if this velocity cannot be met. It may also be beneficial to use nitrogen for long pipeline purges.
Small diameter plastic gas mains shall be purged by controlling the flow rate with a valve on the vent
stack or riser. The vent stack or riser shall be located no further than 5 feet from the end of the pipe being put into service. Avoid squeezing near the venting end as this is the area of concern for static
buildup.
Large Pipelines
Purging Pipelines Larger than 6 inches in Diameter
For mains greater than 6 inches diameter, it is desirable to separate the air from the natural gas with a slug of nitrogen. This technique minimizes mixing which otherwise would be accelerated due to the
greater cross-sectional area of the large diameter pipe and reduces required purge time.
When the use of nitrogen is impractical, pipelines with a diameter greater than 6 inches are purged of air by injecting natural gas into the line at high velocities. Mixing of air and gas is more of a problem for
larger diameters and the purge will usually take longer.
Purging with Nitrogen
In order to prevent explosive mixtures when purging long, large diameter lines, a slug of nitrogen can be injected into the line prior to the purging medium. The nitrogen will mix with the air and the gas, but as long as sufficient nitrogen is injected, an explosive mixture will not occur. The following table gives the required volumes of nitrogen for various pipeline diameters and lengths.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
6 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Immediately following the introduction of the inert gas, natural gas shall be injected into the pipeline in a continuous and rapid manner and vented at the terminal end until the vented gas is free from air. Check
for the presence of 93 percent gas or higher with a CGI.
Once a continuous and pure flow of natural gas is obtained through the vent stack, the venting valve shall be closed. Pressure within the main shall be allowed to build up to the available gas pressure. Close the
throttling (or control) valve, then the venting valve shall be opened and the accumulated pressure allowed to dissipate. This procedure should be repeated a minimum of two times to ensure that any pockets of air
were not bypassed in the pipeline due to a laminar flow condition.
Following completion of the above steps, the pipeline may be placed in service.
Following are additional facts regarding inert slug purging:
• Purge velocity is extremely important. Avoid a slow purge. Velocities less than 100 feet per minute in large diameter pipe allow stratification between heavier and lighter gases.
• The amount of nitrogen necessary to purge short lengths (500 feet or less) of large-diameter pipe satisfactorily at practical purge velocities exceeds the volume of the line.
• Changes in horizontal or vertical direction because of elbows or return bends do not destroy the nitrogen slug.

• A temperature variation in the order of 20 degrees F has no effect on mixing of the nitrogen slug with combustible gas or air.
• Turbulence, even if it causes mixing, is much less the cause of deterioration of the slug than is stratification, which is the process of layering.
NITROGEN PURGING DATA FOR 4" - 20" PIPE VOLUME OF NITROGEN REQUIRED FOR INERT SLUG FOR VARIOUS PIPE SIZES AT 100 FT./MIN. MINIMUM INJECTION RATE
Pipe Diameter Content
500' 1000' 2000' 5000' 10000' 20000' 50000'
4" 0.09 10 10 20 20 20 30 40
6" 0.22 30 30 30 40 50 70 100
8" 0.37 70 70 80 90 120 160 200
10" 0.58 130 140 150 180 230 280 350
12" 0.83 280 300 340 370 400 430 470
16" 1.3 580 630 700 790 850 910 1000
18" 1.67 740 850 970 1100 1200 1300 1400
20" 2.08 1100 1200 1400 1600 1700 1800 2000
This table is based on providing a slug which will reduce to about 100 feet in length at end of purge. To provide an additional safety factor, some operators use double the amount of nitrogen indicated.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
7 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

The following illustration shows a guideline for purging a pipeline into service (replacing air with natural gas).
Verifying the Presence of Gas The use of a combustible gas indicator (CGI) to check for 93 percent gas or higher is the method that should be used when purging air out of facilities to be placed into service. PURGING NATURAL GAS OUT OF EXISTING FACILITIES: NOTE: For any diameter of pipe, it is important to monitor the pressure during the purging process. At no time can the pressure exceed the MAOP. If at any time the pressure exceeds the MAOP plus the allowable build-up, contact Gas Engineering. Small Pipelines Purging of Pipelines 6-inches Diameter and Less: Lines 6-inches in diameter and smaller are purged of natural gas using an air mover or by purging with air. In cases such as services of Can’t Gain Entry Cut-offs where both ends of the line are not accessible, gas may be purged out by “flushing” the line several times with nitrogen. This is accomplished by injecting nitrogen to a safe pressure level (at or below the MAOP) in the service, releasing it to atmospheric pressure and repeating as necessary. The disposal of large volumes of natural gas into the atmosphere should be minimized as far as practical by transferring as much as possible to adjacent systems.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
8 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Large Pipelines Purging of Pipelines Larger than 6-inches Diameter: For mains greater than 6-inches diameter, it is desirable to separate the natural gas from the air with a
slug of nitrogen as detailed in “Purging with Nitrogen” in this specification. This technique prevents mixing which otherwise would be accelerated due to the greater cross-sectional area of the large diameter pipe and reduces purge time. When it is impractical to use nitrogen, pipelines with a diameter greater than 6 inches can be purged of natural gas with air. Except for short lengths, this should be performed with an air mover. Contact Gas
Engineering for further guidance. The following illustration shows a guideline for purging a pipeline out of service (replacing natural gas with air).
Verifying the Absence of Gas A combustible gas indicator (CGI) should be used to verify the absence of combustible gas when purging
gas from existing facilities or when working around structures that could contain or trap combustible gas. Structures to consider include but are not limited to existing pipelines, abandoned pipelines, casings, sewers, confined spaces, and vaults. Flaring of Natural Gas Occasionally, it is desirable to flare (ignite) gas during a purge to eliminate odor and assure that uncontrolled combustion does not occur. Consideration should be given to the distraction this might create to the public in high visibility areas. If this procedure is to be used, refer to “Venting and Blow Down” in this specification.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 13
9 OF 9 SPEC. 3.17

Working on Purged Pipeline When it is necessary to perform work on an existing pipeline which has been purged, precautions shall be taken to verify that a combustible mixture has not developed inside the pipeline due to leakage from a segment of pipeline remaining in service, or from the release of gas from residual liquids in the pipeline.
Special care must be taken when performing cutting or welding on such a line. The degree of isolation should be determined by observing any pressure increases within the purged space with all vents closed and by monitoring for the presence of natural gas.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
1 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

3.18 PRESSURE TESTING SCOPE: To provide a procedure that covers the requirements of pressure testing for new, replaced, or re-connected pipelines and facilities.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.121, §192.143, §192.503, §192.505, §192.506, §192.507, §192.509, §192.511, §192.513, §192.515, §192.619, §192.620, §192.719, §192.725
WAC 480-93-170 OTHER REFERENCES: ASTM A234 or A860 standards
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation—Steel Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation—Plastic Spec. 3.17, Purging Pipelines Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe
Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe PRESSURE TESTING REQUIREMENTS: New and Replacement Pipe
New and replaced pipelines and facilities transporting natural gas must be tested and shall maintain a constant test pressure (excluding fluctuations because of temperature and sunlight) for durations in accordance with the tables in this specification. Dry Line Pipe
“Dry line” pipe (pipe that is installed but not put into service immediately) shall be installed and tested according to the appropriate standard specifications. At the completion of successful pressure testing, the new dry system should be left with approximately 60 psig air remaining in the pipe. Mark the pressure
as left on the pipe near the end of the pipe or logical future point of connection with a permanent marker. The presence of this pressure at the time the pipe is put into service will confirm there has been no damage during the time the system was idle. If pressure has been lost, the pipe is assumed to have sustained damage somewhere and any damaged portion must be repaired and then tested as if new before it is put into service. For further guidance on the installation of Dry Line Pipe, refer to Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains, and Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic (Polyethylene)
Mains under the heading Dry Line Installations.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
2 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

Pressure Testing for Steel Following are general guidelines for pressure testing steel pipelines: 1. Maximum test pressure permitted, expressed as a percent of SMYS:
CLASS LOCATION 1 2 3 4
AIR OR INERT GAS 80 75 50 40
NATURAL GAS 80 30 30 30
WATER 100 100 100 100

2. Leak Tests / Safety: When testing a high-pressure steel installation (including regulator stations and farm taps) with air, inert gas, or natural gas, a leak test shall be performed at 100 psig before increasing to the ultimate required test pressure. This leak test shall be undertaken for the purpose of evaluating any above ground piping joints and fittings for leaks and is documented on
the “High Pressure Leak Check Performed at _____ psig” line of the Pressure Test Information sticker. Appropriate safety precautions (limiting access, barricading, warning signs, etc.),
depending on the test medium, shall be taken to protect employees involved in the test procedure as well as the general public. 3. Maximum test capabilities of fittings such as valves and elbows must be determined before
testing. 4. The minimum test pressure shall not be less than 1.5 times the MAOP. The only exception is for pipelines where testing to 1.5 times the design pressure creates problems due to limitations imposed by valves or fittings (refer to Note 3). Contact Gas Engineering should this condition occur.
5. Pipelines 6-inches in diameter and larger which are designed to operate at more than 40 percent SMYS are to be tested to a minimum of 90 percent SMYS and as close to 100 percent SMYS as practical (tests of ERW pipe should be limited to a maximum of 95 percent SMYS). This will permit them to continue to operate at an established MAOP should a class location change occur. However, a test to 90 percent of SMYS is not to be used as an alternative to designing a pipeline to meet a higher class location which may reasonably be anticipated to occur in the future. Refer to Note 6 for additional information regarding large-diameter pipe testing procedures. Pre-Installation Tests: For fabricated units and short sections of pipe for which a post installation
test is impractical, a pre-installation test may be substituted. The pre-installation test must comply with the pressure requirements and durations for a post installation test and shall be
documented on a Pre-Tested Pipe form (N-2743). The form is to be kept with the as-built job construction documents. The following definitions shall apply:
Short Section of Pipe - A single piece of pipe containing no girth welds (steel) or fusion joints (PE). Fabricated Unit - An assembly of two or more fittings and/or pieces of pipe joined together.
(For pre-installation tests on short sections and fabricated units for pipelines to operate at a hoop stress of 30 percent or greater the minimum test duration shall be 4 hours).
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
3 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

For pre-tested steel pipe and fabricated units, as long as the material has been stored and managed as described in Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation –Steel, and there is no evidence of corrosion or damage to the materials following a successful pressure test, there is no limit to the life of the pressure test and the materials may be considered of reasonable integrity for use. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe, “Pre-tested Steel Pipe” for recordkeeping requirements for pre-tested steel pipe.
If a component other than pipe is the only item being replaced or added to a pipeline, a strength test after installation is not required if the manufacturer of the component certifies that any of the following are true (however a soap test of the tie in weld/connection shall be performed at no less than the operating pressure of the system):
a. The component was tested by the manufacturer to at least the maximum allowable operating pressure of the pipeline to which it is being added; b. The component is manufactured under a quality control system that ensures each item manufactured is at least equal in strength to a prototype and that the prototype was
tested to at least the maximum allowable operating pressure of the pipeline to which it is being added (carbon steel fittings and components other than pipe that meet ASTM A234
or A860 standards, e.g. steel weld caps or threaded fittings); or c. The component has a pressure rating per an ASME/ANSI classification, MSS
specifications, or by strength calculations described in §192.143.
If a single component is replaced or added with no strength test, the soap test shall be
documented using “SOAP” as the test medium and showing the date and time the test is performed as well as who performed the test. This should be documented on the job card or
yellow pressure test sticker.
6. Full encirclement pressure control type fittings, once welded to large diameter mains, may be leak tested to 100 psig for 20 minutes against a test cap. This may be performed to assure a leak
tight weld prior to tying in the pressure control fitting to the remainder of the piping which shall be tested normally in a separate pressure test as required by this specification. This variance from
normal testing procedures may be invoked by recommendation of Gas Engineering when the carrier pipe to which the fitting is being welded is of a large enough diameter (generally larger
than 8 inches) at a test pressure that might cause deformity of the carrier pipe.
7. Testing of replacement pipe: If a segment of pipeline is repaired by cutting out the damaged portion, the replacement pipe section must be tested to the pressures required for a new line
installation.
8. Testing instrument pipelines: Instrument pipelines made of steel pipe and subjected directly to mainline gas pressures shall be tested in accordance with the applicable test requirements in the
above table. It is not necessary to test tubing, but all fittings and connections should be checked for leaks.
9. Tests to over 50 percent SMYS should be performed with water as the test medium, unless such
a test is impractical. Where a hydrostatic test is impractical, air or inert gas may be used, with the limitations shown in Note 1. Buildings within 300 feet of the test section must be evacuated
during the test if air or inert gas is used as the test medium. 10. Without prior approval from Gas Engineering, testing using water, air, or inert gas is not permitted where the test section is isolated from an operating pipeline only by a closed valve, squeeze off
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
4 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

equipment, or plugging equipment, since leakage may occur creating an undesirable and potentially hazardous situation. 11. Where pipelines are installed on street or highway bridges under permits from governmental agencies, more stringent testing may be required by the agency than would be required by this gas standard.
12. Pipe for which hydrostatic testing is used shall be pigged to remove all water from within the pipe. It may be necessary to utilize additional means of drying the pipe such as pigging with methanol or introduction of a medium such as nitrogen or desiccated air into the pipeline. Contact Gas Engineering for assistance.
13. Care should be taken to address environmental concerns and regulations with respect to the disposal of the test medium. Notification to Washington UTC Prior to Pressure Testing Transmission Pipelines

WAC 480-93-170:
business days prior to the commencement of any pressure test of a gas pipeline that will have an
MAOP in excess of 20 percent SMYS. In an emergency situation where it is necessary to maintain
continuity of service, this requirement may be waived by notifying the commission by telephone prior
to performing the test. The following requirements are in addition to the notification:
1. Pressure tests of any such gas pipeline built in Class 3 or Class 4 locations, or within 100 yards of a building intended for human occupancy, must be at least 8 hours in duration. 2. When the test medium is a gas or compressible fluid, the operator must notify the appropriate public officials so that adequate public protection can be provided for during the test. 3. Pressure test procedures must be on file with the commission or submitted at the time of notification.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
5 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

PRESSURE TESTING REQUIREMENTS – HIGH PRESSURE STEEL PIPELINE SYSTEMS
DESCRIPTION
PIPE SIZES
(in)
TEST PRESSURE (MINIMUM)
IN PSIG
TEST
MEDIUM3
LENGTH OF MAIN
(ft.)
DURATION OF TEST (MINIMUM)
(Hours)
TYPE OF
GAUGE REMARKS
High
Pressure: Gas
Mains, Services 2, Regulator
Stations, Farm
Taps, and
Meter Set
Assemblies
≤ 2
As Specified
by Gas
Engineering
Air, Natural
Gas, Inert
Gas, Water3
0-500 1 Recording Chart
Soap test joints of above grade or exposed pipe and fittings during the test.
> 2 As Specified by Gas
Engineering
Air, Natural Gas, Inert
Gas, Water3
0-500 4 Recording Chart
All
As Specified
by Gas
Engineering
Air, Natural
Gas, Inert
Gas, Water3
501-2,000 8 Recording
Chart
All As Specified by Gas
Engineering
Air, Natural Gas, Inert
Gas, Water3
Over 2,000 24 Recording Chart
High Pressure:
Cans &
Barrels
All
As Specified
by Gas
Engineering
Air, Natural
Gas, Inert
Gas, Water3
N/A 1 Recording
Chart
To operate at < 30
percent SMYS
All As Specified by Gas Engineering
Air, Natural Gas, Inert Gas, Water3 N/A 4 Recording Chart To operate at ≥ 30 percent SMYS
Tie-in Joints
(all pressures) All
Current
Operating
Pressure
Soap Test4 N/A N/A N/A
1 For installations not exceeding 20 percent SMYS. Refer to WAC 480-93-170 for installations exceeding 20 percent SMYS.
2 Pressure tests of services includes service pipe and service riser. (Does not include customer meter.)
3 If water is the test medium, then the test must run for at least 24 hours to allow the pipe and water temperatures to
stabilize.
4 When soap testing, the entire joint shall be visually checked to ensure there are no leaks. Use a mirror or other
means if necessary, to inspect the entire joint.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
6 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

PRESSURE TESTING REQUIREMENTS – INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE STEEL PIPELINE SYSTEMS
PIPE PRESSURE (MINIMUM) TEST LENGTH OF MAIN DURATION OF TEST TYPE OF
Intermediate Pressure Gas Mains
All 90 Gas, or Inert

0-10 10 Min Gauge4
It is recommended to soap test joints of above grade or exposed pipe and fittings during the test to check for leaks.

All 90 Gas, or Inert 11-1000 1 Hr. Gauge4
All 90 Gas, or Inert 1001- 10,000 1 Hr. per 1000 Ft.1 Gauge4
All 90 Gas, or Inert Over 10,000 24 Hrs. Recording Chart
Intermediate Pressure Gas Services2
All 90 Gas, or Inert 0-200 10 Min. Gauge4
All 90 Gas, or 201- 1000 1 Hr. Gauge4
All 90 Gas, or Inert Over 1000 1 Hr. per 1000 Ft.1 Gauge4
Intermediate Pressure: Cans and Barrels
All 90 Air, Natural Gas, or Inert Gas N/A 15 Min. Gauge4
Intermediate Pressure Industrial Meter Set All 90 Air, Natural Gas or Inert Gas N/A 1 Hr. Gauge4
Tie-in Joints
(all pressures) All Current Operating Pressure Soap Test3 N/A N/A N/A
1 Round up to the next full hour
2 Pressure tests of services includes service pipe and service riser. (Does not include customer meter.)
3 When soap testing, the entire joint shall be visually checked to ensure there are no leaks. Use a mirror or other
means if necessary, to inspect the entire joint.
4 If an analog gauge is used, the gauge shall have a range of 0-150 psi with 1 psi divisions (maximum) and an
accuracy of ±0.25 percent of full scale (maximum). If a digital gauge is used, the gauge shall meet or exceed the
resolution and accuracy of the analog gauge specified above.
5 If a pressure test combines both main and service, the total length of main plus the service shall be considered as
main (i.e. 800 ft of main plus 600 ft of service tested together shall be tested as 1,400 feet of main)

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
7 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

Pressure Testing Requirements for PE Following are general guidelines for pressure testing PE pipelines: 1. Maximum test capabilities of fittings such as valves and elbows must be determined before testing.
2. The minimum test pressure shall not be less than 90 psig. 3. The maximum test pressure for medium density polyethylene pipe shall not exceed 125 psig. Testing in excess of 120 psig should not exceed a duration of 48 hours. Contact Gas Engineering if your test will approach these criteria.
4. Pre-installation Tests: For short sections of pipe for which a post installation test is impractical, a pre-installation test may be substituted. The pre-installation test must comply with the pressure requirements for a post installation test and shall be documented on a Pre-Tested Pipe form (N-2743) and the form kept with the as-built job construction documents. The following definition shall apply:
A Short Section of Pipe is defined as a single piece of pipe containing no girth welds (steel) or fusion joints (PE). If a component other than pipe is the only item being replaced or added to a pipeline, a strength test after installation is not required if the manufacturer of the component certifies that any of the
following are true (however a soap test of the tie in connection shall be performed at no less than the operating pressure of the system): a. The component was tested by the manufacturer to at least the maximum allowable operating pressure of the pipeline to which it is being added; b. The component is manufactured under a quality control system that ensures each item
manufactured is at least equal in strength to a prototype and that the prototype was tested to at least the maximum allowable operating pressure of the pipeline to which it is being added (PE fittings that meet ASTM D3261 standards, e.g. end caps); or c. The component has a pressure rating per an ASME/ANSI classification, MSS
specifications, or by strength calculations described in §192.143.
If a single component is replaced or added with no strength test, the soap test shall be
documented using “SOAP” as the test medium and showing the date and time the test is performed as well as who performed the test. This should be documented on the job card or yellow pressure test sticker.
5. Where feasible, plastic pipe must be installed and backfilled prior to pressure testing to expose any potential damage that could have occurred during the installation process. During the testing the pipe shall not be exposed to temperatures above 140 degrees F per the requirements of §192.121 and §192.513.
For pre-tested plastic pipe, as long as the pipe and fitting materials have not reached or exceeded their
useful life per Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic, and the pre-tested materials show no evidence of damage following a successful pressure test then there is no limit to the life of the pressure test and the materials may be considered of reasonable integrity for use (refer to Specification 3.33, Permanent Repair Sleeves, “Pre-tested PE Pipe” for recordkeeping requirements for pre-tested PE pipe).

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
8 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

PRESSURE TESTING REQUIREMENTS - PLASTIC PIPELINE SYSTEMS
PIPE PIPELINE PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE TEST LENGTH OF MAIN DURATION OF TEST TYPE OF
Intermediate Pressure Gas Mains
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert 0-10 10 Min. Gauge4
It is recommended to soap test joints of above grade or exposed pipe and fittings during the test to check for leaks.
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert 11-1000 1 Hr. Gauge4
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert 1001-10,000 1 Hr. per 1000 Ft.1 Gauge4
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert Over 10,000 24 Hrs. Recording Chart
Intermediate Pressure Gas Services2
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert 0-200 10 Min. Gauge4
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert 201-1000 1 Hr. Gauge4
All Up to 60 90 Gas or Inert Over 1000 1 Hr. per 1000 Ft.1 Gauge4
Tie-in Joints All All Operating Soap Test3 N/A N/A N/A
1 Round up to the next full hour
2 Pressure testing of services includes service pipe and service riser. (Does not include customer meter.)
3 When soap testing, the entire joint shall be visually checked to ensure there are no leaks. Use a mirror or other means if necessary, to inspect the entire joint
4 If an analog gauge is used, the gauge shall have a range of 0-150 psi with 1 psi divisions (maximum) and an accuracy of ±0.25 percent of full scale (maximum). If a digital gauge is used, the gauge shall meet or exceed the resolution and accuracy of the analog gauge specified above. 5 If a pressure test combines both main and service, the total length of main plus the service shall be considered as
main (i.e. 800 ft of main plus 600 ft of service tested together shall be tested as 1,400 feet of main)
Reinstating Service Lines A service line that has been broken, pulled, or damaged resulting in the interruption of gas supply to the customer shall be pressure tested from the break back to the meter location for the same duration and to the pressures required for a new service. If damage is not the cause for service disconnection, then any part of the original service line that is disconnected (meaning any part of the service that was physically separated or detached from the system) must be tested in the same manner as a new service line from the point of disconnect to the meter valve with the exception of, any part of the original service line used to maintain pressure and continuous service to the customer need not be tested.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
9 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

Recordkeeping Pressure test information and/or charts must be completed and retained for the life of the facility. If only a spring gauge is required for a pressure test, consideration should be given to avoid complicating the project records by completing a pressure test chart as well.
Where multiple pressure tests are performed on a single installation, there shall be a record for each test. An example of this would be any continuous on-going job or installation such as a new plat or long main
installed where more than one pressure test was conducted during construction. Record the following information on the appropriate pressure test form, sticker, chart or electronic service order / work order as applicable. (Note: The recording of the following data is required for both initial pressure tests of newly installed pipe and pressure tests for retested existing pipe after a damage / repair.)
• Operator’s name
• Employee’s name performing the test
• Test medium used
• Test pressure
• Test duration
• Date of test
• Time of day (use military time)
• Chart Box Setting (as applicable)
• Pipe diameter and footage for each diameter of pipe on a single test.
• Failed test information - If a pressure test fails, fill out the initial pressure information and mark the “test failed” box, then make repairs, re-pressure test and record the information on a new
Pressure Test Information sticker (Form N-2490).
• Elevation variations, whenever significant (typically applicable for hydro testing) Care must be utilized to ensure that the time period of the test agrees with the type of test chart being used. Refer to Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe, “Pre-Tested PE Pipe” for further information of recordkeeping requirements for pre-tested piping.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
10 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

Below is an example of the Pressure Test Information sticker (Form N-2490) that should be filled out. These stickers can also be used on a pressure chart by placing sticker on back of chart (Ensure “Time of Day” is recorded in military time). Only individuals who are Operator Qualified on Task 221.120.075, Pressure Testing Gas Pipelines, shall sign off on pressure testing charts and/or test stickers.
Furthermore, only the person actually performing the pressure test shall sign off on the applicable documentation.
PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURES:
1. Isolate the test segment by sealing any open ends such as with a fused cap, welded cap, or a
blind flange, etc.
2. Connect the pressure testing equipment and assemblies to the line.
3. Pressurize the line to the test pressure minimum per the requirements of this specification. Test pressure should be slightly higher than the specified minimum to assure that the temperature
changes during the test do not cause the test pressure to fall below the minimum allowed to establish the required design MAOP. If the line to be pressure tested is at a high-pressure
facility, the test must be held at approximately 100 psig and a leak test performed of above ground pipe joints, and fittings prior to pressurizing the line to the ultimate test pressure.
4. Maintain the test for the duration as specified in the charts per this specification. For long segments of pipe, maintain the test long enough to be certain that the temperature of the test medium has stabilized.
5. It is recommended to soap test joints of above grade or exposed pipe and fittings during the test
to check for leaks. 6. Compare the readings before and after the test. If there is no pressure drop during the test, the pipe has passed the pressure test.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 18
11 OF 11 SPEC. 3.18

7. If the pressure cannot be maintained, there is a leak that needs to be located and repaired. If a test fails, record the information from the test on the form, sticker, or chart and note that it has failed. Fluctuations in ambient temperature during the test may cause the pressure to either increase or decrease during the test. If a pressure fluctuation occurs and if it is suspected to be contributed to an ambient temperature change, consult Gas Engineering for further guidance before concluding the test. Ensure Gas Engineering documentation of the influence of
temperature on a pressure test is stored with the job file. 8. Make repairs and then repeat the pressure test and record the new pressure test information on another pressure test form, sticker, or chart. 9. When the pressure test shows no sign of leakage, purge the line per company procedures,
Specification 3.17, Purging of Pipelines, and tie in the pipe. 10. Record the test data as outlined in the Recordkeeping section of this specification on the appropriate pressure test form, sticker, or chart.

PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
1 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

3.19 TRENCHLESS PIPE INSTALLATION METHODS
SCOPE: To provide a procedure that covers trenchless pipe installation methods such as Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD), Pipe Splitting and Pneumatic Missiling/Piercing. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.303 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfill Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing GENERAL:
Tracking and Potholing when Crossing Utilities In order to help prevent a cross bore from occurring, existing underground utilities that cross a trenchless installation path (regardless of the angle of the crossing) must be verified using depth measurement, as-built records (i.e. sewer), potholing and/or exposing to protect the existing facilities prior to installation. Tracking the location and depth of the bore head should be utilized for directional boring installations. Reasonable means of tracking the location (and depth when possible) of the pneumatic missile are recommended for missile installations (for example using a metal detector, pipe locator, or feeling ground surface vibration). Approved methods for verifying the location and depth of existing utilities within road right-of-way, public or private utility easement include: 1. Natural gas, petroleum, power, phone, cable TV and fiber optic lines believed to be within 24” of the full diameter of the proposed bore or ream hole (whichever is greater) shall be potholed to verify their exact location before crossing and these types of existing utilities shall be exposed within the proposed bore path. An additional 24” on the underside of the utility shall be exposed in the pothole if the proposed bore path is beneath the existing utility. This should allow adequate clearances to be visually verified. If these existing utilities are deeper than 24” below the full diameter of the proposed bore or ream hole (whichever is greater) then exposure of the utility may not be required as long as the pothole extends a minimum of 24” below the proposed bore or ream hole within the bore path and reasonable effort is made to verify the accuracy of the locate during potholing. 2. Existing gravity fed sanitary/storm sewer, pressurized sewer and water utilities that have structures (manholes, catch basins, inlets/outlets, valve boxes, clean-outs, etc.) that can be measured and verified to be more than 24” above or below the full diameter of the proposed bore or ream hole may not need to be potholed. If these existing utilities cannot be verified for depth in the area that the bored crossing will take place then the existing utility shall be potholed per item.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
2 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

3. Use additional information on sewer maps and as-built records, if available, in combination with items 1 and 2 above. 4. If incomplete information persists, either an alternative bore path must be chosen or the facilities installed via open trench.
Approved methods for verifying the location and depth of existing customer owned utilities within private property include: 1. Use a fish tape to locate any unconfirmed drain pipe or conduit. 2. Use sewer as-built/card records for information on depth and location, if available. It is
recommended to also look for visual indicators such as a cleanout, locate marks, pipes inside the structure, etc. to support the information on the card. 3. Use technologies such as GPR (Ground Penetrating Radar) or in pipe camera technology to
assist with the location and depth of utilities in question.
4. If incomplete information persists, an alternative bore path must be chosen or the facilities installed via open trench. Pipe camera technology may be used after installation to verify that the utility has not been damaged. If at
any point it is suspected that a sewer cross-bore situation has occurred then a camera inspection of that facility shall be completed within the area of concern.
Longitudinal Separation
To account for locate inaccuracy and a wandering drill head, cutting tool or missile, gas pipeline, including
services, should be installed with a 4-foot minimum longitudinal separation from other underground utilities. When using trenchless installation methods close to other utilities, consideration should be made
to pothole them at regular intervals to verify location and separation. Gravity sewer lines, drain fields, steam, and hot water lines require further separation. Refer to Specification 3.15, Trenching and Backfill,
“Clearances – Steel and PE Pipelines” for details regarding separation from these utilities.
Depth of Cover
Minimum depth of cover for trenchless pipe installations shall be consistent with Avista standards as outlined in Specification 3.15, Trenching and Backfill, except at waterways. With respect for future
accessibility and maintenance of pipe facilities, it is recommended that a maximum depth of cover of 8-feet be established most specifically during HDD operations unless conflicts or conditions exist that
require pipe be installed at greater depth (i.e., water crossings, utility conflicts, or geographical features). When crossing waterways the depth of cover will be dependent upon a number of factors including the
length of the bore, geological features, size of crossing, obstructions, etc. Consult Gas Engineering for guidance regarding appropriate depths of cover. To reduce the potential for hydro-fracture extreme care
should be exercised when boring at depths less than 20-foot of cover.
Future Locatability Pipe installed by any form of trenchless technology must be locatable. PE main shall a tracer wire installed in conjunction with the installation as detailed in Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic
(Polyethylene) Mains. Steel main shall have a locate wire bonded to the main near the entry or exit
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
3 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

location or have other means of attaching locating equipment to identify the pipe. Refer to Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains for additional information. In situations where traditional locating methods will not be capable of locating the main, due to extreme pipe depths, marker balls should be located over the pipe installation path. The marker balls should be placed, when possible, at approximately 10-foot spacing and at a depth of approximately 24 inches. The marker balls will be used as a reference, in addition to traditional locating methods, to identify the pipe location. Marker balls should
be mapped in GIS to indicate where they have been installed for locating assistance.
Steel – Minimum Radius of Curvature The following formula is used to determine the minimum radius of curvature (in feet) for steel pipe:
Minimum radius of curvature (feet) = Nominal pipe diameter (inches) x 100 Example: Minimum radius of curvature for 6 inch steel pipe = 6 x 100 = 600 feet
PE – Minimum Radius of Curvature
For plastic pipe, the minimum radius of curvature during trenchless installation is summarized in the table titled Minimum Permanent Bending Radius in Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation, Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains.
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING:
General Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) may be suitable for areas in which it is beneficial the avoid excavation at the ground surface.
Permits Proper permits shall be in place as required by state and local jurisdictions before beginning any HDD project. Pilot Hole Alignment
The pilot hole alignment shall be established with the desired entry and exit points, desired depth of cover, and consideration to the final pipe curvature during the design phase.
HDD Bore Path HDD bore site and path selection shall consider several factors including but not limited to the identification of underground obstacles, soil conditions, and suitable bore path alignment. Enough area must be available at the site to allow for the layout of drilling equipment and materials, as well as enough room to allow for proper containment of drilling mud and water. For creek, river, and environmentally
sensitive areas, special considerations must be made to prevent hydrofracture and a mitigation plan must be in place to prevent and/or contain any lost fluids. Refer to “Discharge Mitigation Plan” in this specification for additional information regarding what to do in the event of a spill or hydrofracture.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
4 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

Reaming For pipe less than 4-inch in diameter, reaming is usually not necessary if soil conditions are good and the pilot hole has not collapsed. For pipe 4-inch in diameter and larger, once the pilot hole is established it should be enlarged with a reamer. Reaming should be accomplished using push- or pull-reaming passes and large quantities of drilling mud to flush tailings from the hole.
The drill operator is responsible to determine and implement a final reamed hole diameter and other applicable actions that will ensure a successful bore and a pullback of the pipe that results in minimizing damage to the pipe and pipe coating. As a rule of thumb, the size of the final reamed hole should be a minimum of 1.5 times the pipe diameter; however, the size of the reamed hole should not create settlement or cave-in issues. If the bore path is made up of boulders, gravel, and/or cobble, additional
swabbing passes and/or a larger final ream pass may be required to prevent damage to the carrier pipe and its coating as applicable. Pullback
The pipe should be pulled through the bore hole using a pulling head with a swivel joint installed between
the pipe and drill stem. The pulling head is typically shaped like a bullet and is one or two pipe diameters larger than the pipe being pulled-in. The leading end of the carrier pipe being pulled through the bore hole shall be closed prior to starting pullback to prevent any debris from entering the carrier pipe during installation. The pipe should be supported on rollers or booms at the aboveground work site as it is
pulled through the bore hole to prevent buckling or damage caused from dragging along the ground. When possible, it is desirable to fully assemble the product pipe and complete the pullback without
stopping to minimize the risk that the pipe will become stuck in the bore hole or that the bore hole will collapse. If there is a delay between the establishment of the reamed pilot hole and the pullback step,
swab passes may be required to re-establish the bore hole.
During the pulling operation, both the pulling end and trailing end of the gas pipe should be monitored for continuous and smooth movement. Also, the leading end should be pulled past the termination point,
approximately 3 percent of total length being pulled and observed to assure that excessive damage has not occurred to the pipe and to allow for any potential contraction or recovery of the pipe.
When pulling in plastic (polyethylene) pipe, constant monitoring of pullback forces should be performed
using a calibrated pressure gauge if available on the pullback equipment. The use of a break-away device or a “weak link” is required. Refer to Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic, for pullback
force limitations and use of a break away device or “weak link” and pipe recovery.
HDD Discharge Mitigation Plan
The drilling operator shall monitor the drilling operation for any uncontrolled discharge of drilling products. When a risk exists for an undesirable discharge of drilling fluids to the environment the operator shall
follow an established discharge mitigation plan that includes at a minimum the following preventative and mitigative measures:
1. Implementation of appropriate silt screening or barriers to prevent release of drilling fluids.
2. Work above the high water mark. 3. Monitor waterways during the drilling operation for any signs of hydrofracture. 4. In the event of an uncontrolled discharge stop the drilling operation. 5. Suspend pumping drilling mud into the bore hole.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
5 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

6. In the event of a hydrofracture, minimize the hydraulic pressure in the bore hole by removing accessible drilling fluids. 7. Clean up (where possible) the discharged fluid. 8. Immediately notify the Avista Cultural/Environmental Permits Coordinator, at 509-495-2559. 9. Do not resume drilling without the approval of the permit coordinator and the project manager. PIPE SPLITTING:
General The trenchless pipe splitting method is suitable for the trenchless replacement of existing steel and PE gas pipelines with existing diameters ranging from 1/2-inch to 8-inches. The newly inserted pipe must be
the same nominal size or smaller than the existing host pipe. The splitting of an existing steel or PE pipeline is to be accomplished with a dedicated cutter assembly and expanding head. An expanding head coupled behind the cutter assembly further opens the split pipe and compresses any displaced ground material into the surrounding ground. The expanding head incorporates a new pipe attachment coupling or device that enables the new replacement pipe to be
secured and towed behind the expanding head. The cutter assembly is pulled by a small diameter rigid steel rod or cable controlled by an approved pulling device. Determining Factors
When determining whether an existing gas line (host pipe) should be considered for replacement by this
method, the following shall be taken into account:
• Pipe size
• Pipe Material
• Pipe repair clamps on existing line
• Bends in the line
• Length of line to be replaced
• Burial depth
• Surrounding ground material
• Suitable insertion and pull pit locations
• Existing utility locations
• Any other condition that may prevent successful pipe replacement by this method Equipment Requirements – Steel or PE The equipment suitable for performing the pipe splitting process depends upon the application. For steel or PE pipe splitting it is acceptable to use a hydraulically operated rod pulling machine complete with engine or electrically driven hydraulic power supply unit such as a Hammerhead HydroBurst HB3038 or HB5058 static rod pulling system coupled to dedicated Pipe Splitter or equivalent. A directional boring machine may also be utilized for this process. Each individual rigid steel pull rod section shall have its outside diameter small enough to be inserted in to the host pipe to be replaced. The pull rod shall have adequate flexibility to negotiate gradual bends in existing host pipe during push out and pull back operation. The pipe splitter assembly shall consist of a robust steel body housing the appropriate steel roller cutter disks or fins and rear expander head with new pipe attachment device.
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
6 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

Equipment Requirements - PE For PE pipe, the equipment suitable for performing the splitting process must be of sufficient size and type for the work being performed. It is acceptable to use the following mechanical devices:
• Backhoe, excavating equipment
• Hydraulically operated bore equipment
• Mechanical cable puller
A pipe splitter assembly shall consist of either a robust steel body housing the appropriate steel roller cutter disks or fins and rear expander head or a robust steel body larger than the diameter of the pipe
with fin/knife like barbs welded to the expanding body. Both options will incorporate a new pipe attachment device.
Procedure
During the operation, there must be constant communication between the operator of the mechanical
pulling device and the person at the entry pit, either by means of hand signals or two-way communication. Do not enter the receiving pit while the pulling device is in operation.
Refer to “Pullback” in this section for additional information, but a break away device or a “weak link”
(refer to Specification 3.13) shall be used ahead of the new PE pipe being pulled. Install a minimum of two tracer wires with the new pipe.
Before beginning the operation, insert a camera to verify the location of known fittings. Excavate and
expose identified fittings and remove if possible prior to splitting. Cut the services from the main and remove the mechanical fittings if possible. On locations where services will be tied back in to the main, cut
out the existing host pipe in this vicinity to aid the installation of the new service tee. PNEUMATIC MISSILING/PIERCING:
General
The use of pneumatic missiles or piercing tools as a trenchless installation method is suitable for gas main and service pipes with diameters ranging from 1/2-inch up to 2-inches in size if ground conditions support this installation method. Typically, this method is used for PE installations less than 100 feet in length. Determining Factors
When determining whether a new gas line should be installed by this method, the following shall be taken into account:
• New pipe size
• Length of installation
• Burial depth
• Surrounding ground material (Ground fill, layering, compaction, etc.)
• Suitable insertion and pull pit locations
• Existing utility locations
• Any other condition that may prevent successful pipe installation by this method
PIPE INSTALLATION REV. NO. 11
7 OF 7 SPEC. 3.19

Missile Alignment Procedure The missile alignment shall be established with the desired entry and exit points defined and desired depth of cover established prior to installation. Prior to the operation of a pneumatic missile or piercing tool, all required tools and equipment should be inspected to ensure they are safe for use. Inspect the project site to identify any potential hazards or obstructions. Call for locates, pothole and verify existing
utilities per the “Tracking and Potholing” section of this Specification. Excavate the entry and exit pits and determine the length of the bore. It is recommended that the air hose be marked to aid in tracking and monitoring of progress. Use the appropriate alignment tools to line up the missile or piercing tool. Operate the tool per the manufacturer’s instructions. During operation, walk the bore path and track the progress of the pneumatic tool. Once the bore hole is complete pullback or insert the new carrier pipe as necessary. Protect the leading end of the pipe being installed to prevent debris from entering the pipe
during pullback or insertion.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
1 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

3.2 JOINING OF PIPE

3.22 JOINING OF PIPE - STEEL
SCOPE: To establish a uniform method for initial and renewal qualification of welders, weld procedure qualification, and to define acceptable welding practices. Welding performed on the pipeline system shall be in compliance with the Code of Federal Regulation, Title 49, Part 192. Welding performed in the state of Washington shall comply with WAC 480-93-080. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.221, §192.225, §192.227, §192.229, §192.231, §192.235, §192.241, §192.243, §192.245 WAC 480-93-080 OTHER REFERENCES: API 1104 – Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities API 1104 Appendix B – In Service Welding ASME/ANSI B31.8 – Gas Transportation and Distribution Piping Systems CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Spec. 3.32, Repair of Damaged Pipelines – Repair of Steel Pipe WELDER QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:
General Pipeline welding shall be performed by welders or welding operators tested and qualified by Avista and qualified to API 1104*. Employees qualified to complete production welds shall be qualified to this standard and applicable sections of API 1104. Welders qualified to complete in-service welds shall be qualified to API 1104 and may also be qualified to applicable sections of API 1104 – Appendix B. Individuals qualified to this standard also satisfy the skills required for Visual Inspection of the Weld (221.130.005). Welds that will not be exposed to the test pressure or that will not be a part of the gas carrying system need not be completed by a qualified welder or to a qualified weld procedure. Welding processes commonly used in pipeline welding procedures include shielded metal arc (SMAW) and gas metal arc (GMAW). (*) Denotes the edition of API-1104 currently adopted under CFR 49, Part 192, 192.7(b)(9).
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
2 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Qualification of Welders No welder may weld with a particular welding process unless within the preceding 6 calendar months the welder has engaged in welding with a particular process and has had one weld tested and found acceptable. Welders may maintain an ongoing qualification status by performing full circumferential welds, tested and found acceptable under the above acceptance criteria at least twice each calendar
year, but at intervals not exceeding 7-1/2 months. If the initial welder qualification occurs after June 30th, the welder does not need to requalify the same calendar year. Initial qualification welds shall be evaluated by destructive testing. Re-qualification welds may be determined acceptable by non-destructive (radiographic) or destructive testing. If non-destructive testing is used to re-qualify a welder, the technician evaluating the weld must include the name of the welder being re-qualified on the non-destructive testing evaluation form. Welders who fail to re-qualify within the 7-1/2 month interval shall
complete the initial qualification requirements when qualifying to weld. Welders shall be initially qualified per Section 6.3, “Multiple Qualification” of API 1104 and by welding process (GMAW and/or SMAW). If a welder desires to weld with multiple processes a successful initial
qualification or re-qualification test shall be completed with all desired processes. One of the following qualification tests shall be completed as appropriate for the welder’s area of service and qualifications.
Welders shall be qualified by the following variables: 1) Process (GMAW and/or SMAW)
2) Direction of welding (Vertical Uphill and/or Vertical Downhill) 3) Diameter ( 6.625-inches or 12.75 inches for All Diameters)
4) When welding with the SMAW process a change of filler metal classification from Group 1 or 2 to Group 3 or from Group 3 to Group 1 or 2.
A welder shall only weld within the parameters of their qualifications. Re-qualification is required if any of
the above essential variables is changed. Recommended Initial Qualification Test – Production and In-service <60 psig Process: GMAW or SMAW Qualification Procedure: E6010* or ER-70-S* and as determined by material yield strength and process. *Note: The qualification will only qualify the welder to weld downhill. Qualification Material: 6.625 inch or 12.750 inch Diameter with a wall thickness ≥ 0.250 inches. Yield Strength: ASTM A53, Grade B thru API 5L Grade X52 Weld Test 1: Butt Weld, Horizontal Fixed Position Weld Test 2: Layout, Cut, Fit, and Weld a full-sized branch on pipe connection. A full-size hole shall be cut into the run. Weld shall be completed in the horizontal fixed position with the branch down. Acceptance Criteria: Butt- A) Visual per API 1104, Section 6.4 B) Destructive testing per API 1104, Section 6.5 Branch - A) Weld shall exhibit a neat, uniform workman like appearance. B) Weld shall exhibit complete penetration around entire circumference. C) Complete root beads shall not contain any burn through of more than ¼ inch. The sum of the maximum dimensions of separate unrepaired burn-through in any continuous 12 inch length of weld shall not exceed 1/2 inch. D) Destructive testing per API 1104, Section 6.3.1 (4 Nick Breaks).
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
3 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Welder Qualifications: A welder who has successfully completed both of the qualification welds shall be qualified to complete welds on all non-pressurized piping and weld on in-service piping with a Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) less than or equal to 60 psig with the Process qualified (SMAW or GMAW) in all positions, wall thicknesses, joint designs, fittings, and diameters ≤ 6.625 inches or all diameters if test completed on 12.750 inch material.
Recommended Initial Qualification Test – In-Service Welding >60 psig Process: GMAW or SMAW Qualification Procedure: E7018* or ER70-S as appropriate and as determined by material yield strength and process.
*Note: This qualification will qualify the welder to weld uphill for E7018. Qualification Material: 12.750 inch Diameter with a wall thickness ≥ 0.250 inches. Yield Strength: ASTM A53, Grade B through API 5L Grade X52 Weld Test 1: Layout, Cut, Fit, and Weld a 12.750 inch diameter sleeve 8 inches long onto a 12.75 inch diameter pipe 1 inch long. Weld shall be completed at an angle 45 degrees from the Horizontal (6G Position). Welder Qualifications: A welder who has successfully completed the qualification weld and subsequent destructive testing as outlined in API 1104, shall be qualified to weld with the Process Qualified (SMAW or GMAW), on all pressurized systems, in all positions, all diameters, all wall thicknesses, all material grades, and all branch connection sizes.
Recommended Re-Qualification Test – Production and In-Service Process: GMAW or SMAW Qualification Procedure: E6010, E7018, or ER-70-S and as determined by material yield strength and process. Qualification Material: 6.625 inch or 12.750 inch Diameter with a wall thickness ≥ 0.250 inches. Yield Strength: ASTM A53, Grade B through API 5L Grade X52 Weld Test 1: Butt Weld, Horizontal Fixed Position Welder Qualifications: A welder who has successfully completed the re-qualification weld shall be qualified to weld within the variables of their original qualification.
Weld Testing
Pressure Controlmen of Avista are the only personnel authorized to administer weld testing. The person administering the weld test shall also be the inspector. Each weld test shall be completed using an approved welding procedure. The individual administering the weld test shall document all appropriate information on the Welder Qualification Test Report (Form N-2562), including results of the destructive
test as outlined in API 1104. Records of welder qualification shall be retained for at least 6 years from the date of qualification. Retesting after Failure A welder who has failed to pass the qualification test may be allowed to retest after completing further
practice and/or training.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
4 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Welder Certification Card Welders passing the qualification test and destructive testing shall be issued a company Welder Certification card by the evaluator performing the weld evaluation test. This certification card should indicate the name of the qualified individual, date of qualification, expiration date, process qualified (SMAW or GMAW), Qualification Parameters (In-service ≤ 60 psig and Production or High Pressure),
Qualified Diameter (≤ 6.625-inches or All Diameters), approved weld direction, approved filler metal groupings when appropriate, and the name of the evaluator. The qualified individual must have the card available for inspection when performing welding in the field. Welder Certification cards shall be valid for 6 months. WELD CERTIFICATION CARD
Front of Card:

Back of Card:

Note: Welder is qualified to the variables listed above. The welder may complete a weld using any
qualified Avista weld procedure within the parameters of the employees’ qualifications.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
5 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

WELD PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:
General Detailed weld procedures shall be developed and qualified in accordance with API 1104, Section 5 and copies of these procedures shall be on site where welding is being performed. Procedures shall be
retained and followed when completing welds.
Weld Procedure Qualification Details of each qualified procedure shall be recorded on a Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). The qualification record shall include the details as outlined in Section 5.3, API 1104. The PQR shall be
maintained as long as the procedure is in use. The quality of the welds used to qualify the procedures shall be determined by destructive testing as detailed in API 1104, Section 5.6 for Butt Welds and Section 5.8 for Fillet Welds.
A procedure must be re-established as a new procedure specification and must be re-qualified when any
of the essential variables listed in API 1104 Section 5.4.2 are changed as listed below:
• Welding Process – Change in weld process
• Base Material Yield Strength Grouping – Change in base metal grouping
• Joint Design – Major change in joint design
• Position – A change from roll to fixed, or vice versa
• Wall Thickness Grouping – A change from one wall thick group to another
• Filler Metal – Change in filler metal group
• Electrical Characteristics – Change from DC electrode positive to DC electrode negative or vice versa. A change in current from DC to AC or vice versa
• Time between Passes – An increase in the maximum time between passes
• Direction of Welding – Change from uphill to downhill
• Shielding Gas Flow Rate – Change in shielding gas
• Shielding Flux – A change in shielding flux that changes the AWS classification number
• Speed of Travel – Change in speed range
• Preheat – Decrease in specified minimum preheat temperature Procedure changes other than those listed above are allowed when specifically authorized by the company, as provided for in Section 5.4 of API 1104. Authorized changes shall be noted on a revised procedure specification. Weld Procedure Groupings Production weld procedures shall be grouped as specified in API 1104 and as follows: 1) Process – (SMAW, GMAW) 2) Base Material – (Yield Strength ≤ 42,000 psi, Yield Strength >42,000 psi and < 65,000 psi, Yield Strength > 65,000 psi requires a separate procedure for each pipe grade) 3) Diameter – (Dia. < 2.375 inches, Dia. 2.375 inches through 12.750 inches, Dia. >12.75 inches) 4) Wall Thickness – (w.t. < 0.188 inches, w.t. 0.188 inches through 0.750 inches, w.t. > 0.750 inches) 5) Weld Position – Fixed or Rolled
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
6 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

In-service welding procedures will be grouped as follows: 1) Process – (SMAW, GMAW) 2) Base Material – (Yield Strength ≤ 42,000 psi, Yield Strength >42,000 psi and < 65,000 psi, Yield Strength > 65,000 psi requires a separate procedure for each pipe grade)
3) Diameter – (Dia. < 2.375 inches, Dia. 2.375 inches through 12.750 inches, Dia. >12.750 inches) 4) Wall Thickness – (w.t. < 0.188 inches, w.t. 0.188 inches through 0.750 inches, w.t. > 0.750 inches) When qualifying a weld procedure, the procedure qualification material shall be of the highest yield strength material in the category. When material of lower yield strength is selected the procedure shall
only be qualified to the maximum yield strength tested. WELDING CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:
Weld Type/Procedure Selection
Prior to the welding of pipe or fittings, the welder must first select the proper welding procedure. When welding pipe or fittings of two different yield strengths the procedure for the material of the highest yield strength shall apply. If welding on intermediate pressure pipe and the grade is unknown, select the welding procedure for material grade X46 ≤ X52. If welding on high pressure pipe and the grade is unknown, contact Gas Engineering for assistance determining the correct welding procedure.
Weld procedures shall be located on-site where welding is being performed. Piping, fittings, and appurtenances to be arc welded shall be welded using one of the following arc welding processes:

• Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW)
• Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) This standard covers the SMAW process using cellulose electrodes (E6010) for production welding or in-service welding on systems with an operating pressure of 60 psig or less and GMAW or SMAW using a cellulose electrode (E6010) for the root pass followed by a low-hydrogen (E7018) electrode for the filler and cap pass for production welding or in-service welding on systems operating at any pressure or stress level. Welding on pipe greater than 12 inch diameter (nominal) should be welded simultaneously by a minimum of 2 welders on opposite sides of the pipe (often referred to as brother-in-law welding). If this is not possible, the single welder shall weld one quadrant (1/4 of circumference) at a time, moving to the opposite quadrant after each pass, and welding the opposite quadrant to offset expansion/contraction stresses due to welding. Weld Preparation Tools and equipment used for welding shall be of a capacity suited to the work to be performed. The welding operation must be protected (shielded) from weather conditions (rain, snow, ice, or high winds) that would impair the quality of the completed weld.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
7 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Prior to the welding, the weld groove and the adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned and kept free of all dirt, paint, rust, scale, moisture, oil, grease, or other foreign material harmful to welding. Cleaning should be performed by filing, hand or power wire brushing or grinding, and/or using approved solvents. Before sections of pipe and fittings are assembled for welding, all rust, scale, slag, dirt, liquids, or other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside surface of the pipe by swabbing with clean rags or by
other acceptable methods. Responsible person(s) on the job shall ensure compliance with this requirement. Non-Destructive Pre-Inspection Prior to welding or cadwelding on a pipeline, a visual inspection of the carrier pipe shall be completed.
Visual inspection shall ensure the surface is free of manufacturing defects, corrosion, dents, scrapes, gouges, or other anomalies that may be detrimental to the pipeline. When welding appendages, stopper fittings, service tees, cadwelding, etc. to high pressure in-service (>
60 psig) piping, the area of the carrier pipe to be welded should be inspected to verify wall thickness and verify for the absence of laminations using ultrasonic test equipment prior to welding. If inspection of the
carrier pipe is required in the area of the long seam weld protrusion, the cap of the weld may be removed to a smooth contour with the adjacent pipe using a powered sanding disk. On pipe with suspected or known long seam anomalies, the long seam weld should be inspected using
an X-Ray, shear-wave ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection prior to welding to verify the integrity of the carrier pipe and the absence of subsurface cracks, discontinuities, or inclusions.
Pipe End Alignment
ASME B31.8, Appendix I shall govern the end preparations for butt welding regarding internal and
external offset. Pipe and/or fittings joined by welding shall be aligned to minimize any offset (high-low) of pipe wall surfaces around the circumference of the pipe. For pipe designed at less than 20 percent
SMYS and the nominal wall thickness of the adjoining ends does not vary more than 1/8-inch, no special treatment is necessary provided adequate penetration and bond is accomplished in welding.
If the internal offset exceeds 1/8-inches for pipe designed at < 20 percent SMYS or 3/32-inches for ≥ 20
percent SMYS, a piece of transition pipe with a wall thickness between the two shall be used or the use of a back bevel (14 degrees minimum and 30 degrees maximum) made on the inside end of the thicker
section. External offset shall be limited to the out-of-roundness and pipe and fitting end diameter tolerances given in the material specifications. The illustration below shows the use of a back bevel.

If the pipe or fitting ends are defective or damaged (scratches, gouges, dents, etc.), the ends shall be re-beveled.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
8 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

The joint design and fit up shall be governed by the appropriate weld procedure. The Root-opening gap for SMAW and GMAW welds shall preferably be 1/16 of an inch, not to exceed 3/32 of an inch. The joint design for Fillet welds shall ensure a full penetration weld. Hammers used for aligning pipe and fittings must be bronze or brass faced. Care should be exercised to avoid denting, gouging, or scratching the pipe and/or fittings.
When aligning abutting lengths of pipe for welding, the longitudinal seams shall be staggered (no closer than 3 inches). The pipe or component must be aligned to provide the most favorable condition for depositing the root bead and the alignment must be maintained while the root bead is being deposited. A lineup clamp
should be used for butt welds on pipe in the field with a nominal diameter of 2-inches or larger. If a lineup clamp is used it shall be left in place until the root bead is at least 50 percent completed and equally deposited around the weld groove. No stress (pipe movement) shall be placed on the weld until the weld is complete.
Miter Joints
Miter joints are not allowed. Inflections are to be completed using an appropriate pipe bending machine or fittings. Refer to Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Mains for details related to mitering weld elbows.
Circumferential Weld Separation
The minimum separation between any two circumferential welds, wherever possible, shall be:
One pipe diameter for welds on pipelines other than station piping, but never less than 3 inches (Note:
Fittings may be welded back to back)
Six inches for station piping or fabricated assemblies 6 inch nominal O.D. and larger. One pipe diameter for piping smaller than 6 inch nominal O.D.
One inch, as measured along the inside arc radius of any welding elbow and transverse segments of
these elbows, 2 inch or more in nominal diameter
Adequate working clearance shall be provided and maintained around the pipe and/or fittings at all points to be welded so that the work can be performed safely.
Branch connection welds including reinforcing member welds, should be located at least 3 inches away
from circumferential welds whenever possible.
Maintaining minimum weld separation assures adequate ductility of the welded assembly and avoids stress concentrations.
Preheating
Preheating pipe prior to completing a weld helps ensure a superior weld by removing moisture and contaminates from the surface of the steel. Preheating pipe ensures a proper temperature can be maintained when completing in-service welds and reduces the potential for cracking.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
9 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Refer to the individual welding procedures for when preheating is required. The preheated area shall be at least 6 inches wide, centered about the weld, and shall extend around the entire circumference of the pipe or fitting. Preheat temperature shall be checked with temperature sensitive crayons, such as "Tempilstick",
pyrometer or infrared gun, at the weld area outside of the weld groove. If welding is interrupted, the weld area shall again be preheated before welding is resumed.
Post Heat Weld Treatment
Avista’s current welding procedures do not require post heat weld treatment.
Over-Cooling
Welding on pipelines experiencing high gas flow rates should be avoided as high gas flow rates may cool welds too quickly and cause weld defects including weld cracking.
Welds shall be allowed to air cool in ambient conditions unless a post heat treatment is specified in the welding procedure. Water, forced air, or other means of expediting cooling shall not be used.
Grounding Devices
Grounding devices shall be positively attached to the pipe in such a manner to prevent arcing between the grounding device and pipe. No welding electrode or grounding device shall be permitted to arc to the
pipe except in the actual bevel being welded. Grounds should not be located on flanges or threaded components such as caps or plugs as this may cause arcing across the threads. Grounds should be
located as near as practical to the weld and should not be placed on the opposite side of a valve.
Butt Welding Technique
Horizontal and vertical fixed position shielded metal-arc welding with cellulose electrodes (AWS Exx10,) or wire electrode (ER70S-2, 6) shall be performed by the "Downhill" method. Welding with low-hydrogen
electrodes (AWS Exx18) shall be performed by the “Uphill” method.
Pipes to be welded shall be aligned and the root opening (gap) shall be aligned as in the weld procedure specification and should suit the preference of the welder responsible for the integrity of the root bead.
During alignment and tacking, the joint is held together by a lineup clamp. Care must be taken during joint alignment and preparation to ensure full penetration and complete fusion during root bead (first pass)
deposit.
Depositing Root Bead and Hot Pass
Strike the arc in the weld groove only. Thoroughly clean the root before applying hot pass (second bead). Disc grinding shall be used to remove bumpy starts and slag, improve bead contour, or remove excessive
"wagon tracks" before applying the hot pass. Wagon tracks are slag-filled crevices on either side of the root bead.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
10 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Applying the hot pass with sufficient heat (amperage) will melt out shallow wagon tracks and float any remaining slag to the surface. Start the hot pass immediately after completion of the root bead as delineated in the Weld Procedure, typically within 5 minutes.
Filler and Cover Passes
A side-to-side weave motion is used when applying the filler passes. Filler metal shall be added to any concave portion of the filler passes, before applying the cover pass. On heavy wall pipe and fittings (greater than standard wall thickness) where the welding groove is wide, more than one bead per layer shall be used for filling in the "downhill" direction.
Strip capping shall be used for making the cover pass when welding in the vertical fixed position. Wash passes are not acceptable when welding in this position. Filler and cover passes made using the weave motion when welding downhill on horizontally fixed pipe
and fittings shall be no wider than four times the electrode diameter. Welds shall be uniform and without undercutting.
Two beads shall not be started at the same location. The face of the completed weld should be approximately 1/8 inch greater than the width of and centered on the original groove. At no point shall the crown surface be below the outside surface of the pipe, nor should it be raised above the parent metal
more than 1/16-inch.
Filler and cover passes made using the weave motion welding uphill on horizontally fixed pipe and fittings shall be no wider than 5/8-inch using 3/32-inch diameter rod and 1-inch using 1/8-inch diameter rod.
On pipe or fittings in the vertical fixed position, each weld layer shall be deposited with multiple passes in
the horizontal plane. Wash passes shall not be permitted. The completed weld shall be thoroughly brushed and cleaned.
Roll Welding
Roll welding is not permitted. Repositioning of the pipe joint is permitted as long as all welding is
performed while the pipe is in a fixed position.
Fillet Welding
In-service circumferential fillet welds on sleeves for high-pressure transmission pipelines with an MAOP of 20 percent SMYS or greater shall be made using low-hydrogen electrodes E7018 or GMAW using
ER70S-2, 6 wire. Fillet welds on sleeves and fittings for high pressure pipelines operating at an MAOP less than 20 percent SMYS may be completed using an E6010 root with E7018 filler and cap however an
all low hydrogen process (GMAW) is preferred. For intermediate pressure distribution pipelines with and MAOP 60 psig or less, AWS A5.1 (E6010) electrodes are acceptable for fillet and longitudinal welds.
Fillet welds shall be essentially flat with full throat and legs of uniform length in accordance with the
welding procedure. Undercutting in the fillet weld where the leg meets the parent metal is prohibited. If undercutting occurs in this area, it shall be ground out and a reinforcing pass applied in the undercut area.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
11 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

The welder shall use caution and experience when welding on pressurized piping. It is prudent to know the wall thickness of the carrier pipe when welding so that Speed of Travel, Voltage, and Amperage can be controlled properly within the parameters of the procedure to produce a satisfactory weld without burn through. Extreme care shall be exercised by an experienced welder when welding large fittings to thin wall pipe to ensure the proper control of heat input to ensure good penetration without burn through.
As recommended per ANSI B31.8, slip flanges should be fillet welded on both the front and the back of
the fitting per the diagrams below.

Socket Welding Socket welds shall be made with a space between the pipe and socket weld fitting within the ranges and dimensions shown in the diagram below. This will help eliminate stresses in the weld metal due to thermal expansion of the pipe during the welding process. If the end of the pipe is cut, the end should be square so the space between the pipe and socket weld fitting is uniform. Refer to the diagram below for an illustration.

Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Requirements Welds on pipelines with an MAOP that results in a pipe stress level of 20 percent or more of SMYS shall be non-destructively tested by any process other than trepanning that will clearly indicate defects that may affect the integrity of the weld. NDT inspection should also be considered for gas pipelines being installed on a bridge with an MAOP of 250 psig or more. The NDT results shall be interpreted by a
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
12 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

person certified to Level II in accordance with recommendations by the American Society for Nondestructive Testing or other recognized organization when practical. The acceptability of a weld that is non-destructively tested or visually inspected shall be in accordance with API 1104 Section 9. The person evaluating the weld must include the name of the welder on the non-destructive testing evaluation form.
When NDT testing is required, the following percentages of each day's field welds selected at random by the Operator must be examined using NDT over their entire circumference (when there is more than one welder, a sample of each welder’s work for each day must be included in the random selection):
• 10 percent (at a minimum) of welds - Class 1 locations
• 15 percent (at a minimum) of welds - Class 2 locations
• 100 percent of welds - Class 3 and 4 locations and at crossings of major or navigable rivers, and within railroad or public highway rights-of-way, including tunnels, bridges, and overhead road
crossings. Exception: Where 100 percent is impractical, at least 90 percent of the welds shall be non-destructively inspected. (Any girth weld not tested must have been impracticable to test)
• 100 percent of welds at pipeline tie-ins, including tie-ins of replacement sections. When NDT testing is required, a record must be retained for the life of the pipeline showing by milepost or by geographic feature, the number of girth welds made, the number non-destructively tested, the number rejected, and the disposition of the rejects. Non-destructive testing of welds shall be completed by a third party contractor. Contractor work shall be completed in accordance with contractor qualified procedures accepted by Avista. Contractor shall maintain qualified procedures in accordance with industry standards and must be available on the job site. Avista shall maintain a copy of current contractor qualified procedures. Welds shall be visually inspected by an individual qualified in visual inspection. A welder may visually inspect their own welds when qualified to do so. Inspection by the welder does not preclude external inspection to ensure conformance and acceptability by the company. Visual Inspection Criteria are listed within this specification for reference. In addition to visual inspection of the weld, the welder or weld inspector shall ensure that the weld is completed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the procedure. Procedure inspection criteria should include the following: 1. Inspect the joint alignment and fit up. 2. Preheat requirements are being met, if required. 3. Use of proper electrodes for the procedure being used. 4. Check the amperage settings with an ammeter and verify the voltage settings to make sure that they fall within the ranges specified for the electrode size and type for the weld procedure being used. 5. Verify the speed of travel is within the parameters of the procedure by timing and recording the actual welding time for each pass needed for the procedure and calculate the speed of travel in inches per minute. 6. Check for potential weld defects as listed within this specification. 7. On completion of weld, check for appearance and cap size.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
13 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Determining Speed of Travel Use the following formulas to determine the speed of travel in inches per minute: Speed of Travel (inches per minute) = Distance (inches) ÷ Total Seconds x 60
Example: Determine the speed of travel if a 5-1/2” long weld was made in 39 seconds. Travel Speed = 5.5 inches ÷ 39 seconds x 60 = 8.46 inches per minute If the welding time was over a minute, use the following formula to convert welding time to seconds:
Total Seconds = Minutes x 60 + Seconds Example: Determine the welding time in seconds if the weld took 2 minutes and 12 seconds to
complete.
Total Seconds = 2 minutes x 60 + 12 = 132 seconds Removal or Repair of Weld Defects or Cracks

With the exception of shallow crater cracks, no weld containing cracks, regardless of size or location shall be acceptable. Welds containing cracks and other unacceptable defects that are detected during or immediately after welding shall be repaired or removed. Cracks to be repaired in butt welds or fillet welds of branch connections or sleeves that are more than 8 percent of the weld length must be cut out and replaced. Cracks to be repaired of any length in longitudinal welds in pipe operating with an MAOP of 20 percent or more of SMYS or 500 psig or greater must be repaired by replacing the pipe segment. Cracks in longitudinal welds in pipe operating with an MAOP below 20 percent of SMYS or 500 psig may be repaired using the patching, sleeving, or canning repair methods given in Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe. If a longitudinal or branch connection weld has a crack that is 8 percent or less of the weld length, the weld may be repaired by grinding, filling or machining the repair cavity to bright clean base metal, and fill welding. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe for other permissible repair methods. Repair of a crack or defect in a previously repaired area can only be repaired by an appropriate sleeve or the section cut out and replaced. Electrode Storage Cellulose electrodes including E6010 shall be stored in protected dry storage areas and shall not be heated. (Store at room temperature 60-80 degrees F). To perform properly, Low-Hydrogen E7018 electrodes must be stored and handled in a manner which will prevent absorption of moisture. Low hydrogen electrodes shall be either stored in their manufacturer’s unopened container or a holding oven or electrode warmer which must be maintained at 250-350 degrees
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
14 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

F. If used immediately, low-hydrogen electrodes may be issued for use directly from freshly opened hermetically sealed containers. Low hydrogen electrodes which have been exposed to high moisture conditions or have been removed from the holding oven or electrode warmer for a length of time exceeding four hours shall be discarded. Electrodes in unopened sealed containers remain dry indefinitely under good storage conditions. The
storage area should be enclosed, clean, dry, and have adequate facilities for safe storage to prevent deterioration. Welders who become qualified to use low-hydrogen electrodes shall be thoroughly instructed in storage and handling requirements.
Visual Inspection WELD DEFECTS / CAUSES / VISUAL CHECK: Inadequate Penetration without high-low is an incomplete filling of the weld root.
Causes – Improper welding technique, insufficient joint space, or improper fit-up.
Visually check - Joint space and fit-up; and conformance to the weld procedure. Inadequate Penetration Due to High/Low is defined as the condition that exists when one edge of the root is exposed (or unbonded).
Cause - Because adjacent pipe or fitting joints are misaligned. Visually check - For proper use and adjustment of clamps. Incomplete Fusion is defined as a surface imperfection between the weld metal and the base material
that is open to the surface. It can be in the root or in the cap. Cause – Improper welding technique.
Visually check - For conformance to welding procedure including amperage and travel speed and joint design.
Incomplete Fusion Due to Cold Lap is defined as an imperfection between two adjacent weld beads or between the weld metal and base metal that is not open to the surface. Cause - Improper welding technique.
Visually check - For conformance to the welding procedure, proper interpass cleaning. Welding angle can contribute to this defect. Internal Concavity is defined a bead that is properly fused to and completely penetrates the pipe wall thickness along both sides of the bevel, but whose center is somewhat above the inside surface of the pipe wall. Cause – Excessively wide joint space and improper welding technique.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 20
15 OF 15 SPEC. 3.22

Visually check - For conformance to the welding procedure including joint space. Burn-Through is defined as a portion of the root bead where excessive penetration has caused the weld puddle of the root or hot pass to be blown into the pipe causing a rounded contour in the middle of the root pass.
Causes – Root pass too thin, excessive or improper grinding of root pass, pipe out of alignment.
Visually check - For conformance to the welding procedure including pipe alignment. Slag Inclusions is defined as a nonmetallic solid entrapped in the weld metal or between the weld metal and the parent metal. Elongated slag inclusions are usually called “wagon tracks”.
Cause – Flux coating particles trapped between weld passes or between the pipe bevel and the weld metal.
Visually check - Proper cleaning between passes, proper amperage for the electrode diameter, and proper voltage.
Porosity is defined as gas trapped by solidifying weld metal before the gas has a chance to rise to the surface of the molten puddle and escape. (A “gas pocket” is a term of porosity that is intended to describe a pore within the body of the weld while a “pinhole” describes porosity on or near the edge of the cap pass).
Visually check - For proper cleaning of pipe bevels and root face. Electrodes that may have absorbed excessive moisture or been frozen can produce porosity. Undercutting is defined as a groove melted into the parent metal to the toe or root of the weld and left unfilled by weld material.
Cause –High amperage and a long arc; incorrect electrode position.
Visually check - For conformance to the welding procedure and proper machine setting for arc force (open circuit voltage).

APPENDIX A - WELD PROCEDURE INDEX
BUTT WELDS - PRODUCTION (NON-PRESSURIZED)
PROCEDURE NUMBER WELDING PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL PIPE/FITTING O.D. DIAMETER RANGE PIPE/FITTING WALL THICKNESS RANGE MATERIAL GRADE2
B1 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” < 0.188” Gr. B
B3 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” < 0.188” Gr. B ≤ X42
B4 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
B5 SMAW E6010 >12.750”0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
B6 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” < 0.188” X46 ≤ X52
B7 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
B8 SMAW E6010 >12.750”0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
B9 SMAW E7018 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X65
B17 SMAW E8010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
B19 SMAW E8010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X65
B21 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” < 0.188” Gr. B
B23 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” < 0.188” Gr. B ≤ X42
B24 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
B26 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” < 0.188” X46 ≤ X52
B27 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
B29 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X65
FILLET WELDS - PRODUCTION (NON-PRESSURIZED) -or- IN SERVICE PRESSURIZED ≤ 60 PSIG
PROCEDURE NUMBER WELDING PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL PIPE/FITTING O.D. DIAMETER RANGE1 PIPE/FITTING WALL THICKNESS RANGE1 MATERIAL GRADE2
F2 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B F3 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42 F4 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” < 0.188" Gr. B ≤ X42 F5 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42 F6 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” < 0.188" X46 ≤ X52 F7 SMAW E6010 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52 F9 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
FILLET WELDS - PRODUCTION (NON-PRESSURIZED) -or- IN SERVICE ALL PRESSURES, ALL %SMYS
PROCEDURE NUMBER WELDING PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL PIPE/FITTING O.D. DIAMETER RANGE1 PIPE/FITTING WALL THICKNESS RANGE1 MATERIAL GRADE2
F41 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” < 0.188" Gr. B ≤ X42
F42 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F43 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F45 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” < 0.188" X46 ≤ X52
F46 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F47 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F49 GMAW ER-70-S-6 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X65
F61 SMAW E7018 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F62 SMAW E7018 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F64 SMAW E7018 < 2.375” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F65 SMAW E7018 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
Table continued on following page
APPENDIX A - WELD PROCEDURE INDEX CONTINUED
REPAIR SLEEVE - PRODUCTION (NON-PRESSURIZED) -or- IN SERVICE PRESSURIZED ≤ 60 PSIG
PROCEDURE NUMBER WELDING PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL PIPE/FITTING O.D. DIAMETER RANGE1 PIPE/FITTING WALL THICKNESS RANGE1 MATERIAL GRADE2 F24 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42 F25 SMAW E6010 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42 F28 SMAW E6010 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52 F29 SMAW E6010 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
REPAIR SLEEVE - PRODUCTION (NON-PRESSURIZED) -or- IN SERVICE ALL PRESSURES, ALL %SMYS
PROCEDURE NUMBER WELDING PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL PIPE/FITTING O.D. DIAMETER RANGE1 PIPE/FITTING WALL THICKNESS RANGE1 MATERIAL GRADE2
F31 SMAW E7018 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F32 SMAW E7018 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F33 SMAW E7018 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F34 SMAW E7018 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F44 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F48 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
F51 GMAW ER-70-S-6 2.375” ≤ 12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X65
F53 GMAW ER-70-S-6 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” Gr. B ≤ X42
F54 GMAW ER-70-S-6 >12.750” 0.188” ≤ 0.750” X46 ≤ X52
Full encirclement fitting, “barrel”, and “can” installation requirements: The longitudinal seam weld shall be done by following the appropriate butt weld procedure applicable to the material specifications for the fitting, barrel or can. The fillet weld shall be done by following the appropriate fillet weld procedure applicable to the material specifications for the fitting, barrel or can and not the gas carrying pipe.
1 For fillet welds, pipe/fitting O.D. and wall thickness ranges are referring to the branch pipe or fitting specifications. 2 Select welding procedure based on the higher of the two material grades. If welding on intermediate pressure pipe and the grade is unknown, select the welding procedure for material grade X46 ≤ X52. If welding on high pressure pipe and the grade is unknown, contact Gas Engineering for assistance determining the correct welding procedure. .
PROCEDURE NUMBER: B1
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: < 2.375” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: As Needed TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE
1 SMAW 3/32” E6010 50-100 18-32 4-14 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, All Passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14 1/8” (E6010, All Passes) 60-130 18-38 4-15
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-6-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: B3
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B ≤ X42
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete.
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 3/32” E6010 50-100 18-32 4-14 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, All Passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14
1/8” (E6010, All Passes) 60-130 18-38 4-15 *Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: B4
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B5
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B6
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46 ≤ X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete.
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 3/32” E6010 50-100 18-32 4-14 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
3/32” (E6010, All Passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14
1/8” (E6010, All Passes) 60-130 18-38 4-15
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B7
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46 ≤ X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete.
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
3 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, Pass 1) 50-100 18-32 4-14 5/32” (E6010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: B8
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B9
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X65
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, E7018 Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: E6010 Downhill E7018 Uphill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum (preheat pipe and fitting)
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 2 SMAW 3/32” E7018 70-110 20-35 2-10 N/A
3 SMAW 3/32” E7018 70-110 20-35 2-10 N/A Rem.* SMAW 3/32” E7018 70-110 20-35 2-10 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, Pass 1) 50-100 18-32 4-14 1/8” (E7018, Pass 2 – Remaining) 90-160 20-40 4-12 5/32” (E7018, Pass 2 – Remaining) 110-200 20-40 4-14
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B17
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46  X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, E8010 Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
3 SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, Pass 1) 50-100 18-32 4-14 5/32” (E8010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16 3/16” (E8010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 110-225 18-40 5-18
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 5-29-20 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B19
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X65
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T.
FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, E8010 Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE
1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 3 SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E8010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, Pass 1) 50-100 18-32 4-14
5/32” (E8010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16 3/16” (E8010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 110-225 18-40 5-18 *Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 8-25-20 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B21
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: < 2.375” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18 ER-70-S-6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: As Needed TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOW RATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE
1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-17 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH 2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-17 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH Rem.* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-17 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B23
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Grd. B  X42
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T.
FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18 ER-70-S-6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOW RATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH Rem* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B24
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B ≤ X42
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18, ER-70-S-2,6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete.
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOW RATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
3 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH Rem.* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B26
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46  X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / < 0.188” W.T.
FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18 ER-70-S-6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOW RATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
Rem.* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)

*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: B27
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46 ≤ X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18, ER-70-S-2,6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete.
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOW RATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
3 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH Rem.* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 9-12-19
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: B29
Weld Category: Production, Non Pressurized
WELDING PROCESS: Manual Gas Metal Arc – (GMAW)
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X65
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375” ≤ 12.750” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.18, ER-70-S-2,6 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required
TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: Lineup clamp should be used for welds in the field. If clamp is used it shall be kept in place until root bead is at least 50% complete. TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE, FLOWRATE SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE
1 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH 2 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH 3 GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH
Rem.* GMAW 0.03” ER-70-S-6 85-130 16-25 4-13 75% Ar, 25% CO2, 20-40 CFH

ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)

*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
Approved: Date: 9-12-19 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F2
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: < 2.375” O.D. / 0.188”  0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS E6010 Root, Hot and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: As Needed
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting
If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 3/32” E6010 50-100 18-32 4-14 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
3 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, All passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14 1/8” (E6010, All passes) 60-130 18-38 4-15 5/32” (E6010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 10-7-16 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F3
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: Gr. B ≤ X42
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188” ≤ 0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.1, E6010 Root, Hot, and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave
PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: As Needed
TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting
If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS
FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE 1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
3 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM)
3/32” (E6010, All passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14 5/32” (E6010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16
*Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 10-7-16 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F4
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F5
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F6
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELCTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F7
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F9
Weld Category: Production and In-Service, (Pressurized  60 PSIG)

WELDING PROCESS: Manual Shielded Metal Arc – (SMAW)
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPE GRADES QUALIFIED: X46 ≤ X52
PIPE DIAMETER / W.T. RANGE QUALIFIED: 2.375”  12.750” O.D. / 0.188” ≤ 0.750” W.T. FILLER MATERIAL: AWS 5.1, E6010 Root, Hot, and Filler Passes
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING: Downhill
NUMBER OF WELDERS: One Minimum WELDING TECHNIQUE: Stringer or Weave PREHEAT METHOD: Propane or Oxy-acetylene TEMP. MEASUREMENT: Pyrometer, Infrared Gun, or Temperature Sticks METHOD OF WELD CLEANING: Power Brushing or Grinding
WELD CURRENT / POLARITY: Direct Current / Reverse Polarity POSTHEAT TREATMENT: None Required TYPE / REMOVAL OF CLAMP: As Needed TIME BETWEEN PASSES: 5 Minutes Max. Between Root/Hot Pass and One Fill Pass; Remaining Passes within 24 hrs.
PREHEAT / INTERPASS TEMP: If ambient temperature above 40F: No preheat required unless to remove moisture from pipe/fitting If ambient temperature 40F and below: 200 F minimum - 400 F maximum
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN

WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PASS NO. PROCESS FILLER MATERIAL WELDING PARAMETERS TRAVEL SPEED (IPM) GAS MIXTURE AND PERCENT SIZE CLASSIFICATION AMPERAGE VOLTAGE
1 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 2 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A 3 SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A Rem.* SMAW 1/8” E6010 60-130 18-38 4-15 N/A
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
ELECTRODE DIAMETER AMPERAGE RANGE VOLTAGE RANGE TRAVEL SPEED RANGE (IPM) 3/32” (E6010, All passes) 50-100 18-32 4-14
5/32” (E6010, Pass 2 – Remaining) 100-180 18-40 4-16 *Remaining number of passes needed to achieve joint and weld design requirements as shown above.
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
Approved: Date: 10-7-16 This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F24
Weld Category: Production and In-Service (Pressurized  60 psig)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F25
Weld Category: Production and In-Service (Pressurized  60 psig)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F28
Weld Category: Production and In-Service (Pressurized  60 psig)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F29
Weld Category: Production and In-Service (Pressurized  60 psig)

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS


JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F31 Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
≤
≤≤
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING:
TEMP. MEASUREMENT:
°°
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F32 Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
≤
≤≤
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
PRODUCTION PIPE POSITION: Pipe in Horizontal or Vertical Fixed Position DIRECTION OF WELDING:
TEMP. MEASUREMENT:
°°
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F33
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F34
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F41
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F42
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F43
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F44 Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
≤
≤≤
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS
TEMP. MEASUREMENT:
°°
JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F45
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F46
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F47
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F48
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F49
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F51
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F53
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F54
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS


PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F61
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F62
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS
PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: F64
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.

PROCEDURE NUMBER: F65
Weld Category: All Pressures, All % SMYS

PIPE AND FILLER MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCTION WELDING CONDITIONS

JOINT AND WELD DESIGN
WELDING PARAMETERS AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OPTIONAL APPROVED WELDING PARAMETERS FOR USE WITHIN ABOVE SPECIFIED CLASIFICATION
PROCEDURE CERTIFICATION
This procedure was conducted in accordance with and meets the requirements of API 1104, Twentieth Edition and DOT Part 192.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
1 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

3.23 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) - HEAT FUSION SCOPE: To establish a uniform heat fusion procedure to produce sound, homogeneous joints which adhere to the applicable manufacturer and regulatory codes.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.271, §192.273, §192.281, §192.283, §192.285, §192.287 WAC 480-93-080
OTHER REFERENCES:

ASTM F2620
Performance Pipe Bulletin PP-750 Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) Reference 33 (TR-33) Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) Technical Note 13 (TN-13)
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity JOINING METHODS: General Heat fusion is one technique used to join plastic (polyethylene) pipe, either by manual or hydraulic methods. Butt fusions on 6” pipe shall only be done using hydraulic methods. Heat may not be applied with a torch or other open flame. Pipe and fitting fusion shall be performed by qualified trained personnel. Copies of qualified written joining procedures must be located on site where plastic pipe joining is being performed. Qualifications of Persons to Join Plastic Pipe No persons shall perform joining on polyethylene pipe until that person has received training in the procedures and has made acceptable specimen joints similar to those that will be made in the field. This person must also hold a current qualification. Persons must be re-qualified once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. If any field production joints fail during pressure testing then the individual who performed that particular joining process is no longer qualified and must re-qualify on that fusion procedure unless it can be shown that the joint failed due to factors that are outside of the joiner’s control (i.e., equipment malfunction or material flaw). The specimen joints must be visually examined during and after joining and found to have the same appearance as a joint or photographs of a joint that is acceptable under the manufacturer's procedures and tested in accordance with ASTM F2620. The joint must be cut into at least 3 longitudinal straps,
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
2 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

each of which is found not to contain voids or discontinuities on the cut surfaces of the joint area and be deformed by a bending test. If failure occurs, it must not initiate in the joint area.
Marking Joints For all types of plastic joints, the qualified individual who performed the joint shall use a permanent marker to legibly sign the pipe with their first initial and full last name and shall also mark the date of the joint. It is recommended to write down the time that the joint was fused so that the appropriate cooling times can be easily determined. Pipe Joining Certification Record Each individual that successfully qualifies or requalifies on plastic pipe joining shall be issued a company Plastic Pipe Joining Certification Record. This certification record indicates the name of individual, date of certification, procedures under which the individual is qualified, and the expiration date of the certificate. The individual must have the record and the joining procedures available for inspection when performing plastic pipe joining in the field. BUTT FUSION PROCEDURES: General The following butt heat fusing procedure shall be strictly followed for each joint in order to produce sound homogeneous joints for the following like materials – DRISCOPLEX, PLEXCO 2406, UPONOR 2406, POLYPIPE AND DRISCOPIPE. Avista has adopted Performance Pipe’s procedure for butt fusions from
Bulletin PP-750. Avista’s approved butt fusion procedure aligns with the Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of Polyethylene Pipe that was tested per CFR 192.283 and published as part of Technical Reference 33 (TR-33) in 2012 as a follow-up to Technical Note 13 (TN-13) published in 2007 both by the Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI).
WAC 480-93-080:
applicable procedure, if during any twelve month period the person has not made any joints under that
procedure.
Employees or contractors working in or with potential to work in the state of Washington shall
complete a plastic pipe joint for each type of joining process that an individual is qualified in following
annual Operator Qualification Training, between April 1 and December 31. The results of the
completed joints shall be tracked on form N-2596, “Plastic Pipe Field Joint Tracking, Washington”.
Successful completion of this mid-year qualification will ensure compliance with the twelve month
qualification interval in Washington State. Failure to complete and document a PE joint will render the
individual unqualified to perform that PE joining procedure starting on January 1 and until
requalification is performed in first quarter Refresher Training.
Gas Managers are responsible for ensuring compliance of their employees that work in Washington
State. Completed joint tracking forms shall be sent to the appropriate Compliance Technician for
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
3 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

A butt fusion shall not be made closer than 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater, from a previous squeeze point. Failure to meet these separations may result in damage to the joint. Refer to Spec 3.34 related to requirements for squeezing plastic pipe.
Heating Tool
Heating tool surfaces must be up to temperature before you begin. All points on both heating tool surfaces where they will contact the pipe or fitting ends must be within the parameters listed in the heater surface temperature table below. The maximum temperature difference between any two points on the heating surfaces must not exceed 20 degrees F. It is recommended to periodically check the accuracy of the temperature gun by using ice water. You
should observe a reading very close to 32 degrees F. Butt Fusion Heater Surface Temperature DRISCOPLEX, PLEXCO, UPONOR 2406, DRISCOPIPE, or POLYPIPE
400°F min - 450°F max* 75 +/- 15 psi
*Note: It is recommended that the iron temperature on the outer surface where the
actual PE pipe touches the iron be between 430°F and 450°F. 1. Clean the inside and outside of each pipe or fitting end with a clean cloth. Place pipe ends into
fusion machine. Bring ends together and check alignment. Clean the inside and outside of the component (pipe or fitting) ends by wiping with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth or paper towel to remove all foreign matter and potential contaminants. Replace cloth often as foreign matter and contaminants build up on the surface. Refer to 2.a. below for a list of common contaminants.
Pipe preparation and cleaning are critical to any fusion process. Improperly cleaned or prepared pipe ends may result in a poor fusion compromising joint performance.
2. Align the components with the machine, place them in the clamps, and then close the clamps. Do not force pipes into alignment against open fusion machine clamps. (When working with coiled pipe, if possible, “S" the pipes on each side of the machine to compensate for coil
curvature and make it easier to join). Component ends should protrude past the clamps enough so that facing will be complete. Bring the ends together and check high-low alignment. Adjust alignment as necessary by tightening the high side down. a. Common Potential Contaminants include but are not limited to the following: release agents (silicone or soybean products), silicone based lubricants, petroleum based
products, lubricating oils, rust inhibitors, wax, solvent residue, water/moisture, dirt/dust, plastic shavings, natural body oils, grease, bentonite drilling mud or dust from drilling mud, etc. 3. Insert facing unit between pipe or fitting ends and lock onto guide rods. Face pipe ends to the stops. Place the facing tool between the components ends, and face them to establish smooth, clean, parallel mating surfaces. Complete facing produces continuous circumferential shavings from both ends. Face until there is a minimal distance between the fixed and moveable clamps. Some machines have facing stops. If stops are present, face down to the stops. Remove the facing tool and clear all shavings and pipe chips from the component ends. Do not touch the component ends with your hands after facing.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
4 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

4. Check alignment of pipe ends. Adjust high-low if necessary. If adjustment is made, reinsert facing unit and reface to the stops. Bring the component ends together, check alignment, and check for slippage against fusion pressure. Look for complete contact all around both ends with no detectable gaps, and outside diameters in high-low alignment. If necessary, adjust the high side by tightening the high side clamp. Do not loosen the low side clamp because components
may slip during fusion. Re-face if high-low alignment is adjusted. 5. Check temperature at heater plate and compare with heater surface temperature table, then wipe surface clean. Verify the heating tool is maintaining the correct temperature in the fusion zone by using an approved infrared temperature gun. Place the heating tool between the component ends and move the ends against the heating tool. The initial contact should be under moderate
pressure to ensure full contact. Hold contact pressure very briefly then release pressure without breaking contact. Pressure must be reduced to contact pressure at the first indication of melt around the pipe ends. Hold the ends against the heating tool without force. Beads of melted polyethylene will form against the heating tool at the component ends. When the proper melt
bead size is formed, quickly separate the ends, and remove the heating tool.
Approximate Melt Bead Size Table
Main Pipe Sizes (in) Approximate Melt Bead Size (in)
1 1/4 and smaller 1/32 - 1/16 Melt Bead
2 through 3 about 1/16 Melt Bead
Above 3 through 8 1/8 - 3/16 Melt Bead

During heating, the melt bead will expand out flush to the heating tool surface or may curl slightly away from the surface. If the melt bead curls significantly away (concave) from the heating tool
surface, unacceptable pressure during heating may be indicated.
6. Immediately after heating tool removal, QUICKLY inspect the melted ends, which should be flat smooth and completely melted. If the melt surfaces are acceptable, immediately and in a continuous motion, bring the ends together and apply the correct joining force. Do not slam. Apply enough joining force to roll both melt beads over the pipe surface.
If hydrocarbon contamination is encountered on the pipe face during a butt fusion, stop the fusion
process. Do not complete butt fusion welds on the pipe unless sound pipe can be found to complete the fusion process. When contamination is a concern, it is preferred to use mechanical fittings on plastic pipe 2-inch diameter and smaller. For situations with pipe larger than 2-inch diameter where mechanical fittings are not available, it is recommended that electrofusion fittings
be used to join pipe if contamination is a concern. Electrofusion fittings may be used on 2-inch and smaller, but mechanical connections are preferred. See Specification 3.24, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) - Electrofusion for information regarding the electrofusion process. Contact Gas Engineering as necessary for additional assistance. Refer to the Butt Fusion Troubleshooting Guide at the end of this specification.
7. Hold joining force against the ends until the joint is cool. The joint is cool enough for GENTLE handling when the double bead is cool to the touch. Cool for about 30-90 seconds per inch of pipe diameter (or 1/2 to 1-1/2 minutes per inch of pipe diameter), refer to Cooling Table. Do not try to shorten cooling time by applying water, wet cloths, etc. Avoid pulling, installation, pressure testing, and rough handling for at least an additional 30 minutes.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
5 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

8. On both sides, the double bead should be rolled over to the surface and be uniformly rounded and consistent in size all around the joint. The double bead width should be 2 to 2-1/2 times its height above the surface, and the v-groove depth between the beads should not be more than half the bead height.
When butt fusing to molded fittings, the fitting-side bead may have an irregular appearance. This is acceptable provided the pipe-side bead is correct. It is not necessary for the internal bead to roll over to the inside surface of the pipe. Butt Fusion Cooling TimesDRISCOPLEX, PLEXCO, POLYPIPE or UPONOR 2406
Pipe Size Cooling Time (min) Cooling Time (sec) Cool to Rough Handle (min)
9. If at any time during the fusion process there is doubt regarding the success of the fusion or if contamination is a concern, abandon and remove the fusion joint and re-start the process of making a new fusion joint. HYDRAULIC BUTT FUSION: Refer to the manufacturer’s operation manual for maintenance and special operation of the equipment. The procedure for butt fusion above is the same; however, when using a hydraulic fusion machine, the fusion pressure must be determined using the recommended interface pressure from the pipe
manufacturer and the following procedures: The pressure gauge on the manifold block indicates the pressure at the carriage valve. How much pressure depends on the position of the selector valve and the pressure set on the specific pressure-reducing valve. With the selector valve up, the facing pressure can be set. It may be necessary to adjust the carriage speed, while facing, with the top pressure-reducing valve to control facing speed.
Shift the selector valve to the center position and set the heating pressure (if required). If heating pressure is not required, set the pressure reducing valve at its lowest setting or the drag pressure, whichever is higher. The heating and fusion pressures can be calculated using the following calculations:
Determining Drag Pressure: 1. After facing the pipe, move the carriage so that the pipe ends are approximately 2-inches apart. 2. Shift the carriage control valve to the middle (neutral) position. 3. Select the heating mode, and adjust the middle pressure reducing valve to its lowest pressure by turning the valve counterclockwise. 4. Shift the carriage control valve to the left. 5. Gradually increase the pressure by turning the valve clockwise. Increase the pressure until the carriage moves.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
6 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

6. Quickly reduce the heating pressure by turning the valve counterclockwise until the carriage is just barely moving. 7. Record the pressure. (This is the actual DRAG pressure, which is used in the calculation of the fusion pressure). Determining Fusion Pressure:
The following is the calculation for determining fusion pressure: (OD – t) x t x PI x IFP
TEPA + DRAG

OD = Outside diameter of pipe (should be marked on pipe) t = Wall thickness (OD divided by SDR) PI = 3.1416 SDR = Standard dimension ratio (Should be marked on pipe – Refer to Note Below) IFP = Manufacturer’s recommended interfacial pressure (75 psig +/- 15) TEPA = Total effective piston area (standard high force for specific machine)
DRAG = Force required to move pipe Example: Calculating for 6-inch IPS pipe using a #28 McElroy machine
OD of Pipe = 6.625 SDR of Pipe = 11.5
IFP = 75 psi DRAG = 30 psi (determined using above procedure) TEPA = 4.710 (#28 McElroy machine) (6.625 - .576) x .576 x 3.1416 x 75
4.710 + 30 psi drag = 204 psi
Note: Fusion of pipes or fittings with different SDRs is acceptable as long as the different materials only have up to one SDR difference (i.e. SDR 11 to SDR 13.5 or SDR 9 to SDR 11). When fusing pipes or fittings with unlike SDRs use the higher SDR (thinner wall pipe) when determining the required fusion
pressure. Hydraulic Fusion Pressures #28 McElroy Machine (TEPA = 4.710)Nominal Pipe Fusion Pressure (PSI) (PSI) (PSI)
2” IPS 11 19 23 28
3” IPS 11 41 51 61
4” IPS 11 67 84 100
6” IPS 11 145 181 218
3” IPS 11.5 39 49 58
4” IPS 11.5 64 80 97
6” IPS 11.5 139 174 209
* Fusion Pressures in this table do not include DRAG. Be sure to account for DRAG to determine proper hydraulic fusion pressure.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
7 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

Hydraulic Shift Sequence: 1. Move the carriage to the right to open a gap and allow insertion of the heater plate. 2. Check the fusion position and shift the selector valve handle down to the fusing position. Allow the gauge pressure to drop to the machines minimum pressure setting.
3. Ensure that the heater surface is free of any potential contaminants. Use a clean non-synthetic cloth to clean the surfaces as necessary. 4. Verify heater temperature then insert heater between the pipe ends. 5. Prepare pipe for fusion as previously described in this specification (or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer). 6. Move the carriage to the left, bringing the heater into contact with both pipe ends.
7. Shift the selector valve to the center position and allow the gauge pressure to drop to the machines minimum pressure setting. 8. When the gauge drops to its minimum setting, return the carriage control valve to neutral position. 9. Allow the pipe to melt.
10. After obtaining the proper melt, shift the selector valve down to fusion position and move the carriage to the right just enough to remove the heater.
11. QUICKLY REMOVE THE HEATER and inspect the melted ends, which should be flat, smooth and completely melted. 12. If the melt surfaces are acceptable, move the carriage to the left, bringing the pipe ends together under the pipe manufacturer’s recommended pressure.
13. Allow the joint to cool under pressure as listed in the butt fusion procedure previously described in this specification (or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer).
Cold Weather Fusion
1. Carefully remove (by light tapping and wiping) ice, snow, or frost from inside and outside the pipe
ends and the areas to be clamped in the joiner. Otherwise, they will melt when exposed to the heating tool and spot chill the polyethylene. This may cause incomplete fusion. Also, frost and
ice on the clamping surfaces of the pipe may cause slippage during fusion.
2. In the case of high winds and rain, the heating tool should be shielded to prevent excessive heat loss and to keep the tool dry at all times. A canopy should be used to shield the heating tool and
fusion area from wind, snow, and rain.
3. Always check the manufacturer’s recommendations for any temperature limitations with equipment, such as the “Line Tamer”, which has problems re-rounding pipe in freezing
conditions.
The length of the heating cycle necessary to obtain a complete melt pattern will depend not only on the outdoor temperature, but wind conditions, pipe tolerances, and operator variation. Melt pattern is the key.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 19
8 OF 8 SPEC. 3.23

Butt Fusion Troubleshooting Guide

Compatibility/Cross Fusions When connecting polyethylene pipe and/or fittings that have different densities or unlike material properties it is preferred that an electrofusion process or mechanical fittings be utilized. However, if circumstances require then the butt-fusion procedure outlined earlier in this section may be utilized if the following conditions are met:
• Material Melt Index (MI) – 0.05 g/10 min < MI < 0.25 g/10min (i.e. – Plexco, Driscoplex, Driscopipe, Uponor & Polypipe PE 2406/2708 and PE 3408/4710) When connecting to Driscopipe 7000, Driscopipe 8000, Driscopipe 8600, or DuPont/Uponor “Aldyl A" pipe, connections shall be made utilizing either the electrofusion process or by use of mechanical fittings. These older materials have higher melt indices that are outside the acceptable range for cross fusing using this butt fusion process.
BUTT FUSION BEAD TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Observed Condition Possible Cause
Excessive double bead width Overheating; excessive joining force
Double bead v-groove too deep Excessive joining force; insufficient heating;
pressure during heating
Flat top on bead Excessive joining force; overheating
Non-uniform bead size around pipe Misalignment; defective heating tool; worn
equipment; incomplete facing
One bead larger than the other (except
when fusing pipe to molded fitting)
Misalignment; component slipped in clamp; worn
equipment; defective heating tool; incomplete
facing
Beads too small Insufficient heating; insufficient joining force
Bead not rolled over to surface
Shallow v-groove – Insufficient heating &
insufficient joining force
Deep v-groove – Insufficient heating & excessive
joining force
Beads too large Excessive heating time
Squared outer bead edge Pressure during heating
Rough, sandpaper-like, bubbly, or
pockmarked melt bead surface Hydrocarbon contamination
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
1 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

3.24 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) - ELECTROFUSION
SCOPE: To establish procedures to be followed in the joining of plastic pipe by means of the electrofusion process in Avista’s natural gas distribution systems. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.271, §192.273, §192.281, §192.283, §192.285, §192.287 WAC 480-93-080 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Spec. 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity General Gas employees performing electrofusion of pipe and fittings shall be properly trained in this procedure and shall qualify initially and re-qualify annually. Persons must be re-qualified once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. Refer to Specification 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion, “Qualifications of Persons to Join Plastic Pipe” for specific qualification requirements and required joint testing for the joining of plastic pipe which includes joining by electrofusion. The guidance and requirements in that subsection are required for electrofusion joining qualification. If any field electrofusion joints fail during pressure testing then the individual who performed that particular joining process is no longer qualified and must re-qualify on that electrofusion procedure unless it can be shown that the joint failed due to factors that are outside of the joiner’s control (i.e., equipment failure or material flaw). The following procedures are for the joining of polyethylene plastic pipe during construction or repair operations. This electronic fusion system utilizes a sequence processor or control unit and a specially designed electrofusion fitting. The sequence processor is computerized in order to provide precise control of fusion time, temperature, and joining pressure. A recognition resistor identifies fittings to the control unit and automatically sets the correct fusion time. The control unit also monitors critical aspects of the fusion process and will sound an alarm if part of the process is faulty or incomplete. A self-diagnostic function is built into the unit and is accessible by pressing and holding the start button at power up or by use of a personal computer. The electrical fusion system is not intrinsically safe, and therefore is not explosion proof. In repair situations where 100 percent shut off is not available, escaping gas should be vented away from the control unit.
Electrofusion fittings shall have been tested and qualified by the manufacturer under §192.283 and ASTM F1055 prior to use as an approved fitting. Currently approved electrofusion style fittings include IPEX/Friatec/Frialen, Innogaz, Georg Fischer Central Plastics, and M.T. Deason all of which meet these
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
2 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

qualifications according to each manufacturer. Reference manufacturer’s technical information and cut sheet data for additional information. The manufacturer's instructions should be consulted before performing any electrofusion procedures. Reference Avista’s Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual for Gas Operations for additional information.
An electrofusion shall not be made closer than 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater, from a previous squeeze point. Failure to meet these separations may result in damage to the fittings or joint. Refer to Spec 3.34 related to requirements for squeezing plastic pipe. Calibration of Electrofusion Equipment
Electrofusion machines should be returned to the factory for calibration or maintenance on a time basis as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and the record of calibration/maintenance sticker updated at that time. See the table below for recommended maintenance schedule by manufacturer.

Manufacturer Recommended Service/Maintenance Schedule
Every 3 Years
Marking Joints For all types of plastic joints, the qualified individual who performed the joint shall use a permanent
marker to legibly sign the pipe with their first initial and full last name and shall mark the date of the joint. It is recommended to write down the time that the joint was fused so that the appropriate cooling times can be easily determined. STANDARD COUPLING AND ENDCAP JOINING PROCEDURES:
1. Determine that all necessary tools and equipment are available and good working order before beginning the procedure. When using a generator, the generator should always be engaged before plugging the control unit in. A 3500 watt minimum generator is required, although 5000 watt is recommended. A 110 volt, 30 amp, GFCI A/C power source will also be required. 2. It is critical that the pipe ends to be joined have a square, even cut. It is recommended that a pipe
tape be used to mark the pipe prior to cutting to help ensure a square cut. Once the pipe is cut, remove any burrs or shavings from the pipe ends that may have occurred during the cutting process.
3. Thoroughly clean each pipe end inside and out using clean water or isopropyl alcohol with a clean, lint-free cloth to remove any foreign matter or potential contaminants. Replace cloth often as foreign matter and contaminants build up on the surface. Refer to Specification 3.23 – Sheet 3, Joining of Pipe – Plastic (Polyethylene) – Heat Fusion, “Butt Fusion Procedures” for a list of common contaminants. Pipe preparation and cleaning are critical to any fusion process. Improperly cleaned pipe may result in a poor fusion and a potentially compromised joint.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
3 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

4. Once the fusion area is cleaned, visually check for scratches in the fusion area that appear to be 10 percent or more of the pipe wall. Minor scratches are not unusual on installed pipe, especially on pipe installed via directional drill. Use an approved pit gauge to measure the depth of scratches that are of concern. The edges of the scratch may need to be widened slightly to ensure the measurement point of the gauge can reach the bottom of the scratch to properly measure the depth. Care must be taken not to deepen the scratch. If a scratch is found to be
equal to or greater than 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe, either replace the section with new pipe or repair the pipe using an approved repair fitting, per Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe. If not, proceed to Step 5 in preparation for electrofusion fitting installation.
5. Prior to peeling the pipe, scrape the fusion surface with a scraper, as needed, to remove any ridges that may have been created from displaced material due to scratching. This will help ensure a uniform surface prior to peeling the pipe. Use only scraping equipment recommended by the manufacturer or approved by Avista (emery cloth and sandpaper are not approved tools). Once scraped, or if scraping is not required, peel the pipe using an approved peeler to remove any surface oxidation along with any contamination such as bentonite, oil, grease, or perspiration that may have built up on the outside layer of pipe. Failure to do so could result in contamination within the fusion zone. A full encirclement peeler is recommended. For best results, use a silver metallic permanent marker (do not use a black permanent marker or grease pencil) to mark lines on the area of pipe prior to peeling. The mark lines should run parallel with the pipe and be about 1-inch apart over the entire area of the pipe to be peeled. Secure the peeling tool on the pipe and begin the peeling process. Continue to peel until mark lines are removed. This is usually
accomplished with 1 pass of the tool. Do not exceed more than one pass of the peeler on 2-inch and smaller diameter pipe and two passes of the peeler on pipe sizes larger than 2-inch. If necessary, during the peeling process, remove the tool and clean the blade area with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to remove build-up of material (isopropyl alcohol also works well to clean the blade). It is possible scratches may still exist in the fusion zone after scraping and peeling. This is acceptable as long as the scratches are clean and are not deep enough to have removed 10
percent or more of the original pipe wall. Once peeling is complete, deburr the outside edge of the pipe end near the prepared fusion surface with a scraper. This should help to protect the wire coils of the electrofusion fitting when sliding the fitting over the end of the pipe. 6. Possible recontamination of the prepared surface should be avoided. Do not touch the peeled pipe surfaces or the inside of the fitting with your hands as perspiration and body oils could contaminate joining areas and affect joint integrity. If contaminates are suspected on the fitting, clean the fitting with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth. If contaminants are suspected on the pipe, or if the pipe was installed by a horizontal direction drill using bentonite, clean ONLY the peeled/scraped area of the pipe with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth taking care
not to wipe the pipe outside of the peeled area because contaminants may be redeposited onto the peeled/scraped surface. Let the alcohol evaporate completely prior to assembling the pipe and fitting. 7. Determine the stab depth of the fitting by measuring half the length of the coupling. Mark each pipe end an equivalent length with a silver metallic permanent marker. Do not use a black
permanent marker or grease pencil to mark the stab depth as this may contaminate the pipe surface.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
4 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

8. Slide the coupling or endcap onto one pipe end until the squared end of the pipe meets with the internal stop in the fitting. With couplings, insert the second pipe end into the fitting so that the end also meets the internal stops. If the fitting is being used for a repair the internal stops may be removed. Check the measurement marks to assure the pipe is inserted to the proper stab depth. 9. If there is a possibility of movement in the assembly during the fusion cycle, an alignment
clamping tool should be utilized. Be sure to maintain the proper stab depth. For best results, the alignment clamps should be placed as close to the fitting as possible. For coiled pipe larger than 3/4-inch (and for other binding installations), the use of two clamps on each side of the coupling is recommended. Ensure the clamps are supported to avoid putting stress on the fusion joint. 10. Connect the control unit to the A/C power source. The sequence processor will automatically
perform a quick diagnostic check. 11. Attach the leads from the control unit to the fitting terminals. If a barcode is present, scan the barcode to identify the fitting. Verify the correct fitting type is displayed on the control unit.
12. Press the start button to begin the fusion cycle. Fusion cycle time will count down on the visual
display. 13. When the fusion cycle is complete, “End of Fusion” as well as the “Cooling Time” will appear on the visual display. Disconnect the leads from the fitting and allow the fusion to cool for the
minimum time before removing the clamp(s).
14. After removing the clamp(s), additional cooling time shall be allowed before subjecting the joint to bending, burying, pressure testing, or similar handling or backfill stress. Refer to the table at the
end of this specification for recommended cooling times for various sized electrofusion fittings.
15. Fusion joints shall be subjected to a pressure test as specified in this standard and a visual soap or leak detector test as appropriate.
Note 1: If the fitting is installed and the normal electrofusion process is complete, but there is no
indication of the pop-up indicator rising, then additional investigation is required. Under these circumstances, if the electrofusion fitting feels hot to the touch within each fusion zone, alignment of the
fitting appears good after the fusion and the fitting passes the required pressure testing per Spec 3.18 then the fitting may remain. If not, or there are any indicators of an unsuccessful fusion then the fitting
shall be cut out and replaced. Not all fittings have pop-up indicators (i.e. Central Plastics). If a pop-up indicator is not present on the fitting, then follow the directions and information provided by the
electrofusion processor during installation as well as perform the investigation described above. Note 2: If there are any doubts about the success of the electrofusion process the fitting shall be cut out and replaced.
REPAIR COUPLING JOINING PROCEDURE: 1. Make sure that there is enough room in the excavation to install the fitting and the clamping devices. This repair procedure will require 2 electrofusion fittings per repair section. 2. Cut out and remove the section of damaged pipe.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
5 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

3. Follow the procedures as outlined under "Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures" steps #1 through #7 for cleaning, preparing, and marking the existing pipe ends. 4. Remove the internal fitting stops by bottoming the pipe end to the internal stops. Apply a sudden thrust to the end of the coupling so that the stops cleanly snap out. Make sure that the fitting stops are completely removed from the I.D. of the fitting. To avoid contamination of the inside of
the coupling do not use your fingers to remove the loose stops. 5. Slide the fittings onto each of the existing pipe ends. 6. Insert the new section of pipe into place. Make sure that both ends of the new section are cleaned, prepared and marked properly. The new section should fit into place between the
existing pipe ends with no more than approximately 1/16-inch clearance on each side. 7. Slide a coupling over the pipe junction until both measurement marks are visible. Measurement marks should not extend more than 1/16-inch from the coupling end. Repeat on the other side of
the repair section.
8. Follow the procedures as outlined under "Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures" steps #10 through #15, to complete the fusion process. SADDLE JOINING PROCEDURE: 1. Follow steps #3 and #4 as outlined under "Standard Coupling and Endcap Joining Procedures" to
clean the surfaces to be joined with a clean cloth to remove any dirt or contamination and inspect the pipe for scratches or other damage. If a scratch equal to or deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe is present, either replace the section with new pipe or repair the pipe using an approved repair fitting, per Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe. 2. Center the saddle fitting on the pipe to determine the required fusion area. Mark the pipe with a
silver metallic permanent marker to show the length of the area to be prepared. 3. Prior to peeling the pipe, scrape the entire fusion surface on the pipe with a scraper, as needed, to remove any ridges that may have been created from displaced material due to scratching. This
will help ensure a uniform surface prior to peeling the pipe. Use only scraping equipment recommended by the manufacturer or approved by Avista (emery cloth and sandpaper are not
approved tools for electrofusion installations). Once scraping is complete, or if scraping is not required, peel the entire pipe surface required for the saddle in order to remove oxidation and potential contaminates. A full encirclement peeler is recommended. Follow step #5 in the procedures as outlined under "Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures" for scraping and
peeling.
4. Possible recontamination of the prepared surface should be avoided. Do not touch the peeled pipe surface or the inside of the fitting with your hands as perspiration and body oils could contaminate joining areas and affect joint integrity. If contaminates are suspected on the fitting, clean the fitting with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth. If contaminants are suspected on the pipe, or if the pipe was installed by horizontal direction drill using bentonite, clean ONLY the peeled area of the pipe with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth taking care not to wipe the surrounding pipe because contaminants may be redeposited onto the prepared surface. Let the alcohol evaporate completely prior to assembling the pipe and fitting.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
6 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

5. Position the saddle on the clean, peeled area and place the appropriate saddle clamp under the pipe, adjacent to the saddle fitting. 6. Slide the clamping tool onto the edges of the saddle fitting until the clamp is squarely aligned beneath the fitting. Tighten the clamp to secure the fitting in place.
7. Follow steps #10 through #15 in “Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures” to complete the fusion process. The table at the end of this specification should be consulted for the proper cooling times for tapping tees. ALDYL A TEE REPAIR PROCEDURE:
1. Before initiating the repair, be sure the electrofusion equipment and qualified personnel are on site. A universal barcode electrofusion control box is the preferred method for translating the barcode data. 2. After excavating the tee, clean the stack and (using approved scraping and peeling tools) scrape and peel the outside diameter of the stack down to the intersection of the tee outlet, as needed, in
preparation for electrofusion. Follow step #5 in “Standard Coupling and Endcap Joining Procedures”. 3. Either scrape and peel the outside diameter of the repair fitting insert using approved tools or
clean the outside diameter with isopropyl alcohol. If the insert is contaminated or has been out of the bag and exposed to the environment for an extended time, it should be discarded.
4. Install the prepared insert into the 1.25-inch coupling until the shoulder of the insert stops against the coupling.
5. Install the coupling over the stack of the tee until it bottoms out.
6. Electrofuse the coupling to the tee and insert using the barcode mode or manually input the code using the advanced functions of the processor.
7. After removing the electrofusion cables, allow the assembly to cool for 10 minutes.
8. If not already done, lightly lubricate the O-ring (Dow Corning Silicone Grease #111 or equal) and
install it on the plug.
9. Thread the plug assembly into the insert until it bottoms out. The top of the plug should be flush with the top of the insert. Use a standard 1/2-inch square drive to turn the plug into the insert.
This completes the repair kit assembly process. SERVICE LINE JOINING PROCEDURE: To make the service line connection, follow the “Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures” as outlined above. The clamp utilized should be one provided by or recommended by the manufacturer specifically for performing the service line connection. The table at the end of this specification should be consulted for the proper cooling times for service line connections (reducers).
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
7 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

TAPPING PROCEDURE: 1. Ensure the joint has completely cooled before attempting to perform this tapping procedure. Use a tapping tool recommended by the manufacturer. 2. To "punch" the main, remove the cap and insert the tapping tool.
3. Slowly turn the tapping tool clockwise to tap the main. Continue turning until the cutter contacts the lower stop inside the tee. The lower stop ensures that the proper "punch" depth has been achieved. 4. Back the tapping tool out by turning it counterclockwise until the cutter contacts the upper stop
inside the tee. The upper stop ensures that the cutter is fully retracted so that gas flow is not restricted. 5. Install the cap by screwing it all the way down until the collar of the cap touches the front face of
the drill spigot. Then loosen the cap half a turn to relieve the O-ring tension. REPAIR CLAMP JOINING PROCEDURE: 1. Measure the size of the damaged area of pipe and determine if the damaged area will completely fit into the cold zone area inside the dome of the repair clamp. The cold zone is the area of pipe that will be inside and in contact with the electrofusion fitting but away from the electrofusion melt zone. The cold zone helps to prevent the melt from extruding out of the joint. The cold zone
diameter for each size of repair clamp is as follows: 3-inch IPS = 2.0 inches (75 mm) 4-inch IPS = 3.1 inches (78 mm) 6-inch IPS = 3.3 inches (85 mm)
If the damaged area of pipe will not fit underneath the dome and inside the cold zone, the repair clamp cannot be used, and a different repair method will need to be utilized or the damaged section will need to be replaced. Refer to Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe, for approved repair methods.
2. Follow steps #3 and #4 as outlined under "Standard Coupling and Endcap Joining Procedures" to
clean the surfaces to be joined with a clean cloth to remove any dirt or contamination and inspect the pipe for scratches or other damage. If a scratch equal to or deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe is present, either replace the section with new pipe or repair the pipe using an approved repair fitting, per Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe.
3. Measure and mark the pipe surface covered by the fitting with a silver metallic permanent marker. 4. Prior to peeling the pipe, scrape the fusion surface on the pipe with a scraper, as needed, to
remove any ridges that may have been created from displaced material due to scratching. This will help ensure a uniform surface prior to peeling the pipe. Use only scraping equipment
recommended by the manufacturer or approved by Avista (emery cloth and sandpaper are not approved tools). Once scraping is complete, or if scraping is not required, peel the entire pipe surface required for the repair clamp to remove oxidation and potential contaminates. A full encirclement peeler is recommended. Follow step #5 in the procedures as outlined under
"Standard Coupling and Endcap Joining Procedures" for scraping and peeling.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
8 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

5. Do not touch the peeled pipe surface or the inside of the fitting with your hands as perspiration and body oils could contaminate joining areas and affect joint integrity. If contaminants are suspected on the fitting, clean the fitting with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth. If contaminants are suspected on the pipe, or if the pipe was installed by horizontal direction drill using bentonite, clean ONLY the peeled area of the pipe with isopropyl alcohol and a clean lint-free cloth taking care not to wipe the surrounding pipe because contaminants may be redeposited onto the prepared surface. Let the alcohol evaporate completely prior to assembling the fitting. 6. Align and install the repair clamp in the cleaned, peeled area over the damaged section of pipe ensuring that the damaged area of the pipe is completely encapsulated inside the dome of the fitting and inside the cold zone (refer to Step 1 for the cold zone size for each size of repair clamp). Firmly tighten all bolts, working diagonally, without using excessive force until the clamp is flush with the pipe. Assembly of pipe and fitting must be in a clean, supported, and stress-free condition as much as possible. Note: Both halves of the repair clamp have electrofusion capability. The bottom half of the repair clamp (the smooth side without the raised dome) does not need to be electro fused to the pipe. Only the half covering the repair needs to be electro fused. 7. Follow the procedures outlined in "Standard Coupling & Endcap Joining Procedures” steps #10 through #15 to complete the fusion process. The table at the end of this specification should be
consulted for the proper cooling times for repair clamps.
Re-fusion of Electrofusion Fittings If during the first 25 percent of the electrofusion heat cycle the power supply to the fusion unit is lost (i.e., power outage, generator runs out of fuel, or the leads become disconnected) it is acceptable to re-fuse
the electrofusion fitting as long as the fitting is allowed to cool for at least one hour unless ambient temperature is reached prior to one hour and the fitting remains undisturbed during the cooling process. If the fusion process is interrupted during the second attempt the fitting shall be cut out and replaced.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
9 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

FUSION/COOLING TIMES BY MANUFACTURER
Fitting (inches) Fusion Times (sec)
Clamped Cooling Time (min)¹
Pressurized / Tapping Time (min)
Rough Handling Time (min) Couplings/Endcaps
1/2 CTS 20 5 15 30
1/2 IPS 20 5 15 30
3/4 IPS 35 5 15 30
1 CTS 40 5 15 30
1 IPS 45 10 15 30
1-1/4 IPS 75 10 20 30
2 IPS 60 10 20 30
3 IPS 180 15 30 35
4 IPS 200 15 30 35
Reducers
1 x 1/2 30 5 15 30
Tapping Tees
3 IPS 90 10 20 30
WB HV Tapping Tees
2 x 1-1/4; 2 x 2 90 10 25 30
Branch Saddles
2 x 2 90 10 25 30
6 x 2 60 10 25 30
Warning: A.C. current only. D.C. current can result in damage to processor.
Times show above are based upon Manufacturer's recommendations and are not additive. ¹Clamping of fittings is not always required. Refer to Spec. 3.24, Sheet 3 of 8 for direction related to clamping.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
10 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

TABLE B: Innogaz
Fitting (inches) Fusion Times (sec)
Clamped Cooling Time (min)¹
Pressurized / Tapping Time (min)
Rough Handling Time (min) Couplings/Endcaps
1/2 CTS 17 3 15 15
1 IPS 37 6 15 15
2 IPS 85 10 20 20
Reducers
1 x 1/2 20 4 15 15
Tapping Tees
2 IPS 70 10 20 20
WB HV Tapping Tees
Warning: A.C. current only. D.C. current can result in damage to processor.
Times show above are based upon Manufacturer's recommendations and are not additive. ¹Clamping of fittings is not always required. Refer to Spec. 3.24, Sheet 3 of 8 for direction related to clamping.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
11 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

TABLE C: IPEX/Friatec/Frialen
Fitting (inches) Fusion Times
(sec)
Clamped Cooling Time (min)¹
/ Tapping Time* (min) Rough Handling Time Couplings/Endcaps
1/2 CTS 27 5 8 10
1/2 IPS 28 5 8 10
3/4 IPS 28 5 8 10
1 CTS 28 5 8 10
1 IPS 28 5 8 10
1-1/4 IPS 34 10 15 25
2 IPS 54 10 15 25
3 IPS 100 10 30 40
4 IPS 151 10 30 40
6 IPS 440 20 60 75
3/4 x 1/2 28 5 8 10
1 x 1/2 28 5 8 10
1 x 3/4 28 5 8 10
2 x 1-1/4 54 10 15 25
*Before Tapping
1-1/4 IPS 34 20 15 15
2 IPS 54 20 15 15
3 IPS 100 30 20 20
4 IPS 151 30 20 20
6 IPS 440 45 30 30
3 IPS 100 10 30 40
4 IPS 151 10 30 40
6 IPS 440 20 60 75
Warning: A.C. current only. D.C. current can result in damage to processor.
Times show above are based upon Manufacturer's recommendations and are not additive. ¹Clamping of fittings is not always required. Refer to Spec. 3.24, Sheet 3 of 8 for direction related
to clamping.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
12 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

TABLE D: M.T. Deason
Fitting (inches) Fusion Times (sec)1
Clamped Cooling Time (min)2
Pressurized / Tapping Time (min)
Rough Handling Time (min)
1/2 CTS On Label
On Label
1 CTS On Label 10 20 20
On Label
On Label
On Label
On Label
6 IPS On Label 20 40 40
Endcaps
1 CTS On Label 5 15 15
On Label
On Label
4 IPS On Label 10 20 20
On Label
Reducers
On Label
On Label
1 x 3/4 On Label 10 20 20
On Label
On Label
6 x 4 On Label 20 35 35
Tapping Tees
On Label
2 IPS On Label 10 25 25
On Label
On Label
6 IPS On Label 10 25 25
WB HV Tapping Tees
On Label
On Label
4 x 1-1/4; 4 x 2 On Label 10 25 25
On Label
Warning: A.C. current only. D.C. current can result in damage to processor.
Times show above are based upon Manufacturer's recommendations and are not additive. 1Manufacturer does not publish fusion time. Refer to the fitting label for proper fusion time. 2Clamping of fittings is not always required. Refer to Spec. 3.24, Sheet 3 of 8 for direction related
to clamping.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 13
13 OF 13 SPEC. 3.24

Warning: A.C. current only. D.C. current can result in damage to processor.
Times show above are based upon Manufacturer's recommendations and are not additive. 1Manufacturer does not publish fusion time. Refer to the fitting label for proper fusion time.
2Clamping of fittings is not always required. Refer to Spec. 3.24, Sheet 3 of 8 for direction related
to clamping.
TABLE D: M.T. Deason Continued
Fitting (inches) Fusion Times (sec)1
Clamped Cooling Time (min)2
Pressurized / Tapping Time (min)
Rough Handling Time (min) Branch Saddles
2 x 2 On Label
On Label
4 x 2 On Label 10 25 25
On Label
On Label
6 x 4 On Label 20 35 35
Repair Saddles
On Label
On Label
6 IPS On Label 10 25 25
22.5° / 45° / 90° Elbows
1 CTS On Label 10 30 30
On Label
On Label
4 IPS On Label 10 20 20
On Label
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
1 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

3.25 JOINING OF PIPE - PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) - MECHANICAL
SCOPE: To establish procedures to be followed in the joining and repair of plastic pipe by means of mechanical fittings and couplings in Avista’s natural gas distribution systems. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.271, §192.273, §192.281, §192.283, §192.285, §192.287 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic (Polyethylene) Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 3.22, Joining of Pipe - Steel Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity General Heat fusion or electrofusion fittings should be used whenever practical to join polyethylene pipe. Company-approved mechanical couplings may be used to connect plastic pipe in repair situations and for new installations where warranted. Compression style service head adapters may be used in cases where non-cathodically protected riser replacement is impractical or in cases where prefabricated risers for plastic services are impractical or unavailable. Compression-style fittings shall be of the type designed to effectively resist pullout forces (Category 1-A, ASTM D-2513). Mechanical fittings shall have been tested and qualified by the manufacturer under §192.281 and §192.283 prior to use as an approved fitting. Approved mechanical fittings shall utilize only gasket material compatible with plastic pipe, employ a rigid internal tubular stiffener in conjunction with the outer coupling and meet a listed specification based upon the applicable material. Approved compression-style fittings include Continental Con-Stab ID Seal fittings and RW Lyall Lycofit mechanical fittings both which meet these qualifications according to each manufacturer. Reference current manufacturer’s technical information and specification data for additional supporting information. Joining of plastic pipe by mechanical fittings shall only be performed by properly trained and qualified personnel who shall qualify initially and re-qualify annually. Persons must be re-qualified once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. If any field mechanical joints fail during pressure testing then the individual who installed that particular fitting is no longer qualified and must re-qualify on that mechanical fitting installation procedure unless it can be shown that the joint failed due to factors that are outside of the installer’s control (i.e., equipment malfunction or material flaw). For Aldyl-A pipe, the use of RW Lyall Lycofit mechanical fittings is only allowed on 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch diameter pipe. Joining of Aldyl-A pipe larger than 3/4-inch diameter should be made using an approved electrofusion fitting.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
2 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

PE valves may be installed using spigot and sleeve mechanical fittings as long as the fitting can be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. Other mechanical fittings are not approved for the installation of PE valves. Mechanical couplings or fittings shall not be re-used.
A mechanical connection shall not be made closer than 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater, from a previous squeeze point. Failure to meet these separations may result in damage to the fittings or joint. Refer to Spec 3.34 related to requirements for squeezing plastic pipe. When making a mechanical connection if the carrier pipe becomes discolored and appears to yield during insertion of the spigot or stab end of the fitting it is recommended the installation be cut out and replaced.
An alternative joining method may need to be considered during replacement.
Marking Joints
For all types of plastic joints, the qualified individual who performed the joint shall use a permanent black marker to legibly sign the pipe with their first initial and full last name and shall also mark the date of the
joint.
Procedures PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED SPIGOT AND SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS USING THE QRP-100 QUICK RATCHET PRESS TOOL (REFERENCE: LIT-LCQRP100INST-2E): Note: The QRP-100 ratchet press is for installation of Lycofit 1/2-inch CTS and 3/4-inch IPS fittings only. Refer to the Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual and the manufacturer provided instruction document packaged with each fitting for further details and diagrams to supplement the following procedure.
Installation Procedure for Double Ended Couplings 1. Inspect the installation tool for proper orientation prior to installation. If there is any damage or deformation present on the tool or tool jaws utilize a different tool where these conditions do not exist.
2. Inspect the fitting for signs of damage prior to installation. Inspect the spigot barbs and metal stiffener for deformation that may indicate damage to the entire spigot. Discard the fitting if any of these conditions exist.
3. Wipe the pipe sections to be joined with a clean, dry cloth to assure there is no dirt, grease, or oil in the assembly area. Slide the completion sleeve onto the PE pipe exposing approximately 3 inches of the pipe end. Note: Completion sleeves are non-directional and can be installed onto the pipe via either end.
4. Slide the LycoRing, with the small diameter first (thin end), onto the PE pipe and position it approximately 1/2 inch further than the length of the fitting’s spigot from the end of the pipe. Note: The LycoRing may be damaged if the ring is pushed over the side of the pipe.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
3 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

5. Place the spigot into the ratchet tool’s fixed jaw. With one hand, slide the completion sleeve onto the LycoRing until the LycoRing starts to grip the pipe. Position the pipe and completion sleeve into the ratchet tool’s movable end, the spigot should be on the fixed end. Align the pipe to the spigot and push the pipe into the spigot, stopping when the pipe reached the first barb on the spigot.
6. Operate the ratchet tool and advance the pipe onto the spigot. Stop advancement when the pipe covers the last barb on the spigot. Inspect the PE pipe for signs of damage or undue stress after it has been advanced over the spigot. Note: To prevent possible damage to the PE pipe, ensure that the spigot and the completion sleeve are fully seated in the ratchet tool’s fixed jaw and that the tool and the pipe/coupling alignment is square so that the pipe does not drag on the edges of the tool jaw. Do not apply lubricants to the fitting’s spigot, sleeve, or the PE pipe.
7. Reverse the ratchet direction and ratchet the tool enough to pull the completion sleeve back to expose the LycoRing. Remove the LycoRing by pulling it off of the side of the pipe using the pull tab on the ring.
8. Reverse the ratchet tool’s ratchet direction and advance the completion sleeve over the pipe and
spigot by operating the ratchet. Stop the completion sleeve advancement when the sleeve is fully inserted over the spigot. Inspect the joint and again the PE pipe to ensure that there is no damage that may have occurred during the installation process.
9. Complete the other side of the coupling by repeating Steps 2 through 8.
10. Test the fitting per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. Installing Other Lycofit Fittings
Refer to page 4 of the QRP-100 Lyco Quick Ratchet Press installation procedure in the Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual for Gas Operations for guidelines on the proper spigot flange location for
each type of Lycofit fitting as well as the placement of the spigot flange in the ratchet tool’s jaw during installation. Apply the same steps used for installing double ended couplings as specified above.
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED SPIGOT AND SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS USING THE LHP-200 HYDRAULIC PRESS TOOL (REFERENCE: LIT-LCLHPINST Rev. 1B):
Note: The LHP-200 hydraulic press is for installation of Lycofit 1-1/4-inch, 1-1/2-inch, and 2-inch IPS fittings only. Lubricate the hydraulic tool’s shafts with non-synthetic lubricant only. Refer to the Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual and the manufacturer provided instruction document packaged with each fitting for further details and diagrams to supplement the following procedure. 1. Inspect the hydraulic tool to ensure there is not any damage or defamation present on the tool that might compromise the integrity of the final joint. 2. Inspect the fitting for signs of damage prior to installation. Inspect the spigot barbs and metal stiffener for deformation that may indicate damage to the entire spigot. Discard the fitting if any of these conditions exist. 3. Wipe the pipe sections to be joined with a clean, dry cloth to assure there is no dirt, grease, or oil in the assembly area. Slide the completion sleeve and then the LycoRing onto the pipe so that
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
4 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

the LycoRing is approximately 3-1/2 inches from the end of the pipe. Nest the spigot flange in the saddle of either press plate. Place the tool so that the press plate opposite of the spigot is behind the completion sleeve. 4. Slide the PE pipe over the end of the spigot and operate the hydraulic pump until the press plate is in contact with the completion sleeve. Note: Ensure the completion sleeve engages the
LycoRing and that the LycoRing does not slip along the PE pipe. 5. Continue operating the hydraulic pump to move the press plate and advance the spigot into the PE pipe until the pipe covers the last barb on the spigot. Inspect the PE pipe for signs of damage or undue stress after it has been advanced over the spigot. Note: Do not apply lubricants to the fitting’s spigot, sleeve, or the PE pipe.
6. Release the hydraulic pressure and allow the tool jaw to open enough to pull the completion sleeve back and expose the LycoRing. Remove the LycoRing by pulling it off of the side of the pipe using the pull tab on the ring.
7. Operate the hydraulic pump to move the press plate and advance the completion sleeve over the
pipe and the spigot. Stop pumping when the sleeve face is in contact with the spigot flange. Inspect the joint and again the PE pipe to ensure that there is no damage that may have occurred as part of the install process.
8. Complete the other side of the coupling by repeating Steps 2 through 7.
9. Test the fitting per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED SLIP-LOCK TYPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS (REFERENCE: ECN 2185 Rev “L” 10/31/07, 34-6034-00): 1. Excavate the area large enough to accommodate the flexing of the pipe that is required to install
the fitting. Open excavation further as necessary. 2. Verify the stab fitting is the correct size for the PE pipe. Cut the pipe so that the ends are square using a cutter approved for plastic pipe. Avoid using a hacksaw as this may result in rough ends that are difficult to chamfer.
3. Wipe the pipe sections to be joined with a clean, dry cloth to assure there is no dirt, grease, or oil in the assembly area. Inspect for scratches or gouges. If any are detected, cut again so that the last 2 to 6 inch section (depending on size) that will be inserted into the coupling has no surface defects.
4. Use the appropriate chamfering tool specified by the manufacturer, chamfer the end of the pipe to achieve a proper bevel. The chamfer permits the pipe to be stabbed without damage to the internal seals. Chamfer the pipe in the direction of the arrows on the tool for 4 to 6 turns until pipe bottoms out. If the pipe does not appear adequately chamfered, repeat the process. Keep cutting blades free of shavings.
5. Use a soft felt tip pen, crayon, or grease pencil to mark the stab depth. This measurement may be obtained by holding the pipe against the butt fusion of the coupling and marking the pipe at the end of the coupling.

JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
5 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

6. The ends of the pipe should be free of dirt and debris. Clean or purge as necessary. Check the coupling for dirt or debris. If dirt is found in the coupling, use another to ensure proper sealing. 7. Stab the pipe into the coupling so that it bottoms out. The reference mark made in Step 5 should be within 1/8-inch from the entrance of the coupling. The coupling is now locked in place. If unable to bottom out the pipe in the coupling, replace it and begin over at step 2.
8. Test per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED COMPRESSION TYPE SERVICE HEAD ADAPTERS (REFERENCE: ECN 2172 Rev D 9/07 0000-99-1045-00): 1. If installing on existing steel riser, cut upstream end (minimum 2 feet from the bend), de-burr, and install a protective sleeve. Remove old service valve from top of riser, inspect, and clean the pipe threads as necessary. 2. If pre-building a new galvanized riser, determine proper length and location of the bend. Bend and/or cut riser to the appropriate configuration. De-burr cut end and install a protective sleeve. Refer to Specification 3.16, Services, Drawing A 34735. 3. Insert 1/2-inch CTS I.D. (5/8-inch O.D.) polyethylene pipe through the riser, leaving a 10 inch minimum length of pipe extending above the riser. 4. Insert liner over the 5/8-inch O.D. pipe and slide down into the riser casing. (Top end riser liner is optional - use if available with current supply of service head adapters). 5. Apply pipe joint compound to the riser threads. Do not over-apply. 6. Install the line shield nut on the riser casing with the compression end facing up, then tighten with a wrench. 7. Slide the seal ring over the pipe and into the line shield nut. 8. Insert service pipe onto the adapter-coupling stiffener, applying pressure to the plastic pipe until it bottoms out in the adapter coupling. Push entire assembly to the line shield nut. 9. Tighten adapter coupling until it bottoms out against the shoulder of the line shield nut. 10. Install new service valve and tighten. 11. Purge the service line and then pressurize. Check the regulator for flow and lockup. Test per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED SLIP-LOCK TYPE SERVICE HEAD ADAPTERS (i.e., “PERFECTION” TYPE): 1. Follow Steps 1 and 2 under procedures for compression type service head adapters, as appropriate.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
6 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

2. Inspect the gas riser casing for burrs and damaged threads. Deburr and rethread if necessary. 3. Disconnect the service head adapter fitting from the inlet device supplied (short section of pipe nipple, threaded on one end). If the riser is already threaded, discard this short nipple. If riser is not threaded, this nipple may be welded to end of riser to provide threaded end.
4. Push the PE service line through the threaded steel nipple and/or bushing or riser casing until it extends 6 to 8 inches beyond the casing outlet. 5. Square cut the end of the PE service line and wipe clean with a dry cloth. Inspect to be sure that there are no scratches, gouges, or surface defects in the last 4 inches of the service line.
If scratches or gouges are visible, cut off the defective area, and repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Chamfer the square cut end of the PE service line with a chamfering tool recommended or supplied by the manufacturer.
7. Determine the stab depth required by checking the length of hex on the fitting body (length of
hex equals the stab depth). Mark the stab depth on the PE service line with a soft marking instrument (grease pencil, etc.). 8. Stab the service head adapter fitting onto the PE service line until the service line bottoms out
in the fitting. The mark on the PE service line should be within 1/8-inch from the end of the fitting. Note: Do not twist the fitting or pipe until fully stabbed.
9. Reconnect the service head adapter fitting and the inlet device. After applying pipe joint
compound to the riser threads, place the assembly back on the riser threads and tighten.
10. Install the service valve and tighten.
11. Purge the service line and pressurize. Check regulator for flow and lockup. Leak test per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED WELD-ON 1201 AND 1302 STYLE STEEL PUNCH TEES WITH COMPRESSION TYPE OUTLET CONNECTION FOR PE PIPE
Note: Aspects of this procedure are related to welding the steel service tee onto a steel main. These steps are described in this procedure; however, welding shall be completed using an approved weld procedure in accordance with Specification 3.22, Joining of Pipe – Steel. Services shall be installed per Specification 3.16, Pipe Installation – Services. 1. Before installation of the service tee, confirm the punch is rated for the steel pipe to be tapped. a. 3/8-inch punches are rated for tapping pipe with a 0.280-inch maximum wall thickness and a 70,000 psi maximum yield strength.
b. 1/4-inch, 1/2-inch, 3/4-inch, and 1-inch punches are rated for tapping pipe with a 0.250-inch maximum wall thickness and 65,000 psi maximum yield strength
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
7 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

2. Verify the compression fitting on the outlet of the tee is the correct size for the PE pipe being connected. Verify the SDR of the PE pipe matches the SDR stamped on the end of the stiffener. 3. Remove the O-ring cap, the punch, outlet seal ring, and compression nut from the service tee and place in the plastic bag in which the tee was shipped. Do not remove the splatter shield
from the inlet. 4. Remove the coating on the mainline and thoroughly clean off any residual rust, dirt, etc.…in the area where the service tee is to be welded. 5. Weld the service tee onto the main. Note: the service tee must be cool to the touch before re-
inserting the punch (removed during Step 3). 6. Once the service tee is installed on the main, the PE service can be connected to the tee one of two ways as follows:
a. Install the compression nut and seal ring on the outlet of the tee. Do not tighten the
compression nut. -Or-
b. Slide the compression nut and seal ring onto the PE pipe.
7. Cut the end of the PE service pipe square, deburr inside and outside, and clean thoroughly to assure there is no dirt, grease, oil etc. on the pipe in the assembly area.
8. Mark the appropriate stab length on the pipe.
a. For 3/8-inch OD, 5/8-inch OD, 7/8-inch OD and 1/2-inch IPS: Stab length = 1-11/16”
b. For 3/4-inch IPS, 1-inch IPS, 1-1/4-inch IPS, and 1-1/8-inch OD:
Stab length = 1-7/8-inch
9. Insert the PE pipe into the tee until it bottoms in the fitting. Note: Prior to completing the service line connection be sure to install a stress-relieving sleeve on the service line that will
help protect the rigid steel to PE transition per the requirements in Spec 2.13 – “Joining of Plastic Pipeline Components”. Also, refer to Drawing A-37169 in Spec 3.16 for an example of
a sleeve installation on a steel tee with PE transition.
10. Tighten the compression nut until it bottoms on the shoulder of the tee (metal to metal). The stab length line should be no more than 3/16 of an inch from the face of the compression nut.
If the stab length line is more than 3/16 of an inch from the face of the compression nut, disassemble the joint and repeat Steps 6 through 10.
11. Prior to tapping the tee fitting to allow gas to the service line, pressure test the tee and new
outlet piping as applicable per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. 12. Insert the punch in the service tee and turn clockwise by hand to avoid cross threading. Apply proper lubricant to the punch threads and tip prior to tapping. Acceptable lubricants
include thread cutting oil, tapping fluid, or tapping grease.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
8 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

13. Use a standard hex wrench (see note below) or a ratchet wrench with Continental drive key and bushing to make the tap. It is important to ensure retention of the coupon by running the punch all the way down until the punch seats on the main. Continental drive key and bushing information:
a. 1/2-inch body tees use 23-3691-00 Hex Drive Key, Bushing, and Socket Adapter b. 3/4-inch body tees use 23-3692-00 Hex Drive Key, Bushing, and Socket Adapter Note: The manufacturer has approved the use of a standard hex wrench or the Continental drive key and bushing.
14. To allow gas to the service line, back the punch valve up until it protrudes 2 to 3 threads above the top of the tee. 15. Insert the hex drive of the O-ring plug cap into the socket of the punch valve and run the unit
down until it is leak tight. Take care as the threads of the O-ring plug engage the threads of the tee body to prevent cross threading.
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED WELD-ON STYLE 1201 AND 1302 STYLE STEEL PUNCH TEES WITH SPIGOT AND SLEEVE TYPE OUTLET CONNECTION FOR PE PIPE Note: Aspects of this procedure are related to welding the steel service tee onto a steel main. These steps are described in this Specification; however, welding shall be completed using an approved weld
procedure in accordance with Specification 3.22, Joining of Pipe – Steel. Services shall be installed per Specification 3.16, Pipe Installation – Services. 1. To install the steel service tee, follow steps 1-5 in the separate procedure listed above in this specification (Procedure for Installing Approved Weld-On 1201 and 1302 Style Steel Punch Tees with Compression Type Outlet Connection for PE Pipe).
2. Once the service tee is connected to the main install the outlet pipe as described in the separate procedure listed in this specification (use the procedure for the QRP-100 ratchet press tool for 1/2-inch CTS and 3/4-inch IPS fittings or the procedure for the LHP-200
hydraulic press tool for 1-1/4-inch IPS and 2-inch IPS fittings). Note: Prior to completing the service line connection be sure to install a stress-relieving sleeve on the service line that will
help protect the rigid steel to PE transition per the requirements in Spec. 2.13 – “Joining of Plastic Pipeline Components”. Also, refer to Drawing A-37169 in Spec. 3.16 for an example of a sleeve installation on a steel tee with PE transition.
3. Prior to tapping the tee fitting to allow gas to the service line, pressure test the tee and new outlet piping as applicable per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.

4. Once the service is connected to the outlet of the service tee, tap the tee to complete the service following steps 11-15 in the separate procedure listed above in this specification (Procedure for Installing Approved Weld-On 1201 and 1302 Style Steel Punch Tees with Compression Type Outlet Connection for PE Pipe)
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
9 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED PE COMPRESSION X WELD END ADAPTER COUPLINGS (SOMETIMES REFERRED TO AS THE “BUTTON” FITTING) (REFERENCE: ECN 2625 REV “D” 08/29/14): Note: Step 2 of this procedure is related to welding the coupling. Welding shall be completed using an
approved weld procedure in accordance with Specification 3.22, Joining of Pipe – Steel. 1. Before welding the adapter coupling, remove the seal ring and compression nut from the coupling body and place in the plastic bag in which the coupling was shipped. 2. Weld coupling body following an approved welding procedure.
3. Allow welded coupling to cool to ambient temperature before installing PE pipe. 4. After the weld has cooled to ambient temperature, the PE service can be connected to the
fitting one of two ways as follows:
a. Install the seal ring and compression nut. Do not tighten the compression nut. -Or-
b. Slide the compression nut and seal ring onto the PE pipe.
5. Verify that the coupling is the correct size for the polyethylene (PE) pipe. Verify the SDR (or wall thickness) of the pipe matches the SDR (or wall thickness) stamped on the end of the
stiffener.
6. Cut PE pipe ends square, deburr inside and outside, clean thoroughly to assure there is no dirt, grease, oil, etc. on assembly area of pipe.
7. Mark the appropriate stab length on the pipe.
a. For 3/8” OD, 5/8” OD, 7/8” OD and ½” IPS: Stab length = 1-11/16”
b. For ¾” IPS, 1” IPS, 1-1/4” IPS, and 1-1/8” OD:
Stab length = 1-7/8”
8. Insert the PE pipe until it bottoms in the fitting. Note: Prior to completing the service line connection be sure to install a stress-relieving sleeve on the service line that will help protect
the rigid steel to PE transition per the requirements in Spec. 2.13 – “Joining of Plastic Pipeline Components”. Also, refer to Drawing A-37169 in Spec. 3.16 for an example of a
sleeve installation on a steel tee with PE transition.
9. Tighten compression nut until it shoulders against the outlet. The line marked for stab length should be no more than 3/16 of an inch from face of nut. If it is not, disassemble the joint and
reinstall following steps 5 through 9.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
10 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED BOLT-ON TYPE MECHANICAL TEES WITH SPIGOT AND SLEEVE TYPE OUTLET CONNECTION (REFERENCE: LIT-LCTTINST Rev. 1E): Note: Refer to the Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions Manual and the manufacturer provided instruction document packaged with each fitting for further details and diagrams to supplement the
following procedure. 1. Thoroughly clean the entire pipe surface where the tapping tee will be installed. Do not place the saddle O-rings over gouges or scratches on the pipe surface. If a scratched surface is unavoidable, refer to the procedure below for repairing scratches prior to tee installation.
2. Remove the tapping tee from the bag. Take care not to allow dirt to contaminate the O-rings or to enter the cutter cavity. Position the top half of the tapping tee to the main and align the tee’s outlet spigot in a horizontal position and press the tee onto the pipe surface. Align the bottom half of the tee with the bolt holes in the top half. Press the halves together evenly
leaving an equal gap between the halves on both sides. Spin the four flange nuts onto the bolt studs until hand tight (nuts should spin freely). Note: It is preferred the service tee be
installed on the top of the main with the spigot outlet in the horizontal position, however it is acceptable to rotate the tee as much as 90-degrees up or down from horizontal. 3. Tighten the nuts using a nut driver. Tighten the nuts one turn at a time in a crisscross pattern
until the corners of the top and bottom flanges are brought together (approximately 60 to 95 in-lbs). Do not over tighten.
4. Install the outlet pipe as described in the separate procedure listed in this specification (use
the procedure for the QRP-100 ratchet press tool for 1/2-inch CTS and 3/4-inch IPS fittings or the procedure for the LHP-200 hydraulic press tool for 1-1/4-inch IPS and 2-inch IPS fittings).
5. Pressure test the tee and new outlet piping as applicable per Specification 3.18, Pressure
Testing.
6. Remove the tapping tee cap. Be careful to keep dirt out of the cap and cutter area. Insert a 3/8-inch Lyall manufactured Lyco hex drive tool into the cutter and advance the cutter down
until contact has been made with the cutter stop. Do not continue to advance the cutter once contact has been made with the stop. Unscrew the cutter until the top of the cutter is
approximately 1/4 inch below the rim of the tapping tee top.
7. Inspect the cap for cleanliness and seating of the O-ring in the groove. Inspect the tapping tee top rim and threads for cleanliness and cutter position. Re-install the cap and tighten by
hand until the cap contacts the stop. Do not use a wrench to tighten the cap.
8. Pressurize and soap test tapping tee cap, saddle and outlet connections to assure proper assembly.
9. During backfill, ensure that the earth is fully compacted under the tapping tee; its outlet
connection, and the adjacent PE pipe.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
11 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING APPROVED BOLT-ON TYPE MECHANICAL TEES WITH SLIP-LOCK TYPE OUTLET CONNECTION (REFERENCE: ECN 2185 Rev “L” 10/31/07, 34-6034-02): Mounting surface must be clean and free of cuts and scratches when possible. If a scratched surface is unavoidable, refer to the procedure below for repairing scratches prior to tee installation.
1. Place top and bottom half of saddle on main. Insert bolts and tighten in a crisscross pattern, taking care not to rotate saddle on the main. A thread lubricant such as “Select Unyte” should be used on the bolts. Tighten the bolts until the flanges of the saddle come together along the outer edge. The flanges of the saddle may not come together next to the pipe. Bolt torque should not exceed 120 inch-pounds. Note: It is preferred the service tee be installed on the top of the main with the spigot outlet in the horizontal position, however it is acceptable to rotate the tee as much
as 90-degrees up or down from horizontal. 2. Connect service line to tee following the procedures for the slip-lock type couplings outlined in this specification.
3. Pressure test the tee and new outlet piping as applicable per Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
4. For tapping the tee, remove O-ring and cap, then insert approved drive key into punch. 5. Screw punch down until stop on drive key contacts the top of the tee. The tap is now complete.
6. To allow flow through the service, back punch up until the top of the punch is flush with top of tee.
It is important that the punch does not protrude above the tee.
7. Replace O-ring and cap. Screw down hand tight. Do not use wrenches on O-ring cap.
8. Pressurize and soap test tapping tee cap, saddle and outlet connections to assure proper assembly.
PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING SCRATCHES FROM PE PIPE PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF A MECHANICAL TAPPING TEE: This procedure shall be used when:
1. The surface of the PE pipe where the tee will be installed contains scratches that can cause an inadequate sealing surface between the pipe and the tee, and 2. Installing the tee in an alternative non-scratched location is not practical. This procedure shall not be used if the depth of any scratch exceeds 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe. If a scratch deeper than 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe is present, either replace the section with new pipe or repair the pipe using an approved repair fitting, per Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe. Scratch Repair Procedure: 1. Thoroughly clean the entire pipe surface where the mechanical fitting will be installed. An alcohol wipe is the preferred method for cleaning the pipe surface.
JOINING OF PIPE REV. NO. 18
12 OF 12 SPEC. 3.25

2. Mark the edges of proposed location of the mechanical fitting with a marker. Extend sanding of the surface a minimum of 1/2” beyond the edges of the fitting to ensure the entire area where the fitting contacts the pipe is repaired and to allow for proper visual inspection of the repair. 3. Use 80-grit emery cloth and sand the surface of the pipe evenly where the fitting will be installed until most of the scratches are removed. If the scratch depth is such that the use of 80 grit emery
cloth will cause further damage to the pipe surface, this step may be skipped and may proceed to Step 4. Do not remove more than 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe. Do not use a scraper or peeler to remove the scratches. 4. Use 180-grit emery cloth and sand the surface until no scratches remain.
5. Use 280-grit emery cloth and sand the surface once more to prepare the final surface. 6. Wipe the sanded surface clean with an alcohol wipe.
7. Continue with the Bolt-on Mechanical Tee procedure in this specification. PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING 1/2 INCH AND 3/4 INCH ABANDONMENT NUTS ON CONTINENTAL STEEL TO PE SERVICE TEE (REFERENCE: ECN 2620 REV “E” 07/22/14): 1. Remove the service tee cap. Screw down the punch completely to shut off gas flow. 2. Remove the existing compression nut and seal ring and discard.
3. Cut the PE service line as close as possible to the end of the stiffener. Do not remove the remaining pipe from the stiffener. 4. Assemble the abandonment nut with a new seal ring onto the outlet of the service tee. Tighten the abandonment nut until it contacts the shoulder of the service tee.
5. Unscrew (back out) the service tee punch to allow gas pressure through the tee to the abandonment nut and then reinstall the service tee cap. Soap test the joints for leaks.

1 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

3.3 REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES

3.32 REPAIR OF STEEL PIPE
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for determining appropriate repairs based on extent of damage to steel distribution and transmission pipelines. Each segment of pipeline that becomes unsafe must be replaced, repaired, or removed from service. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.241, §192.243, §192.245, §192.309, §192.627, §192.711, §192.713, §192.715, §192.717, §192.719, §192.723, §192.725 OTHER REFERENCES: ASME B31G – Manual for Determining the Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains Spec. 3.17, Purging Pipelines Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 3.22, Joining of Pipe – Steel Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 4.12, Safety-Related Conditions GESH Section 4 – Emergency Procedures, “Temporary Control of Escaping Gas” STEEL REPAIR REQUIREMENTS: General Each operator shall take necessary measures prior to beginning repairs to assure that the public and Company personnel are protected from danger. Typically, repairs should be made as soon as practical, depending on the degree of the hazard. Welding equipment shall not be used where an uncontrolled gas-air mixture exists. Prior to welding, cutting, or other hot work in or around a structure or area including a trench containing gas facilities, a thorough check shall be made with a combustible gas indicator (CGI). CGI readings shall continuously be taken while repairs are being made until the area is made safe. Welded repairs shall be performed by qualified welders using a qualified welding procedure. Refer to Specification 3.22, Joining of Steel Pipe. Whenever a previously buried pipeline is exposed, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534) shall be completed. Refer to Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation, for more information.

2 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

Only those methods of repair as detailed in this standard are approved as permanent repairs to welded steel mains. When a repair cannot be made in conformance with the conditions of this standard, the section of defective pipe shall be replaced with a new piece of pipe. The most appropriate method of repair permitted shall be selected from the proper “Steel Repair Selection Chart” based on operating pressure and stress (refer to the attached charts).
If a segment of steel pipeline is repaired by cutting out the damaged portion, the replacement pipe must be tested to the pressures required for a new line installation and specific information about the pressure test and pipe material shall be documented on the Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form (N-2743). Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing, “Recordkeeping.” Regardless of which method of repair is used, exposed pipe must be cleaned, have mastic reapplied or
be recoated with an approved pipeline primer, and taped according to the manufacturer’s instructions and per Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains. Corrosion damage shall be measured by a device such as a pit gauge to determine the depth of pitting.
Whenever exposed, underground Dresser-style or other steel mechanical compression fittings shall be
cut out or canned (barreled). A Cathodic Protection Technician shall be contacted to verify that the fitting is not being used as an isolation point. Cutting out or barreling may inadvertently create a problem between two separated cathodic protection systems so additional steps may be necessary before removing or barreling the fitting.
Monitoring of Pressure
Gas personnel performing work on pipelines and facilities that could result in loss of pressure or
overpressure to the system shall install accurate pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the work site. The pressure gauges shall be continuously monitored as long as is necessary, so that personnel
can respond accordingly, if system pressures are greatly affected.
Additionally, there may be times when merely monitoring downstream pressure may not be sufficient to prevent customer outages without further action. It may be necessary during warm days or periods of low
gas use to intentionally draw down the pressure of the downstream system and observe it to confirm the existence of a looped system prior to altering the system or leaving the area. Consult Gas Engineering
for recommendations prior to altering any system’s pressure.
Service Lines
When a service line has been disconnected for repair, refer to “Reinstating Service” in Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
Grinding
When grinding to eliminate a defect, care must be used to remove the entire defect. A 60 grit sanding
wheel should be used. Such grinding shall be smoothly contoured to the pipe to eliminate all possible points of stress concentration. The wall thickness shall not be ground to less than what is required for the
design pressure of the pipeline. Arc burns on steel pipe to be operated at a pressure that produces a hoop stress of 40 percent or more of SMYS must have a remaining wall thickness that is equal to either the minimum required by the

3 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

tolerances in the specification to which the pipe was manufactured or the nominal wall thickness required for the design pressure of the pipeline. Grinding and Fill Welding When grinding and fill welding, the repair area must be ground clean. The fill weld metal shall penetrate
the base material. The surface of the finished repair weld shall be ground smooth to the contour of the pipe on lines operating over 100 psig. Arc welding is required for all repairs. Patching Patches shall have a wall thickness greater than or equal to the pipe they are being installed on, have
rounded corners, and be designed to operate at less than 20 percent SMYS at the pipeline MAOP. Contact Gas Engineering for assistance determining the proper patch specifications. Sleeving
Sleeve design and testing shall be similar to patch design but must be full encirclement and should
feature a backing strip. Sleeve length should extend a minimum of 6 inches on each end of defect. Refer to the Specification 3.22, Joining of Steel Pipe, Appendix A, for specific weld procedures for sleeve installation.
Mueller Save-A-Valve Nipple or Equivalent
A Mueller Save-A-Valve nipple or equivalent fitting may be used to repair an individual corrosion pit (either leaking or non-leaking) where the diameter of the pit at the surface of the pipe is less than the
inside diameter of the nipple. The weld shall be visually limitations when using the Mueller Save-A-Valve or equivalent type fittings.
Canning (Barreling)
Gas main repair cans may be used for repairs on pipelines with a design pressure which produces a hoop
stress of less than 20 percent SMYS. The can shall be designed and fabricated using approved pipe and fittings (use of plate shall not be allowed) and pressure tested to 1.5 times the MAOP. Canning shall not
be used on pipelines operating at pressures greater than 60 psig without concurrence of Gas Engineering. Canning repairs on systems operating above 60 psig shall be designed by Gas
Engineering.
Tapping and Plugging Procedures
A copy of the manufacturer’s detailed tapping and plugging procedures for the type(s) of equipment utilized in each construction area must be kept at locations where tapping and plugging activities are
conducted. Both the tapping and plugging procedures should be reviewed periodically to ensure that responsible personnel are familiar with operating and maintenance of tapping and line stopping
equipment. Additionally, these procedures shall be reviewed as part of an equipment check and tailboard in the field prior to tapping. Only qualified individuals shall perform tapping and plugging operations
unless an individual is being observed on a one to one basis. (Refer to Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation - Plastic, “Pipe Coupon Retention Procedures,” for further guidance on retention of pipe coupons for transmission and high pressure mains.)

4 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

Replace Segment of Pipe Remove the section of pipe containing the defect from service and purge section as necessary. Remove cylindrical barrel section of pipe containing defect by making two circumferential cuts. Replacement pipe shall be of equal or better material based on the system design pressure and design requirements of Specification 2.12, Pipe Design-Steel. Pipe used to replace a segment of pipeline must be pressure
tested to the requirements of new main and to meet the MAOP of the pipeline system being repaired. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. Pre-Tested Steel Pipe When making a repair as a result of third party damage or material failure and it is not possible or
practicable to test the section of pipe being replaced, pre-tested pipe shall be used. A Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form (N-2743) shall be filled out and kept at the local office for all pre-tested pipe. Once the pipe is installed, a copy of the Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form must be kept for the life of
facility with the project file (not at the warehouse with the uninstalled pipe records). If pre-tested steel pipe is used to make a repair on high pressure facilities, then a copy of the Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation
form and pressure test chart must be sent to Gas Engineering to include in the project file. The tested pipe shall be segregated from the rest of the pipe stock and identified as pre-tested pipe. The pipe should be periodically inspected and remarked as necessary to indicate its status. Refer to Specifications 3.12 and 3.13 for further guidance on Storage and Handling of pipe and Specification 3.18 regarding pre-
installation testing.
Dents (Pipe Distortion)
Distortion or denting may be defined as a depression, which produces a gross disturbance in the curvature of the pipe wall (as opposed to a scratch or gouge, which reduces the pipe wall thickness). The
depth of a dent shall be measured as the gap between the lowest point of the dent and the prolongation of the original contour of the pipe in any direction. Dents on a longitudinal or circumferential weld
operating at less than 20 percent SMYS can be treated the same as a dent, which does not affect a weld. Dents in a pipeline with a MAOP equal to 20 percent SMYS, or more, which affect the longitudinal or
circumferential weld shall be removed or repaired by a method that reliable engineering tests and analysis show can permanently restore the serviceability of the pipe. A dent with mechanical damage is
more severe than a dent or mechanical damage alone.
Percent distortion shall be defined as the ratio of the depth of the dent to the actual diameter of the pipe times 100. Distortion exceeding the limitations in the “Steel Repair Selection Charts” shall be removed.

5 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

Repair Clamps and Sleeves Repair clamps shall only be used when it is not practical to use the repair methodologies as instructed in the “Steel Repair Selection Charts”. Only approved repair clamps and sleeves may be used (refer to the Foreword of this manual for what is considered “approved”). Unless detailed in the following specifications, the manufacturer’s installation procedures shall be followed. Repair clamps should be
temporary unless they are welded in place and meet the required ANSI ratings of the main. An anode shall be cad welded to all permanent clamps and the clamps coated in mastic. Contact the Cathodic Protection department to determine proper size of anode.
Transmission Lines
The following pertains to transmission repairs other than those required under the Transmission Integrity Management Plan (TIMP), which is a separate document maintained by Gas Engineering. The operating pressure must be at a safe level during repair operations.
The strength of pipe based on actual remaining wall thickness shall be determined by using ASME B31G
to determine a safe pressure reduction if repair or replacement is not feasible. Testing of repairs made by welding shall be visually inspected to ensure that the welding is performed in accordance with the welding procedure and that the acceptability of a nondestructive weld is in
accordance with Section 9 of API 1104 per §192.241.
Under the following conditions, visual examinations of the welds may be substituted for radiographic examinations:
1. The pipe has a nominal diameter of less than 6 inches regardless of stress level; or
2. The pipeline operates at a pressure of less than 40 percent of SMYS and the welds are so limited that radiographic testing is impractical. A waiver from Gas Engineering should be obtained to
avoid radiographic examination in this case.
A waiver from Gas Engineering should be obtained to avoid NDT examination in either case.
Leak Repair and Residual Gas Checks
After a leak is repaired, it shall be checked for residual gas while the excavation is still open by a person qualified in Avista Side Leak Investigation. The perimeter of the leak area shall be bar holed and checked
with a combustible gas indicator in percent gas mode to determine if repairs were adequate and if there is migration from a secondary leak. A minimum of four bar hole readings shall be taken at equally spaced
points at the perimeter of the excavation or from within the bell hole prior to backfill to fulfill this requirement.
If readings indicate the presence of gas, the perimeter shall be expanded, and additional bar hole
readings taken until the extent of the leak is found and documented down to less than 0.05 percent gas in air. If the discovery of gas is determined to be a second leak, a new order shall be established by
contacting the Avista Call Center. Bar hole locations shall be mapped as appropriate. Repairs to damaged service lines require additional leak survey actions. Refer to “Service Line Leak Survey” in Specification 5.11, Leak Survey for more information.

6 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

Whenever a pipeline is exposed, whether steel or PE, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534) shall be completed. Further detail regarding the use of the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form is detailed in Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation. Pressure test information is required if a section of pipe is replaced. It can either be tested in the field or by using pretested pipe. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
Recordkeeping Records and maps of repairs performed shall be retained for the life of the facilities. Specific Repair Methods
The following three Steel Repair Selection Charts detail the repair methodology to be used for damaged steel pipelines.
STEEL REPAIR SELECTION CHART FOR PIPELINES WITH AN MAOP OF 100 PSIG OR LESS
TYPES OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF REPAIR LIMITATIONS ON METHODS
1. MECHANICAL DAMAGE: NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES, GROOVES,DENTS, AND HOLES

A. DENT-LESS THAN 10% DISTORTION 1. NO REPAIR REQUIRED NO NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES OR GROOVES IN DENT.
B. DENT-MORE THAN 10% DISTORTION (1/2” FOR 4-1/2” O.D. & SMALLER)
1. SLEEVING OR CANNING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP.
2. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
C. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-LESS THAN 50% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS
1. GRINDING LESS THAN 10% DISTORTION OR DENT (1/2" FOR 4-1/2" O.D. & SMALLER). PIPE WALL NOT TO BE REDUCED TO LESS THAN 50% OF ORIGINAL NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS.
D. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-MORE THAN 50 PERCENT OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS
1. GRINDING AND WELDING LESS THAN 10% DISTORTION OR DENT (1/2" FOR 4-1/2" O.D. & SMALLER. REPAIR NOT TO EXCEED 1/4 CIRCUMFERENCE OF PIPE NOR 5 SQUARE INCHES. NOT MORE THAN ONE REPAIR PER FOOT OF PIPE LENGTH.
2. PATCHING LESS THAN 10% DISTORTION OR DENT (1/2" FOR 4-1/2" O.D. & SMALLER. PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20% SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
3. SLEEVING OR CANNING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP.
4. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
E. HOLE 1. PATCHING PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20% SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE SLEEVE OR CAN MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS AT THE PIPELINE MAOP.
3. LEAK CLAMP PRESSURE RATING OF CLAMP MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE PIPELINE MAOP.
4. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
2. CORROSION DAMAGE, TO INCLUDE BOTH GENERAL CORROSION AND LOCALIZED CORROSION PITTING (as measured with a pit gauge)

A. DEPTH LESS THAN 50% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS 1. NO REPAIR REQUIRED CLEAN AND RECOAT BURIED PIPE OR REPAINT ABOVE GRADE PIPE.
B. DEPTH OVER 50% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS BUT LESS THAN 80%-NO LEAKAGE.
1. GRINDING AND WELDING REPAIR NOT TO EXCEED 1/4 CIRCUMFERENCE OF PIPE NOR 5 SQUARE INCHES. NOT MORE THAN ONE REPAIR PER FOOT OF PIPE LENGTH.
2. PATCHING PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20% SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
3. SLEEVING OR CANNING NO LIMITATIONS.
4. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING) 2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE.
5. LEAK CLAMP

7 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

TYPES OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF REPAIR LIMITATIONS ON METHODS
2. CORROSION DAMAGE, TO INCLUDE BOTH GENERAL CORROSION AND LOCALIZED CORROSION PITTING (as measured with a pit gauge) (CON’T)

C. DEPTH 80% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS OR MORE-INCLUDING LEAKING CORROSION PITS
1. PATCHING SAME AS 2.B.2.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING NO LIMITATIONS.
3. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING) 2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE.
4. LEAK CLAMP
5. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
D. EXTENT OF THE CORROSION IS SUCH THAT THE REPAIRS IN A, B & C ARE NOT FEASIBLE
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED SHOULD BE REMOVED.
3. LEAKS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM A. ALL 1. PATCHING SAME AS 2.B.2. EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
3. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING) 2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE, FOR EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
4. NON-LEAKING CRACKS OR DEFECTS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM
A. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK GREATER THAN 2" LONG, A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK THAT IS MORE THAN 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR A CRACK THAT PENETRATES EITHER THE ROOT OR SECOND BEAD
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED. IF NOT FEASIBLE TO TAKE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE, INSTALL SLEEVE.
B. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2" LONG, A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR OTHER DEFECTS
1. GRINDING OR FILL WELDING IF CRACK PENETRATES EITHER THE ROOT OR SECOND BEAD, REPLACE PIPE SEGMENT.
2. PATCHING, SLEEVING OR CANNING LIMITATIONS FOR PATCHES SAME AS 2.B.2.
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
5. LEAKS IN BODY OF FITTING OR IN CLAMPS A. ALL 1. CANNING EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
2. REPLACE FITTING OR CLAMP NO LIMITATIONS.
STEEL REPAIR SELECTION CHART FOR PIPELINES WITH AN MAOP GREATER THAN 100 PSIG
BUT LESS THAN 500 PSIG, AND AN OPERATING STRESS LESS THAN 20 PERCENT OF SMYS AT
THE PIPELINE MAOP
TYPES OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF REPAIR LIMITATIONS ON METHODS
1. MECHANICAL DAMAGE: NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES, GROOVES, DENTS, AND HOLES
A. DENT-LESS THAN 5% DISTORTION 1. NO REPAIR REQUIRED NO NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES AND GROOVES IN DENT.
B. DENT-MORE THAN 5% DISTORTION (3/8" FOR 6-5/8" O.D. & SMALLER) 1. SLEEVING OR CANNING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS.
2. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
C NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-LESS THAN 10% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS 1. GRINDING PIPE WALL NOT TO BE REDUCED TO LESS THAN 90% OF NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESS. DENT OR DISTORTION LESS THAN 5% OF O.D.
D NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE DEPTH-MORE THAN 10% BUT LESS THAN 30% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS
1. GRINDING AND WELDING DENT OF DISTORTION LESS THAN 5% OF O.D. (3/8" FOR 6-5/8" O.D. AND SMALLER). REPAIR NOT TO EXCEED 1/4 OF PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE NOR 4 SQUARE INCHES. NOT MORE THAN ONE REPAIR PER 5 PIPE DIAMETERS OF LENGTH.
2 PATCHING DENT OR DISTORTION LESS THAN 5% OF O.D. (3/8" FOR 6-5/8" O.D. AND SMALLER). PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20% SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
3. SLEEVING OR CANNING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20 SMYS.
E. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-DEPTH GREATER THAN 30% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS
1. PATCHING PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20% SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS. PERCENT
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.

8 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

TYPES OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF REPAIR LIMITATIONS ON METHODS
F. HOLE 1. PATCHING PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. LENGTH NOT OVER 10 PIPE DIAMETERS ON PIPE OVER 8-5/8 O.D. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS, WALL THICKNESS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED CARRIER PIPE, AND OPERATE AT LESS THAN 20 PERCENT SMYS AT PIPELINE MAOP.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE SLEEVE OR CAN MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS AT THE PIPELINE MAOP.
3. LEAK CLAMP PRESSURE RATING OF CLAMP MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE PIPELINE MAOP.
4. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
2. CORROSION DAMAGE, TO INCLUDE BOTH GENERAL CORROSION AND LOCALIZED CORROSION PITTING (as measured with a pit gauge)
A. DEPTH LESS THAN 20% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS 1. NO REPAIR REQUIRED CLEAN AND RECOAT BURIED PIPE OR REPAINT ABOVE GRADE PIPE.
B. DEPTH BETWEEN 20% AND 30% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS 1. GRINDING AND WELDING REPAIR NOT TO EXCEED 1/4 CIRCUMFERENCE OF PIPE NOR 4 SQUARE INCHES. NOT MORE THAN ONE REPAIR PER 5 DIAMETERS OF LENGTH.
2. PATCHING SAME AS 1.E.1.
3. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS.
4. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING)
2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE.
5. LEAK CLAMP
C DEPTH OVER 30% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS BUT LESS THAN 80%-NO LEAKAGE 1. PATCHING SAME AS 1.E.1.
2. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS.
3. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING)
2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE.
D DEPTH 80% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS OR MORE-INCLUDING LEAKING CORROSION PITS 1. PATCHING SAME AS 1.E.1.
2. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS
3. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING)
2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE.
4. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
2. CORROSION DAMAGE, TO INCLUDE BOTH GENERAL CORROSION AND LOCALIZED CORROSION PITTING (as measured with a pit gauge) (CON’T)
E. EXTENT OF THE CORROSION IS SUCH THAT THE REPAIRS IN A, B, C & D ARE NOT FEASIBLE
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED SHOULD BE REMOVED.
3. LEAKS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM A. ALL 1. PATCHING SAME AS 1.E.1. EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
2. SLEEVING OR CANNING EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS.
3. MUELLER SAVE-A-VALVE NIPPLE (OR EQUIVALENT FITTING)
2" MAXIMUM SIZE NIPPLE, FOR EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY.
4. NON-LEAKING CRACKS OR DEFECTS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM
A. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK GREATER THAN 2" LONG, A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK THAT IS MORE THAN 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR A CRACK THAT PENETRATES EITHER THE ROOT OR SECOND BEAD
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED. IF NOT FEASIBLE TO TAKE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE, INSTALL SLEEVE.
B. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2" LONG, A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR OTHER DEFECTS
1. GRINDING AND FILL WELDING IF CRACK PENETRATES EITHER THE ROOT OR SECOND BEAD, REPLACE PIPE SEGMENT.
2. PATCHING, SLEEVING OR CANNING LIMITATIONS FOR PATCHES SAME AS 1.E.1. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS.
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
5. LEAKS IN BODY OF FITTING OR IN CLAMPS A. ALL 1. REPLACE FITTING OR CLAMP NO LIMITATIONS.
2. CANNING EXISTING FACILITIES ONLY. MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE CANS MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS.

9 OF 9 SPEC. 3.32

STEEL REPAIR SELECTION CHART FOR PIPELINES WITH AN MAOP OF 500 PSI OR GREATER,
OR AN OPERATING STRESS OF 20 PERCENT OR MORE OF SMYS AT THE PIPELINE MAOP
TYPES OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF REPAIR LIMITATIONS ON METHODS
1. MECHANICAL DAMAGE: NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES, ARC BURN, GROOVES, DENTS, AND HOLES

A. DENT LESS THAN 2% DISTORTION 1. NO REPAIR REQUIRED NO NOTCHES, SCRATCHES, GOUGES, AND GROOVES IN DENT. NO WELDS AFFECTED BY DENT.
B. DENT MORE THAN 2% DISTORTION (1/4" FOR O.D. LESS THAN 12.750") 1. SLEEVING DENT MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP. IF DENT AFFECTS A WELD, REPAIR AS IN 1.B.2.
2. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
C. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-DEPTH LESS THAN 10% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS AND LESS THAN 8% OF PIPE W.T. FOR WELDED PIPE 20" O.D. OR LARGER
1. GRINDING PIPE WALL NOT TO BE REDUCED TO LESS THAN 90% OF NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS (90% ON WELDED PIPE 20" O.D. OR LARGER) DENT OR DISTORTION LESS THAN 2% OF O.D. (1/4" FOR O.D. LESS THAN 12.750").
D. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, GROOVE-DEPTH 10% OR MORE OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS. DESIGN PRESSURE LESS THAN 40% SMYS.
1. SLEEVING OR CLOCK SPRING® DENT OR DISTORTION MUST NOT PREVENT PROPER FIT UP.
E. NOTCH, SCRATCH, GOUGE, ARC BURN GROOVE-DEPTH 10% OR MORE OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS. DESIGN PRESSURE 40% SMYS OR MORE. (8% OR MORE FOR WELDED PIPE 20" OR LARGER.)
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED. IF NOT FEASIBLE TO TAKE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE, REPAIR WITH SLEEVE AS IN 1.B.1. %
F. HOLE 1. SLEEVING MATERIAL USED TO FABRICATE SLEEVE MUST NOT EXCEED 20% SMYS AT THE PIPELINE MAOP.
2. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
2. CORROSION DAMAGE, TO INCLUDE BOTH GENERAL CORROSION AND LOCALIZED CORROSION PITTING (as measured with a pit gauge)
A. DEPTH 10% OR LESS OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS. 1. ENGINEERING TO DETERMINE THE REMAINING STRENGTH OF THE PIPE.
ENGINEERING TO DETERMINE THE APPROPRIATE REPAIR METHOD, IF ANY.
B. DEPTH OVER 10% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS BUT LESS THAN 80%-NO LEAKAGE.
1. PATCHING PIPE OF NOT MORE THAN 40,000 PSI SMYS. LENGTH OR WIDTH OF PATCH NOT TO EXCEED 1/2 PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE. A MINIMUM OF 3" CLEARANCE BETWEEN PATCHES. PATCH SHALL HAVE ROUNDED CORNERS.
2. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS.
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
C. DEPTH 80% OF PIPE WALL THICKNESS OR MORE-INCLUDING LEAKING CORROSION PITS
1. PATCHING SAME AS 2.B.1.
2. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS.
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
D. EXTENT OF THE CORROSION IS SUCH THAT THE REPAIRS IN A, B & C ARE NOT FEASIBLE
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED SHOULD BE REMOVED.
3. LEAKS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM A. ALL 1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED. IF NOT FEASIBLE TO TAKE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE, REPAIR WITH SLEEVE.
4. NON-LEAKING CRACKS OR DEFECTS IN WELD OR PIPE WELD SEAM
A. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK GREATER THAN 2" LONG, A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK MORE THAN 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR A CRACK THAT PENETRATES EITHER THE ROOT OR SECOND BEAD
1. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED. IF NOT FEASIBLE TO TAKE MAIN OUT OF SERVICE, INSTALL SLEEVE.
B. ANY LONGITUDINAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2", A BRANCH OR CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD CRACK LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 8% OF WELD LENGTH, OR OTHER DEFECTS
1. GRINDING OR FILL WELDING AT LEAST 1/8" WALL THICKNESS REMAINING. REDUCE PRESSURE TO BELOW 20% SYMS PRIOR TO MAKING REPAIR. INSPECT REPAIR. IF DEFECT REMAINS, REPAIR AS IN 4.A.1.
2. SLEEVING NO LIMITATIONS.
3. REPLACE SEGMENT OF PIPE ENTIRE SECTION AFFECTED MUST BE REMOVED.
5. LEAKS IN BODY OF FITTING OR IN CLAMPS A. ALL 1. REPLACE FITTING OR CLAMP X-RAY TIE-IN WELDS OF REPLACED FITTINGS.

REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 8
1 OF 4 SPEC. 3.32A

3.32A PERMANENT REPAIR SLEEVES
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for installation of permanent repair sleeves. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.241, §192.245, §192.309, §192.725 OTHER REFERENCES:
API 1104 OR API 1107
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
Spec. 3.22, Joining of Pipe – Steel Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe General Employees performing welding operations on permanent repair sleeves shall be properly trained and qualified to weld on permanent sleeves per API 1104 or API 1107: DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR USE OF “PLIDCO SPLIT-SLEEVE” PERMANENT STEEL REPAIR CLAMP:
General The Plidco Split-Sleeve may be used for permanent repairs of defects in steel pipelines where a full encirclement sleeve is required or where field conditions preclude other methods of repair. The sleeve consists of 2 semi-circular sections of a specified steel seamless pipe with bolting ears on opposing sides. The sleeve is separated into two pieces by removing the bolts and studs. It is then installed on the pipe, the bolts and studs re-installed and torqued. A special elastomer seal and retainer system accomplishes the sealing process. The Plidco Split-Sleeve may also be welded into position. Precautions The following precautions shall be observed when installing the Plidco Split-Sleeve:
• Make sure that there is sufficient space in the trench to safely install the sleeve, torque the bolts, and perform the welding operation (if necessary).
• If installing the sleeve on a pipeline that has an active leak, take precautions to avoid accidental ignition of gas. Use a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) if entering an oxygen deficient
atmosphere.
• Make sure that the sleeve is the proper size and length to fully cover the damaged area.
• Check the working pressure and temperature on the label of the sleeve. Do not exceed the maximum working pressure or temperature (also note minimum working temperature).
• Do not use the sleeve to couple pipe.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 8
2 OF 4 SPEC. 3.32A

• Remove all coatings, rust, and scale from the pipe surface where the circumferential seals of the sleeve will contact the pipe. The seal can tolerate minor surface irregularities up to +- 1/32 of an inch.
• Use caution when transporting, lifting, and installing the sleeve as contact with the sleeves or retaining rings can result in the seals being damaged or pulled from their grooves.
• On models with vent taps, make sure that a nipple and valve are installed prior to installation
(leave the valve in the open position until the sleeve is torqued). In some cases, the vent tap may be simply plugged off. Installation
1. Coat exposed surfaces with a lubricant (Buna-Nitrile seals may be lubricated with either a
petroleum, silicone, or glycerin-based lubricant. See manufacturer’s instructions if using a sleeve with other than Buna-N).
2. Disassemble the sleeve. Clean and lubricate the stud bolts and nuts. Prove free and easy running prior to installation.
3. Place reference marks on the pipe as necessary to assist with centering the sleeve over the damage area.
4. Assemble the sleeve around the pipe making sure the yellow painted ends are matched, and that the sleeve is centered over the leak or damaged area as much as possible. Consider loosely
assembling the sleeve to one side of the leak (or damage), then re-positioning it over the critical area.
5. Torque stud bolts and nuts uniformly to the following:
Nominal Diameter Wrench Opening Torque (ft-lb)
of Stud Bolt (in) Across Flats (in)
5/8 – 11 1-1/16 56
3/4 - 10 1-1/4 98
7/8 – 9 1-7/16 156
1 – 8 1-5/8 233
(See manufacturer’s instructions for torque specifications for larger sizes)
6. To complete assembly, the stud bolts should be rechecked for the recommended torque. The
side bars are gapped approximately 1/8-inch when the sleeve is fully tightened.
Field Welding Instructions The following instructions shall be followed when permanently welding the Plidco Split-Sleeve on steel pipelines.
• The pipeline should be operating at or near MAOP before performing welding operations.
• Use electrodes which have been properly stored in a dry box and are of equal or greater tensile strength than the pipe. Low hydrogen electrodes (E-XX18) are recommended for the fillet welds due to their high resistance to moisture pick-up and hydrogen cracking. They are also the
preferred electrode for seal welding the stud bolts and nuts. SMAW filler metals that include the cellulose coated electrodes (E-XX10) are acceptable provided they are proven by procedure
qualification. Do not use cellulose coated electrodes for seal welding the stud bolts and nuts. The GMAW welding process may also be used.
• Carefully control the size and shape of the circumferential fillet welds. The size of the fillet weld should be at least 1.4 times the wall thickness of the pipe.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 8
3 OF 4 SPEC. 3.32A

• The fillet weld face should have a concave face, with streamlined blending into both members of the sleeve. Avoid notches and undercuts.
• Monitor the heat generated by welding or preheating, particularly near the area of the seals. Use temperature crayons or probe thermometers. If the heat generated approaches the temperature limit of the seal material, welding should be halted or sequenced to another part of the fitting so that the affected area has a chance to cool (allow cooling in ambient conditions, do not force cool the area).
• The stud bolts are made of AISI 4140 steel with high carbon equivalence (grade B7). Use low hydrogen electrodes (E-XX18) and a modest (not over 200 degrees F) preheat to reduce the problem of hydrogen cracking or pinholes. The pre-heat will dry out any moisture, oil dampness,
or thread lubricant that may be present in the seal weld area. GMAW welding procedures may also be used.
Welding Sequence
1. Fillet weld the ends of the sleeve to the pipe.
2. Seal weld the side openings. 3. Re-torque the stud bolts and nuts.
4. Seal weld around the bottoms of the nuts to the sidebars. 5. Seal weld the nuts to the stud bolts.
Testing
Test the Plidco sleeve if required. Test pressure can be up to 1-1/2 times the design working pressure.
Storage
Store the sleeves in a protected area, out of sunlight. Wrapping the container or sleeve in plastic will help
to also protect it from deterioration due to ozone and other atmospheric contaminants.
It is recommended that the elastomeric packing, the stud bolts, and the nuts be coated with a heavy grease to prevent rusting and deterioration.
The elastomer packing has a shelf life of 2 to 20 years depending on the storage precautions used. Use
the “thumbnail” test to determine if the elastomer is still usable. Push your thumb into the exposed packing. If it returns to its original shape, it should be okay to use. If the thumbnail imprint remains, it should be replaced. DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR USE OF “TD WILLIAMSON PERMANENT HEMI-HEAD REPAIR SPHERES”:
General A 20-inch diameter repair sphere is available for use with 4-inch, 6-inch, 8-inch, and 10-inch pipe sizes. This repair sphere is available marked but not cut to a specific pipe size which requires field scarfing. Paint marks on the sleeves indicate approximate points to scarf (check actual pipe dimensions to
determine actual points to cut).
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 8
4 OF 4 SPEC. 3.32A

Precautions The following precautions shall be observed when installing the repair sphere:
• Make sure that there is sufficient space in the trench to safely install the sleeve, torque the bolts, and perform the welding operation (if necessary).
• If installing the sleeve on a pipeline that has an active leak, take precautions to avoid accidental ignition of gas. Use a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) if entering an oxygen deficient atmosphere.
• Make sure that the sleeve is the proper size and length to fully cover the damaged area.
• Check the working pressure and temperature on the label of the sleeve. Do not exceed the maximum working pressure or temperature (also note minimum working temperature).
• Do not use the sleeve to couple pipe.
Installation 1. Check the area on the pipe where fitting is to be installed. Clean pipe thoroughly and check roundness. Pipe more than 1/8-inch out of roundness may require special preparation such as grinding the fitting bore. 2. Remove moisture from the pipe before installing sleeve. Heat from an oxy-fuel torch is the most common method of removal. 3. Clean sleeve edges thoroughly where weld is to be made. Remove any paint, dirt, rust, oil, or other foreign matter. 4. Center and level sleeve. The sleeve should be positioned so that the vent port is on the top. 5. Remove the pipe plug from the top of the sleeve. Fit-Up and Welding Sequence Employees performing welding operations on the repair spheres shall be properly trained and qualified to weld on permanent sleeves per API 1104 or API 1107: 1. Reduce the welding gap on the end fillet weld to a uniform minimum (1/8-inch maximum is recommended). 2. Establish a 1/16-inch to 3/16-inch gap between the top and bottom fitting halves for the longitudinal welds. 3. Use electrodes which have been properly stored in a dry box and are of equal or greater tensile strength than the pipe. Low hydrogen electrodes (E-XX18) are recommended for the fillet welds due to their high resistance to moisture pick-up and hydrogen cracking. The GMAW welding process may also be used. Use the proper sequence of welds:
• Longitudinal weld first
• One end of circumferential weld
• Other end of circumferential weld 4. Replace the pipe plug in the vent after completion of welding.
Inspection Conduct a visual examination for cracks, lack of fusion, or undercutting.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 19
1 OF 4 SPEC. 3.33

3.33 REPAIR OF PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) PIPE SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for determining appropriate repairs based on the extent of damage to plastic distribution pipelines. Each segment of pipeline that becomes unsafe must be replaced, repaired,
or removed from service. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.311, §192.614, §192.725
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation, Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains Spec. 3.17, Purging Pipelines Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing
Spec. 3.23, Joining of Pipe - Plastic - Heat Fusion Spec. 3.25, Joining of Pipe - Plastic - Mechanical Spec. 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Spec. 5.17, Reinstating Gas Pipelines and Facilities
PLASTIC REPAIR REQUIREMENTS: General Each operator shall take necessary measures prior to beginning repairs to assure that the public and
Company personnel are protected from danger. Each imperfection or damage that would impair the serviceability of plastic pipe must be repaired or removed. Prior to performing repairs to plastic pipe, a thorough check shall be made with a combustible gas indicator (CGI). CGI readings shall be continuously taken while repairs are being made until the area is made safe.
Only those methods of repair as detailed in this standard are approved as permanent repairs to polyethylene mains. When a repair cannot be made in conformance with the conditions of this standard, the section of defective pipe shall be cut out and replaced with a new piece of pipe.
If a segment of plastic pipeline is repaired by cutting out the damaged portion, the replacement pipe must be tested to the pressures required for a new line installation and specific information about the pressure test and pipe material shall be documented on the Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form (N-2743). Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing, “Recordkeeping.”
When a pipeline is exposed, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534) shall be completed. Refer to Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation for more information.

REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 19
2 OF 4 SPEC. 3.33

Monitoring of Pressure Gas personnel performing work on pipelines and facilities that could result in the loss pressure or overpressure to the system shall install accurate pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the work site. The pressure gauges shall be continuously monitored as long as is necessary, so that personnel can respond accordingly if system pressures are greatly affected.
Additionally, there may be times when merely monitoring downstream pressure may not be sufficient to prevent customer outages without further action. It may be necessary during warm days or periods of low gas use to intentionally draw down the pressure of the downstream system and observe it to confirm the existence of a looped system prior to altering the system or leaving the area. Consult Gas Engineering for recommendations prior to altering any system’s pressure.
Pre-Tested Pipe When making a repair as a result of third party damage or material failure, and it is not possible or
practical to test the section of pipe being replaced, pre-tested pipe shall be used. A Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form (N-2743) shall be filled out and kept at the local office for all pre-tested pipe.
Once the pipe is installed, a copy of the Pre-Tested Pipe Documentation form must be kept for the life of facility with the project file (not at the warehouse with the uninstalled pipe records). The tested pipe shall be segregated from the rest of the pipe stock and identified as pre-tested pipe. The pipe should be
periodically inspected and remarked as necessary to indicate its status. Refer to Specification 3.13, Pipe Installation - Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains for PE print line information and for storage and handling of the
pipe. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing regarding pre-installation testing.
Static Charges
Polyethylene is a poor conductor of electricity; therefore, precautions must be taken to prevent build-up of static electrical charges on plastic pipe that is damaged and leaking or at squeeze points. These static
charges, if not properly grounded, might cause ignition in a gaseous atmosphere. Refer to Specification 3.34, Squeeze-Off of PE Pipe and Prevention of Static Electricity, “Prevention of Accidental Ignition by
Static Electricity,” and Specification 3.17, Purging Pipelines, “Prevention of Accidental Ignition” for further items to consider when working near gas pipeline facilities.
Temporary Repairs
Temporary repairs may be made using an approved full encirclement stainless steel clamp, however
these clamps are not acceptable as a permanent repair solution.
Permanent Repairs
Permanent repairs may be made by replacing the damaged pipe with a workable length of new pipe or an approved repair fitting. A repair fitting shall be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions.
The following “Plastic Repair Selection Chart” details the required repairs for damaged polyethylene pipe.

REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 19
3 OF 4 SPEC. 3.33

PLASTIC REPAIR SELECTION CHART
TYPE OF DEFECT EXTENT OF DEFECT PERMISSIBLE METHOD OF PERMANENT
Scratches, gouges, cuts, and abrasions
Pipe Size Pipe Wall 1/2" CTS 0.009" 3/4" IPS 0.009" 1-1/4" IPS 0.016" 2" IPS 0.021" 3" IPS 0.030" 4" IPS 0.039" 6" IPS 0.058"
If defect is less than this depth (i.e. 10 percent of the pipe wall), pipe damage should be sanded smooth. Soap test to assure that no crack or slice exists. Refer to Spec. 3.25, Joining of Pipe - Plastic – Mechanical, for complete instructions for sanding pipe. If defect is equal or greater than this depth, defective pipe shall be replaced with new pipe or repaired with an approved repair fitting.
creases, holes, and No limit Defective pipe shall be replaced with new pipe or an approved repair fitting.
Cracks No limit The new pipe segment should extend at least 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater,
Damage to Service Line Repair requirements for a dig-in or otherwise damaged plastic service lines.
Direct buried plastic service: Visually inspect the plastic pipe upstream and downstream from the area of contact. When a service line has been disconnected for repair (merely changing out the meter valve does not apply) resulting in an interruption of gas supply to the customer, the service line must be re-tested from the point of disconnect
to the meter valve in the same manner as a new service line before reconnecting. If provisions are made to maintain continuous service to the customer such as by installation of a bypass or maintaining line pack in some fashion, any part of the original service line used to maintain continuous service need not be tested. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. After third party excavation damage to services, a gas leak survey must be performed from the point of damage back to the service tie-in.
Plastic service inserted into an existing casing: If casing is damaged (broken, bent, or crushed), replace the plastic carrier pipe 2-feet upstream and downstream of the dig-in location and soap-test the replaced section. The casing pipe should be cut back 1-foot from the plastic pipe tie-in points and casing plugs should be installed where the plastic exits and enters the casing. Follow the same procedures as above. If additional damage is found, replace the
service.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 19
4 OF 4 SPEC. 3.33

Heat Damage Repair requirements for plastic service inserted risers or prefabricated non-corrodible risers for meter sets exposed to, or damaged by, a fire or excessive heat:
• Plastic pipe is sensitive to heat. Therefore, whenever a plastic service inserted riser or prefabricated non-corrodible riser may have been subjected to unusually high temperatures, such as being exposed to a house fire or meter fire, the plastic insert or the entire riser must be replaced.
• Pressure testing of the service is not sufficient because the plastic piping inside the riser may hold a short duration air pressure test but could still be damaged to the point that, on a long-term basis, it will eventually rupture. Marking Joints For plastic joints, the qualified individual who performed the joint shall use a permanent marker to legibly sign the pipe with their first initial and full last name, and shall also mark the date of the joint.
Recordkeeping Records and maps of repairs performed shall be retained for the life of the facilities.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
1 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

3.34 SQUEEZE-OFF OF PE PIPE AND PREVENTION OF STATIC ELECTRICITY
SCOPE: To establish a procedure by which polyethylene pipe may be squeezed-off in order to control gas distribution pressure in emergency situations or during certain pipeline construction procedures. Also included in this section are procedures for prevention of accidental ignition by static electricity when working with polyethylene (PE) pipe. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.751 WAC 296-809, 480-93-178 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation - Plastic Mains Spec. 3.17, Purging Pipelines Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic Pipe Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook)
General The primary method for pressure control in Avista’s distribution systems is the use of available system valves. When polyethylene pipe is encountered, squeeze-off using suitable tools and equipment may also be used as a control method. Squeeze-off is frequently used to stop the flow of gas for emergency repairs; it can also be used to control pressure during the construction of plastic pipelines. Squeeze-Off Tools Squeeze-off tools suitable for use on plastic pipe consist of round steel bars and a mechanical or hydraulic means of forcing the bars together. The tools are designed to squeeze the pipe until the inside surfaces meet and shutoff is achieved. To ensure proper flow control and to minimize damage to plastic pipe, squeeze-off tools shall have mechanical stops to limit the minimum gap between the squeeze bars to a tolerance that will prevent damage to the pipe. The bars themselves shall be rounded and shall conform to the diameter recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
Monitoring of Pressures Gas personnel performing work on pipelines and facilities that could result in the loss of pressure or overpressure to the system shall install accurate pressure gauges upstream and downstream of the work site. The pressure gauges shall be continuously monitored as long as is necessary, so that personnel can respond accordingly if system pressures are greatly affected. Additionally, there may be times when merely monitoring downstream pressure may not be sufficient to prevent customer outages without further action. It may be necessary during warm days or periods of low gas use to intentionally draw down the pressure of the downstream system and observe it to confirm the
existence of a looped system prior to altering the system or leaving the area. Consult Gas Engineering for recommendations prior to altering any system’s pressure.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
2 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

Prevention of Accidental Ignition by Static Electricity Static electricity can build up on any non-conductor such as plastic pipe, therefore the possibility exists that a spark discharge of sufficient energy could cause ignition of natural gas if the proper air/gas mixture is present. It is also possible for repair crews to receive shocks from static electricity even if ignition does
not occur. Potential for ignition is present if all three of the following conditions are present: 1. There is sufficient gas flow to cause extensive turbulence in the pipe; 2. Rust, dust, or other foreign particles are present in the gas streams; and 3. A static charge is present at a point where a combustible air/gas mixture is present.
Emergency flow control situations requiring squeeze-off of polyethylene pipe may involve working in the vicinity of blowing gas. Squeezing, purging, and repair work should only be performed by a trained and qualified individual. The following procedures shall be considered or complied with as appropriate whenever working with blowing gas and plastic pipe:

• If a repair is involved, consider excavating squeeze-off holes at approximately 50-feet from the damaged area, if possible. This will help to limit direct exposure of the employee to blowing gas and debris from the excavation. This will also act as a safety precaution to help mitigate the potential for build-up of static charge due to squeeze-off at the location where gas is releasing to atmosphere.
• If working in the vicinity of leaking gas, CGI readings shall continuously be taken while repairs are being made until the area is made safe.
• A fire suit of appropriate flame resistant material shall be worn when controlling blowing gas or in a confined hazardous atmosphere. Refer to Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety
Handbook).
• If gas is blowing, place the proper fire extinguisher near the job site per Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook).
• During an emergency situation, a properly trained and qualified gas employee shall assess the need for a Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA). If it is determined that an SCBA is required, refer to Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook) for specific requirements.
• Refer to Specification 3.17, Purging Pipelines, “Prevention of Accidental Ignition” for additional considerations when working in a potentially explosive environment. PREVENTION OF STATIC ELECTRICITY PROCEDURES In addition to properly grounding the squeezing tool, one of the two following procedures shall be used to
prevent the build-up of static electricity on pipe and tools during squeeze-off. These procedures are not intended to replace the need to properly ground the squeezing equipment. For either of the following procedures be sure to properly ground the squeezing tool before making contact with the pipe. This will protect the operator in the event of a static discharge by providing a safe path to ground. The ground strap must be attached to a conductive element on the squeeze tool (i.e.,
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
3 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

metal) to function as intended. Improper connection of the ground strap will provide inadequate protection from a static discharge. Aerosol Static Suppression Procedure Only company approved aerosol static suppressor can be sprayed on tools, into cuts, outside or inside
pipe or any surface area where needed to suppress static. Only the surfaces that have been wet by the aerosol static suppressor will dissipate static electricity. (The aerosol suppressor sprayed on the OUTSIDE of a pipe will not suppress static charges on the INSIDE of the pipe). Surfaces sprayed with aerosol static suppressor do not need to be kept wet to suppress static. Note that these procedures are not intended to replace the need to properly ground the squeezing tool.
Operating Temperatures – Aerosol static suppressor is effective from any temperature up to 120 degrees F. If the product freezes while in use on a pipe, static will still be suppressed. Freezing will not diminish its static suppression abilities. Aerosol static suppressor will freeze at temperatures below 30 degrees F.
However, if the aerosol freezes, simply thaw, shake, and spray. Freezing will not damage the product.
Employees are required to use static suppressant anytime a plastic pipeline is damaged, repaired, taken out of service, or put into service. 1. Pipe Surfaces – Hold the aerosol about 1-foot away from surface and direct spray onto the
surface which you wish to suppress static. Spray the entire pipe surface exposed in excavation or bell hole. Spray only enough so the surface appears wet. The aerosol can be
held upside down to reach under the pipe. However, periodically upright can to refill internal dip tube and continue spraying. Visually verify the surface of the plastic pipeline being
worked on is coated with static suppressor.
2. Cutting Pipe – Spraying into the cut while cutting the pipe will disperse the aerosol static suppressor inside the pipe and suppress static on any surface it contacts inside the cut. The
cutting tool shall be sprayed while in the process of cutting.
3. Open Ended Pipe and Purged Pipelines – Apply the static suppressor spray inside and outside the open end of the pipe for added protection when working with open ended or
purged pipe. When working around open pipe ends, where there is a hazard of a combustible atmosphere present, spray inside and outside the pipe taking care to wet the cut
ends of the pipe also (convergence zone). Hold the aerosol 1 foot away and spray into the inside open end of the pipe and onto exposed pipe edges to eliminate static. Only after
spraying the outside of the pipe and the exposed pipe edges should you approach the pipe and spray into the pipe as far as possible in order to eliminate static inside the pipe.
4. Surfaces to be Fused – Prior to fusing, any surface sprayed with aerosol static suppressor
should be either wiped off with either isopropyl alcohol or washed off with water before facing or scraping to remove any residue of the spray. Proceed as you would after thoroughly
drying taking care not to leave any water that would affect the fusion.
5. Mechanical Couplings – The aerosol static suppressor will not affect mechanical couplings if the surface is cleaned off with alcohol wipes or washed off with water to remove any residue of the spray.

REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
4 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

Wet Soapy Rag Procedure Proper use of wet soapy rags to treat pipe and tools prior to squeeze-off will reduce the risk of a static discharge and possible ignition. Note: These procedures are not intended to replace the need to properly ground the squeezing tool.
1. Before employees enter an excavation or attempt to control blowing gas, spray the pipe and surrounding area where working with a soap and water solution. Soapy water creates a better conductor than plain water as it will coat the pipe and not bead up. 2. Wrap wet rags around entire length of exposed pipe, leaving enough room to squeeze and cut the pipe. The wet rag should be one continuous length with a “jumper” buried in the soil
under the squeeze area. The “jumper” will provide continuity when the pipe is cut, helping to eliminate the possibility of an arc occurring. 3. Keep the pipe and excavation wet until the squeezers are removed. This provides a
continuous discharge of static electricity on the pipe.
4. Once the pipe has been squeezed following the procedure outlined below, the pipe is ready to be cut. During the cutting process spray soapy water solution on the area being cut. This will help dissipate the static from the interior of the pipe by giving it a path to follow away from the edge of the cut.
If squeezing the pipe to make a repair, complete the repair at this time. Be aware of the possibility of
combustible air/gas mixtures and static charges even after blowing gas is controlled.
If performing squeeze procedure from aboveground out of the bell hole or excavation, follow steps #1 and #4 of the procedures outlined above.
SQUEEZING PROCEDURE
Precautions should be taken to avoid damage to the pipe. Any damage sustained could lead to eventual failure. The location of the squeeze point, the squeezing procedure, and squeeze release procedure below follow the guidelines defined in ASTM F1041, Standard Guide for Squeeze-off of Polyolefin Gas Pressure Pipe and Tubing.
1. Ensure the pipe is centered and squared in the squeeze tool. It is important that the pipe be free to spread as it flattens. Failure to do so may result in damage to the pipe or the tool. Also check to see that the tracer wire is not caught between the squeeze bars and the pipe. Make sure that gap stops are set in proper position for the size of pipe. Make sure squeezing tool is properly grounded. 2. Location of the squeeze point:
• The squeeze point shall be at least 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater, away from the nearest fitting or heat fusion joint or sidewall connection, saddle or mechanical fitting, a prior squeeze-off, or a second squeeze-off tool. Failure to do so
may result in damage to the fittings or joint. Consideration should be made during construction to anticipate these situations, especially on service stubs, and keep at least 30 inches between the service tee and the end cap. This will allow adequate spacing to ensure the 12 inch separation can be met on either side of the squeeze.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
5 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

• Do not squeeze on pipe sections containing deep scratches (greater than 10 percent of the pipe wall thickness).
• Plastic pipe should only be squeezed-off in the same place one time. It is possible for scale or other metal particles contained in the gas flow to become trapped at the squeeze point. A second squeeze in the same area could force these particles into or through the pipe wall. 3. Squeeze Procedure:
• The squeeze rate cannot be any faster than 2 inches per minute. Squeeze rate example for a 4-inch IPS pipe: The outside diameter is 4.5 inches, therefore the minimum time to
squeeze the pipe is 4.5 inches / 2 inches per minute = 2.25 minutes (2 min 15 sec). The minimum time to squeeze pipe for various pipe sizes are tabulated in the table below. Do not over squeeze the pipe. The squeeze tool should have mechanical stops that come into contact when the pipe is at its maximum squeeze point.
• If the squeeze rate cannot be adhered to due to an emergency situation, the pipe is considered damaged in the squeezed area and shall be cut out and replaced.
• Do not use extension levers or cheater bars when using the squeeze tool. Damaged tools
should be repaired or replaced.
• A bubble tight flow control will not always be attainable. If more complete pressure control is needed, a valve should be used or additional squeeze tools used in series. 4. Squeeze Release Procedure:
• It is critical to release the squeeze very slowly. The release rate cannot be any faster than 0.5 inches per minute. Squeeze release rate example for a 4-inch IPS pipe: The outside diameter is 4.5 inches, therefore the minimum time to release the squeeze is 4.5 inches / 0.5 inches per minute = 9 minutes. The minimum time to release a squeeze for various pipe sizes are tabulated in the table below.
WAC 480-93-178:
pipe diameters, whichever is greater, from any joint or fitting.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES
SQUEEZE-OFF PE & PREVENTION STATIC ELECTRICITY REV. NO. 18
6 OF 6 SPEC. 3.34

PE Pipe Squeeze and Release Rates
Pipe Size SDR Pipe Avg.
Minimum Pipe Wall Thickness
Time to Squeeze Pipe
Time to Release Squeeze
1/2" CTS 7 0.625 0.090 00:19 01:15
3/4" IPS 11 1.050 0.095 00:32 02:06
1" IPS 11 1.315 0.120 00:40 02:38
1-1/4" IPS 10 1.660 0.166 00:50 03:20
1-1/2" IPS 11 1.900 0.173 00:57 03:48
*SDR - Standard dimension ratio is calculated by dividing the average O.D. of the pipe by the minimum wall thickness in inches. For use of hydraulic squeezers follow the manufacturer’s instructions and follow the squeeze and release rates outlined above. POST-SQUEEZE PROCEDURE After the squeeze procedure, ensure the following steps are completed to finish the evolution. 1. Visually inspect the affected area for damage. 2. Test for leaks using a soap and water solution. 3. Wrap black electrical tape around the pipe on both sides of the squeeze point prior to backfilling. NEW FITTING / FUSION NEAR A SQUEEZE POINT When installing a new fitting / fusion near a new or previous squeeze point, the squeeze point shall be at least 3 pipe diameters or 12 inches, whichever is greater, away from the fitting / fusion.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 4
1 OF 3 SPEC. 3.35

3.35 DETAILED PROCEDURES FOR USE OF “ADAMS” STYLE REPAIR CLAMPS
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for the installation and use of Adams style repair clamps. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.627, §192.711 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe GESH Section 2 – Leak and Odor Investigation General “Adams” style repair clamps are cylindrical sections of stainless steel that have an internal, attached lining of rubber or other pliable material. Some models of these clamps are designed so that they may be opened along their longitudinal axis and slipped onto a section of pipeline. Other models come in two separate sections that have interlocking gaskets and bolts on both sides. Once in place, the bolts are tightened resulting in a decrease in the annular area between the pipe and the clamp. The snug fit between the rubber gasket and the pipe will usually eliminate any leakage. These clamps are used on a temporary basis to repair leaks or mechanical damage to steel or polyethylene pipe caused by outside forces or to reinforce small areas of corrosion damage on steel or polyethylene pipe. Temporary leak clamps should not be used on pipelines that are badly corroded or that are weakened due to serious damage. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair of Damaged Pipelines, “Steel Repair Selection Charts,” to determine when a leak clamp may be used. The intent of this temporary repair is to make the site safe per GESH Section 2 – Leak and Odor Investigation. Thereafter, the permanent repair can be completed as soon as possible. These clamps should not be backfilled. It is permissible to cover the trench with steel road plates, if necessary. “Adams” style clamps shall not be tapped and may not be welded to the pipeline. Only clamps approved by Gas Engineering may be used for temporary repairs. Employees using temporary repair clamps shall be properly trained and qualified to install each style of clamp available on service/crew vehicles.
Precautions The following precautions are applicable when installing all brands and styles of leak repair clamps: 1. Ensure there is sufficient space in the trench to apply the clamp and torque the bolts. Use manual wrenches to initially tighten the clamp if there is danger of accidental ignition of a gaseous atmosphere. 2. If installing the clamp on a pipeline that has an active leak, take precautions to prevent accidental ignition of the gas. Use a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) as outlined in Avista’s Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook) if entering an oxygen deficient atmosphere.
3. Verify clamp size by checking the diameter of the pipe and the length of the damaged area. 4. Clean the pipe to remove loose dirt and corrosion from the surface. Loose coating material should be removed until a reasonably smooth surface remains.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 4
2 OF 3 SPEC. 3.35

5. Place marks on the pipe to reference the leak. Use these marks to assure that the clamp is properly positioned. Use a paint stick, grease pencil, or other visible marker. 6. Applicable 360-degree leak clamps with outlets should have a nipple and valve installed prior to installation. Install the outlet pointing outward where it will be accessible when the clamp is tightened. The valve should be left in the open position until the clamp is fully tightened. 7. When using clamps that have a gasket that provides partial coverage ensure the gasket is
centered over the damage area before the clamp is tightened. 8. Ensure no foreign materials stick to the gasket as it is brought around the pipe. Check that no materials become lodged between the gasket and the pipe as the nuts are tightened. 9. Use the proper wrench for the job. Use a torque wrench if specified by the manufacturer to achieve proper bolt torque. 10. Keep bolt threads free of dirt and foreign materials.
11. Test for leaks after clamp is tightened.
Romac Style SS1 Procedures
The following procedures are applicable to 3/4-inch to 3-inch Style SS1 Stainless Steel Repair Clamps manufactured by Romac Industries, Inc.
1. Visually inspect the clamp for damage and to ensure that no parts are missing. Clean the pipe surface that will be covered by the clamp. Ensure the area around the damaged area is large enough to accommodate the installation of the clamp and the torque wrench handle.
2. Place reference marks on the pipe in line with the crack or hole in the pipe, if practical. Center the clamp over the repair area before installing it and place additional marks on the pipe at the
edges of the clamp. These marks will assist centering the gasket material over the damaged area.
3. Back off the nuts to the end of the bolts, but do not remove them. Separate the clamp and wrap it around the pipe at a location remote to the damage area.
4. Slide the lifter bars up the receiver lug profile and snap into place over the side-bar edge. Ensure the gasket tails are not folded under, they must be lying flat around the pipe.
5. Using the reference marks, slide the clamp over the damaged area. Ensure the bolts are in a position where they can be tightened properly.
6. Tighten all nuts evenly in 20 ft-lb. increments. Start in the center and work toward each end keeping torques as evenly balance as possible. Using a torque wrench, tighten all nuts to the
following values:
Nominal Pipe Diameter (in) Torque (ft–lb)
4 and below 30-35
6 and above 75-85
7. Wait 10 minutes and then retighten to ensure the proper torque is maintained. Adams and Mueller Style Procedure The following procedures are applicable to repair clamps manufactured by Mueller: 1. Make sure the clamp style matches the diameter of the pipeline and the length of the repair. 2. Clean the pipe thoroughly, removing any burrs and loose material. 3. Slip the bolt head(s) out of the lug(s) and separate the clamp. On 2-piece clamps, loosen and remove all of the bolts, nuts, and washers to separate the clamp.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED PIPELINES REV. NO. 4
3 OF 3 SPEC. 3.35

4. Mark the damaged area, if practical, for alignment purposes. Ensure the gasket will cover the damaged area by at least 1 inch when aligned. Use a longer clamp if necessary. 5. Place the clamp on the pipeline to the side of the damaged area. 6. While compressing the clamp, slip the bolt head(s) back into the lug(s). On a Full-Seal 2-piece clamps, align the bolt holes in the side lugs and re-install the bolts, nuts, and washers. Finger-tighten only until in final position.
7. On Full-Seal clamps, ensure the inter-locking gasket fingers are in the proper position. Gap bridges should slide under the bank (rotate the clamp slightly as necessary to prevent any hang-up or binding). 8. Slide the clamp carefully over the damage area and note alignment marks. 9. Tighten bolts alternately to the torque value specified below:
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
1 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION

3.42 CASING AND CONDUIT INSTALLATION
SCOPE: To establish a uniform procedure for casing design to be used under roadways, railroad crossings, and alongside or within bridge structures. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.323 WAC 480-93-110, 480-93-115 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.15, Bridge Design Spec. 2.32, Cathodic Protection Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: General In general, casings are used only where required by permit, ordinance, or governing agency for railroad, highway, and bridge crossings. The principal purpose for a casing is to provide a means of installation and replacement of a main without interrupting traffic on the traveled way. It is also to provide a conduit for gas to escape from under the traveled way should a leak occur in the carrier pipe. Casings shall be designed with sufficient strength to withstand anticipated stresses due to bending, torsion, and temperature change. Gas Engineering should be consulted when installing a casing. Gas Engineering has concluded that none of the Company’s casing end seals are “…strong enough to retain the MAOP pressure of the pipe…” and consequently, there is not a need to either add vent pipes or run a strength calculation on unvented, post-1970 casing to prove compliance with §192.323.
Link type seals and rubber boots are acceptable ways to seal the ends of casings. Conduits may be sealed with spray foam or other suitable sealant. The requirements for end sealing services as outlined in WAC 480-93-115 are applicable to Washington State only and is a best practice in Idaho and Oregon.
WAC 480-93-115:
or conduit of any type material, the gas pipeline company must seal the casing ends to prevent or
slow the migration of gas in the event of a leak.
Service lines installed in a casing or conduit must be sealed at the end nearest the building to prevent
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
2 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

Casing Size The casing shall have a minimum inside diameter sufficiently larger than the outside diameter of the carrier pipe to accommodate placement and removal of the carrier pipe. Consideration should be given to any possible future need to increase the carrier pipe size and the casing should be sized accordingly.
The following tables may be used as guidelines for sizing casing:
STEEL CASING PIPE SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL CARRIER PIPE
Nom. Dia. of Steel Carrier Nom. Dia. of Minimum Wall Minimum Nom. Dia. of Vent Pipe
3/4 2 0.125 2
1 1/4 3 0.125 2
2 6 0.250 2
3 6 0.250 2
4 8 0.250 2
6 10 0.250 2
8 12 0.250 2
10 16 0.250 2
12 20 0.250 2
16 24 0.281 3
20 26 0.375 3

CASING PIPE SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTIC (POLYETHYLENE) CARRIER PIPE
Nom. Dia. of Plastic Carrier Pipe (in) Suggested Casing Size* (in)
*NOTES: (1) Suggested sizes are given to prevent damage to plastic carrier pipe should water leak into casing and freeze. (2) Casing specifications for steel casings apply as shown in the previous table. (3) PVC plastic casing must be Schedule 40 for size 2-inch through 6-inch and Schedule 80 for sizes 8-inch and above. Casing Specifications Plastic conduit shall not be used for steel carrier pipeline as it interferes with the ability to cathodically
protect the steel carrier pipeline.
Buried steel casings with steel carrier pipe shall be bare to prevent potential shielding of cathodic protection.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
3 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

Casing pipe should be butt welded with full circumferential welds to similar quality as the carrier pipeline. Some governing agencies may require the use of a galvanized casing on bridges or other structures. If a galvanized casing is required, the casing should be ordered with a galvanizing cutback on each end (typically 3 to 4 inches in length) to accommodate welding. When a cutback is used, the weld and the bare pipe surrounding the weld shall be painted with a galvanizing paint or other approved coating after
welding is complete. If a cutback is not used, weld fume extraction equipment and welder respiratory protection equipment should be used. The weld shall be painted with a galvanizing paint or other approved coating after welding is complete. Casings shall be seamless, ERW or DSAW welds, but need not meet specifications for carrier pipe. “Casing grade quality pipe” is preferred as it is lower in cost.
Casings designed for railroad crossings shall be per Drawing E-33947, Sheet 1 of 2. Casings designed for state or interstate highway crossings shall be per Drawing E-33947, Sheet 2 of 2. Drawings are located at the end of this specification.
Keep moisture from filling the casing. Normally, use of an approved end seal will keep the carrier pipeline
dry and the ends free of debris. Although crossings should not be located where a freeway or expressway is in a depressed location, when this is unavoidable, additional measures may be taken to keep carrier pipeline dry. Contact Gas Engineering for advice in using additional sealing methods when encountering potential high water table areas.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
Installing Steel Carrier Pipe in Casing
The inside wall of the casing pipe must be free of sharp or rough surfaces. When necessary, the entire length of the casing pipe shall be cleaned to remove debris. Suggested means of cleaning include purging with air and/or use of pigging devices.
Casings should have a minimum of one vent pipe installed and it is preferred to have a vent pipe at each end. Vent pipes should be welded to the casing prior to inserting carrier pipe to prevent damage to the carrier pipe. If two vents are installed, the casing vent at the lower elevation shall be attached to the bottom of the casing and the other to the top of the casing. This provides for natural circulation through the vents. It also allows for the ability to blow accumulated water out of the casing through the lower vent.
Vent pipes shall be constructed of carbon steel as delineated in Drawing E-33947 at the end of this specification. Do not use factory-coated steel pipe for the below-grade portion of the vent piping, as it can appear to be gas-carrying pipe when excavated in the future.
The above ground portion of vent pipes shall be coated with paint (tape-wrapping below ground is not required). The vent pipe must not contact the steel carrier pipeline. The vent shall be installed to prevent water or other debris from entering the vent opening. The carrier pipe shall be inspected for damage prior to its installation and during the insertion operation as the pipe enters and leaves the casing pipe.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
4 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

Casing Insulators - For steel carrier pipelines, casing insulators should be installed with maximum 5 feet separation. Close spacing prevents grounding of steel carrier pipeline to casing. Install two casing insulators at each end of casing to assure carrier pipe does not come in contact with end of casing. The carrier pipe shall be inspected at the leading end for damage after the installation by using a
flashlight to illuminate the interior of the casing. Any significant gouging of the pipe coating (steel carrier pipeline) must be repaired or replaced. A cathodic reading should be taken immediately after installation to assure that the carrier pipeline is not electrically shorted to the casing.
Permanent test leads shall be attached to at-least one end of the casing and the steel carrier pipe. Install test leads at both ends of the casing whenever possible. The wire connections on the casing shall be covered with mastic or tape wrap similar to steel pipe. Refer to Drawing E-33947 at the end of this specification.
End Seals – Link type seals with centering blocks shall be used to seal casing ends when steel carrier pipe is installed. The carrier pipe shall be supported to keep the proper concentric alignment when installing these types of seals. The bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the casing shall be graded to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for the carrier pipeline. Installing PE Carrier Pipe in Casing The inside wall of the casing pipe must be free of sharp or rough surfaces. When necessary, the entire length of the casing pipe shall be cleaned to remove debris. Suggested means of cleaning include purging with air and/or use of pigging devices. Vent pipes shall be welded to the casing at each end prior to inserting carrier pipe to prevent damage to the carrier pipe. The casing vent at the lower elevation shall be attached to the bottom of the casing and the other to the top of the casing. This provides for natural circulation through the vents. It also allows for the ability to blow accumulated water out of the casing through the lower vent. Vent pipes shall be constructed of carbon steel as delineated in Drawing E-33947 at the end of this specification. The aboveground portion of vent pipes shall be coated with paint (tape-wrapping below ground is not required). The vent shall be installed to prevent water or other debris from entering the vent opening. Casing Insulators - For plastic carrier pipelines, install casing insulators as needed to slip pipe smoothly into casing. Install two casing insulators at each end of casing to assure plastic carrier pipe does not come in contact with end of casing. The leading end of the carrier pipe shall be closed before insertion and the pipe inspected for damage at the leading end after the installation by using a flashlight to illuminate the interior of the casing. Any significant gouging of the pipe wall (polyethylene carrier pipeline) must be repaired or replaced as described in Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe.
WAC 480-93-115:
casing and to the steel gas pipeline to verify that no electric short exists between the two.
PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
5 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

End Seals – Boot type seals shall be used to seal casing ends when plastic carrier pipe is installed. The carrier pipe shall be supported to keep the proper concentric alignment when installing these types of seals. For plastic pipe that is encased in steel, maintain continuity of the tracer by insertion of tracer wire along with the plastic through the steel casing. Refer to Drawing B-34947 at the end of this specification.
The bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the casing shall be graded to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for the carrier pipeline. Casing pipe containing plastic main or service shall not be subjected to excessive heat. As a result, bridge casings should be hung either under or within bridge structures to avoid the heating effects of
direct sunlight. Casing pipe containing plastic main or service pipe shall not be squeezed or deformed except in an emergency. If this is necessary, the casing and plastic carrier pipe shall be replaced. Refer to
Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe.
Conduits The use of conduits should be discouraged. Occasionally it is necessary to install a conduit to enable road construction, etc., prior to installation of a plastic gas main or service.
Plastic conduit may only be used for polyethylene carrier pipeline if it provides sufficient strength to
withstand anticipated stresses due to overburden, bending, torsion, and temperature change and is approved by permitting agency.
Only gray or yellow plastic conduit should be used. Conduit should be clearly marked or labeled to
indicate that a gas pipeline is housed within. One method is to wrap the conduit with yellow tape stamped "Caution--Natural Gas" in "candy cane" fashion. No white plastic conduit shall be used as it may be
confused with water irrigation pipe.
Conduit should be sized to allow carrier pipe and tracer wire to pass easily through at the time of insertion.
The bottom of the trench adjacent to each end of the conduit shall be graded to provide firm, uniform, and
continuous support for the carrier pipeline. Protection from sharp edges of conduit must be provided for main and service inserts such as, but not limited to, a split piece of plastic pipe between the carrier pipe
and the edge of the conduit or use of a casing insulator. As the carrier pipe exits the conduit, ensure that it does not scrape the end of the conduit.
Installed conduits should be properly noted on Company maps.
Inserted steel services may be referred to as a conduit, typically in regard to Avista’s mapping procedures
within Avista’s AFM (GIS) System. This particular situation is the only non-plastic conduit for natural gas use at the Company.

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
6 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
7 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

PIPE SYSTEMS REV. NO. 18
8 OF 8 SPEC. 3.42

CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
1 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

3.43 LAND DISTURBANCE REQUIREMENTS SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures related to gas construction land disturbance activities, identify permit requirements, and establish excavation and sediment control Best Management Practices (BMP’s).
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Federal – 40 CFR 123.25(a), 122.26(a)(1)(v), 122.26(b)(14)(x), and 122.26(b)(15) Idaho – U.S Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Washington – Washington State Department of Ecology (DOE)
Oregon – Oregon Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) Local Jurisdiction Critical Areas, Stormwater Erosion and Site Disturbance Regulations CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling
General Land disturbance and excavation activities require proper planning. Prior to excavation or land disturbance associated with gas construction work, it is necessary to acquire the appropriate locates, permits, easements, and in many cases to implement appropriate stormwater erosion control measures to
prevent inappropriate discharge of sediment off of the construction site. Additionally, some construction areas fall within or near environmentally sensitive areas (e.g., floodplains, wetlands, streams, steep slopes) and have prescriptive requirements regarding techniques for disturbed areas, as well as removal and disposal of excavated material.
This specification shall apply to employees, contractors, activities, and land disturbance, directly or
indirectly associated with gas construction projects. Compliance with this specification will reduce the potential negative impacts of construction activities and provide protection of stormwater, groundwater, water bodies, watercourses, and wetlands consistent with the Clean Water Act requirements.
Gas related land disturbance and excavation activities shall be completed in accordance with this specification and Specification 3.15, Trenching & Backfilling. Gas construction activity shall be performed
in a manner to minimize stormwater discharge from the construction site. Temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed after final site stabilization has occurred.
Necessary action shall be taken to minimize the depositing and tracking of mud, dirt, sand, gravel, rock,
or debris onto public or private roads, driveways, parking lots, and the like. Acquisition and adherence to appropriate permits and implementation of sediment control best management practices (BMP’s) are necessary steps related to excavation activities. A list of land
disturbance activities, required permits, and excavation requirements is detailed in Table 2.
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
2 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Definitions BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs): Acceptable techniques that can be implemented to protect water quality caused by development or construction activities. A BMP can be a policy, practice, procedure, technology, structure, or device that controls, prevents, or removes discharges not meeting water quality standards.
CESCL: Certified Erosion & Sediment Control Lead. A person that has been certified by the authorized state jurisdiction to conduct construction site inspections to ensure stormwater mitigation measures are being followed as specified in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT: A permit issued by the regulatory entity having jurisdiction in a
state that provides guidelines construction operators should follow to comply with the requirements of the federal stormwater regulations. DOE: Washington State Department of Ecology EPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency EROSION: The wearing away of the land surface by water, wind, ice, or gravity. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN (ESC): The ESC is a drawing detailing where and what
types of Best Management Practices (BMPs) are to be used to control stormwater pollution during and after construction, as well as methods for final stabilization. This plan is typically required as a part of the
permit process and also a subpart of a larger document known as the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI): A form filed with the appropriate regulatory entity before beginning
construction when required to secure a Construction General Permit.
NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT): A form filed with the appropriate regulatory entity when construction activities have ended as a requirement of the Construction General Permit.
ODEQ: Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality
SEDIMENT: Any soil particles or solid material that have been moved by erosion from the place where
they were formed.
TACKIFIER: A chemical or organic compound sprayed on loose soil to hold it in place.
STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP): A site-specific written document that identifies potential sources of stormwater pollution, describes best management practices to reduce
pollutants and the volume of stormwater discharges from a construction site and identifies procedures the operator will implement to comply with the terms and conditions of a general construction permit. The
written plan describes how stormwater runoff at a construction site will be controlled, temporary erosion control measures, final stabilization measures, monitoring requirements, and contacts.
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
3 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Storm Water Permitting Requirements The Clean Water Act and associated federal regulations require nearly all construction operators engaged in clearing, grading, and excavating activities that disturb one acre or more and have potential to discharge to surface waters or wetlands (including through storm drains and ditches),
including smaller sites in a common plan of development or sale, to obtain coverage under a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit for their stormwater discharges. Under the NPDES program, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) can authorize states to implement the federal requirements and issue stormwater permits. Both Washington and Oregon are authorized to issue their own permits for construction activities. In Washington, NPDES permits are issued by the Department of Ecology (DOE), and in Oregon they are issued by the Department of Environmental
Quality (DEQ). In Idaho, the U.S. EPA is the permitting authority for the NPDES construction general permit. Refer to Table 1 for permitting requirements.
An Avista Environmental Permitting Specialist will help facilitate identification and acquisition of proper
permits related to construction activities and development of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan’s (SWPPP) when required. Refer to Table 1 and Table 2 in this specification for more details on permitting
requirements. Avista may construct under another developer or third party contractor’s permit when the permit specifies the inclusions of “utilities”. The Avista Environmental Permitting Specialist can provide guidance when it is appropriate and acceptable to construction under a third party permit.
Gas construction activity undertaken in accordance with an approved Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Plan or permit must comply with the conditions of the plan and relevant permits.

CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
4 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Table 1 – Stormwater Erosion Control Guidance If Disturbing Greater Than One Acre
Oregon Washington Idaho
SWPPP Required
ESC Required
NOI Required
NOT Required
Permit fees
Certified Inspector Needed Land Use Compatibility Statement Required
State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) No Yes No
Newspaper publication the notification >5 acres 2 weeks. Applicant does notification construction can start
Permit name
File online
File hard copy
Governing jurisdiction Rogue Valley DOE EPA
Documentation stored
Processing time
• Idaho is under the federal EPA jurisdiction. The permitting system is managed through contracts with third party contractors. • Oregon is under the jurisdiction of DEQ and Washington is under jurisdiction of DOE. • Oregon has two jurisdictions that are the reviewing party depending on the location of the project. • In Oregon, for projects greater than 20 acres in disturbance, an Oregon licensed professional is required to complete the ESC. • In Washington, field inspectors (monitors) of the SWPPP are required to have their CESCL (Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead) certification. • In Oregon, certification is required to inspect soil erosion control measures. • Idaho has its own certification program for projects requiring a General Construction Permit. The program is called the Stormwater and Erosion Education Program (SEEP). Typically EPA will require monitoring personnel in Idaho to be SEEP or CESCL certified.
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
5 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Best Management Practices (BMPs) In order to enhance sediment control activities at construction sites Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall be implemented for land disturbance construction activities regardless of land disturbance size as described in this section and Exhibit A. If the project will disturb one acre or more, contact the Avista Environmental Permitting Specialist as mentioned previously to get assistance with permitting and
SWPPP development. For projects where land disturbance will be less than one acre, it is still incumbent upon the construction crew and others involved to consider all potential BMPs and to implement those that would support good stewardship of the project site. It is particularly important to protection drains and direct pathways that flow to a stream or water body. Following is an overview of the four major BMP groupings and the specific individual BMPs that fall within
the groupings. The more commonly used BMPs are underlined and further detailed at the end of this specification; however BMPs are not limited to this list. Work in and near water typically requires environmental permitting and strict adherence to BMPs. Temporary BMPs should be removed after sites are stabilized. Contact the Avista Environmental Permitting Specialist and Gas Engineering for further assistance in choosing the proper BMPs for a gas construction project.
1. Planning BMPs
• Contractor Education – Providing copies of the ESC / SWPPP / BMPs to crew leaders. Having discussions regarding sensitive areas to avoid during construction, reviewing spill response procedures, setting up regular meeting times, and providing contact information.
• Buffer Zone – Protecting existing vegetation adjacent to the project provides a stabilized area which will help control erosion, protect water quality, and enhance aesthetic benefits.
• Phased Construction – Scheduling the project to reduce the amount and duration of soil exposed to erosion effects of rain, wind, etc.
• Clearing Limits – Clearing the smallest area practical for the shortest time possible to complete the project.
• Perimeter Control – Doing prior planning and implementing any sediment or erosion control BMP at the perimeter of the project to prevent sedimentation damage to the construction site or nearby property.
• Source Control – Designing material storage and handling practices to prevent or
reduce the discharge of pollutants into groundwater systems. Some examples are minimizing the storage of hazardous material on site, storing such materials in
designated areas, installing temporary secondary containment, and conducting regular inspections.
• Stockpile Management – Designing procedures to eliminate or reduce air and stormwater pollution from stockpiles of soil, paving materials, rubble, and the like. Process may involve some type of perimeter sediment barrier or be as simple as covering the stockpile with tarps or other protective means.
• Concrete Washout – Designating a containment area for washout of cement truck delivery chutes and related equipment.
• Temporary Restrooms – Doing prior planning to order and use temporary restroom facilities (i.e. Porta Potties).
• Stabilized Construction Entrance / Exit – Establishing an area to minimize the tracking of mud and dirt onto nearby roads.
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
6 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

2. Erosion Control BMPs
• Slope Roughening –Typically involves forming horizontal depressions along a construction slope with tracked or treaded equipment to form grooves that are perpendicular to the slope. This method stabilizes soils and reduces runoff velocity, encourages the growth of vegetation and trap some sediment.
• Mulching – A temporary measure stabilizing soil and controlling erosion by placing a material like straw, grass, hay, compost, wood chips, or wood fibers on top of or incorporated into the soil surface.
• Hydromulching – Similar to mulching except the mixing of a tackifier is combined to the mulch and water to form a slurry mix that is then broadcast on the soil surface to help
ensure the mulch stays in place.
• Hydroseeding – Similar to hydromulching that typically consists of applying a mixture of mulch fiber, grass seed, fertilizer, and a stabilizing tackifier to the soil surface.
• Erosion Control Blankets – Installing a porous net or fibrous sheet mats that are then placed over the ground surface to stabilize slopes and control erosion.
• Dust Control – Controlling dust pollution by any method such as water sprinkling,
vegetative covering, tackifier installing, or surface roughening. Water should be obtained through an approved source and may not be withdrawn from water bodies without proper
water rights or permits.
3. Sediment Control BMPs
• Vegetative Buffer Strip – Using a living sediment barrier that consists of a gently sloping area of vegetative cover that runoff water flows through before entering a water feature. This buffer area may be an undisturbed strip of natural vegetation or a graded and planted area.
• Sediment Trap / Basin – Constructing a containment area formed by excavation and/or embankment to intercept and retain sediment-laden runoff. The trap / basin must be large enough to allow most of the sediment to settle out and consequently are usually professionally designed.
• Silt Fence – Using a temporary sediment barrier consisting of a filter fabric stretched and attached to supporting posts. Silt fences function by impounding water and slowly
releasing it, allowing sediment to settle out and collect behind (upstream of) the fence.
• Fiber Roll / Straw Wattle – Using a temporary sediment barrier that consists of straw, flax, coconut fiber, compost, or other similar materials bound into a biodegradable tubular casing. When properly placed at the toe and on the face of slopes, they intercept runoff, shorten slope length, decrease flow velocity, and trap sediment.
• Inlet Protection – Using temporary devices (wattles, sediment fences, etc.) constructed to improve the quality of water being discharged to dry wells, drop inlets or catch basins
by pooling sediment-laden runoff and thereby increasing settling time.
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
7 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

4. Run-off Control BMPs
• Swales and Dikes – Installing a temporary channel to prevent runoff from entering disturbed areas by intercepting and diverting it to a stabilized outlet or a sediment-trapping device.
• Grassy Swales – Designing grassed shallow depressions in the earth constructed to hold stormwater while the grass and underlying soil and rock filter out various pollutants.
• Check Dams – Constructing a small dam of rocks, logs, or brush and located in an open channel, swale, or drainage area in order to reduce or eliminate excessive erosion by reducing runoff velocity.
• Slope Drains – Using a device to transport concentrated runoff from the top to the bottom of a slope that is at high risk for or has already been damaged by erosion without further damaging the slope.
• Outlet Protection – Installing various forms of protection (rock, riprap, etc.) at the outlets of pipes, culverts, catch basins, sediment basins, etc. where the velocity of water flow may cause erosion.
• Terracing – Constructing an earth embankment or ridge-and-channel arrangement along
the face of a slope at regular intervals that serves to reduce erosion by capturing surface runoff and directing it to a stable outlet at a speed that minimizes erosion.

CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
8 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Table 2 – Construction Activities, Typical Governing Agencies and Associated Permits
Construction Permit – Governing
Land Disturbance (Federal) Construction Permit SWPPP (Storm Water Pollution
land > 1 Acre and potential to discharge to surface water or wetlands. Permit will include BMP's.
Disturbance Construction Permit SWPPP (Storm Water Pollution
land =/> 1 Acre and potential discharge to surface water or wetlands. Permit will include BMP's.
Disturbance land > 1 Acre and potential to discharge to surface water or wetlands. Permit will include BMP's.
Disturbance waters under Engineers under the navigable waters
Disturbance Permit Process Engineers (COE) wetlands and Lands classified by
discharge into a wetland
Disturbance Permit Process Jurisdiction, City or County wetlands Jurisdictional Permit DOE guidance
Disturbance Permit Process Lands and/or Local Jurisdiction
wetlands from Local Jurisdiction (City or County) and a Division of Lands Permit. Check w/
Disturbance Permit Process Lands
Disturbance Permit Process Lands Certificate or implement FEMA rules
Disturbance Permit Process Lands Governing Jurisdiction ordinances. Applies to disturbance of steep slopes.
Hazards Permit Process Lands Governing Jurisdiction ordinances. Applies to disturbance of geological formations. Ex. Hot Springs, Earthquake Zones, Unstable

CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
9 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Table 2 – Construction Activities, Typical Governing Agencies and Associated Permits (cont.)
Cultural Resources Federal Permit Preservation Permit known sites.
Disturbance Permit and ESC Plan
Lands Governing Jurisdiction grade and movement of soil. Governing jurisdiction determines the amount of soil
above High Water Mark or work within buffer zone of waterways.
Jurisdiction processes the SEPA. WDF issues the HPA
Water Features Environmental Policy Act) and HPA (Hydraulic Project Approval w/ Washington Fish and Wildlife.
buffer zone of waterways. Buffer zone size varies on type of waterway.
above High Water Mark Lands private property under water bodies.
above High Water Mark Dept. of Water Resources land not covered by Dept. of
permit.
above High Water Mark Required unless under Section 10
notification to Department of Fish and Wildlife.
below High Water Mark, Working in stream bed, or under Section 10
Army Corp. of Engineers high water mark or Section 10 Waters
Disturbance Permit Process Lands Certificate or Permit implement FEMA rules
Activities Department of Lands Public and Private lands Available
Activities districts Available
Activities Fire Protection Association or Local fire
Available
Activities within 200' of covered waters
are not limited to: Spokane River, Latah Creek, Colville River, Pend Oreille River.
Disturbance Permit Process Lands Certificate or implement FEMA rules
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
10 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

Exhibit A – Common BMPs and How to Implement
1. Silt Fence Sediment Control BMP
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
11 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

2. Fiber Roll / Straw Wattle Sediment Control BMP
CONSTRUCTION REV. NO. 5
12 OF 12 SPEC. 3.43

3. Rock Check Dam Run-off Control BMP
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
1 OF 5 SPEC. 3.44

3.44 EXPOSED PIPE EVALUATION SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for evaluating steel and plastic pipelines that are exposed that were previously buried.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.459, §192.475(b), §192.491, §192.1007(a)(1)(2)(3) WAC 480-93-110(1), 480-93-110(6)(7)(8)
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic (Polyethylene) Mains Spec. 3.15, Backfilling and Trenching
Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe Spec. 4.42, Distribution Integrity Management Program Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance
General When buried steel or plastic pipe is exposed an Exposed Piping Inspection Report (paper form N-2534 or electronic version of this report form) shall be completed in accordance with this standard. (Note: It is
only necessary to complete an Exposed Piping Inspection Report when a gas carrying pipe is exposed).
An Exposed Piping Inspection Report form is not necessary for the following conditions:
• Casings or conduits (including plastic pipe in galvanized steel with service head adapter) or anodeless risers when no pipe is exposed.
• Pipe that has been abandoned or is in the process of being abandoned.
• Anodeless risers or risers with a service head adapter.
• Portions of risers that are aboveground.
• Buried riser piping that is not exposed. When retiring a steel service with a low cathodic read, the cathodic read recorded on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report for the main should be taken after the service being retired has been disconnected from the main. The Exposed Piping Inspection Report is to be used to document both steel and plastic (PE) pipeline facility information about each exposure of pipe that will remain a gas carrying pipe. The job-related information and location shall be identified as detailed on the report. Applicable sections consistent with the material exposed (Steel or Plastic) shall be completed. For electronic orders where a CP low read is reported, field personnel should include the centerline measurements of the exposure in the comments section.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
2 OF 5 SPEC. 3.44

External Examination Plastic Pipe The appropriate section of the Exposed Piping Inspection Report shall be used to capture information about each exposure of pipe, including the external pipe information, the as-found condition of the pipe, and the installation conditions. Specific information to be captured includes but is not limited to:
• Pipe material
• Pipe manufacturer
• Manufacture date and lot number
• Pipe color
• External pipe condition
• Internal pipe condition (as applicable)
• Products found inside pipe or on inside pipe wall
• As-found soil in contact with the pipe
• As-left soil type in contact with the pipe
• If a previous squeeze-off location is present in the exposed area for PE material
• If the pipe was squeezed during the current exposure
• If contaminated soil is present (Contaminated soil means the exposed soil smells of petroleum.) If the print line or information is not readable, then check the appropriate boxes that indicate
“Unidentifiable”. This indicates that an attempt was made to capture this information but that it was not readable. Note: If during the exposure, the tracer wire is found to be separated from the pipe, the tracer wire shall
be relocated next to the plastic pipe and in a straight line to facilitate accurate pipe locating.
Examining Buried Steel and Pipe Coating
When a buried steel pipeline is exposed, it must be examined for evidence of external corrosion and
coating deterioration. The inspection includes noting the type of pipe coating and the coating bond condition upon exposure, condition of external pipe if the coating has been removed, and documentation of rust and pitting. If pitting is found, it shall be measured with a pit gauge and the depth and width of the pitting shall be noted in the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form. The pit depth shall be measured in
decimal inches, e.g., 0.050-inches. The width of the pit shall be recorded in fractions of inches in 16th inch increments, for example, 1-3/16-inches.
Remedial action must be taken to the extent required, as referenced in the repair charts found in
Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel. When corrosion is found and it extends beyond what is exposed, then the adjacent pipe must also be exposed and investigated to determine to what extent corrosion exists.
Pipe shall further be exposed until at least 3 feet of adjacent pipe is found to be corrosion-free.
A pipe-to-soil read shall be taken and recorded when the coating needs to be repaired or removed. This information shall be recorded on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report. Refer to Pipe-to-Soil Procedures
in Specification 5.14, Cathodic Protection for details. (Note: A pipe-to-soil read is not needed on risers if no below ground riser piping is exposed.)
Examining Buried Portion of Steel Risers

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
3 OF 5 SPEC. 3.44

When soil is removed from around a buried steel carrier riser, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report is required. This does not include anodeless risers or risers with a service head adapter. (Note: it is not necessary to fill out an Exposed Pipe Report for the part of the riser that is aboveground. If no buried riser piping is exposed, no Exposed Piping Inspection Report is needed.) Field personnel need to remove the soil around a steel carrier pipe riser where there is no wrap or poorly
bonded wrap that comes aboveground. Dig until well bonded wrap is found and then rewrap it to above grade level per the requirements of Specification 3.12, Steel Mains, “Tape Wrap.” This includes anytime field personnel are digging up around the riser below grade level. If there is pipe wrap that comes above grade and the field employee is only brushing back built up dirt or debris back to grade level, then no Exposed Piping Inspection Report or pipe-to-soil read is required.
If the riser type cannot be determined, the riser shall be dug up and exposed until the riser type is determined. Exposed riser information to be documented on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form includes:

• Depth in inches that the soil was removed from around the riser.
• Length exposed will most likely be the same as the depth in inches; however, this is recorded in feet, i.e., 1 inch = 0.08 of a foot, 2 inches = 0.17 of a foot, 3 inches = 0.25 of a foot, etc.
• Coating type for steel risers that have a painted coating; choose “Other,” “Riser/gray paint,” or “Riser/green paint,” etc. Otherwise, choose one of the appropriate coatings. Coating Bond Condition Classifications:
(If bare pipe is noted in the “coating type” section, then no coating bond information is required since no coating is present.)
Bonded: The coating provides a continuous barrier and no defects are observed.
Unbonded: The coating has degraded to the point that areas of corrosion are detected on the surface, coating holidays exist, or the coating is visibly dis-bonded from the surface of the pipe. (Note: A pipe-to-soil read is required on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form for un-bonded conditions.) Soil Type Descriptions:
Sand: A sedimentary material that is finer than granule and coarser than silt. Loam: Soil that has no or few rocks or pebbles but has some peat or peat-like elements in the soil. Clay: Very fine soil that becomes slimy or plastic when mixed with water and compacts tightly and is
hard to remove from the ditch and boots.
Rocky: Soil that contains rock, angular or rounded, in substantial concentration.
Concrete/Grout: Material composed of concrete as well as other cementitious materials such as fly ash, slag cement, or aggregate materials mixed with water and allowed to harden.
Controlled-Density Fill (CDF): A self-compacting, flowable cementitious material used primarily as a backfill in lieu of compacted backfill.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
4 OF 5 SPEC. 3.44

Low Cathodic Protection (CP) Read Identified If a low read is found, it shall be reported to the CP Low Field Reading Reporting Hotline as soon as possible. If the report is not submitted via the mobile computer, then Fax or email a picture of the completed paper Exposed Piping Inspection Report (form N-2534) to the following:
Low Read Hotline: Primary: Alternate:
Fax or Email to: Fax:Email:
The hotline will no longer provide prompts for the required information. When calling the hotline be prepared to provide the following information:
• First and last name
• State the cathodic protection read was taken in (ID, OR, or WA)
• The date (month, day, and year) the low cathodic protection read was taken
• Address or location where the read was taken, be as specific as possible
• City
• Pipe-to-soil read
• Any additional comments
Internal Steel Pipe Examination When steel pipe is removed from a pipeline for any reason, the internal surface must be inspected for evidence of corrosion (rust or pitting) and if the inside wall is clean, dirty, or oily, and if there are puddles of water, oil, or black sludge in the pipe. If pitting is found, it shall be measured with a pit gauge and the depth and width of the pitting shall be noted in the appropriate section of the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form. If internal corrosion is found refer to “Internal Corrosion Control” in Specification 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance. Internal PE Pipe Examination
When pipe is removed from a pipeline or cut apart for any reason, the internal surface of the plastic pipe
shall be inspected to determine if the inside wall is clean, dirty or oily, and if there are puddles of water, oil, or black sludge in the pipe.
Compliance
The exposed pipe process shall utilize both electronic and paper documents to capture gas pipe field data as presented on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form. Information captured on the paper Exposed Piping Inspection Report form shall be recorded electronically within the Avista document retention system.
Records Retention Avista shall maintain the exposed pipe records for the life of the pipeline facility or 10 years whichever is longer.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
5 OF 5 SPEC. 3.44

Examples of Pipe Exposures Below are examples of when an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form is required to be filled out (multiple Exposed Piping Inspection Report forms may be required depending on what is exposed in the ditch or bell hole):
• Where multiple mainline coating types for steel pipe exist within the open ditch, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report is required for each coating type and an additional Report is required if the condition of the pipe under the coating changes. An additional Exposed Piping Inspection Report is not required for a change in coating type for the weld joint or a fitting, only for a change in the mainline pipe coating.
• Where pipe diameter changes within the open ditch.
• On either side of a dresser fitting or isolation fitting within the open ditch.
• On a pipeline that remains energized within the open ditch for a pipe abandonment, replacement, or removal. (Including service stubs; no minimum length is exempt).
• Where each service lateral is exposed within the open ditch.
• Steel gas carrying risers that are uncovered below grade level.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
1 OF 3 SPEC. 4.11

4.0 OPERATIONS 4.11 CONTINUING SURVEILLANCE SCOPE:
To establish a procedure for continuous monitoring of Avista’s pipelines and facilities in order to determine the extent of changes in class locations, changes or trends in leakage history, changes or trends in corrosion or cathodic protection requirements, updating and correcting mapping data, and identification of other unusual operating or maintenance requirements. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
§192.465, §192.481, §192.605, §192.609, §192.611, §192.613, §192.617, §192.619, §192.620, §192.705, §192.706, §192.721, §192.723 WAC 480-93-017, 480-93-018, 480-93-180, 480-93-187, 480-93-188, 480-93-200
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe Spec. 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements Spec. 4.18, Odorization Procedures
Spec. 4.31, Operator Qualification Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance Spec. 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling and Pipeline Markers General
The Maintenance and Operations sections of the Gas Standards Manual comprise Avista’s Continuing Surveillance program. When maintenance is performed, it allows an opportunity for continuous monitoring of procedures, pipelines, and facilities.
Information Analysis and Responsibilities
Operations Managers shall be responsible for making initial determinations regarding conditions or situations on pipelines and facilities that require a special analysis or possible action. Hazardous or potentially hazardous conditions that may affect life or property shall be corrected immediately upon
discovery or as soon as possible under regulatory code and company standards. Employees in each construction area shall receive training to be able to recognize conditions that may be subject to safety related reporting requirements or that may require action to prevent the formation of an immediate hazard.
Information pertaining to potentially hazardous conditions, especially those that indicate a trend or
system-wide problem, shall be reported and discussed with appropriate Gas Engineering personnel and the Gas Pipeline Integrity Program Manager. An analysis shall be performed to determine if mitigating action should be taken to forestall a hazardous situation. The review of this information should be conducted periodically. Consideration shall be given to using centralized maps, map overlays, etc. to
visually analyze areas of corrosion, leakage, soil subsidence, failures, and other unusual conditions.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
2 OF 3 SPEC. 4.11

As soon as it is determined that a trend has possibly developed in such above mentioned conditions, Gas Engineering shall initiate additional surveys in order to make a final determination on what action is appropriate. The required mitigation shall be communicated to the affected construction area as soon as practicable. In cases where a segment of pipeline is involved, a program to recondition or phase out the segment shall be initiated. If the segment cannot be reconditioned or phased out, the MAOP of that
pipeline system shall be reduced per §192.619 and §192.620. In the case where other gas facilities are involved, the appropriate repairs or replacements shall be completed as soon as possible. Material Failure
A leak marked as a material failure must have a Gas Material Failure Report (Form N-2614) filled out and
sent to the Gas Materials Specialist in Gas Engineering. The failed material or component should also be sent to the Gas Materials Specialist for failure analysis. If the failed item is large, heavy, difficult to ship, or to remove from the system, field personnel should contact the Gas Materials Specialist for further guidance. If it is decided the failed material or component need not be removed from the system, the field
person should take a picture of the failed material or component and send it to the Gas Materials Specialist. A Gas Material Failure Report should be filled out for other non-leak material failures as well.
The Gas Materials Specialist will then take the steps below to determine to what extent the material is to be analyzed to determine the failure cause. The three levels of failure analysis include: 1. Internal Analysis: The Gas Materials Specialist will first examine the failure report and material
to determine if the failure cause is readily identifiable as a known failure type, typically because it has been observed and confirmed previously by either a manufacturer or independent lab
analysis. The Gas Materials Specialist may seek input from other gas materials experts including Gas Engineers, the Gas Pipeline Integrity Program Manager, or others to make this
determination.
2. Manufacturer Analysis: If there is uncertainty in the failure cause using internal analysis, the material may be sent to the manufacturer for additional analysis. This is often done when
suspected failure cause is a manufactured material defect or an installation error. The Gas Materials Specialist will confer with Gas Engineering before sending the material to the manufacturer.
3. Independent Laboratory Analysis: The Gas Engineering Manager and the Manager of Pipeline Integrity and Gas Compliance will collaborate on any request or recommendation for an
independent laboratory analysis. The Gas Engineering Manager is responsible for the creation of the lab analysis specifications and for approving any laboratories to be utilized. An independent laboratory analysis may be sought for the following reasons:
• The failure cause appears unique, i.e., the failure cause is not a known material defect, installation error, or other known failure cause.
• The material is no longer being manufactured and it has a suspected manufacturing defect.
• It is deemed prudent to acquire an independent analysis to confirm a failure cause, to dispute a failure cause, or to gain additional information.
• Avista has been required to conduct an independent analysis.
• The material is involved in or results in a major gas incident. If it is determined by either internal or external analyses that the material failure was caused by an installation error, then an internal investigation shall be performed when required per GESH, Section 17 – Gas Incident Field Investigation, or Gas Standards Manual, Specification 4.31, Operator Qualification.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
3 OF 3 SPEC. 4.11

Once the failure cause has been determined by one of the three analysis methods above, the Gas Materials Specialist will document the failure cause and notify the Gas Pipeline Integrity Program Manager of the results. The Gas Pipeline Integrity Program Manager will record and trend material failures. Reports required by state or federal pipeline safety entities shall be submitted by the Gas Pipeline Program Integrity Manager and approved by the Manager of Pipeline Integrity and Gas Compliance.
The Gas Pipeline Integrity Program Manager works with the Gas Materials Specialist throughout this process to track and trend material failures as applicable in order to meet the requirements of Avista’s DIMP and TIMP programs and to facilitate the submission of PHMSA Forms F7100.1-1 and F7100.1-2 and/or F7100.2-1 as delineated in Gas Standards Manual, Specification 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements.

Map and Data Corrections Occasionally data or mapping discrepancies are identified by field personnel and construction contractors. These discrepancies require an editor to make the map/data correction. Mapping and data
corrections shall be submitted by the individual who identified and validated the discrepancy. Request for corrections should be submitted along with the information included on the “Map/Data Correction Form” (Form N-2672) to the appropriate office for editing. In Washington State, map corrections shall be completed within 6 months following the completion of field work. In Idaho and Oregon this is a best
management practice.
WAC 480-93-200 (6):
a material or construction defect has resulted in an incident or hazardous condition, Avista must
supply the WUTC a copy of the failure analysis report within 5 days of receiving it.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 11
1 OF 4 SPEC. 4.12

4.12 SAFETY-RELATED CONDITIONS SCOPE: To establish procedures to be followed in the event that safety-related conditions are found to exist on Avista’s pipelines or facilities that requires action and/or reporting under State or Federal guidelines.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §191.3, §191.23, §191.25, §192.605 WAC 480-93-180, 480-93-200
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.11, Continuing Surveillance Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance Spec. 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling - Pipeline Markers
General
Gas operations employees shall be familiarized through review of this section with conditions and situations that constitute an actual or potential safety-related condition. Employees that discover such conditions shall report all pertinent facts to the applicable Operations Manager immediately. Gas
Engineering shall then be notified so that they may make an evaluation and recommendations for correction or repair of the condition, as appropriate. Corrective action shall be taken to eliminate or minimize any hazardous conditions that are discovered.
Such actions shall include, but are not limited to:
• In the case of corrosion, reducing the operating pressure to a pressure commensurate with the strength of the pipe based on the actual remaining wall thickness.
• Repairing corroded pipe if the area of general corrosion is small.
• Replacing pipeline segments with corrosion pitting or general corrosion.
• Repairing or replacing facilities that may have failed or caused a pipeline pressure to exceed the MAOP, plus build-up.
• Shutting down any pipeline or facility where an immediate hazard exists. Reporting of Safety-Related Conditions Gas Engineering with the assistance of the Pipeline Safety Engineer shall assess and report (as necessary) the conditions found to exist on company facilities or pipelines that constitute an actual or potential safety-related condition as defined in §191.23.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 11
2 OF 4 SPEC. 4.12

The following safety-related conditions discovered on pipelines and facilities shall be reported:
• In the case of a pipeline operating at a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of specified minimum yield strength (SMYS), in which general corrosion has reduced the wall thickness to less than that required for the maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP), and localized corrosion pitting exists to a degree where leakage might result.
• Unintended movement or abnormal loading by environmental causes, such as earthquake, landslides, or flooding, which impairs the serviceability of a pipeline.
• Any material defect or physical damage that impairs the serviceability of a pipeline that operates
at a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of SMYS.
• Any malfunction or operating error of pressure limiting or control devices that causes the pressure of a distribution pipeline to exceed its MAOP plus the allowable build-up.
• A leak in a pipeline that constitutes an emergency.
• Any safety-related condition that could lead to an imminent hazard and causes (either directly or
indirectly by remedial action of the operator), for purposes other than abandonment, a 20 percent or more reduction in operating pressure or shutdown of operation of a pipeline.

• For transmission pipelines only, each exceedance of MAOP plus allowable build-up for operation of pressure limiting or control devices as specified in the applicable requirements of §192.201, §192.620(e), and §192.739. Exceptions to Reporting Safety-Related Conditions A report is not required for any safety-related condition that:
• Exists on a master meter system or a customer-owned service line.
• Is an incident or results in an incident before the deadline for filing the safety-related condition report.
• Exists on a pipeline that is more than 220 yards (660 feet) from any building intended for human occupancy or outdoor place of assembly. Exception: Reports are required for conditions within
the right-of-way of an active railroad, paved road, street, or highway.
• Is corrected by repair or replacement in accordance with applicable safety standards before the deadline for filing the safety-related conditions report. Exceptions: Reports are required for transmission pipelines where corrosion has reduced the wall thickness to less than that required
for the maximum allowable operating pressure, other than localized pitting on an effectively coated and cathodically protected pipeline. Reports are also required for transmission pipelines
where there has been an exceedance of MAOP plus allowable build-up as discussed in the last bulleted item of the previous section.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 11
3 OF 4 SPEC. 4.12

Filing of Safety-Related Condition Report
Each report of a safety-related condition must be filed (received by the Associate Administrator) in writing within 5 working days (not including Saturdays, Sundays, or Federal holidays) after the day a representative of the operator first determines that the condition exists, but not later than 10 working days
after the day a representative of the operator discovers the condition. Separate conditions may be described on a single report if they are closely related. Each report of a gas transmission pipeline MAOP exceedance meeting the requirements of criteria in the previous section, must be filed (received by the Associate Administrator) in writing within 5 calendar days of the exceedance.
The report shall be headed "Safety-Related Condition Report" and shall include the following information:
• Company name, principal address, and operator identification number (OPID). Avista’s OPID is 31232.
• Date of the report.
• Name, job title, and business telephone number of person submitting the report.
• Name, job title, and business telephone number of person who determined that the condition exists.
• Date condition was discovered and date condition was first determined to exist.
• Location of the condition, with reference to the State (and town, city, or county) and, as
appropriate, nearest street address, survey station number, milepost, landmark, or name of pipeline.
• Description of the condition, including circumstances leading to its discovery, any significant effects of the condition on safety, and the name of the commodity transported or stored.
• The corrective action taken (including reduction of pressure or shutdown) before the report is submitted and the planned follow-up or future corrective action, including the anticipated schedule for starting and concluding such action. Gas Engineering with assistance of the Pipeline Safety Engineer shall email or fax a copy of the Safety-Related Condition Report to the following email address or number: [e-mail] Fax No. 202-366-7128 Copies of the Safety-Related Condition Report shall also be sent to the appropriate state agencies.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 11
4 OF 4 SPEC. 4.12

Recordkeeping
Records of Safety-Related Condition Reports, letters, and other documentation relating to the discovery, evaluation, and correction of safety-related conditions shall be retained in the local construction office and in Gas Engineering for the life of the system.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
1 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

4.13 DAMAGE PREVENTION PROGRAM SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures to prevent damage to Company pipeline facilities due to excavation or other related construction activities.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.614, §192.615, §192.616, §192.707, §192.935, §196, §198 WAC 480-93-124, 480-93-200, 480-93-250
RCW 19.122 OAR 952 ID 55-22
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.14, Pre-Check Layout and Inspection Spec. 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation
Spec. 4.11, Continuing Surveillance Spec. 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance
General
Avista maintains and implements a Damage Prevention Program to educate contractors and the general public about gas pipelines in coordination with Avista’s Public Awareness Program. The Damage Prevention Program includes procedures for:
• Notifying the public and contractors of the program's existence and purpose,
• Notifying the public and contractors as to how they can learn the location of pipeline facilities before excavation or construction activities commence,
• Providing a means of receiving and recording notification of planned excavation and construction
activities,
• Providing the public and contractors information as to the type of temporary markings to be used to identify underground facilities and how to identify the markings, and
• Providing actual temporary physical marking of buried pipelines in areas of excavation or construction before activity begins.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
2 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

For the purpose of this section, the term "excavation" shall include excavation, blasting, boring, tunneling, backfilling, the removal of aboveground structures by either explosive or mechanical means, and other earth moving operations. The term "construction" shall apply to all other activities that could affect the integrity of Avista’s gas pipelines or facilities. Public Awareness Program
The Safety Department is responsible for the overall development, implementation, and maintenance of Avista’s Public Awareness Program. The program identifies stakeholder audiences and associated lists, the message content per stakeholder, frequencies and methods of message delivery, a program evaluation process, and additional languages into which this media information should be translated.
The focus of Avista’s Public Awareness Program is to raise the awareness of the presence of natural gas pipelines within its communities and educate stakeholders on the prevention and/or response actions to natural gas pipeline accidents. Avista’s communication methods are through various media including, public service announcements, paid advertising, bill inserts, newspapers, magazines, mass mailings,
online marketing, presentations and events.
One Call systems may also provide appropriate information to contractors and the public through such means as television and radio advertising, bumper stickers, pamphlets, presentations, events etc. The local operations managers should endeavor to use these means in addition to the Company programs. Additional detail is available in Avista’s Public Awareness Plan, which is maintained by the Public
Awareness Specialist.
Inspection and Protection of Pipelines after Railroad Accidents
Avista should inspect its gas pipeline facilities following railroad accidents and other significant events occurring within railroad right-of-way. Such inspection should include but is not limited to alerting rail
operators and emergency responders of the presence, depth and location of the pipelines to minimize the potential of damage to the facilities during clean-up and restoration activities. Avista’s Safety Department
has developed special communications materials for communication of this topic to known railroads and their agents in the Company’s service territory. The name of the brochure is “Electric and Natural Gas
Line Safety for Railroad Workers” (WA/ID) and “Natural Gas Line Safety for Railroad Workers” (OR).
One Call Notification System
A One Call notification system is where a utility locate request center, known as a One Call Center, receives a request from an excavator through one number (811 or www.811.com) for locating and
marking of underground utility facilities in a planned excavation site. This system eliminates the need for duplicate calls requesting the same information from the different utilities or agencies affected. The One
Call Centers may provide a platform for members to discuss damages, facilitate planning, and to further improve the system. One Call Centers may collect information on damages and compile the results for
distribution to the members.
In the instance that a One Call notification system is not available in a particular service district or in the event that such services are suspended or cancelled, the Company shall make provisions for notifying the
public and contractors of the provisions of this Damage Prevention Program through coordination with Avista’s External Communications Department and the local operations manager.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
3 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Requests for Locates Through One Call In areas where One Call notification systems are available, a designated One Call Center will receive and process incoming requests regarding facility locations. A minimum of two (2) business days prior notice is required for locate requests. One Call Centers will normally retain records pertaining to locate requests, however, written requests for locates and supporting documentation shall be retained by Avista or their
locating representative for a minimum of three (3) years. Requests for locates received by Company personnel should be routed through the One Call Center. This assures that Avista’s locators are properly notified, proper documentation is obtained, and records are kept for each locate ticket. One Call Centers that Avista is a member of are:
• North Idaho – Password Inc.
• North Central Idaho – Dig Line
• Oregon – One Call Concepts
• Washington – One Call Concepts
• Montana (electric only) – One Call Concepts Requesting Emergency Locates
Emergencies occur which do not allow two (2) working days to mark gas facilities. Requests for emergency locates should still be routed through the One Call system and facilities should be marked as soon as possible after being notified. An EMERGENCY means any condition involving a clear and present danger to life, property or a customer service outage. (In Oregon the definition includes interruption of essential public services and in Idaho the definition includes blockage of roads/transportation facilities that require immediate action). If Avista is dealing with an emergency that requires excavation, a request for locates shall be made. If locates cannot be expedited and an alternative method of securing the situation is not feasible, then excavate using reasonable care. Locating and Marking Gas Facilities
Individuals performing locates of Company gas facilities shall be properly trained in the use of the appropriate locating instrument, the use of Company maps, and shall be familiar with the state underground dig laws, and information and procedures contained herein. Websites for State Underground Dig Laws: Idaho: https://legislature.idaho.gov/statutesrules/idstat/title55/t55ch22/ Oregon: https://secure.sos.state.or.us/oard/displayDivisionRules.action?selectedDivision=4223 Washington: http://apps.leg.wa.gov/rcw/default.aspx?cite=19.122
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
4 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Upon receiving notification of proposed excavation or construction activity, or upon receipt of a location request, the following procedures shall be followed, in addition to the respective state’s “Underground Dig” laws:
• Gas facilities shall be located and marked within two full business days (unless other documented arrangements have been made with the excavator) after the excavator notifies the One Call Center.

• Marking of facilities – Use a stripe approximately 18” long by approximately 2” wide. Stripe approximately every 10 to 15 feet and more frequently in areas where facilities turn, angle, junction, cross, etc. to indicate the location of the facilities. Marks should be carried slightly past the dig area. Use an arrow “>” to indicate the direction that the pipe continues on and out of the dig area.
• Dotting with yellow paint is acceptable in areas of decorative rock, hardscapes and landscaped areas to minimize overspray on private property. Should be used in conjunction with flags if appropriate.
• Labeling for locate marks shall indicate company identification letters “AVA” for Avista, “GAS” for the type of facility, and diameter of the pipe if it is greater than 2” in diameter. If the pipeline is considered high pressure it shall also be indicated. Example:
AVA 4” HP GAS or AVA 4” GAS
• Placement of labeling should be on every lateral and approximately 50 feet apart or at a distance that the excavator can clearly see from one label to the next. This is extremely important where there may be multiple gas type companies in the area with yellow marks. (If there are short laterals off of the mainline that clearly show it is part of the gas line then labeling may not be necessary due to the shortness of the lateral.)
• In Oregon Only: Abandoned facilities should be provided when possible (if known) to assist the excavator and reduce downtime when they come across an unmarked pipeline. These facilities should be marked in yellow with a capital letter “A” inside a circle along with the company identification letters AVA for Avista, the word GAS, the pipe size if known and greater than 2” in diameter. Example: AVA GAS 4”
• If no gas facilities are in the area, the excavator or contractor shall be notified of this. Notification may either be by telephone, email, in person, or by painting “NO AVA GAS” on the ground surface at the proposed excavation or construction site. The employee shall document how this
information was communicated as part of the documentation above.
• When marking underground company gas pipelines and facilities, the locator shall use the following methods:
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
5 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

a) Yellow spray paint. Using paint intended for temporary marking of underground facilities, the locator shall indicate the presence of pipelines or other facilities using a striped line on the ground or road surface. Care should be taken to avoid getting paint on buildings, parked cars, sports courts, etc. Mismarks should be removed immediately by overcoating with a neutral color. b) Yellow polyethylene whiskers or flags should be used as an alternative method of marking where snow, ice, rain, or heavy traffic could make paint marking ineffective. Examples include dirt or gravel roadways, alleys or intersections, parking areas or construction sites, landscaped or grassy areas and dead vegetation areas where visibility of yellow paint presents a problem. c) Yellow marking stakes may also be used where practical. Drive stakes into the ground surface at regular intervals so that the direction of the gas pipeline is easily discernible.
In each case of locating and marking company facilities, the locator shall take reasonable steps to assure that the excavator or contractor can properly identify the location markings.
If the locator cannot determine where the dig site or zone is, contact the excavator for clarification. If unable to contact the excavator, then locate the area based on the description on the locate ticket if there are no white marking indications or if the white markings are not complete or clear.
It is beneficial to meet with the excavator at the job site to clarify the exact location where the construction
will take place. In unusual situations, some methods other than the above marking methods may be used such as offset markings/stakes.
A visual inspection shall be completed during the facility locating process. The primary reason for the
visual inspection is to determine if there are facilities that are not on record or mapped, such as in new areas of construction. The visual inspection includes identification of access points and potential hazards
as well as to assure that plant facilities shown on records match those of the site. Evidence of a facility not on a record/map includes but is not limited to valves, risers, meters, and vent pipes.
The locator shall document all facilities located on the locate request ticket, in a ticket management
system, or on a daily log sheet. Documentation includes locate ticket number, name of locator, date and time locate was completed, conversation with excavators and pictures showing the locate marks in case
of a dispute. Pictures should also capture the excavator’s white markings.
When a request is made for “remarking” or “refreshing” of Avista’s facilities, the request shall be treated as if it were a new locate request by connecting to the facilities and locating it out to validate whether or
not there has been a change since the last time it was located.
If in the course of locating and marking, a locating technician discovers a natural gas leak, they shall call Avista at 1-800-227-9187 to report the leak.
HARD TO LOCATE FACILITIES PROCESS: Every hard to locate pipeline situation is different. There is a difference between steel and plastic and the success to locating and or finding them. The length of the hard to locate (or un-locatable) pipe is also a big factor, a steel stub or end of main are more likely to tone depending on the length, whereas a plastic stub or end of main are extremely difficult.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
6 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

• The locating technician checks to see if a marker ball is present.
• The locating technician direct connects using the appropriate frequency and power setting to obtain continuity. Neighboring hook up locations should be accessed if a sufficient signal cannot be obtained at the first location. A higher frequency may need to be used to push a signal onto the facility that is hard to locate.
• If a proper signal cannot be obtained to locate the gas facility, the locating technician should communicate with the excavator to let them know about the hard to locate facility and to
determine if the facility will be in their dig zone. This communication should be documented with the locate ticket.

• In WASHINGTON RCW 19.122.030 (3)(b) and (4)(b)(iii): A GIS map of the area showing the location of the hard to locate (un-locatable) facility with Avista’s disclaimer on it should be given to the excavator within the two (2) business days. In the proposed construction area, spray paint a yellow triangle mark on the ground pointing in the direction where the facility is un-locatable.
• If the facility is in the dig zone, then the locating technician either turns the section that they cannot locate over to a lead technician or to Avista* if there is no lead technician assigned to the area such as in the smaller districts.
• As-built research is then conducted for the hard to locate (un-locatable) facility to determine if there are centerline measurements that can be used to mark the facility. The facilities should be
marked with the actual measurements (i.e., 395’ CL with an arrow showing the direction of which street centerline is being referenced). The excavator should then be notified that a record was
used to locate the facility and to dig with care.
• If there is no record of the facility or the record does not provide sufficient information for a measurement, then follow the additional actions seen below. *When a contract locator notifies Avista’s local office of a hard to locate (un-locatable) facility, the local Avista operations office shall take additional actions to identify the location of the facilities within the prescribed timeline of the locate ticket unless documented arrangements with the excavator have been made. Additional actions may include but are not limited to: (Contact Damage Prevention Program Administrator for guidance if necessary) 1. Review of maps, main, service line, or stub card as-built documents. 2. Potholing the facilities to try to find and fix a broken wire. 3. Coordinate with the excavator to minimize the potential for damage to Avista’s facilities by utilizing such techniques that include but are not limited to the following: a. Having field personnel stand-by while excavating across the facility. b. Identify the location of the facility by hand excavating. c. Employ other locating techniques as available and if time permits. 4. Facilities with broken wires, if not repaired through actions listed above, should have a job made up to have the broken wire repaired when practical. 5. When facilities are located, centerline measurements should be captured and mapped in GIS for use for future locating.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
7 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

6. Installation of a marker ball to aid in future locating of facilities such as end of main, end of stub, or other locations where it makes sense at the time of an open ditch. 7. Tolerance Zone
A locator is required to locate to a “reasonable accuracy” which means a location within 24 inches of the
outside lateral dimensions of both sides of an underground facility (also known as a tolerance zone).
TOLERANCE ZONE/REASONABLE ACCURACY ZONE DIAGRAMS - WA/ID: In the “reasonable accuracy zone” or “tolerance zone” an excavator is required to excavate with hand tools or non-invasive methods (in WA it is using reasonable care) within this zone to determine the exact or precise location of the marked utility.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
8 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

TOLERANCE ZONE DIAGRAM – OREGON Tolerance zone means the area within 24 inches surrounding the outside dimensions of all sides of an underground facility. Employ hand tools or other non-invasive methods either to determine the exact location of the underground facility or down to 24 inches beyond the depth of intended excavation within
24 inches of the outside dimensions of a marked underground facility.
Recordkeeping Written requests for locates and supporting documentation shall be retained by Avista or their locating representative for a minimum of three (3) years.
APWA Uniform Color Codes for Marking Listed below are American Public Works Association (APWA) uniform color codes used to mark utility locations. These color codes shall be adhered to unless it conflicts with local codes or practices. Red Electric Power Lines, Cables or Conduit, Lighting Cables Yellow Gas, Oil, Steam, Petroleum, Hazardous Liquid, Gaseous Materials Orange Communications, Cable TV, Alarm or Signal Lines, Cables or Conduits, Fiber Blue Potable Water Green Sewers, Drainage Facilities or Other Drain Lines Pink Temporary Survey Markings Purple Slurry, Irrigation, and Reclaimed Water White Proposed Excavation Area
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
9 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Excavator Responsibilities for Safe Digging The general responsibilities of an excavator for safe digging and prevention of excavation damages are outlined below. (Refer to respective state dig laws for specific requirements)

• Premark the excavation site in white.
• Request locates at least two (2) business days before beginning an excavation.
• Do not begin excavation until all known utilities are marked or have been cleared (utilities are
listed on the locate ticket in some states their contact information is also included).
• Verify the locate description matches the excavation project, if not then request additional locates.
• Hand dig within tolerance zone or use other non-invasive methods to expose and determine the exact location of underground facilities before using mechanized equipment.
• If an underground facility is discovered that is not marked notify owner/operator or call 811.

• Properly support and protect pipeline and other utilities when exposed.
• Maintain the locate markings. Marks are good for the following timeframes starting from the day after notification to 811/One Call Center, if your project will not be completed prior to the expiration of the locate ticket, call 811/One Call Center to update the ticket at least 2 full business days prior to expiration: o WA = 45 days, then request new locates
o ID = Three consecutive weeks (21 days), then request new locates o OR = 45 days, then request new locates
• If an excavator damages a utility, then refer to the section on Avista Damage to Other Facility Operators later in this specification.

• If damage occurs to a pipeline and gas is escaping, call 911. Marking of pipe after installation is a requirement in Oregon per OAR 952-001-0070 (8). In areas of ongoing excavation or construction (such as residential or commercial site development) in Oregon, newly installed facilities shall be located and marked with locate paint or appropriate flagging for backfilled facilities immediately upon placement. For shaded pipe in a ditch where Avista is not backfilling the ditch, locate and mark using locate paint on the sand or “natural gas” caution/warning tape which may be placed on the sand over the pipe using sand in various places to anchor the tape in place so that the location of the pipe is still visible. Locate Ticket Availability
Avista crews (whether company employees or contractors), should have a copy of the One Call locate ticket on site whenever performing excavation.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
10 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

On-Site Inspections - General
If company personnel are made aware there exists a possibility that company gas pipelines or facilities could be damaged by excavation or construction activities the following procedures shall apply:
• The pipeline or other facilities shall be inspected as frequently as deemed necessary before and after the construction or excavation activities. The employee performing the inspection shall be properly trained to verify that the integrity of the pipeline or other gas facility has not been compromised. Whenever a pipeline is exposed, whether steel or PE, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (N-2534) shall be completed. If the pipeline is damaged (including the coating if steel pipe), it shall be repaired per the appropriate company procedure. For steel piping, a pipe-to-soil read shall be taken. Refer to Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation.
• In areas of underground utility congestion, company personnel should consider the advantages of opening bell holes and exposing the various utilities prior to excavation. When a proposed excavation is planned in proximity to any gas line, the line should be located by bell holing at a number of locations necessary to determine the exact location of the pipeline.
• When trenchless methods are used, underground facilities that cross the bore path must be
located and protected. Those facilities that cross the bore path must be day-lighted (potholed) to verify location and depth. This applies to those streets with a pavement cut moratorium in place
as well; if the location and depth of foreign utilities cannot be positively identified an alternate bore path must be selected. Refer to Specification 3.19, Trenchless Pipe Installation Methods for
minimum potholing requirements.
• In the cases of major road, sewer, or construction projects consideration shall be given to appointing an employee dedicated to assuring that company facilities are not damaged. Blasting Near Pipelines Blasting activities within 200 feet of any gas facility require evaluation by Avista Gas Engineering. An Avista representative should be on site during the blasting operation. No blasting operation is allowed that will adversely affect Avista facilities. Following a blast performed within 200 feet of any gas pipeline, or a blast that has the potential to damage a gas facility, a post inspection leak survey shall be completed to verify the integrity of the pipeline system. For blasting operations in which the predicted Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) of the blast will exceed 2 in/sec at the pipe an engineering evaluation of the blasting operation is required (refer to chart below). PPV is a measure of the ground vibration caused by blasting.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
11 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

When blasting within 200 feet of a pipeline and the predicted PPV is less than 2 in/sec (Safe to Blast) then the contractor shall provide seismic monitoring at a location perpendicular to the blast and over the
pipeline to verify the blaster is operating within the predetermined limits. Engineering evaluations include review of the contractor submitted blasting plan. The plan shall include the following information: 1.) Date of blast 2.) Drawing specific to the location of the blast including distance to Avista facilities
3.) Hole size, spacing, depth, and layout 4.) Type of explosive and specific energy release 5.) Total weight of explosives 6.) Delay interval
7.) Maximum charge weight/delay
Gas Engineering shall review the blasting plan for conformance with Avista’s Gas Standards. Blasting operations shall restrict the Total Combined Stress on the pipeline to no greater than 80 percent of SMYS for all operating class locations. The total combined stress on the pipeline shall be determined
in accordance with AGA Project PR-15-109 “Pipeline Response to Buried Explosive Detonations.”
On-Site Inspections for Transmission Facilities
Additional preventative and mitigative measures are required for transmission pipelines that are affected by §192, Subpart O – Pipeline Integrity Management. Avista is required to monitor all excavations near
transmission pipelines. The following procedures shall apply:
Blasting - Peak Particle Velocity (PPV limited to 2 in/sec)
Charge Distance to Pipe Centerline (Ft)
To
t
a
l

C
h
a
r
g
e

W
e
i
g
h
t

(
l
b
s
)

p
e
r

8

m
s

d
e
l
a
y
SAFE TO BLAST
CONTACT ENGINEERING
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
12 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

• Locating personnel will inform the designated individual, who will be the coordinator in each construction area that has transmission facilities (Spokane, Colville, and Klamath Falls areas), any time they perform a locate on a transmission line. The locating personnel will provide the locate ticket for recordkeeping purposes.
• The designated individual or company representative will do the initial screening by contacting the One Call requestor or contractor to determine where they will be digging and if the location will likely be within 10 feet of a transmission pipeline.
• The coordinator will arrange for an Avista representative (inspector) to be on-site during the
excavation work, if it has been determined that digging will be within 10 feet of the transmission line. The Avista representative will indicate on the one call ticket (or on a separate form attached
to the one call ticket) their name, the date they completed the stand-by inspection, and whether the pipe was exposed. A copy of the ticket (and form) shall be forwarded to the Damage
Prevention Administrator and a copy shall be kept in the local construction office.
• When facilities are exposed, the company representative will document the condition of the coating and pipe on an Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (N-2534) and take a pipe-to-soil read if the coating is compromised.
• If mechanical damage occurs to the pipeline during the excavation, whether it results in a leak or not, data shall be collected in the same format as all other excavation damage (either through the field computer or on a Gas Operating Order form (N-2633). The excavator information must be filled out on the form and mapped in Avista’s AFM (GIS) mapping system. When damage occurs, the Damage Prevention Administrator should be notified.
• If blasting is planned near the pipeline, refer to the previous section on Blasting Near Pipelines.
Excavation Identified Without a Locate Ticket (WA Transmission)
If there is evidence that excavation near a transmission pipeline was completed without a locate request or that Avista was not made aware of, notify the Damage Prevention Administrator as a follow-up
assessment is required to determine if the pipeline sustained damage. The Damage Prevention Administrator will in turn notify the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager and Gas Engineering to determine
the appropriate method of assessment (response).
When an Avista employee discovers an excavator digging within 35 feet of a transmission pipeline without first obtaining utility locates, the following information shall be acquired at the time of the
discovery and provided to the Damage Prevention Administrator:
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
13 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Acquire the following information:
• Date of Observance
• Company name
• Operator name
• Operator address
• Operator phone number
• Location of dig site/address
• Type of excavator
• Type of work being performed
• Individual who observed the digging
The Damage Prevention Administrator and the Pipeline Safety Engineer should coordinate the notice with the Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission (WUTC) in accordance with the reporting rule
and as mentioned previously. The report should be completed within 45 days of discovery. Auditable documentation of the correspondence shall be retained within the commission correspondence files in
Gas Engineering. Intentional Damage or Removal of Locate Marks
When an Avista employee discovers that gas locate marks have been intentionally damaged or removed in the state of Washington, notification to the Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission (WUTC) must be made per WAC 480-93-200(9)(b). The Damage Prevention Administrator and the Pipeline Safety Engineer should coordinate the notice and provide relevant details of the event that were observed or that the company employee became aware of. The report should be completed within 45 days of discovery. Auditable documentation of the correspondence shall be retained within the
commission correspondence files in Gas Compliance. Mapping Corrections Occasionally, when locating facilities, errors will be noted on Company maps. Mapping errors and corrections shall be completed in accordance with Specification 4.11, Continuing Surveillance. Response to Facility Damage Identified damage to Avista facilities shall be repaired in accordance with Avista Gas Standards.
Documentation of damage to Avista’s facilities shall be captured through the existing Gas Trouble process as detailed in Section 2 of the GESH – “Leak and Odor Investigation”.
Instances of damage to other facility operators shall be captured using the Damage Information Reporting
Tool (DIRT) Field Form.
WAC 480-93-200(9)
each instance of the following when the company or its contractor observes or becomes aware of an
excavator that digs within 35 feet of a transmission pipeline without first obtaining a locate. (b) A
person intentionally damages or removes the marks indicating the location or presence of gas pipeline
facilities.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
14 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Damage includes the substantial weakening of structural or lateral support of an underground facility, penetration, impairment or destruction of any underground protective coating, housing or other protective device, or the severance (partial or complete) of any underground facility to the extent that the project owner or the affected facility owner or facility operator determines that repairs are required. Avista Damage to Other Facility Operators
When Avista personnel damage other operator’s facilities the damage shall be reported to the Claims Department and documented on the Damage Information Reporting Tool (DIRT) Field Form. Additionally, Avista shall notify the other facility operator so appropriate repairs can be completed. At a minimum the following information shall be documented on the DIRT form:
• Date and time of the incident
• Avista employee involved in the incident
• Location of the incident (with enough information to be found by another individual)
• Description of the damage
• Locate information
• Whether a one-number locator service was notified before excavation commenced, and, if so, the
locate ticket number provided by a One Call locator service
• Root cause of why damage occurred
• Type of Right-of-Way where damage occurred
• Type of underground facility damaged
• Type of excavator that caused the damage
• Type of excavation equipment that caused the damage
• Type of work that was being performed when the damage occurred
• Type of locator (contract or company)
• Did damage cause interruption of service
• Was the work area pre-marked (showing the boundary of the excavation site)
• Did this event involve a sewer cross bore
• Measured depth from grade
• Photographs of the damaged facility
Completed Damage Information Reporting Tool (DIRT) Field Forms shall be sent to the Damage Prevention Administrator at MSC-6, who will review the information and submit the report information into
the respective state reporting databases.
• WA damages through the UTC Virtual DIRT database within 45 days of the incident as required by RCW 19.122.053.
• ID damages through the Damage Prevention Board Virtual DIRT database as required by Idaho Code Chapter 22, Section 55-2208 (5)
• OR damages through CGA DIRT Refer to Avista Specification 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
15 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

Avista excavators and their contractors are required to call the local public safety agency (i.e. 911) when excavation damage they have caused, results in an emergency condition. The following calls must also be made: Washington: Operator of the facility that was hit and 811 One Call Center
Oregon: Operator of the facility that was hit Idaho: Owner of the facility that was hit and 811 One Call Center Photograph Requirements
Photographs shall be taken of excavation damages and should include sufficient detail to represent
information related to the excavation damage. Details should include but are not limited to:
• Photographs of the damage and the surrounding area from all four directions
• Locate marks or photograph representing lack of locate marks
• Excavation location
• Use of measurement devices such as a tape measure to convey dimensions, including locates outside the tolerance zone*.
• Use of a note within the photograph to convey the following:
o Date of damage event o Location
o Work Order or Service Request Number or claim number when available. Photographs are to be emailed to [e-mail] to assist with the determination of the root cause, filing of excavator complaints, and for claims processing. WA Damage Reporting
Damaged facilities in Washington shall be reported in accordance with Specification 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements.

WAC 480-93-200(7)(b)
conducted without a facilities locate first being completed, the gas pipeline company must also report
the name, address, and phone number of the person or entity that the company has reason to believe
may have caused the damage. The company must include this information in the comment section of
the web-based damage reporting tool form or sent to the commission separately. If the company
chooses to send the information separately, it must include sufficient information to allow the
commission to link the name of the party believed to have caused the damage with the damage event
reported through the damage reporting tool.
WAC 480-93-200(7)(c) - Each gas pipeline company must retain all damage and damage claim
records it creates related to damage events, including photographs and documentation supporting the
conclusion that a facilities locate was not completed, reported under subsection (b) of this section, for
a period of two years and make those records available to the commission upon request.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 19
16 OF 16 SPEC. 4.13

WA Excavator Notifications For damage to gas facilities located in Washington, Avista shall provide to the excavator the information as required by WAC 480-93-200(8).
Building Permits near Transmission Utility Easements or Rights of Way
When Avista is contacted by third parties regarding pipeline facilities, the following minimum information
shall be conveyed. In Washington, permitted construction activity within 100 feet of a transmission line will require the building applicant to consult with Avista. Consultation related to transmission facilities should be conducted by the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager. The Pipeline Integrity Program Manager shall document information about the consultation and file that document with the IMP program
documents. The following minimum information shall be conveyed to the applicant:
• Location of pipeline facilities
• Possible future notification information
• Damage prevention requirements including 811 information
• Vegetation management requirements
• Pipeline accessibility information
• Easements, if applicable

RCW Chapter 19.122.033(4)
pursuant to chapter 19.27 RCW must, when permitting construction or excavation within one hundred
feet, or greater distance if required by local ordinance, of a right-of-way or utility easement containing
a transmission pipeline: (a) Notify the pipeline company of the permitted activity when it issues the
permit; or (b) Require, as a condition of issuing the permit, that the applicant consult with the pipeline
company.
WAC 480-93-200(8)
pipeline facility, the following information set forth in chapter 19.122 RCW;
(a) Notification requirements for excavators under RCW 19.122.050(1);
(b) A description of the excavator’s responsibilities for reporting damages under RCW 19.122.053;
and
(c) Information concerning the safety committee referenced under RCW 19.122.130, including
committee contact information, and the process for filing a complaint with the safety committee.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
1 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

4.14 RECURRING REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
SCOPE: To establish procedures for the submission of federal and state reports. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §191.7, §191.11, §191.12, §191.13, §191.15, §191.17, §191.22, §191.29, §192.945 RCW 19.122.053, 81.88.080 Idaho Code §55-2208 (5) WAC 480-93-180, 480-93-200 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.13, Damage Prevention
General There are annual and conditional reporting requirements by PHMSA and state commissions. This specification covers these requirements. Reporting Distribution Facilities
Information for Avista’s distribution systems shall be reported on form PHMSA F7100.1-1. A separate form must be filled out and filed for each state in which the system operates. Form PHMSA F7100.1-2 or PHMSA’s Excel template format shall be filled out for each hazardous mechanical fitting failure that meets the criteria as outlined in Avista’s Distribution Integrity Management Plan (DIMP), Section 11, Reporting Results. Reporting Transmission Facilities
Information for Avista’s transmission facilities shall be reported on form PHMSA F7100.2-1. Only one form submission is required as it now encompasses all states within the one form.
Submission of Reports Avista, as an intrastate pipeline operator, shall submit federal annual reports via PHMSA’s online reporting tool at their website no later than March 15 of each calendar year.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
2 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

In the event the website is unavailable or inoperable, reports can be submitted via hardcopy to the following address: Office of Pipeline Safety Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration US Department of Transportation
Information Resources Manager, PHP-20 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE. Washington, DC 20590-0001 A copy of Form F7100.1-1, F7100.1-2, and/or F7100.2-1 shall also be submitted to each respective state commission no later than March 15 of each calendar year.
TIMP Performance Reporting
In accordance with §192.945 operators with transmission facilities that fall under Subpart O – Pipeline
Integrity Management is required to submit on an annual basis a report on the TIMP Performance Measures. These reports are submitted as part of the Transmission Annual Report, as mentioned above.
PHMSA Conditional Reporting
The following conditional reports shall be made to PHMSA as applicable and within the specified
timeframes as shown and as discussed at §191.22.
1. Construction of or any planned rehabilitation, replacement, modification, upgrade, uprate, or update of a facility, other than a section of line pipe that costs $10 million or more. (60 days
before the event occurs. If 60-day notice is not feasible due to an emergency, notification must be as soon as practicable).
2. Construction of 10 or more miles of a new or replacement pipeline (60 days before the event occurs).
3. Construction of a new LNG plant or LNG facility (60 days before the event occurs).
Note: The definition of “construction” in the previous paragraphs was amplified in Advisory Bulletin ADB-2014-03 to include: Material Purchasing/manufacturing; Right-of-Way Acquisition; Construction
equipment move-in; on-site/off-site fabrications and right-of-way clearing, grading and ditching.
4. A change in the primary entity responsible for managing or administering a safety program required by federal code covering pipeline facilities operated under multiple Operator
Identification Numbers (OPIDs) (Within 60 days after the event occurring). 5. A change in the name of the operator (Within 60 days after the event occurring).
6. A change in the entity responsible for an existing pipeline, pipeline, pipeline segment, pipeline facility or LNG facility (Within 60 days after the event occurring).
7. The purchase or sale of 50 or more miles of pipeline or pipeline system (Within 60 days after the event occurring).
8. The purchase or sale of an existing LNG plant or facility (Within 60 days after the event occurring).

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
3 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

WUTC Construction Defects and Material Failures Report
DOT Drug and Alcohol MIS Form Submission
Plans and Procedures
A copy of the updated Gas Standards Manual and the Gas Emergency and Service Handbook shall be
filed annually with the Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission (WUTC). The submission should be completed near the first of the year following standards revisions and shall be submitted
electronically. Copies of the updated documents shall also be submitted to the Idaho Public Utilities Commission and the Oregon Public Utilities Commission. Hardcopy or electronic is acceptable to these
entities.
WA Isolated Steel and Replacement Program In accordance with Washington State settlement agreement Docket PG-100049 a report detailing the Isolated Steel inspection and replacement program progress shall be submitted to the Washington
Utilities and Transportation Commission. The report shall be submitted by January 15, April 15, July 15, and October 15 and shall summarize the progress for the preceding quarter.
NPMS Updating In accordance with §191.29, Avista shall provide the following geospatial data to PHMSA:

• Geospatial data, attributes, metadata, and transmittal letter appropriate for use in the National Pipeline Mapping System (NPMS).
• The name and address for the operator (Avista).
• The name and contact information of a pipeline company employee to be displayed on a public Web site, who will serve as a contact for questions from the general public about the operator's NPMS data.
WAC 480-93-200(10)(b):
material failures resulting in leakage must be submitted to the Washington Utilities and Transportation
Commission no later than March 15 of each year, to include information from the preceding year.
WAC 480-93-200(13):
copy of a DOT Drug and Alcohol Testing Management Information System (MIS) form with US DOT,
Office of Pipeline Safety, the gas pipeline company must simultaneously submit a copy of the form to
WAC 480-93-180(2):
days prior to the operation of any gas pipeline. Each gas pipeline company must file revisions to the
manual with the commission annually. The commission may, after notice and opportunity for hearing,
require that a manual be revised or amended. Applicable portions of the manual related to a
procedure being performed on the pipeline must be retained on-site where the activity is being
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
4 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

The information required above must be submitted each year, on or before March 15, representing assets as of December 31 of the previous year. If no changes have occurred since the previous year’s submission, Avista must comply with the guidance provided in the NPMS Operator Standards manual available at http://www.npms.phmsa.gov or by contacting the PHMSA GIS Manager at 202-366-4595.
250+ PSIG Pipelines Map Submission (Washington) In accordance with RCW 81.88.080, Avista shall provide accurate maps of pipelines that operate above 250 psig to the commission. It shall be the responsibility of the Gas Integrity Management Analyst to ensure an updated cache of all such maps are electronically forwarded to the commission annually no later than March 15.
WA Damage Reporting
In accordance with the Washington RCW and UTC reporting requirements regarding the reporting of
damages to underground facilities, Avista shall report the following within 45 days of the damage event using the Washington commission’s virtual private damage information reporting tool (DIRT) report form
or other similar form.
Avista shall report all known instances of damage to Avista’s gas facilities by others and by Avista employees. Additionally, the report shall include instances of damage events to other facility operators by Avista. Instances of damage shall be captured as detailed within Specification 4.13 – Damage Prevention.
WA Reporting Requirements
The following elements shall be reported in accordance with WAC 480-93-200(7) and as set forth in RCW 19.122.053(3)(a) through (n):

• The name of the person submitting the report and whether the person is an excavator, a representative of a one-number locator service or a facility operator.
• The date and time of the damage event.
• The address where the damage event occurred.
• The type of right-of-way, where the damage event occurred, including but not limited to city, street, state highway, or utility easement.
WAC 480-93-200(7) In the event of damage to a gas pipeline, each gas pipeline company must
provide to the commission the following information using either the commission’s web-based
damage reporting tool or its successor, or the damage reporting form located on the commission’s
website: (a)The reporting requirements set forth in RCW 19.122.053(3)(a) through (n).

RCW Chapter 19.122.053(1) & (3) Facility operators and excavators who observe or cause damage
to an underground facility must report the damage event to the commission within forty-five days of
the damage event using DIRT.
RCW CHAPTER 19.122.053(2) A non-pipeline facility operator conducting an excavation, or a
subcontractor conducting an excavation on the facility operator’s behalf, that strikes the facility
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
5 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

• The type of underground facility damaged, including but not limited to pipes, transmission pipelines, distribution lines, sewers, conduits, cables, valves, lines, wires, manholes, attachments, or parts of poles or anchors below ground.
• The type of utility service or commodity the underground facility stores or conveys, including but not limited to electronic, telephonic or telegraphic communications, water, sewage, cablevision, electric energy, petroleum products, gas, gaseous vapors, hazardous liquids, or other substances.
• The type of excavator involved, including but not limited to contractors or facility operators.
• The excavation equipment used, including but not limited to augers, bulldozers, backhoes, or hand tools.
• The type of excavation being performed, including but not limited to drainage, grading, or landscaping.
• Whether a one-number locator service was notified before excavation commenced, and, if so, the excavation confirmation code provided by a one-number locator service.
• Whether an excavator experienced interruption of work as a result of the damage event.
• A description of the damage.
• Whether the damage caused an interruption of underground facility service.
For instances in which Avista believes the facility damage was the result of an excavation without a facilities locate the following additional information shall be reported.

• If applicable:
o The person who located the underground facility and their employer.
o Whether underground facility marks were visible in the proposed excavation area before excavation commenced. o Whether underground facilities were marked correctly.
ID Damage Reporting In accordance with the Idaho Code reporting requirements regarding reporting of damages to underground facilities, Avista shall report each damage event by no later than March 31 for the previous year’s damages. Damage events shall be reported using the Idaho Damage Prevention Board’s virtual private damage information reporting tool (DIRT) database.
WAC 480-93-200(7)(b) - If the damage is believed by the company to be the result of an excavation
conducted without a facilities locate first being completed, the gas pipeline company must also report
the name, address, and phone number of the person or entity that the company has reason to believe
may have caused the damage. The company must include this information in the comment section of
the web-based damage reporting tool form or sent to the commission separately. If the company
chooses to send the information separately, it must include sufficient information to allow the
commission to link the name of the party believed to have caused the damage with the damage event
reported through the damage reporting tool.
Idaho Code Title 55 Chapter 22; 55-2208 (5) Underground facility owners and excavators who
observe, suffer or cause damage to an underground facility or observe, suffer or cause excavator
downtime related to a failure of one (1) or more stakeholders to comply with applicable damage
prevention regulations shall report such information to the board in accordance with the rules
promulgated by the board.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
6 OF 6 SPEC. 4.14

Document Retention Records related to damage events are auditable for 2 years under the WAC reporting requirements. Document retention is greater than 2 years for information related to the DIMP or other code requirements. Refer to applicable standards. Supporting documentation could include but is not limited to:
• Trouble Order Information (1st Responder Operating Order).
• Service work order contained within Maximo.
• Exposed Piping Inspection Reports.
• Photographs.
• Avista Claims documentation and investigation documents.

WAC 480-93-200(7)(c)
it creates related to damage events, including photographs and documentation supporting the
conclusion that a facilities locate was not completed, reported under subsection (b) of this section, for
a period of two years and make those records available to the commission upon request.
OPERATIONS
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE REV. NO. 14
1 OF 3 SPEC. 4.15

4.15 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE (MAOP)
SCOPE: To define and explain Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) as it is addressed in the applicable regulatory codes and as it applies to Avista’s operations. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.5, §192.14, §192.105, §192.195, §192.605, §192.607, §192.619, §192.620, §192.621, §192.623, §192.624 WAC 480-93-018, 480-93-020, 480-93-155, 480-93-180, 480-93-200 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 2.23, Regulator Design Spec. 4.17, Uprating General
It is desirable to operate the gas systems near the documented MAOP. This provides for maximum system capacity during periods of unusually cold weather or other high system demand. The majority of Avista’s intermediate pressure distribution systems have an MAOP of 60 psig, although some systems have a lower MAOP. The intermediate pressure systems are most susceptible to pressure loss during periods of high demand and for this reason should be operated near the system MAOP.
Determination of MAOP The determination of the MAOP of any gas pipeline segment is made by Gas Engineering. The MAOP is based on one or several of the following factors (with the lowest pressure being the established MAOP for the system or segment):
• The design pressure of the weakest part of the pipeline segment as calculated by §192.105. For steel pipe in pipelines being converted under §192.14 or uprated, if any variable necessary to determine the design pressure under the design formula in §192.105 is
unknown, one of the following pressures is to be used as design pressure: o 80 percent of the first test pressure that produces yield under section N5.0 of Appendix N of ASME B31.8, reduced by the appropriate factor in §192.619 (a)(2)(ii) or if the pipe is 12.75 inches or less in outside diameter and is not tested to yield the
design pressure would be 200 psig.
• The MAOP established at the time of the pressure test by dividing the pressure to which the segment was tested after construction as follows: o For plastic pipe in all locations, the test pressure is divided by a factor of 1.5 o For steel pipe operated at 100 psig or more, the test pressure is divided by a factor determined in accordance with the following table:
OPERATIONS
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE REV. NO. 14
2 OF 3 SPEC. 4.15

Class

Installed before 11/11/1970 and before Installed on or Converted

• The pipeline is operating in satisfactory condition and the highest actual operating pressure the segment was subjected to during the five years preceding July 1, 1970. This restriction applies unless the segment was pressure tested in accordance with §192.619 after July 1, 1965.
• The pressure that is determined to be the maximum safe pressure after considering and accounting for records of material properties, including material properties verified in accordance with §192.607, if applicable, and the history of the segment, including known corrosion and the actual operating pressure. However, overpressure protection must be installed on the segment in a manner that will prevent the MAOP from being exceeded in accordance with §192.195.
Changing MAOP
The MAOP of a pipeline or system shall not be exceeded unless the particular facility has been uprated according to the procedures outlined in Specification 4.17, Uprating. The MAOP of a pipeline may be reduced based on several factors such as damage, corrosion, or operating characteristics of the pipeline as determined by Gas Engineering.
MAOP Consideration during Startup and Shutdown The various aspects of bringing a pipeline into or out of service are addressed in Specification 3.17 (Purging Pipelines), 3.18 (Pressure Testing), 5.16 (Abandonment or Inactivation of Facilities), 5.17 (Reinstating Abandoned Gas Pipelines and Facilities), and elsewhere in Avista’s Gas Standards. In all instances of bringing pipelines into service or shutting them down, the MAOP of these systems must not be exceeded. In the event the MAOP is exceeded, contact the Gas Engineering Manager and the Pipeline Safety Engineer. Downstream system investigations may likely be warranted, and state and/or Federal notifications may be necessary.
WAC 480-93-020:
OPERATIONS
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OPERATING PRESSURE REV. NO. 14
3 OF 3 SPEC. 4.15

Recordkeeping Records for transmission pipeline segments operating in a Class 3, Class 4, or High Consequence Area shall be Traceable, Verifiable and Complete per §192.624. If records for these pipeline segments are not Traceable, Verifiable and Complete, or if the MAOP for these segments is greater than 30% of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength (SMYS) and was established using the Grandfather Clause
[§192.619(c)], they would be subject to MAOP Reconfirmation in accordance with the Transmission Integrity Management (TIMP) program documentation. Records for any MAOP reconfirmation or materials verification shall be retained for the life of the pipeline. All records that could be used to establish MAOP for transmission pipeline segments in operation as of July 1, 2020 shall be retained for the life of the pipeline. Likewise, any records that could be used to establish MAOP for high pressure distribution and intermediate pressure distribution should be retained for the life of the pipeline as well.
Any newly installed or repaired segments of transmission pipeline must make and retain Traceable, Verifiable and Complete records for the establishment of the MAOP for the life of the pipeline. The same requirement should apply to all newly installed high-pressure distribution segments placed in operation.
Records pertaining to transmission and high-pressure distribution MAOP shall be centralized and kept in Avista’s Spokane Gas Engineering office for all service territories. Records for intermediate pressure
MAOP are held locally in the construction office. The MAOP of all pipelines, valves, and fittings in Avista’s system is maintained in Avista’s AFM (GIS) system and it is the responsibility of Gas Engineering and GIS Edit teams to update and maintain as necessary.

WAC 480-93-018 (5):
completes any construction activity and make such records available to appropriate company
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
1 OF 5 SPEC. 4.16

4.16 CLASS LOCATIONS
SCOPE: To assist in determining the design criteria, construction practices, and maintenance frequencies of Avista’s gas facilities as they relate to the applicable Federal and State codes. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.5, §192.609, §192.611, §192.613, §192.620 WAC 480-93-020, 480-93-155 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 4.15, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) Spec. 4.17, Uprating Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey Spec. 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling and Pipeline Markers
General For Avista, determinations of class locations and the subsequent monitoring of those locations applies to pipelines which operate at a hoop stress equal to or greater than 20 percent SMYS for the purposes of patrolling (refer to Specification 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling and Pipeline Markers). A class location unit along a pipeline extends 220 yards on each side of the centerline of any contiguous one-mile length of pipe. Each separate dwelling unit in a multiple dwelling unit building is counted as a separate building intended for human occupancy.
Class Locations Class 1 location is any class location unit that has 10 or fewer buildings intended for human occupancy. Class 2 location is any class location unit that has more than 10, but fewer than 46 buildings intended for human occupancy. Class 3 location is:
• Any class location unit that has 46 or more buildings intended for human occupancy; or
• An area where the pipeline lies within 100 yards of either a building that is occupied by 20 or more persons on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period. (The days and weeks need not be consecutive); or
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
2 OF 5 SPEC. 4.16

• An area where the pipeline lies within 100 yards of a small, well defined outside area (such as a playground, recreation area, outdoor theater, or other place of public assembly), that is occupied by at least 20 or more persons on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period. (The days and weeks need not be consecutive.) Class 4 location is any class location unit where buildings with 4 or more stories aboveground are prevalent.
Class Location Boundaries The boundaries of the above-mentioned class locations may be adjusted in accordance with the following:
• A Class 4 location ends 220 yards from the nearest building with 4 or more stories aboveground.
• In a Class 3 location when there is a cluster of buildings intended for human occupancy that ends 220 yards from the nearest building in the cluster.

• In a Class 2 location when there is a cluster of buildings intended for human occupancy that ends 220 yards from the nearest building in the cluster. Class Location Study Determining the boundaries of class location areas is essential for implementation of Avista’s maintenance and operational programs as required by State and Federal regulations. A review of the class locations shall be done annually for pipeline segments that operate greater than 20 percent SMYS as part of the preparation for the submission of the PHMSA Report F7100.2-1 Annual Report for Natural or Other Gas Transmission and Gathering Systems. This information shall be provided to Gas Engineering for confirmation or revision of MAOP’s as outlined below in this specification.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
3 OF 5 SPEC. 4.16

Change in Class Location When an increase in population density indicates a change in class location for a segment of an existing steel pipeline operating at a hoop stress that is greater than 40 percent SMYS or indicates that the hoop stress corresponding to the established maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) for a segment of
existing pipeline is not commensurate with the present class location; a study shall be done immediately per the requirements of §192.609 to determine: 1) The present class location for the segment involved. 2) The design, construction, and testing procedures followed in the original construction and a
comparison of these procedures with those required for the present class location. 3) The physical condition of the segment to the extent it can be ascertained from available records.
4) The operating and maintenance history of the segment.
5) The maximum actual operating pressure and the corresponding operating hoop stress, taking pressure gradient into account, for the segment of pipeline involved. 6) The actual area affected by the population density increase, and physical barriers or other factors
which may limit further expansion of the more densely populated area.
Confirmation or Revision of MAOP
Confirmation or revision of the maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) that is required as a result of a study as outlined above must be completed within 24 months of the change in class locations as
outlined below per the requirements of §192.611. Pressure reduction under paragraph (1) or (2) of this section within the 24-month period does not preclude establishing a maximum allowable operating
pressure under paragraph (3) of this section at a later date. If the hoop stress corresponding to the established maximum allowable operating pressure of a segment of pipeline is not commensurate with the present class location, and the segment is in satisfactory physical condition, the maximum allowable operating pressure of that segment of pipeline must be confirmed or revised according to one of the following requirements:
1) If the segment involved has been previously tested in place for a period of not less than 8 hours: a) The maximum allowable operating pressure is 0.8 times the test pressure in Class 2 locations, 0.667 times the test pressure in Class 3 locations, or 0.555 times the test pressure in Class 4 locations. The corresponding hoop stress may not exceed 72 percent of SMYS of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 percent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50 percent of SMYS in Class 4 locations.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
4 OF 5 SPEC. 4.16

b) The alternative maximum allowable operating pressure is 0.8 times the test pressure in Class 2 locations and 0.667 times the test pressure in Class 3 locations. For pipelines operating at alternative maximum allowable pressure per § 192.620, the corresponding hoop stress may not exceed 80 percent of SMYS of the pipe in Class 2 locations and 67 percent of SMYS in Class 3 locations.
2) The MAOP of the segment involved must be reduced so that the corresponding hoop stress is not more than that allowed by this part for new segments of pipelines in the existing class location. 3) The segment involved must be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 192 Subpart J and its MAOP must then be established according to the following criteria:
a) The MAOP after the requalification test is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class 2 locations, 0.667 times the test pressure for Class 3 locations, and 0.555 times the test pressure for Class 4 locations.
b) The corresponding hoop stress may not exceed 72 percent of SMYS of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 percent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50 percent of SMYS in Class 4
locations. c) For a pipeline operating at an alternative maximum allowable operating pressure per § 192.620, the alternative maximum allowable operating pressure after the requalification test
is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class 2 locations and 0.667 times the test pressure for Class 3 locations. The corresponding hoop stress may not exceed 80 percent of SMYS of
the pipe in Class 2 locations and 67 percent of SMYS in Class 3 locations. The MAOP confirmed or revised in accordance with this section, may not exceed the MAOP established before the confirmation or revision. Confirmation or revision of the MAOP of a segment of pipeline in accordance with this section does not
preclude the application of the general requirements of Uprating in §192.553 and §192.555 – Uprating to a pressure equal to or greater than 30 percent of SMYS. MAOP Reconfirmation Transmission pipeline segments operating in a Class 3 or 4 location, or in a High Consequence Area
(HCA) must have records necessary to establish the MAOP per 192.619(a), including requirements of 192.517(a) that are Traceable, Verifiable and Complete (TVC). If TVC records are not available, the MAOP Reconfirmation procedure set out in the Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP) document shall be followed.
For pipelines with MAOP established per 192.619(c), also known as the “grandfather clause”, the MAOP shall be reconfirmed per the TIMP document if the pipe segment operates at greater than or equal to 30 percent SMYS and is in a Class 3, Class 4 or HCA location. Documentation of MAOP Revisions
Changes identified through the class location study and the MAOP confirmation or revision review shall be documented by Gas Engineering in the Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure master document with assistance from the Pipeline Integrity group.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
5 OF 5 SPEC. 4.16

Records Records shall document the current class location of each transmission pipeline segment and how each class location was determined. This will be kept with the document for Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP) and maintained according to that document’s retention policy.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
1 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

4.17 UPRATING SCOPE: To establish procedures to be followed when increasing the maximum allowable operating pressure(s) of Avista gas distribution and transmission pipeline facilities.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.503, §192.551, §192.553, §192.555, §192.557, §192.619 WAC 480-93-020, 480-93-155, 480-93-160
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design – Plastic (Polyethylene) Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing
Spec. 4.15, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey General
Determinations relating to the raising of MAOP of a pipeline shall be made by Gas Engineering in
coordination with the local construction office. Uprating procedures in the field shall be performed by properly trained and qualified personnel. An uprate shall be conducted only after the system has been assessed for integrity impacts. This
assessment will be conducted by both the assigned Gas Engineer and the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager as part of the historical records review to determine if the pipelines should be uprated. This may
include a risk analysis. When it is determined that it is necessary to raise the MAOP of a pipeline via an uprate, as opposed to a pressure increase (achieved by isolating the system and performing a static pressure test per Spec.
3.18), the general procedures outlined in this Specification shall be used:
Uprating Requirements Review of Design, Operation and Maintenance History – The history of the segment to be uprated shall be reviewed to include materials of construction and pressure ratings of valves and fittings used, cathodic protection history, and history of exposed pipe reports including external and internal inspections of the pipes performed in the past. The review shall include a listing of pipe footage to be uprated by size, material, and installation year. Previous leak survey results should be considered to ensure there is no indication the segments being uprated are prone to leaks. Previous pressure tests should be collected for mains and services and included in the uprate file. If there are segments of plastic pipe included in the uprate, which do not have pressure test records showing a pressure test of 1.5X the intended MAOP after the uprate, then the uprate shall be conducted to 1.5X the intended final MAOP.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
2 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

The review shall also include a listing of all meter sets within the uprate area and an analysis of the adequacy of regulator used for pressure rating, as well as relief capacity at the highest pressure the regulator will be subjected to during the uprate. Written Plan - A written plan shall be developed by Gas Engineering that details the procedures to be followed before, during, and after the uprating process. Gas Engineering shall review the design,
operating, and maintenance history of the pipeline segment to assure that the pipeline can be operated safely at the new MAOP, and that regulatory requirements are satisfied. A written plan shall schedule the uprate procedure to assure that once the uprate procedure is started, it is completed in as short a time as practicable, taking into account weather conditions, need for delay to make system repairs, etc. Incremental Pressure Increases - Increases in operating pressure that are made in increments under the
uprating plan shall be performed gradually and at a rate that can be safely controlled. Leak Survey - The pipeline segment shall be leak surveyed prior to the uprating procedure if it has been more than one year since the last leak survey. At the end of each incremental increase, the pressure shall be held constant while the entire pipeline segment is again checked for leaks. A final leak survey shall be done at the conclusion of the uprating process.
Repairs - Each leak detected must be repaired before a further pressure increase is made. (Exception: a leak determined not to be potentially hazardous need not be repaired, if it is monitored during the pressure increase and it does not become potentially hazardous). Other repairs necessary to ensure the safe operation of the pipeline segment shall be completed prior to any pressure increases.
Limitation - Except as provided for elsewhere in this standard, a new MAOP established under these procedures shall not exceed the maximum pressure that would be allowed for a new segment of pipeline constructed of the same materials in the same location.
Uprating Pipeline to Hoop Stress <30 Percent SMYS
Before increasing the operating pressure above the previously established MAOP, the above mentioned general procedures shall be adhered to with the following additions: Repairs, alterations, and replacements in the pipeline segment, that are necessary for safe operation at the increased pressure, shall be performed before increasing operating pressure. This includes replacing reinforcing or anchoring offsets, bends, and end caps in pipe joined by compression couplings to prevent failure of the pipe joint if the offset, bend, or end cap is exposed in an excavation. Service replacements or insertions, as well as
relocations of meter sets, shall also be completed prior to increasing pressure. The segment of pipeline to be uprated should be physically separated (except through a regulator station or valve) from any adjacent segment that will continue to be operated at a lower pressure. The segment being uprated shall have pressure gauges installed (or chart recorders) and shall be monitored before, during, and after each incremental pressure increase. In addition, any adjacent pipeline system or segment that will continue to be operated at a lower pressure than the segment being uprated shall be monitored with pressure gauges (or pressure recording devices) before, during, and after the uprating process to ensure that overpressuring does not occur due to unknown pipe connections. Increases in the MAOP shall be made in increments that are equal to 10 psig or 25 percent of the total pressure increase (whichever produces the fewest number of increments).

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
3 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

Uprating Pipeline to Hoop Stress ≥30 Percent SMYS Consult Gas Engineering before considering an uprate that would produce a hoop stress of 30 percent SMYS or higher. If the uprate moves forward, §192.555 must be followed. Uprate in the State of Washington
Washington Administrative Code (WAC 480-93-155) requires the following reporting procedures in addition to the above stated uprating procedures: When increasing the MAOP of any pipeline or facility to a pressure over 60 psig, the Commission shall be provided with a written plan and drawings at least 45 days prior to raising the pressure. The plan shall
include a review of the following:
• All affected gas facilities, including pipe, fittings, valves, and other associated equipment along with their manufactured design operating pressure, their specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) at the intended MAOP and any other applicable specifications or limitations.
• Original design and construction standards.
• Original pressure test records.
• Previous operating pressures, identifying the dates and lengths of time at that pressure.
• All leaks, regardless of cause, on the segment and the date and method of repair.
• Where the pipeline is being uprated to an MAOP of over 20 percent of the SMYS, records of the original welding standards and welders.

• Maintenance records for all affected regulators and relief valves for the past 3 years or three most recent inspections, whichever is longer.
• Where applicable, relief valve capacities compared to regulator flow capacities, with calculations.
• Cathodic protection readings of the affected pipeline and facilities, including rectifier readings, for the past 3 years or three most recent inspections, whichever is longer.

• Any additional records that commission staff may deem necessary to evaluate the pressure increase. Washington Administrative Code requires certain proximity considerations, which must be addressed when planning to uprate above 250 psig. Refer to Specification 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel, “WA State Proximity Considerations” for more information. UPRATING PROCEDURE - TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF EVENTS:
Prior to Pressure Increase
• An integrity impact review is to be completed by Gas Engineering and the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager which includes a review of the design, operating and maintenance history of the pipelines to be uprated.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
4 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

• The first page of the Written Plan for Pressure Uprating (N-2757) document shall be filled out as completely as possible by the Gas Engineer. Include any addendum showing calculations on regulators and relief valves, mechanical fittings in the system, pressure design ratings of valves and other components, changes to odorization system, etc.
• A review of the uprate plan is conducted with key stakeholders including appropriate Gas Control Room personnel.
• A map or drawing is prepared showing the segment to be uprated, along with any lateral
connections. Pipeline sizes should be shown as well as the physical location of valves, regulator stations, mechanical fittings, stubs, services to be replaced, meters to be re-located, system
isolation points, MAOP's of adjacent systems, and preferred locations of pressure gauges.
• A leak survey is completed on the entire segment and related facilities operating at the current MAOP and results are documented on the Gas Uprating Data form.
• Hazardous leaks are repaired. Grade 2 and 3 leaks are addressed as outlined in Specification 5.11, Leak Survey. All other replacements, repairs, alterations, etc. are completed. Information is recorded on the Written Plan for Pressure Uprating (N-2757) document or on separate work orders and retained in the uprate file.
• Pressure monitoring gauges or recorders are installed and pressures noted (normally done on the day of the uprate, unless otherwise required.) Pressure gauges should be installed on adjacent
systems of lower pressures to avoid overpressuring.
During the Pressure Increases

• Field employees monitor pressure gauges or recorders as segment pressure is gradually increased to the first increment.
• A leak survey is again conducted while the increased pressure is held constant at the first increment. If hazardous leakage is discovered or if the pressure does not stabilize, the pressure should be lowered and the necessary repairs completed. Repairs should be documented on the Written Plan for Pressure Uprating (N-2757) document or on a separate work order and retained in the uprate file.
• District regulator stations should be checked to verify the integrity of the regulators by checking the downstream pressures.

• When a subsequent leak survey indicates no hazardous leakage, the segment pressure may then be increased to the next incremental step. Continue to follow the above procedures until the final MAOP is safely achieved at the last pressure that establishes it (typically 1.5 times MAOP). Document all work and other information on the Written Plan for Pressure Uprating (N-2757) document.
• A final leak survey at this highest pressure is performed and hazardous leaks are repaired. Grade 2 and 3 leaks are addressed as outlined in Specification 5.11, Leak Survey.
• Each time the pressure of the system is to be increased or decreased, Pressure Controlmen must contact the Gas Control Room (509-495-4859 or via radio) to inform them of the change.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
5 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

Uprate Acceptability Criteria
A final review of all uprate information shall be performed before the new MAOP is approved. Final approval is needed by the Gas Engineering Manager and the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager. Examples of information to be reviewed include:

• Leak data and trending – Were the number of underground leaks trending up or down?
• Material reports – Did the Exposed Piping Inspection Reports indicate any material issues?
• Processes followed – Were the processes for the uprate followed correctly? Were any critical
steps missed or not performed adequately?
If it is deemed that the uprate project has not met this final acceptability criteria, the system will be returned to a pressure below this MAOP that is deemed safe and acceptable per this requirement which
may require returning to the original MAOP.
Following acceptance of the uprate, the first page of the Written Plan for Pressure Uprate (N-2757) document should be stamped by a Professional Engineer as certification of the new MAOP and the
uprate package containing all pertinent information shall be retained for the life of the pipeline.
Consideration should be given when needed to perform additional safety measures and may include:
• Performing additional leak surveys after the final MAOP is achieved.
• Pipe or other facility replacements
• Pressure checks at meter sets
• Supplemental risk modeling
After Final MAOP is Achieved If the project has been deemed acceptable, then:
• The new MAOP is declared and the system is set back to its final operating pressure.
• Pressure gauges or recording devices are removed (unless required to remain in place).
• Records are noted as to the new MAOP, including the regulator station maintenance records.
• Gas Engineering shall make a final review of the segment uprating file to ensure compliance with regulatory codes and Avista standards and retain this record for the life of the pipeline segment. Recordkeeping
Data pertaining to the uprating procedure for each pipeline segment shall be recorded on the Written Plan for Pressure Uprating (N-2757) document located on the Gas Wiki SharePoint website, and on any written addendum as required. The information on the Gas Uprating Data sheet and addendum shall include the following:
• Type of work, investigations, and tests performed.
• Documentation of leak surveys performed, including maps used.
• Leaks detected and repaired.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 13
6 OF 6 SPEC. 4.17

• Pipeline or facility alterations, repairs, or replacements completed.
• Documentation of actual incremental pressure increases and type of gauge or pressure recording devices used.
• Dates and names of persons responsible for each specific uprating task. Gas Engineering shall retain the documents relating to any uprating procedure (including design specifications) for the life of the pipeline segment.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 15
1 OF 5 SPEC. 4.18

4.18 ODORIZATION PROCEDURES SCOPE: To establish uniform odorant sampling procedures for Avista and to assure that the proper concentration of odorant exists as per applicable codes.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.625 WAC 480-93-015
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.52, Odorization of Natural Gas Spec. 5.23, Odorization Equipment
General
This specification details the requirements and procedures necessary to assure that the Company's natural gas supplied to Avista’s customers is odorized as required by code. Procedures for adding odorant to the pipeline system, testing to assure even distribution and proper concentration, and
recordkeeping are also covered in this specification. Maintenance related to odorization equipment shall be performed by personnel trained and qualified in the maintenance of such odorization equipment and systems.
Natural gas supplied to customers by Avista will be odorized. Natural gas will generally be odorized at or
near the gate station except where such gas is adequately odorized as received from the pipeline company. Odorant Concentrations
Natural gas shall be odorized to a level that will enable detection by a person with a normal sense of
smell at a minimum of 20 percent LEL or a minimum of 1.0 percent gas in air. To enhance public safety, it is Avista’s intent to odorize the gas to a minimum level of 8 percent of the LEL or a minimum of 0.40
percent gas in air. These levels (often called the Readily Detectable Level) are to be measured and recorded with a Company-approved odorometer.
When sampling odorant and the first read is higher than 0.40 percent gas in air (indicating a lesser concentration of odorant than desired) a second read should be taken to verify the reading. If a second read confirms low odorant levels, system changes should be made to address the situation. This can
include odorizer or regulator station adjustments. A follow-up read should be completed to confirm adequate odorization levels.
When odorization is performed by an interstate pipeline, the applicable operations manager will contact
Gas Engineering to initiate odorant level adjustments.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 15
2 OF 5 SPEC. 4.18

Pickling Newly Installed Piping Newly installed steel and PE pipelines have a tendency to absorb the odorant from the gas stream. This is especially true for pipelines that are gassed up, but not immediately put into service. “Pickling” is a process to address the problem of lower than adequate odorant being present in the gas stream due to pipe absorption.
The most common way to pickle a pipe is to increase the odorant injection rate at the odorizer supplying gas to this pipeline. This increased injection rate should stay in effect until the pipe walls are no longer absorbing the odorant. Frequent monitoring of the downstream system for adequate odorization should be done to determine when the odorizer can be returned to its previous setting. These actions should be taken with the intent of accomplishing the pickling as soon as possible after putting the pipeline into
service. Contact Gas Engineering for further assistance.
Odorant Sampling
Avista shall perform monthly sampling (tests) of natural gas in the system to assure that the proper concentration of odorant exists. These tests shall be performed in accordance with procedures outlined
in this specification and in accordance with applicable manufacturer's instructions. The determination of odor intensity shall be made by performing an odorometer test at various customers’ premises. Odorometer tests shall be made at points in the gas distribution system and spaced so as to give an accurate representation of odorant concentrations across the system. The Gas Planning Engineer can
assist in specifying general test point locations. New test points shall be established as necessary as system growth occurs.
Test Point Review
Each area shall review their test points once each calendar year. This review shall be noted on the
sampling form to determine if existing test points are still valid or if test points have been moved based on the review. Field personnel shall conduct odorometer tests as near to these locations as is practical.
Field personnel are encouraged to allow customers to help perform odorometer sniff tests.
Odorometer sniff tests shall be conducted in an odor-free environment. Persons conducting the tests
should have a normal sense of smell and should not perform the test if they have a head cold or other illness that might affect the normal sense of smell. Breath mints, washes, or medicines that can affect the
sense of smell shall also not be used prior to conducting the test.
Odorometer test procedures shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The effectiveness of the distribution of odorant shall be determined from periodic reports made by appropriate, trained field personnel.
Locations Where Odor is Inadequate
Locations where the odorant usage is shown to be inadequate shall be re-checked immediately. If the re-
check indicates that the odorant level is indeed inadequate, field personnel shall proceed to check other locations close to the original location for proper odorant level until the area of inadequacy is completely defined. The cause of the inadequacy shall be determined and corrected as soon as possible (odorizer may need slight adjustment based on load conditions). If unable to determine the cause of the
inadequacy, contact Gas Engineering for assistance.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 15
3 OF 5 SPEC. 4.18

Odorant Level Analysis Operations personnel shall adjust odorizers as necessary to assure odorant levels remain within specification. Gas Engineering may provide assistance with odorizer level adjustments. If odorization is provided by the gas supplier, the supplier shall be notified of inadequate levels so that adjustments can
be made.
Periodic Odorizer Station Inspectors Odorizer maintenance shall be performed per the requirements outlined in Specification 5.23, Odorizer Equipment.
Recordkeeping
Odorometer sampling results, verification results, and follow-up actions shall be recorded on the Odorizer
form (Form N-2621). Completed forms shall be retained for a minimum of 5 years. YZ ODOROMETER (DTEX): General
DTEX is a small, handheld instrument, which assists the user in determining the odorant intensity of
natural gas with menu-driven step-by-step instructions. The DTEX system can accept inlet pressure from 5-inches WC up to a maximum of 5 psig. This unit records the actual air/gas percentage for both threshold detection level (TDL) and readily detectable level (RDL) and can be downloaded into a computer to print a report. This unit is intrinsically safe for hazardous locations Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D.
Operating Instructions The following procedures should be followed when testing to determine odorant level in distribution systems using this type of odorometer:

• Always keep the instrument dry. It should be protected from water, open flames, and any other potential source of damage.
• Avoid conducting tests in windy conditions or in closed, confined spaces.
• Operators should be selected with due consideration to smoking habits, colds, and other health conditions since these factors may affect the operator's sense of smell. It is essential to select operators with an average sense of smell in order to obtain reasonable consistent results from the use of the instrument.

• Connect the gas inlet hose to the test source connection and open the source isolation valve.
• Power up the system by pressing the PWR button on the keypad. The fan will begin to run automatically as part of a system hardware check.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 15
4 OF 5 SPEC. 4.18

• Use arrow keys to scroll information in the screen up and down. Press P to purge the unit before a test. Open the flow valve fully until you smell gas then close valve and press Enter to continue. The gas inlet hose and internal regulator must be filled with gas prior to running a test for accurate test results.
• Continue to follow the step-by-step instructions to sign on and enter location information for each test site. Threshold Detection Level (TDL) 1. Position nose within 3/4-inch of the sniff chamber and with valve closed sniff exhaust. If an uncharacteristic odor is detected, allow the instrument to operate for an additional two minutes. If uncharacteristic odor persists, perform an exhaust background evaluation test.
2. Slowly open the flow valve and sniff exhaust. Continue to open the flow valve and sniff getting breaths of fresh air between sniffs. Continue the procedure until the first hint of a new odor is detected. This is the threshold detection level (TDL); this is the minimum concentration of gas in air when one detects a new or different odor.
3. Remove nose from sniff chamber.
4. Press the Record Test Level (RTL) key, this records the threshold detection level (TDL). Read the manufacturer's instructions before operating any instrument. Manufacturer's instructions shall supersede any general instructions in this procedure. Readily Detectable Level (RDL) 1. Position nose within 3/4-inch of the sniff chamber. 2. Continue to open the flow valve until the readily detectable odor of gas is attained. This is the readily detectable level (RDL), which is the determination that natural gas odor can be positively identified. 3. Remove nose from sniff chamber. 4. Press the Record Test Level (RTL) key, this records the readily detectable level (RDL). 5. The test is completed; close valve and press Enter. 6. Add any notes such as “windy,” or if there was something that affected the test such as car exhaust then press Enter. 7. Press the PWR key. Several options will be displayed in the screen. After each test select V to vent the unit to prevent undue saturation of inlet hose and system components and residual smell in the unit.
• Close the source isolation valve.
• Remove the gas inlet hose from the source of connection.
• Press V to vent
• Open the flow valve fully
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 15
5 OF 5 SPEC. 4.18

• Wait until prompted on screen, then close flow valve
• Press PWR to shut down
Exhaust Background Evaluation Approximately every 30 days the instrument should be checked for an exhaust background evaluation. Without connecting gas to the inlet, power on the unit, open the flow valve fully and press P on the keypad to purge the unit. Purge for two minutes before closing the valve and pressing the Enter key to conclude the purge procedure. If after two minutes the smell persists over and above normal background, send the unit in to be serviced.
Calibration of Instrument The DTEX odorometer should be calibrated every two years. (Note: The DTEX calibration due date is displayed each time the unit is powered on.) This calibration must be performed by the manufacturer and the record of the calibration shall be retained for a minimum of five years. The calibration request to the manufacturer should specifically state for them to perform a “Two Year Calibration” on the unit.
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 10
1 OF 2 SPEC. 4.19

4.19 CREW ACTIVITY REPORTING - WASHINGTON
SCOPE: To establish a uniform reporting procedure for Avista’s construction areas in the state of Washington for reporting crew activities per the applicable code. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: WAC 480-93-200 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Section 3.0, Construction Section 5.0, Maintenance
General This section details the requirements necessary to ensure Avista’s construction areas within in the state of Washington, report construction and repair crew activities as required by the Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission (WUTC). WUTC safety inspectors who perform random crew inspections utilize this report and rely heavily on it to be detailed and accurate. Daily Reporting
Each construction office or entity (including the Gas Facility Replacement Program) shall email (on a daily basis, no later than 10:00 a.m.), a list of each crew and where they are scheduled to perform construction and/or repair activities. The list shall be broken down by individual crews and the scheduled work must be listed by address or at a minimum, cross streets and the town or city where the activity is scheduled. (The term “crew” includes Avista crews as well as contract crews that are working for Avista.) Be sure to include a phone number(s) on the report for the person(s) to call if the WUTC needs to verify a crew location or has other questions. Contractors working on behalf of Avista (e.g. GFRP Contractor) may be allowed to directly submit their daily construction reports to the WUTC. Consult with Avista’s Pipeline Safety Engineer prior to beginning this process. The report should contain construction activity and repair activity scheduled for that particular day. Submission of all planned work scheduled for the entire week is acceptable but the report must be updated and submitted every day and reflect applicable changes / updates to the schedule. If no construction activities are scheduled in a particular construction area, then no report is required. Submission of Reports
The daily report must be submitted by e-mail to the following e-mail address. (Be sure to include a descriptor in subject line of the email as to the purpose of the email such as “Avista Gas Crew Schedule Colville” or “Crew Notification Ritzville District”.) [e-mail]
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 10
2 OF 2 SPEC. 4.19

WUTC Contact If experiencing problems submitting the daily report, call the WUTC office assistant at 360-664-1182 for assistance and to explain the problem. The phone call notifies the WUTC of the attempt to comply with WAC 480-93-200(12).
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 4
1 OF 2 SPEC. 4.22

4.2 CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION 4.22 CUSTOMER OWNED SERVICE LINES SCOPE:
To establish procedures for ongoing notifications to Avista’s gas distribution customers regarding the potential hazards concerning buried downstream gas piping systems and the corresponding remedies and resources available for correction of discovered leakage, damage, or corrosion. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
§192.16 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: None
General Operators of gas distribution systems are required to make certain notifications to gas customers concerning customer owned service lines and buried customer piping systems. This rule applies only to operators who do not maintain the customer's buried piping up to entry of the first
building downstream of the meter or if the customer's piping does not enter a building, up to the principal gas utilization equipment or the first fence (or wall) that surrounds that equipment. Required Information
The following items are required to be included in the written notifications:

• Avista does not maintain the customer’s piping.
• If a gas customer's piping is not maintained, it may be subject to the potential hazards of corrosion and leakage.
• Buried gas piping should be periodically inspected for leakage and corrosion, as applicable.
• Any unsafe conditions discovered on customer piping should be corrected immediately or as soon as practical, depending on the nature of the problem.
• If customers excavate near buried gas lines, the piping should be located in advance and the excavation should be performed by hand to avoid damage to the pipelines.
• There are resources available to assist in locating, inspecting, and repairing the customer's buried gas lines. These resources include licensed plumbers, dealers, and heating contractors.

OPERATIONS REV. NO. 4
2 OF 2 SPEC. 4.22

One-Time Notification As required by code, an appropriate written customer notification was prepared and distributed to Avista natural gas customers prior to August 14, 1996. The customer notification included the information required by §192.16, as detailed above.
Ongoing Notification Natural gas customers shall be notified of the information required by § 192.16 within 90 days after establishing service at a particular location. The written notification may be inserted in the new customer information packet, inserted into the first billing, or mailed separately to the customer establishing service.
Customer Service shall be responsible for identifying each new gas customer and for ensuring that the written notification is mailed to the customer within the 90-day time frame. Recordkeeping
Copies of the written notifications shall be retained by the Pipeline Safety Engineer. Evidence of
notifications shall be retained for a period of 3 years.
OPERATIONS
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION PROGRAM
REV. NO. 20
1 OF 1 SPEC. 4.31

4.3 AVISTA UTILITIES’ OPERATOR QUALIFICATION PROGRAM 4.31 OPERATOR QUALIFICATION SCOPE:
The purpose of Avista’s Operator Qualification Program (OQ Program) is to ensure individuals performing covered tasks on Avista’s gas pipelines and facilities are fully qualified in accordance with §192, Subpart N and State regulation. The OQ Program is detailed in a separate document that is maintained by the OQ Program Administrator. The OQ Program outlines accountabilities, responsibilities and the procedures for identifying covered tasks, evaluation intervals, span of control, recordkeeping requirements, and other administrative practices. The goal of the OQ Program is to help ensure a
qualified work force and to reduce the probability and consequence of incidents caused by human error. As of October 28, 2002, individuals performing covered tasks shall either be qualified or work under the direction of a qualified individual.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
§191.3, §192.3, §192.801, §192.803, §192.805, §192,807, §192.809 WAC 480-93-013, 480-93-999 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS:
See standards referenced by task in Appendix A of this specification. General
Avista has established and maintains a qualified workforce in accordance with §192 Subpart N, State
regulatory requirements, and through incorporation of industry practices. A qualified employee is one that has been evaluated and can perform assigned covered tasks and recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions (AOC).
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

1 OF 20

TASK INDEX TABLE
TASK NO. TASK NAME
221.060.010 Abandon or Inactivate Facilities 2 221.020.035 Avista Side – Leak Investigation 2 221.110.030 CP-Atmospheric Coating Maintenance 2 221.110.025 CP-Coating Maintenance for Buried Pipe 3
221.110.020 CP-Identify Atmospheric Corrosion 3
221.110.015 CP-Identify Corrosion on Buried Pipe 3
221.110.035 CP-Install Cathodic Test Leads and Stations 4
221.110.055 CP-Pipe to Soil Testing 4 221.110.050 CP-Rectifier Inspections 4 221.120.070 Damage Prevention 5 221.120.090 Install and Maintain Casings 5
221.120.110 Install and Maintain Pipeline Markers 5
221.070.041 Install Gas Meters: Large Commercial 6
221.070.045 Install Gas Meters: Residential and Small Commercial 6
221.120.115 Install Gas Pipelines 7 221.230.005 Leak Survey 7 221.080.045 Line Heater Maintenance 7 221.230.050 Locate Gas Pipelines 8
221.230.035 Monitoring Pipeline Pressures 8
221.080.047 Monthly Line Heater Maintenance 8
221.130.015 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds 9 221.090.025 Odorization-Odorizer Maintenance 9 221.090.035 Odorization-Odorizer Adjustment 9 221.090.030 Odorization-Periodic Odorant Testing 10
221.230.055 Operate Gas Pipeline: Local Facility Remote-Control Operations 10
221.230.001 Patrolling Gas Pipelines 10
221.030.001 PE Pipe Joining-Electrofusion 11
221.030.010 PE Pipe Joining-Hydraulic Butt Fusion 11 221.030.005 PE Pipe Joining-Manual Butt Fusion 11 221.030.020 PE Pipe Joining-Mechanical Couplings 12 221.030.015 PE Pipe Joining-Mechanical Service Tees 12
221.030.025 PE Pipe Joining-Mechanical Spigot and Sleeve Type Fittings 12
221.120.085 Pipe Bending 13
221.100.065 Pipe Squeezing 13 221.120.120 Pipeline Cover, Clearance & Backfill 13 221.120.075 Pressure Testing Gas Pipelines 14 221.230.040 Prevention of Accidental Ignition 14 221.120.080 Purging Gas Pipelines 14
221.070.070 Recognizing Unsafe Meter Sets 14
221.080.035 Regulator Station- 5/10 Year Maintenance 15
221.080.030 Regulator Station- Annual Maintenance 15 221.080.025 Regulator Station- Bypassing 15 221.060.015 Repair Gas Pipelines 16 221.070.020 Replace Service Valves 16
221.040.001 Tapping and Stopping-Mueller 4” and Smaller 17
221.040.010 Tapping and Stopping-Mueller 6” and Larger 17
221.040.005 Tapping and Stopping-TDW 4” and Smaller 18 221.040.015 Tapping and Stopping-TDW 6” and Larger 18 221.050.005 Valve Maintenance 18 221.080.020 Vault Maintenance 19 221.130.005 Visual Inspection of the Weld 19
221.130.010 Welding 19
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

2 OF 20

TASK
Description: Abandon or inactivate gas pipelines and aboveground
facilities. Identify the requirements for abandoning or inactivating gas facilities including discontinuance of gas service to the customer. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Incomplete purge-re-purge and verify • Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Corrosion-remediate and/or report
• Fire or explosion-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.13, 5.16
TASK
Description: Respond and investigate a notice of gas leakage and odor calls (Avista-Side) by utilizing leak detection and bar testing equipment, be able to pinpoint and grade a leak. Complete required documentation. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Completing this task also satisfies skills required for Leak Survey (221.230.005)
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Hazardous gas leakage-initiate immediate response
• Probe damages/pipe coating-repair or initiate repair
• Multiple leaks-pinpoint by bar hole testing
• Other gases present-contact property owner/protect life & property
• Gas in a duct or sewer system-implement/initiate
Standards referenced: Gas Emergency & Service Handbook, Sections 2 & 4.

TASK
221.110.030 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Inspect and maintain coatings for aboveground piping. Identify the requirements for maintaining coatings on aboveground piping. Using approved materials and procedures, maintain coatings on aboveground pipe. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.

Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Damaged coating-repair coating
• Damaged pipe-repair or report
• Pitting-repair or report
• Corrosion present-repair or report
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.14

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

3 OF 20

TASK
221.110.025 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Inspect and maintain coatings for buried pipe. Identify the requirements for maintaining coatings for buried pipe. Using approved materials and procedures maintain coatings on buried pipelines. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Damaged coating-repair coating
• Inadequate coverage or contact-smooth to remove wrinkles, voids; re-wrap and remediate
• Pipe damaged, corroded or pitted- report
• Debris on wrap – remove debris and re-wrap
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 3.12, 3.32, 5.14

TASK

Description: Monitor aboveground facilities for corrosion. Inspect aboveground facilities such as regulator stations and meter set assemblies for signs of atmospheric corrosion. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Pitting-repair or replace pipe or fitting
• Corrosion present-report and remediate
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.14

TASK
221.110.015 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Inspect buried pipe for corrosion. Inspect for external and internal corrosion on buried pipelines. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Pitting-repair or replace pipe or fitting
• Corrosion present-report and remediate
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 4.13, 5.14

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

4 OF 20

TASK
221.110.035 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Install Cathodic test leads and “Fink” test stations. Identify the requirements, tools, materials used to install Cathodic test leads. Using a thermo-weld tool, inspect the pipe, prepare the pipe and tool, and install test wires following written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Substandard weld-repair and replace
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 2.32

TASK
Description: Test pipe to soil potential. Inspect test equipment. Identify the requirements for performing a pipe to soil read. Perform a proper pipe to soil read. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Note: NACE Certification in any of the following areas meets the Operator Qualification Requirements of this Task: CP1 – Cathodic Protection Tester, CP-2 – Cathodic Protection Technician, CP-3 – Cathodic Protection Technologist, or CP-4 – Cathodic Protection Specialist.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Low potential read-report to CP technician for action to take
• High potential read-report to CP technician for action to take
• Dry ground conditions-wet surrounding area
Standards referenced: Specification 5.14

TASK
Description: Inspect and test rectifiers. Identify the requirements for testing and inspecting a rectifier. Inspect test equipment. Perform output (voltage/amperage) readings and complete required documentation. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Note: NACE Certification in any of the following areas meets the Operator Qualification Requirements of this Task: CP1 – Cathodic Protection Tester, CP-2 – Cathodic Protection Technician, CP-3 – Cathodic Protection Technologist, or CP-4 – Cathodic Protection
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Low potential read-investigate and initiate repair
• High potential read-investigate and initiate repair
Standards referenced: Specification 5.14

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

5 OF 20

TASK
Description: Prevent damage to pipeline facilities through public education, physical marking, work practices, and inspections. Identify dig laws and requirements for excavating around buried facilities. Educate the public and contractors on the One Call System. Prevent physical damage to facilities when working on or near the facility. Provide on-site inspections of excavation activities near pipeline facilities when necessary.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Un-marked facility-report to appropriate owner
• Damaged facility-report or repair
Standards referenced: Specification 4.13

TASK

Description: Install and maintain casings. Identify the requirements for installing casings, casing vents, and casing seals. Install casings in accordance with design and written procedures including installing casing vents and seals, Cathodic test leads, and installation to prevent damage to the gas carrier pipe. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Shorted casing-report and remediate
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
• End seals leaking-repair or replace
• Damaged vent pipe-repair or replace
Standards referenced: Specification 2.32, 3.42, 5.14

TASK
221.120.110 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Install and maintain gas pipeline markers and signage. Identify the requirements for installing and maintaining various types of pipeline markers. Install pipeline markers as close as practical over distribution and transmission lines. Maintain pipeline markers in accordance with gas standards. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Missing or damaged markers-repair or replace
• Improper signage-replace
• Signage not legible-replace signage
Standards referenced: Specification 5.15

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

6 OF 20

TASK
221.070.041 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Install, maintain, and protect large commercial meter set assemblies. Identify the codes and standards for meter location, installation, and protection of the large commercial meter set assembly. Purge the service riser and install and protect the meter set in accordance with gas standards requirements. Verify regulator flow and lock up. Adjust regulator set points as needed. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. NOTE: Diaphragm meters (AL1400, AL2300, AL5000) and all rotary meters with a metering pressure of 7” WC, 2 psig, or 5 psig are covered by this task.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• MSA in an improper location-relocate or vent regulator
• MSA and piping under stress-reset or re-pipe • MSA unprotected-barricade, move, coat
• MSA is leaking-repair or report • No lock-up - repair or replace
• Regulator out of adjustment - adjust set point
• Uncontrolled release of gas - initiate immediate
Standards referenced: Specification 2.22, 2.23, 2.24 (tables and dwgs), 5.12 and GESH 6.

TASK
221.070.045 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Install, maintain, and protect residential and small commercial gas meter set assemblies. Identify the codes and standards for meter location, installation, and protection of the residential and small commercial meter set assembly. Purge the service riser and install and protect the meter set in accordance
Adjust regulator set points as needed. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• MSA in an improper location-relocate or vent regulator
• MSA and piping under stress-reset or re-pipe
• MSA unprotected-barricade, move, coat
• MSA is leaking-repair or report
• No lock-up - repair or replace
• Regulator out of adjustment - adjust set point
• Uncontrolled release of gas - initiate immediate
Standards referenced: Specification 2.22, 2.23, 2.24 (tables and dwgs), 5.12 and GESH 6

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

7 OF 20

TASK
Description: Install gas pipelines. Identify the requirements for storing, handling, and installing gas pipelines. This includes tracer wire requirements (including setting tracer Finks and anodes), trench requirements, plowing and trenching, and various other installation requirements. Install gas pipelines in accordance with gas standards. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Note: Tracer wire connections are part of this task.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Pipe exceeds exposure to UV-discard pipe
• Pipe damaged during handling-cut out or replace
• Wire connector fails-replace connector
• Test station missing wire-replace wire
• Pulling force exceeded-replace pipe section
• Pipe coating damaged-replace or repair coating
• Construction standards not met-initiate immediate response to correct.
Standards referenced: Specification 3.12, 3.13
TASK
Description: Leak survey gas pipelines by walking or driving. Identify the requirements for performing leak survey. Inspect, test, and calibrate leak survey instruments as applicable. Perform a walking/mobile leak survey in accordance with gas standards. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
• Hazardous gas leak-immediately report to 1-800 # to initiate response
• Standards referenced: Specification 5.11, 5.19

TASK
Task Description: Identify the requirements and procedures for maintaining line heaters. Identify the requirements for annual and ten year maintenance. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions: • Line heater leaking – Repair or replace as required
• Set points out of specification – Adjust as required • Water / Glycol solution low – Fill according to instructions
Standards referenced: Specification 5.22

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

8 OF 20

TASK
221.230.050 Locate Gas Pipelines 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Locate and mark gas pipelines. Identify the requirements for locating and marking gas pipelines. Inspect the locating equipment prior to locating gas pipelines. Perform a gas locate using proper tools and techniques. Accurately mark gas facilities by appropriate methods. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Broken tracer wire-report or remediate
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
• Pipeline un-locatable-report for verification/notify excavator • Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 4.13

TASK
Description: Monitor gas pipeline pressures. Identify the requirements for monitoring pipeline pressures. Using chart recorders, telemetry, and other equipment; monitor, gas pipeline pressure to check for abnormal conditions in the gas system. (Does not include upstream / downstream monitoring done during pipe installations.) Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Abnormal pipeline pressures-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 2.23, 2.25, 3.12, 3.13, 3.32, 3.33, 3.34, 4.17, 5.12, 5.21

TASK
Task Description: Inspect the line heater for gas and fluid leaks. Inspect set points, fluid levels, temperatures and pilot light operability. Adjust or repair as required. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Line heater leaking – Repair or replace as required
• Set points out of specification – Adjust as required
• Water / Glycol solution low – Fill according to instructions
• Pilot light inoperable – initiate inspection and repairs by qualified personnel
Standards referenced: Specification 5.22

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

9 OF 20

TASK
221.130.015 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds Per API 1104 Knowledge Non-Observable*
Description: Non-destructive testing personnel shall be certified to Level I, II, or III in accordance with ASNT (American Society for Nondestructive Testing or equivalent. Only a Level II or III shall interpret the test results. Includes radiographic, magnetic particle,
ultrasonic test, and liquid penetrant. Acceptance standards for non-destructive testing shall meet the requirements of Section 9 of API 1104.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Rejected weld – notify company of reject for remedial action
• *An NDT technician may be under a 1:1 span of control for pipeline facility AOC’s relating to prevention of accidental ignition Standards referenced: Specification 3.12

TASK
Description: Maintain odorizers. Identify the requirements and procedures for maintaining odorizers. Maintain, fill, and adjust gas odorizers following manufacturers and standards requirements. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. This task also covers adjusting injection-style odorizers.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Odorant spill-report and initiate immediate response
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
• Over/under odorization-adjust set points
Standards referenced: Specification 5.23, 4.18, 2.52

TASK
Description: Identify the requirements and procedures for adjusting odorizers. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. This task covers the adjustment of wick and bypass type of odorizers, not injection type.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Odorant spill-report and initiate immediate response • Gas leak-initiate immediate response • Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 4.18

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

10 OF 20

TASK
221.090.030 1 Years Skill 1:3
Description: Identify the requirements and procedures for periodic odorant sampling and perform the test using the proper equipment. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Odorant level low-report or remediate
• Odorant level high-report or remediate
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
Standards referenced: Specification 4.18

TASK
3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Gas Controller monitoring system operations using telemetry and / or pressure devices. Direct manual operations of pressure regulating equipment and valves. Recognize and respond to abnormal operating conditions (alarms) by notifying field personnel to respond and take action.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Loss of SCADA Communications-Notify field technician and monitor
• High/Low Pressure- Notify field technician and monitor
• High/Low Temperature- Notify field technician and monitor
• Improper Odorizer Operation- Notify field technician
• Indication of Safety-Related Condition- Notify field technician
• High Flow- Notify field technician and monitor
Standards referenced: Specification 4.51

TASK
Description: Patrol gas pipelines by walking, driving, or flying for the specific purpose of observing conditions that may affect the safety and operation of transmission pipeline and selected distribution facilities. Identify the requirements for patrolling gas pipelines. Patrol gas pipelines inspecting for signs of soil subsidence, encroachment, gas leaks, and missing or damaged pipeline markers and signage. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions: • Encroachment-report for follow up
• Washouts-report for follow up
• Gas leaks-report for follow up
• Missing/damaged markers-report for follow up
Standards referenced: Specification 5.11, 5.15

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

11 OF 20

TASK
Non-Observable
Description: Electro fuse PE pipe and fittings. Properly inspect
pipe joining equipment and associated tools prior to joining. Clean, inspect, and prepare pipe and fittings for joining. Using an electro fusion processor, properly join and inspect an electro fusion coupling or electro fusion tee on PE pipe. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Inclement weather-shield or cover joining process • Equipment out of specs-repair or replace equipment
• Visual inspection unacceptable-replace bad joint
Standards referenced: Specification 3.24

TASK
221.030.010 1 Year Skill Non-Observable
Description: Hydraulically butt fuse PE pipe. Properly inspect pipe joining equipment and associated tools prior to joining. Clean, inspect, and prepare the pipe for joining. Using hydraulic butt fusion equipment, properly perform and visually inspect a butt fusion. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Inclement weather-shield or cover joining process
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace equipment
• Visual inspection unacceptable-replace bad joint
• See troubleshooting table in Spec 3.23
Standards referenced: Specification 3.23

TASK
Non-Observable
Description: Manually butt fuse PE pipe. Properly inspect pipe joining equipment and associated tools prior to joining. Clean, inspect, and prepare the pipe for joining. Using mechanical butt fusion equipment, properly perform and visually inspect a butt fusion. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions: • Inclement weather-shield or cover joining process
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace equipment
• Visual inspection unacceptable-replace bad joint
• See troubleshooting table in Spec 3.23
Standards referenced: Specification 3.23

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

12 OF 20

TASK
221.030.020 1 Year Skill Non-Observable

Description: Install mechanical slip-lock or compression fittings. Clean, inspect, and prepare the pipe and slip-lock or compression fitting prior to joining. Properly install and visually inspect the mechanical fitting. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Damaged fitting-replace fitting
• Damaged pipe-repair or replace pipe
• Pipe joint leaks-replace fitting
Standards referenced: Specification 3.25

TASK
221.030.015 1 Year Skill Non-Observable

Description: Install bolted mechanical service tees to PE pipe.
Clean, inspect, and prepare the pipe and fitting prior to joining. Properly install and visually inspect a mechanical service tee on PE pipe. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Damaged fitting-replace fitting
• Damaged pipe-repair or replace pipe
• Pipe joint leaks-replace fitting
Standards referenced: Specification 3.25

TASK
221.030.025 1 Year Skill Non-Observable
Description: Install spigot and sleeve type mechanical fittings. Clean, inspect, and prepare the pipe fitting prior to joining. Properly install and visually inspect a spigot and sleeve type mechanical fitting. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Damaged fitting-replace fitting
• Damaged pipe-repair or replace pipe
• Pipe joint leaks-replace fitting
Standards referenced: Gas Standards Manual Specification 3.25

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

13 OF 20

TASK
Description: Bend steel or PE pipe. Identify the requirements and procedures for performing pipe bends in the field. Describe procedures for bending pipe using appropriate methods so as to avoid damage to the pipe. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Bending radius exceeded--replace pipe section
• Mechanical damage such as wrinkle bends, cracks—replace pipe section
Standards referenced: Specification 3.12, 3.13

TASK
Description: Squeeze off PE pipe. Using the proper squeeze tool, squeeze off PE pipe following the procedure for squeezing and follow written static electricity grounding procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Pipe damage-replace section of pipe
• Loss of pressure or overpressure (failure to monitor pressure)-initiate emergency shutdown procedure
• Incomplete shutdown-move squeezers and squeeze again or use second squeezer
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 3.34

TASK
221.120.120 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Provide proper depth for gas pipelines. Identify pipeline cover, clearance, and backfill requirements. Install gas pipelines with the minimum requirements established by code. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Minimum cover not met-provide protection to pipe or contact gas engineering for remedial action
• Clearances not met—provide protection or move facility
• Backfill material not suitable-remove and replace
• Trench bottom not suitable-pad trench bottom
• Settlement-provide proper compaction
Standards referenced: Specification 3.15

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

14 OF 20

TASK
Description: Pressure test gas pipelines for leakage. Identify the requirements for pressure testing gas pipelines. Describe testing procedures for gas lines using gas, air and inert gas for indications of leakage. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Overpressure the pipeline-report and retest
• Pressure drop-investigate, remediate, and re-test
• Pipeline failure-repair or replace and retest
Standards referenced: Specification 3.18

TASK EVALUATION INTERVAL EVALUATION METHOD SPAN OF CONTROL
Prevention of Accidental Ignition 3 Years Knowledge 1:3
Description: Prevent accidental ignition. Identify, recognize, and remove potential ignition sources common to the job site. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Fire-initiate immediate response
• Combustible atmosphere – secure the area and Standards referenced: Specification 3.17, GESH Section 4

TASK
Description: Purge gas pipelines. Identify the requirements, tools, equipment, and techniques that are needed to safely purge a gas pipeline. Purge the gas pipeline in a manner so as to achieve 100 percent of gas in air or 0 percent gas in air. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions: • Incomplete purge-purge and re-test
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 3.17

TASK
221.070.070 Recognizing Unsafe Meter Sets 3 Years Knowledge 1:3*
Description: Recognize meter sets that may be subject to safety-related and other risks, such as possible leaks, stresses to piping or other physical damage, inoperable (obscured) service valves, overbuilds, unauthorized attachments to meters, and diversion of gas service. This course is intended for individuals who will work near meter sets for other purposes but who do not typically install or maintain meter sets as part of their duties. (The content of this course is covered within other tasks associated with installing and maintaining meter sets so it is not mandatory for all job titles.)
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Identification of non-safety-related risk—report for follow up action
• Identification of safety-related risk—initiate immediate response.
Standards referenced: Specification 2.22, 5.14
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

15 OF 20

TASK
221.080.035 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Identify the maintenance requirements for 5/10 year maintenance and perform maintenance. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Overpressure of the system-report and investigate downstream system
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.12

TASK
221.080.030 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Identify the maintenance requirements and perform annual maintenance on all configurations of regulator stations. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Note: Pilot heater maintenance is included in this task.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Overpressure of the system-report and investigate downstream system
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.12

TASK
Description: Bypass a regulator station. Bypass a regulator station or industrial meter set with like equipment for maintenance and emergency situations following written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Overpressure the system-report and investigate downstream system
• Gas pressure loss-initiate immediate response
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 5.12

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

16 OF 20

TASK
Description: Repair gas pipelines. Identify the requirements and methods for repairing gas pipelines including the use of permanent repair leak clamps and sleeves such as the “PLIDCO” and “Clock Spring”. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Mechanical damage-refer to pipe repair chart
• Corrosion damage-refer to pipe repair chart
• Leaks in welds-refer to pipe repair chart
• Non-leaking cracks or defects-refer to pipe repair chart
• Leaks in body of fittings or clamps-refer to pipe repair chart
• Uncontrolled release of gas-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 3.32, 3.32A, 3.32A, 3.33
TASK
Description: Replace broken, damaged, or other non-compliant gas service valves. Using the Mueller “No-Blo” service valve changing equipment, remove the broken, damaged, or non-compliant valve and replace with a new valve. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Equipment out of spec’s.-repair or replace as needed
• Equipment failure during operation-assess situation and take appropriate action
• Defective riser-report or repair • Incomplete shutdown-remove, inspect, and repeat
• Hazardous gas leakage-initiate immediate response • Fire or explosion-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 2.14, 2.24, 3.16, 5.17, GESH Section 9
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

17 OF 20

TASK
221.040.001 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Inspect tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Review manufacturer’s instruction for using tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Using Mueller tapping and stopping equipment, properly tap and stop steel gas fittings 4 inches in diameter and smaller following manufacturer’s written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
• Incomplete shut down-remove stopper and inspect or re-sweep
• Hazardous gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Line pressure drops-remove stopper plug and evaluate.
• Line pressure loss-initiate emergency shutdown and restoration procedure.
Standards referenced: Specification 3.32

TASK
221.040.010 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Inspect tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Review manufacturer’s instruction for using tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Using Mueller tapping and stopping equipment, properly tap and stop steel gas fittings 6 inches in diameter and larger following manufacturer’s written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
• Incomplete shut down-remove stopper and inspect or re-sweep • Hazardous gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Line pressure drops-remove stopper plug and evaluate.
• Line pressure loss-initiate emergency shutdown and restoration procedure
Standards referenced: Specification 3.32

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

18 OF 20

TASK
221.040.005 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Inspect tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Review manufacturer’s instruction for using tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Using TD Williamson tapping and stopping equipment, properly tap and stop steel gas fittings 4 inches in diameter and smaller following manufacturer’s written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
• Incomplete shut down-remove stopper and inspect or re-sweep
• Hazardous gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Line pressure drops-remove stopper plug and evaluate
• Line pressure loss-initiate emergency shutdown and restoration procedure
Standards referenced: Specification 3.32

TASK
221.040.015 3 Years Skill 1:1
Description: Inspect tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Review manufacturer’s instruction for using tapping and stopping equipment prior to operation. Using TD Williamson tapping and stopping equipment, properly tap and stop steel gas fittings 6 inches in diameter and larger following manufacturer’s written procedures. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Equipment out of specs-repair or replace
• Incomplete shut down-remove stopper and inspect or re-sweep • Hazardous gas leak-initiate immediate response
• Line pressure drops-remove stopper plug and evaluate
• Line pressure loss-initiate emergency shutdown and restoration procedure
Standards referenced: Specification 3.32

TASK
Description: Maintain distribution and transmission valves. Accurately locate and identify the valve to be maintained. Inspect the valve box and valve for signs of damage or leakage. Partially operate the valve. Lubricate the valve as needed. Verify documentation is accurate. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.

Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Valve box out of alignment-excavate and repair
• Valve inoperable-repair or replace
• Valve leaking-repair or replace
• Hazardous gas leakage-initiate immediate response
Standards referenced: Specification 2.14, 5.13

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

19 OF 20

TASK
Description: Inspect and maintain vaults. Identify the requirements
for vault inspection and maintenance. Inspect vaults for damage and repair as needed. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Gas leak-initiate immediate response • Fire-evacuate and initiate immediate response
• Poor physical condition-initiate repairs
• Plugged drains or vents-clear obstructions
Standards referenced: Specification 2.22, 2.42, 3.12, 5.18

TASK
221.130.005 Visual Inspection of the Weld 3 Years Knowledge 1:1
Description: Visually inspect weld joints. Verify the weld procedure is being followed this includes checking the joint and alignment, preheat requirements, amp and voltage settings, measure and calculate speed of travel, look for visual weld defects. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions.
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Weld defects (porosity overlap, undercut, cracking, contaminants) – repair or cut out weld
Standards referenced: Specification 3.22
TASK
Non-Observable
Description: Joining of steel pipe by welding. Perform fit up and weld of joint in accordance with applicable company welding procedure and process which includes the use of the appropriate electrode, voltage, amperage and speed of travel. Recognize and react to abnormal operating conditions. Individuals qualified to this standard also satisfy the skills required for Visual Inspection of the Weld (221.130.005).
Abnormal Operating Conditions and Remedial Actions:
• Correct procedure not followed – cut out weld
• Defects in weld – repair or cut out weld
Standards referenced: Specification 3.22

OPERATOR QUALIFICATION COVERED TASK LIST – APPENDIX A

20 OF 20

COVERED TASKS ASSOCIATED WITH INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT, SUBPART O
As Necessary
Hydrostatic Testing Metal Loss Assessment As Necessary
Dent Assessment As Necessary
Grinding Repairs Repair of Leaking Defects As Necessary
Installation of Steel Pressure Containing Sleeves As Necessary
Installation of Composite Sleeves As Necessary
Assessment of Arc Burns and Hard Spots
In-Line Inspection As Necessary

APPENDIX B
EVALUATION GUIDELINES

1 OF 1 SPEC. 4.31 B

Preparation:
(1) Acquiring and developing evaluation skills.
(2) Reviewing applicable performance Evaluation Criteria Guide(s).
(3) Reviewing applicable performance criteria documents, i.e.:
(a) Operation and maintenance procedures.
(b) Engineering specifications.
(c) Manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Coordinate with individuals on timeframe and location of evaluation.
(5) If utilizing a simulation, make sure all props and necessary equipment are available and ready.
Evaluation:
(1) Select correct forms.
(a) Performance Evaluation Criteria Guide(s).
(b) Performance Evaluation Forms.
(c) Supplemental Evaluation Forms.

(2) Prepare the individual.
(a) Explain scope and process of evaluation(s).
(b) Answer any administrative questions.
(c) Remind individual to verbalize and demonstrate.
(d) Be careful how you ask questions – you want to probe not coach.
(e) Remind individual to identify Abnormal Operating Conditions (AOC).
(f) Performance evaluation – not memory test.
(g) Give examples of what “verbalization” means.
(h) Not a timed test.

(3) Assess individual.
(a) Monitor safety.
(b) Evaluate individual’s performance in accordance with establish criteria.
(c) Question individual without giving away information.
(d) Verify ability to recognize and react to AOCs.
(e) Mark the PEF as the evaluation progresses.
(f) Indicate reason(s) unsatisfactory performance.
(g) Mark successful or unsuccessful completion of each step.
(h) Mark successful or unsuccessful completion of the evaluation(s).
(i) Review results with individual.
After Evaluation:
(1) Complete required documentation.
(2) Submit for entry in record keeping system.
(3) If required, take action to schedule individual for re-evaluation or remedial training.
(4) If unable to pass evaluation after remedial training, the individual’s manager will be contacted to
determine subsequent action.
Rev 2 12/12/15
APPENDIX C OPERATOR QUALIFICATION
REVIEW FORM

Individual Qualification Mutual Assistance Qualification Name of Individual (whose qualifications are being reviewed):
Company OQ Program/Criteria being reviewed:
Compare the evaluation criteria and procedures for any listed covered tasks and associated abnormal operating conditions (AOCs) to ascertain if they are comparable to Avista’s OQ Program and O&M Plan.

List of Covered Tasks
(and AOC’s)/Procedures Avista Tasks

Comments: ________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________ Proof of qualifications available:
Reviewed by (name, title, date):

(Attach any documents to support the decision for acceptance)
PO
S
T

R
E
P
O
R
T
A
B
L
E

O
R

OP
E
R
A
T
O
R

QU
A
L
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

AS
S
E
S
S
M
E
N
T
GU
I
D
E
L
I
N
E

F
L
O
W
C
H
A
R
T
AP
P
E
N
D
I
X

D
Id
e
n
t
i
f
y

i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s

i
n
v
o
l
v
e
d

i
n

In
c
i
d
e
n
t
Co
n
d
u
c
t

I
n
c
i
d
e
n
t

I
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
Ga
s

O
c
c
u
r
r
e
n
c
e

R
e
v
i
e
w

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d
Se
e

G
E
S
H

D
r
a
w
i
n
g

17
In
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l

q
u
a
l
i
f
i
e
d
?
Un
d
e
r

d
i
r
e
c
t

o
b
s
e
r
v
a
t
i
o
n
?
Fi
n
d

o
u
t
wh
y
Pr
o
c
e
d
u
r
e

a
d
e
q
u
a
t
e
?
Pr
o
c
e
d
u
r
e

f
o
l
l
o
w
e
d
?
Ma
k
e

n
e
c
e
s
s
a
r
y

ch
a
n
g
e
s

t
o

a
p
p
r
o
p
r
i
a
t
e

do
c
u
m
e
n
t
s
Co
v
e
r
e
d

T
a
s
k

e
v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n

pr
o
c
e
s
s

a
d
e
q
u
a
t
e
?
Se
n
d

a
l
l

d
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

t
o

P
i
p
e
l
i
n
e

In
t
e
g
r
i
t
y

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

M
a
n
a
g
e
r

t
o

r
e
v
i
e
w

fo
r

C
o
m
p
a
n
y

w
i
d
e

t
r
e
n
d
s

a
n
d

in
c
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e

i
n
t
o

D
I
M
P
Co
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
e

C
h
a
n
g
e
s
Ne
w

A
O
C
’
s

n
e
e
d
e
d

b
a
s
e
d

o
n

in
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
?
DO
T

R
e
p
o
r
t
a
b
l
e

I
n
c
i
d
e
n
t

/
Re
a
s
o
n
a
b
l
e

C
a
u
s
e
Di
s
q
u
a
l
i
f
y

In
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s
Tr
a
i
n

I
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s
/
Co
u
n
s
e
l

In
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s
Re
-ev
a
l
u
a
t
e

a
n
d

Re
q
u
a
l
i
f
y
In
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s
Do
c
u
m
e
n
t

t
h
e

Re
s
o
l
u
t
i
o
n
NO
No
t
e
:

If

a

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

l
i
m
i
t
a
t
i
o
n

i
s

de
t
e
r
m
i
n
e
d

t
h
r
o
u
g
h

t
h
e

i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n

pr
o
c
e
s
s
,
It

s
h
a
l
l

b
e

b
r
o
u
g
h
t

t
o

th
e

a
t
t
e
n
t
i
o
n

o
f

H
u
m
a
n

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s

fo
r

f
u
r
t
h
e
r

i
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
.
1/
1
/
2
0
2
1
R
e
v
i
s
i
o
n

7
NO
YE
S
YE
S
NO
NO
NO
NO
YE
S
YE
S
Su
s
p
e
n
d

O
/Q
t
a
s
k
s

o
f

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
e
d

in
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s

u
n
t
i
l

I
n
v
e
s
t
i
g
a
t
i
o
n

i
s

co
m
p
l
e
t
e
YE
S
YE
S
Re
l
e
a
s
e

S
u
s
p
e
n
s
i
o
n

o
f

In
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
s
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
1 OF 2 SPEC. 4.41

4.4 INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM

4.41 TRANSMISSION INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (TIMP)
The Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP) is a separate document that is maintained by the TIMP Program Manager. This document is accessible on the Company’s Gas Wiki SharePoint website. The following standard gives a general overview of what is contained within this document. SCOPE: The purpose of Avista’s Transmission Integrity Management Program (TIMP) is to provide safe, reliable, and cost-effective transportation of natural gas for our customers without adverse effects on the public, customers, employees, and the environment. The TIMP is specifically intended to apply only to segments of transmission pipelines subject to the requirements of §192, Subpart O. This program provides for the comprehensive, integrated, and systematic management of pipeline integrity in high consequence areas (HCA), medium consequence areas, and Class 3 or Class 4 areas operating at a hoop stress of 30% SMYS or more, as a means to improve the safety of the covered pipeline systems. This program provides the necessary framework for Avista to effectively allocate resources for appropriate prevention, detection, and mitigation activities that will result in improved safety. This program provides a process to assess and mitigate risks in order to reduce both the likelihood and consequences of pipeline failures. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192, Subpart O CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.13, Damage Prevention Program Spec. 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements Spec. 4.31, Operator Qualification Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey
OPERATIONS REV. NO. 8
2 OF 2 SPEC. 4.41

INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES: Avista has adopted a set of principles as the basis for the intent and specific details of this program. The principles are presented below:
• Functional requirements for integrity management shall be engineered into new pipeline systems from initial planning, design, material selection, installation, and initial inspection and testing.
Avista follows the applicable laws and regulations as well as uses numerous consensus codes and standards in order to meet this requirement. Policies, plans, and procedures have been developed which are also used to meet this requirement.
• System integrity requires commitment by operating personnel using systematic, comprehensive, and integrated processes in order to safely operate and maintain the pipeline systems.
• The TIMP will be continuously evolving and improving and is therefore intended to be flexible. Periodic evaluation is conducted to ensure that the program takes appropriate advantage in
improvements in technologies and that the program utilizes the appropriate prevention, detection, and mitigation activities. The effectiveness of the various activities will be reassessed and
modified to ensure the continuing effectiveness of the program and its activities. The integration of information is recognized as a key component for managing system integrity. Information that
can impact the understanding of the important risks to a pipeline system comes from a variety of sources. Avista is committed to analyzing pertinent information in order to effectively manage
pipeline integrity.
• Avista has developed a risk assessment methodology and will use that methodology to determine the types of adverse events or conditions that may impact pipeline integrity. The process is also used to prioritize the pipeline segments for further assessment by considering the likelihood and consequence of an adverse event. The model utilizes Dynamic Risk Assessment Systems, Inc.’s Integrated Risk Assessment Software system (IRAS) to display and manage risk assessments and employs a risk algorithm that was custom-designed to accommodate Avista’s unique system configuration and data resources.
• Avista will continually gather new and/or additional information pertaining to system configuration and system experience. The Integrity Management Plan will be reviewed on a regular basis to ensure that new information becomes integrated into the Integrity Management Plan.
• Avista is committed to keeping abreast of new knowledge and technologies affecting pipeline integrity and evaluating those technologies and implementing them where appropriate. Avista
personnel will attend meetings and conferences and will perform literature searches in order to investigate and then evaluate the use of new technologies for specific use in the TIMP. New technologies and knowledge will be gathered and integrated into the Integrity Management Plan as appropriate.

• Avista has determined the set of performance measures that will best serve the need for monitoring and evaluating the effectiveness of the TIMP. Reports, based on these performance measures, will be generated on an annual basis.
• Avista is committed to communicating the results of its integrity management activities to its stakeholders.
DISTRIBUTION INTEGRITY DATE 01/01/20
1 OF 2 SPEC. 4.42

4.42 DISTRIBUTION INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
The Distribution Integrity Management Program (DIMP) is a separate document that is maintained by the Pipeline Integrity Program Manager. This document is accessible on the Company’s Gas Wiki SharePoint website. The following standard gives a general overview of what is contained within this document. SCOPE: The purpose of Avista’s DIMP program is to enhance safety by identifying and reducing gas distribution pipeline integrity risks to the public, customers, employees, and the environment. The effective date of Avista’s DIMP program was August 2, 2011. The program outlined in the DIMP document applies to distribution facilities subject to the requirements of §192, Subpart P. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192, Subpart P CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 4.11, Continuing Surveillance Spec. 4.14, Recurring Reporting Requirements Spec. 4.31, Operator Qualification Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey GESH Section 2, Leak and Odor Investigation
General
Operators must integrate reasonably available information about their pipelines to be used in their risk decisions. The rule requires that operators identify risks to their pipelines where an incident could cause serious consequences and focus priority attention in those areas. The rule also requires that operators implement a program to provide greater assurance of the integrity of their pipeline. The integrity management approach was designed to promote continuous improvement in pipeline safety by requiring operators to identify and invest in risk control measures beyond previously established regulatory requirements.
DISTRIBUTION INTEGRITY DATE 01/01/20
2 OF 2 SPEC. 4.42

DISTRIBUTION INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT ELEMENTS: The DIMP Plan addresses the following elements: 1. Written Distribution Integrity Management Plan document.
2. Knowledge of the System – Demonstrate an understanding of Avista’s infrastructure using reasonably available information from past and ongoing design, operations, and maintenance activities. Identify additional information necessary and develop a plan to obtain that information over time through normal activities. 3. Identify Threats – Identify existing gas distribution pipeline threats through available data
including leak repair, incident data, material failure reports, operational and maintenance history, excavation damages, and exposed piping inspection reports. Identify potential threats that have not occurred but based on geographical location may occur such as earthquakes, flooding and other natural hazards, or have been identified by other organizations such as National
Transportation Safety Board, Pipeline and Hazardous Material and Safety Administration, or industry associations.
4. Evaluate and Rank Risks – Develop a process to identify what factors affect the risk posed by the threats identified and where they are relatively more important than others based on likelihood of failure and the potential consequences of the failure.
5. Identify and Implement Measures to Address Risks – Develop risk control measures to address
the risks that have been evaluated and prioritized.
6. Measure Performance, Monitor Results, and Evaluate Effectiveness – Establish performance measures that are monitored from an established baseline in order to evaluate the effectiveness
of the DIMP program. There are four performance metrics that are required to be monitored to evaluate the effectiveness of the program.

• Number of Hazardous Leaks either Eliminated or Repaired, Categorized by Cause
• Number of Hazardous Leaks Eliminated or Repaired, Categorized by Material
• Total Number of Leaks Eliminated or Repaired, Categorized by Cause
• Number of Excavation Damages, Locate Tickets, and the Ratio of Excavation Damages per 1000 Locate Tickets 7. Reporting of Results – The annual report which includes the four above mentioned performance metrics is required to be completed and submitted to PHMSA each calendar year. Each mechanical failure that results in a hazardous leak during the calendar year is required to be reported to PHMSA along with the annual report by no later than March 15 of each calendar year. 8. Periodic Evaluation and Improvement – Periodically re-evaluate threats and risks on the entire pipeline and periodically evaluate the effectiveness of the program. A complete program re-evaluation shall be completed every five (5) years.
GAS SYSTEM MONITORING & ALARM REV. NO. 6 DATE 01/01/20
1 OF 2 SPEC. 4.51

4.51 GAS CONTROL ROOM MANAGEMENT PLAN
The Gas Control Room Management Plan is a separate document maintained by Operations Support. This document is accessible on the Gas Control Room SharePoint site. The following information gives a general overview of what is contained within this document. SCOPE: The requirements in the Gas Control Room Management Plan apply to Avista’s Gas Control Room in Spokane, Washington, which monitors the pipelines/systems in the states of Idaho, Oregon, and Washington. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.631 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.25, Telemetry Design Spec. 4.15, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) Spec. 4.31, Operator Qualification CONTROL ROOM MAJOR ELEMENTS: The Gas Control Room Management Plan includes the following sections, as applied to Gas Control:
• Control Room Management Plan Introduction
• Roles, Responsibilities, Accountability, and Authority of Gas Control Personnel
• Providing Adequate Information to Gas Control Room Personnel – SCADA Processes
• Providing Adequate Information to Gas Control Room Personnel – Shift Change and Other Procedures
• Fatigue Risk Management System
• Alarm Management Plan
• Change Management Plan
• Operating Experience Program
• Control Room Training Program
• Compliance and Deviations
• Activity Review Process
GAS SYSTEM MONITORING & ALARM REV. NO. 6 DATE 01/01/20
2 OF 2 SPEC. 4.51

Control Room Notifications Field personnel shall contact Gas Control when emergency conditions exist or when working on location as described below at a gate station, regulator station, meter set, or other facility known to have telemetry.
Before performing maintenance, operations, or construction activities that may affect Control Room operations, Gas Control must be called at 509-495-4859 or via radio to notify them of the work. This includes valve operations including sensing lines to instrumentation and regulators, set point changes, work on or testing of regulators, instrument calibrations, piping configuration changes, increasing or decreasing the pressure of the system, and other activities that may result in an alarm or alert condition being sensed and transmitted. This will minimize false alarm/alert notifications and associated personnel
call outs. Activities that do not potentially affect gas pressures, gas temperatures, or alarms, such as site maintenance, reading of odorizer levels, fencing construction and/or vegetation management, etc., do not
require notification.
When work is complete, Gas Control must be called again to ensure alarms and alerts have cleared before leaving the site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE/ QUALITY REV. NO. 4 DATE 01/01/20
1 OF 3 SPEC. 4.61

4.61 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL (QA/QC) PROGRAM
SCOPE: The purpose of Avista’s QA/QC Program is to enhance the quality of gas field activities and improve standardization and efficiency of these activities. The QA/QC Program is designed to audit field activities and not to direct work in the field which is the function of Company and contract inspectors. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.605 (b)(8) CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains Spec. 3.13, Pipe Installation – Plastic Mains Spec. 3.15, Trenching & Backfilling Spec. 3.16, Pipe Installation – Services Spec. 3.17, Purging of Pipelines Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 3.22, Joining of Pipe-Steel Spec. 3.23, Joining of Pipe – Plastic Heat Fusion Spec. 3.24, Joining of Pipe – Electrofusion Spec. 3.25, Joining of Pipe – Mechanical General
The Quality Assurance Program is a separate document that is maintained by the Quality Assurance Manager. Quality Assurance (QA) comprises those actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that products, processes, or systems comply with applicable specifications and standards. The focus is on providing assurance that processes are adequate and effective. Quality Control (QC) comprises operational techniques and activities, including audits, necessary to control the characteristics of a product or service (i.e., characteristics that can be measured against codes, drawings, or specifications). The focus is on preventing defective products or services.
Objectives of the QA/QC Program The QA/QC Program is structured to meet the following objectives: 1. Ensuring adherence to federal, state, and Company requirements, standards, policies, and procedures. 2. Identifying areas in which the Company’s standards may need to be updated or clarified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE/ QUALITY REV. NO. 4 DATE 01/01/20
2 OF 3 SPEC. 4.61

3. Evaluating the transfer of training/qualifying to the field and identifying training/qualification needs. 4. Providing support to Field Supervisors, Trainers, and Operator Qualification (OQ) Specialists. 5. Presenting recommendations by Avista Utilities Gas Managers and Supervisors to the QA Committee and applicable groups. 6. Facilitating and driving change through direction from the QA Advisory Committee.
Program Applicability
The QA/QC Program applies to the following categories of activities: Construction
• New construction
• Reconstruction
• Conversions
• Extensions
• Other work (e.g., relocations, cut offs, grading, replacements, maintenance, etc.)
• Pre and Post Paperwork
Gas Service
• Meter work
• Service calls (Inside service work)
• Odor calls
• Maintenance
• Gas Emergencies Leak Survey
• Surveys
• Odor calls
• Leak re-checks
• Leak resolution Locating
• One Call locates
• Standbys
• Pipe Ids
• Damage Prevention Pipeline Marker Program
• Survey
QUALITY ASSURANCE/ QUALITY REV. NO. 4 DATE 01/01/20
3 OF 3 SPEC. 4.61

Atmospheric Corrosion (AC)
• Survey
• Follow up on write up Emergency Response
• Incident Commander (IC)
• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
• Public Safety
• Communications
• Response Time
• Local and State Emergency services Additionally, the QA/QC Program applies to the following employees: 1. Avista natural gas employees 2. Avista gas construction and contract construction crews, including those working with Avista gas crews 3. Avista contractors performing leak survey, atmospheric corrosion, and pipeline marker survey inspections 4. Avista field support employees and contract employees who perform natural gas locating activities.
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
1 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

5.10 GAS MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES AND MATRIX SCOPE: To define the various maintenance timeframes as required by state and federal regulations for gas pipeline systems.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192 WAC 480-93
The timeframes identified in this manual are defined as follows: Definitions
Monthly – Means any time within the calendar month.
Annually – Means any time within the calendar year. Calendar Year – Means twelve consecutive months beginning January 1 and ending December 31.
2-1/2 months – Means the same calendar date of the second consecutive month plus an additional 15
days. 4-1/2 months – Means the same calendar date of the fourth consecutive month plus an additional 15 days.
6 months – Means the same calendar date of the sixth consecutive month.
7-1/2 months – Means the same calendar date of the seventh consecutive month plus an additional 15
days.
15 months – Means the same calendar date of the fifteenth consecutive month.
3 years – Means the same calendar date of the third consecutive year.
39 months – Means the same calendar date of the thirty-ninth consecutive month.
5 years – Means the same calendar date of the fifth consecutive year.
63 months – Means the same calendar date of the sixty-third consecutive month.
10 years – Means the same calendar date of the tenth consecutive year.
For calendar dates that end on a weekend or holiday, the next business day shall be considered the timeframe end date.

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
2 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

The following pages include Gas Maintenance Matrix tables which outline the tasks and timeframes for each type of ongoing maintenance activity.

Category Sub-Category Maintenance Frequencies Other References GSM Ref.
Regulator Stations
Regulator Station Relief Inspection Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 192.743 5.12
Regulator Station Overhaul Approx. 20% Per Year (Rebuild All In 5 Years) Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Master Meter Regulator Stations Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 192.743 5.12
Regulator Station, Relief Capacity Review Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.743 5.12
Gate Stations, Supplier's Relief Set Point Review
Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.743 5.12
operating on permanent Once Every 3 Years, Not To Exceed 39 months Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Portable Regulator Stations placed into service Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Portable CNG Trailers Not To Exceed 15 Months Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Flexible Element and Boot Type Regulators (Overhaul) Once Every 5 years Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Once Every 10 years Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Single Service Farm Taps
Regulator Station, Single Service Once Every 3 Years, Not To Exceed 39 months 192.479 192.481 WAC 480-93-110 5.12
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
3 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

Category Sub-Category Maintenance Frequencies DOT Ref Other References GSM Ref
Heaters

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Monthly Avista Internal Standard 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Monthly Avista Internal Standard 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Monthly Avista Internal Standard 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Water/Glycol
Sample Annually or Replace Every 3 Years Avista Internal Standard 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters High Temperature Shutdown
Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Flame Arrestor
Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 5.22

Regulator and Gate Stations, Line Heaters Heating Coil Once Every 10 years Avista Internal Standard 5.22
Regulator Stations, Pilot Heaters Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 5.22
Regulator Stations, Pilot Heaters Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.739 5.22
Valves

Emergency Valves Once Each Calendar Year, 192.747 WAC 480-93-100 5.13
Emergency Valves Once Each Calendar Year, 192.745 WAC 480-93-100 5.13
Emergency Curb Valves Once Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-100 5.13
and Associated Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.745 192.747 WAC 480-93-100 5.13
Secondary Valves Once Every 5 years Not to Exceed 63 months (Recommended)
Avista Internal Standard (Best Practice) 5.13

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
4 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

Category Sub-Category Maintenance Frequencies DOT Ref Other References GSM Ref
Line Patrols
Transmission* Class 1 & 2 Locations Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.705 5.15
Class1 & 2; Highway & Twice Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 7-1/2 months 192.705 5.15
Transmission* Twice Each Calendar Year 192.705 5.15
Class 3; Highway & RR Four Times Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 4-1/2 months 192.705 5.15
Transmission* Four Times Each Calendar Year 192.705 5.15

Transmission Integrity Per Avista's TIMP program
HP Distribution Pipelines Not To Exceed 15 months 192.721 5.15
(External Loading / Four Times Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 4-1/2 months 192.721 5.15
Major River Crossings Once Every 5 Years, Not to Exceed 63 months. 192.721 5.15
Distribution Lines Annually In Conjunction With 20% Leak Survey 192.721 5.15
Line Markers Once Every 5 years Not To Exceed 63 months 192.707 WAC 480-93-124 5.15
Cathodic
Annual Survey of Cathodic Protection Areas
Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.465 5.14

Isolated Short Section Survey Main <100 ft. or Service Lines
10% Per Year (Entire System every ten years) 192.465 5.14

Rectifiers Six Times Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 2-1/2 months 192.465 5.14
Critical Bonds, Critical Diodes Six Times Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 2-1/2 months 192.465 5.14
Other Bonds Other Diodes Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.465 5.14
Unprotected Pipelines Within 1 yr. of Installation (90 Days, Washington) 192.465 WAC 480-93-110 5.14
Casings with Steel Carrier Pipe Once Each Calendar Year, Not to Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-115 5.14
Shorted Casing (Confirm Short) 90 Days after initial determination of a possible short WAC 480-93-110 5.14
Atmospheric Corrosion, Monitoring of all aboveground piping
Once Every 3 Years, Not to Exceed 39 months 192.479 192.481 WAC 480-93-110 5.20

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
5 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

Category Sub-Category Maintenance Frequencies DOT Ref Other References GSM Ref
Leak Survey
Business District Once Each Calendar Year, 192.723 WAC 480-93-188 5.11
High Occupancy Structures High Occupancy Areas Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-188 5.11
20% Survey 20% Per Year, Complete System In 5-Year Period Not to Exceed 63 months 192.723 5.11
Transmission Pipelines Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months 192.706 5.11
Pipelines Operating greater than or equal to 250 psig Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-188 5.11

<30% SMYS Transmission in Class 3 or 4 Location with no HCA's
Semi-annually as outlined Avista's Transmission Integrity Management Plan 192.935 5.11

Non-Cathodically Protected Steel Pipe & Non-Cathodically Protected Isolated Risers
Twice Each Calendar Year Not To Exceed 7-1/2 months (Washington Only)
WAC 480-93-188 5.11
Shorted Casings
Initially within 90 days of confirmed shorted condition and then 2 times each year not to exceed 7-1/2 months
WAC 480-93-110 5.11
Road Resurfacing Jobs Prior to Paving or resurfacing WAC 480-93-188 5.11
Underground Leak Residual Re-Check Within 30 days of making repair WAC 480-93-186 5.11
Grade 2A Leak Response Less than 30 days Standard 5.11
Grade 2 and Grade 2A Re-Evaluation Every 6 Months until cleared – Repair within 15 months WAC 480-93-18601 5.11
Grade 2 Repair Within 1 Yr. Of Detection Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-18601 5.11
Grade 3 Re-Evaluation Next Leak Survey or Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-18601 5.11
Program Self Audit Every 3 Years (Washington Only) WAC 480-93-188 5.11
Third party damage As needed WAC 480-93-188 5.11
activity such as earthquake, As needed WAC 480-93-188 5.11

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE TIMEFRAMES & MATRIX
REV. NO. 11
6 OF 6 SPEC. 5.10

Category Sub-Category Maintenance Frequencies DOT Ref.Other References GSM Ref.
Odorization
Odorization Test Monthly - All Test Points 192.625 WAC 480-93-015 5.23
Test Point Review Once Each Calendar Year Avista Internal Standard 4.18
Odorizer Maintenance WAC 480-93-015 5.23
Vaults
Vault Maintenance 192.749 5.18
Meters
2 psig Residential 1 Time, After 180 Days Avista Internal Standard 5.12
2 psig Commercial 1 Time, After 180 Days Avista Internal Standard 5.12
5 psig Non-Industrial 1 Time, After 180 Days Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Industrial Annually Avista Internal Standard 5.12
Certifications
Welder Certification Weld Retest Twice each calendar year Not to Exceed 7-1/2 months 192.227 WAC 480-93-080 3.22
Plastic Certification Not To Exceed 15 months 192.285 WAC 480-93-080 3.23
Damage Prevention
Public Awareness As Necessary 192.616 4.13
Emergency Plan
Emergency Training Annually 192.615 GESH 13
Fire, Police, & Public Official Liaison Periodically 192.615 192.616 GESH 13
O & M Manuals
O & M Manual Review 192.605 WAC 480-93-180 1.4
O & M Procedure Review Periodically 192.605 WAC 480-93-180 1.4
Instruments
CGI Calibration 45 days and 12 times per WAC 480-93-188 5.19
Leak Survey Equipment Calibrations Per Manufacturer's recommendation WAC 480-93-188 5.11
Odorometer Calibration WAC 480-93-015 4.18
Pressure Gauges, Recorders and Calibration Standards Once Each Calendar Year, Not To Exceed 15 months WAC 480-93-170 5.21
Meter Provers Every 2nd Calendar Year Avista Internal Standard 2.22
Cathodic Instruments (Voltmeters, Electrodes, etc.) Annually WAC 480-93-110 5.14
Customer Notification
Notification to Customer of Responsibility for Buried Letter to Customer Within 90 Days of Service 192.16 4.22

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
1 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

5.11 LEAK SURVEY SCOPE: To establish procedures to be followed in detecting, classifying, and reporting natural gas leakage in Avista’s pipeline systems and facilities. Included in this section are leak survey types and methods, leak
classification criteria, leak investigation and follow-up procedures, and recordkeeping requirements. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §191.12, §192.503, §192.706, §192.709, §192.723, §192.1009
WAC 480-93-110, 480-93-115, 480-93-175, 480-93-185, 480-93-186, 480-93-18601, 480-93-187, 480-93-188 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing
Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation Spec. 5.15, Pipeline Patrolling - Pipeline Markers GESH Section 2, Leak Investigation GESH Section 4, Emergency Procedures GESH Section 17, Incident Investigation LEAK SURVEY
General Only properly trained and qualified employees and contractors shall perform leakage surveys, leak centering procedures, and calibration of leak detection equipment. Avista shall perform gas leak surveys
in which a gas detection instrument is passed over the transmission and distribution pipelines, as well as other gas facilities. The frequencies and types of surveys are specified in this specification and shall conform to applicable regulatory codes. While performing leakage surveys, personnel will typically also perform distribution patrolling functions as noted in Specification 5.15, “Maintenance Frequencies”. Specific detail on this accomplishment is covered in the Leak Survey Program Orientation Manual.
Relation of PPM, Percent Gas, and Percent LEL PPM RELATION TABLE
100 .01% .2%
500 .05% 1%
1,000 .10% 2%
5,000 .5% 10%
7,500 .75% 15%
10,000 1% 20%
50,000 5% 100%
100,000 10%
250,000 25%
* - The percent LEL figures are based on 1% Gas being equal to 20% LEL for Avista gas
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
2 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Leak Detection Instruments Instruments utilized to detect concentrations of natural gas shall be used according to manufacturer’s instructions. These instructions shall be on-site when the equipment is in use, both for on-foot and mobile surveys. Instruments utilized by Avista and its contractors to detect concentrations of natural gas during leak surveys are as follows: Flame Ionization Detector (F.I.) - This electronic instrument detects the presence of methane gas by measuring the ions produced in a hydrogen flame when gas is burned. The ions conduct electricity, which is in turn measured by the electronic circuitry in the instrument to produce a reading, normally in parts-per-million (ppm) of gas in air. Most modern flame ionization detectors are capable of detecting concentrations of gas 1 ppm or less. Air samples are drawn into the detector by a pump. If the sample is
diluted the readings may be inaccurate, thus it is not advisable to use this type of detector in wet or windy weather. Flame ionization detectors are so sensitive that they are the primary instrument used in leak surveys to detect the presence of gas. (Other equivalent instruments may be used as technological advances are made). Other combustible gas indicators are then used to grade the leak by obtaining percentage gas in air reads and to center the source of the leak.
Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI) - Combustible Gas Indicator is a leak detector that employs either a catalytic or thermal filament to detect the presence of combustible gases. The Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) is measured using the catalytic filament. The filament is heated, combustible gases burn on the filament, and the changes in temperature are converted to a reading. The percent Gas Range (0 to 100 percent gas in air) is measured using a thermal filament. The thermal filament is heated, combustible gases cool the filament, and changes in electrical resistance in the filament are converted to a reading.
Most CGI units have a hand aspirator pump that is used to draw in the sample. CGI’s are mainly used to obtain readings of combustible gases drawn from bar holes, inside structures, or in other confined areas. These detectors are not normally used in the system leak surveys due to the fact that bar holes would have to be drilled along all pipeline routes in order to effectively sample buried facilities. CGI’s are, however, essential in centering leaks and obtaining accurate percentage gas in air readings.
Electronic Combustible Gas Indicator - This detector is similar in operation to the standard CGI unit except that they normally have a motorized pump system to draw in sample air, most have a digital display, and some use a permeable membrane to detect the presence of gas instead of a filament. Some of these detectors do not indicate percentages of gas but simply have a visual or audible alarm. Detectors that have the capability of displaying percentage readings may be used to center leaks, determine the extent of underground leakage using bar holes, and to obtain readings in structures or
other confined areas. Detectors without percentage indication shall not be used in leakage surveys or in centering and classifying leakage. Detecto-Pak Infrared Detector (DP-IR) – The DP-IR is a detector that utilizes infrared controlled interference polarization spectrometry (CIPS). This translates to having a low-end sensitivity of 1 ppm that can auto-scale up to 100 percent gas by volume. The DP-IR is basically the combination of a “search” instrument and a CGI in one device that does not require external fuel gas. The DP-IR is also selective to methane only and thus prevents false positives that can be detected with other units. Additional features include a built-in self-test and zero function which helps assure the instrument is working properly. These self-tests are internally stored by the instrument which has sufficient memory to hold up to 2,000 logs. Remote Methane Leak Detector (RMLD): The RMLD is a detector that is capable of detecting leaks from a remote distance and consequently, it is possible to survey areas that are hard to reach or are not easily accessible. The RMLD does not have to be within the gas plume because it uses laser technology known
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
3 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

as Tunable Diode Laser Absorption Spectroscopy. As the laser passes through the gas plume, the methane absorbs a portion of the light, which the RMLD then detects. This technology makes it possible to detect leaks along the sight line without needing to walk the full length of the service line. It is designed to be selective to detecting methane only and will not false alarm on other hydrocarbon gases. The RMLD has a built in function to perform a self-test and calibration of the laser wavelength. The self-test feature should be used daily to ensure the instrument is operating properly.
IRed Portable Infrared Ethane Detector (IRed): The IRed is designed to detect the presence of ethane in a methane sample. The IRed can detect 250 parts per billion (ppb) up to 1,000 ppm ethane. The IRed is used to determine if methane detected in the range of 20 to 2,000 ppm is of similar make-up to that of pipeline gas, which contains ethane or is naturally occurring methane from other sources such as organic decay. The IRed is not designed for high concentrations or determining actual ethane content from within
a pipeline. The IRed senses gas using Infrared Absorption Spectroscopy in combination with an electronic narrow band pass filter. This technology utilizes an infrared light source with an output that is changed when certain gases absorb the light output. The filter only allows specific light wavelengths to be monitored and measured. The concentration of gas is proportional to the amount of specific Infrared light absorbed and
is displayed in parts per billion (ppb) or parts per million (ppm). The IRed is housed with Avista’s Leak Survey group and should be requested when the result of a leak/odor investigation is inconclusive and foreign gas is suspected. Contact Leak Survey/Atmospheric Corrosion Field Administrators if such conditions are suspected.
Bascom Turner Gas Rover (ethane option)- The Gas-RoverTM can be used for handheld or mobile surveys and for responding to indoor or outdoor leak calls. The Gas-RoverTM locates leaks, grades them, does safety checks and, in the process, greatly reduces the number of bar-holes needed to be placed on the property. What makes the Gas-RoverTM so versatile is its calibrated accuracy in the PPM range of gas, its intrinsic safety, its optional carbon monoxide and oxygen sensors, and its extensive and automatic data collection and storage.
Bascom Turner Gas Explorer (ethane option)- The Gas-Explorer can be used for handheld or mobile surveys and for responding to indoor or outdoor leak calls. The Gas-Explorer locates leaks, grades them, does safety checks and, in the process, greatly reduces the number of bar-holes needed to be placed on the property. What makes the Gas-Explorer so versatile is its calibrated accuracy in the PPM range of gas, its intrinsic safety, its optional carbon monoxide and oxygen sensors, and its extensive and
automatic data collection and storage. The Bascom Turner Gas Rover and Explorer with ethane option allow the user to take an air sample from a site suspected to be non-pipeline gas like the Sensit IRed. The device analyzes the sample and gives the user a result of ethane detected or not detected. Some units use a combination of the above technologies.
Maintenance of Instruments Each instrument used for leak detection and evaluation shall be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Instruments shall be calibrated monthly or in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Calibrations shall be performed on a regular schedule using certified test gases. Calibrations shall also be performed after any repairs or replacements of parts. Records of
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
4 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

instrument calibrations shall either be affixed to the instrument and maintained in the local construction office or maintained within the Leak Survey Mobile Application as applicable. Dust filters on detectors shall be checked at least daily and more frequently if conditions are dusty. Filters should be changed or cleaned as necessary.
Batteries shall be checked daily and changed if the instrument will not zero or if it appears to not be functioning properly. Rechargeable batteries should be cycled periodically. Remove batteries if the unit is to be stored for a long period of time. Detectors shall be checked for leakage in the sampling system before each use. Leaks shall be repaired (leaks in the sampling system can cause the sample to be diluted or may allow dirt to enter the
instrument). GAS LEAK SURVEY METHODS: The following gas leakage survey methods and procedures shall be employed in locating leaks in gas piping systems and other related facilities:
Surface Gas Detection Survey
This survey involves continuous sampling of the atmosphere at or near ground level over buried gas pipelines and facilities with an instrument capable of detecting a concentration of 50 ppm or more of gas in air (gas detector) at any sampling point. Aboveground facilities are also to be checked with the gas
detector during the survey. Gas in air concentrations registering at or above 7500 ppm shall be leak classified and then documented for follow-up repair. The gas detector used in surface surveys shall be one of the approved leak detection instruments listed in the “Leak Detection Instruments” section of this Specification and one that is applicable. Sampling of the atmosphere over buried piping should be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications for the specific instrument, but not more than 2-inches above the ground surface as applicable.
Foot Survey - Survey of gas pipelines and facilities conducted on foot shall be conducted using an approved and applicable gas detector. The gas detector shall be passed over all portions of each main, service, and other facilities. In addition, the atmosphere shall be tested at accessible gas, electric, telephone, sewer, water, and other underground structures. The gas detector shall also be passed over cracks in pavement, in wall-to-wall paved areas, and over the cracks in the sidewalk. Building walls
adjacent to the pipelines or facilities and other locations where there may be the possibility of migrating gas shall also be surveyed. Dead vegetation over the top of gas lines may be an indicator of an underground leak. The individual performing the survey shall determine the locations of underground pipelines or facilities when necessary to accurately complete the survey. Mobile Survey - A vehicle mounted gas detector (one of the approved and applicable leak detection instruments listed in the “Leak Detection Instruments” section of this specification) may be used to perform the surface gas detection survey. This method may be used where it is practical in surveying long stretches of buried pipeline that are accessible to a vehicle. Care shall be exercised not to exceed speeds specified in manufacturer’s instructions. Pipelines and other facilities that are inaccessible to vehicles shall be surveyed by foot.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
5 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

The individual performing either the foot or mobile surface survey shall evaluate and classify any leaks found (refer to Classifying Leaks within this specification). Document the leaks using the Leak Survey Location Report, N-2511, or electronic record and forward the information as applicable for the scheduling of required repairs or follow-up. Survey Limitations
Leak survey should not be conducted during periods of high winds, rain, excessive soil moisture, or if the surface is sealed by ice or water as these conditions may prevent leaking gas from rising directly to the surface. Bubble Leak Test
Bubble leak tests involve the application of a soap and water solution or other leak detection solution to exposed piping or facilities to determine the existence of a leak. The pipe or facilities to be tested should be reasonably clean and free of debris. The piping is then coated with the solution and monitored for
signs of leakage (active bubbles).
This method is normally used to test exposed aboveground portions of a system such as meter set assemblies, exposed piping at regulator stations, service valves, etc. It is also used to test any fittings or taps not included in a pressure test. Bubble tests are also used for detection of leaks on customer house (downstream) piping and equipment.
Bubble leak tests shall only be used as a supplement to the other methods of leak detection in Avista’s
gas systems. Employees performing bubble leak tests shall document conditions found and shall schedule required repairs or follow-up.
Pressure Drop Test
This test is used to determine if an isolated segment of pipeline loses pressure due to a leak. The
pipeline or facility must first be isolated in order to perform the test. Pressure drop tests conducted solely to determine if leakage exists should be performed at a pressure at least equal to operating pressure.
Testing procedures shall conform to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
Pressure drop tests have limited application in the scope of leak detection in a pipeline system. They will only establish whether a leak exists; the leak will then need to be located and evaluated. The employee
performing pressure drop tests shall document conditions found and shall schedule required follow-up or repairs.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
6 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Detection of Other Combustible Gases Most leak detection instruments will register a reading for other combustible gases even though they are calibrated for methane. In the case where leak indications are found that originate from a source other than natural gas, the employee performing the survey shall take prompt action at the time of discovery to protect life and property, and shall notify the property owner or adult person on the premises that the leak
indications were found, and that the source is other than natural gas. The customer shall be advised to contact the proper authorities for determination of the exact cause of the indication, and for correction of the problem. Examples of foreign sources of leak indications include gasoline vapors, sewer or marsh gases, propane vapors, etc.
Can’t Gain Entry / Can’t Find
In the course of performing leak survey operations, survey technicians may encounter situations where they Can’t Gain Entry (CGE) to the customer’s property (because of a locked gate or an aggressive dog, etc.) or Can’t Find (CF) the gas meter to successfully complete the survey. Specific processes for CGE and CF follow up attempts by the survey contractor are detailed in the Leak Survey Orientation Manual (updated annually.) If the follow up attempts required by the contractor are unsuccessful, a follow up order is generated, and Avista Gas Operations completes the survey. LEAK SURVEY PLANS: At the end of each year, the Leak Survey Program staff (in conjunction with the appropriate construction offices) shall determine the proposed leak survey program for the coming year. Such proposals shall include:
• Mobile devices and/or maps showing the areas to be surveyed
• Methods of survey to be used
• Estimates of total footage of main, number of services, and/or total hours for the survey
• Brief summary of training plan for seasonal employees (as applicable)
Gas leakage surveys shall be conducted according to the following frequencies: Annual Surveys
Business Districts and Buildings of Public Assembly Leak surveys shall be made once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months of business districts and/or places of public congregation (high occupancy structures or areas). The surface survey shall be conducted using an approved gas detector in accordance with the procedures outlined in this
specification.
WAC 480-93-185:company shall take appropriate action regarding its own facilities to protect life and property. In addition, if an indication is found to originate from a foreign source and the situation is ongoing and potentially hazardous, the employee on site shall inform the property owner or the adult occupying the premises, and where appropriate, shall inform the police department, fire, department, or other appropriate governmental agency. If the property owner or an adult person occupying the premises is not available, the company must, within 24 hours of the leak investigation, send out a letter to the person occupying the premises explaining the results of the investigation. A copy of the letter must be kept for 5 years.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
7 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Business District – An area where the public regularly congregates or where the majority of the buildings on either side of the street are regularly utilized for financial, commercial, industrial, religious, educational, health, or recreational purposes. Mains in the right-of-way adjoining a business district must also be included in the survey.
High Occupancy Structure or Area – A structure which is normally occupied by 20 or more persons on at least 5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12-month period. (The days and weeks need not be consecutive.) Structures and areas include churches, hospitals, schools, and may include assembly buildings, outdoor theaters, outdoor recreation areas, etc. Where gas service lines exist, a survey shall be conducted at the building wall where the service enters
the building. A permanent bar hole shall be drilled if deemed necessary by the employee conducting the survey. If leakage is detected at the outside wall of a building, a survey shall be conducted on the inside of the
building at points where migrating gas could be expected to enter and accumulate.
Service piping, service risers and valves, and the entire meter set assembly shall be checked with a leak detector or with a soapy solution. Leaks detected shall be reported on an individually numbered leak survey report. Each underground leak
detected shall also be noted on the appropriate map or electronic record, as applicable. Leak survey reports shall be forwarded to the local construction office for the appropriate action or follow- up.
Identifying High Occupancy Structures, High Occupancy Areas, and Business Districts
Annually, prior to leak survey season, the Leak Survey Program staff will conduct reviews using the last
season’s maps to confirm any changes and make necessary updates. At this time the addition of high occupancy structures / areas will be noted for inclusion on the annual survey program. The records of
this annual process are the red-lined maps / mobile device updates; no separate record of this review is required. Refer to Avista’s Annual Map Update SOP for specific procedures on updating High Occupancy
Structures, High Occupancy Areas, and Business Districts.
250+ psig Pipelines Washington Only
Transmission and Other HP Pipelines Transmission pipelines shall be leak surveyed once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. The survey shall be conducted using an approved leak detection instrument. As a best practice starting in 2018, high pressure pipelines in all states should be leak surveyed annually. Transmission pipelines that operate at less than 30 percent SMYS in a Class 3 or Class 4 location where no high consequence areas have been identified per Avista’s Transmission Integrity Management Program shall be leak surveyed on a semi-annual basis.
WAC 480-93-188:
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
8 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Each leak detected shall be reported on an individually numbered leak survey report. Each underground leak detected shall also be noted on the appropriate map. Leak survey reports shall be forwarded to the local construction office for action or follow-up.
5 Year Survey
Residential areas shall be surveyed with an approved leak detection instrument so that the entire system is surveyed in a 5-year period not to exceed 63 months. (Approximately 20 percent of the system shall be surveyed each calendar year). Mains, services, meter set assemblies, and other gas facilities shall be included in these surveys. Meter sets may be checked with a leak detector or tested with a soapy solution.
Each leak detected shall be reported on an individually numbered leak survey report. Each underground leak detected shall also be noted on the appropriate map or electronic record. Leak survey reports shall be forwarded to the local construction office for action or follow-up.
Special Surveys
The following special surveys are required in the state of Washington. Avista’s operating districts in other states should also perform these special surveys as a best practice.
When special surveys are required, the respective operations area’s representative shall notify the Leak Survey Program Manager and provide delineation of the extent of the area requiring the special survey.
Special surveys shall be surveyed with an approved leak detection instrument in the following instances.

• Prior to any paving or resurfacing, following street alterations or repairs where there are gas facilities under the area to be paved and when damage could have occurred to the gas facilities. This survey shall be completed using an approved leak detection instrument to check the pipeline or facilities, and to check for gas at manholes and other street openings. (Chip sealing of roadways is not considered paving or resurfacing to the extent that a special survey is required.)
• In areas of sewer, water, or other substructure construction adjacent to underground gas facilities where damage could have occurred to the gas pipelines.
• In areas of unstable soil conditions where active gas pipelines or facilities could be damaged or otherwise affected.

• In areas and at times of unusual activity, including, but not limited to, foreign construction, earthquake, flooding, explosions (including blasting operations), fires, or other natural disasters. (Note: In the case of an earthquake, first priority areas should be those where there has been noticeable damage to roadways, land distortion such as buckling and heaving of the ground, and places where there are known unstable soils and / or where landslides have occurred.)
• In cases where it is determined that additional survey methods are required to identify the source or location of a suspected gas leak or odor, or in cases where a company employee specifically
requests a special survey.
• During pressure uprating procedures. Refer to Specification 4.17, Uprating.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
9 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

• Shorted Casings – When a steel casing becomes electrically shorted to a steel gas pipeline and the short cannot be cleared in 90 days, a leak survey test shall be conducted within 90 days of discovery and at least 2 times annually thereafter, but not to exceed 7-1/2 months until the condition is corrected.

DIMP Identified Surveys
A special survey shall be conducted when a trend is identified through Avista’s Distribution Integrity Management Program, where a leakage survey has been identified as an additional action to minimize
high risk facilities. The Pipeline Integrity Program Manager shall coordinate with the Leak Survey Program staff to determine the parameters of the survey.
CLASSIFYING LEAKS:
The following procedure establishes criteria by which leakage indications of natural gas may be classified.
Each indication of gas leakage must be evaluated by the employee performing the survey. Evaluation includes establishing the area limits or perimeter of the leak, determining if immediate action is necessary
to protect life and property, and assignment of a Grade or Class to the leak in conformance with this specification.
Leakage monitoring, classification, and repairs shall be based on the following factors:
• Potential or actual danger to the public or property
• The volume of escaping gas and the percentage readings on a Combustible Gas Indicator (or equivalent instrument).
• The area limits of the leak and the proximity to structures both above and below ground
• The possibility or presence of any type of channel or other means whereby gas may accumulate or migrate below ground
• Soil and surface conditions that may affect migration
• Proximity of the leakage to sources of ignition
• Public and media awareness, apprehension, and reaction to the leakage
• Earth movement, flooding, or other natural disaster where external stresses on pipelines or facilities may cause or accentuate leakage When all the above factors have been considered, the employee performing the survey shall classify
each leak using one of the following leak grades, thereby establishing the leak repair priority. With regard to the following leak grade criteria, the definition of “reading” means a repeatable (sustained) representation on a combustible gas indicator or other similar instrument.
WAC 480-93-188 (3)(d):
survey must be conducted on all such segments of piping (including non-cathodically protected
isolated risers) 2 times each calendar year not to exceed 7-1/2 months in the state of Washington.
WAC 480-93-175:
within 30 days from the date a steel pipeline has been moved or lowered that is 2 inches in diameter
and smaller that operates at 60 psig or less and that did not have a study performed prior to moving in
the State of Washington.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
10 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Grade 1 Leak
A Grade 1 leak is any leak that represents an existing or probable hazard to persons or property. It requires immediate repair or prompt continuous action until the conditions are no longer a hazard. Grade 1 leaks are responded to immediately by company personnel. Refer to “Reclassification of Leaks”
subsection in this specification for further guidance on acceptable temporary repairs and if they meet the requirements of “prompt continuous action” noted here. Examples of Grade 1 Leak Situations: 1. Any leak which, in the judgment of personnel on the scene, is regarded as an immediate
hazard 2. Escaping gas that can be seen, felt, or heard which is in a location where it may endanger the general public or property 3. Escaping gas that has ignited
4. Any indication of gas which has migrated into or under a building or tunnel 5. Any reading at the outside wall of a building where the gas could potentially migrate to the
inside wall of a building
6. Any reading of 80 percent LEL or greater in a confined space 7. Any reading of 80 percent LEL or greater in small substructures not associated with gas facilities, where the gas could potentially migrate to the outside wall of a building
8. Any leaks involving construction damage to our pipelines or facilities
9. Any leaks where the police, fire department, other governmental authority, or media has
responded and Avista has been notified as such
Note: The Avista First Responder can leave once the investigation is complete, the scene is safe, and a
crew is on location making repairs. Action to Be Taken: Immediate and prompt action until the leak is considered non-hazardous may include one or more of the following: A. Implementation of the company Emergency Operating Plan (EOP)
B. Evacuation of the premises involved and any adjacent structures as needed
C. Venting of the leak
D. Removal of all sources of ignition
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
11 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

E. Blocking off an area and/or re-routing traffic (vehicle or pedestrian)
F. Stopping the flow of gas by closing valves or by other means
G. Notifying the police and fire departments
H. After making safe, repair the leak
Grade 2A Leak A Grade 2A leak is assigned only by Avista’s Leak Survey Contractor and defined as: Any leak that is recognized as being non-hazardous at the time of detection, but that justifies scheduled repair based on
probable future hazard and is in a location that would benefit from a response sooner than the standard Grade 2 timeframe.
Examples of Grade 2A Leak Situations: 1. Any leak discovered greater than 5 feet from a building foundation, but may have the potential to
migrate to the building foundation. 2. Any leak discovered in a high use hardscape area, such as a street intersection.
3. Any readings between 20 percent and 80 percent LEL in a confined space.
Grade 2 Leak A Grade 2 leak is any leak that is recognized as being non-hazardous at the time of detection but justifies a scheduled repair based on probable future hazard. Underground leaks that are classified as Grade 2 by the individual performing leak surveys shall be followed up with a subsurface survey (pinpointing of the leak) and a verification of the grading by obtaining percentage reads with a Combustible Gas Indicator.
Examples of Grade 2 Leak Situations: Leaks requiring action prior to ground freezing or other adverse changes in venting conditions (any leak that could potentially migrate to the outside wall of a building under frozen or adverse soil conditions).
Leaks requiring action within 6 months include the following: 1. Any reading of 40 percent LEL or greater under a sidewalk in a wall to wall paved area that could potentially migrate to the outside wall of a building 2. Any reading of 100 percent LEL or greater under a street in a wall to wall paved area that would probably migrate to the outside wall of a building 3. Any reading less than 80 percent LEL in small substructures not associated with gas where gas would probably migrate creating a probable future hazard
4. Any reading between 20 percent and 80 percent LEL in a confined space (See also “Grade 2A Leak” earlier in this specification. Leak Survey Contractor shall report these as a Grade 2A.) 5. Any reading on a pipeline operating at 30 percent SMYS or greater in Class 3 or 4 locations
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
12 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

6. Any leak of sufficient magnitude to justify scheduled repair It should be recognized that Grade 2 leaks will vary greatly in degree of potential hazard. Some Grade 2 leaks, which when evaluated by the above criteria, may justify scheduled repair within the next 5 working days. Others may justify repair within 30 days. These situations should be brought to the attention of the
individual responsible for scheduling leakage repair. Action to Be Taken: Grade 2 leaks shall be reevaluated every 6 months (minimum) and repaired, cleared, or re-classified within one year, not to exceed 15 months from the date reported. If a Grade 2 leak occurs in a segment
of pipeline due for replacement, an additional 6 months may be added to the 15 months maximum time for repair. The following factors shall be considered in assigning a priority of repair: amount and migration of gas, proximity to buildings and subsurface structures, extent of any paving, soil type and conditions (frost caps, moisture, natural venting, etc.). In addition to the above requirements, the judgment of experienced field personnel shall be enlisted in
determining the scheduling of repairs on Grade 2 leaks. These leaks shall be repaired under a time schedule that provides safety to the public, while remaining practical to company operations. Grade 3 Leak
A Grade 3 leak is any leak that is non-hazardous at the time of detection and can reasonably be expected
to remain non-hazardous. Underground leaks coded Grade 3 by the individual performing leak surveys shall be followed up with a subsurface survey (pinpointing of the leak) and a verification of the classification by obtaining percentage reads with a Combustible Gas Indicator. Examples of Grade 3 Leak Situations:
1. Any reading of less than 80 percent LEL in small gas associated substructures such as small meter boxes or gas valve boxes 2. Any reading under a street in areas without wall to wall paving where it is unlikely the gas could migrate to the outside wall of a building
3. Any reading of less than 20 percent LEL in a confined space Action to Be Taken: Grade 3 leaks shall be re-evaluated during the next scheduled leak survey or within 15 months of the reporting date, whichever occurs first, until the leak is re-classified or repaired. Aboveground Outside Leak Classification If a leak is found on aboveground facilities it should be graded in accordance with the following: Grade 1 – A Grade 1 leak is any leak that represents an existing or probable hazard to persons or property – (Hazardous.) Refer to Grade 1 Leak subsection in this specification.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
13 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Grade 2 – Any leak that is recognized as being non-hazardous at the time of detection, but that justifies scheduled repair based on probable future hazard. Any leak registering on a CGI (percent gas mode) 5 percent or greater gas in air. Grade 3 – Any leak that is non-hazardous at the time of detection and can reasonably be expected to remain non-hazardous. Any leak registering on a CGI (percent gas mode) 0.75 to 4.99 percent gas in air.
A leak found on aboveground facilities does not require documentation and classification until it can be detected at a minimum of 7500 ppm gas in air.
Aboveground Inside Leak Classification
Any inside leak on Avista piping should be treated as a Grade 1 leak by Avista’s Leak Survey Contractor for subsequent evaluation and grading by an Avista Gas Serviceman. The Avista First Responder should evaluate the potential hazard posed by the leak, and if appropriate in their judgment, may downgrade the leak one time to a Grade 2 or a Grade 3.

Underground Leak Investigation The Avista First Responder shall investigate for the presence of underground leakage by taking underground samples when any of the following conditions exist:
• When leakage on a meter set assembly or outside customer house piping is repaired and gas odors persist.

• When an inside or outside odor investigation is inconclusive as to the source of the odor.
• When it is determined that we have previously responded to a leak or odor call at the same premise location within the past 30 days.
• When a fire department (or other emergency responder) has requested our response to check our gas facilities (example: close a meter due to fire, continue a leak investigation begun by the fire department, etc.). Refer to GESH Section 17, Gas Incident Field Investigation.
• In all cases of failures of gas facilities or when our gas facilities are involved in fires or explosions. Refer to GESH Section 17, Gas Incident Field Investigation.
• In any other situation where it is suspected that natural gas may be leaking or migrating underground.

• When there is suspected damage beyond a break in a main or the possibility of multiple leaks.
• When a service line has been pulled, broken, or damaged (even without apparent leakage) by a third party excavation, a ppm survey or bar hole survey shall be performed from the point of the damage back to the service tie-in point which may be where it branches off another service or if there is no branch then back at the main.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
14 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Underground Leak Determination The presence or absence of underground leakage shall be determined by performing a bar hole survey utilizing a CGI unit in “percent gas mode” or a ppm survey utilizing approved leak detection instrument in “ppm mode” that is capable of detecting a concentration of 50 ppm or less. Should any concentration in the “ppm mode” be found, a bar hole survey using a CGI in the “percent gas mode” is required to be used
to pinpoint and grade the leak. For a ppm survey, describe the area surveyed (refer to GESH 2, Leak and Odor Investigation, “Investigation at Aboveground Avista Facilities” for examples of descriptions) and document the results found. For a bar hole survey, the location and results of each bar hole shall be documented. Checks shall be made at the following locations to determine the extent of the leakage:
• The point of entry of all underground utilities to a building or structure (gas service riser, water service, sewer, conduits, etc.)
• At cracks in exterior basement walls and around the perimeter of the building foundation.
• Over the service line and out to the main, as necessary.
• At street openings such as curb boxes, drains, vaults, manholes, etc. in the immediate area.
• In the interior atmosphere of the basement of any building or structure involved in the investigation.
• At any other location where natural gas may accumulate or migrate.
Note: Bar holes over 12-inches in depth require notification to the One Call Center.
Survey Limitations: To determine which type of survey to use above, consideration must be given to
limitations such as frost, rain, high winds, surface sealed by ice/water, paving, concrete, or other issues that would prevent an effective survey. Pinpointing/ Centering
Pinpointing is the process of tracing a detected gas leak source. It should follow an orderly systematic
process to minimize excavation. The following procedure for centering or pinpointing the leak shall be followed. A subsurface survey or leak centering procedure shall be conducted by taking samples with a
combustible gas indicator in a series of available openings (sewer manholes, electric or telephone substructures, etc.) or bar holes over or adjacent to the pipeline or facility. The location of the gas facility
and its proximity to buildings and other structures should be considered when determining the spacing of sample points. Spacing of sample points along the main or service will depend on soil and surface
conditions but should never be more than 20 feet apart. Where a pipeline passes under a paved area, samples should be taken at the entrance and exit points of the paved area. In areas of extensive paving,
consideration shall be given to drilling permanent test holes. When conducting the survey, bar holes should penetrate to approximately the same depth. Readings taken at the same depth will enable a meaningful comparison between samples. The reading should be
taken at the bottom of the test hole. Care shall be taken not to aspirate water into the instrument. Combustible gas indicator probes shall be equipped with a device to prevent the drawing in of fluids.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
15 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Refer to Specification 5.19 on how to measure the concentration of methane in a bar hole or other confined area. When taking each sample reading, the employee performing the survey shall use the most sensitive scale on the instrument. Any indications shall be investigated to determine the source of the gas.
Care should be taken when probing, especially around plastic pipe. Sample patterns should include points as close as possible to the main or pipeline, and adjacent to service taps, known branch connections, Dresser fittings, or other compression couplings. Risers and buried piping near building walls should also be sampled.
Samples shall continue to be taken until the area limit of the leak is determined, and until the readings have been sufficiently analyzed so that the suspected center or source of the leak is determined. Locations with the highest readings will normally indicate that they are closest to the center of the leak; however, other factors may preclude this. In instances where readings of 100 percent gas are obtained in several bar holes, it may be necessary to use an ejector aerator to purge each bar hole. In no case should air ever be injected into a bar hole, as this could result in the gas being driven through the soil into
a structure. Remember when analyzing readings that there is a potential for multiple leaks. The locations and percentage of gas in air readings obtained with the combustible gas indicator shall be documented on the appropriate gas operating order. Indicate the approximate locations of the samples, and the corresponding gas-in-air percentage readings in relation to the involved structure or other physical landmarks.
Venting Underground Leakage
Underground leaks shall be vented to the atmosphere as soon as possible. Underground samples shall be taken at practical time intervals to determine the extent of migration during repairs and to determine when such concentrations have reached a safe level. If excavations cannot be left open, for example,
due to traffic, the excavation should be filled with a granular material such as gravel until the gas is completely vented. Gas Present in Sewer or Duct System
If gas is found to be migrating to or accumulating in sewer or other duct systems, the Avista First
Responder shall make a complete survey of the affected system to determine the area limits of the leakage. Buildings or structures served by the system or adjacent to it shall also be checked for the migration and/or accumulation of natural gas. Emergency procedures shall be followed to protect people and property in the event that gas is found to be migrating in sewer or duct systems. Manhole covers and
other lids should also be removed and the open manhole barricaded to aid in venting. Underground leaks shall be pinpointed and classified per the Leak Classification criteria noted in this Specification. Leaks classified Grade 1 shall be repaired immediately. Grade 2 and 3 leaks shall be
scheduled for repair per the judgment of trained, qualified field persons on the scene. In all cases, leakage that is found to be migrating to a building foundation, accumulating in an enclosed area or tunnel, or that may pose a hazard to the public or property shall be repaired immediately.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
16 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Gas Control Room Notification The Gas Control Room shall be notified at [phone] or via radio as to the conditions found and whether a construction crew or other assistance is needed to make permanent repairs. Remaining-on-the-Job
In all cases, the Avista First Responder shall remain on the job site until the situation is safe and poses no hazard to the public or until relieved by a supervisor or other trained and qualified gas employee. UNDERGROUND LEAK REPAIR
Leak Repair and Residual Gas Checks
After any leak is repaired it shall be checked for residual gas while the excavation is still open by a person qualified in Avista Side Leak Investigation. The perimeter of the leak area shall be bar holed and checked with a combustible gas indicator in percent gas mode to determine if repairs were adequate and if there is
any migration from a secondary leak. A minimum of four (4) bar hole readings shall be taken at equally spaced points at the perimeter of the excavation or from within the bell hole prior to backfill to fulfill this requirement. If readings indicate the presence of gas, the perimeter shall be expanded, and additional bar hole readings taken until the extent of the leak is found and documented down to less than 0.05 percent gas in
air. If the discovery of gas is determined to be a second leak, a new order shall be established by contacting the Avista Call Center by calling 800-227-9187. Bar hole locations shall be mapped as appropriate.
EXCEPTION: When a leak is found in a valve box and the leak is repaired by performing maintenance on the valve, a reading from a combustible gas indicator shall be taken near the bottom of the valve box after
the repair is made. If the reading is zero percent gas in air, bar holes are not required, and the reading shall be documented on the order. If the reading indicates the presence of gas, bar holes shall be taken around the perimeter of the leak area as described above.
Repairs to damaged service lines require additional leak survey actions. Refer to the “Service Line Leak
Survey” subsection below.
Whenever a pipeline is exposed, whether steel or PE, an Exposed Pipe Inspection Report form (Form N-2534) shall be completed. Further detail regarding the use of the Exposed Pipe Inspection Report form is
detailed in Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation. Pressure test information is required if a section of pipe is replaced. It can either be tested in the field or by using pretested pipe. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing.
When exposed, underground Dresser-style or other steel mechanical compression fittings shall be cut out
or canned (barreled). A Cathodic Protection Technician shall be contacted to verify that the fitting is not being used as an isolation point. Cutting out or barreling may inadvertently create a problem between
two separated cathodic protection systems so additional steps may be necessary before removing or barreling the fitting.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
17 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Pressure Testing Replaced Segments Pressure test information is required if a section of pipe is replaced. It can either be tested in the field or by using pretested pipe. Refer to Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing, for further information. Reinstating a Damaged Service Line
A service line that has been is broken, pulled, or damaged resulting in the interruption of gas supply to the customer shall be pressure tested from the break back to the meter location for the same duration and to the pressure required for a new service. See Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing, “Reinstating Service” for further information.
Service Line Leak Survey When a service line has undergone excavation damage (even without apparent leakage) by a third party excavation, a ppm survey or bar hole survey shall be performed from the point of the damage back to the
service tie-in point which may be where it branches off another service or if there is no branch then back at the main. (Broken tracer wires and nicked coatings do not require the leak survey to occur.)
Follow-up Inspections for Residual Gas
In the case of a repaired underground leak where residual gas remains below ground within 1-foot of a
building wall, the employee shall remain on scene to actively monitor and lower the degree of hazard until the gas concentration within 1 foot of the wall is <1 percent and falling as determined by 3 successive
reads, no sooner than 20 minutes apart. (Reference the GESH, Sections 2 and 4.) The employee shall find the perimeter of the readings by bar holing until less than 0.05 percent gas-in-air is detected.
In cases away from structures, where there is residual gas in the ground after a repair, regardless of the
grade of the leak, a follow-up inspection with a CGI shall be made as soon as practical, but in no case later than 30 days after the repair. The repair shall continue to be rechecked until a reading of less than
0.05 percent gas-in-air is obtained, and the leak repair order is closed.
If any residual gas exists, the employee shall find the perimeter of the readings by bar holing until less than 0.05 percent gas-in-air is detected, to assure a new leak source from outside the original site is not
occurring. If a new leak is discovered, this must be treated as a new investigation and must be documented separately on a new leak order. This will allow for proper documentation of the cause of
the new leak and for filling out an Exposed Pipe Inspection Report as applicable. Bar hole locations shall be mapped as appropriate.
Large amounts of gas that have saturated the ground may take additional time to completely vent.
Successive readings should indicate a consistent drop in gas-in-air concentrations over time. If a reading of less than 0.05 percent reading is not obtained after a reasonable time allowance for venting, the leak
repair shall be excavated and visually examined for defects, and the adjoining pipeline checked for additional leakage.
If a defect in the leak repair is found or if additional leakage is indicated, the leak shall be graded, and
repairs made.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
18 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Re-Classification of Leaks Leaks shall be re-inspected using the same criteria and guidelines used to classify leaks when they are first detected. A Grade 1 or 2 leak can only be downgraded once to a Grade 3 leak without a physical repair. After a leak has been downgraded once, the maximum repair time for that leak is 21 months from the date of the downgrade. (The downgrading of a Grade 1 leak classification to a Grade 2 or Grade 3
classification should only occur when the leak has been misclassified.) Maximum effort should be implemented to fix Grade 1 leaks when discovered. A temporary repair, however, may be authorized in cases where an immediate repair is not feasible. A Grade 1 leak that has had temporary repair action taken so that it is no longer hazardous may be left to fix when conditions allow if after three consecutive reads, 20 minutes apart, the reads demonstrate that the gas in air levels
are not rising to hazardous levels. A Grade 1 leak that has had temporary repair and is no longer hazardous, should not be left longer than one week in this state without the approval of the operations manager and the Manager of Gas Engineering. Combustible Gas Indicator readings in percent gas mode via bar hole shall be taken DAILY to ensure gas levels are staying non-hazardous until the final repair is complete. These leaks will remain classified as Grade 1 leaks.
Self-Audits Audits shall be performed as frequently as necessary, but in any case, at intervals not exceeding three years to determine the following as discussed in WAC 480-93-188(6). (These self-audits are required in
Washington and are a best management practice in other states.)
• That the leak survey schedule is commensurate with the requirements in the applicable State and Federal codes;
• That the survey program is effective and that a consistent evaluation of leaks is being made throughout the system;
• That required repairs and follow-ups are being made within the time limits specified;
• That leak repairs are effective; and
• That the records being kept are adequate and complete. Self-Audit Records
To align with the Distribution Integrity Management Program (DIMP), Leak Survey Self-Audit records shall be retained for 10 years.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
19 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

MAINTENANCE FREQUENCIES: Avista leak survey programs shall be performed according to the following schedules:
Type of Survey Frequency
Residential Areas 5 Year Survey (20 percent Survey) 20 percent of system each calendar
Non-Cathodically Protected Isolated Risers Twice each calendar year, not to exceed 7-1/2 months (Washington only)
Other Non-Cathodically Protected Steel Pipelines Twice each calendar year, not to exceed 7-1/2 months (Washington only)
Shorted Steel Casing then twice each calendar year not to
Transmission Lines
<30 percent SMYS Transmission Lines in Class 3 or 4 Location With No HCA’s Semi-annually as outlined in IMP Plan
Paving and Utility Construction Jobs
Annually (best practice)
High Press Pipelines Operating >=250 psig (Washington Only)
Lowering or Moving of Pipe =< 2” & < 60 psig No roping calculations Within 30 days of moving pipe (Washington Only)

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
20 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Type of Repair or Follow-Up Frequency
Grade 1 Leak Repair
Less than 30 days
Grade 2 and 2A Re-Evaluation
Grade 3 Leak Repair Continuous annual or survey monitoring
until repaired or re-classified
Grade 3 Re-Evaluation
Underground Leak Repair Follow-Up (regardless of the grade) Immediately after repair, and not later than 30 days after where residual gas is present
Self-Audit of Leak Survey Program Not to exceed 3 years. (Washington Only)

Recordkeeping Records and maps of leak surveys performed shall be retained for the life of the facilities. Each leak survey performed and/or leak discovered shall be recorded on an individually numbered leak survey report. The report shall be filled out as completely as possible and shall indicate the following
information: LEAK SURVEY FORMS: Special information required for leak surveys performed:
• Date of survey and a description of the area surveyed (include maps and any logs kept)
• Survey method (DP-IR, F.I., CGI, etc. including instrument number) and name of person(s)
performing the survey
• Results of the survey, including the number of services checked, the footages of mains surveyed, number of leaks found and locations of leaks, the leak grades as they were classified by the surveyor, as well as references to individual reported leaks and map reference numbers Special information required for leaks discovered:

• Address and complete location of the leakage (include drawing as necessary)
• Map reference number
• Time and date leak found
• Leak classification grade and percentage gas-in-air reading
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
21 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

• Leak data such as type of detector and instrument identification number, probable source of leakage, soil type, surface conditions, pipe size and type, vegetation damage, etc. Special information required for leaks repaired:
• Bar holing information, if required
• Leak detection instrument identification number and percent of gas in each bar hole
• Leak cause* (Refer to end of this specification for definitions of causes)
• Component leaking
• Part of system (main, service)
• Pipe size and material type
• Location
• Repair Date
• Exposed Piping Inspection Report
• Pressure test info (tested in the field or pretested pipe)
• Repair materials
• Post-repair perimeter of excavation readings with type of approved leak detection instrument and ID number. Leak repair work orders shall be retained with the leak survey report and the report shall be noted as to the disposition of the repairs and/or follow-ups. (When exposing pipe, an Exposed Piping Inspection Report Form (Form N-2534) shall be completed. Reference Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation, for further guidance.) Special information required for rechecks:
• Date of the recheck.
• Percentage gas-in-air readings found for each bar hole location.
• Type of combustible gas indicator used and ID number. o If additional readings of gas are found, additional follow up and documentation is required until the residual gas is cleared. Closing Leak Reports
A leak report shall be considered closed when one or more of the following conditions have been established:
• The cause of the leak report has been corrected by the completion of necessary repairs, or
• Where evidence indicates that materials other than natural gas caused the leak report, and this information has been directed to the appropriate parties for action, or
• When required, a follow-up inspection has been conducted which shows the absence of natural gas Blowing Gas and Odor Calls For information on recording the appropriate information on blowing gas and odor calls refer to the Gas Emergency and Service Handbook, Section 2.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
22 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Leak Incident Reporting When an individual makes a determination that a leak condition indicates a hazardous or potentially hazardous situation, the individual shall immediately notify the Call Center by calling 800-227-9187 and request assistance as needed. In the case of major construction damage or any situation that is indicated as reportable in GESH Section 13, Emergency Planning, Training and Incident Notification, the
Gas Controller shall immediately notify the following persons or departments:
• Emergency services (as necessary)
• Appropriate crews or servicemen to control the situation and effect repairs
• Claims Department
• On-call construction supervisor
• On-call Gas Engineer
• Applicable operations manager
• Corporate Communications The On-Call Gas Engineer shall evaluate the situation and determine if a telephonic report to the appropriate agency is required and shall make the report within the specified time limits. Field employees and the Gas Control Room shall provide the necessary information to complete the required reports as soon as such information is known. Reports and related information shall be recorded on the appropriate forms and retained in Gas Engineering. In addition, written follow-up reports shall be completed by the On-Call Gas Engineer and forwarded to the appropriate agency within the specified time limits. LEAK FAILURE CAUSE DEFINITIONS The following are definitions and examples for leak failure causes: CORROSION: Leak resulting from a hole in the pipe or other component that galvanic, bacterial, chemical, stray current, or other corrosive action causes (corrosion is not limited to a hole in the pipe).
• Pitting
• Dog urine
• Leaks from components that broke due to corrosion such as bolts NATURAL FORCES: Leaks not attributable to humans such as:
• Earth movements - earthquakes, landslides, subsidence
• Lightning
• Heavy rains/floods - washouts, flotation, mudslide, scouring
• Temperature - frost heave, frozen components, snow related (Refer to snow removal under “other outside force damage”)
• High winds or similar natural causes
• Leaks attributable to animals (gophers, moles, etc.) EXCAVATION: Leak resulting from excavation damage caused by:
• Earth moving or other equipment, tools, or vehicles
• Operator's personnel or contractor
• People not associated with the operator
• Unknown previous damage by excavators such as backhoe damage, stakes, ground rods, etc.
• Ground settlement due to excavation disturbance of original compacted backfill OTHER OUTSIDE FORCE DAMAGE: Include leaks attributed to humans:
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
23 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

• Fire or explosion
• Deliberate or willful acts, such as vandalism
• Vehicular or other machinery (i.e. lawn mower) damage to aboveground facilities
• Animals chained to meter set assembly (MSA)
• Snow removal (shovel, plowing, roof clearing)
• Electrical arcing MATERIAL*:
Material - include leaks resulting from a defect in the pipe material or component due to faulty manufacturing procedures.
• Any type of material failure (i.e. cracks/breaks) in plastic pipe or the body of plastic fittings (Aldyl A service tee crack in tower, cracked service tee caps, rock impingement)
• Failure in steel pipe or the body of steel fittings (not including corrosion)
• Failure in longitudinal weld or seam
• Deterioration of original sound material
• Pipe failure due to bending stress
*Any leak marked as a material failure shall also have a Gas Material Failure Report filled out and sent to the Gas Materials Specialist in Gas Engineering along with the failed component per
Specification 4.11, Continuing Surveillance. WELDS/JOINTS - This includes leaks due to:
• Faulty wrinkle bends
• Faulty field welds
• Plastic joints
• Mechanical fittings (Refer to further guidance at end of this section for Hazardous Mechanical Fitting Failures)
• Underground leaks on threaded fittings that cannot be tightened
EQUIPMENT: Leaks resulting from:
• Failure or malfunction of fittings and equipment with internal components
o Malfunction of regulator/relief equipment (weeping regulators /relieving regulators/debris in regulators), remote control valves, instrumentation
o Seal failures on gaskets, O-rings, seal/pump packing, or similar leaks (fittings with O-rings in caps)
• Stripped or cracked threads on nipples, valves, or other threaded fittings
• ERT degradation
WAC 480-93-200 (6):a material or construction defect has resulted in an incident or hazardous condition, Avista must supply the WUTC a copy of the failure analysis report within 5 days of receiving it.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
24 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

OPERATION: Leaks resulting from:
• Inadequate procedures or safety practices, or
• Failure to follow correct procedures, or other operator error o Stab fittings not chamfered correctly or inadequate stab depth
o Debris found in cap of fitting
• MSA settlement failures
• Damage sustained in transportation to the construction or fabrication site
• Failure of original sound material from force applied during construction that caused a:
o Dent o Gouge
o Other defect that eventually resulted in a leak LOOSE / NEEDS GREASE: Leaks fixed by:
• Tightening of fitting (MSA fittings, service tee caps, stopper fitting caps)
• Applying new pipe dope
• Lubrication such as valves both underground and aboveground. OTHER: Leaks resulting from any other cause, such as exceeding the service life, not attributable to any of the above causes or inability to determine the cause of the leak. If you are unsure how to categorize the cause of the leak, contact the Integrity Management Program Manager for assistance.
Hazardous Mechanical Fitting Failures
Mechanical fittings that result in a hazardous leak (Grade 1) are reportable to PHMSA, regardless of the leak failure cause including excavation damage. This also includes leaks that were originally graded as Grade 1 and downgraded prior to repairs being conducted. Mechanical Fitting (Definition): Fittings that consist of specifically designed components including elastomer seals, O-rings, or gaskets and a gripping device to affect pressure sealing and/or pull-out resistance capabilities such as stab type, nut follower, and bolted type mechanical fittings. This applies to both steel and plastic fittings. Some examples of mechanical fittings are as follows:
• Bolt-on service tees
• Bolt-on service tees with stab outlet or with a compression nut
• Steel welded service tees with compression outlet (if leak was in the compression outlet.
• Dresser couplings
• Service head adapters
• Couplings, tees, elbows, three-ways, caps and stop-n-go fittings with stab connections
• Couplings, tees, elbows, three-ways, and caps with compression connections to include nut.
• Repair clamps
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 20
25 OF 25 SPEC. 5.11

Following is the information that PHMSA requires to be reported for every hazardous mechanical fitting failure:
• State where failure occurred (i.e., Washington, Idaho, etc.)
• Date of Failure
• Type of fitting involved (i.e., stab, nut follower, bolted, other)
• Type of mechanical fitting (i.e., service tee, main tee, tapping tee, transition fitting, coupling, riser, adapter, valve sleeve, end cap, other)
• Leak Location (i.e., aboveground, below ground, inside, outside, main-to-main, main-to service, service-to service, meter set)
• Year installed
• Year manufactured
• Manufacturer
• Part Number / Model Number
• Lot Number
• Other attributes
• Fitting Material (i.e., steel, plastic, steel/plastic combination, brass, other)
• Two Materials Being Joined (First pipe size / material and second pipe size and material)
• Leak failure cause
• Additional Leak Details (i.e., leaked through seal, leaked through body, pulled out, etc.)
Until further notice, cut out the fitting and send it to the Gas Materials Specialist (Dan Wisdom) in Gas Engineering (MSC-6). If you are unable to cut out or send in the component, contact Dan Wisdom. Make
sure to provide the appropriate service order number or work order number as applicable for the leak order the fitting represents.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
1 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

5.12 REGULATOR AND RELIEF INSPECTION SCOPE: To establish an inspection and maintenance program for Avista’s gas service regulators, district regulator stations, gate stations, and farm tap regulator stations. Also covered in this specification is inspection
and maintenance on associated relief valves, safety shutoffs, monitors, and permanent blow down facilities (overpressure protective devices). REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.195, §192.197, §192.199, §192.201, §192.203, §192.619, §192.739, §192.741, §192.743
WAC 480-93-130, 480-93-140, 480-93-200 OTHER REFERENCES: National Electric Code (NEC), Article 500 for Hazardous (classified) locations
CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 2.23, Regulator Design Spec. 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings
Spec. 2.25, Telemetry Design Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe Spec. 5.13, Valve Maintenance
General
The information and procedures contained in this specification shall constitute the regulator and relief inspection and maintenance program for Avista. Only qualified, properly trained employees shall perform inspections and maintenance on company pressure regulating and pressure safety systems.
Before performing maintenance or construction activities at a gate station, regulator station, meter set, or other facility known to have telemetry, Gas Control must be called to notify them of the work. This will
keep false alarm and alert notifications from being distributed. When work is complete, Gas Control must be called (509-495-4859 or via radio) again to ensure alarms and alerts have cleared before leaving the site.
Pressures Precaution When performing maintenance that involves any regulator, regulating station, meter set, or overpressure protective device, the inlet and outlet pressures shall be continuously monitored on site using accurate
pressure gauges if the device configuration allows this. If the device is not configured to allow on site monitoring, an alternate nearby location may be used, and Gas Engineering shall be contacted regarding
revising the existing configuration to allow future on site monitoring. Care shall be taken when performing operations such as bypasses and stop-offs, so as not to allow the downstream or supply pressure to drop below normal operating limits. Any loss of pressure that may have extinguished pilots or that may have affected the normal operation of the customer’s gas equipment shall be treated as an outage and the
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
2 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

procedures followed as outlined in the GESH, Section 5, Emergency Shutdown and Restoration of Service. Care shall also be taken not to allow the operating pressure to exceed the MAOP plus allowable buildup (or MOP) of the associated system. If it is determined that a system has exceeded the MAOP (or MOP), the employee shall immediately attempt to correct the situation and normalize the pressure. Downstream
pressure checks shall be initiated to verify if any damage was caused by the overpressurization of the system. Gas Engineering shall be notified if either of the above-mentioned situations occurs as this may necessitate notification of the regulatory agencies. SERVICE REGULATORS:
General Maintenance of all Service Pressures Service regulators normally reduce distribution pressure to a pressure that is specified as the delivery pressure or utilization pressure. Utilization pressure for most domestic customers in Avista’s gas system
is 7–inches WC (1/4 psig). Utilization pressure for some domestic, commercial, and industrial customers may be 7–inches WC, 2 psig, 5 psig, or line pressure depending on load and other factors. Service regulators are normally inspected or tested under the following circumstances:
• When a complaint is received from a customer regarding a suspected pressure problem, a noisy meter set, odors that may be resulting from a relieving regulator, a damaged meter set, or other
related mechanical problems; or
• When a field employee notices a functional problem during the normal course of operations or when a related condition is made known by another employee. This includes problems apparent during the course of performing service orders, turn-ons, relights, new meter installations and inspections, etc.; or
• When meters and/or regulators are changed out or inspected under a company change out program (planned meter changes, recalls, retrofits, etc.).
The following should be checked by the field employee when performing an inspection on a service
regulator:
• The general physical condition of the meter set should be checked. Attention should be paid to rust, meter sets in a bind due to settling, need for meter protection, tamper seals in place, index readable, etc.
• The regulator and/or relief vents should be clear and free from obstruction, the vent screen should be in place, and the vents should be oriented in a direction that will not allow water to enter. In the winter, care should be taken to keep ice and snow from enveloping the regulator vent as the vent may be frozen over and result in pressure problems.
• Flow and lockup pressure settings shall be checked and adjusted when installed and as necessary thereafter using a water manometer, or a pressure gauge that is known to be accurate.
• The service regulator has overpressure protection.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
3 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

The field employee shall correct any abnormal conditions found on incidental inspections. The appropriate records should be noted if the meter set is under a maintenance program to avoid duplication of efforts. Maintenance of Elevated Service Pressure Accounts
Elevated service pressure accounts not considered “industrial” shall be maintained as follows: 1. Two psig metering pressure meter sets (residential and commercial) shall have the set pressure checked one time 180 days after initial installation and then as noted under “General Maintenance of All Service Pressures” in this specification.
The filter/strainer should be checked if the pressure requires adjustment at the 180-day check.
2. Five psig metering pressure sets that are not industrial meter sets shall have the pressure checked one time 180 days after initial installation and then as noted under “General
Maintenance of All Service Pressure” in this specification. The filter/strainer should be checked if the pressure requires adjustment at the 180-day check.
In addition, these 5 psig metering pressure meter sets shall be checked during the regular testing cycle of
diaphragm meters sized AL1400 and above, rotaries, and turbines.
At the time the meter is due for periodic testing per testing requirements in Specification 2.22, Meter Design, and the meter is either tested or changed out, maintenance should be conducted on the meter
set per the requirements for “General Station Inspection” and “Annual Regulator Station Maintenance,” as applicable.
180-Day Inspection Criteria
New meter sets metering at greater than 7-inches WC and all rotary meter sets (regardless of metering
pressure), require a one-time inspection at approximately 180 days of operation (no sooner than 150 days). Diaphragm meters will be inspected by Gas Service Persons; rotary meters will be inspected by
the Gas Meter Shop. The following shall be verified and remediated as appropriate during the 180-day inspection:

• Flow and lockup pressure is in accordance with the customer billing code and applicable pressure.
• Verify meter configuration matches CC&B (Billing System) Correction Code
• Verify AMR device is operating
• Verify AMR device reading is tracking with CC&B (Billing System) read
• Check and adjust flow and lockup pressure as necessary
• Check overall condition (labeling, settling, paint, etc.)
• Check strainer as necessary. Clean strainer if necessary.
• For rotary meters, complete the initial differential test.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
4 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

In some cases, the customer piping may not be connected, or the meter may not have been used at the 180-day check. In this situation, an additional order shall be requested for a subsequent 180-day check to be completed.
Maintenance of Industrial Meter Sets
A meter set that meets any of the following conditions is considered an industrial set: 1) A set metering at pressures above 5 psig (Note: metering pressure, not delivery pressure) 2) A rotary meter size 16M or larger regardless of metering pressure 3) A turbine meter 4) Any set with an hourly design load equal to or above 14,600,000 BTU/Hr.
Elevated service pressure accounts considered “industrial” shall be maintained per the requirements under “General Station Inspection” and “Annual Regulator Station Maintenance” as described within this specification.
REGULATOR STATIONS AND ELEVATED PRESSURE METER SETS:
District regulator stations are pressure reducing stations that provide service to 3 or more service points. Their function is to reduce high pressure distribution or transmission pressure to distribution pressure. Master meter stations and customer bypass stations are treated like district regulator stations and are therefore subject to the same maintenance frequencies as those facilities.
Farm Taps A Farm Tap (sometimes referred to as a Single Service Farm Tap – SSFT) is a pressure regulating station that controls pressure to a service line. Pressures will normally be reduced from pressures over 60 psig down to an intermediate pressure that is commensurate with the load (typically 25 - 45 psig). Normally, an overpressure protection device is provided by a relief valve or safety shutoff. A Farm Tap
style pressure regulating station is considered a district regulator station if it serves downstream main piping and must be maintained as such. Farm Taps with an upstream source of gas being fed from a transmission line (Interstate or Avista) without other pressure regulation upstream shall be maintained as a district regulator station once every three years not to exceed every 39 months. Refer to Specification 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables &
Drawings for an example drawing of a Farm Tap regulator station design.
District Regulator Stations A District Regulator Station is a pressure regulating station that controls pressure to high-pressure or low-pressure distribution main. (It does not include pressure regulation whose sole function is to control pressure to a manifold serving multiple customers). District Regulator Stations vary in design depending on the load demands and size of the system, physical location, construction limitations, availability of parts, etc. These stations will typically reduce
high pressure gas (over 60 psig) and they will normally use either a relief valve or a monitor valve for overpressure protection. Refer to Specification 2.24, Meter & Regulator Tables & Drawings for examples of drawings of typical regulator station designs.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
5 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

District Regulator Station Relief Capacity Review Gas Engineering is responsible for reviewing district regulator stations which utilize relief valves as the overpressure protection device to assure that the relief valve has adequate relief capacity (refer to Specification 2.23, Regulator Design). If the relief does not have adequate capacity based upon the calculation, it shall be replaced, or restrictors installed on the regulator(s) based on the recommendation
of Gas Engineering. System deficiencies that could potentially result in the overpressure of the downstream system should be modified within 30-days. Other deficiencies that do not pose an immediate threat to system operation should be modified during annual regulator station maintenance or prior to the end of the calendar year, whichever occurs first. This review must be conducted once every calendar year, not to exceed 15 months. Relief capacity review records shall be kept for minimum of 5 years.
The relief capacity calculations must be compared to the rated or experimentally determined relieving capacity of each device for the conditions under which it operates. After the initial calculations are made / reviewed, subsequent calculations do not need to be performed if the annual review documents the fact
that parameters have not changed to cause the previous relief capacity calculations to no longer be valid.
Gate Station Regulator and Relief Set Point Review At each gate station where the interstate pipeline is responsible for pressure reduction, Gas Engineering is responsible for gathering the current regulator and relief valve set point information. Gas Engineering
shall review set points for regulators (worker and monitor) and relief valves to ensure an appropriate delivery pressure and overpressure protection. Set points must not exceed the MAOP (+10 percent) of
the downstream Avista facilities. If set points exceed MAOP (+10 percent), Gas Engineering shall notify the respective interstate company to have the set points revised. This review must be conducted once
every calendar year, not to exceed 15 months.
Regulator Station Numbering
Refer to Specification 2.23, Metering and Regulation, “Regulator Station Numbering, “for guidance on numbering of regulator stations.
General Station Inspection
A station inspection should be performed each time a district regulator station, elevated pressure meter
set, or farm tap is visited. (If bypassing of the station is required, the Station Bypassing Procedure within this specification should be followed.) The field employee should note the following and take appropriate
action to resolve any deficiencies:
• The general condition of the station. It should be free of debris and weeds. Access to the station should not be impaired, and all station entry doors, locks, and gates shall operate freely. It shall be verified that the station is properly barricaded or protected from damage. Necessary warning signs and station identification signs shall be in place and in good condition. In addition, the signs shall have the correct phone number and other pertinent information and be properly mounted.
• Ventilating equipment installed in station buildings or vaults should be checked for proper operation. Electrically operated ventilating equipment shall not be operated until it is determined that it conforms to the applicable requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), Article 500 for Hazardous (classified) locations. A check should be done for accumulations that may prevent proper venting to atmosphere.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
6 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

• In cases where the station pressure is being adjusted or verified, the inlet and outlet flow pressures shall be checked with a pressure gauge known to be in calibration.
• The relief (or safety shutoff) shall be checked to verify that the shutoff valve isolating it from the system is locked in the open position. The vent stack cap on the relief should also be checked for free operation.
• Station valves and locking devices shall be checked to ascertain that they are functioning, and that the valves are locked, or handles removed to prevent tampering, and that they are in the
correct position. (Both above and below ground station valves with the exception of inlet and outlet emergency valves already being maintained shall be serviced at this time.)

• The station should be leak tested if a gas odor is present.
• Cathodic protection wires and fittings shall be checked and repaired as necessary.
• Station equipment that is abandoned or not in use shall be removed so as not to create a hazard.

• As the last step before exiting a station, a visual inspection shall be performed to verify all equipment and valves are in the correct operating positions before locking devices are installed. Conditions found that are not up to operating standards should either be corrected upon discovery or scheduled for repair as soon as possible. Hazardous conditions shall be corrected immediately. Farm Taps and HP Services Farm Taps (SSFTs) and High Pressure Services are visited every three years (not to exceed 39 months) for an Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection. Additionally, a “General Station Inspection” as noted above shall be performed. A flow and lockup test may be performed if the site is appropriately configured; however, this action is not required. See “Farm Taps” subsection in this Specification for an exception to these stated maintenance requirements for farm taps with an upstream source of gas being fed from a transmission line. ANNUAL REGULATOR STATION MAINTENANCE
In addition to the general station maintenance items listed above, the district regulator stations shall receive the following attention under the annual regulator station inspection. (Also, if bypassing of the station is required, the Station Bypassing Procedure within this specification should be followed.) The
Manufacturer’s Operating Instructions shall be consulted as applicable. Maintenance Procedure The station outlet flow pressure as found and as left at the station shall be checked and recorded on the Regulator Station Inspection and Maintenance Record (form N-2527). If the regulator is pulsating or
otherwise acting abnormally, it should be readjusted or disassembled and inspected internally. The outlet station pressure shall be set to the value shown on the regulator inspection record. A suitable, accurate pressure gauge shall be used for all pressure checks. MAOP's and MOP's may differ from one district regulator station to another, so it is important to check the records before performing maintenance or setting pressures on a station.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
7 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

• The station lockup pressure shall be verified, if readily allowed by existing station design, and noted on the inspection record.
• If the regulator is disassembled, the orifice, seat, diaphragm, or boot shall be inspected and replaced as necessary.
• Pilot filters should be cleaned or replaced as necessary. Pilot loading lines shall be inspected for debris or flaking and cleaned as needed.
• Regulator and pilot vents shall be leak tested. Leakage usually indicates a defective diaphragm or other malfunction. The regulator or pilot shall be repaired or replaced as necessary. Replace cracked or broken regulator or pilot vent caps. Check to make sure that regulator vents are positioned in the downward position or has a vent elbow installed. Check to make sure any vent screens are in place and are not damaged.
• Replace damaged gaskets or O-ring seals on regulator or pilot as necessary.
• Replace items on a regulator or pilot if subject to manufacturer’s recall or update.

• Check the condition of the downstream sensing or control lines. Assure control lines are not damaged or bent. Check the operation of any line valves. Repair or replace as needed.
• The responsiveness of the regulator shall be verified by checking stroke or by placing the regulator back into service and observing downstream pressure.
• Flange bolts shall be checked to make sure that they extend fully through the nuts and that no flange bolts are missing. If a flange bolt-hole is threaded and no nut is required, make sure that the bolts are long enough to thread through both flanges.
• The station shall be visually inspected for signs of atmospheric corrosion (rusting or pitting). Special care should be taken to inspect for pitting around fittings that could result in a failure. Adjustable pipe supports shall be repositioned and the pipe surface inspected for the evidence of corrosion. Non-adjustable pipe supports should be visually inspected at the pipe interface for any evidence of corrosion.
• Insulating material should be in place and in good condition between the carrier pipe and the support. Risers in the station shall be inspected to ensure the coating is appropriate for above ground installation and is above the soil-to-air interface and not disbonded. Above ground wax tape is the preferred coating for steel risers at the soil-to-air interface. X-Tru coating shall not be
used for new installations but may be left in the field on existing stations if the coating is not cracked or degraded and covered with a well bonded gray enamel paint. Cracked or degrading X-Tru coating must be repaired with above ground wax tape. In addition to station piping, supporting members shall be inspected for corrosion and/or damage. If there is evidence of significant corrosion per Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe, contact Gas Engineering.
Information pertaining to the inspection of the regulator shall be recorded on the appropriate regulator station inspection and maintenance record.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
8 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

Maintenance of Overpressure Protection Devices Overpressure protection devices (including relief valves, monitor regulators, and safety shutoff valves) shall be inspected and tested once each calendar year. Overpressure protection devices shall be inspected to ensure the following:
• They are in good mechanical condition.
• They have a vent stack that is not restricted and is positioned away from sources of ignition. Vent caps and screens shall be checked for obstructions, for proper operation, and to determine that the screens are intact. Replace or repair any defects.
• They are set to function at the correct pressure by using an accurate test gauge. The regulator inspection and maintenance record shall be consulted to determine the relief maximum set point
as specified by Gas Engineering. In some cases, the relief set point may be less than the MAOP due to operating restrictions.
• They are properly installed and protected from dirt, liquids, and other conditions that might affect proper operation.
• Sensing lines, control lines, filters, restrictors, etc. on relief valves have been inspected and repaired as necessary.
Relief and Safety Bottled nitrogen or bottled CNG should be used when possible to pressurize and test relief and safety shutoff valves. This procedure avoids the unnecessary release of natural gas into the atmosphere and is also safer than allowing full relief of natural gas at the station. (Refer to the Nitrogen or CNG Relief Testing Procedure within this specification). Precautions should be taken to isolate the relief or safety shutoff valve from the system before testing to avoid overpressurization, or contamination of the downstream system with nitrogen. If the relief or safety shutoff does not operate within the specified parameters (maximum set point), it shall be adjusted to conform to the required set point. If adjustment does not provide the desired results, then the relief or safety shutoff must be repaired or replaced.
Monitor Testing Monitor regulators shall be isolated from the system and operated in order to confirm that they will control pressure at the proper set point and that they will lockup. Any deviation from normal operation shall be corrected by repair or replacement. Service monitor regulators according to the guidelines for "Regulator Maintenance" or according to procedures for "Regulator and Relief Overhaul". Strainer/Filter Inspection
Station filters or strainers should be either visually inspected or tested by differential flow test. They should be cleaned or replaced as necessary per manufacturer’s instructions.
Station Valves
Valves shall be checked for proper operation and lubricated as necessary per Specification 5.13, Valve Maintenance.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
9 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

Maintenance of Blow Down Facilities Blow down facilities located on transmission pipelines, at regulator stations or at gate station facilities shall be inspected once each calendar year, not to exceed 15 months. Valves on blow down facilities shall be checked for proper operation and lubrication as necessary per Section 5.13, Valve Maintenance. Purge any excess pressure that may exist between the normally-closed blow down valve and the stack
closure fitting as necessary prior to the start of and at completion of maintenance.
Changes in Station Design Modifications to existing regulator station designs must be approved by Gas Engineering.
Maintenance of Regulator Stations Operating on Permanent Bypass Annual regulator station maintenance is not required on stations currently operating on permanent bypass. These stations shall be visited every 3 years (not to exceed 39 months) for an Atmospheric
Corrosion Patrol. If a station is to be reinstated from permanent bypass the regulator station shall receive the inspection and maintenance items listed under “Annual Regulator Station Maintenance” prior to being
placed back into service in the field. Information pertaining to the inspection of the station shall be recorded on the appropriate Regulator Station Inspection and Maintenance Record. Portable Regulator Station Maintenance
A portable regulator station shall receive the inspection and maintenance items listed under “Annual
Regulator Station Maintenance” every time the station is placed into service in the field. There is not an additional requirement to conduct inspection and maintenance on portable regulator stations annually not to exceed 15 months. Information pertaining to the inspection of the station shall be recorded on the appropriate Regulator Station Inspection and Maintenance Record. Portable CNG Trailer Maintenance
Portable CNG trailers shall receive the inspection and maintenance items listed under “Annual Regulator Station Maintenance” once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. Information pertaining to the inspection of CNG trailers will be recorded on the appropriate Regulator Station / Industrial Meter Inspection and Maintenance Record form (N-2527). The Fleet Department is responsible for inspecting and maintaining the CNG tanks, CNG tank valves, and all vehicle related items.
In addition to annual maintenance, CNG trailers should be inspected before each use to ensure the regulators are set appropriately and that the trailer is functioning safely. A CNG Trailer Regulator Inspection form (N-2711) should be filled out each time the trailer is placed into service. A single form
should be kept with each trailer, so all users of the trailer are filling out the same form. The Pressure Controlmen responsible for performing annual maintenance on the trailer should replace the form annually and keep the form in case the document is asked for during an audit.
Regulator Stations – Special Inspections
If there are indications of abnormally high or abnormally low pressures in a system, regulators and applicable auxiliary equipment within the regulator station must be inspected and necessary measures employed to correct the unsatisfactory operating condition.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
10 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

5 YEAR OVERHAUL – FLEXIBLE ELEMENT & BOOT TYPE REGULATORS AND RELIEF VALVES: Maintenance Procedures
In addition to the annual station maintenance and portable regulator station maintenance, every 5 years each flexible element or boot type regulator (to include portable regulator stations as applicable) shall include the following internal inspection:
• Flexible elements or boots shall be visually checked for cracks, wear, etc., and replaced as necessary.

• Gaskets, O-rings, discs, seals, etc. should be replaced as necessary. The overhaul procedure may be performed in the field or in the shop. It may prove to be convenient to have the regulator or relief device overhauled in the shop and have it ready so that it may simply be exchanged in the field. 10 YEAR OVERHAUL – DIAPHRAGM TYPE REGULATORS, RELIEF VALVES & PILOTS: Maintenance Procedures
In addition to the annual station maintenance and portable regulator station maintenance, every 10 years
each diaphragm type regulator and pilot (to include portable regulator stations as applicable) shall include the following internal inspection:
• Diaphragms shall be visually checked for cracks, wear, etc., and replaced as necessary.
• Orifices and seats shall be visually inspected for scoring, pitting or other damage and replaced as necessary.
• Pilot filters shall be replaced.
• The pilot valve and seat shall be inspected for wear and repaired per manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Gaskets, O-rings, discs, seals, etc. should be replaced as necessary. The overhaul procedure may be performed in the field or in the shop. It may prove to be convenient to have the regulator or relief device overhauled in the shop and have it ready so that it may simply be
exchanged in the field.
Exclusion: Small diaphragm type regulators and relief valves used in farm tap regulator stations or meter sets would not need to be overhauled unless the regulator or relief valve does not function properly during the general station inspection or annual regulator station inspection. However, it may prove more convenient to replace the regulator or relief valve rather than to perform the internal overhaul in the field.
GATE STATIONS: Avista-owned facilities in gate stations shall be serviced under the same annual maintenance schedule as district regulator stations. Maintenance procedures shall be the same for the station, pressure regulators, and overpressure protective devices.
Field employees performing maintenance on gate stations shall be properly trained on such maintenance, and shall be familiar with the layout of the station, including the locations of all shutoff valves, feeds, odorizers, charts, telemetry devices, etc. Consideration should be given to notifying Gas Supply and/or
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
11 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

the System Operator, as well as the transmission pipeline supplier when maintenance is to be performed at gate stations.
Chart Recorders and Telemetry
When a mechanical chart recorder is used at a district regulator station, it should be inspected on a
monthly basis. The chart should be changed at this time and the pens should be checked and changed as necessary. The downstream operating pressure should also be checked with a calibrated pressure gauge and cross checked against the chart reading. If any discrepancy is detected, the chart recorder should be repaired or replaced. If a chart recorder is being utilized, it shall also be inspected during the annual regulator station inspection and maintenance.
Inspections and calibrations on telemetry devices and electronic pressure recorders at gate stations and multi-fed distribution systems shall be performed once each calendar year to verify high- and low-pressure alarms are functioning properly. This can be accomplished by checking information relayed to the System Operator or Gas Supply with actual pressures at the gate station or telemetry location.
Problems with telemetry equipment shall be referred to the appropriate department for repair as soon as they are detected. If the telemetry system is not functioning properly, a pressure recorder should be set
at the same location site to validate functionality of the equipment or if the telemetry system is down for repair for an extended length of time. Refer to Specification 2.25, Telemetry Design for additional information on the design and installation of telemetry devices. Company field personnel shall respond to all alarms generated by telemetry equipment that may indicate a potential safety problem. If there are indications of abnormally high or low pressure, the regulator and
the auxiliary equipment must be inspected, and the necessary measures employed to correct any unsatisfactory operating conditions.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
12 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

MAINTENANCE FREQUENCIES: Avista’s gas distribution regulator stations and gate stations shall be inspected and maintained according to the following schedule:
District Regulator Station
Gate Stations
Single Service Farm Taps (AC and General Inspection at minimum) Once every 3 years (Not to exceed 39 months)
Portable CNG Trailers
Portable Regulator Stations
Maintenance shall be based on the anniversary date established and required maintenance shall be completed before expiration of the grace period. On existing stations, the last date serviced
establishes the anniversary date. Recordkeeping
At Avista, maintenance performed on district regulator stations, gate stations, and farm taps shall be recorded on the appropriate Regulator Station Inspection and Maintenance Record (form N-2527)
(electronic or paper) and retained for the life of the facility. Relief Capacity Review records shall be kept for a minimum of 5 years.
When identifying regulators on the Inspection form, use the following identification sequence for the various configurations shown:
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
13 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
14 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

PROCEDURE FOR REGULATOR STATION AND METER SET BYPASSING: The following procedure should be adhered to when placing regulator stations and meter sets that have a non-regulated, hard-piped bypass installed. Care shall be exercised during all phases of the bypass operation in order to ensure that the system pressure is adequately maintained. Gas Supply, as well as
the applicable pipeline transportation company, shall be advised whenever a gate station is put on bypass. (NOTE: The following procedures are applicable only to regulator stations with fixed bypasses.) If utilizing this procedure for low pressure situations (cold weather actions), skip steps #5, #7, #8, and #12. These steps are used to take the regulators out of service for maintenance purposes. 1. Make sure that necessary tools, parts, and safety equipment are available at the job site before
proceeding with the bypass procedure. 2. Take an accurate upstream pressure reading. It is not necessary to continuously monitor the upstream pressure during the bypass operation. 3. Install an accurate pressure gauge on the downstream side of the station. Note the outlet pressure. Leave this gauge in place during the entire bypassing operation. 4. Unlock all station valves. If required by design, install temporary soft bypass hose. Test valves
by partially operating them. 5. Crack open the station bypass valve. Close the downstream station valve, and then check the downstream pressure. It may be necessary to also close the sensing line valve to achieve lockup, depending on station design. Modulate the bypass valve as required to maintain system
pressure. Use caution not to open the bypass valve too much as you may run the risk of overpressuring the system.
6. Close the upstream station valve to complete the isolation of the regulator(s). The station is now on bypass. 7. Continue to note the downstream pressure readings. Adjust bypass valve to maintain but not exceed downstream system pressure.
8. Blow down isolated section to atmosphere and perform station maintenance as required. 9. To put regulator(s) back into operation, start by opening the upstream station valve slowly until it
fully pressurizes the regulator and loads the pilot (if applicable). Regulator adjustment screw should be backed off before placing regulator back into operation to avoid possible
overpressuring of downstream prior to final pressure adjustments. 10. Open the downstream valve slowly.
11. If applicable, open the control line slowly. The regulator should now begin to control pressure. 12. Close the bypass valve. The station is now off bypass. Remove temporary soft bypass if one
was used. Cap and plug all appropriate valves and fittings. 13. Adjust the regulator(s) to the proper set point(s) while observing the downstream pressure gauge.
Allow sufficient time for pressures to equalize while making adjustments. Tighten locking nuts in place when done.
14. Check all valves used during operation for leakage. Adjust or lubricate as necessary. Double check the positions of all valves and locks are in place.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 17
15 OF 15 SPEC. 5.12

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING RELIEF VALVES WITH NITROGEN OR BOTTLED CNG: This procedure is suggested for use in testing the performance of relief valves in the field. It is recognized that this procedure will not be applicable in all cases due to difference in relief and regulator design. The following procedure does, however, provide for pressurization and testing of certain relief valves without the possibility of overpressuring the downstream pipe.
1. Install an accurate pressure gauge on the downstream side of the station to monitor system pressure while the relief is shut down. 2. Temporarily isolate the relief from the system by unlocking and closing the manual relief isolation valve. 3. Proceed with the testing and pressure setting of the relief, as found. Should it be necessary to
perform maintenance on the relief valve de-pressurize the relief valve and piping prior to proceeding with the necessary repair. 4. Install a field fabricated device into a port that will pressurize the appropriate section of the relief valve. The device should consist of a pressure gauge of range appropriate to the relief setting, a
section of pipe nipple that will allow it to be screwed into the body of the relief, and a valve rated for the pressure being used. It is also convenient to install a quick connect fitting on one end so
as to facilitate easy connection. 5. Make sure that the control valve on the device is in the "off" position. Connect the device with a hose (rated for the appropriate pressures) to a supply tank of nitrogen. The supply tank should have its regulator set at a pressure that will allow the relief to be tested fully.
6. Slowly turn on the valve on the supply tank until the hose is pressurized. 7. Slowly open the control valve on the device to begin pressurizing the relief. Observe the
pressure gauge while gradually increasing pressure with the control valve (throttling). Note the pressure at which the relief opens and make adjustments as necessary. Repeat the
pressurization process several times to eliminate the possibility of the relief sticking. 8. Adjust the relief set point as specified by Gas Engineering on the appropriate records.
9. When the proper setting is achieved, turn off the supply valve on the nitrogen bottle and the control valve on the device. Disconnect the hose and de-pressurize the relief.
10. Remove the relief testing device from the relief and re-install the fitting or plug removed to install the device.
11. Open the manual relief isolation valve to put the relief back in service. 12. Lock valve in open position.
In some instances, such as in the case of smaller sized relief valves, the relief valve may temporarily be
removed from the station and "bench tested" on the service vehicle using bottled nitrogen. The field employee performing such testing should exercise good judgment in the test methods and equipment
used.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
1 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

5.13 VALVE MAINTENANCE
SCOPE: To establish an inspection and maintenance program for Avista’s gas distribution and transmission pipeline valves. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.145, §192.179, §192.181, §192.363, §192.365, §192.745, §192.747 WAC 480-93-018, 480-93-100 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.14, Valve Design Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe
General The information and procedures contained in this section shall constitute the valve maintenance program for Avista. Only personnel trained and qualified in maintenance of various valve types and designs shall perform maintenance on Company valves. Included in this section are procedures for proper valve maintenance, basic installation and operating requirements, valve maintenance categories and frequencies, and recordkeeping. The individuals performing valve maintenance will notify Gas Control of the area they will be performing maintenance for the day. If part way through the day the work moves to a different area, update Gas Control. When finished, or at the end of the day, notify Gas Control that the crew has completed valve maintenance work for the day. VALVE TYPES: Steel Plug Valves
Most of the existing steel valves used in Avista’s systems are of the Rockwell-Nordstrom plug valve design. The basic design of the Nordstrom valve consists of a body, plug, cover, resilient adjustment member, and the sealant. The function of each component part is detailed below: The Body - Its purpose is to connect the valve to the pipeline and mate with the plug to form a pressure vessel capable of operation under various pressures depending on the end connections and the cover design. The Plug - The plug is the only moving part. It has a tapered surface designed to mate with the body to provide a tight seal between the body and plug. The plug has a machined port through which gas flows when the valve is in the open position. The Cover - The cover retains the resilient adjustment member and prevents external leakage. The Resilient Adjustment Member - This consists of a diaphragm to allow plug movement without leakage, a self-energizing packing ring to maintain force against the plug and a gland to set tension against the resilient packing. The resilient adjustment member varies according to design. For instance, in the Rockwell Hyperseal valve (with an inverted plug), it is a spring disc or bottom cover.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
2 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

The Sealant - The sealant functions as a seal against leakage and also hydraulically lifts the plug from its seat in the body to provide ease of operation and to prevent sticking. The lubricated plug valve operates on a closed hydraulic system, utilizing the hydraulic force of the lubricant to lift the plug from its locking taper seat for operation. The resilient member reseats the plug to prevent leakage. Nordstrom plug valves will normally require 1/4 turn to close or open the valve. Valves are turned
CLOCKWISE to CLOSE and are turned COUNTERCLOCKWISE to OPEN. Standard Rockwell-Nordstrom valves turn clockwise to close, unless otherwise specified. Plug valves designed by other manufacturers will normally have the same design features as the Rockwell-Nordstrom type valves; however, manufacturer's instructions and specifications should be consulted before installing or maintaining such valves.
Steel Gate Valves Gate valves are steel valves designed so that a threaded stem with a steel gate or conical end screws down and seats in a receptacle so as to shut off the flow of gas. Shut-off is achieved without use of a lubricating sealant. Valve design enables the gate or conical end to seal with either elastomers or metal-to-metal contact. Valve stem seals are maintained by use of elastomer "O" rings. Gate valves require
multiple turns to open or close the valve. Valves are turned CLOCKWISE to CLOSE and are turned COUNTERCLOCKWISE to OPEN. Steel Ball Valves
Steel ball valves are designed so that a ball inserted in the valve has a cylindrical bore in it through which
gas flows when the valve is in the open position. When the valve is operated, the ball rotates, and the flow is stopped due to the bore being perpendicular to the flow. Ball valves require 1/4 turn to open or close the valve. Valves are turned CLOCKWISE to CLOSE and are turned COUNTERCLOCKWISE to OPEN. Leakage is controlled through the use of nylon or Teflon seals around the ball and O-ring seals around the operating stem.
Gear Valves The term "gear valve" normally applies to a larger plug or ball valve that uses a worm gear and other reduction gears for operation. The gear system may either be exposed or concealed depending on the particular valve design and application. Each type and size of gear valve will take a varying number of turns on the operating handle to open or close the valve.
Polyethylene Valves
Valves constructed of polyethylene plastic are available and used in plastic distribution systems. These valves are either of the ball or plug design. These valves will require 1/4 turn to open or close the valve. Valves are turned CLOCKWISE to CLOSE and are turned COUNTERCLOCKWISE to OPEN. Less torque is required to open and close these valves. Due to their plastic design, these valves can be easily over-torqued, and valve stops damaged. Particular care needs to be taken when operating and the use of a cheater bar is prohibited.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
3 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

Valve Turns The table below lists the approximate number of turns for each valve type. (The information is meant to be for reference only and should be verified as applicable.) Size (in) # of Turns Notes Plug Valve – Spur Gear Reduction
∕
Rockwell/Nordstrom part number ending in 7.
∕
∕
∕
Plug Valve – Worm Gear Reduction
ending in 9. There are several models available depending on
Plug Valve – Non-geared
Gate Valve – Kerotest

Mueller Inline Curb Valve and Tee

Mueller Curb Valve Tee w/ Autosafe PHUSE EFV
Polyethylene Ball Valve

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
4 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE TYPES: Steel Plug Valves
These valves require a periodic injection of sealant to provide enough pressure in the valve to provide
positive shut-off. Plug valves shall be turned and should be lubricated, as needed at the time of their scheduled maintenance. Other valve adjustments should be performed as necessary by trained field personnel. Refer to the "Plug Valve Lubrication Procedures" for detailed lubricating instructions. Lubrication risers may be installed on plug valves as needed. Half-inch schedule 80 pipe should be used to bring the lubrication fitting close to the surface. The riser should be packed with fresh lubricant before
installation. Field personnel qualified to operate valves shall have a hollow valve key to allow operation of valves with risers installed. Local construction offices are encouraged to standardize valve key sizes. Extreme care must be exercised when installing risers, installing or replacing lubrication fittings, and when lubricating valves so that foreign debris does not get inside the valve or its lubricant. The introduction of any foreign material in the valve may plug the lubrication ports and channels, and may result in leakage,
binding, or scoring of the plug.
Steel Gate Valves Gate valves shall be checked for leakage and ease of operation on an as needed basis (annually if they are Emergency valves). They do not require field lubrication as O-ring seals control leakage. After it is
verified that the valve turns acceptably, field personnel should open the valve fully to seat the stem against the O-ring seal. If the valve leaks, the valve should be scheduled for replacement or overhaul. Steel Ball Valves
Modern ball valves normally do not require any maintenance other than verifying they turn properly and
are not leaking. Some ball valves (new or old) are fitted with external grease fittings to be used if the valve fails to give tight shut-off. These ball valves should NOT be greased unless they fail to seal tightly. If greasing is required to obtain shut-off, the valve may need to be greased as part of its normal maintenance. Use a valve lubricant that is specified by the ball valve manufacturer.
Ball valves that are designated Emergency valves shall be turned and inspected on an annual basis. Other ball valves shall be inspected on an as needed basis. Ball valves that are leaking or that do not turn properly should be greased (if possible), repaired, or replaced. Steel Gear Valves
Gear valves that are of the Nordstrom plug design shall also be injected with sealant to provide ease of operation and positive shut-off. Gear operated ball valves shall be maintained as mentioned above when they fail to turn properly. The worm gear and other gearing mechanisms shall also be lubricated and adjusted to achieve acceptable operation. Emergency gear valves shall be lubricated and adjusted on an annual basis. All other gear valves shall be lubricated and adjusted on an as needed basis if they are found leaking or hard to turn. Enclosed gear valves should be packed with an appropriate grease to prevent water accumulation and corrosion.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
5 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

Polyethylene Valves Plug and ball valves constructed of polyethylene normally do not require any maintenance other than verifying that they turn properly and that they are not leaking. Polyethylene valves that are designated Emergency valves shall be turned and inspected on an annual basis. Other polyethylene valves shall be inspected on an as needed basis. Polyethylene valves that are leaking or that do not turn properly should
be replaced. GENERAL VALVE MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION NOTES:
General
Prompt remedial action shall be taken to correct any emergency valve that is found inoperable, unless an alternative valve has been designated as a replacement. As part of the maintenance activity, documentation regarding the valve shall be verified, including valve number, mapping, status (open or closed), and valve attributes if known.
For the purpose of maintenance, a valve shall be considered operable if the valve can be “broken loose” from its normal operating position and turned slightly. It is recommended to close a valve at least 25 percent of the way to test its operation. It is acceptable to operate valves up to 100 percent where practical and there is a reduced risk of outage. The direction of the pipeline and the position of the valve
should be verified by utilizing the valve stops and the position indicator on the valve itself. If this cannot be verified, notify the local gas manager to discuss next steps before attempting to perform maintenance.
Mark your starting point so that there is an indication of where to reposition the valve after turning. This may be accomplished using temporary marking such as white paint if weather conditions allow. Ensure that the valve is being turned in the proper direction. For normally closed valves separating two distinct pressure zones, it is recommended that these valves be evaluated and considered for removal. If removal is not practical, it is recommended during
maintenance that these valves be serviced, cleaned, and lubricated as necessary, but do not operate the valve. To “crack” a valve (turn the stem just enough to move it off the stops) is not considered operating. Operating these valves could result in an uncontrolled overpressure condition on the downstream system. If the valves must be operated, system pressures downstream of these valves must be monitored closely and significant care taken not to overpressure the downstream system.
Use care when operating valves. A single serviceperson should be capable of operating any valve during an emergency. If operation of the valve requires more force than a reasonable person can apply, the valve should be considered for maintenance or replacement. Hard to turn plug valves should be lubricated if possible before attempting to turn them again. For hard to turn valves, the use of a valve flush may help in freeing up the valve. For hard to operate steel valves, if alternative methods of lubrication are not possible or successful, it is acceptable to apply a lubricant or a penetrating oil (external use only) to aid in the operation of the valve. Forcing valves could result in damage to worm gearing, shearing of the stem, cracked or distorted bodies, broken locking devices, etc. Use the proper wrench for the valve being worked on. Damaged or
compromised valves shall be replaced. Pipe alignment and support is particularly critical in large above ground valve installations. During valve maintenance on above ground valves, care should be taken to ensure necessary supports are in place.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
6 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

Maintaining Valve Boxes Valves boxes should be thoroughly cleaned out when servicing valves to prevent corrosion and for ease of operation. Lids should be easily removable and should be identified by painting the outside of lid yellow.
To allow for quick field verification of emergency and secondary valves, a short section of small diameter polyethylene pipe, or something similar made of a non-corrodible material, should be placed in the valve box with the valve number either written in permanent marker or tagged to it.
Valve Disable / Abandonment
When it is determined that a valve will no longer be used in the gas distribution system, it shall be either disabled or abandoned. Disabled Valve: A valve that has gas flowing through it but is no longer operable.
Valves can be disabled in the following ways:
1. Made inoperable by canning/barreling or capping 2. Is inaccessible (i.e., under pavement) Abandoned Valve: A valve that has been physically removed or disconnected from the piping system
such that gas will no longer flow through it.
If the valve is to be disabled, the valve is identified as "Disabled” on the maintenance record and on Company maps. Valve maintenance is no longer performed on the valve, but the past maintenance
records should be kept until the valve is abandoned (removed) from the system.
Maintenance
Avista gas distribution and transmission valves, based on the criteria established in Specification 2.14, Valve Design, shall be maintained to make operable and serviced according to the following schedule:
Valve Category Frequency
(Valves as specified in §192.179 and §192.181) that Once each calendar year, not to exceed 15 months
churches, schools, hospitals, jails, convalescent not to exceed 15 months
Secondary Valves exceed 63 months (This is a Best Practice but not a

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
7 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

As part of the initial installation of a valve, the valve will be viewed as receiving the required maintenance. During road projects, both Emergency and Secondary valves should be maintained during the process of the temporary lowering of the elevation of the valve box. Ensure the maintenance activity is appropriately documented to avoid duplication of the maintenance effort at a later date.
A compliance date shall be assigned to all newly installed emergency valves. Subsequent maintenance shall be based on the date established and required maintenance shall be completed before expiration of the grace period (as long as the grace period is within the calendar year). Above ground gas carrying portions of valves shall receive an atmospheric corrosion (AC) inspection and
applicable AC maintenance as required by §192.479 and §192.481 during required valve maintenance actions. Secondary Valves Maintenance
As a best practice, approximately 20 percent of the secondary valves in Idaho, Oregon, and Washington
should be maintained to ensure operability each calendar year. Secondary valves within the entire gas system should be maintained in a 5-year period, not to exceed 63 months.
Recordkeeping
Valve maintenance information shall be recorded on the appropriate valve inspection and maintenance
record. These forms become a permanent record of valve maintenance performed and shall be retained for the life of the facility. Records may be electronic or paper format and shall be available to the local
Construction Office.
Emergency Valves and Emergency Curb Valves should be identified on the card or electronic record. All required information shall be recorded and updated on the appropriate form, Valve Construction Card N-
2421, and a procedure initiated to assure the valve is maintained according to the proper maintenance frequency.
PLUG VALVE LUBRICATION PROCEDURES: Consult manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions before performing valve lubrication or
maintenance. Manufacturer's instructions will normally have detailed procedures for troubleshooting, maintaining, and repairing a specific valve. Contact Gas Engineering for assistance in locating manuals when required. There are normally two methods used to lubricate the plug valves. Lubricant sticks may be manually injected into the valve, or a pressure gun (Rockwell 400C, VAL-TEX, or similar) may be employed to inject lubricant into the valve under pressure. Most buried valves will require the use of the handgun as it simplifies the lubrication procedure.
WAC 480-93-100 (2): In the state of Washington, Emergency Curb Valves newly installed or pre-
existing that meet the criteria identified in Specification 2.14, Valve Design, “Emergency Curb Valves,”
shall be maintained once each calendar year, not to exceed 15 months.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 16
8 OF 8 SPEC. 5.13

Manual Injection To inject lubricant (sealant) manually: 1. Assure valve is in the full open or full closed position. 2. Remove the Rockwell lubrication fitting or lubricant screw.
3. Insert the appropriate sealant from the tube or choose the correct size stick and place it into the stem. 4. Replace the fitting and screw it down with a wrench until the sealant system is filled completely. This is determined by the resistance produced by the sealant pressure. Larger valves will require several sticks or tubes of sealant. 5. Add sealant and screw down the fitting until sealant back pressure builds up, making the fitting
hard to turn. Then continue to add sealant until the plug lifts (sometimes with a hissing sound) and relieves itself indicating that the system is full. Stop adding sealant and operate the valve. If the plug does not turn easily, add sealant until it is free or consult the manufacturer's instructions.
Sealant Gun
To inject sealant with the Rockwell 400C, VAL-TEX, or similar sealant gun: 1. Assure valve is in the full open or full closed position. 2. Insert proper lubricant/sealant into the gun. Check that there is sufficient hydraulic fluid in the gun reservoir. (Refer to manufacturer's instructions for procedures).
3. Fit the gun's button head coupler over the lubrication fitting on the valve. Start the coupler onto the fitting until the fitting head stops at the check valve (approx. half way).
4. Lift up gently on the back end of the coupler and pull the coupler onto the fitting with a gentle sliding movement.
5. Inject sealant by pumping the gun as long as the needle on the pressure gauge climbs steadily. At some high pressure point on the gauge, the needle will drop back when the plug un-seats
indicating a fully pressurized system. This point can also be felt when the pumping effort falls off. Additional pumping will not hold the gauge needle and injecting should be stopped at this point.
The plug should then be turned to check the ease of operation. Additional sealant can then be injected, if needed.
6. If the valve will not hold internal pressure and the needle on the gun's gauge falls to line pressure after each stroke, consult the valve instruction manual. If the needle on the gauge pumps up into
the red zone, then bypasses, there may be a restriction in the valve, or the gun may need repair. The manufacturer's instruction manual should be consulted in trouble shooting valve or gun
problems. 7. Put a dab of sealant on the top portion of the Rockwell fitting to prevent corrosion after the
lubrication procedure is completed.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
1 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

5.14 CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for the monitoring of metallic pipelines for external and internal corrosion. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.451, §192.491, §192 Appendix D WAC 480-93-110, 480-93-115, 480-93-188(3)(d) CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design Spec. 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installation Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Spec. 3.32, Repair for Steel Pipe Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation CATHODIC PROTECTION MONITORING General
Cathodic protection (CP) monitoring and repair shall only be performed by properly trained and qualified personnel. As a minimum qualification, Cathodic Protection Technicians will be NACE Level 1 Certified, or in the process of working to obtain this certification and working under the direction of a NACE Level 2 or greater Certified Technician, or a Cathodic Protection Specialist. Special conditions in which CP is ineffective or only partially effective sometimes exist. Deviation from this specification might be warranted in specific situations provided that corrosion control personnel in responsible charge demonstrate that the objectives of reference standards are being achieved.
Cathodic Protection Criteria
External corrosion control of steel pipelines can be achieved at various levels of cathodic polarization depending on the environmental conditions. However, in order to demonstrate that adequate cathodic protection (CP) has been achieved, one or more of the following shall apply: 1. A negative (cathodic) voltage potential of at least 850 mV (-0.850 mV) with the CP applied. The potential is measured with respect to a saturated copper/copper sulfate reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. Voltage drops (IR drops) other than those across the structure-to-electrolyte boundary must be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. 2. A minimum negative polarized potential of at least 850 mV relative to a saturated copper/copper sulfate reference electrode.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
2 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

3. A minimum of 100 mV of cathodic polarization between the structure surface and a stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. The formation or decay of polarization can be measured to satisfy this criterion.
Monitoring Cathodic Protection Areas
Each cathodic protection area or system must be tested at least once each calendar year, but with intervals not exceeding 15 months to determine if the requirements are met. Each system shall maintain a level of cathodic protection as to not cause damage to the coating system or pipeline. The level of protection should not exceed -1.200 VDC “Instant Off Potential” in reference to a CSE (CuCuSO4) reference electrode. Each system or area must have sufficient enough test stations/locations to determine that the overall system or area has adequate levels of cathodic protection.
Monitoring Isolated Main Less than 100ft or Service Lines
For separately protected short sections of pipe not in excess of 100 feet or separately protected service
lines, risers, and isolated steel valves within PE service areas these isolated sections of steel may be surveyed on a sample basis. At least 10 percent of these protected structures, distributed over the entire
system, must be surveyed or replaced each calendar year, with a different 10 percent checked each subsequent year, so the entire system is tested in a 10-year period. MONITORING RECTIFIERS General
Before performing rectifier maintenance, the Cathodic Protection Technician must first verify that no electric shock hazard exists, (such as “touch potential hazard”), by utilizing a multi-meter or inductive AC gauge to measure AC activity on the rectifier case. Bi-monthly Rectifier Monitoring
Each CP rectifier or impressed current power supply must be inspected six times each calendar year, but with intervals not exceeding 2-1/2 months to ensure it is operating as required. The following data is required during a bi-monthly inspection:
1. Tap Settings*
2. Voltage Read 3. Amp Read 4. Name of CP Technician 5. Date
*The tap settings are not required for rectifiers with remote monitoring systems. At least once per year, each CP rectifier or impressed current power supply must be visually inspected for physical damage or deficiencies, such as rectifier damage, blown fuses, wire deterioration, and missing
red color coding on anode wires. Voltage Reads: Unless relayed by a remote monitoring system, the voltage at the rectifier shall be taken by using an Avista approved multi-meter by the following method. Connect the common or (-) lead of the multimeter to the structure or (-) output lug of the rectifier. Connect the volt or (+) lead of the multimeter to the anode
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
3 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

or (+) output lug of the rectifier. Select the DC volts on the multimeter and record the volt reading as shown on the meter. Amp Reads: Unless relayed by a remote monitoring system, the current output of the rectifier shall be determined by
utilizing the shunt located on the inside of the front panel and calculated using one of the two following methods: 1. Ohm’s Law: Find the rating of the shunt, (i.e., 15 amp, 50 mV). Using the multi-meter, take, and record the mV read
across the shunt terminals. Using Ohm’s Law, calculate the current output.
Ohm’s Law: V = IR or I=V
R
Where: V (volts) = mV X 0.001 I = amps R = ohms = V/I= volts/amps Example: Shunt rating of 15 amps, 50 mV with a measured voltage drop across the shunt of 35 mV (convert millivolts to volts by multiplying millivolts by 0.001). A. R = (50mV X 0.001)/15amps= 0.00333 ohms B. V = 35mV X 0.001 = 0.035 V C. I = V/R = 0.035V/.00333 (ohms) = I(current out) 10.51 Amps 2. Calibration Factor: This is Ohm’s Law stated in another way. Using the rating of the shunt, determine the “calibration factor” by dividing the amps by the mV. Multiple the voltage reading measured across the shunt in millivolts by this calibration factor to determine the current output of the rectifier. Example: Using the same information from the example above: Calibration Factor = Shunt Rating = amps/mV = 15/50 = 0.3 (in this example) Current Output = I = 0.3 X 35 = 10.5 amps
Detecting Stray Current
Cathodic Interference: When a voltage gradient overlaps a foreign structure and is negative with respect to remote earth, it promotes current discharge from the foreign structure in the area of influence. Anodic Interference: If a foreign structure crosses a voltage gradient that is positive with respect to the remote earth. It promotes current pick-up within the area of influence and current discharge outside the area of influence. Current span testing is a method that can be used to test for stray current.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
4 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Interference problems are individual in nature, resolving interference problems can be mitigated utilizing one of the following methods:
• Removal of detrimental effects of interfering current by installing a metallic path.
• Counteracting the effect by applying cathodic current
• Removal of the interfering current source
• Coating or shielding at current pick-up points
• Resistance bond with foreign cathodic structure
Monitoring Critical Bonds and Diodes Each reverse current switch, each diode, and each interference bond whose failure would jeopardize Avista’s cathodic protection system must be checked at least six times each calendar year, but with intervals not exceeding 2-1/2 months. Other interference bonds or diodes that are considered non-critical must be checked at least once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months. Monitoring Steel in Steel Casings
Underground steel casing installations with steel carrier pipe shall be tested at least once each calendar year, not to exceed 15 months, to determine that the casing is electrically insulated from the carrier pipe and the carrier pipe is cathodically protected. Potential measurements will be made with the reference electrode in a single location as determined by the Cathodic Protection Technician. Refer to the Pipe-to-Soil Procedures at the end of this specification. A shorted casing may exist if a potential difference of less than 10 mV exists between the casing and the carrier pipe. CP current sources must be off when taking the potential read. If all sources cannot be turned off, any potential within 100mV between casing and pipe will require additional testing. New casings require test leads connected to the pipe and casing per Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design. Any existing casing without test leads will be retrofitted with test leads unless installation is infeasible. If there are no tests leads or close contact points, the procedure outlined at the end of this specification should be utilized to determine if the casing is shorted. CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE: Facilities Under Restoration of Cathodic Protection
When facilities under cathodic protection are found with pipe-to-soil (P/S) potentials below adequate levels, the facilities must be scheduled for restoration. Areas shall be restored within 90 days from the date they are found below adequate levels of protection in Washington and should be restored within 90 days in Idaho and Oregon as a best management practice. An additional 30 days may be allowed in all states for remedial action, if there are circumstances beyond Avista’s control. Remedial action must have started in a timely manner with an effort to complete remedial within the 90-day timeframe. Examples of extenuating circumstances are permitting issues, the availability of repair materials, and unusually long investigation/repair requirements.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
5 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Shorted Casings
If testing indicates that there is a possible shorted casing, the following actions, or equivalent actions, developed by Gas Engineering should be employed:
• Clear the metallic contact, if possible, through a construction method that will resolve the problem.
• If metallic contact is not cleared immediately, schedule the possible shorted condition for a follow-up inspection within 90 days to confirm the short still exists. (Note: this is accomplished immediately following discovery of a potentially shorted casing by the Cathodic Technician by performing a battery test, a diode test, or a casing isolation tester analysis. Documenting the completion of this follow-up inspection should be accomplished on an applicable Cathodic Protection Workorder.)
• Leak survey within 90 days of confirmed shorted condition.
• Fill the annular space with a high dielectric casing filler or other material, which provides a corrosion-inhibiting environment.
• If the above options are impractical and the risk of corrosion is minimized by conditions including the location, pipe condition, risk of overpressure, and safety considerations, the casing can be monitored by leak survey. A leak survey must be performed on an ongoing basis at least twice annually but not to exceed 7-1/2 months between leak surveys with leak detection equipment until either of the above options becomes practical or conditions change which render this option inadequate to minimize the risk of corrosion.
Electrical Shorts Electrical shorts affecting a cathodic protection system (i.e., non-insulated meter set, crossed insulator, etc.) shall be located, and repaired as necessary. Whenever exposed, underground Dresser-style or other steel mechanical compression fittings shall be cut out or canned (barreled). A Cathodic Protection Technician shall be contacted to verify that the fitting is not being used as an isolation point. Cutting out or barreling may inadvertently create a problem between two separated cathodic protection systems so additional steps may be necessary before removing or barreling the fitting.
WAC 480-93-110(2):
correct any cathodic protection deficiencies known and indicated by any test, survey, or inspection. An
additional thirty days may be allowed for remedial action if due to circumstances beyond the gas
pipeline company's control the company cannot complete remedial action within ninety days. Each
gas pipeline company must be able to provide documentation to the commission indicating that
remedial action was started in a timely manner and that all efforts were made to complete remedial
action within ninety days.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
6 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Isolated Steel When isolated sections of steel piping (including isolated steel services/risers) are found, they shall be cathodically protected within 90 days from the date they are found barring extenuating circumstances. These sections must then be reported to the respective Compliance Technician, the Cathodic Protection Foreman, and to the Gas Isolated Steel Project Manager as applicable to be monitored and evaluated for
further action.
Isolated Steel Risers Isolated steel risers shall be replaced with new anodeless steel risers or protected with the appropriate size and type of anode as specified by the Cathodic Protection Technician. If an anode is utilized, it shall
be placed on the isolated service monitoring list and replaced within 1 year of discovery. Isolated Steel Services
Isolated steel services shall be replaced from the main to the meter and a new anodeless riser shall be installed. Dresser fittings found on isolated steel services shall not be bonded across or barreled. Neither shall they be removed and replaced with steel. If a Dresser fitting is found on the isolated service, the entire isolated steel service should be replaced with new pipe. Refer to Specification 2.32, Cathodic Protection Design, “Replacing Steel Services” for guidance on converting steel services to PE services.
Examining Buried Steel Pipe and Coating Whenever a buried steel pipeline is exposed, it must be examined for evidence of external corrosion and coating deterioration. Refer to Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation. Repair and Wrapping of Pipe If external corrosion is found, replacement must be made to the extent required. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair for Steel Pipe, or consult Gas Engineering for proper repair of corroded pipe. Pipe exposed for examination and/or repair must be cleaned and recoated. Refer to Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains, for requirements on coating pipe. INTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL:
Examining Internal Pipe When steel pipe is removed from a pipeline for any reason, the internal surface must be inspected for evidence of corrosion (rust or pitting) and if the inside wall is clean, dirty or oily, and if there are puddles of
water or oil, or black smudge in the pipe. If pitting is found, it shall be measured with a pit gauge and the depth and width of the pitting shall be noted in the appropriate section of the Exposed Piping Inspection
Report form. Refer to Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation. If internal corrosion is found:
WAC 480-93-188(3)(d):cathodically protected within 90 days from being found must be leak surveyed twice each calendar
year, not exceeding 7-1/2 months until properly protected.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
7 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

• When internal corrosion is found and it extends beyond what is exposed, the adjacent internal pipe must also be exposed and investigated to determine the extent to which internal corrosion exists.
• Replacement must be made to the extent required. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair for Steel Pipe, or consult Gas Engineering for proper repair of corroded pipe.
• Steps must be taken to minimize the cause of the internal corrosion such as use of a corrosion
inhibitor. Corrosion cells formed on the internal surfaces of pipelines are confined to the internal metal surface and electrolyte and function completely independent from external cells. Scale formations, such as calcium
and magnesium carbonates and adherent corrosion products on metal surfaces are important in the internal corrosion process. The beneficial effects of the scale and oxide, which act as protective coatings,
are dependent upon their formation, thickness, grain structure, and adherence.
Cavitation and impingement are common forms of corrosion in fluid systems in and near pumps. The hammer-like effect of collapsing entrained gas or air bubbles breaks through protective films or oxides.
Turbulent flow created by constrictions or by rapid changes in direction of flow and excessive velocities also removes the protective films formed. When the oxide and scale are repeatedly removed, there is no
normal reduction of the corrosion process. Cavitation and impingement produce a characteristically pitted surface at selective locations and is accelerated by the presence of oxygen, carbon dioxide, and
hydrogen sulfide. When entrained solids such as dirt and sand are present, a combination of erosion-corrosion can take place.
CP Equipment Accuracy Check
Voltmeters and electrodes used for cathodic protection shall be tested and documented for accuracy
annually.
ELECTRODES - Electrodes shall be checked for accuracy by preparing a new electrode which is the standard electrode to be compared against. This electrode should not be used in the field. Set LC-4 voltmeter to DC voltage scale to 200 mv and input impedance to 200 as well. Attach the standard reference electrode to the negative side of the meter and electrode to be tested to the positive DC side. Place the two electrodes end to end, contacting each plug assembly. If the electrodes are evenly matched, the LC-4 voltmeter should read zero. The difference between the two should have a reading of
no more than +/- 10mV. If results are out of tolerance, the electrode should be rejuvenated per manufacturer’s recommendations. VOLTMETERS – Voltmeter shall be checked for accuracy using the Tinker and Rasor VC-1 Verifier and procedure. The tolerance level of the voltmeter should be +/- 0.05 V.
Connect the voltmeter to be tested to the Verifier terminals labeled "Positive" and "Negative", observe polarity. Turn the "Voltage Select" knob on the Verifier to the position marked 1.0v. Display on the voltmeter under test will read 1.000 +/-0.002 volts. Continue to turn the "Voltage Select" knob to the 1.5v and 2.0v positions. In each case, the voltmeter under test will read the selected voltage within +/-0.05 volts. To test the polarity indicator on the voltmeter
under test, reverse the positive and negative leads connected to the voltmeter. The voltmeter should display a minus (-) sign, and the voltage selected on the "Voltage Select" knob of the Verifier. If the voltmeter is out of tolerance, it shall be repaired or replaced.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
8 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

MAINTENANCE AND REMEDIATION TIMEFRAMES AND FREQUENCIES:
Monitoring Function Frequency
Cathodically Protect New Steel Pipelines
Testing of Cathodic Protection Areas and Isolated
Sections Greater than 100 Ft. (Note: If such isolated sections of steel reside within a casing, they only need to be visited once per calendar year not to exceed fifteen months
and this will satisfy both inspection requirements.)
Once each calendar year (Not to exceed 15 months)
Cathodic Protection Rectifiers 6 times per year (Not to exceed 2-1/2 months)
Testing of Critical Interference Bonds, Reverse 6 times per year
Testing of Other Interference Bonds Once each calendar year (Not to exceed 15 months)

Monitoring Function Frequency
Testing of Steel Casings with Steel Carrier Pipe (Note: If such steel in steel casings are also an isolated section of steel greater than 100 feet in length, they only need to be visited once per calendar year not to exceed fifteen months and
Once each calendar year (Not to exceed 15 months)
Leak Survey of Isolated Steel Pipe Not Cathodically Protected Two times per year (Not to exceed 8 months) (State of Washington only)
External Surface, Steel Buried Piping - Visual Inspection Whenever buried piping is exposed
Visual Inspection When pipe cut apart or coupon removed

Construction/Repair Function Repair/Remediation Completion By
Existing Cathodic Protection Areas Where Protection is Inadequate
90 days from date of discovery (WA requirement and a best practice in Oregon and Idaho). If extenuating circumstances exist, another 30 days
to restore to adequate level of CP may be granted.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
9 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Cathodically Protect Isolated Steel Sections of Piping (including services and risers)
90 days from date of discovery, conduct leak
survey and then leak survey 2 times per year. (Not to exceed 7-1/2 months (Cathodically
Protect))
Possible Shorted Casings 90 days from date of discovery conduct a follow-up test to confirm the shorted condition.
Confirmed Shorted Casings repair) and continue leak survey thereafter two
Existing Cathodic Protection Areas Where Protection is Inadequate If extenuating circumstances allow another 30 days to restore to adequate level of CP.

Recordkeeping
Cathodic protection maintenance records shall be retained for as long as the pipeline or facility remains in service.
Records and/or maps showing the location of cathodically protected piping, cathodic protection facilities,
galvanic anodes, and neighboring structures bonded to the cathodic protection system shall also be maintained. STRUCTURE-TO-ELECTROLYE POTENTIAL (PIPE-TO-SOIL POTENTIAL)
General A structure-to-electrolyte potential is the voltage difference between the surface of a buried metallic
structure (pipe or other metallic pipeline component) and the electrolyte (soil) measured with reference to an electrode in contact with the electrolyte. (Examples of structures include steel gas pipelines, service
risers, regulator station risers, casing vents, tracer wires, test stations, etc.)
Potential Test Equipment
The approved equipment for taking structure-to-electrolyte potentials includes a high input impedance voltmeter in conjunction with a copper/copper sulfate reference electrode.
The common or (-) lead of the multi-meter will be connected to the reference electrode. The volt or (+) lead will be connected to the structure being protected by CP current. A negative potential should be indicated on the meter in this configuration. IF A POSITIVE POTENTIAL READING IS INDICATED,
CONTACT A CATHODIC PROTECTION TECHNICIAN OR SPECIALIST IMMEDIATELY.
Potential Requirements Each potential will have the following information recorded:
• Magnitude of potential reading
• Polarity of the reading (+ or -)
• Date of reading
• Name of person taking the reading
• ON and OFF potential reads (Note: Off reads are not required on exposed pipe evaluations)
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
10 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Maintenance of Equipment Reference Electrode:
• Verify that the copper/copper sulfate electrode’s solution is at an adequate level (1/2 - 3/4 full)
• Verify solution is clear, not cloudy. If cloudy, contact a Cathodic Protection Technician to replace the solution and recalibrate.
• The porous plug should be kept clean, capped, and stored in a vertical position to prevent from drying out. Multi-meter:
• Store in a dry, moisture-free location
• Replace batteries as needed per manufacturer’s instructions. Test Leads:
• Check for broken leads. Broken test leads will cause a potential reading to drift. To test for broken test leads, use a 9-volt battery and place the (-) lead of multi-meter on (-) terminal of the
battery and the (+) lead to the positive terminal of the battery. The voltage read should be close to 9 V (DC). If read is not steady, the leads may be broken. Contact a CP Technician or CP
Specialist if leads are broken.
Calibration and/or Verification of Equipment
Calibration and/or verification of equipment shall be performed annually by a Cathodic Protection Technician. High input impedance multimeters shall have a serial number sticker or plate adhered to
them (for ID purposes) and a sticker or label affixed and updated annually during maintenance to enable tracking of the calibration or verification.
Equipment Setup
The reference cell is connected to the negative or common terminal (usually black) of the voltmeter and
the lead to the structure to be tested is connected to the positive terminal (usually red). Turn multi-meter to volts DC setting.
Aboveground Potential Reads
Connect the reference cell to the negative or common terminal of the voltmeter or multi-meter. Make sure
that the porous plug of the reference cell is in good contact with the soil and is not contacting stones, vegetation, and landscaping plastics. (You may get false readings if the reference cell contacts materials
other than soil). If dry or frozen ground is encountered, water may be necessary at the point where you place the electrode in the ground. If the ground has very dry soil conditions, dig a small hole, such as with a screwdriver and pour an
abundant amount of water into the hole. This will help to get a more accurate pipe-to-soil read. If the ground is already wet, this step may not be necessary.

MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
11 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter or multi-meter to the structure to be tested, make sure that you are taking a read on the appropriate side of an insulated fitting. When taking a read at surface levels on aboveground facilities, it is best to place the electrode in the ground directly above the underground pipe and at approximately 6 to 12 inches on either side of where the pipe rises out of the ground.
Exposed Pipe Reads When a steel pipeline is exposed and the coating needs to be repaired, a pipe-to-soil read shall be taken and documented on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534). It is best to place the electrode in the soil directly above or at the same level and as close as possible to the soil surrounding the exposed pipe. The closer the electrode is to the soil that contacts the pipe, the more accurate the
read will be. (This may not be possible in all cases, so take the read at the closest location that is possible.) Ensure the porous plug of the reference cell is in good contact with the soil and is not contacting stones,
vegetation, and landscaping plastics. (You may get false readings if the reference cell contacts materials other than soil.) If dry or frozen ground is encountered, water may be necessary at the point where you
place the electrode in the ground. If the ground has very dry soil conditions, dig a small hole, such as with a screwdriver and pour an abundant amount of water into the hole. This will help to get a more accurate pipe-to-soil read. If the
ground is already wet, this step may not be necessary.
Recordkeeping
Record pipe-to-soil reads and other required information on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report form (Form N-2534) as required in Specification 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation. The local Cathodic
Protection Technician will follow up on reads that do not meet the required voltage criteria.
Requesting Assistance
If you are getting a questionable read, check the equipment to make sure that all equipment is functioning properly. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your local Cathodic Protection Technician for
assistance. If a pipe-to-soil reading results in a positive voltage potential, a local Cathodic Protection Technician should be contacted immediately. A positive read, if read correctly, will indicate that the cathodic protection system is not functioning properly. This may result in metal loss of the pipe if not corrected immediately.
Monitoring Electrical Isolation of Steel Encased Pipeline
When monitoring electrical isolation of a casing from a steel pipeline, follow the same requirements for
aboveground Potential Reads; however, a potential read is taken on the casing vent (or designated test lead) and on the pipeline (or designated test lead) and compared to see if the potential difference
between the two indicates isolation if there is more than a 100 mV difference. The electrode shall be placed on the ground directly over the pipeline and near the end of the casing for both reads.
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
12 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING A CASING WITHOUT TEST LEADS: The following procedure is a method for testing for electrical isolation on casings for which there are no test leads or close contact points:
A current source transmitter and receiver (such as a Radio detection Model PDL2 receiver and RD433 HCTX-2 transmitter or equivalent) used in conductive mode is used. The positive output of the transmitter is connected to an electrically continuous portion of the natural gas piping that traverses through the casing, preferably at a distance of at least 100 feet from the casing. The transmitter’s negative connection is made to a convenient electrical ground. The transmitter is set to low frequency and low current output. The low frequency and output levels reduce the chance of transmitted current “jumping”
to unintended nearby structures. The receiver is then set to the low frequency level and the underground piping route is traced along its path, beyond the suspected location of the casing. Transmitter current output is then measured by the
receiver at appropriate locations and recorded on a sketch of the casing and pipe. Current output from the transmitter will travel along the electrically continuous section of the piping. The current will leave the
pipe at coating holidays, entering the earth and returning to the transmitter through the negative connection. Depending upon the transmitter output setting and the coating condition of the pipe, current will travel along the pipe a substantial distance before it is all returned back to the transmitter. The better the coating condition, the longer the distance the current will travel. In the instance of a bare casing
shorted to the pipe, much of the current will be returned back to the transmitter along the length of the casing with a substantially reduced percentage of the current continuing on along the pipe.
With a non-shorted casing, the amount of current measured on the downstream side of the pipe just
beyond the casing should be nearly the same as the current measured on the upstream portion of the pipe prior to the pipe entering the casing. At locations where the pipe T’s, a proportionate amount of the
current will travel to each side of the T depending upon the amount and condition of pipe on that particular branch.
Example of Non-shorted Casing: Example of Shorted Casing:

Flow
MAINTENANCE
CATHODIC PROTECTION MAINTENANCE
REV. NO. 18
13 OF 13 SPEC. 5.14

ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURE FOR TESTING A CASING WITHOUT TEST LEADS: The following is an approved method of testing for electrical isolation on casings for which there are no test leads or close contact points.
1. A current source transmitter (such as Tinker and Rasor Mark 3 PD short locator equipment or equivalent) is attached to a nearby gas facility and to a ground source. 2. The transmitter output is set to no more than 2 amps and then interrupted. (The set point is based on the distance between the current source and the casing being tested. The closer you are to the casing, the fewer amps that are needed.) 3. The receiver is adjusted to 70 percent sensitivity.
• The signal produced by the transmitter will only flow toward holidays in the pipe coating or grounded structures in contact with the coated pipe.
• A shorted casing, which is not coated, shows a huge holiday or ground. The signal is dissipated almost in its entirety by the size of the holiday. Unless the receiver sensitivity is increased, pipe locating is not possible past the casing if it is in a shorted condition. If the casing is determined to be shorted, refer to the “Shorted Casings” of this specification for remedial actions.
• If no short or contact exists between the casing and the steel carrier pipe, the signal
continues past the casing as normal and pipe locating is possible beyond the casing.
The casing length and diameter are not a concern when using this method. Any contact between a coated carrier pipe and a bare casing reacts the same. In addition, the surrounding soil makeup has little or no effect on this type of inspection.

PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
1 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

5.15 PIPELINE PATROLLING AND PIPELINE MARKERS
SCOPE: To establish procedures for patrolling of Avista’s gas transmission pipelines and distribution mains for the purpose of observing conditions that may affect the safety and operation of the lines or other company facilities. This specification also specifies where, when, and in what manner company pipelines and facilities must be marked or identified. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.613, §192.705, §192.707, §192.721, §192.935 WAC 480-93-124 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 3.15, Trenching and Backfilling Spec. 4.13, Damage Prevention Program Spec. 4.16, Class Locations Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey
General Gas Engineering and the local construction offices shall identify transmission lines, high pressure distribution mains, and other distribution lines that may require patrolling or marking under existing regulations. Pipelines that require patrolling include but are not limited to:
• Transmission lines;
• High Pressure Distribution Mains (as a best practice in all states); and
• Any distribution line subject to abnormal movement or external loading which may result in leakage or failure. Mains in places or on structures where anticipated physical movement or external loading could cause a failure or leakage shall be patrolled four times each calendar year, but at intervals not exceeding 4-1/2 months and documented on Bridge Crossing and Other Piping Quarterly Checklist (Form N-2630). Included in this category are exposed facilities that are designed for movement (having expansion loops or joints and otherwise lacking rigid restraint), bridge crossings (regardless of pipeline classification), frost heaving problem areas, and other areas where possible earth movement or land subsidence is a distinct probability. For areas near a gas pipeline where land movement has been identified, further investigation may be warranted to determine whether the pipeline is moving and is under stress. Gas Engineering shall be contacted to determine the appropriate method of investigation and monitoring for the specific
situation. For new installations, Gas Engineering and/or local operations managers should determine if the facilities are at risk of physical movement in order to establish a maintenance requirement for patrolling. Aboveground facilities that are rigidly restrained and are not expected to experience physical movement
are inspected for atmospheric corrosion every 3 years, not to exceed 39 months. If during this inspection it is noted that the pipe has experienced movement then the facility shall be identified as an “anticipated movement” facility which shall be inspected four times per calendar year, not exceeding 4-1/2 months.
PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
2 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

Employees performing patrolling and marking functions shall be properly trained and qualified. This includes being familiar with the locations of the pipelines being patrolled, locations of other company facilities, locations of bridge, highway and railroad crossings, stream and river crossings, etc. Designated buried pipelines shall be patrolled by an appropriate method in order to observe surface
conditions on and adjacent to the pipeline right-of-way for indications of leaks (vegetation or leak detector survey), construction or excavation activity, washouts, land subsidence or other earth movement, stream erosion, vegetation management needs and encroachments on the right-of-way by structures, roads, etc. Missing or damaged pipeline markers shall also be identified during patrols and fixed / replaced as applicable.
Designated aboveground pipelines and facilities shall be patrolled in order to observe conditions such as missing supports, broken pipe hangers, and damaged or compromised structural barricades. Missing or damaged warning signs shall be identified during patrols.
Atmospheric corrosion can occur in many places such as where the pipe penetrates through bridge structures, where the pipe is installed close to the bridge structure, between pipe and hangers / rollers,
and in spans over water. If evidence of corrosion is noticed, it shall be noted on the inspection form, Bridge Crossing and Other Piping Quarterly Checklist (Form N-2630), so that it may be referred to Gas Engineering or the local Cathodic Protection Technician for further evaluation as applicable.
For long spans on bridges, binoculars or drones can be used; however, where vision is limited or when entire pipe span cannot be seen in detail, the inspector may need to get access under the span to be able
to observe conditions of the pipe. (If access under the span is a problem for example where boating ramps are closed seasonally, what is visible from the ends or shorelines should be checked quarterly and
closer inspections done semi-annually not to exceed 7-1/2 months.)
Methods of Patrolling
Pipeline patrols may be accomplished by either ground (foot or vehicle patrols) or by air (the preferred aerial method is by helicopter but as drone technology improves, this may be an equally good option).
Ground patrols may be performed in conjunction with other work such as leak surveys, valve
maintenance, chart changing, meter inspection and maintenance, etc.
Ground patrols allow for close observation of conditions that may affect company facilities or pipelines. Evidence of gas leakage such as odors and bubbles in surface water can only be adequately detected
and assessed on the ground. Other factors such as survey marks (indicating possible future construction), atmospheric corrosion, damaged casing vents and cathodic test points, etc., will also only
be readily apparent during a ground patrol.
Aerial (helicopter) patrols are often more effective to cover long distances and/or rugged terrain. Field personnel performing aerial patrolling shall be provided with the appropriate equipment (such as
binoculars, aerial maps, etc.) so that the patrol is effective.
Aerial patrols shall be supplemented by ground patrols whenever the pipeline route or any other unusual condition cannot be accurately discerned from the air. Highway and railroad crossings shall be carefully observed for evidence of leakage during aerial and
ground surveys.
PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
3 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

Major river crossings under which the pipeline might be subject to scouring, dredging, or other physical damage shall be examined by qualified divers every 5 years, not to exceed 63 months. The diver or remote submergible vehicle shall inspect for signs of leakage (bubbles), exposure, scouring, or any other condition that may affect the safety or integrity of the pipeline.
Other underwater crossings (streams, creeks, etc.) shall be patrolled during the course of the 5-year survey (20 percent leak survey) or during other more frequent patrols as deemed necessary. Refer to Specification 5.11, Leak Survey.
Clearance
The following shall apply to pipeline facilities on Avista fee owned property or within easements where the terms of the easement allow for such restrictions:
1. No trees are permitted within 10 feet (20-foot clear zone) of an Avista pipeline.
The canopy of trees adjacent to easements should not extend into the easement when mature. Branches extending into the easement may be trimmed and side cut by Avista at its discretion.
2. With prior approval from Avista, some types of low growing, shallow-rooted shrubs may be permitted outside 5 feet (10-foot clear zone) of the pipeline centerline. Avista requires that the mature plantings will not prevent Avista personnel or vehicles from accessing the easement for
emergency purposes, seeing down the easement during routine patrols, or walking down the easement directly over the pipeline as they perform required inspections. (Note - The intent is to
allow shallow rooted plants (shrubs, flowers, etc.) to grow outside of the 10-foot clear zone and deeper-rooted plants/trees may be permitted outside the 20-foot clear zone but vegetation should
not block access or visual line of sight). Mechanical equipment shall not be used during the planting of shrubs or other vegetation.
3. Avista reserves the right to cut and/or remove vegetation within the easement as required for safe
and efficient access, operation, inspection, and maintenance of its pipeline facilities. Avista will assume no responsibility for the costs associated with the replacement of cut and/or removed
landscape plantings that do not meet these criteria.
The following shall apply to pipeline facilities within right-of-way where vegetation restrictions are not within Avista control or within existing easements where the terms of vegetation restriction within the
easement are not clearly defined:
1. When vegetation is determined to prevent safe and efficient access, operation, inspection, and maintenance of pipeline facilities or there is potential that tree roots may cause damage to pipe
facilities, the property owner or controlling entity shall be contacted to determine if the vegetation can be removed or cut back. 2. In certain cases, Avista may be required to relocate pipeline facilities at its own expense to appropriately mitigate these conflicts.
PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
4 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

MAINTENANCE FREQUENCIES Distribution Line Patrols Frequency
High Pressure Mains (over 60 psig MAOP)
Should occur once each calendar year as a “Best Practice” (Not to exceed 15 months)
Bridge Crossings and lines subject to possible movement 4 Times each calendar year (Not to exceed 4-1/2 months)
Underwater Inspections (major river crossings) Once every 5 years (Not to exceed 63 months)
(includes stream and creek crossings) leak survey

Population Class 1 & 2 Locations Once each calendar year
(Not to exceed 15 months)
Population Class 1 & 2 Locations at Highway and Railroad Crossings 2 Times each calendar year (Not to exceed 7-1/2 months)
Population Class 3 Locations
Population Class 3 Locations at Highway and Railroad Crossings 4 Times each calendar year (Not to exceed 4-1/2 months)
Population Class 4 Locations 4 Times each calendar year (Not to exceed 4 1/2 months)
Population Class 4 Locations at Highway 4 Times each calendar year
Refer to Specification 4.16, Class Locations, for the definition of each population class location in regard to transmission line patrols. Recordkeeping Patrols of transmission and distribution lines should be documented on the Gas Patrolling Report (Form
N-2629) or otherwise as applicable. This includes aerial as well as ground patrols. Employees performing patrols shall list the conditions found, as well as repairs needed. Required repairs shall be forwarded to the appropriate construction personnel for follow-up action.
Records pertaining to major underwater river crossing inspections shall be retained in Gas Engineering in a file specific to the crossing itself or at the local construction office where the crossing exists. Normally, a dive team or other specialized individual(s) will be contracted to inspect the pipeline and prepare a report of its condition. Records pertaining to pipeline patrols and inspections shall be retained for the life of the facility.

PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
5 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

TIMP – Transmission Patrolling There are additional patrolling and documentation requirements in regard to Avista’s transmission facilities. Excavations near Avista’s transmission lines are to be monitored as outlined in Specification 4.13, Damage Prevention Program, “On Site Inspections for Transmission Facilities.”
Other requirements are outlined in Avista’s Transmission Integrity Management Program, which is a separate document accessible on Avista’s intranet website. PIPELINE MARKERS Pipeline Markers for Buried Pipe
Pipeline markers may be single or double-faced signs and shall be a distinctive yellow color and written legibly on a background of sharply contrasting color. New and existing gas warning and pipeline marker signs shall include the word "Warning", "Caution", or "Danger" followed by the words "Gas Pipeline" in letters at least one inch high with a one-quarter inch stroke. Information posted on the signs or markers must list the current operator (Avista) and a 24-hour telephone number (including the area code).
Outdated information on the markers must be updated when found. Pipeline markers shall be installed and maintained, where practical, over each distribution and transmission pipeline to indicate a potential hazard and/or to designate the location and route of such
buried pipelines or underground facilities. Flat markers should be placed perpendicular to the pipeline. Round markers are preferred for new installations of high-pressure gas mains to enhance visibility. Flat
markers are typically used for intermediate pressure pipelines. Pipeline marker adhesive stickers may be placed directly on above ground company facilities (e.g., CP Big Finks, CP Small Finks, vent pipes, etc.) where doing so would enhance safety notification.
Pipeline markers shall be placed approximately 500 yards (1500 feet) apart, where practical, and at points of inflection of the pipeline. An effort should be made to place pipeline markers in such a manner
that the route of the pipeline is easily discernible and so that the markers are not obscured, to the extent possible, by natural or man-made features. When multiple mains exist in a common right-of-way, each
pipeline should be individually marked.
Off-set pipeline markers may be used and should indicate the distance from and direction to the pipeline.
Pipeline markers shall also be placed at the following locations:
• Railroad crossings;
• Aboveground pipelines in areas accessible to the public (except service risers, meter set assemblies, and gas pipeline company owned piping downstream of the meter set assembly);
• Public road and highway crossings; (The exception being public roads or highways in Class 3 or Class 4 areas.)
• Irrigation and drainage ditch crossings where hydraulic scouring, dredging, or other activities could pose a risk to the facility;
• Fence lines (In Class 1 / Class 2 areas) where a pipeline crosses private property;
• On both sides of stream and river crossings;
• Any other location where it is determined the pipeline may be subjected to damage (In Class 1 / Class 2 areas)

PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
6 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

Exceptions for Marking Pipeline markers for buried lines are not generally required for mains in Class 3 or 4 locations (refer to Specification 4.16, Class Locations) where placement of a marker is impractical or where a damage prevention program is in effect. Refer to Specification 4.13, Damage Prevention Program.
Washington Pipeline Marker Location Requirements
Vegetation Guidelines
Vegetation shall be controlled so pipeline markers and signage are visible during an inspection or line patrol. If mileage markers are installed along the pipeline, vegetation shall be controlled so that these markers are visible during an aerial inspection of the facility.
Markers for Aboveground Pipelines
Line markers and/or warning signs shall be placed at any point where gas distribution or transmission pipelines are exposed. Markers should not be placed where they are likely to be damaged, destroyed, or where they will interfere with land uses such as cultivation of fields. Markers should not be placed in landscaped areas or areas where the marker may have a negative visual impact without obtaining the permission of the property owner or authority involved. Markers shall not be placed in the right-of-way of a road where they could interfere with or present a hazard to traffic.
WAC 480-93-124 - Pipeline Marker Location Requirements
The following pipelines must have pipeline markers installed in Washington:
• Over mains located in Class 1 and 2 locations.
• Over transmission lines in Class 1 and 2 locations, and where practical, over transmission
lines in Class 3 and 4 locations.
• On aboveground gas pipelines except service risers, meter set assemblies, and Avista-owned piping downstream of the meter set assembly.
• At both ends of suspended pipelines.
In the state of Washington, the following main and transmission pipelines must have pipeline markers
installed regardless of the population class location:
• Where practical, over pipelines operating above 250 psig (this includes Avista’s transmission lines).
• At crossings of navigable waterways, on both sides if practical (custom signage may be
required to ensure visibility).
• At river, creek, irrigation canal, and drainage ditch crossings where hydraulic scouring, dredging, or other activity could pose a risk to the pipeline. Mark both sides of the crossing if practical (custom signage may be required to ensure visibility).
• At railroad crossings, on both sides if practical. (Note: Additional markers may be warranted within the railroad right-of-way in addition to those typically installed on casing vent pipes, particularly in the case of wide right-of-ways and where the vent pipes are located at the extreme edges of the right-of-way.)
• Where practical, when mains and transmission lines cross interstate highway, U.S. highway, and state highway routes. (Mark both sides of the crossing if possible.)
PIPELINE PATROLLING AND REV. NO. 17 DATE 01/01/21
7 OF 7 SPEC. 5.15

Gas pipelines attached to bridges or otherwise spanning an area shall have proper markers or warning signs at both ends of the suspended pipeline. Markers or signs should be installed in the ground at each end of the bridge and stickers / signage directly affixed on the exposed pipeline at both ends near the abutments. These signs / markers shall be kept visible and readable and shall be inspected in conjunction with pipeline patrols. Signs or markers reported damaged or missing shall be replaced as
soon as practical. In Washington, this shall be done within 45 days per the requirements of WAC 480-93-124. District regulator stations, gate stations, farm taps, and block valves shall have warning signs in place. Washington Pipeline Marker Surveys

WAC 480-93-124 – Survey of Pipeline Markers:
In the state of Washington, a survey of pipeline markers must be conducted every 5 years not to
exceed 63 months to ensure they are located where required and are visible and legible.
Markers that are reported damaged or missing must be replaced within 45 days.
Survey records must include a description of the system and area surveyed.
The documented survey record may be maps, drawings, electronic records, or other documents that
sufficiently indicate class locations and other areas where pipeline markers are required in the state of
Washington.
The documented survey records must be kept for a minimum of 10 years.
ABONDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF REV. NO. 16 DATE 01/01/20
1 OF 4 SPEC. 5.16

5.16 ABANDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF FACILITIES
SCOPE: To establish procedures to be used in abandoning Avista’s natural gas pipelines and services. Also included are procedures for inactivation of Avista’s other gas facilities. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.727 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 3.17, Purging Spec. 5.13, Valve Maintenance Spec. 5.14, Cathodic Protection Maintenance Spec. 5.20, Atmospheric Corrosion Control
General Transmission and distribution pipelines, and services should be abandoned when it is determined they are no longer required for immediate or future use. To enhance public safety and eliminate ongoing maintenance related to inactive above grade facilities, services should be considered for abandonment if they are not expected to be used in the next three years or the service location will substantially change in the future. They shall be disconnected from the pipeline system. Procedures relating to abandonment of pipelines and facilities and purging operations shall only be performed by properly trained and qualified personnel. The abandoned pipeline shall be blown down and purged until it is substantially free of gas in accordance with Specification 3.17, Purging Pipelines. If air is used, the employee performing the purging operation shall verify that a combustible gas mixture is not present after purging. Abandoning Gas Facilities
Pipeline sections to be abandoned in place or that are no longer subject to gas pressure, shall be disconnected from all sources and supplies of gas. The following procedures shall be followed when abandoning gas pipelines:
• Gas Engineering shall be consulted when abandoning pipelines longer than 1,000 feet as additional plugging or sealing points may be required. Segments longer than 1,000 feet should
be cut into lengths of 1,000 feet or less. The ends of each section shall be sealed.
• Removal of the pipeline section from the ground or filling the pipeline with solid materials are other options that may be appropriate depending on the circumstances. These options tend to be more costly and normally not needed unless required by local agreements or governing agencies.
• Except as noted in the two paragraphs below, capping of live facilities shall only be by use of
fusion/weld caps or approved mechanical fittings.
ABONDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF REV. NO. 16 DATE 01/01/20
2 OF 4 SPEC. 5.16

• For 2-inch and smaller curb tees, curb valve tees and high-pressure service tees operating at 1175 PSIG or less it is acceptable to seal the outlet of the tee during abandonment using a plug or disk cut from steel bar stock provided the following conditions are met: o Use a steel plug or disk with minimum thickness based upon the following service tee size:
 3/4" service tee/outlet – minimum 1/4" thick
 >3/4” service tee/outlet – minimum 1/2" thick
o Use a 1/4" minimum thickness circumferential fillet weld either internally or externally to the outlet of the service tee. If welded externally then the thickness of the disk should be at least 1/4" thicker than the minimum in order to ensure that the minimum thickness shown is maintained on the internal side of the tee and for the welding surface of the parent metal o In high pressure retirement applications (MAOP > 60 PSIG) use a minimum Grade B, A36 hot rolled steel bar-stock material with a minimum yield strength of 36,000 PSIG, not to exceed a yield strength of 52,000 PSIG in order to accommodate current existing weld procedures
 For high pressure facilities use only material that can be tracked via a Material Test Report (MTR). Provide the material Heat # information to Gas Engineering for all high-pressure retirements
• For 2-inch and smaller steel pipe operating at 60 psig or less, where space limitations make it impractical to seal the live end with a fitting, it is permissible to seal the end utilizing a coupon (disk) cut from bar stock. The disk must be at least 1/4-inch thick and fit within the piping so as to be fillet welded circumferentially.
• Pinching the active end of a steel pipe for isolation and abandonment is not an approved method.
• Use of a blind flange as a sealing method of the live facilities is not permitted other than for an above ground application.
• When a cut is required (whether mains or services), a piece of pipe at least 18 inches in length should be removed so that the termination points are as discernible as possible. Excavations shall be backfilled and thoroughly compacted.
• Sections of pipeline that are still in operation shall be inspected for corrosion and coating condition. These conditions shall be documented on the Exposed Piping Inspection Report (Form N-2534). Pipe coating that is removed from pipe that is to remain in service shall be
repaired at the conclusion of the sealing procedure.
• When abandoning a lateral (main or service), it should be disconnected as close to the mainline as possible to reduce the potential for future excavation damage. If there is a valve on the lateral to be abandoned, the valve should also be abandoned to eliminate potential underground leaks occurring on the valve stem in the future. Services to be abandoned in place are subject to the following procedures:
• The preferred method for abandoning a service is to isolate the service using the service tee
located at the main, cutting the service line as close as practical to the main, and installing a cap on the active end of the service line. For 2-inch and smaller steel services operating at 60 psig or less, it is permissible to cut the service line at the outlet of the tee, remove the compression nut from a compression tee, or cut the service pipe as close as practical to the main, and seal the end of the tee or pipe utilizing a coupon (disk) cut from bar stock. The disk must be at least 1/4-inch thick and fit within the service tee or pipe so as to be fillet welded circumferentially. If a
Continental compression service tee is used for a PE service off of a steel main, an abandonment cap should be used at the service tee. The open end of the abandoned pipe shall be sealed.
ABONDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF REV. NO. 16 DATE 01/01/20
3 OF 4 SPEC. 5.16

• The service riser shall be removed to below ground level and the remaining pipe sealed. If the service passes through or under a building foundation, the pipe shall be cut outside the building, and both ends sealed.
• Prior to demolition of buildings, services should be disconnected at the main or at a point that will prevent damage to the service. A service found to be supplying a riser without an accompanying building shall be cut off and sealed at or outside the property line as soon as possible after discovery. The ends of the abandoned pipeline shall be sealed to prevent migration of any foreign gas or other materials through the abandoned line. Sealing shall be done by one of the following methods:
• Crushing or flattening the pipe end and welding the opening
• Welding a plate or a weld cap over the opening
• Using expandable foam insulation
• Utilizing a plastic pipe cap on the OD or plastic plug on the ID. The cap or plug should be sized appropriately for the pipe and be in a satisfactory condition to seal the end of the pipe (i.e. no
cuts, cracks, etc.)
Casings
Casings to be abandoned in place shall have their vent pipes and Finks cut off (or entirely removed)
below grade. The cut-off ends shall be filled with expandable foam. Carrier pipe within casings shall be abandoned in accordance with the above guidelines for Abandonment of Mains.
Disabling a Curb Valve Tee
When disabling a curb valve tee, the preferred method is the same as discussed above in “Abandoning
Gas Facilities”. In addition, a Mueller H-17800 steel abandonment cap should be installed onto the top of tee and seal welded to prevent leakage. Valve Abandonment
In pipeline systems that are still operational, gas distribution valves and curb valves may be abandoned
only if they are not deemed necessary for the safe operation of the gas system involved. Disabled valves (i.e. no longer operational, but gas still runs through it) shall comply with Specification 5.13, Valve
Maintenance, “Valve Disable / Abandonment.”
Valve Box Abandonment
When abandoning a valve, the valve box may be removed or, if it cannot be easily removed, it may be abandoned in place by filling the valve box with sand and capping with 4 inches of concrete flush with grade. For a valve that has been ‘Disabled’ per Specification 5.13, Valve Maintenance, a marker ball should be left at the valve prior to making it inaccessible.
Regulator Station Abandonment
Gas piping or other related equipment in regulator and other stations that are no longer in use should be removed in order to minimize hazards.
ABONDONMENT OR INACTIVATION OF REV. NO. 16 DATE 01/01/20
4 OF 4 SPEC. 5.16

Vault Abandonment Each gas regulator vault that is being abandoned shall be filled with suitable compacted material.
Commercially Navigable Waterways
When abandoning a pipeline facility that crosses over, under or through a commercially navigable waterway, a report must be filed by the operator when the facility is abandoned as delineated at §192.727(g)(1).
Inactivating Gas Meter Facilities
When service to a customer is discontinued (shut off or account closed), one of the following procedures must be complied with:
• The valve that is closed to prevent the flow of gas to the customer (service valve) must be provided with a locking device or other means designed to prevent the opening of the valve by persons other than those authorized by Avista.
• A mechanical device or fitting that will prevent the flow of gas must be installed in the meter assembly (i.e., blank tin disc in meter outlet, blank swivels, plugs, etc.).
• The customer's piping must be physically disconnected from the gas supply and the open ends
sealed.
• If the meter set assembly (meter and service regulator) is removed, the service valve shall be locked off and an 8-inch idle riser nipple and cap assembly shall be installed. An approved gas warning sticker (Stock Item Number 662-0426 or 662-0428) shall be applied to the 8-inch nipple and cap assembly to help prevent future damage to the service riser. The outlet swivel shall be removed, and the customer's house piping shall be plugged or capped as appropriate.
Idle Meters and Idle Services An idle meter is a meter installation on a service where the account is closed. Idle meters shall be removed when it is apparent that gas will not be used in the near future. Local construction offices should investigate customer accounts idle over 12 months to determine if the meter set should be removed. An idle meter may remain if the customer opens the account and maintains payment of the basic monthly charge. An idle meter on rental property may remain if the marketing representative determines that another tenant may use the gas in the future. An idle service or riser is where the meter has been removed and the service valve has been locked. Maintenance Requirements Maintenance is not required on abandoned pipelines. Idle risers should have idle riser markers with warning signs installed as detailed in “Inactivating Gas Meter Facilities” in this specification. Idle risers and idle meters shall be inspected for atmospheric corrosion and general condition the same as aboveground facilities as outlined in Specification 5.20, Atmospheric Corrosion Control.
REINSTATING ABANDONED GAS REV. NO. 9 DATE 01/01/21
1 OF 2 SPEC. 5.17

5.17 REINSTATING ABANDONED GAS PIPELINES AND FACILITIES
SCOPE: To establish procedures to be used when reinstating or re-activating abandoned gas pipelines or other gas facilities in Avista’s gas systems. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.725 WAC 480-93-170 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design - Steel Spec. 2.13, Pipe Design - Plastic Spec. 3.16, Services Spec. 3.17, Purging Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe Spec. 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe General
Each abandoned or disconnected gas pipeline or other facility must be tested in the same manner as a new gas pipeline or facility before it is reinstated. Reinstatement or reactivation of gas pipelines and facilities shall only be performed by properly trained and qualified employees. Reinstating Gas Mains and Services
Each pipeline section that is to be reinstated shall be tested according to the procedures outlined in Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing. Gas Engineering shall review and approve gas pipelines and facilities prior to reinstatement to verify that reinstating this pipe does not affect the integrity of the system. Leaks detected through the testing procedure shall be located and corrected (refer to Specification 3.32, Repair of Damaged Pipelines – Steel, and Specification 3.33, Repair of Plastic (Polyethylene) Pipe). Each pipeline shall be re-tested until no pressure drop or leakage is detected. Each abandoned gas service line disconnected from the main must be tested from the point of disconnect to the meter valve in the same manner as a new service line before reconnecting. Refer to “Reinstating Service” in Specification 3.18, Pressure Testing for additional information. Steel pipelines exposed for reinstatement shall be examined for corrosion and the existing coating
examined before proceeding. Reinstated steel pipelines shall be tied into the existing cathodic protection system and coatings shall be restored where necessary.
REINSTATING ABANDONED GAS REV. NO. 9 DATE 01/01/21
2 OF 2 SPEC. 5.17

Reinstating Gas Facilities Valves exposed during the reinstatement procedure should be serviced, lubricated, and/or repaired as necessary. Regulator stations, odorizers, or other facilities shall be brought up to current Company standards before
reactivation. Testing and adjustments shall be performed per Company standards. Insulated, locking meter valves with lubrication ports shall be installed on reinstated services. Meter set assemblies on reactivated lines shall be built to standard design and/or brought up to Company standards (including relief and bypass capabilities).
No steel service or main that has been disconnected for longer than 90 days may be reinstated without approval from Gas Engineering and the Cathodic Protection General Foreman. Plastic services or mains that have been disconnected for longer than 6 months without being pressurized with air or nitrogen
should not be reinstated without approval from Gas Engineering.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
1 OF 2 SPEC. 5.18

5.18 VAULT MAINTENANCE
SCOPE: To establish an inspection and maintenance program for vaults that house natural gas facilities in Avista’s construction areas. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.749 WAC 296-809 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.42, Vault Design General
Vaults shall be inspected each time the enclosed facilities are inspected and serviced. Vault Inspection
Inspection of vaults shall include the following procedures:
• The atmosphere of the vault shall be tested with a Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI). If the vault qualifies as a confined space, the atmosphere shall be tested and monitored in accordance with
confined space entry guidelines. (Refer to the Avista Incident Prevention Manual (Safety Handbook), Part 2, Section 16 – Confined/Enclosed Spaces, for additional guidance). Gas leaks
discovered shall be repaired.
• The physical condition of the vault must be observed. The walls and roof shall be checked for signs of caving in, crumbling, rusting, or other deterioration. Note the less than adequate conditions found on the Regulator Station Inspection and Maintenance Record (Form N-2527) (paper or electronic as applicable) so that the conditions found may be scheduled for repair as necessary.
• Ventilating appurtenances (as applicable) shall be inspected to determine that they are functioning properly. Check vents pipes and floor drains to ensure they are not plugged. Clear or repair as necessary.
• The vault cover shall be checked to make certain that it opens or operates properly, that it is not bent or broken, and that it seats properly. Schedule repairs as needed.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
2 OF 2 SPEC. 5.18

MAINTENANCE FREQUENCY: Avista’s gas distribution vaults shall be inspected and maintained according to the following schedule:
Type Frequency
Vaults
An anniversary date shall be assigned to newly installed vaults. Subsequent maintenance shall be based
on the anniversary date established and required maintenance shall be completed before expiration of the grace period. On existing vaults, the last date serviced establishes the anniversary date.
Recordkeeping
Records pertaining to vault maintenance should be recorded on the Regulator Station Inspection and
Maintenance Record (Form N-2527), whether on paper or electronic format. Records on vault maintenance shall be retained for the life of the vault.

MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
1 OF 2 SPEC. 5.19

5.19 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATOR TESTING AND CALIBRATION
SCOPE: To establish procedures for operation, testing, and calibration of combustible gas indicators used to detect and classify leakage in Avista’s pipelines and facilities. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.706, §192.723 WAC 480-93-186, 480-93-18601, 480-93-187, 480-93-188 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 5.11, Leak Survey
General Combustible gas indicators (CGIs) that are used for leak survey, leak classification, leak centering or pinpointing, or leak detection on customer premises shall be tested and calibrated monthly (12 times a year) not to exceed 45 days. Calibration and maintenance performed on these instruments shall be according to the manufacturer's instructions. Each instrument used shall be designed to detect natural gas (methane - CH4) and shall indicate by analog or digital method the percentage gas in an air mixture. Some models also indicate the percentage of Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). The instrument shall be intrinsically safe and rated for operation in a Class I, Division I, Group C, and D atmospheres as defined by the National Electrical Code (NEC). Instruments calibrated after a gas incident shall have the readings recorded and checked against the previous calibration record to verify a change, if any, in the instruments’ performance. Batteries shall be checked before utilization and changed if the instrument will not zero or if it appears to not be functioning properly. Test gases shall be used in the concentrations recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall be certified as accurate within +/- 2 percent of the indicated concentration of methane in air. An appropriate test apparatus such as an “on demand” regulator or equivalent shall be used to provide a sampling atmosphere of the required concentration. Calibration Procedures
Combustible gas indicators (CGIs) that are used for leak survey, leak classification, leak centering or pinpointing, or leak detection on customer premises shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s instructions and specific to the docking station (if used) used for each device.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 8
2 OF 2 SPEC. 5.19

MAINTENANCE FREQUENCIES: Avista’s combustible gas indicators shall be tested and calibrated according to the following schedule: Instrument Interval
Bascom Turner (all models) or equivalent (12 times a year and not to exceed 45 days) Note: If the CGI has been shipped off for repair and is gone the entire month, it does not need
*Monthly means every calendar month. A late in the month calibration does not allow waiting the full 45 days and skipping a calibration the next calendar month. An early in the month calibration (ex. the first day of the month) will be out of calibration after the 16th day of the next month.
Recordkeeping Instrument test and calibration results shall be recorded on the appropriate instrument test form (Form N-2605) and retained in the local construction office (Avista CGIs) and in the respective contractor office (contractor CGIs) for a minimum of 5 years. Electronic copies of the forms should be forwarded via email monthly by the last day of the calendar month to #[e-mail].
MAINTENANCE
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
REV. NO. 3
1 OF 5 SPEC. 5.20

5.20 ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for the monitoring of metallic pipelines for atmospheric corrosion. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.479, §192.481, §192.491 WAC 480-93-110 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.12, Pipe Design – Steel Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 3.42, Casing and Conduit Installation Spec. 3.12, Pipe Installation - Steel Spec. 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe Spec. 3.44, Exposed Pipe Evaluation ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL:
General
Atmospheric Corrosion is the steady and gradual deterioration of the exposed surface of steel by oxidation or chemical reaction with elements of the atmosphere or environment.
Oxidation of metal is the chemical process known as rusting. Rust is the first symptom of atmospheric corrosion. If not treated, it may lead to further deterioration of the pipe depending on local atmospheric conditions. In Avista’s service territories, (which are for the most part dry climate environments), a certain level of oxidation that discolors the pipe -- without the presence of metal loss -- is common and generally does not require immediate remediation as allowed by §192.481. Facilities showing heavy oxidation without metal loss are repaired on an as-needed basis to prevent further deterioration. Pitting is a severe form of corrosion that occurs when a pipe becomes marked with small indentations, or pits, in its surface. Pitting involves an actual loss in pipe wall thickness. Pitting can be caused by rust or by reaction with other chemicals in the environment that attack the base metal of pipe and fittings. Causes of Atmospheric Corrosion
Atmospheric corrosion (AC) occurs from exposure to natural forces that attack the base metal and weaken the pipe. It is caused by a chemical reaction between the pipe and its surrounding elements, such as:
• Air
• Moisture (rain, sleet, snow, fog, or condensation)
• Chemicals or pollutants in the environment

MAINTENANCE
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
REV. NO. 3
2 OF 5 SPEC. 5.20

Inspection Requirements Aboveground piping shall be inspected at least once every 3 years not to exceed 39 months, for evidence of atmospheric corrosion. The inspection can be accomplished by meter readers, gas leak survey personnel, and other gas field personnel. Typical aboveground piping includes but is not limited to meter sets, idle risers, single service farm taps, and bridge crossings. Besides the aboveground piping, other
areas of concern to investigate during inspection are as follows:
• Piping/risers at ground surface levels (soil-to-air interface, especially tape wrap)
• Where meters are buried in soil (i.e., meter is in contact with underlying soil and/or landscape materials). This excludes diaphragm meters AL 1400 and larger that are supported on non-combustible material.
• Riser valves or threads that are below grade.
• Where coating is disbonded.
• Under pipe supports, particularly when evidence of corrosion (staining) is apparent.
• Where piping penetrates through bridge structures / deck penetrations.
• In spans over water and splash zones Additionally, while the atmospheric corrosion inspection is being conducted, other areas of potential concern can be observed that are outside the scope of the requirements of the §192.479 and §192.481 atmospheric corrosion inspections. These include but are not limited to:
• Settling of facilities (Settled)
• Barricades lacking (Protection needed)
• Damage to facilities
• Overbuilds
• Service regulator vents not oriented downward
• Overgrown vegetation
• Other items that may eventually pose a hazard if not corrected Can’t Gain Entry / Can’t Find
In the course of performing atmospheric corrosion inspections, survey technicians may encounter
situations where they Can’t Gain Entry (CGE) to the customer’s property (because of a locked gate or an aggressive dog, etc.) or Can’t Find (CF) the gas meter to successfully complete the survey. Specific processes for CGE and CF follow up attempts by the survey contractor are detailed in the Atmospheric Corrosion Orientation Manual (updated annually). If the follow up attempts required by the contractor are unsuccessful, a follow up order is generated, and Avista Gas Operations completes the survey.
Remediation Aboveground facilities that require repainting or recoating should have remedial action completed according to the AC Corrective Order Types and Remediation Time Guidelines Table 5 within this
specification. Facilities reported for metal-loss corrosion shall be followed up to determine the remedial requirements. Refer to Specification 3.32, Repair of Steel Pipe, or consult Gas Engineering for proper
repair of corroded pipe. Sites that bear a light level of oxidation (orange/brown discoloration without metal loss) do not require repainting. Sites that show heavy oxidation without metal loss should be repainted, as needed, to prevent further deterioration.
MAINTENANCE
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
REV. NO. 3
3 OF 5 SPEC. 5.20

Repainting is accomplished by cleaning the surface with mechanical means such as a wire brush and then applying one coat of industrial grade spray primer/enamel paint. Care must be exercised to perform painting in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, paying attention to guidance on ambient temperature and when it is too cold to perform painting operations. This procedure is suitable for the prevention of atmospheric corrosion.
Aboveground facilities such as bridge crossings that require permits or necessitate special coordination shall be remediated as soon as practical. For all other concerns found, remedial actions should be completed as indicated in the AC Corrective Order Types and Remediation Time Guidelines Table. Refer to the Program Manager for questions
regarding the urgency of questionable situations.
Insufficient Wrap on Steel Risers
The wrap on steel risers must be visible above grade level and be well bonded to the steel riser. If insufficient wrap is discovered, the riser must be excavated down until well bonded wrap can be found /
adhered to, and then rewrapped to the above grade level per the requirements in Specification 3.12, Pipe Installation – Steel Mains, “Tape Wrap.”

MAINTENANCE
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
REV. NO. 3
4 OF 5 SPEC. 5.20

AC Corrective Order Types and Remediation Time Guidelines
Table 1 The order/job types in Table 1 should be completed within 30 days of the inspection date to
Order Type Order Routing
Atmospheric Corrosion – Can’t Gain Entry Service (A071) Atmospheric Corrosion – Can’t Find Service (A069) Atmospheric Corrosion – Uninspected (Overbuilt, Overgrown, Debris) Service (A086) Atmospheric Corrosion – Damaged Riser Job (K082)
Table 2 The order/job types in Table 2 shall be completed within 1 year in ID and OR and 90 days in WA.
Order Type Order Routing
Atmospheric Corrosion – Buried Meter Service (A080) Atmospheric Corrosion – Buried Riser Service (A084) Atmospheric Corrosion – Buried Riser Job (K080) Atmospheric Corrosion – Corroded (metal loss) Service (A052) Atmospheric Corrosion – Corroded (metal loss) Job (K064)
Table 3 The order/job types in Table 3 should be completed end of year following inspection year
Order Type Order Routing
Atmospheric Corrosion – Needs Wrap Service (A070) Atmospheric Corrosion – Riser in Concrete/Needs Wrap Job (K055)
The order/job types in Table 4 are part of the A/C- Continuing Surveillance program. A best practice is to complete these order types end of year preceding next inspection year (Year 3)
Order Type Order Routing
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Other Service (A051)
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Settled Service (A046)
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Overgrown Service (A056)
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Other Job (K062)
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Protection Needed Job (K054)
A/C – Continuing Surveillance – Overbuilt/Inspected Job (K051)
Table 5 The order/job types in Table 5 should be completed, as needed, or end of year preceding next inspection year (Year 3)
Order Type Order Routing
Repainting heavily oxidized facilities (without metal loss) Service

MAINTENANCE
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION CONTROL
REV. NO. 3
5 OF 5 SPEC. 5.20

Recordkeeping Since 2008, the atmospheric corrosion monitoring program records, electronic or paper, are maintained at the Avista corporate headquarters. Historical records may be held at each local construction office. The last two surveys covering a minimum of five years shall be retained. All corrosion repair
documentation must be retained for the life of the facility.
Blowing Gas and Odor Calls For information on recording the appropriate information on blowing gas and odor calls refer to the Gas Emergency and Service Handbook, Section 2 – Leak and Odor Investigation.

MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
1 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

5.21 MAINTENANCE OF PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS SCOPE: To establish procedures and specifications for the maintenance and calibration / verification of pressure testing and gauging devices used by Avista’s field personnel and contractors.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.501, §192.503, §192.505, §192.507, §192.509, §192.511, §192.513, §192.515, §192.517, §192.741 WAC 480-93-170
OAR 860-023-0035, OAR 860-023-0040 OTHER REFERENCES: ANSI B40.1
NEC Article 500 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 2.22, Meter Design Spec. 3.18, Pressure Testing
Spec. 5.10, Gas Maintenance Timeframes & Matrix Spec. 5.12, Regulator and Relief Inspection General
Pressure gauges and pressure recorders are used to determine existing distribution system pressures,
pressure testing of facilities and to assist in making proper adjustments to customer meter sets, district regulator stations, farm taps, and other gas facilities or systems. Only qualified and properly trained individuals shall use pressure gauges or pressure recorders to make determinations or adjustments on Avista’s facilities.
Pressure gauges are typically hand held units that are designed to be portable and allow instant checking
of pressures. Pressure recorders are designed to be temporarily or permanently installed at a gas meter or facility to provide graphic or electronic documentation of instantaneous pressure of pressure changes over a pre-determined period of time. Both pressure gauges and pressure recorders may be installed by the use of fittings or by the temporary use of “Pete’s Plug” style pressure taps.
Applicable personnel have the option of testing (verifying) pressure gauges on a test apparatus (Test Bench) in the construction office or sending the gauges to a certified testing lab. Preference is for the verification to occur at the test bench in the construction office nearest their home base for the cost
savings it will afford. Pressure recorders are typically calibrated at the Gas Meter Shops in Spokane or Medford.

MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
2 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Types of Pressure Gauges Digital Pressure Gauge - Modern digital pressure gauges combine electronic pressure transducers with microprocessors to determine the pressure being measured. Incremental changes in the position of the transducer diaphragm are converted to electrical signals which are processed and displayed on a LCD display. The gauges are normally battery powered.
Minimum display increments (resolution) shall either be in one-tenth (0.1) or one-half (0.5) psig (or inches of water column as applicable) increments. Some examples of digital pressure gauges being used by Avista are the Crystal XP2i for psig and the UEI EM201B for inches of water column.
If a Crystal digital psig gauge is over pressured beyond 200 percent of its rated pressure range, it is recommended that the gauge be verified to ensure there was not a shift in calibration. Consult other manufacturers for their recommendations regarding over pressurization of their gauges. The UEI EM201B digital manometer can only tolerate extremely minor over pressures of 2 inches water
column (WC) above its 60 inch WC range and damage occurs at 64 inches WC.
Typical operating temperature ranges for digital gauges such as the Crystal XP2i are 14°F to 122°F. The
UEI EM201B digital manometer’s operating temperature is 32°F to 104°F. Common practice is to keep the gauge in the heated space in a vehicle. Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge – Bourdon Tube gauges uses a thin-walled tube that is normally made from a copper alloy (brass) or stainless steel, depending on the application. This tube is called the element. The element is either bent into a semicircle (C-shaped tube) or spirally wound (coiled safety
tube). When pressure is applied to the inside of the tube via the pressure port, the pressure tends to make the Bourdon Tube straighten itself, causing the end piece to move upward. The movement of the end piece is transmitted via the link to the movement. The movement converts the linear motion of the end of the Bourdon Tube into rotational movement. The rotational movement is what causes the pointer to indicate the measured pressure.
Accuracy should be to ANSI B40.1 Grade B or better. ANSI B40.1 – 1974 indicates that the permissible error shall not exceed 2 percent of span at any point between 25 percent and 75 percent of span; in the rest of the scale, 3 percent error is permissible. Bourdon Tube gauges shall indicate pressure in minimum 1 psig increments for psig gauges and shall indicate in 1-inch WC increments for inches water column scales.
Bourdon Tube gauges, as well as other mechanical gauges, can be adversely affected by vibration and oscillation.
The normal ambient temperature range for the Bourdon Tube gauges that Avista uses is -4°F to +140°F.
The error caused by temperature changes is +0.3 percent or –0.3 percent per 18°F rise or fall,
respectively. The reference temperature is 70°F. This means that at the colder end of the temperature range (-4°F), the gauge may have a negative error of approximately 1.23 percent in addition to its normal percent error rating. This fact should be kept in mind when performing inspections and adjustments in cold weather.
Some examples of bourdon tube gauges being used by Avista are those manufactured by Perma-Cal, typically their “Test Gauge” series with 0.25 percent of full scale accuracy.
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
3 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Spring and Diaphragm Gauges – Spring and diaphragm gauge purchases are not planned in the future as they are being phased out. They often have a user-accessible screwdriver adjust for zeroing the gauge. Some examples of diaphragm gauges being used by Avista are the Ashcroft 0-10 psig or 0-10 inches
WC. Manometers - Water manometers consist of a U-shaped tube that is mounted on a rigid base that is delineated in inches. There is a valve on one end of the tube and an apparatus for connecting to the pressure source on the other tube end. The tube is filled with water so that both sides of the tube line up with the zero mark on the base. As pressure is applied to one end of the tube, the water level changes
correspondingly. A reading is taken from both sides and the sum of the readings (the difference between the high side and low side) equals the pressure measurement in “inches of water column” or WC. Since this is a direct physical measurement, no field calibrations are required aside from verifying the water level is correct. Care must be taken to ensure that the manometer is upright and level before taking the readings.
Electronic manometers combine a very sensitive electronic differential pressure sensor and
microprocessor to provide a very accurate (±1 percent of reading) and high resolution (> 0.01”) measurement in inches of water column (WC). Manometer pressure measurements shall only be used when inspecting or adjusting meter set installations that operate at inches of water column pressure. Some examples of manometers being used by Avista are the water based Alta-Robbins G211 U-tube and the digital UEI EM201B dual input differential manometer. Types of Pressure Recorders Electronic Pressure Recorders - Electronic pressure recorders combine pressure transducers with microprocessors to convert the pressure being recorded into digital information.

Electronic pressure recorders typical temperature operating ranges are -40°F to 150°F with an overall
accuracy typically around ±0.50 percent of span. They typically display the current pressure via an LCD display. They may also record case temperature which is fairly close to ambient temperature and other information such as maximum, minimum, and average pressures in their internal memory (audit trail) for downloading to a computer or, when equipped with a modem, telemetering to our PI data historian or SCADA system. Examples of electronic pressure recorders used by Avista are the Mercury (now Honeywell) model ERX in both portable and fixed versions.
Paper Chart Recorders - Paper chart recorders utilize an ink pen that creates a line on a circular chart, thus indicating pressure with respect to time. A battery powered chart drive moves the circular paper chart according to the timeframe specified (i.e., 1 hour, 24 hour, 7 day, 30 day, etc.). The ink pen is connected to an arm that is attached to an element. Elements may normally be copper bellows (low pressure, up to 30 psig) or a stainless steel helical coil (for pressures over 30 psig). The elements expand or contract as pressure fluctuates thus moving the arm and pen on the chart with a typical accuracy of ±1/2 chart graduation. The elements can normally withstand a 50 percent over-range and still
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
4 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

retain accuracy. The recorder is normally connected to the pressure source by a flexible hose and fittings. “Pete’s Plug” style quick check fittings can also be used for connection. Paper chart recorders are in process of being phased out due to the inherent challenges with older mechanical devices and the paper charts being exposed to the elements and being rendered unreadable.
Calibration/Verification Standard Device The pressure standard is a high accuracy piece of test equipment that shall be used to verify the accuracy of each construction office test bench gauges. It may also be used for calibration of field instrumentation such as electronic pressure recorders and electronic volume correctors. It reduces pressure from an internal or external high pressure nitrogen cylinder via adjustable regulation and an
adjustable chamber to provide a finely adjustable and stable outlet pressure measured by an internal digital pressure gauge. Avista typically utilizes a Condec (previously Eaton) UPC5000 with three pressure ranges such as 2,000/1,000/400 psig or 1000/500/200 psig with an accuracy of 0.05 percent of full scale for the individual range selected.
Test Benches
Test benches are an apparatus where annual verification of company and contractor gauges will take place. Test bench design should be standardized across all applicable construction offices and will have a sufficient number of high accuracy digital gauges to verify most pressure gauges being used by Avista
employees and contractors. The annual gauge verification of all pressure gauges will occur at the test bench and will follow a documented process to include entry of essential gauge information in the
compliance data repository (Maximo).
Required Gauges by Job Type
Company and contractor personnel have need to use specific gauges based on their job responsibilities. Following is a list of individual job descriptions and the typical minimum complement of pressure gauges
that are needed to do that job. (Note: There is not a firm requirement for individuals to purge their inventory of gauges to achieve these minimum inventory values, rather these lists provide Operations
Managers and their personnel a reference of typical needs for the various company-wide positions).
Gas Serviceman:
• (1) 0-300 PSIG, Digital
• (1) Water Manometer
• (1) UEI Digital Manometer
• (1) 0-150 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauge
• (1) 0-600 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauge Pressure Controlman:
• (1) Water Manometer
• (1) 0-300 PSIG, Digital
• (1) 0-1000 PSIG, Digital
• (1) 0-2000 PSIG, Digital
• (1) 0-15 PSIG, Digital
• (2) 0-10” WC (Ashcroft, Yellow Jacket or similar)
• (2) Differential Pressure Gauges
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
5 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Gas Meterman:
• (2) 0-500 PSIG, Digital
• (1) UEI Digital Manometer
• (1) Water Manometer
• (1) 0-150 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauges Company Gas Crew:
• (2) 0-150 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauges
• (1) Water Manometer
• (1) UEI Digital Manometer Contract Gas Crew:
• (2) 0-150 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauges
• (1) Water Manometer
• (1) UEI Digital Manometer Telemetry Technician:
• (1) Condec (Eaton) Portable Pressure Calibration Unit, UPC 5000
• (1) Crystal XP2i 0-1000 PSIG, Digital
• (1) Fluke 100G Pressure Calibrator
• (1) Fluke 30G Pressure Calibrator Inspector:
• (1) 0-150 PSIG Perma-Cal Gauges List of Acceptable Gauges Following is the current list of recommended gauges for purchase by Company and contractor personnel:
• Perma-Cal “Test” gauges, full scale ranges to 2000 psig, accuracy: 0.25 percent full scale (bourdon tube)
• Crystal XP2i, full scale ranges to 2000 psig, accuracy: 0-20 percent of range: 0.02 percent, 20-100 percent of range: 0.1 percent of reading (digital)
• UEI EM201B for inches of water column (digital)
• Water manometer
• Others as approved by the Gauge Verification Process Owner, Design Manager. (Often as
recommended by the Capital Tools Committee)
The Gauge ID and Verification Sticker Following is the procedure to uniquely identify each pressure gauge and to document the current calibration status of the gauge:

• Each gauge shall have a self-adhesive long life label affixed with Avista’s name and the unique Avista gauge ID number. The size should be as small as practical based on label printer capabilities and space on the gauges. Numbering shall follow the convention of a GPG prefix which stands for Gas Pressure Gauge, followed by a 5 digit number. (Example: GPG00171).
• Each gauge shall also have a self-adhesive long-life label (measuring approximately one inch square) affixed to show the verification expiration date and the initials of the person that performed the verification.
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
6 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Responsibilities by Job Type Following are the key roles and responsibilities of personnel supporting the gauge calibration and verification program at Avista: Meter Shop Foreman:
• Ensure calibration of the pressure calibration equipment such as the Condec / Eaton pressure calibrators as required in “Maintenance Frequencies” subsection below.
• Coordinate calibration of district test benches by Meter Technicians.
• Be available as a subject matter expert to the Test Bench Lead and Back-up Technicians.
Meter Technician:
• Visit each test bench annually, typically during first few weeks of the calendar year to: o Verify each reference pressure gauge on the test bench o Document the pressure verifications in Maximo. o Affix applicable calibration sticker/label to test bench gauges o Train Test Bench Leads and Back-up Technicians
• Be available as a subject matter expert to the Test Bench Lead and Back-up Technicians. Gauge Verification Process Owner:
• Act as the customer advocate for the gauge verification process by helping collaborate management and stakeholder engagement.
• Work as applicable with management to ensure training, communication, and process execution occurs.
• Facilitate “service level agreements” as applicable to focus efforts to improve the gauge verification process.
• Serve as the primary point of contact for future proposed process changes including gauge inventory change decisions.
• Ensure appropriate creation and maintenance of process documentation. Audit this documentation as applicable.
• Escalate improvements that need to be made to the gauge verification process to applicable management for resolution.
• Collaborate with identified stakeholders to create, track, manage, and review gauge verification metrics for process evaluation and improvement.
• If required, gather a cross-functional team to problem solve, complete root cause analysis, and implement corrective actions. Operations Managers:
• Designate the Lead and Back-up Gauge Verification Technicians for respective test bench in their
office.
• Ensure Test Bench Lead Technician, Back-up Technician, and Responsible Owners of gauges are fulfilling their responsibilities under the program. Test Bench Gauge Verification Lead Technician:
• Ensure test bench gauges are verified prior to verification of any gauges.
• Verify gauges of personnel / contractors in operations district.
• Ensure gauges have unique identification number affixed via stickers or labels.
• Document applicable information in Maximo.
• Affix applicable date verification sticker to gauges.

MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
7 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Test Bench Gauge Verification Back-up Technician:
• Fulfill the duties of the Test Bench Gauge Verification Lead Technician when that person is not available. Responsible Owner of the Gauge:
• Ensure annual verification of all assigned gauges is completed as required.
• Take responsible care of assigned gauges.
Test Bench Locations
Test benches are located at the following Avista operations sites:
• Jimmy Dean Center (Dollar Road) in Spokane, Washington
• Coeur d’Alene, Idaho
• Pullman, Washington
• Clarkston, Washington
• La Grande, Oregon
• Roseburg, Oregon
• Medford, Oregon
• Klamath Falls, Oregon Test Bench Gauge Verification
Annual Test Bench Verification Procedure (i.e., the Test Bench’s gauges): The Pressure Calibration Standards (such as the Condec / Eaton UPC5000 or approved equal) shall be sent to the manufacturer or an approved instrumentation calibration facility annually for testing / calibration and documentation including a certificate of calibration. Once calibrated, the Calibration Standard can be used to perform verification of the reference pressure gauges on the Avista Test Benches. Gas Meter Shop personnel shall visit each test bench and perform a verification of each reference
pressure gauge on the test bench. Alternatively, test bench gauges may be sent to an approved calibration vendor. The serial number of the calibration standard device (as applicable) used to verify the test bench gauges shall be noted in the records repository system (Maximo). Each test bench reference pressure gauge shall be zeroed and then tested at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale gauge range. Perform these tests on the ascending pressure to 100 percent and descending pressure back to zero. Acceptable tolerance is +/- 0.25 percent of full scale for the high accuracy digital pressure gauges with a full scale range greater than 15 psig. Pressure gauges with a full scale range of 15 psig or less, shall be compared to a high accuracy digital pressure gauge of equal or better accuracy. Acceptable tolerance is +/- 1.0 percent of full scale.
If a gauge is not within tolerance it will either be calibrated to Avista’s acceptable tolerance, or it will be removed from service and replaced by a similar gauge already verified as acceptable. Maximo information will be updated by Gas Meter Shop personnel to reflect either Pass or Fail for each reference pressure gauge. If a gauge fails, notation should be made as to why it failed and actions taken.
(Example: “gauge sent to vendor for repairs” or “gauge retired and removed from service”.) Each verified or calibrated reference pressure gauge shall receive a sticker identifying a one year validation date. Example: a gauge calibrated on 1/4/16 will have a 1/4/17 date on the verification sticker. (Note: The date on the calibration sticker will reflect the “compliance due date” but in actuality, there will still be three months until the grace date has been exceeded and the gauge has gone out of compliance.)
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
8 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

A unique Maximo Identification Number will be created and assigned to each reference pressure gauge by the qualified individual. A sticker will be attached to the gauge showing this unique identifying number. Manufacturer, pressure range, type, pass/fail status, and other pertinent information such as manufacturer’s serial number (as applicable) will be determined and recorded in Maximo by the qualified individual.
Field Gauge Verification at Test Benches
Following is the procedure for annual verification of Company and contractor field gauges at the test bench: Pressure gauges held by Company and contractor personnel should be verified once each calendar year not to exceed 15 months at the Avista Test Bench located nearest to their primary work
location. Gauges may, however, be tested at any of the test bench locations noted above. Alternatively, test bench gauges may be sent to an approved calibration vendor. The verification of the pressure gauges shall be performed by trained and qualified individuals who are
familiar with the testing apparatus, procedures, and recordkeeping in Maximo. The primary individual responsible for these duties at each site will be the Test Bench Gauge Verification Lead Technician. This
person’s back-up will be the Test Bench Gauge Verification Back-Up Technician. Each field pressure gauge shall be zeroed (if manually adjustable, corrected to read as close to zero as possible) and then tested at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale gauge range. Perform these tests
on the ascending pressure to 100 percent and descending pressure back to zero. Acceptable tolerance is +/- 1 percent of full scale for psig gauges and +/- 5 percent of full scale for inches WC gauges.
If a gauge is not within tolerance it will either be calibrated to Avista’s acceptable tolerance, or it will be
removed from service and replaced by a similar gauge already verified as acceptable.
Maximo records will be updated to reflect either Pass or Fail for each gauge tested. If a gauge fails, notation should be made as to why it failed and actions taken. (Example: “gauge sent to vendor for
repairs” or “gauge retired and removed from service”.) Updated information and status shall be made when repairs are completed or retirement of the pressure gauge is decided.
Each calibrated or verified reference pressure gauge shall receive a sticker/label identifying a one year
validation date. Example: a gauge calibrated on 1/4/16 will have a 1/4/17 date on the verification sticker. (Note: The date on the calibration sticker will reflect the “compliance due date” but in actuality, there will
still be three months until the grace date has been exceeded and the gauge has gone out of compliance.)
A unique Maximo Identification Number will be created and assigned to each pressure gauge by the qualified individual. A sticker will be attached to the gauge showing this unique identifying number.
Manufacturer, pressure range, type, pass/fail status and other pertinent information (such as manufacturer’s serial number) as applicable will be determined and recorded in Maximo by the qualified
individual.
Field Operating Guidelines for Pressure Gauges
Electrically powered portable digital psig gauges shall be rated as “Intrinsically Safe” or suitable for use in Class I Division 1 areas and shall conform to applicable requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) Article 500 for Hazardous (Classified) Locations or the equivalent. Electronic pressure recorders shall be rated for at least a Class I Division 2 location.

MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
9 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

A water manometer or digital low pressure gauge approved by Gas Engineering shall be used on inches water column (WC) meter sets. Accurate pressure gauges shall be used whenever performing any type of pressure inspections on customer meter installations, district regulator stations, distribution and transmission pipelines, or any other gas facility.
Pressures may be monitored or tested using the following methods of connection:
• “Pete’s Plug” type pressure taps;
• Solid pipe fitting connections (pipe fittings shall match pressure rating of the facility being tested);
• Tapered rubber cone (used for inches water column checks only);
• Custom made meter outlet test apparatus. “Pete’s Plug” pressure taps shall have a gasket installed in the seal cap and shall be checked for leakage after testing. Defective taps shall be replaced. Permanent pressure taps that utilize valves shall also be plugged or capped off when the pressure gauge or recorder is removed. Pressure gauges or recorders should be installed in a manner as to prevent damage to the gauge or recorder. Recorders should not be placed in areas where there are corrosive chemicals, where there is a high risk of vehicular damage, or where there could be an accumulation of ice or snow. Pressure gauges and recorders should be properly stored in a protective case (or other means) to prevent damage due to vibration, shock, exposure to the elements, etc. “Pete’s Plug” insertion male probes and other test apparatus orifices shall be inspected periodically to determine if there is a blockage that could affect accurate pressure readings. Any defective fittings or probes shall be replaced. Protective covers, caps, or inserts shall be replaced in the probe or instrument to prevent damage or entry of foreign materials. Pressure gauges shall be inspected prior to use for any apparent physical damage and to determine that the pointer or digital display is at zero. Gauges that show signs of physical damage or have been mishandled (dropped) shall be removed from service until a pressure verification can be performed to validate accuracy of the device. If checked and found accurate, it need not be re-tagged with a new date and may continue to be tested on the original cycle. Gauges that do not read zero shall be removed from service until a pressure verification is performed to validate their accuracy which will include a zero adjustment by test bench personnel during verification. Field adjustment back to zero without test bench full range verification is not acceptable. Liquid filled pressure gauges that have lost liquid or are damaged shall be replaced. Liquid filled gauges should not be purchased in the future as they are being phased out. Field Operating Guidelines for Pressure Recorders
Employees shall verify the circular paper chart is of the correct pressure range and that the brand is compatible with the pressure recorder (as applicable). This shall be done prior to setting the recorder.
MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE GAUGES AND RECORDERS
REV. NO. 14
10 OF 10 SPEC. 5.21

Batteries shall be checked on the pressure recorder chart drive prior to installation. The batteries are typically replaced annually. The chart drive shall be checked to verify the period selector coincides with the time period required, as well as with the time period indicated on the circular paper chart. Pressure recorder pens shall be checked for sufficient ink prior to use and typically shall be refilled or
replaced. Pressure recorders shall be transported in a secure manner and shall be protected from damage. Pressure recorders shall be inspected prior to use for any apparent physical damage and to determine that the pointer or digital display is at zero. Recorders that show signs of physical damage or have been
mishandled (dropped) shall be removed from service until a pressure verification can be performed to validate accuracy of the device. If checked and found accurate, it need not be re-tagged with a new date and may continue to be tested on the original cycle.
Employees shall inspect pressure recorder hoses and fittings after installation in order to determine if there are any leaks. Leaks shall be repaired prior to leaving the premises.
MAINTENANCE FREQUENCIES: Pressure gauges, standards, and pressure recorders shall be calibrated or verified for accuracy according to the following schedule:
Type of Instrument Frequency
Pressure Gauges Once each calendar year (Not to exceed 15 months)
Pressure Recorders Once each calendar year (Not to exceed 15 months)
Pressure Calibration Standards
Recordkeeping
Verification / calibration of pressure standards, gauges, and pressure recorders should be first documented at the main test bench workbook in the construction office where used. The applicable information will then be transferred to the electronic data repository (Maximo). State utility commissions require a calibration / verification sticker or label on the pressure gauge or recorder. Care shall be exercised to ensure that gauge stickers remain affixed to the gauge and in readable condition. Gauges with missing or unreadable calibration stickers shall no longer be used until the sticker is replaced / updated or the gauge is re-verified as applicable. Pressure gauges, recorders, and calibration standards shall be tagged with the verification expiration date which is subject to the grace periods offered by the definition of timeframes noted in Specification 5.10, Gas Maintenance Timeframes & Matrix.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 3
1 OF 3 SPEC. 5.22

5.22 HEATER MAINTENANCE
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for maintaining gas line and pilot line heaters to ensure safe and reliable operation. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.605, §192.739 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: None General Avista operates two types of gas heaters. “Line Heaters” that heat the entire gas stream and “Pilot Line Heaters” which heat a secondary stream used to operate regulator pilots. Gas heaters are required to prevent external ice buildup on gas piping and/or hydrate formation inside the piping. Ice or hydrates will typically form when the gas temperature is less than 32 degrees F and liquid, or moisture is present. Heaters counter the Joule-Thomson effect that lowers the gas temperature incrementally with a decrease in gas pressure. The Joule-Thomson effect will lower the temperature of natural gas approximately 7 degrees F for every 100 psi reduction in pressure. Proper operation of heating equipment is important to prevent hydrate and ice buildup which can lead to excessive pipe strain, ground freezing, and improper operation of regulator pilots. LINE HEATERS
Operation Line heaters should be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this specification. Flame management systems should not be modified without concurrence with Gas Engineering. Avista’s current line heaters are indirect water-glycol fire tube heaters. The gas stream enters the heater through the inlet connection located on the opposite end from the firebox. The gas stream flows back and forth in a serpentine fashion through a pipe coil mounted in the upper half of the unit. The water-glycol bath is heated by a direct fired firebox located in the lower half of the unit. This firebox is heated by feeding a fuel gas stream to the natural draft burners in the firebox. The firebox heats the glycol to approximately 150 degrees F -180 degrees F. The water then exchanges heat with the gas passing through the coil in the upper half of the unit. The gas temperature is controlled by one of two temperature controllers. The first temperature controller measures the glycol/water bath temperature in the line heater. The second controller measures the temperature of the gas in the downstream piping. The temperature controllers will turn on and off the high fire within the firebox of the heater, which in turn warms the glycol and transfers additional heat to the gas stream.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 3
2 OF 3 SPEC. 5.22

Typical Set Points:
• Glycol/Water bath – 180 degrees F Max
• Downstream gas temperature - 120-140 degrees F
• Regulators – Per manufacturer’s instructions
Maintenance The following items should be checked at the intervals specified.

Indirect gas fired heaters should be filled with a 50/50 water/glycol solution. The water/glycol solution is the heat transfer medium between the firebox and the line gas. Either Ethylene or Propylene Glycol may be used, although Propylene Glycol should be used in all new installations because of its lower toxicity. The solutions should not be mixed to ensure proper chemical analysis. The preferred solution is Dow Ambitrol NTF 50. The heat transfer medium should be present in the sight glass. If low, additional fluid consisting of 50/50 water/glycol should be added. The heat transfer medium should be replaced every 3 years or sampled annually to ensure it has the proper level of corrosion inhibitor. Chemistry corrections should be made as indicated by the analysis. FLUID SAMPLING PROCEDURES: 1) Ensure that the system is warm. The system must be heated to get a representative sample since the heat in the unit allows thermal mixing of the fluid. 2) When acquiring the sample run the fluid until the fluid trapped in the sampling point has been cleared to ensure a representative sample. Protect yourself from the heated fluid. 3) Follow the sampling procedure contained with the kit. Fill the sampling bottle, leaving
approximately 1-inch of air space. 4) Sampling kits can be acquired from Dow Chemical at 800-447-4369.
Maintenance Item Maintenance Interval Corrective Action
Leak Inspection Monthly Repair any leaking equipment or fittings.
Operation Monthly Verify proper set points and unit is operating properly – Adjust as required.
Water/Glycol Level Monthly Fill with Water/Glycol 50/50 solution.
Water/Glycol Constituents Sample Annually or
Replace every 3 years
If sampling, make chemistry corrections.
Always sample when the heater is hot.
Pilot Safety Test Repair/Adjust.
High Temperature Shutdown Thermostat Test Annually, not to exceed 15 months Verify proper operation. Repair/Adjust as necessary.
Flame Arrestor Clean/Inspection Annually, not to exceed 15 months Remove cover and blow Air through Flame Cell to clean.
Heating Coil Inspection 10 years Remove heating coil and inspect for corrosion. Replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 3
3 OF 3 SPEC. 5.22

PILOT LINE HEATERS Avista’s existing pilot line heaters are a catalytic style. The pilot line heaters are used to heat the gas that is supplied to pilot regulators. Heating the pilot gas reduces the likelihood of improper pilot regulator operation due to icing or hydrate formation in the pilots. Pilot line heaters are typically used at stations with pressure drops in excess of 250 psig.
Theory of Operation
Catalytic pilot line heaters work on the principle of oxidation with a catalyst which allows the reaction of natural gas to occur at a lower temperature. Under normal conditions, natural gas will not burn unless its temperature has been raised to approximately 1200 degrees F to 1400 degrees F. By forcing the gas to
pass through a bed impregnated with a platinum-based catalyst, catalytic heaters cause natural gas to oxidize at approximately 250 degrees F. Once the catalytic heater is initiated, the heat of reaction continues to build and stabilize between 650 degrees F to 900 degrees F.
Operation/Maintenance
Pilot line heaters should be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this specification. The following items should be checked at the intervals specified:

Recordkeeping Maintenance activities for heaters shall be noted on the Heater Inspection and Maintenance Record (Form N-2615), whether paper or electronic, and shall be retained for the life of the facility.
Maintenance Item Maintenance Interval Corrective Action
Leak Inspection Annually, not to exceed 15 months Repair any leaking equipment or fittings.
Operation Annually, not to exceed 15 months Verify proper regulator set points and unit is operating properly – adjust as required.
MAINTENANCE ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
1 OF 5 SPEC. 5.23

5.23 ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
SCOPE: To establish uniform procedures for maintaining gas odorization equipment to ensure safe and reliable operation. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: §192.625, §192.739 WAC 480-93-015 CORRESPONDING STANDARDS: Spec. 4.18, Odorization Procedures General Avista operates three types of odorization equipment. The first type of odorizer is an “Injection Odorizer” which injects odorant into the flowing gas in proportion to the gas flow rate. The second is a “By-Pass Odorizer” that odorizes a portion of the gas stream to a high concentration that is then mixed with the flowing gas to produce an acceptable odorant level. The third is a “Wick Odorizer” that is used on smaller capacity systems or single services and incorporates a wick that odorizes the entire gas stream. Proper operation of odorization equipment is important to ensure appropriate odorant concentrations and prevent odorant leaks within the odorization facilities. INJECTION ODORIZERS (YZ TYPE) Operation/Maintenance
Injection odorizers should be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this specification. Odorant systems should not be modified without concurrence with Gas Engineering. Avista’s current injection odorizers operate by injecting odorant into the main gas stream in proportion to the gas flow rate. The equipment uses a pump to inject the odorant into the gas. A central processor unit controls the operation of the injection system and determines the output of the pump based on a corrected flow control signal from the mainline gas meter. Typical Set Points:
• Expansion Tank Pressure – 25 psig
• Gas Supply Pressure – 70 psig
• Blanket Gas Pressure – 30 to 35 psig
• Odorant Level – Maximum Capacity 90 Percent Full
• Injection Rate – 0.36-0.72 lbs/MMCF (Adjust as necessary based on odorometer testing) Note: Variations may occur depending upon operating conditions that may lead to acceptable alternate set points.
MAINTENANCE ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
2 OF 5 SPEC. 5.23

Maintenance
The following items should be checked at the intervals specified. Equipment shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The manufacturer recommends that the preventative maintenance schedules consider the application of the odorizer. Considerations related to preventative
maintenance intervals include weather / environment, the condition of the actuation gas, the odorant, the odorant bulk storage tank, and the pump stroke frequency.

Maintenance Item Maintenance Interval Corrective Action
Operation/Leak Inspection Monthly Verify proper set points and unit is operating properly. Check system controller for alarms – Adjust as required. Repair any leaking equipment or fittings.
Monthly
Tank Overflow Monthly Inspect expansion tank and overflow protection regulators and relief for proper pressures.
Replace Filters As needed Replace as needed the “Bulk Odorant” and “Gas Supply” filters. Replace based on unit operation.
Injection Pump Monthly Once every calendar year Inspect Pump Oil Level, Fill as necessary. Inspect and/or Rebuild Injection Pump.
Solenoids
Pump Solenoid - Once every calendar year Verometer Solenoid – Once Every 2 years
Inspect and replace operational solenoids as necessary.
Pneumatic Relay Once every calendar year Clean and service pneumatic relay.
Relief Valves Once every calendar year Test and service as necessary the “Expansion Tank
Low Pressure Relief” and the “Bulk Tank Relief Valve.”
Supply Gas Farm Tap Regulator / Relief Once every calendar year Inspect and repair gas supply regulator and relief valve as necessary. (Typically, this is a farm tap style regulator and relief.)
Charcoal Scrubber
Inject Pump - Once every calendar year Expansion Tank Overflow – Once every 2 years
Replace as necessary.
Battery Once every 2 years Replace system controller battery.
Pneumatic Valve Once every 2 years Inspect and/or Replace “Pneumatic Relay Valve”.
MAINTENANCE ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
3 OF 5 SPEC. 5.23

BY-PASS ODORIZERS By-pass odorizers are used to odorize medium sized gas systems. The odorizers are typically installed below grade at gate stations. Theory of Operation
A very small amount of the mainstream natural gas is by-passed through the odorizing unit. The resulting odorant-laden gas is returned to the gas main to mix with the major portion of the gas flow. As the by-passed gas passes through the odorizer it absorbs enough odorant to provide the desired odor intensity for the entire gas stream when the gas is reintroduced with the main gas supply. Typically, a partially closed valve is used to develop the differential pressure required to operate the odorizer and maintain a
direct relationship between the volume by-passed and the total volume flowing in the main. Precision Control Valves are used to adjust and accurately control the odorization rate. Operation/Maintenance
By-pass odorizers should be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and this specification. Typical Set Points: Differential Pressure: 30-80 inches water column (WC)
The following items should be checked at the intervals specified.
WICK ODORIZERS Wick odorizers are used to odorize small gas flows or single customers. The odorizers are installed on above grade piping. Theory of Operation
The entire gas stream flows past an odorant saturated wick that odorizes the gas stream. The wick extends from a reservoir full of odorant to the gas pipeline. The capillary action of the odorant continuously feeds odorant through the wick system from the reservoir to the gas stream. The concentration of odorant within the gas stream is adjusted by modifying the amount of wick that extends within the flowing gas.
Maintenance Item Maintenance Interval Corrective Action
Leak Inspection/ Operation Monthly
Repair any leaking equipment or fittings.
Verify unit is operating properly. Adjust or repair as necessary.
Odorant Level Monthly Inspect and fill as necessary.
MAINTENANCE ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
4 OF 5 SPEC. 5.23

Operation/Maintenance Wick odorizers should be operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and this specification. Typical Set Points:
Adjust wick length as necessary to achieve desired odorant level. The following items should be checked at the intervals specified.
Odorant Transport
Odorant is transported to the bulk delivery sites by Avista's designated contractor. Avista personnel may
transport odorant from these bulk sites in the contractor's sealed containers or in Avista's DOT approved 154-gallon or 500-gallon portable odorant tanks. When transporting odorant via Avista's DOT approved portable odorant tanks, the vehicle towing the
trailers must have a hazardous material certification. In addition, because the trailers weigh over 1000 pounds they must be placarded with “3336” Flammable Liquids, along with the vehicle towing the trailer.
The appropriate Safety Data Sheets (SDS), bill of lading, tank test and inspection report, certificate of registration, and vehicle inspection sheet shall be in the vehicle being used, additionally the bill of lading
is good for two years. Drivers of the vehicle must maintain a current CDL with hazmat and tank endorsements. Contact the Avista Safety & Health Department for proper labels and SDS sheets.
Odorant Spills
Odorant spills shall be controlled and corrected immediately. An Avista-approved non-flammable, non-
toxic neutralizing agent shall be used.
Ground spills and indoor spills should be sprayed with the neutralizing agent as soon as possible. The chemical will normally begin neutralizing mercaptan-based odorants upon contact. The solution should
be mixed according to manufacturer's instructions and can normally be applied using a spray bottle or with a weed type garden sprayer in the case of larger spills. Care should be taken when cleaning spills
as a flammable atmosphere may exist as odorant is flammable. The atmosphere in an indoor spill situation should be vented as you would with a natural gas leak.
Parts, equipment, clothing, and personnel may also be de-odorized using various solutions of neutralizing
agents. Consult the manufacturer's instructions before applying the agent to avoid possible risks to health. Personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be used when indicated.
Maintenance Item Maintenance Interval Corrective Action
Leak Inspection/ Operation Monthly Repair any leaking equipment or fittings. Verify unit is operating properly. Adjust or repair as necessary.
Odorant Level Monthly Inspect and fill as necessary.
MAINTENANCE ODORIZATION EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE REV. NO. 4
5 OF 5 SPEC. 5.23

Safety and Health Department Notification The Avista Safety and Health Department shall be notified in all cases in which odorant comes in direct contact with Company personnel. In cases of large spills requiring disposal of contaminated ground, clothing, and other items, company Safety and/or Environmental Coordinators shall be notified through the 24-hour spill pager hotline at 509-998-0996. Mercaptan
based odorants require respiratory, skin, and eye protection, and are listed as Hazardous Materials in the Company SDS reference. Safety and/or Environmental Coordinators shall coordinate the necessary reporting, referral for medical services, and disposal relating to odorants. The SDS data sheets shall be immediately available to the field employee filling or maintaining odorization equipment. Recordkeeping
A monthly volume odorization report shall be made on the Odorizer Inspection and Maintenance Record (Form N-2621) as necessary for use in planning the re-filling or repair of odorizers. Copies of these records (electronic or paper) shall be retained for a period of 5 years. The following information should be recorded for each odorization station (except for farm tap installations):
• Manufacturer's designation of the odorant used
• Pounds of odorant used Other maintenance activities for odorizers shall be recorded on the Odorizer Inspection and Maintenance Record (Form N-2621). Copies of these records (electronic or paper) and retained for the life of the facility.